Full text of "Proceedings of the Royal Society of London"

See other formats

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ROYAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.

From June 16, 1870, to June 15, 1871.

VOL? XIX:

y
ee
/

LONDON:
PRINTED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS,

RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET.

MDCCCLXXI.

CONTENTS.

VOL. XIX.

No. 123.—June 16, 1870.

Page

On the Atmospheric Lines of the Solar Spectrum, in a Letter to the Presi-
Ce ete mete tito lt, LCMNESSEY. 0.0. gi o'si< apa oie dhe oFerwsdie oe fea eas 08

On the Radiation of Heat from the Moon.—No. II. By the Earl of Rosse,
ae Ee EEA cer leh cdot eatle Ci les cs ico salves 0 ie be 0 8 w fecsiciees<

On Linear Differential Equations—No. III. By W.H. L. Russell, F.R:S.

Observations with the Great Melbourne Telescope, in a Letter to Prof.
Bprerlae emi S SC OUCUT cya 6 fda" 5 oye ey ol tiedeiese'e © 6) 4) e) 6 47o.9\0 nie e wlecenia)»

Chemical and Physiological Experiments on living Cinchone. By J.
Broughton, B.Sc., F.C.S., Chemist to the Cinchona-Plantations of the

Serie AUR OE NI ICUs 3.00504) ht er Be, oak 8 vale Bia elcid ones aneuk wrelord oi @ wnaroerstabanens

Researches on the Hydrocarbons of the Series Cn Han+2—VI. By C.
Berea PPIieReNE BOBRUTC Tomi diet settee he eye = ol so ala ay milo o1'e(ain) ticle. aye" ss.) als) 2) s)ea sete 6

Formation of Cetyl-alcohdl by a singular reaction. By C.Schorlemmer .
Researches in Animal Electricity. By C. B. Radcliffe, M.D............ :
HSC OF Presents «2 2... ee wees SMeOUEE Maat 2 apa ch ouch eel easy eV oa) ascuied ies ai'ns cies :

Communications received after the Session.

On Approach caused by Vibration. By Frederick Guthrie..............

On Jacobi’s Theorem respecting the relative equilibrium of a Revolving
Ellipsoid of Fluid, and on Ivory’s discussion of the Theorem. By I.
Todhunter, M.A., F.R.S., late Fellow of St. John’s College, Cambridge. .

On the Theory of Continuous Beams. By John Mortimer Heppel, M. Inst.
C.K

er ery oe 08 © © @

Remarks on Mr. Heppel’s Theory of Continuous Beams. By W. J. Macquorn
ee Maite mi ipl) Wye WB Se aesc arene et puaueie 4 a’) a eyei'saiele. P-o.g nee vince sacar bee

Researches into the Chemical Constitution of the Opium Bases.—Part IV.
On the Action of Chloride of Zine on Codeia. By Augustus Matthiessen,
F.R.S., Lecturer on Chemistry at St. Bartholomew’s Hospital, and W.
MIS, On C MINGUS ELOSNITA Ls his hate da ab hed Ys Whe nase iead nace ek

Gal

1V
: Page
Experiments on the Action of Red Bordeanx Wine (Claret) on the Human
Body. By E. A. Parkes, M.D.,F.R.S., Professor of Hygiene in the Army
Medical School, and Count Cyprian Wollowicz, M.D., Assistant Surgeon,

Army Medical Staff... 0000 ce eee selee cece en oe seals a 73
On the Mathematical Theory of Combined Streams. By W. J. Macquorn
Rankine, C.E., LL.D., F.R.SS. Lond. and Edinb..... onto wt els ae 90

No. 124.— November 17, 1870.

Researches into the Chemical Constitution of the Opium Bases.—Part IV.
On the Action of Chloride of Zinc on Codeia. By Augustus Matthiessen,
F.R.S., Lecturer on Chemistry at St. Bartholomew’s Hospital, and W.
Burnside, of Christ’s Hospital. (See page 71.)..........0se su eee 94

Experiments on the Action of Red Bordeaux Wine (Claret) on the Human
Body. By E. A. Parkes, M.D., F.R.S., Professor of Hygiene in the
Army Medical School, and Count Cyprian Wollowicz, M.D., Assistant ~
Surgeon, Army Medical Staff. (See page 73.) ............ bare oe aoe 95

On the Mathematical Theory of Combined Streams. By W. J. Macquorn
Rankine, C.E., LL.D., F.R.SS. Lond. and Edinb. (See page 90.) .... 95

On the Fossil Mammals of Australia.—Part IV. Dentition and Mandible of
Thylacoleo Carnifex, with Remarks on the Argument for its Herbivority.
By Prof. Owen, FBS. &e. 2...) cen es ie ie er 95

November 24, 1870.

Communication from the Secretary of State for India relative to Pendulum
Observations now in progress in India in connexion with the Great Tri-
gonometrical Survey under the Superintendence of Colonel J. T. Walker
1. DASE OF 5 ern PAREN ssc a! WON

On the Theory of Resonance. By the Hon. J. W. Strutt............006. 106
On the Aromatic Cyanates. By A. W. Hofmann, LL.D., F.R.S......... 108

November 30, 1870,»
Anniversary Meeting :

Reportof Auditors 33 sleL. A. 3. ee ‘ini «ato Soe 113
List of Fellows deceased, &. 13. ...... 6002004250 6 eee 113
———— elected since last Anniversary «...... .. 7a . 114
Address of the President ..:.......-sisee+0e ees ie
Presentation of the’ Medals s.2). s6.5. 2), Sa ae We ie ss 193
Election of Council and Officers. ..... 0024 s¢s50 «at a 128
Financial Statement .............0ece0eccecsc ent 129 & 130
ast of Presents. ......56ss0cscedeewscsensecds acu duas th 131

Account of the appropriation of the sum of £1000 annually voted by Par-
liament to the Royal Society (the Government Grant), to be employed in
siding the advancement of Science ,.......:...:.....,. se 135

Account of Sums granted from the Donation Fund in 1870.............. 145

No. 125,—December 8, 1870.

Report on fe Bai Researches carried on during the Months of July,
August, and September 1870, in H.M. Surveying Ship ‘Porcupine.’ By
W. B, Carpenter, M.D., F.R.S., and J. Gwyn Jeffreys, F.R.S........... 146

Vv
December 22, 1870.

On the Extension of the Coal-fields beneath the Newer Formations of Eng-
land; and the Succession of Physical Changes whereby the Coal-mea-
sures have been reduced to their present dimensions. By Edward Hull,

M. A., F.RS., F.G.S., Director of the Geological Survey of Ireland .... 222

On the Constitution of the Solid Crust of the Earth. By the Ven. John
Henry Pratt, Archdeacon of Calcutta, M.A., F.R.S. ...........65. 223

Actinometrical Observations made at Dehra and Mussoorie in India, Octo-
ber and November 1869, in a Letter to the President. By Lieut. J. H.N.
eM a ce ia ia eco ag hc [5 guage ola YRS Al oe, vnjn cea P hele aneliee ea csi es 225

Page

January 12, 1871.
On Fluoride of Silver.—Part Il. By George Gore, F.R.S...........00.. 235

Some Experiments on the Discharge of Electricity through Rarefied Media
and the Atmosphere. By Cromwell Fleetwood Varley Remar mccoy oie 6 236

Polarization of Metallic Surfaces in Aqueous Solutions, a new Method of
obtaining Electricity from Mechanical Force, and certain relations be-
tween Electrostatic Induction and the Decomposition of Water.’ By
Cromwell Fleetwood Varley...... BR HRSA. 5 Shee et aT toe Sp Parana 243

January 19, 1871.

On the Structure and Development of the Skull of the Common Frog
(Hana temporaria). By W. Kitchen Parker, F.R.S. 2.00.6... eae 246

Method of measuring the Resistance of a Conductor or of a Battery, or of
a Telegraph-Line ‘influenced by unknown Earth-currents, from a single
Deflection of a Galvanometer of unknown Resistance. By Henry Manee,
Superintendent Mekran Coast and Persian Gulf Telegraph Department,
LED ELBE Us RIE COR Tee IRS core to eden Soares arse eg ok aC mer Teno eaeney tear 248

Measurement of the Internal Resistance of a Multiple Battery by adjusting
the Galvanometer to Zero. By Henry Mance ............... cece eee 252

Modification of Wheatstone’s Bridge to find the Resistance of a Galvano-
meter-Coil from a single deflection of its own needle. By Prof. Sir Wil-

peredierh stoi Fy ic ge eee ysis ale gp eo Slaw ges Saeed ewe ee seee.s 253
On a Constant Form of Daniell’s Battery. By Prof. Sir William Thomson,

LSS. one bo eee ca Ra ace Cie RR isa icra a se ac a 253
On the Determination of a Ship’s Place from Observations of Altitude. By

ese WV ilar CP homsony. ERS .6 cco bd ele eels 6 bh weed siss 259

January 26, 1871.

On the Mineral Constituents of Meteorites. By Nevil Story Maskelyne,
M.A., F.R.S., Professor of Mineralogy, Oxford, and Keeper of the Mineral
Department, [Eis it TAT rt Cush gna ele eg area Sa a 266

On the Organization of the Calamites of the Coal-measures. By W. C.
Williamson, F.R.S., Professor of Natural History in Owens Callens) Man-

SE UEEEEE co oo NURS GC RAC COORG CRS Si CO uO On Nr ane 268
On Approach caused by Vibration. A Letter from Prof. Sir W. Thomson,
Pan), Poiessy doe: to Prot. Frederick Guthrie; BwAw: |. k.ccse eee cee es 271

REP CSCTI Gy feo ont, hee. te Ae ks Ts sa oe SEN 2a

er eee.

sal

No. 126.—February 2, 1871. Page
On Linear Differential Equations—No. IV. By W.H. L. Russell, F.R.S. 281
Measurements of Specific Inductive Capacity of Dielectrics, in the Physical

Laboratory of the University of Glasgow. By John C. Gibson, M.A.,
and Thomas Barclay, M.A. oo... je. hea ws ved ss os err 285

On the Uniform Flow of a Liquid. By Henry Moseley, M.A.,.D.C.L.,
Canon of Bristol, F.R.S., and Corresponding Member of the Institute of
PEACE GSES. SUP RPI BPN Ee er 286

February 9, 1871.
On the Effect of Exercise upon the Bodily Temperature. By T. Clifford
Allbutt, M.A., M.D. Cantab., F.L.S., Member of the Alpine Club, &c... 289

Observations of the Eclipse at Oxford, December 22, 1870. By John
Phillips, M.A., D.C.L., F.R.S., Professor of Geology in the University

Of Oxtord 00... sake eine mails bie dint ke erccueily keen 290
On the Problem of the In- and Circumscribed Triangle. By Prof. A. Cayley,
RS aje dg w's) ee waa eit O64 are 9 Soe tye ldle Bye bie a Sees ce eee) or 292

On the Unequal Distribution of Weight and Support in Ships, and its
Effects in Still Water, in Waves, and in Exceptional Positions on Shore.
By E. J. Reed, C.B., Vice-President of the Institution of Naval Archi- *
DEG oe PIA Ny, pe eto aera pe cl Re 5 “sa niece 6 oleh 6 oe 292

February 16, 1871.

On some of the more important Physiological Changes induced in the
Human Economy by change of Climate, as from Temperate to Tropical,
and the reverse (concluded). By Alexander Rattray, M.D. (Edinb.),

Surgeon -R.N., ELMS. “Bristol” et ees ies ee os Coe 295
On a Registering Spectroscope. By William Huggins, LL.D., D.C.L.,
EE e oie oe aje sgn vei tbo. v. 401618 ole ree sialon « Pls keh 317

February 23, 1871.

On the Mutual Relations of the Apex Cardiograph and the Radial Sphyg-
mograph Trace. By A. H. Garrod, of St. John’s College, Cambridge .. 318

On the Thermo-electric Action of Metals and Liquids. By George Gore,
BT PRS 2 Sic bin aitliele le Sfeiera’e ips la lo Hashes: acne a sete. « fy cu eAlonatiote Rae ts ieee ae 324

No. 127.—March 2, 1871.

Further Experiments on the effect of Diet and Exercise on the Elimination
of Nitrogen. . By KE. A. Parkes, M.D, ERS... oan. 606 yeep eee 349

Magnetic Observations made during a Voyage to the North of Europe and
the Coasts of the Arctic Sea in the Summer of 1870. By Capt. Ivan
Belavenetz, I.R.N., Director of the Imperial Magnetic Observatory,
Cronstadt. In a Letter to Archibald Smith, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S. .... 361

March 9, 1871.
Results of Seven Years’ Observations of the Dip and Horizontal Force at
Stonyhurst College Observatory, from April 1863 to March 1870, By
PH NLCY: 19. J, CULV oe bt vies 9 bpp ee 4 bo Oe ae peel nn soe ee 368

vil
Page
Preliminary Notice on the Production of the Olefines from Paraffin by Dis-
tillation under Pressure. By T. E. Thorpe, Ph.D., Professor of Chemistry
in Anderson’s University, Glasgow, and John Young ..............-. 37

Contributions to the History of the Opium Alkaloids. Part I—On the
Action of Hydrobromic Acid on Codeia. By C. R. A. Wright, D.Sc... 371

March 16, 1871.

Description of Ceratodus, a genus of Ganoid Fishes, recently discovered in
rivers of Queensland, Australia. By Albert Gunther, M.A., Ph.D.,
SIME a ey horse ot atete sbi a es 28a Sas), eres vale agin, aes eve vale ORs O17

On the formation of some of the Subaxial Arches in Man. By George W.
Callender, Assistant-Surgeon to, and Lecturer on Anatomy at St. Bar-
PemD MRM EMEL CH SIOUE AN agten sls ais oles pis 5, so Wels dv a sp0.e sjsce eich es. cele qe oa aia Pleo 380

March 23, 1871.

Experiments on the Successive Polarization of Light, with the in
of a new Polarizing Apparatus. By Sir Charles Wheatstone, F.R.S. .. 381

On an approximately Decennial Variation of the Temperature at the Obser-
vatory at the Cape of Good Hope between the years 1841 and 1870,
viewed in connexion with the Variation of the Solar Spots. By E. J.
Stone, F.R.S., Astronomer Royal at the Cape of Good Hope. In a
eae ROME PPE MEL OUGETIG co! «5 sbi te vic p'a o1>!0 alo cee viele 0 as 6! 8 era's Pied avecals 389

Résumé of two Papers on Sun-spots:—“On the Form of the Sun-spot
Curve,” by Prof. Wolf; and “On the Connexion of Sun-spots with
Planetary Configuration,” by M. Fritz. By B. Loewy .............. 392

‘March 30, 1871.

Experiments in Pangenesis, by Breeding from Rabbits of a pure variety,
into whose circulation blood taken from other varieties had previously

been largely transfused. By Francis Galton, F.R.S. ...............- 393
Contributions to the History of Orcin.—No, I. Nitro-substitution Com-
pounds of the Orcins. By John Stenhouse, LL.D., F.R.S., &......... 410

ES PMUMMP ETE GROILL SI rd ns te. sesh a er e eo a eta Natok eed eae ln a oe ee 418

No. 128.—April 20, 1871.

Note on the circumstances of the Transits of Venus over the Sun’s Disk in
the years 2004 and 2012. By J. R. Hind, F.R.S.

On the Existence and Formation of Salts of Nitrous Oxide. By Edward
La LOSS, LL 0 B ESA ets as te ne ee OL cree ee naot sue ses ae) cath eg sill gato 425

Research on a New Group of Colloid Bodies containing Mercury, and cer-
tain Members of the series of Fatty Ketones. By J. Emerson Reynolds,
Member of the Royal College of Physicians, Edinburgh, Keeper of the
Mineral Department, and Analyst to the Royal Dublin Society ........ 431

April 27, 1871.

The Bakerian Lecture.—On the Increase of Electrical Resistance in Con-

ductors with rise of Temperature, and its application to the Measure

of Ordinary and Furnace Temperatures; also on a simple Method of

Bee lectrical Resistances. By Charles William Siemens, F.R.S,
“2G Ce NENG whee CL ces Cerf 0S Phage MERE GR ee 443

vill
Pa,
On the Change of Pressure and Volume produced by Chemical Combina-
tion... By M. Berthelot), 2 gi3)2% esuled. es ss «soe 445

Remarks on the Determination of a Ship’s Place at Sea. In a Letter to
Professor Stokes. By G. B. Airy, LL.D. &c., Astronomer Royal...... 448

May 4, 1871.

On the Structure and Affinities of Guynza annulata, Dunc., with Remarks
upon the Persistence of Paleozoic Types of Madreporaria. By P. Martin
Duncan, M.B. Lond., F.R.S., Professor of Geology in King’s College,

MA ONGON. +) + o-oo: 20. o ener or e's’ ciara’ pintara) e's slahe sev al « «5 we wear oe rr 450

On the Molybdates and Vanadates of Lead, and on a new Mineral from
Leadhills. By Professor Dr. Albert Schrauf, of Vienna.............. 451

May 11, 1871.

An Experimental Inquiry into the Constitution of Blood, and the Nutrition
of Muscular Tissue. By William Marcet, M.D., F.R.S., Senior Assis-
tant Physician to the Hospital for Consumption and Diseases of the

Whest, MrOMPtON, 6 g-rap0» Leigh Sin nf aPals eles clean ee sia alaiehep eae 465
On Protoplasmic Life. By F. Crace-Calvert, F.R.S. ...........+e002-- 468
Action of Heat on Protoplasmic Life. By F. Crace-Calvert, F.R.S....... 472
laistof Presents. 6... ce. de ees ee eee ob ees + oes oe 477

No. 129.—May 25, 1871.

On the Temperature of the Interior of the Earth, as indicated by Observa-
tions made during the Construction of the Great Tunnel through ¢he
Alps. By D. T..Ansted, M.A., F.R.S., Kor See. GS. soem eee 481

Some Remarks on the Mechanism of Respiration. By F. Le Gros Clark,
F.R.C.S., Professor of Anatomy and Surgery at the Royal College of Sur-

PES OBIS gh i io) Pega t's ch oh pape) Chee ate. phaknn CMON waa ine RL eM Te se vate epiarees 486
Researches on the Hydrocarbons of the Series Cz, Han42—VII. By C.
Schorlemmer ...... Yin dic apeiie atte gle ap whet Seen eee iy oc 487
Note on the Spectrum of Uranus and the Spectrum of Comet I., 1871. By
William Huggins, LL.D., D.C.L., VP.RS. 22. ps0. 50s see 488
On a New Instrument for recording Minute Variations of Atmospheric
Pressure. By Wildman Whitehouse, F.M.S. &. &¢....0..0.0+eeeee 491
June 8, 1871.
Miection of Fellows’ 00.0... eee es aie a elas siele'e 0's «'« ae alee oer 494

June 15, 1871.
On the Fossil Mammals of Australiaa—Part V. Genus Nototherium, Ow.
fay. Prot. .F. Onven, PARIS. oor ooh Pee M6 lito ss 0 ohn nee 494
On Cyclides and Sphero-Quartics. By John Casey, LL.D., MR.LA. .... 495
On a Law in Chemical Dynamics. By John Hall Gladstone, Ph.D., F.R.S.,
qi. Allied: Tate pM att iesescte vies tows, 4.0 vps teiest winless ae ie ee 498

On the Organization of the Fossil Plants of the Coal-measures.—Part II.
Lepidodendra and Sigillarie. By W. C. Williamson, F.R.S., Professor of
Natural History in Owens College, Manchester

1X
Page
Contributions to the History of the Opium Alkaloids.—Part II. On he
Action of Hydrobromic Acid on Codeia and its derivatives. By C.R. A.
Wright, D.Se., Lecturer on Chemistry in St. Mary’s Hospital Medical

fo)

RSE on is SOD pe ORR a Te ee ne Pare ar a race ee 504

On the Measurement of the Chemical Intensity of Total Daylight made at
Catania during the Total Eclipse of December 22, 1870. By Henry E.
frentee, Bio), and T. i. Thorpé, PARSiBivis sos cccc chs igari sarees 511

On the Calculation of Euler’s Constant. By J. W. L. Glaisher, B.A., FR.A.S, 514

Records of the Magnetic Observations at the Kew Observatory. No. 1V.—
Analysis of the principal Disturbances shown by the Horizontal and Ver-
tical Force Magnetometers of the Kew Observatory from 1859 to 1864.

By General Sir Edward Sabine, K.C.B., President .............. 000s 524
Amended Rule for working out Sumner’s Method of finding a Ship’s Place.
Py eroatessor oir William Thonison, PSR. i .5 crore ccc eiees 524

On Linear Differential Equations—No. V. By W.H. L. Russell, F.R.S, 526

On the Undercurrent Theory of the Ocean, as propounded by recent ex-
plorers, by Captain Spratt; C.5., RN. FOR.S. so cck ce ce eee 528

On the Physical Principles concerned in the passage of Blood-corpuscles
through the Walls of the Vessels. By Richard Norris, M.D., Professor

of Physiology, Queen’s College, Birmingham.................-eseeee 506
OEE OM ks Ras Flee Chk GH eNO LS VON Hae ce eG eo eee a o's 564
MMMM CCC Ol accesses ba gices syle M085 89 Cesicthigetesiass ». 573

Obituary Notices of Fellows deceased :

James David Forbes ...........0. Wiig ek cc toe RR Sia eo Neca cae i
yan selsia PUTING 2.66. oe ne eka SEs Cee eee 1x
Purames Wlarke f:4.<8idasveilsseneei’ ch ORDERS Lace HES Peles xiii
ametramne elem Mer ee ns kh eh pet £04 RAS Rab Ue BS) LS os xix

PnmbaEPN PGETIgtS GLPRVES ce she fk eel hb as CERO as bide he tac XXVil

ERRATA,

Page 246, iine 4, for 200 lbs. read 2 volts.

2507" 2507
Page 287, line 27, for %¢ / readv=ne ?¢.

250R
Page 288, line 29, for Q=C. pas

250R oe _
read Q=C [ <r 2B data

Page 324, line 13 from bottom, for arterial read cardiac.

Page 372, line 7, dele comma after the word ether.

Page 374, lines 18 and 19, for “forms a sort of lather, on agitation from which”
read ‘forms on agitation a sort of lather, from which”

Page 375, line 22, for “alkaloids; and their derivatives thus”
read “alkaloids and their derivatives; thus”

35, for “ bromohydrobromate of tetracodeia.”

3 22
read * hydrobromate of bromotetracodeia.”

corp

Page 498, line 2 from bottom, after “ action.” insert :—‘ The mathematical expres-

log 3
sion of this law is e=C ples 2, c being the chemical action, C the constant, and p the
proportionate quantity of salt.”

Page vii, line 14 from bottom, for Cuchullius read Cuchuilins.

Correction to W.H. L. Russey’s Paper on Linear Differential Equations.—No. lV.
The expression for Q, page 283, should be

O=: : An An=1

anh” gael
The process for ascertaining the value of the integral

+ ...A,0724 Aol Aa,

les) Elz (2 — a)A— 1
ao @— Beri eayrFi
is erroneous, but how the mistake occurred I cannot now tell.—W. H. L. R.

DIRECTIONS TO THE BINDER.

Plate J. between p. 6 & 7.
TI. & IIL. between p. 238 & 239.
TV. to face #383
V.& VE. between p. 492 & 493.

PROCEEDINGS

mek ROYAL SOCEETY.

June 16, 1870.

XIV. “On the Atmospheric Lines of the Solar Spectrum, in a Letter
to the President.” By Lieut. J. H. Hennessry. Communicated
by the President. Received May 21, 1870.

Mussoorie, April 25, 1870.

My prEAR Sir,—I have the pleasure to enclose a map of the solar
spectrum, including the region from the extreme red to the lines D, and
a report on my endeavours to view the zodiacal light. A complete set of
actinometric observations (simultaneous) between Dehra and Mussoorie
has also been made. The latter observations are in course of reduction,
and will, I trust, be submitted to you ere long.

2. Instruments.—The set of instruments which the President and
Council of the Royal Society were good enough to send ont to India under
Lieut. Herschel’s care, for my use, was duly handed to me at Bangalore
(Madras Presidency) when I was on duty there in the winter of 1867-68.
This set comprises a spectroscope with three flint-glass prisms, a hand-
spectroscope, a tube with a double-image prism, and two of Hodgkinson’s
actinometers, as detailed in Professor Stokes’s letter (list) addressed to the
Under Secretary of State for India, dated 31 October, 1867.

3. Narrative-—On the completion of my duties at Bangalore I was
enabled to bring the instruments up to Mussoorie, where the spectroscope
was set up in May 1868. Meanwhile, however, the hot season in the
plains had set in. The dust, as usual at this time of the year, filled the
atmosphere, so that all hopes of obtaining spectroscopic observations of
the sun about the time of sunset were in vain ; and my endeavours to carry
out the suggestions of the Committee, which they were so good as to make

in connexion with my letter of 13 Feb. 1866, were reluctantly deferred

to the ensuing October, when a clear atmosphere might again be expected.
VOL. XIX. B

2 Lieut. J. H. Hennessey on the [J une 16,

4. Position of observatory.—With the permission of Colonel Walker,
R.E., Superintendent of the Great Trigonometrical Survey of India, the
Spectroscope was placed in the small rotating dome observatory of the
Survey department. It stands on the southernmost range of the Hima-
laya Mountains, in lat. N. 30° 27! 41", long. E. 78° 6! 45", height above
mean. sea-level 6937 feet. My Sheeran were made in this observa-
tory, excepting the interval last winter, when, in order to command a
view of the sun down to the horizon, I shifted the instrument to an
adjoining ridge.

d. Times of cbservation.—I was not long in ascertaining that between
10 a.m. and 2 p.m. no sensible alteration in the spectrum occurred. I am
here speaking of the red end, which has almost exclusively been the sub-
ject of my study. Accordingly, the observations which may be called
**sun high’? were made between these hours. It was, however, some time
before I discovered that by far the greater effect of the earth’s atmosphere
on the spectrum did not occur until the sun was about to dip* under the
horizon. In fact it is only when the sun is some three or four diameters
from the horizon that the very considerable alteration of the spectrum
begins. To secure this condition, the atmosphere must be quite free from
dust, which, as already implied, rises in great clouds from the plains until
deposited by the heavy rains in July and August; and the sky must be
clear of clouds, at least about the horizon. The lines were watched under
these circumstances, and mapped down to the last moment before any
serious diminution of light occurred. These results are given in the map
observed “at sunset.’ It is easy to see that such favourable conditions
cannot be expected continuously day after day ; and even when available,
the time for observation is so very limited, that no results can be obtained
without considerable perseverance. When, however, this exceptional
condition of air and sky do cccur, the observer who has watched and be-
come familiar with the spectrum sun high, is well rewarded by the decided
manner in which the atmospheric lines now stand out, as ay sun, still
quite bright, is on the point of setting.

6. Narrative resumed.—Between May and October 1868 x employed
my leisure in watching the spectrum sun high, fully expecting that the
brilliant weather of the autumn would enable me to make every endeavour
towards carrying out the suggestions of the Committee with the sun low.
But the autumn came and the air was still hazy. In fact, while the average
fall of rain here is some 90 inches, there fell in the season of 1868 only 61
inches, or about two-thirds the usual quantity; a drought which in the
first instance led to the scarcity of food, from which these provinces are
only now emerging. To complete my mortification, I found that the colli-

* A range of hills to the eastward conceals the view for some degrees in altitude ;
so that, though I have repeatedly watched the spectrum of a morning as well, my map

is in preference based on the view at sunset, when the sun can be followed down to
the horizon,

1870.] Atmospheric Lines of the Solar Spectrum. 3

mator of the spectroscope had bent, by its own weight, at the flanges
where it unites with the drum; and this deterioration involved remedies
for which the available means were but too limited. In this way the au-
tumn of 1§68 passed away, to my great disappointment, without bringing
me any results save experience ; and I eventually left Mussoorie, as usual,
for the winter of 1868-69, to carry on my survey duties at Dehra.

7. Narrative continued.— On my return to this place about the end of
April 1869, I found, as was to be expected, that, owing to the small amount
of rain in the winter, the hazy state of the atmosphere still continued ; so
that it was not until last October (1869) that I was able fairly to com-
mence work at sunset. Even then I had to discover by experiment that,
to observe the full atmospheric effect on the spectrum, I must command a
view of the sun down to the very horizon. To suit this new condition, I
had to shift the spectroscope twice to adjoining positions, and to modify
the map I had already prepared.

8. Construction of spectroscope.-—The spectroscope is made up of a
drum containing three flint-glass prisms, one of which may be made non-
effective at pleasure. The collimator unfortunately consists of three
pieces, of which the nearest portion is rigidly fixed to the drum. The
second piece unites with the drum piece by means of three screws driven
through flanges; the third piece, which unscrews for packing, bears the
slit at its far end. The spectrum is viewed by a telescope provided with
four eye-pieces, whose magnifying-powers I determined with a dynameter
to be as follows :—

Eye-piece. Power.
NGM ae eal . Sates cee tna af bers 9
MR es Si Se eas nas ee raises 17
LTS ee eS Re eee 25
Sie aR ee RS 54

A graduated circle and vernier, read by a side-telescope, provide the
means for measuring distances between the lines; and the foregoing are
mounted equatorially on a tripod-stand.

9. Details.—In observing the spectrum sun high, I was soon struck by
the difference in intensity of the lines as seen at Mussoorie and as given in
Kirchhoff’s well-known map. Excepting the decided lines A, B, C, and D,
all the others appeared comparatively faint, and even wanting in defini-
tion. It is also worthy of remark, that while Kirchhoff used a power of
forty to view the spectrum with, I am unable to employ any higher power
than eye-piece No. 2 (power 17). My observations were thus made with
eye-piece No. 2, using all three prisms; and this combination, the most
powerful at my command, produced an image only some three-tenths of
what Kirchhoff, I presume, actually saw.

10. Details.—The comparative smallness of image presented to view
has necessarily added sensibly to the difficulties of the undertaking ; for,

4, | Lieut. J. H. Hennessey on the [June 16,

understanding the Committee to suggest that I should adopt Kirchhoff’s
map and scale as a basis, it became incumbent on me to magnify the
image actually viewed some three times before sketching it on my map.
As an aid towards this end, I removed the strong metal cross wires in the
telescope, and replaced them by two tolerably stout silk fibres, parallel to
one another, and rather more apart than the image of B sun high. I
could thus compare a given line with one of the fibres, or, where more
convenient, with the space between them; and, through the intervention
of the fibres, compare any one line with any other. These comparisons
of magnitude were thus all mental, there being no micrometer in the eye-
piece to measure small spaces with, and the smallest quantity that I could
measure on the circle being the distance between the two linesin D. In
selecting a relative unit between Kirchhoff’s and my map, I have adopted
the breadth he has assigned to the line A. This line will therefore be
found equally wide in his map and in mine at sunset. The necessity for
enlarging the image leads to an unintentional deception, deserving notice.
It will be seen that my line A, for instance, is equally and intensely black
throughout ; whereas the same line, shown at the same width in Kirch-
hoff’s map (402 to 407), is made up of several lines of varying intensity.
This difference is due to the lesser power of my instrument; and in all
probability the line up here would decompose into its component lines
under greater dispersion.

11. Necessity for constructing my map from independent measures.—
The want of intensity generally in the spectrum sun high at Mussoorie,
combined with the smaller power of the instrument, made it exceedingly
difficult, and in most cases impossible, to identify individual lines in
Kirchhoff’s map with corresponding ones under view; so that, after
making every endeavour at identification, I was obliged to content myself
with adopting the positions (sun high) assigned by him to the strong lines
A, B, C, and D, and to place all the other lines of sensible intensity by
means of differential measures and interpolation. Practically speaking,
this amounted to the construction of a new map, so far as my wants were
concerned.

12. Definitions.—By a constant line is intended one that presents the
same appearance at sunset or sun high; a variable grows darker at sunset,
and, generally speaking, widens out; and an atmospheric or air-line is
invisible only sun high. By a band may be understood those broad belts
which suddenly appear like shadows at sunset; instances of bands occur
on both sides of C and elsewhere.

13. Lines mapped.—Every variable or air-line (or band) sensibly visible
has been measured and mapped; but of the constant lines only those
sufficiently intense to be easily intersected were observed and placed. It
appeared undesirable to crowd the map with a large number of faint lines,
whose property of constancy made their presence in an atmospheric map
redundant. On the other hand, the introduction of certain constant and

1870. | Atmospheric Lines of the Solar Spectrum. 5

sufficiently intense lines proves valuable for purposes of identification. I
may add in this place, that no lines whatever are here visible between B
and C; and this fact will afford some means of estimating the relative in-
tensity of spectrum viewed at Mussoorie and that mapped by Kirchhoff.
14. Direct sunlight employed.—On first commencing work, I endea-
voured to follow the plan adopted by Kirchhoff and employ a heliostat for
reflecting the sun’s rays; but, unlike the Professor, I was unable to com-
mand the clockwork for driving the heliostat. The variability of light
under these circumstances proved intolerable; add to this the necessity
for observing the sun as late in the evening as possible, made the introduc-
tion of any absorbing medium undesirable ; and, lastly, the object of main-
taining a constancy of circumstances between sun high and sunset, led me
to prefer pointing the collimator direct to the sun. I therefore screened
the drum and its prisms with an ample sunshade, and received the light
from the sun directly on to the slit of the spectroscope.
15. Identification of constant lines.—It will be seen that in the space
A to C there appears but little for recognition. No doubt the following
groups are, generally speaking, identical, viz. :—
My map, sun high. Kirchhoff’s map.
Group 469-492 is the same as 470-492.
» 499-508 aes 498-509.
» 9/0-586 Shr acus 570-587.

But the component lines, group by group, are widely different, and several
sensibly intense lines in the Professor’s map between 541 and 564 are ab-
sent here.

16. Constant lines, continued.—In the space C to D the identification is
more frequent and definite. My 711 and 719 are clearly represented in
Kirchhoff’s map, and between the latter line and 795 several other cases of
identity occur. Further on, towards D, the resemblance is not clear; until
on arrival at the variable lines between my 955 and D recognition becomes
impossible. Remembering that my map has been prepared from perfectly
independent measures, I am naturally glad of establishing identification,
where possible, with the Professor’s map, for the evidence such identity
offers of the accuracy of my work. Until my map had been finished, and
the scale of millimetres drawn above it, the means of making a compari-
son were all wanting.

17. Comparison of variable and aielines. —In discussing the variable
and air-lines, I much regret my inability to adopt the suggestions of the
Committee, and institute a comparison with Sir David Brewster’s and Dr.
Gladstone’s map given in the Philosophical Transactions for 1860.
The volume in question is, unfortunately, one of the few of its kind not at
present included in the library of the Great Trigonometrical Survey ; nor
am I aware that any other library in these provinces possesses acopy. The
only map of the kind to which I have access is that by Janssen, given in

6 _ Tneut. J. H. Hennessey on the [Jume 26;

Roscoe’s Spectrum Analysis, fig. 57. The scale adopted in this diagram
is, however, only about half that of Kirchhoff’s, and the lines are so very
numerous that identification is exceedingly difficult. It is evident, how-

~ ever, that my 812, a notably variable line, is identical with his 254.

18. The same, continued.—Comparing with the lines numerically alluded
to by Kirchhoff in his appendix as atmospheric lines, the following coinci-
dences (nearly) appear :—

My map at sunset. 3 Kirchhoft’s list of atmospheric lines.
Dl: aia ils As easiest rea 711-4 |
LSS alae RIS SRNR ASA Hen er 954°2
TKO TERS A sc AR OR rt AMS asst 961-

969°7
BAPE TSC REE dha oh neh eke ee
Dee Sea oe Sees poeta ne 970°5
QUO es oe Gare, Gemeie e ee ese gota a0 (24
LUA AAS RGSS ABER aes NF URNS Tee ea 977°4
OSH. 40 938°9
SE aC arene 989°6

In assuming the foregoing identities, I have been guided necessarily merely
by numerical coincidences. Ali the foregoing, in the proposed nomencla-
ture, are variable lines, not air-lines.

19. Discussion of air-lines and bands.—Again, comparing my map sun
high with that at sunset, and beginning from the red end, the first group
met with are the air-bands 262 to 302. These bands, so far as I am
aware, have not been placed before, if seen. I have seen and taken mea-
sures to them repeatedly ; but without the interposition of a blue glass
they were invisible. The slit, too, must be sensibly widened. The whole
group is nearly at the end of the luminous rays, where, at sun high,
almost complete darkness prevails; and after careful watching of this
group, I cannot help entertaining the belief that the range of the luminous
rays increases towards the red end of the spectrum as the sun approaches
the horizon. With the sun high, hardly any light reaches so far as 262
of the scale. When, however, the sun is setting, this part of the spectrum
lights up sensibly. I am even inclined to assert that other bands exist still
further removed from A than the group under notice; they, however, ap-
peared too faint for intersection. May it not be anticipated that, at con-
siderable terrestrial altitudes, an extension of the spectrum will occur both
at the violet and red ends?

20. The same, continued.—Between 508 and 570 a very marked suc-
cession of air-lines and bands occur. Indeed, so far as I have been able ~
to glance at the spectrum in general, the most refrangible rays appear the
most liable to absorption. The air-bands about C and D are worthy of
notice, as also are the air-lines 724 and 726.

21. Discussion of variable lines.—Both A and B appear as lines of this

AeA Gt SRN tenn es tated

| | [i ]
$e v8 g8 98 L8 se 86 06 16 36

TIL NIXIN 295 oy 0047

TOL ZOl

Kassouua LT

+
©

EN PR Tb WEEN AS

SA gs

MSE OR

338

Bun

213)

W.H. Wesley, lith-

10 A.M. g2 P.M.

PART OF THE SOLAR SPECTRUM AS SEEN BETWEEN

a.
Ay IPI ON

SUNSET.

THE SOLAR SPECTRUM AS SEEN

1870.) Atmospheric Lines of the Solar Spectrum. 7

class. In the absence of a micrometer for measuring small spaces, I have
assumed that in widening out. at sunset A does so equally on both sides;
on the contrary, B, I believe, maintains its left (or violet) edge constant,
and changes towards its right (or red) edge. The line 812 is the most
notably variable I have observed. Unlike other lines, it commences to
change quite two to three hours before sunset. The darkening is gradual
until near sunset, when it suddenly becomes black, and the band to the
right as suddenly appears. The variable lines are, however, so numerous,
that further notice of them might prove tedious reading. I therefore con-
tent myself by calling attention to the fact that, so far as I have the means
of judging, the variable lines at sunset and sun high superpose one another,
—more accurately speaking, on the former occasion, when they are gene-
rally wider, they include the position occupied sun high. I need hardly
dwell on the circumstance that the loss of light which no doubt occurs
near sunset cannot be the cause of the widening out in these lines; for
constant lines, identified with Kirchhoff’s, stand mapped in the vicinity of
variable lines of greater and lesser refrangibility.

22. Concluding remarks.—At the time of writing the air is so laden
with dust that you may gaze on the setting sun with impunity; and spec-
troscopic observation, even at several degrees of altitude, is impossible.
But when the ensuing rainy season is approaching its termination, and the
exquisitely clear state of atmosphere once more returns, I hope to make
good progress with the map; and also to try and ascertain*, by comparison
of the map already made with the actual objects, if the variable and atmo-
_ spheric lines and bands change their appearance from time to time. A
variation of the latter kind might open out a vast field of inquiry.

23. Proposed alteration of spectroscope.—Though quite willing mean-
while to continue the work with the spectroscope as it now stands, I should
consider it a great boon if you would allow me to send it to England for
certain improvements. These I briefly indicate as follows:—1. One or
even two additional prisms might be introduced into the drum, so as to
increase the dispersion. 2. The collimator should be made up into one
piece with the drum, and this may be done simply by uniting the present
three pieces firmly together. 3. A micrometer introduced at the eye-end
of the telescope would be invaluable. ‘The stand answers every purpose,
so that it might be useless sending it home, unless any delay is likely to
occur in improvising a stand to adjust and test the instrument. Should I
receive a favourable reply by the return mail, the spectroscope ought to
reach Messrs. Troughton and Simms by the end of July ; andif they could
undertake to do the needful alterations by the end of August, it would, if
despatched immediately overland, reach me about the first week in October,
just in time for the fine weather. Unless, however, these dates are not ex-
ceeded, I should lose the observing season, and this would be lamentable.

24. The same.—Even should the foregoing meet with approval, I am

* Report of the Committee, last paragraph of § 4.

8 On the Atmospheric Lines of the Solar Spectrum. [June 16,

aware that without suitable supervision the alterations could not be carried
out satisfactorily ; and in saying this, I make no doubt that Messrs. Trough-
ton and Simms would perform their part in their usual effective manner. I
already owe Mr. Huggins a considerable debt of gratitude for past superin-
tendence ; and his kindness on that occasion induces me to venture the hope
that he would undertake to direct such alterations as may be approved
of with despatch.

25. Zodiacal light.—Every attention has been given to this subject, but
the only result obtained is, that no traces whatever of the zodiacal light
are visible here. I was on the watch in October and the early part of
November 1868. In April and May of 1869 my absence on duty at Dehra
prevented my devoting more than an occasional evening to the subject.
Last autumn, however, I gave it every attention, but all without seeing the
light. The following extract from my note-book, made the first morning
of my watching last winter, is a representative of all subsequent entries :—

13th October, 1869. Mussoorie Observatory.—A beautifully clear
morning. Not aspeck of cloud or mist to be seen. The horizon, 8.S.E.
by S. to 8.S.W., appears sharp and distinct, though some 90miles distant.
To the north, the snowy range, though some 60 miles away, appears hardly
a day’s journey from this. The light is gradually increasing; the red
rays now tinge the sky; the sky itself brightens; the highest peaks of the
snowy range are tipped with light ; the sun bursts over the hills as if in a
moment. All this has happened without any wings or rays preceding the
sun. In other words, no traces of the zodiacal light have appeared.

26. The same, continued.—I watched for the light on the mornings of the
14th, 18th, 21st, 23rd, and 29th October, and on the Ist, 9th, and 15th No-
vember, 1869. Onall these occasions the air and sky were beautifully clear.
Other dates of watching, under unfavourable circumstances, are excluded
from this list. Though no zodiacal light appeared to me at Mussoorie, it is
worthy of remark that Colonel Walker, while travelling by post across the
plains of Central India, saw a brilliant show of the light (as far as I can
reckon) between the 12th and 15th of November, 1869. Recently I watched
for the light on the evenings of the 11th, 12th, 13th, and 14th April, 1870,
with the same results as before.

27. The same, conclusion.—How far these facts supply a connecting-link
between the earth’s atmosphere as a medium and the zodiacal light I leave for
the consideration of more competent authorities. The information may have
some special interest for Mr. Balfour Stewart, who, I learn from the monthly
notices of the Royal Astronomical Society, has given the subject some
attention.

28. <Actinometrical observations.— Discussion of these observations is
deferred until, with the assistance of Mr. W. H. Cole, M.A., I am able to
reduce and forward the results already obtained. The two actinometers
(Hodgkinson’s) work capitally, and are in good order. Amongst other
observations, they have been compared with one another. Unfortunately

1870.] The Earl of Rosse on Lunar-Heat Radiation. 9

a press of other work precluded them from comparison with the instrument
(standard) at Kew Observatory. After inspection of the observations, you
may be good enough to consider the desirability of sending me a third
actinometer of the same kind, due comparison being first made at Kew,
whereby the relation between the instrument at the Observatory (Kew)
and those sent out to me by the Royal Society may be established.

XV. “On the Radiation of Heat from the Moon.—No. II.” By
the Earu or Rossz, F.R.S. Received June 14, 1870.

In a former communication to the Royal Society I gave a short account
of some experiments on the radiation of heat from the moon, made with
the three-foot reflector at Parsonstown, during the season of 1868-1869.
I then showed :

1st. That the moon’s heat can be detected with certainty at any time
between the first and last quarter, and that, as far as could be ascertained
from so imperfect a series of observations, the increase and decrease of
her heat, with her phases, seems to be proportional to the increase and
decrease of her light, as deduced by calculation*.

2ndly. That a much smaller percentage of lunar than of solar rays is
transmitted by a plate of glass, and we therefore infer that a large portion
of the rays of high refrangibility, which reach the moon from the sun, do
not at once leave the moon’s surface, but are first absorbed, raise the
temperature of the surface, and afterwards leave it as heat-rays of low re-
_ frangibility.

3rdly. That, neglecting the effect of want of transparency in our atmo-
sphere, and assuming, in the absence of any definite information on the
subject, that the radiating-power of the moon’s surface is equal to that of
a blackened tin vessel filled with water, the lunar surface passes through a
range of 500° F. of temperature ; consequently the actual range is probably
considerably more.

4thly. The proportion between the intensity of sunlight and moonlight,
and between the heat which comes from the sun and from the moon, as
deduced from those observations, agreed as nearly as could be expected
with the values found by independent methods, and for this reason might
be considered the more reliable.

During the past season these observations have been continued, but much
time has been spent in trying various modifications of the apparatus, and
a satisfactory comparison of observations made on different nights, under
different circumstances, has been impossible ; however, by more numerous
and more complete experiments, made alternately with and without an inter-

* See the Proceedings of the Royal Society, No. 112, 1869, page 439.

10 The Earl of Rosse on Lunar-Heat Radiation. [June 16,

posed plate of glass, the second conclusion arrived at during the previous
season has been toa great extent confirmed.

The following Table gives the values found for the percentage of the
moon’s heat which passes through glass :—

Distance of Dew a
Date of rae teats Altitude of | of moon’s heat
observation. = the moon. | transmitted by
opposition. ince
glass.
; 15 13°3 I.
April 15th, 1870 5 204 I575 els
24. 16°6 pa Bie
. 15 14°5 I.
April T6th..203..4. 15 { ah ae ii
: * 194 : iM
Ayer ag thc. ate be 31 { st ae ite
Mareh 33th 0.022: 50 50 Efe
February roth ... 66 44. 3°4.
February gth...... 77 32 9°3
. 44. I1‘0 i.
April oth ...... 361 { 4 ry 1
April Sth. ent. 93 30 1230
March 8th......... 109 27 13'0
Mean = 11°88.

The same plate of glass which was used in I. and II. on April 15th,
and the experiments on the two following nights, was tested for the solar
rays, and the following values of the percentage of heat transmitted were
obtained :-—

AN Ong Rois J Oana no oSnauaadaonasneeocnos sas 86°2
86°6
ATU STS ble ec ec seecucseceene tear temas 89°3
84°3
87°I
Mean on April 180i) cic.cc.csccosssesee5 86°8

The piece of glass used on the other occasions, instead of being placed
at six or eight inches from the pile, was laid against the end of the pro-

_ tecting cone, or about half an inch from the face of the pile. When it

was placed in this position and tested for solar rays, an increase of devia-
tion in the proportion of 1-1 to 1 was obtained, owing to the “ bottling up”
of the sun’s rays as in an ordinary greenhouse, and the keeping off of
currents of air. ;

It seems therefore to be clearly proved that there is a remarkable dif-
ference between the sun’s and the moon’s heat in regard to their power of
passing through glass. The amount transmitted varies from night to
night, and in the later observations the value was gencrally larger than in
the earlier ones. Possibly this may have arisen from the formation of a

1870. | The Earl of Rosse on Lunar-Heat Radiation. 11

slight and imperceptible film of moisture on the surface of the glass, which
was much more unlikely to form during the much shorter period* of ex-
posure to the night air in the later observations.

The experiment made during the previous season to determine the ratio
between the heating-power of the moon and of the sun was repeated with
more care, and the value found, taking what appeared to be the most pro-
bable mean heating-power of full moon, as determined on various nights,
was

Sun’s total heat

Moon’s total heat = 82600.

Taking the percentage of light transmitted by glass =92

Do. do. of sun’s heat 13/7)
Do. do. of moon’s heat =,
a do. of heat from a body at 180° F.= 1°6
If 1 i and ~, represent respectively the percentage of dark and lu-
E ; i 0’ [' -
2 Y d er
minous rays present in the moon’s radiant heat, ane ap 7 an GI

the corresponding quantities for the sun’s radiant heat, we have
0x ‘016+/x°92

ie
+0
and
Vee 3 apie
0x :016+07~x SRT.
l' +0!
bo 0-1. 854 954
i Cee ga 7830
Peo Tt . 104 82600 x 104 300.

In all the foregoing experiments on lunar radiation the quantity measured
by the thermopile was the difference between the radiation from the circle
of sky containing the moon’s disk and that from a circle of sky of equal
diameter not containing the moon’s disk; we have obtained no information
In reference to the absolute temperature of either the moon or the sky.

The following experiment was therefore made with the view of trying to
connect the radiation of the sky with that of a body of known temperature,
the deviation due to each degree (Fahrenheit) difference of temperature
between a blackened tin vessel containing hot water and subtending a given
angle at the pile anda similar vessel containing colder water was first
ascertained ; then a similar determination of that due to the difference of
radiation from one of these vessels, and from a portion of sky of equal
diameter, was made. The following was the result :—

* About 12 minutes in place of 30 to 60 minutes.
+ All these values, except the first, were determined by experiment for the specimen
of glass employed.

12 The Earl of Rosse on Lunar-Heat Radiation. [June 16,
Altitude | Calculated | mn. nora. | Apparent
of part | difference ie ve tin | tempera- R k
of sky of tem- 1 "| ture of ee wane
examined. | perature. | Y°*S®- the sky.
April 16th 49 23°9 55°5 41°6 Sky hazy.
April 20th o, ee te i "3 Sky apparently black
4 3 Se on oe \ and transparent ;
id 5° 3 5°'5 occasional light
, 64 30°! 47 16°9
6 e: , clouds.
9» 4 26-2 44 17°38

If the temperature of space be really as low as is supposed, this result
seems to indicate considerable opacity of our atmosphere for heat-rays of
low refrangibility.

The ever varying transparency of our atmosphere has been found to be
a very serious obstacle ; but the much greater steadiness of the needle
during the later experiments (the mean error of the last few nights’ ob-
servations having been from two to three and a half per cent. one of the
whole deviation *) encourages us with the hope that, by taking advantage
of favourable moments, and measuring the moon’s light simultaneously
with her heat, more accurate information on this subject may soon be
acquired.

The observations were examined with the view of ascertaining how far
the heating-power of the moon’s rays varies with her altitude. Owing to
the interference of clouds, and the limited range of altitude within which
the observations were made, it is hardly worth while to give the results in
detail ; however, I may just say that the heating-power of the moon’s rays
appears to diminish with her altitude only about one-third as fast as the
intensity of the solar chemical rays, as ascertained by Roscoe and Thorpe.

An attempt was made to ascertain, by comparing two measurements of
the moon’s light at different altitudes with two corresponding measure-
ments of her heat, whether our atmosphere intercepts the eat-rays to a
greater extent than the /uminous rays. It was found that while the lght
was diminished with the altitude in the proportion of about 3 to 1, the
heat was diminished in the proportion of about 5 to 1. In consequence,
however, of much of the moon’s light and heat being intercepted by hazy
clouds, or condensed vapour, at the lower altitude, the experiment was in-
conclusive as to the effect of a transparent atmosphere on the dark rays
of heat.

The accompanying diagram shows the proportion between the amount
of lunar heat found on various nights at various ages of the moon. There
appears to be a general accordance between the variation of her radiant
heat with her phase and the corresponding amount of her light as deduced
by calculation.

* During the experiments of the previous season the mean error varied between 27
per cent. and 85 per cent. or more.

the

ts,

imen

fect exper

imper

and

so few

ge from

S
(2)
E
rt
oS
Cre
Lo]
(5)
S
S
vo
>
~
=
os
ins]
o
pio)
jo)
amt
1/2)
SI
o
(<B)
mM
~~
oS
ov
oo
La

8
os
sy
3
RS
~
3
rs
1
Ss
3
~
S
N
Ss
S
o
nM
n
fo)
faim
aa
(o)
—_—
—
os
4
o
=|
|

er olee ihe Sede aa crag iO cali are
NOOW MGNG os Se amca he 95 eS ganna a NOON TINdee.' ss MEAD LSU TS

maximum oO

As far as we can

1870.]

14 Mr. W. H. L. Russell on Linear Differential Equations. [June 16,

Subjoined is a Table giving the dates of the various observations, with
the reference numbers corresponding to those on the diagram, and with
remarks on the state of the sky. |

Lala: Date of R "
dj is observation. ier
lagram.
Te Aprils th: .olarecss
II. | January 8th ...... No mention of cloud.
TE | April 8th «2.0.2.5.
IV. | January 9th ...... No mention of cloud.
Ve} March Sth. 3.03605: Extremely clear sky.
VEE Aspire) gt ©. wanes No mention of cloud. [night by a halo.

November 23rd...

XIII. | March 13th ......
OVA maar ath oe Sky not good; fleecy clouds. [ clouds.
XW >| April t4th. 3....0.. Bad night ; stopped after 10 minutes, in consequence of
XK Vale Apes stlys 2. /..0. Sky very clear.
XVII. | January 16th......
XVIII. | September 20th ...| Occasional clouds.
XIX. | February 16th ...| Sky hazy at sunset ; occasional clouds. [night.
XX. | April 16th...:.....) Sky apparently not quite so clear as on the preceding
XS pra zits, 6...
XXII. | November 22nd...) Fog and white frost, afterwards drift.

No remark about cloud.

XVI. “On Linear Differential Equations.””—No. III. By W. H.
L. Russert, F.R.S. Received June 11, 1870.

The integrals obtained in my last paper on this subject were deduced by
the same process which afforded the determinants in the first paper. It
is obvious that these integrals could be found by a more direct investiga-
tion. This is what I am now going to attempt. It will be found moreover
that the present method will have the advantage of clearing away the am-
biguities arising from the existence of common factors in the algebraical
coefficient of the highest differential, and the denominator of the exponen-
tial in the solution. It will also be found to lead us <9 certain ulterior
results.

Let us take the differential equation

d°y F ; 19 d°y " " ee) dy
(a+ Ba) 2Y +(e +6'o+ 72") SY + (a"+p'ety'e)W
+(e" +B e+ y'"x)y=0.:

Let us now put in this equation
| y=E(ar jefe,
We shall easily see that it is impossible for the exponential to contain

1870.] Mr. W. H. L. Russell on Linear Differential Equations. 15
higher powers of («) than here given. Then we shall have

| eats adi da(u-+v2),

= + (u-+ve)E : Al

E+E oe ¢ faulutva),

d° a° i

ceil ve) i ‘ e [da(utve),
L

Substituting these values in the differential equation, and equating the co-
efficients of the highest powers of (7) to zero, we have
yB+ry =0,

whence

and also
vrat3rup+2pry' +b +y'v=0;
whence substituting for (7) and reducing, we have

as before.

The other integrals given in my last paper may be deduced in a cic
way.
This method suggested to me that it was possible to ascertain if any

: aes
linear differential equation admitted of a solution of the form y= Q
where P, Q, p, q are rational and entire functions of (2).

Let, as before, the ley equation be

% |
(a+ 0,2+... $m a) 6 (6, Bet) 6a Se 0,

Oi
Then it is easily seen that ae factors of g must be divisors of

CO ate Conn tel ee) Weta bes

hence if we have
a, tavt...+ame”™=(ex—a)"(x—b)..

we must have

= Geet nett seb ty alt sosbes ee eet sie
Now this series can evidently be written in the form

y= R(a)etot met oe tm 0™,
where R(x) can be expanded in descending powers of (#). Hence if this
value of y be substituted in the proposed differential equation, we may de-
termine 4,, 4,,.--+%, by the same process as before.

16 Mr. W. H.L. Russell on Linear Differential Equations. [June 16,

To determine A,, A’—1,..., let

: » Or c=at+ B

&t—a 2
Then the solution of the resulting linear differential equation in (<) will be
of the form

——

y= — —R (z)erot Ai# af Aoz?+.. Ay 2".

where R,(z) can be expanded in descending powers of (2), and therefore
A,, A, A, ... be determined as aga

In the same way, by putting c=06+ ~ we may determine B,. B,,

In order to exhibit the accuracy of this reasoning, I will form some dif-
ferential equations from given primitives, and then see if the above process
-will enable us to reproduce these primitives as solutions.

Let us take the primitive

1
y= (a+ 1)e2?+32+ 51:
From this we may deduce the differential equation

avy P dy
(a? —a?—x#+ 1) — — (a* + 20° —62?—3a4 4).

— (2a° + a* + 4a°—a?—5a—4)y=0.
Let
y= Ri pef eri,
If we use higher powers of (#) in the exponential, they will not give us a
result.
y- @Y

= > am given in
the earlier part of this paper, and equating the highest terms to zero, we

have

Substituting in the differential equation the values of W

y?—y—2=0 and 2uy—r?—p—2v—1=0,
whence
y=2 and p= 3, or v=—1, and p=0,

and therefore
2

S dx(u+ va)=2°+32, or ——
The divisors of the first term are r—1 and +1.

Let « = z +1, and the differential equation becomes
Z
“ a*Y (0,7 dy 6 =
pize se) ra (22 tot) +(32°+...)y=0,
1
which gives a solution of the form y=R,(z)e*, when z= Do te If we put

r= : —1, the differential equation will be of the form

(Azt+...) S44 (B14... B+ (Ceo+.. yee

1870.] Mr. W. H. L. Russell on Linear Differential Equations. 17

in which the numerical coefficients are of no consequence, as the equation
does manifestly not admit of an exponential solution. If, then, the differ-
ential equation admits of a solution in the proposed form, it must be one of
the two forms,

y=R(a)e z= or y= R(w)e z wes

where R(«) is a rational and entire function of (x) or a canst fraction.
Using the first form, we should of course determine it equal to v+1.

22+ 34¢+ ——

1
Asa second example, we form from the primitive, y= («#— l)e"* e+1, the
equation

(@—1)(e+1)° 2 (2a? +a— 3) 2 (a + 5a" 44+ 1)y= 0.
Here we must put me, ude, higher powers of (a) in the exponential
]
leading to no result. Substituting, we find p=+1. Let c= Pais and.

the differential ee becomes

(28+...) 4 (att. JE tet... =O,

which gives y=R(z)e*. If we put = z we find no exponential solution.
cA
Consequently the solution of the equation, if it can be obtained under
the form we are now considering, must be one of the two expressions,
1 1
y=R(a)e ei and y=R(w)e "eH,

As a third example, I take the primitive,
1
y=xe av

and from it the differential equation
d’y dy im
ie ed 2 rh Sle A 2 pein = (5
wv a? + (2a* + 2) - (a + 4a’? + 2u—2)y=0
We must evidently here put y=R(z)e/##, which gives p=+1. If

1 :
o the equation becomes

z = 22 oU_ t4e 422" —22°)\y=0.

If we put here y=R(z\e/@+»), employ the formule given in the first
part of the paper, and equate the coefficients of the highest powers of (2)
to zero, we have v?—2y=0, 2uv—2u=0, whence v=2, and p=0; and

1 1
y must be one of the two forms R(x)e"+#, or R(v)e** ®.

VOL, XIX. Cc

i Mr. A. Le Sueur on Observations with the | {June 16,
XVII. “ Observations with the Great Melbourne Telescope, in a

Letter to Prof. Stokes.” By A. Le Suzur. Communicated by
Prof. Sroxss, Sec. R.S. Received April 18, 1870.

Observatory, Feb. 27.

Dear Sir,—I have little more definite to tell you with reference to the
star 7 Argis; thinking that a larger dispersion would be of advantage, 1
have had a supplementary arrangement added to the spectroscope, by
means of which a direct prism may be interposed between the collimator
and the usual prism.

With this increased dispersion, the red line keeps its place ; the yellow
one turns out to be slightly more refrangible than D.

The green lines, which, with the smaller dispersion, were very difficult,
now become almost unmanageable ; this would seem to throw some doubt
on their reality, as mere extra dispersion should have little effect on real
lines.

The direct prism being a small one, does not take in the whole of the |
pencil when condensed to the limits bearable by the collimator; but as
the arrangements at my disposal do not in any case admit of utilizing
the full condensation, the smallness of the prism has not had any material
effect.

On the whole, I am now inclined to think that, with respect to the
green lines, the appearance of the spectra is due to a character of light
somewhat similar to that of a Orionis, &c. ; a spectrum of groups of dark
lines, with spaces more or less free between them, producing the effect
(when the light is not sufficient to bear a slit fine enough for dark lines)
of a spectrum crossed by bright lines.

The behaviour of the red line, however (of the blue one, being less con-
spicuous, I cannot speak with so much confidence), would lead to the
already drawn inference that it is a real hydrogen line.

I have examined other stars of about the same magnitude as » Argis ;
in the majority of these there is not even a suspicion of condensation in
any part of the spectrum ; red stars, R Leporis for instance, give a spectrum
not dissimilar to that of » Argtis; but the red line on none of the stars
examined is so-conspicuous as in 7.

The weather since the beginning of this year has been more favourable,
so that Iam able, by degrees, to increase the amount of work done. The
routine work is the review of figured nebule ; as might be expected, the
4 feet gives views considerably different from the C. G. H. drawings ; but at
present I have nothing worthy of special mention.

The light of the nebule, as they are taken up for general examination,
is analyzed with the prism; of those which have been examined I have yet
found none for which it may be certainly said that the light is not of defi-
nite refrangibilities.

In irregular nebule, the bright knots even, which are so distinetly

call

-1870.] Great Melbourne Telescope. 19

mottled as to point to a cluster condition, give out, as far as I have yet seen,
light which is monochromatic, or nearly so.

_ Acknowledged clusters, where discrete stars are plainly discernible, are
of course excluded; of the nebulosity mixed up with such clusters as
47 Toucan, I cannot speak with certainty ; but if the light were monochro-
matic, I think that (in the case particularized at least) the brilliancy would
be sufficient to afford a definite impression.

Would you call Lord Rosse’s attention to 1477-78 (general catalogue),
of which I enclose a diagram from
measured positions? The configura-
tion differs so widely from that given
in the Philosophical Transactions, °
that, with reference to the rotation
of the two nebulous stars, it would ;
be interesting to have the evidence
of any additional observations made
at Parsonstown. ¥

_ From Mr. Huggins’s observations
of the nebule in Orion, I gather
that he has seen only the three usual
lines; with a wide slit, I had lately | C
a very strong suspicion of a fourth
line, probably G. I have not spe-
cially examined the nebulee since ;
but probably Mr. Huggins will be able to give confirmatory evidence.

On the night of February Ist we had a pretty brilliant auroral display ;
being at work at the time, I missed part of it; but as soon as I became
aware of its existence I applied the spectroscope. At moments four lines
already known were easily visible, the chief line being remarkably brilliant.
A much narrower slit than that used could have been borne at the time of
maximum display, which, however, lasted only a few moments. I was
intent on measuring the lines, as at the time I had no published definite

information with reference to other than Angstrém’s special line; but at
moments light was seen at the red end of the spectrum sufficiently bright
to leave a distinct impression of colour; when, however, special attention
was devoted to that part of the spectrum the aurora had greatly diminished
in brilliancy, so that I was unable to make out whether a red line existed,
or whether there was a general spectrum at the red end. I incline to the
latter opinion, and put it down to the rose-coloured are; this arc, however,
which seemed pretty brilliant after the streamers had disappedted! did not
then give a visible spectrum. Probably this phenomenon has been ob-
served before to better purpose; but I cannot find mention thereof in
published accounts. Yours truly,
A, Lz Sueur.

c 2

20 Mz,OGcenlenintronwie ON [June 16,

XVIII. “Chemical and Physiological Experiments on living Cin-
chone.”’ By J. Brovaguton, B.Sec., F.C.S., Chemist to the
Cinchona-Plantations of the Madras Government. Communi-
cated by Dr. Epwarp Franxuanp. Received May 16, 1870.

‘ (Abstract.)

The memoir describes the principal scientific results which have been
obtained during the last three years, in the course of chemical work on the
Neilgherry Cinchona-plantations.

The chemical characteristics of the various parts of the Cinchona plant
are described. The condition in which the alkaloids are met with in the
living bark is shown to be that of a slightly soluble tannate existing in the
parenchymatous cells.

The order of formation of the alkaloids is shown to he, Ist, silent
lizable quinine ; 2nd, crystallizable quinine; 3rd, cinchonidine and cincho-
nine. Reasons are adduced for thinking that the alkaloids are really formed
in the tissues in which they are found.

The effect of the solar rays falling on the bark, either while living on
the tree or when separated, is shown to be prejudicial to its contained
alkaloids. The effects of shielding the bark artificially, and the influence
of elevation of the site of growth, are detailed.

The question as to whether the alkaloids are substitutes for the nite
bases is discussed, and a series of experiments is described, which combine
to show either that such substitution does not take ve or does so Ba
in a very partial degree.

XIX. “ Researches on the Hydrocarbons of the Series C,H,, ,2?—VI.

By C.Scuorzemmer. Communicated by Prof. Stoxss, Sec.R.S.
Received June 14, 1870.

In my last communication* I stated that, from the results of my ex-
periments, I came to the conclusion that, by acting on these hydrocarbons
with chlorine, a mixture of primary and secondary chlorides was formed,
as the alcohols derived from these chlorides yielded on oxidation, besides
an acid containing the same number of carbon atoms as the alcohol, also
acetones, or the characteristic oxidation products of secondary alcohols.

The correctness of this conclusion has been fully proved by further ex-
periments, and I am at present engaged in investigating the conditions
under which the one or the other of these chlorides is formed.

In order to obtain decisive results, it was first of all required to work on
considerable quantities of a hydrocarbon; and I selected for this research
hexyl-hydride, C,W,,, from petroleum, as this body can be obtained the
most easily in a sufficient quantity.

The derivatives of hexyl-hydride have been fully investigated by Cahours

* Proc. Roy. Soc. vol, xviii. p. 25,

sant men

SSE he "

1870.] | Hydrocarbons of the Series C,H, 5 21

and Pelouze*, but the results which I have so far obtained differ in several
important points from those of these eminent chemists.

By acting on this hydrocarbon with chlorine in the cold and in presence
of iodine, I prepared hexyl-chloride, C, H,, Cl, already described by Cahours
and Pelouze, which boils at 125°-126° C.; but besides this compound
there was also formed a pretty large quantity of a product which distilled
between 126° and 135° C., and from which no substance having a constant
boiling-point could be isolated. This higher boiling portion can be sepa-
rated only with difficulty from the chloride boiling at 125°-126°, for even
after repeated distillations a residue of the former is always left behind.

On heating the lower boiling chloride with glacial acetic acid and
potassium acetate a hexyl-acetate was obtained, of which the larger portion
distilled between 158° and 162°, the boiling-point rising up at last to 170°.
Besides the acetate a pretty large quantity of herylene, C,H,,, had also
been formed by the decomposition of the chloride.

The chloride boiling between 126° and 135°, treated in the same way,
yielded also hexylene, besides a hexyl-acetate distilling between 160° and
170°. According to Cahours and Pelouze, this ether boils at 145°.

I did not try to isolate definite compounds from these acetates, as I
found that by converting them into the alcohols and subjecting these to frac-
tional distillation, they easily split up into two distinct compounds,—one,
which forms the greater part of the mixture, boiling constantly at 140°-
141°, and the other and smaller portion distilling between 150° and 155°;
the quantity of liquid coming over between these two limits being quite
insignificant.

The liquid boiling at 140° is a secondary hexyl-alcohol; on oxidation it
yields first an acetone, which, by further oxidation, splits up into acetic
acid and butyric acid. It is therefore methyl-butylearbinol,—

Ci
(ut } CH. OH.
Whether this compound is identical or not with the secondary hexyl-alcohol,
which Erlenmeyer and Wanklyn obtained from mannite, I am not yet able
to decide.

The body which distilled between 150° and 155° is a primary heryl-
alcohol, C,H,,OH ; on oxidizing it an oily acid was formed, which, as the
analysis of its silver-salt showed, has the composition of caproic acid,
C, H,,0,. Cahours and Pelouze mention in their memoir only the latter
alcohol; they do not state, however, under what NEG they acted
upon the hydride with chlorine.

I have found that, by treating this hydrocarbon with chlorine alone in
the cold as well as at the boiling-point, chlorides are obtained which boil
between 125° and 135°, and which appear to be identical with those described
above. I intend not only to study these chlorides more fully, but also to

* Annal, Chim. Phys. (4) 1.9.

22 Dr. C. B. Radcliffe on Animal Electricity. [June 16,

compare the alcohols obtained from them with the secondary alcohol from
mannite and from hexylene, and with the primary hexyl-alcohol which is
found in fusel-oil.

XX. “ Formation of Cetyl-alcohol by a singular reaction.” By C.
SCHORLEMMER. Communicated by Prof. Sroxrs, Sec. B.S.
Received June 14, 1870. |

On heating a mixture of sebacic acid, C,, H,,0,, and caustic baryta, be-
sides the hydrocarbon C, H,,, which I have described in a former commu-
nication*, other products are formed, amongst which there is a solid body,
which, by several crystallizations from alcohol, was obtained in small white
crystals.

On analyzing it, Mr. Dearden obtained results which led to the formula
C,, H,,O, which is that of cetyl-alcohol :—

Calculated. Found.
Te ae Te ae aes
Wei as 192 79°34 79°3 78:9
H,, eh See 34 14°05 13°8 13°9
O 16 6°61 a peeve

242 100-00

This body has not only the composition but also the characteristic pro-
perties of cetyl-alcohol; it melts at 49°, and solidifies again at the same
temperature.
- The formation ef this compound is certamly very singular, and perhaps
the more so as cetyl-alcohol is so easily oxidized to sebacic acid by the
action of nitric acid. I intend to obtain larger quantities of it by the above
reaction and to investigate it.

XXJ. “Researches in Animal Electricity.’ By C. B. Rapcuirrs,
M.D. Communicated by Cuartes Brooks, M.A. Received
May 19, 1870.

(Abstract.)
Part I.

The subjects of the present inquiry are three in number :—1. The elec-
trical phenomena belonging to living nerve and muscle during rest; 2.
The electrical phenomena which mark the passing of nerve and muscle
from the state of rest into that of action; and 3. The workings of voltaic
electricity, and of electricity generally, upon nerve and muscle.

1. The electrical phenomena belonging to living nerve and muscle during
the state of rest.

Argument,—Living nerve and muscle have an electricity of their own,
which fails by degrees as life dies out, and is wanting altogether after

* Proc. Roy. Soc. vol. xvi. p. 376.

1870.] ~—Dr.C. B, Radeliffe on Animal Electricity. 23

death. This electricity is made known by the electrometer, as’ well as by
the galvanometer. Living nerve and muscle supply to the galvanometer
currents, called respectively the nerve-current and the muscle-current,
when the sides of the fibres are connected, through the coil, with either
one of the two ends, or when certain points upon the sides or upon the
ends are brought together in the same manner, the direction of these cur-
rents showing that the sides of the fibres are positive in relation to either
of the two ends, or else the reverse (the instances of reversal being the
exception and not the rule), and that the positive surface becomes more
positive, and the negative surface more negative, as the distance from the
line of junction between these surfaces increases. Living nerve and muscle
are also (as is now for the first time distinctly proved by means of Thom-
‘son’s New Quadrant Electrometer) capable of acting upon the electro-
meter, the action showing that the electrical differences upon which the
nerve-current and muscle-current depend are not the same in all parts of
the fibres, the differences between the sides and the ends being differences
in kind, like those which belong to the two surfaces of a charged Leyden
jar, the differences upon the sides singly, and upon the ends singly, being
only those which indicate different degrees of tension in one kind of elec-
tricity. In accounting for these phenomena, the very imperfect conducti-
bility of nerve and muscle, and of animal tissue generally, is taken as a
starting-point. It is assumed (and in support of this assumption some
new measurements of the resistance of nerve and muscle to electrical con-
duction are given) that in nerve and muscle the sheaths of the fibres may
conduct electricity so imperfectly as to be capable of acting as dielectrics,—
that a charge of one kind of electricity, developed on their outsides (by
oxygenation’or in some other way), may induce an opposite charge on their
insides,—and that the electrical condition of the two ends of the fibres may
be opposed to that of the sides, because the charge induced within the
sheath is conducted to the ends by the contents of the sheath, It is sup-
posed, in short, that the fibres of living nerve and muscle during rest are
so many charged Leyden jars, their electrical condition at this time being
statical, not, current, and that the nerve-current and muscle-current are no
more than accidental phenomena arising from the: galvanometer being
placed between two points which happen to be electrically dissimilar. And
in support of this view it is pointed out that precisely parallel electrical
phenomena may be obtained from a piece of wood, shaped like the piece of
nerve or muscle, and coated on its sides, but not at its two ends, by a sheath
formed of two layers of tinfoil separated by an intermediate layer of thin
gutta-percha sheeting, if only the sides be charged as the sides of the piece
of nerve or muscle are supposed to be charged, and if the electrodes of
_the galvanomer or electrometer be applied in the proper manner.

2. The electrical phenomena which mark the passing of nerve and muscle
Srom the state of rest into that of action.

Argument.—The nerve-current and muscle-current disappear almost

24 Dr. C. B. Radcliffe on Animal Electricity. {June 16,

entirely when nerve and muscle pass from the state of rest into that of
action. The ‘‘secondary contraction” set up in a muscle by simply
laying its nerve upon another muscle or nerve in which a state of action is
present, points to a disturbance outside the acting nerve and muscle such
as might be caused by a discharge of electricity, and suggests the idea
that the sudden disappearance of nerve-current and muscle-current in action
may be owing to such discharge ; and this view is not a little borne out by
certain close anatomical and physiological analogies which are found to
exist between the muscular apparatus and the electric organs of the Tor-
pedo. In short, the evidence seems to show that a discharge analogous to
that of the Torpedo is developed, as Matteucci supposed, when nerve and
muscle pass from the state of rest into that of action, and that the dis-
charge of the Torpedo itself may be nothing more than the unmasked
manifestation of a discharge which occurs in a masked form in every case
of nervous and muscular action.

3. The workings of voltaic electricity, and of electricity generally, upon
nerve and muscle. 7

Argument.—The behaviour of muscle under the action of the so-called
‘inverse’ and “direct” currents is taken as the text in the present inquiry.

Contraction in this case plainly belongs, not to the time when the circuit
remains closed, but to the moments ‘of closing and opening the circuit,
when the nerves and muscles are acted upon by instantaneous currents,
called ewtra-currents, which currents are in very deed discharges. These
extra-currents agree with ordinary induced currents in their discharge-like
character; but they disagree in their direction, the extra-current at the
closing of the circuit taking the same course as the constant current, the
extra-current at the opening having the opposite course ; and this point of
difference is not to be lost sight of. At first both extra-currents cause
contraction ; afterwards, when the muscle and nerve have lost some of their
susceptibility to impressions, only that extra-current causes contraction
which happens to pass in the same direction as that in which motor im-
pulses are transmitted along the motor nerves to the muscles. With this
clue, indeed, it is not difficult to trace to its cause every variation in the
order of contraction which characterizes the case in question.

Nor is it altogether unintelligible that the behaviour of the muscles as to
the continuance of these contractions should, under ordinary circumstances,
differ in the case where the current is inverse, and in the case where the
current is direct.-. This difference is noticed when the voltaic circuit is in-
sulated, but not when an earth-wire is put to either of the poles. With the
voltaic circuit insulated, the contractions continue for 60! or longer in the
case where the current is inverse, and for no longer than 15! or 20! in the
case where the current is direct: with the earth-wire at the negative pole
the contractions continue for 60! or longer in the case where the current

is inverse, and in that in which the current is direct also; with the earth-
b

oil
a
.

1870.) —- Dr. C. B. Radcliffe on Animal Electricity. 95

wire at the positive pole the contractions continue no longer than 15! or
20! in the case where the current is direct, and in that in which the cur-
rent is inverse also. With the earth-wire at either pole—that is to say,
the part acted upon by the inverse current and the part acted upon by the
direct current are both made to contract for the same length of time, the
contraction in both parts being 60’ or longer if the wire be at the negative
pole, and for no longer than 15! or 20! if it be at the positive pole. Now
the earth-wire changes the charge of free electricity associated with the
inverse and direct currents, but it does not alter the course of those cur-
rents. When the voltaic circuit is insulated, the part acted upon by the
inverse current is charged positively, and that acted upon by direct current
negatively, the charge in each case proceeding from the voltaic pole which
happens to be nearest ; when the earth-wire is put to either pole, the free
electricity of that particular pole runs off to earth, and the parts between
the poles (the half traversed by the inverse current and the half traversed
by the direct current alike) are charged with the free electricity of the
other. pole,—with positive electricity if the wire be at the negative pole,
with negative electricity if it be at the positive pole. The whole case,
indeed, is one which seems to admit of only one conclusion, namely this—
that the longer or shorter continuance of the contraction must have its ex-
planation, not in the current being inverse in the one case and direct in the
other, but in the free electricity associated with one or both these currents
being positive in the one case and negative in the other, the contraction
continuing for the longer time when this electricity is positive, and for the
shorter time when it is negative. And that this should be so is not alto-
gether unintelligible if the natural electrical condition of the fibres of living
nerve and muscle be what it has been assumed to be—a condition in which
the outsides and insides of the sheaths are in opposite electrical states, the
charge on the outside, usually positive, inducing the opposite charge on the
inside; for on this assumption it may well be that a positive artificial
charge to the outsides of the sheaths may preserve the natural activity of
the fibres, and so favour the continuance of the contraction by keeping up
their natural charge, the positive electricity outside the sheaths inducing
negative electricity inside the sheaths ; and that a negative artificial charge
may have the contrary effect, the negative charge outside the sheaths in-
ducing positive electricity within the sheaths, and so producing that re-
versal in the relative position of the two electricities which is only met
with when the fibres are upon the point of losing their activity.

Voltaic electricity, therefore, would seem to act upon nerve and muscle,
not by the constant current which passes while the circuit is closed, but by
the charge of free electricity, positive or negative, associated with this
current, and by the extra-currents which pass at the moments of closing
and opening the circuit, which extra-currents are in very deed discharges,
the charge being favourable to the continuance of activity when positive,
and unfavourable when negative, the instantaneous currents or discharges

26. Dr. C. B. Radcliffe on Animal Electricity. [June 16,

causing action. As with the natural electricity of nerve and muscle, so in

this case, rest and charge, and action and discharge would seem to go
together.

And so also with the action of Franklinic and Faradaic electricity upon
nerve and muscle. With Franklinic electricity the state of rest in both
nerve and muscle is plainly connected with the charge, and the state of action
with the discharge. With Franklinic electricity, too, the positive charge is
found to be favourable to the continuance of the state of action, and the
negative charge unfavourable. And so likewise with Faradaic electricity,
not only as regards the connexion of the state of action with the discharge,
for the induced currents may be resolved into discharges, but also as regards
the connexion of the state of rest with the charge, for in the interval be-
tween the two induced currents the secondary circuit is in fact occupied by
a charge of electricity.

Part II.—On Electrotonus.

Argument.—There is reason to believe that the whole truth has not yet
been elicited respecting the movements of the needle of the galvanometer
and the modifications of the activity of the nerve which are characteristic
of electrotonus.

The movements of the needle of the galvanometer characterizing electro-
tonus appear to be due, not, as is commonly supposed, to modifications of
the nerve-current consequent upon the action of the voltaic current, but to
the passage through the coil of the galvanometer of streams of free electri-
city, positive or negative, as the case may be, from the voltaic pole which
happens to be nearest to the coil,—of free positive electricity from the
positive pole in anelectrotonus, of free negative electricity from the negative
pole in cathelectrotonus. They cannot, so it is argued, be due to modifica-
tions of the nerve-current consequent upon the action of the voltaic current,
because the same movements continue when there is no nerve-current to

be thus modified, as when a dead nerve is used in place of a living nerve, _

or even when other bodies are substituted for nerve; they may, so it is
suggested, be due to streams of free electricity passing through the coil of
the galvanometer from the nearest voltaic pole, because such streams do
pass in this direction, and because streams of free electricity from a
frictional machine so passed give rise to similar movements,—the stream of
positive electricity to the movement of anelectrotonus, the stream of
negative electricity to that of cathelectrotonus. This is the view taken of
the movements of the needle of the galvanometer characterizing electro-
tonus. |

A different conclusion to that commonly held is also thought to be
necessary respecting the modifications of the activity of the nerve in elec-
trotonus. Instead of this activity being suspended in anelectrotonus and
exalted in cathelectrotonus, the facts, many of them new, are, when fully
realized, found to show that this suspension is met with, not in anelectro-

1870. ] Dr, C. B. Radcliffe on Animal Electricity. 27

tonus only, but in cathelectrotonus also. It would seem, indeed, that the
only difference between anelectrotonns and cathelectrotonus in this respect
is, that this suspension is a little less complete in cathelectrotonus than in
anelectrotonus, a lesser ‘‘ stimulus” serving to cause action in the former
state than in the latter. It would even seem that any proper exaltation of
activity is to be met with in anelectrotonus rather than in cathelectrotonus.
Such are the conclusions respecting the modifications of the activity of the
nerve in electrotonus which are believed to be warranted by all the facts,
old and new alike.

Nor is tke increase of contraction detected by the myograph in cath-
electrotonus a sufficient reason for concluding that the irritability of the
nerve and muscle is exalted in this state; on the contrary, this increase
may be nothing more than the natural consequence of the altered electrical
condition in cathelectrotonus. In ordinary muscular action, the state of
elongation or relaxation is believed to be caused by the mutual attraction
of the charges of opposite electricities disposed upon the two surfaces of
the sheaths of the muscular fibres, this attraction compressing the sheaths
at right angles to their surfaces; in ordinary muscular action the state of
contraction is believed to be brought about by the discharge of the charges
which caused the opposite state of elongation, this discharge leaving the
fibres free to obey, as simple elastic bodies, the attractive force inherent in
the physical constitution of their molecules. In cathelectrotonic muscular
action, on the other hand, it is believed that the state of elongation may
be greater than that which is natural to the fibres (after removal from the
body, at least), because the charge communicated from the negative pole to
the fibres is greater than the natural charge of the fibres, the artificial
charge to the outside of the sheaths inducing an equivalent charge of the
opposite electricity on the insides, and so causing increased elongation by
increasing the compression to which the sheaths are subjected between
these two charges; and that the contraction may be increased, because
contraction, according to this view, is only the return of the fibres, by
virtue of their elasticity, from the previous state of increased elongation.
“The case supposed is precisely that which may be imitated in every
particular upon a narrow band of thin india-rubber sheeting, coated with
gold-leaf on its two surfaces within a short distance of their edge, or else
wetted to the same extent simply with water, and by charging and dis-
charging in turn; for as the charge is communicated the band goes on
elongating until the charge has reached its maximum, and when discharge
is brought about there is sudden shortening, the degree of shortening being
always commensurate with the previous degree of elongation. What happens
is that which is supposed to happen in ordinary muscular action and in cath-
electrotonic muscular action also, if only the effects of the smaller charge and
discharge be made to stand for the first, and those of the fuller charge and
discharge for the last form of muscular action. It is of no moment, also,
whether the electricity used in charging be negative or positive. Whether

28 Dr. C. B. Radcliffe on Animal Electricity. [June 16,

the charge be negative or positive, the results are the same, and therefore it is
plain that there ought also to be increased contracticn in anelectrotonus if
this be the true explanation of the increased contraction which happens in
cathelectrotonus. In cathelectrotonus it is assumed that the negative charge
from the negative voltaic pole charges the outsides of the sheaths of the fibres
negatively, and induces an equivalent charge of positive electricity on the in-
sides ; in anelectrotonus, on the other hand, itis assumed that the positive
charge from the positive voltaic pole brings about a contrary state of things
in the fibres, charging the outsides of the sheaths positively, and affecting the
insides negatively by induction. The difference assumed to exist between
the two electrotonic states is in the relative position of the two charges
upon the sheaths of the fibres, nothing else. It is not a difference which
can affect the elongation of the fibre if elongation be brought about by the
mutual attraction of the opposite charges with which the sheaths are
charged; for the attraction of either charge for the other must be the same,
whether it be exercised from within the sheath or from without it. It
follows, indeed, from what is supposed, not only that there should be in-
creased contraction in anelectrotonus as well as in cathelectrotonus, but
also that the state of rest in both electrotonic conditions should be
characterized by increased elongation. And what there should be in
theory there is in fact ; for it proves on inquiry that contraction may be
caused in anelectrotonus by an adequate “stimulus,” that this contraction
is greater than that caused hy the same “stimulus”’ in the unelectrotonized
state, and that actual increased elongation of the fibres is an effect of both
cathelectrotonus and anelectrotonus. The view of muscular action here
taken is that which has been always advocated by the author as regards
contraction, but it is modified somewhat as regards elongation; for now,
instead of looking upon elongation as arising from the mutual repulsion
among the muscular molecules set up by the presence in the muscle of a
single charge of electricity, this state is referred to the mutual attraction of
opposite electrical charges disposed, as in a Leyden jar, upon the two sur-
faces of the sheaths of the muscular fibres.

Looking back, then, at the history of electrotonus there appears to be
nothing contradictory to what has been already said respecting the work-
ings of electricity upon nerve and muscle. It is still the same story of
rest along with the state of charge, and of action along with the state of
discharge, with this significant addition, that in electrotonus the charge is
shown, not only as coincident with the state of rest, but as having an
actual power of suspending action in both nerve and muscle, and of causing
increased elongation of the fibres in muscle.

1870.] Presents. 29

Presents received June 16, 1870.
Transactions.

Albany :—Albany Institute. Transactions. Vols. I., III. 8vo. Albany
1830-55. The Institute.
Homeopathic Medical Society of the State of New York. Transactions.
8yo. Albany 1863. The Society.
Society for the Promotion of Agriculture, Arts, and Manufactures.
Transactions. Vol. I. 8vo. Albany 1801. The Albany Institute.
Society for the Promotion of Useful Arts. Transactions. 8yvo. Albany
1807. The Albany Institute.
Berlin :—Kon. Preuss. Akademie der Wissenschaften. Monatsbericht,
Jan,, Feb., Marz 1870. 8vo. Berlin 1870. The Academy.
Birmingham :—FEighth Annual Report of the Free Libraries’ Com-
mittee. 8vo. Birmingham 1869. The Borough.
Bordeaux :—Académie Impériale des Sciences, Belles-Lettres et Arts.
Actes. 3° série, 30° année, 4™* trimestre ; 31 année, 1* trimestre.
8vo. Bordeaux 1868-69. Prix décernés pour l’année 1869. 8vo.
Bordeaux 1870. The Academy.
Société Médico-Chirurgicale des Hépitaux et Hospices. Mémoires et
Bulletins. Tome LY. fasc.1, 2. 8vo. Bordeauwv 1869. The Society.
Brussels :—Académie Royale de Médecine. Mémoires Couronnés et
autres Mémoires. Collection in 8vo. Tome I. fasc. 1. 8vo. Brua-
elles 1870. Bulletin. 3°série. Tome III. Nos. 11,12; Tome IV.
Nos. 1-4. 8vo. Bruxelles 1869-70. The Academy.
Académie Royale de Belgique. Bulletin. 2° série. Tome XXIX. Nos.
4,5. 8vo. Bruwelles 1870. The Academy.
Observatoire Royal. Annales Meétéorologiques, 3° année, ff. 5-12; 4°
année, ff. 1-3. 4to. Bruwelles 1869-70. The Observatory.
Calcutta :—Asiatic Society of Bengal. Journal. Nos. 4,5, 13, 15, 19 ;
1870, Part 2, No.1. 8vo. Calcutta 1832-70. Proceedings, 1870,
Nos. 2,3. 8vo. Calcutta 1870. The Society.
Geological Survey of India. Memoirs. Vol. VI. Part 3. 8vo. Calcutta
1869. Paleontologia Indica, Series VY. Parts 5-10, The Gas-
tropoda of the Cretaceous Rocks of Southern India, by F. Sto-
liczka. 4to. Calcutta 1868. Records. Vol. I. Parts 1-3; Vol. II.
Part 1. 8vo. Calcutta 1868-69. Annual Report. Twelfth year,
1867. 8vo. Calcutta 1868. The Survey.
Caracas :—Sociedad de Ciencias Fisicas y Naturales. Vargasia. No. 6.
Amadeo Bonpland, Apuntes Biograficos, por A. Ernst. 8vo. Cardcas

1869. The Society,
Cherbourg :—Société Impériale des Sciences Naturelles. Mémoires. Tome
XIV. 8vo. Paris 1869. The Society.
Florence :—R. Comitato Geologico d’Italia, Bollettino. Nos. 2, 3. 8vo.
Firenze 1870, The Committee,

30 Presents. [June 16,

Transactions (continued). ai
Freiburg im Breisgau. Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Berichte iiber die
Verhandlungen. Band V. Heft 2. 8vo. Freiburg 1869. The Society.
Havana :—Colegio de Belen. Observaciones Magnéticas y Meteorold-
gicas. Ano Meteoroldgico de 30 de Noviembre de 1868 4 30 No-
viembre de 1869. 8vo. Habana 1870. The College.
Hermannstadt :—Siebenbiirgischer Verein fir Naturwissenschaften.
Verhandlungen und Mittheilungen. Jahrg. 1, No.6; Jahrg. 5, Nos.
1-3; Jahrg. 8, Nos. 9,10; Jahrg. 12, Nos. 1-6; Jahrg. 13-16. 8vo.

Hermannstadt 1850-65, The Union.
Kazan :—Imperial University. (Outchonia Zapiski.) 1863, Part 1. 8vo.
Kazan 1865. _ The University.

Leipzig :—Astronomische Gesellschaft. Vierteljahrsschrift. V. Jahrgang,
Heft.2. 8vo. Leipzig 1870.
Fiirstlich Jablonowski’sche Gesellschaft. Preisschriften XVI. (Engel-
hardt).° 8vo, and Atlas 4to. Leipzig 1870. | The Society.
Konigl. Sachsische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften. Abhandlungen.
Band. IX. Nos. 1-3. 8vo. Leipzig 1868-69. Berichte tiber die
Verhandlungen. Math.-Phys. Classe, 1867, 3, 4; 1868, 1-8 ; 1869,

1. 8vo. Leipzig 1868-69. The Society.
London :—Art Union. Thirty-third Annual Report of the Council. 8vo.
London 1869. The Union.
British Horological Institute. Horological Journal. Nos. 131-142.
8vo. London 1869-70. The Institute.
British Museum. Catalogue of Sea-Pens or Pennatulariide, by J. KE.
Gray. 8vo. London 1870. The Trustees.

East-India Association. Journal. Vol. TV. No. 1. 8vo. London 1870.
The Association.

Entomological Society. Transactions for the year 1870. Part 1. 8vo.
London 1870. The Society.
Linnean Society. Journal. Zoology, Vol. X. Nos. 47, 48; Botany,
Vol. XI. Nos. 52, 53. 8vo. London 1869-70. Proceedings, Session

1869-70. The Society.
London Mathematical Society. Proceedings. Nos. 22-24. 8vo. London
1870. The Society.
Meteorological Society. Proceedings. Nos. 47-49. 8vo. London 1870.
The Society.
Odontological Society. Transactions. New Series. Vol. II. Nos. 2-7.
8vo. London 1869-70. The Society.
Photographic Society. Photographic Journal. Nos. 207-217. 8vo.
London 1869-70. The Society.
Quekett Microscopical Club. Journal. No. 10. 8vo. London 1870.
The Club.

Royal Astronomical Society. Monthly Notices. Vol. XXIX. Nos. 8, 9;
Vol. XXX. Nos. 1-5, 7. 8vo. London 1869-70. The Society.

1870.] Presents. 7 31

Transactions (continued).

Royal Institute of British Architects. Sessional Papers. 1868-69,

Nos. 7, 138,14; 1869-70, Nos. 1, 2, 4-9. 4to. London 1869-70.
The Institute.
Royal Institution. Proposals for forming by subscription in the Me-
tropolis of the British Empire a Public Institution for diffusing the
knowledge and facilitating the general introduction of useful
Mechanical Inventions and Improvements. 8vo. London 1799,

rpr. 1870. The Institution.
Royal Medical and Chirurgical Society. Proceedings. Vol. VI. Nos.
4,5. 8v0. London 1869-70. The Society.
Royal United Service Institution. Journal. Vol. XIV. No. 57. 8vo.
London 1870. ° The Institution.
Society of Antiquaries. Proceedings. Second series. Vol. IV. No. 7.
8vo. London 1869. The Society.

Zoological Society. Transactions. Vol. VII. Parts 1,2. 4to. London

- 1869-70. Proceedings of the Scientific Meetings for the year 1869.
Parts 2,3. 8vo. London. The Society.
Matiritius :—Royal Society of Arts and Sciences. Transactions. New
Series. Vol. III. Report of the Secretary during the year 1869.

8vo. Mauritius 1869. The Society.
Milan :—Societa Italiana di Scienze Naturali. Atti. Vol. XII. fase. 1, 2.
8vo. Milano 1869. The Society.

Moscow :—Société Impériale des Naturalistes. Bulletin. Année 1846,
No. 1; 1861, No.1 (Sheet 17); 1869, Nos. 1-3. 8yv0, Moscow
1846-69. The Society.

Munich :—Akademie der Wissenschaften. Sitzungsberichte. 1869, II.,
Hefte 3,4; 1870, 1., Heft 1. 8vo. Miimchen 1869-70.

The Academy.
Konigliche Sternwarte. Annalen. Band XVII. Supplement-band IX.
Verzeichniss, 1820-69. 8vo. Miinchen 1869. The Observatory.

New York:—American Museum of Natural History, First Annual
Report. 8vo. New York 1870. The Museum.

Paris :—Académie des Sciénces. Comptes Rendus des Séances, June to
December 1869, Jan. to ae 1870. Tome LXIX. Tables 1869.
Ato. Paris. The Academy.

Dépot de la Marine. Annales Hydrographiques, 1868, 4° trimestre ;
1869, 1-3 trimestres. 8vo. Paris 1868-69. Annuaire des Marées
des Cotes de France pour l’an 1870. 12mo. Paris 1869. Cata-
logue Chronologique des Cartes, &c. 8vo. Paris 1869. Catalogue
par Ordre Géographique. 8vo. Paris 1869.. Essai sur l’atterrage
et ’entrée de la Rade de Brest. 8vo. Paris 1868. Pilote des Cotes
Ouest de France. Pilote de Terre-Nueve. Tomes I., II. Pilote de
la Mer Noire. Pilote de la Manche. Routier des Cotes N. O., Ouest
et Sud @Espagne, Etude sur les Ouragans de l’Hémisphére Austral.

32 Presents. [June 16,

Transactions (continued). '
Instructions Nautiques sur la Nouvelle-Calédonie. Instructions
Nautiques pour la Cote sud-est de la Nouvelle-Ecosse. Instructions
pour la Navigation de la Céte Ouest d’Ecosse. Description des
Cotes du Royaume de Portugal. Les Cotes du Brésil LYV°. section.
Note sur les Sondes faites par de grandes profondeurs. 8vo. Paris
1869. One hundred and fifty-four Maps and Plans. The Depot.

Ecole Normale Supérieure. Annales Scientifiques. Tome VII. Nos.
1,2. 4to. Paris 1870. The School.
Société de Géographie. Bulletin. Janv., Fev. et Mars1870. 8vo. Paris.
The Society.
Société Géologique. Bulletin. 2°série. T, XX VI. Nos.3-6. 8vo. Paris
1869-70. The Society.
Societé Météorologique. Nouvelles Météorologiques, 1870, Nos. 1-5.
8v0. Paris. The Society.
Philadelphia :—Franklin Institute. Journal. Vol. LXXXIX. Nos. 3, 4.
8vo. Philadelphia 1870. The Institute.
Rome :—Observatorio del Collegio Romano. Bullettino Meteorologico.
Vol. VIII. Nos. 7-12; Vol. IX. Nos. 1-5. 4to. Roma 1869-70.
The Observatory.
St. Petersburg :—Compass Observatory. MOpcKoil COopHukS (Marine
Collections). 1869, Nos. 5-12; 1870, Nos. 1-5. 8vo.
The Observatory.
Siena:—R. Accademia de’ Fisiocritici. Revista Scientifica. Anno II.
fase. 1, 2. 8vo. Stena 1870. The Academy.
Toronto :—Canadian Institute. Canadian Journal. Vol. XII. Nos. 3-5.
8vo. Toronto 1869-70. ; The Institute.
Vienna :—Anthropologische Gesellschaft. Mittheilungen. Band I. Nos.
1-3. 8vo. Wien 1870. The Society.
Kaiserliche Akademie der Wissenschaften. Denkschriften. Math.-Nat.
Classe, Band X XIX. Phil.-Hist. Classe, Band XVI., XVIII. 4to.
Wien 1869. Sitzungsberichte. Math.-Nat. Classe. Erste Abth.
Band LIX. Hefte 3-5; Band LX. Hefte 1,2. Zweite Abth. Band
LIX. Hefte 4, 5, Bande LX. Hefte 1,2. Phil.-Hist. Classe, Band
LXI. Hefte 2, 3; Band LXII. Hefte 1-4. 8vo. Wien 1869. An-
zeiger, 1869, No. 23-25, 27, 28; 1870, Nos. 1-11. 8vo. Wien
1869-70. Almanach. Jahrgang 19. 8vo. Wien 1869. Die Tem-
peratur-Verhiltnisse der Jahre 1848-63, von C. Jelinek. 4to.
Wien 1869. Jahrbiicher der k.k. Central-Anstalt fiir Meteoro-
logie und Erdmagnetismus, von C. Jelinek und C. Fritsch. Neue
Folge. Band IV. Jahrgang 1867. 4to. Ween 1869.
The Academy.
Wiirzburg :—Physikalisch-Medicinische Gesellschaft. Verzeichniss der
Bibliothek. 8vo, Wurzburg 1869. | The Society.

ene,

1870. ] Presents. . Od
Journals.
Academy, a Monthly Record of Literature, Learning, Science, and Art.
Nos. 1-9. 4to. London 1869-70. The Editor.
American Journal of Science and Arts. Vol. XLIX. Nos. 145-147. 8vo.
New Haven 1870. The Editors.

_ Archivio per la Zoologia, ’ Anatomia e la Fisiologia; pubblicato per cura

dei Proff. Sebastiano Richiardi e G. Canestrini. Serie II. Vol. II.

fasc. 1. 8vo. Bologna 1870. The Editors.
Atheneum. June to December 1869; January to May 1870. 4to.
London. The Editor.
Australian Medical Journal. Nos. 96-99, 101-107. 8vo. Melbourne
1869-70. The Editor.

Builder. June to December 1869; January to June 1870. folio. London.
The Editor.

Bulletin de Statistique Municipale. Ville de Paris. Jan., Feb., June,

December 1869. 4to. Paris. The Baron Hausmann.
Chemical News. June to December 1869; Jan. to June 1870. 4to.
London. The Editor.
Chinese Recorder and Missionary Journal. Vol. II. No. 10. 8vo.
Foochow 1870. The Editor.

Cosmos. June to December 1869; January to June 1870. 8vo. Paris.
The Editor.

Educational Times. July to December 1869; J an. to June 1870. 4to.

London. The Editor.
Les Mondes. June to December 1869; January to June 1870. 8vo.
Paris. The Editor.

Medical Press and Circular. New Series. Vol. VII. Nos. 25,26; Vol.
VIII. Nos. 1-10, 12-18, 20-23, 25, 26; Vol. IX. No. 1.
Nature, a Weekly Illustrated Journal of Science. Nos. 1-33. roy. 8vo.

London 1870. The Editor.
Notes and Queries. June to December 1869; Jan. to June 1870. Ato.
London. : The Editor.

Philosophical Magazine. July to December 1869; Jan. to June 1870.
W. Francis, Esq.

Popular Science Review, edited ay Henry Lawson, M.D. Nos. 32-35.

8vo. London 1869-70. The Editor.
Quarterly Journal cf Science. Nos. 23-26, 8vo. London 1869-70.
The Editors.
Revue des Cours Littéraires dela France et de l’Etranger. June to De-
cember 1869; Jan. to June 1870. 4to. Paris. Tr.e Editors.
Revue des Cours Scientifiques de la France et de ’tranger. June to
December 1869 ; Jan. to June 1870. 4to. Puris. The Editors.
Scientific Opinion. Jan. to June 1870. 4to. London. The Editor.
Scientific Review. Jan. to June 1870. fol. London. The Editor.
Spiritualist. Vol. I. Nos. 5-10. fol. London 1870. The Editor.

VOL, XIX. D

34: Presents. [June 16,
Symons’ s Monthly Meteorological Mega. Nos. 52, 53. 8vo. London

Leone The Editor.
Zeitschrift fiir Chemie. 13 Jahrg. Hefte 8-10. 8vo. Leipzig 1870.
The Editors.

Blosfeld (G.) Organostathmologie oder Lehre von den Gewichtsverhilt-
nissen des Menschlichen Korpers. 8vo. Erlangen 1864. ‘The Author.
Cesare (Paladini) Tentativo intorno ad una Geometria a piu di tre di-
mensioni ossia a dimensioni veramente imaginarie. 8yo. Sondrio

1869. - ‘The Author.
Delesse( ) Lithologie der Meere der alten Welt. S8vo. 1870. Revue
de Géologie. 8vo. Paris 1870. The Author.

Dove (H. W.) Ueber das barometrische Maximum im Januar 1869. 8vo. —
_- Berlin 1869, 3 The Author.
Gagliardi (Ferdinando) Saggio storico-critico sulla Dottrina di Malthus.
Svo. Mrenze 1870. The Author.

Hayden (F. V.) Geological Report of the Exploration of the Yellowstone
and Missouri Rivers, 1859-60. 8vo. Washington 1869. Preliminary
Field Report of the United States’ Geological Survey of Colorado and
New Mexico. 8yo. Washington 1869. The Author.

Henwood (W. J., F.R.S.) Address delivered at the Spring Meeting of the
Royal Institution of Cornwall on the 17th of May, 1870. 8vo. Pen-

zance 1870. The Author.
Lazeu(H. de) la Légitimité en Espagne. 8yo. Berne 1870. (3 eopies.)
The Author.

Parsons (T.) The “ Washerwoman” of Melbourne. 8vo. Melbourne 1870.
The Author.

Plantamour (H.) et Hirsch (A.) Note sur la détermination du coefficient
de Dilatation d’un Barreau d’Argent. 8yvo. Grenéve 1870.

The Authors.

Samuel (Brothers) Wool and Woollen Manufactures of Great Britain.
8vo. London 1859. The Authors.
Tyndall (J., F.R.S.) Researches on Diamagnetism and Magnecrystallic
Action. 8vo. London 1870. ‘The Author.

- Waterhouse (J.) Report on the Cartographic Applications of Photography
as used in the Topographical Departments of the Principal States in
Central Europe. 8vo. Calcutta. 1870. The Author.

Zantedeschi (Fr.) Pioggia e Neve frammiste a varie sostanze, cadute
nella notte dal 13 al 14 di febbrajo 1870 nella Liguria nel Piemonte
ed in altre contrade d’Italia, coll’ analisi qualitativa e quantitativa.
Svo. Venezia 1870. The Author.

1870.] Mr. F. Guthrie on Approach caused by Vibration. 35

Weekly Returns of Births and Deaths in each of the Districts of the City
of Dublin. Vol. VI. Nos. 23-48, 50-52; Vol. VII. Nos. 1-12, 14,
15, 17, 19-22. 8vo. Dublin 1869-70. Quarterly Return of the Mar-
riages, Births, and Deaths registered in the Divisions and Districts

of Ireland, Nos. 21, 22, 24. 8vo0. Dublin 1869.
The Registrar General for Ireland.

The Society adjourned over the Long Vacation to Thursday, Novem-
er 7.

“On Appreach caused by Vibration”? By FReprrick GuTHRIE,
B.A. Communicated by Prof. G. G. Sroxes, Sec. B.S. Re-
ceived August 26, 1869*.

§ 1. The chain of experiments which I have to describe arose from the
endeavour to explain an observation that a delicately suspended piece of
cardboard moves, from a considerable distance, towards a vibrating tuning-
fork. It will be preferable to detail the experiments, not in the order in
which they occurred to me and were actually performed, but in the order
in which I conceive them to form a logical sequence.

§ 2. The experiment of Clement shows that when a continuously renewed
current of air passes between two parallel disks from the common axis to-
wards the circumference, the disks are urged together. Consequently, in
seeking to explain the fact observed in § 1, it was necessary to examine the
air surrounding the resonant fork in order to ascertain whether air-currents
existed in its neighbourhood ; and further, to distinguish between such
currents as might be found to move in closed curves forming whirlwinds in
the immediate neighbourhood of the fork, and such as might radiate in un-
closed paths from the fork through the air.

§3. In 1831 Mr. Faraday +, in tracing the cause of the accumulation of
light particles on the internodal points and lines of vibrating bodies, came
to the conclusion that such accumulation was due to minute whirlwinds, and
not, as had been held by M. Savart +}, to the existence of secondary nodes.
A general conclusion at which Mr. Faraday arrived was this: whenever the
different parts of a surface are vibrated to different degrees, there is always
a tendency for the air to flow along the surface of the vibrating body to-
wards the more violently agitated portions from the less agitated.

§ 4. It is clear that, before examining the possible connexion between
these superficial whirlwinds and. the fact mentioned in § 1, it is necessary
to examine into the existence of air-currents of unclosed paths.

* Read Dec. 17, 1868. See abstract, vol. xvii. p. 106.
t Phil, Trans. 1831, p. 299.
{ Ann. de Chim, et de Phys. t, xxxvi. pp. 187, 257.
: p 2

36 Mr, F. Guthrie on Approach caused by Vibration.

The tuning-fork which was most employed, and Fig. 1.
which I call fork A, gave 128 complete vibrations per y
second, and had the following dimensions :— x x

meétre.
0 y=0°0230,
o x=0°0172,

0 2=20°3255. ; Lath
I call the three faces intersecting in 0, the faces a, 6, ah

and ¢ respectively. Let the symbol H,, &¢. denote
the position of the fork when the face c is horizontal,
&e.

§5. Experiment 1.—The fork A was set vibrating by drawing the bow
across the edge oy; the plane of vibration was accordingly parallel to 6.
The fork was then brought into the neighbourhood of an ascending thread
of smoke. The fork and smoke had in succession the three relative post-
tions :—

(1) H,. The smoke passed across the face a parallel to oy.

(2) H,: The smoke passed across the face 6 parallel to oz.

(3) H,. The smoke passed across the face c parallel to oz.

In ali cases the smoke clung to the surface across which it passed as
though the fork were at rest.

§ 6. Lxperiment 2.— A cylindrical
glass tube T, 0:4 m. long and 0-042 m.
in internal diameter, was fastened (fig. 2) —==U1______]
in a horizontal position. One end was left
open, the other carried a cork, through
the centre of which passed a horizontal |
tube ¢, 0°04 m. long and 0-:0035 m. in-
ternal diameter. These tubes were filled
with smoke, and the fork A, which had
been set vibrating as in §5, was brought —==J_______}] ] 4
to the open end of the wide tube. he
fork and tube had in succession the
four relative positions shown in fig. 2,
namely :—

(1) H,. Axis of tube perpendicular
to a.

(2) H,. Axis of tube perpendicular OO ar eee “
to 0.

(3) H, or H,. Axis of tube perpendicular to ec.

(4) The same as (3), but having one prong of the fork thrust as far
as possible into the tube T. In none of the cases did the smoke show any
tendency to escape through the tube ¢, nor was fresh air drawn in.

§ 7. Experiment 3.—The cork and tube ¢ of experiment 2 were with-

Mr, F. Guthrie on Approach caused by Vibration. 37

drawn and replaced by a film-bubble of glycerine-soap-water. The com-
binations of position of experiment 2 were repeated. In none of the cases
did the bubble show any variation from the vertical plane.

§8. Hence I conclude that when a tuning-fork is in a state of plane
vibration, 10 permanent true air-currents are formed; that is, no air-
currents could be detected departing from any side of the fork and pe-
netrating the surrounding air in unclosed paths.

§ 9. The superficial whirlwinds examined by Mr. Faraday may be sup-
posed to be greatly modified when they are excited in the immediate
neighbourhood of a solid body; and as the “attraction”? which formed
the starting-point of the present examination (§ 1) is exerted upon a solid
body in the neighbourhood of the resonant fork, some experiments, sup-
plementary to those of Mr. Faraday, were found necessary.

§ 10. Numerous experiments, which need not be here detailed, showed
(1) that Mr. Faraday’s surface-currents, as exhibited on a freely vibrating
fork, are very much modified when the fork vibrates in the immediate
neighbourhood of a rigid plane, and (2) that the effects of any currents
produced by vibration do not extend sensibly beyond 0:006 m. from the
fork’s face, and only even to this extent near the a face.

§ 11. We shall see that the existence of such air-circuits, confined as
they are to the immediate vicinity of the fork, are quite insufficient to ac-
count for the class of phenomena which have to be described, and which
are similar to the fundamental fact mentioned in § 1.

§ 12. Experiment 4.—To one end of a
splinter of wood, 0°5 m. long, a card
0:08 m. square was fastened in such a way
that the plane of the card was vertical,
and contained the line of the splinter.

The whole was hung from a fibre of un- leak
spun silk (fig. 3) and counterpoised. The Ca Shae ered
tuning-fork A was set in vibration as be-

fore, and was brought towards thecard in the three relative positions cer-
responding to those of § 6, namely :—

(1) (H1,). The face a parallel to the card.

(2) (H,). The face 6 parallel to the card.

(3) (H, or H,). The face ¢ parallel to the card.

In all three cases the card moved towards the fork. The rate at which
the card moved was greatest when the fork was sounding loudest. In all
three cases it was possible to draw the card from a distance of 0:05 m. at
least,—a distance quite beyond the direct influence of the superficial
whirls which exist in position (1) (on face a).

§ 13. There is perhaps nothing essentially contrary to reason in the con-
ception of two bodies in space free to move, so related to one another that
while the first has no tendency to move towards the second, the second
has a tendency to move towards the first, But if the tendency of the one

Fig. 3.

a — a a aa a aaa ea aa ace

38 Mr. F. Guthrie on Approach caused by Vibration.

to move be caused by the condition of the medium between the two, it
seems inevitable that the tendency shall be mutual. Thus, if that tendency
result from a general diminution in the tension of an elastic medium be-
tween the two, they will be urged towards one another. To test the reci-
procity of the motive tendency in the case under consideration the follow-
ing experiment was tried.

§ 14. Experiment 5.—The tuning-fork A was fastened to the end of a
rod 1:0 m. long; the other end of the red was counterpoised, and the
whole was hung from a silk tape. If the vertical plane passing through
the rod be called V, then the rod and fork received in succession the rela-
tive positions,—

(1) (H,). V parallel to a.

(2) (H,). V parallel to 6.

(3) (H, or H,). V parallel to e.

In (1) and (2) the fork was simply hung from the suspended rod; in
(3) it was fastened to an iron rod in the direction of its axis, and the two
were then attached to the suspended rod at their common centre of gravity.
The fork was sounded by the bow as before, and a piece of card 0°05 m.
square was brought near the face a (in 1), 6 (in 2), ande (in 3). Im all
eases the suspended fork approached the card; but, owing to the great
inertia of the suspended fork and counterpoise, the motion was much
slower and less striking than was the case when the card was hung.

§ 15. Experiment 6.—Further, instead of a card, a second fork, B
(sounding A), was set in vibration, and brought into the neighbourhood of
the vibrating suspended fork A. The three faces a’, 6’, c' of the fork B
were held in succession parallel to the three faces a, 6, c of the fork A,
that is parallel to V when the faces a, 6, ¢ were in each of the three posi-
tions described in $14. There were thus nine combinations effected. In
every case the suspended fork approached the stationary one. Hence, to
whatever cause the approach is due, the action is mutual.

§ 16. The next question, the solution of which promised to throw light
upon our problem, was this: What is the general or mean condition as to
tension of a medium in which undulations are generated? Though this
question has received very great attention from theoretical physicists, it
has not been approached, as far as J am aware, from the side of experiment
in the manner to be described.

§ 17. Experiment 7.—The fork A was fixed in an upright position in
its sounding-box (fig. 4). One of its prongs was enclosed in a glass tube
T, 0°4 m. long, and 0'042 m. internal diameter, carrying a cork through
which the prong passed. ‘The upper end of T also carried a cork, through
which passed a narrow tube ¢, bent twice at right angles, and dipping into

‘ water. The internal diameter of ¢ was 0'0035 m. The corks of the tube

T were made tight with wax, and a little air was expelled from the tube T
by warming it with the hand, so that when the atmospheric temperature
was regained, the water stood at some distance up the tube ¢. The tube é

Mr. F. Guthrie on Approach caused by Vibration. a9

was firmly clamped in several places to prevent vibration, and consequent

Fig. 4

centrifugal effect. On passing the bow
across 7, the enclosed prong was also set
in vibration. When the amplitude of the
vibration was as great as possible, the
water had sunk in the tube ¢ to the amount
of 0:003 m. The moment both prongs
were suddenly stopped the level of the
_ water in ¢ was restored.. The depression
of the water in ¢ cannot be due to in-
creased temperature; for, if it were so,
the increase of volume would be gradual
and accumulative, and, on stopping the
vibration, the contraction due to cooling
would be also gradual; whereas the at-
tainment of maximum depression and the
restoration to normal volume are prac- |__

tically instantaneous.

§ 18. We have here accordingly an experimental proot that the rapid
motion (in this instance vibration) of a body in a medium produces on the
whole an effect similar to that which would be produced by the expansion
of the body, namely, a displacement of the medium. If air were perfectly
elastic and had no inertia, no such total displacement could ensue, and I
think I may safely predict that the apparent expansion of the medium
will be found, in the case of hydrogen less, and in the case of carbonic acid
greater than in that of air*.

§ 19. Though we know the dimensions of the fork and its rate of vibra-
tion, and though we can measure with tolerable accuracy the amplitude of
its vibrations, we can only calculate from this the mean velocity of any
given point, because in the middle of a vibration the fork is moving very
much faster than towards the commencement or termination. Hence this
vibratory displacement cannot, with our present data, be connected with the
known rate at which air enters a vacuum.

§20. The fundamental experiment of §$1, 12 next suggested for its
explanation the following question. Let there be two equal and opposite
forces, P and Q, producing equilibrium upon a body having inertia; let one
of them, P, be increased and diminished by a series of equal increments
and decrements following one another in rapid succession. Will the con-
tinually varying force, whose mean is P, maintain average equilibrium with
the unaltered force Q? The plane of the cardboard in § 1 and § 12 is the
seat of two opposing forces, namely the pressure of the atmosphere on
both sides. When the sounding-fork is held on one side, the pressure on
that side undergoes successive equal increments and decrements. Accord-
ingly, if the question just proposed be answered in the negative, a suffi-

* Compare the sighing of an organ pipe after it has been sounded.

40 Mr. F. Guthrie on Approach caused by Vibration.

cient ground would be at hand for the approach of the cardboard to the
fork.

§ 21. Experiment 8.—A “ Cartesian diver’? was made out of a test-
tube, a bubble of air, and a beaker-glass of water. This was so nicely
adjusted that it rose when near the surface of the water, and sank when
the top of the tube was 0°05 m. below the surface. When resting on the
bottom of the beaker, the top of the test-tube was 0°067 m. below the
surface of the water. When the diver was resting on the bottom of the
beaker, the tuning-fork A, in a state of vibration, was presented to the
glass in various directions with regard to the tube. The fork was placed
sometimes in contact with the water, sometimes in the neighbouring air,
and sometimes in contact (towards the base of the fork) with the glass.
Although the vibration of the bottom of the beaker caused the diver to
leap up it invariably sank again, and showed no sign of undergoing any
alteration in specific gravity. If, now, the question in § 20 were answerable
in the negative, the equilibrium would have been destroyed, because the
atmosperic pressure on the one hand, and the elasticity of the confined air
on the other being equal and opposite forces, an alteration in one caused
by its subjection to successive sonorous waves, would have altered the
volume of the confined air and so destroyed the equilibrium.

§ 22. I hoped to throw light upon the fundamental experiment of § 1
and § 12, by varying the nature of the surface of the body which received
the vibrations, with the view on the one hand of preserving them, and, on
the other, of dispersing them as much as possible. With this view expe-
riments 9-12 were undertaken.

§ 23. Eaperiment 9, fig. 5.—Upon one end of a splinter Figs. 5.
of wood 0°5 m. long, a cylinder of cardboard 0:03 m. in
diameter and 0:04 m. deep, closed at the bottom, was
fastened in such a manner that its axis was horizontal,
and its bottom in the plane V. The cylinder was coun-
terpoised, and the whole was hung from an unspun silk
thread. The vibrating-fork A was brought near the open
end of the cylinder in the three positions already de-
scribed, and also with one prong inserted into and nearly
touching the bottom of the cylinder. In all cases motion
towards the fork ensued.

§ 24. Haperiment 10.—A handful of cotton-wool was
hung upon the splinter in place of the cylinder of experi-
ment 12. The cotton-wool moved towards the fork from a
distance of at least 0°05 m., when the latter was presented
to it in either of the three positions, § 8.

Muslin and washleather behaved in a similar manner.

§ 25. Experiment 11.—A circular paper drum 0°25 m. in diameter
having a rim 0°025 m. deep, was hung by a silk tape in the same manner
as the cylinder of § 23. Parchment was stretched across the wide end of

Mr. F. Guthrie on Approach caused by Vibration. Al

a funnel 0:2 m. in diameter. The neck of the funnel was placed in the
mouth, and the drum of the funnel was brought opposite and parallel to
the edged face of the paper drum. Air was rapidly forced into and drawn
out of the funnel. The paper drum moved towards the funnel even from
a distance of 0:1 m.

§ 26. Experiment 12.—A sheet of cardboard 0:4 m. square was hung
in the plane V from a rod 1:0 m. long. The cardboard was counterpoised,
and hung from a silk tape. The paper drum of § 25 was placed 0°05 in.
from the cardboard, and parallel to it, and was then thipped. The card-
board moved towards the drum.

§ 27. Experiment 13.—A rod of brass 1:2 m. long, provided at the ends
with disks of brass perpendicular to the rod 0°26 m. in diameter, was set
in longitudinal vibration by means of resined leather. One of the disks
was held, during the vibration, near to the cardboard of § 26, also near the
cotton-wool and muslin of § 24. In all cases the suspended body moved
towards the disk. By this means it was easy to cause motion when the
two were at the distance of,0°2 m.

§ 28. I have in the foregoing paragraphs sought to eliminate systema-
tically secondary and disturbing influences from the fundamental experi-
ment. The experimental results appear to me to poiut to the following
conclusions.

Whenever an elastic medium is between two vibrating bodies, or between
a vibrating body and one at rest, and when the vibrations are dispersed in
consequence of their impact on one or both of the bodies, the bodies will
be urged together.

The dispersion of a vibration produces a similar effect to that produced
by the dispersion of the air-current in Clement’s experiment, and, like the
latter, the effect is due to the pressure exerted by the medium, which is in
a state of higher mean tension on the side of the body furthest from the
origin of vibration than on the side towards it.

In mechanics,—in nature there is no such thing as a pulling force—
though the term attraction may have been used in the above to denote the
tendency of bodies to approach, the line of conclusions here indicated
tends to argue that there is no such thing as attraction in the sense of a
pulling force, and that two utterly isolated bodies cannot influence one
another.

If the zetherial vibrations which are supposed to constitute radiant heat
resemble the aerial vibrations which constitute radiant sound, the heat
which all bodies possess, and which they are all supposed to radiate in ex-
change, will cause all bodies to be urged towards one another.

42 Mr. Ll. Todbunter on Jacobi’s Theorem.

On Jacobi’s Theorem respecting the relative equilibrium of a
Revolving Ellipsoid of Fluid, and on Ivory’s discussion of —
the Theorem.” By I. Topuuntsr, M.A., F.R.S., late Fellow
of St. John’s College, Cambridge. Received November 28,
1869*.

1. The late James Ivory contributed to the Philosophical Transac-
tions various memoirs on the subject of the equilibrium of fluids and the
figure of the earth: the memoirs will be found in the volumes for 1824,
1831, 1834, and 1839. Ivory objected to the received theory of the equi-
librium of fluids, and advocated some peculiar opinions at great length,
and with much repetition. I do not propose now to criticise these memoirs ;
I will merely state that I consider them to be altogether unsatisfactory.

2. There is, however, one theorem in the general subject to which I
now propose to draw attention, namely, Jacobi’s theorem respecting the
possibility of the relative equilibrium of an ellipsoid of fluid having three
unequal axes and revolving about the least. Ivory discussed this theorem,
and his errors are so numerous and so singular, that I have thought it
would be desirable to place the corrections before the Society which origi-
nally received and published Ivory’s communications. In correcting Ivory’s
errors and supplying his defects, I shall add something to the discussions
which have hitherto been given of the theorem itself. It will be seen
as we proceed that one of Ivory’s errors has been already noticed and
corrected.

3. Ivory first alluded to the matter in the memoir of 1834, which was read
to the Royal Society a few months before Jacobi announced his discovery
of the theorem. Of course at that date Ivory held the common opinion,
that the relative equilibrium of a revolving ellipsoid with three unequal
axes was impossible. But he does not merely acquiesce in the erroneous
opinion, he attempts to demonstrate it in the following manner :—

‘Further, the figure of the fluid in equilibrium can be no other than
a spheroid of revolution. Draw a plane through the axis of rotation and
any point (wyz) in the surface of the fluid. This plane will contain that
part of the attraction of the spheroid which is parallel to the axis of rota-
tion, or to the coordinate x: it will also contain the centrifugal force
directed at right angles from the axis of rotation. The same plane will also
contain the resultant of the attractions parallel to y and z; for if it did
not, the resultant might be resolved into two forces, one contained in the
plane, and the other perpendicular to it; and the force perpendicular to
the plane would partly act in a direction touching the surface of the
spheroid, which is inconsistent with the equilibrium of the fluid. Where-
fore, the whole attractive force at any point in the surface of the spheroid
is contained in a plane passing through the point and the axis of rotation ;

* Read Jan. 20, 1870. See vol. xviii. p. 171.

Mr. I. Todhunter on Jacobi’s Theorem. 43

which obviously excludes ellipsoids with three unequal axes, and limits the
figures of equilibrium to spheroids formed by the revolution of an ellipsis
about the axis of rotation;...”

The error here begins with the sentence which I have put in italics; the |
resultant of the attractions parallel to y and z need not act in the plane
which Ivory specifies : the component which he obtains ina plane touching
the surface may be balanced by a like component arising from the attrac-
tion parallel to x and the the so-called centrifugal force.

4, To the Philosophical Transactions for 1838 Ivory contributed a
memoir of ten pages on Jacobi’s theorem. Ivory devotes a few sentences
to the history of the matter. He records the fact that Lagrange had
inferred that the figure of relative equilibrium must be a figure of revolu-
tion. He makes no allusion, however, to his own erroneous demonstration
in the volume for 1834.

5. The object of the memoir seems to be twofold—to establish Jacobi’s
theorem, and to deduce numerical results relating to the extreme possible
cases analogous to those which had long been known relating to the extreme
possible cases for an ellipsoid of revolution.. The first object is attained ;
Jacobi’s theorem is demonstrated in a manner resembling that which had
previously been used by Liouville. The second object Ivory fails to attain,
owing to an error in his process.

6. Inthe second page of the memoir there is an error in mechanics re-
sembling that which we have already noticed in Art. 3. At any point in
the surface of an ellipsoid, let the normal to the surface be drawn; and
let it be terminated by the principal plane which is perpendicular to the
axis of rotation: let p be the length of this straight line. At the same
point in the surface draw a straight line in the Breeton of the resultant
of the attraction of the whole mass of the ellipsoid, and let it be terminated
by the same principal plane ; let p! be the length of this straight line, then
Ivory says :—

“‘ Let o denote the third side of the triangle which has p and p! for its
other sides: then o will represent the only force which, together with the
attractive force p’, will produce a resultant in the direction of p at right
angles to the surface of the ellipsoid.”

This statement is quite wrong. Any straight line which is in the same
plane as the normal at any point, and the direction of the resultant attrac-
tion at that point, may be taken for the direction of such an additional force
as Ivory requires; and the magnitude of the force can then be properly
determined. i

7. In order to render the discussion of Ivory’s memoir readily intel-

® ligible, it will be necessary to indicate briefly the demonstration of Jacobi’s
theorem.

Let the equation to an ellipsoid be

y — /;
yes ear son

AA, Mr. I. Todhunter on Jacobi’s Teekicas

The attractions which the ellipsoid exerts on a point (#, y, z) parallel to
the axes of coordinates are known to be respectively Av, By, Cz, where

AaoM(Medu piSM(t wdu G@_3M(?__ wdu
Jo HB Jo (LEN WV Yo 1+ pt)
Here M denotes the mass of the ellipsoid, and H stands for

V(1+d2u?) (1 + p2u?) :
see the ‘ Mécanique Céleste,’ Livre III. No. 7.

Take the axis of w for that of revolution, and let w be the angular
velocity. Then the necessary and sufficient condition for relative equi-
librium is that the equation

Awdz+(B—w*)ydy +(C—w’*)zdz=0

should coincide with the differential equation to the surface of the ellipsoid,
namely,
ydy +5 zdz
l + ne + pe i
Hence we have the conditions
Boo Cok 1 (1)
A l Az rh? A l oe e ° ° e ° °
If we eliminate w? between these we obtain

(1+2’) (l+p°) (B—C)=A(w*—d’). 2 ww (2)
But from the values of B and C we have

3M 7st he. Eds
B—C=— (p—d ae,
ge Ce (, TE
Thus (2) becomes

wey {ee Ce) (SB () pes

This may be satisfied by putting »”=)’, which gives us an ellipsoid of re-
volution. Or it may be satisfied by making

2 a ( tutdu (udu |
ext) | (ae,

this may be reduced to

1 y?(1—u’) (1—D?p?u?)du _
{iQaog ee =),

We have then to show that for suitable values of \ and p this relation will
hold. This will be shown in the sequel. We must also show that the
value of w? is positive. From (1) we have )

B—w eae
Cac Ae

rdx+

Mr. I. Todhunter on Jacobi’s Theorem. A5

so that
pa Bee BN’ — a
v—p? De —pe
Put in the values of B and C, and this reduces to
2 _ 3M (' aU —w*)du
Tae

so that w” is positive.

8. Before considering Jacobi’s theorem, we will advert to the case in
which p’=)’.

We have from (1)

Hi A rd a 5
LX
let p be the density of the ellipsoid, then
M= Ampk*(1 2a
3
=
Put g for 4zp ; thus
“

_opl 1 ve’ (1—2’)da
ad ee (4)
Here we have changed u into w, and d into J, in order to have the same
notation as Ivory has. Ivory says:

* From the equation (4) we learn that q will be known when J is given,
or that every spheroid of a determinate form requires an appropriate
velocity of rotation.

“‘The inspection of the same equation is sufficient to show that q is
positive for all values of 7°; and as it vanishes both when 7’ is zero and
infinitely great, it must pass at least once from increasing to decreasing,
or it will admit of at least one maximum value. By differentiating with
regard to / we obtain

dq =|" 30°(1—a") (1—Pa")dx (5)
dt, (+P) iia bikie

from which formula we learn that = is positive between the limits 7’=0

and J*=1; that it will consist of a positive and a negative part when 7° is
greater than 1; and the positive part decreasing while the negative part
increases, that it will ultimately be negative when 7° is infinitely great.
It follows therefore that = can be only once equal to zero, and conse-
quently that g can have only one maximum value, while 7’ increases from
Piao.”

This is quite unsound, because the words which I have put in italics are
untrue, There are two ways of separating the integral into a positive part
and a negative part. We may take for the positive part the integral

46° Mr. I. Todhunter on Jacobi’s Theorem.

between the limits 0 and ~ and for the negative part the integral between

the limits : and 1. Or we may put the integral in the form

Lae*(l—a’)da a»( x*(1—x’)da 2
= 1 cera PE ees Takin Un Moca a ae a
o (are) 0 (14+0a")?

I do not know which of these two ways Ivory adopted. It is true that in
each of them the positive part decreases as / increases ; but in each of them
the negative part is finite when J is finite, and is infinitesimal when 7 is in-
finite, and so does not always increase with Z as Ivory supposes.

9. However, although Ivory’s reasoning is unsound, the result which he
wishes to establish is correct, as I shall now show.

La’(1—a’) (1—Pa*) da

Consider the integral { a at eee
as J increases from unity to infinity, the integral vanishes and changes sign
once, and only once.

It is obvious that the integral must vanish once, because it is positive
when /=1, and negative when/=« : it is indeed infinitesimal in the latter
case, but the sign is certainly negative.

Put z for dv; thus the integral becomes

4, 2(P—2) (l—2 dz _ w ay,

PN +2) is
We have to show that the equation w=0 can have only one root between
J=1and/=x. If the equation could have more than one root it must

We have to show that

have three roots at least; and then the equation a= must have two

roots atleast. Now

du L2(1—2\dz
— =21 Ss pee p) ’
Hl \, a2) 2lv, say

dv_?U—?P)
di (1+7)*"

Thus v is positive when 7=1, and while J increases = is always negative ;

and

thus v continually diminishes algebraically, and so cannot change sign more
d ; ae ‘
than once. Hence “7 cannot vanish more than once; it will vanish once

because v is positive when /=1, and has a finite negative value when /=c ,
namely,

T
{° sin *@(1—2 sin°@)d0, that ‘ee
0

10. There is also another way in which the result may be established.
For from (4), by the known method of integration, we have

Mr. I. Todhunter on Jacobi’s Theorem. 47

gett! tan-1 raed

oP?
therefore
_dq_ 309942 1, 809+ 70)
dl oF 21+ Fe
Thus - vanishes when
3
iy eae eater oe

(Gat)
Ivory gives these formule with some misprints.

Now it has been shown by Laplace that the equation (6) has one positive
root, and only one, namely, when /=2'529.... See the ‘ MécaniqueCeéleste,’
Livre III. No. 20.

11. We now return to Jacobi’s theorem. We take the integral in (3),
and put x for «'; we put A—=r, and we may suppose ) greater than p, so
that r is positive; and we put\y=p. Thus (3) becomes

| eee i)
0 (Lt pey frat}

Denote the left-hand member of (7) by V; then we propose to examine
the range of values of p and 7 which make V vanish, supposing both p
‘and 7 positive. If we regard p as an abscissa, and r as an ordinate corre-
sponding to p, we in effect propose to trace in the first quadrant the curve
determined by the equation V=0.

(12. If we put 7=0, the equation (7) becomes
i vas Me tae ON)
\ oC aA! ae ee e e e e ° (8)
0

(1 -bpay:

Ivory says: ‘‘It is obvious that there is only one value of p that will
verify the equation just found; for the integral can pass only once from
being positive to be negative while p increases from 1 to be infinitely
great.” |

I cannot admit that this assertion is obvious; the result, however, may
be established by the following investigation :—

Denote the integral by u; as long as p is less than unity, u is positive,
and when p is infinite wis negative. Thus «w must vanish once as p changes
from unity to infinity : we have to show that w can vanish only once.

If the equation «=0 could have more than one root, it must have three

ood
roots at least; and then the equation — =0( must have two roots at least :
this we shall show to be impossible. |

We have
du_ ft a*(1—2") (84 2p—p’a")da |
dp 0 (1+ pa") {

AS Mr. I. Todhunter on Jacobi’s Theorem.

; 2 m
it is obvious then that z cannot vanish until 3 i op is greater than unity,

ire du . :
that is, until pis greater than 3. Thus ip is negative when p=3; and we

can see that ii is positive when p=oc. Hence zs changes sign once as p

increases from 3 to infinity.
Put px’= tan’d, and let p= tan’B; thus

: B att
Chime { sin’ (p cos’ — sin?) | 1—(3+ ) cos*s } do =, say.
2 De

dp p3\o cos’0
Then we know that v is negative when p=3, and positive when p=x.

If, then, the equation v=0 could have more than one root, it must have three

roots at least, and then the equation 2p must have two roots at least.

dp
Now
a9)
dv _ { : sinto( ee ee "0,
dp 0 P
Can De ene (p—3) vp
SSS Sy) be ee
: dp a TO Ep)
Thus = is always positive when p is greater than 3, and therefore ©
P

continually increases, and so cannot vanish more than once.

Hence v cannot vanish more than once, and therefore ~ cannot vanish
more than once. Thus wu is always negative when p has any value greater
than that which makes w vanish.

13. There is also another way in which the result may be established.
It will be found that

eee (l—p*e')dx_3+13p_3+14p+3p* ..-1 ,-
2)\3 oi in TC eGae Vp.
0 (1+ pz") Sp Sp2
Then it may be shown that the last expression will vanish once, and only
once, as p changes from 1 too. This method is adopted by Liouville
in an article in his ‘Journal de Mathématiques’ for April 1839: the
article consists of observations on the memoir by Ivory, which we are
discussing.

Liouville says that the value of », which makes the last expression
vanish, is a little less than 2. Ivory has a formula which is equivalent to
this, but he does not employ it to show that there is only one value of p;
for he had already, as we have seen, stated this to be obvious. From the
circumstance that Liouville gives a strict demonstration, it is plain that he
agrees with me in thinking that Ivory’s statement is not obvious.

According to Ivory, the value of p which satisfies (8) is 1:9414....
We will denote this by p,.

14. I shall now show that if we ascribe to p any value greater than p,,
a corresponding value of r exists, which will make V vanish.

Mr. I. Todhunter on Jacobi’s Theorem, 49

Let such a value be ascribed to p; then from Art. 12 it follows that, with
this value of p and with +r=0, the value of V will be negative: we shall
now show that by taking 7 large enough V will be positive,

ve 1 (1 —2*) (1l—p*e*)dx .
Jo {1+ (2p-+r)a* + pat}
thus the sign of V is the same as that of
1g?(1—x’*) (l—p’2”)dax
i! (c+ a+ prern')2

where c° stands for : i
2p-+7

When cis made small enough, the term p’c** may be neglected in com-
parison with z*; and so the sign of the integral wiil become the same as

that of
Lat —a*\de _(' pai(1—2’)de

0 (ce? +x") {, (c+ 2°)3
The first term is infinite when c=0, and the second term is finite; thus
the sign of the integral is positive when c is small enough. Since V is
negative when 7=0, and is positive when 7 is large enough, it must vanish
for some intermediate value of r.

15. Moreover, when c is very small, we have approximately

1 y*(1—x’)da Vases 2
{, w(—#')de _ log aan log

(c’+w’)2 © c cee.
1 pat] —x da _ Pp
0 (e?+.2°)2 4
Thus to make V vanish when - is very large, we have approximately
2
Agia
celle
therefore
2(2p+r) et 2;
so that approximately
p83
rodet 2,

16. We shall next show that corresponding to a given value of p there
is only one value of r which will make V vanish.

Put ;
A’ss(l4+ pe’) +7e’,
P?=(1+p)’-+7r’;

C1 — i”) (1 —pu)= A? m= P?2",

. 1 y'dax ol tatda
tieare ty 1”
ft) Qo 4

VOL. XIX. E

then

Thus we have

50. Mr. I. Todhunter on Jacobi’s Theorem.

and therefore

Hence

= dV 1 y?*dax Pn?\* ,
Vrs 2 oT (' <0 a) ar) a e ® e e (9)

The right-hand member is necessarily positive. If we put o=r’, we may
write the equation thus,

oe ‘L a 0-3 -) ae.

This shows that if p be kept constant, VP* continually increases with 6;
and therefore cannot vanish more than once, and therefore of course V
cannot vanish more than once.

17. Ivory makes the following statement :—

“‘ Let V stand for the integral in the equation (7); and supposing that
p and 7° vary so as always to satisfy that equation, we shall have

= ~ap+Trdr=0.

Now, 7 representing Re positive quantity, we may conceive it to
increase from.zero.to be infinitely great ; in which case it follows from

the nature of the function V, that during the whole increase TO ede
eit ; TAT

will be negative Delete the other term a will be positive; which
requires that p decrease continually.”

It is here in fact asserted that a is negative for such values of p and
7 as make V vanish; this is, however, wrong, as equation (9) shows that
= is positive when V=0. The mistake was pointed out by Liouville in

the memoir already cited, and the correction was accepted by Ivory in the
Philosophical ‘Transactions for 1839, pages 265, a ave mistake
vitiates the remainder of Ivory’s memoir.

The investigation of Art. 16 is taken in substance from Thole 8
memoir; he also demonstrates the proposition of Art. 14, but not in the
way en I have adopted. —

18. The extract given in the preceding article from Ivory’s memoir
involves another error, which Liouville does not notice: the words “which -
requires that p decrease continually,’ contain an arbitrary unproved asser-
tion. We have

ON . dV dp Pahari dp :
hence if Fe Were negative, do & would be positive; then a might be

Mr. I. Todhunter on Jacobi’s Theorem. 51

tL , or it might be negative: we cannot assert at once, as Ivory does,

that 2 ! must be negative, Suppose, for example, that V stood for p*—7r°—1;

then wv would be negative for positive values of 7, and p would continually
zs d

increase with r.

19. As I have already stated, Ivory accepted the correction made by
Liouville; but in the two pages in which the mistake is acknowledged
other untenable assertions are advanced. It was in effect necessary for
Ivory’s purpose to trace the curve determined by V=0 in the first quadrant ;
but instead of demonstration such as we have supplied in Art. 14, Ivory
gives unwarranted assertions of the kind already noticed in Art. 18.

We have |

Waite ae foe
ae | ate + 2p—p'x") (1+pex’) + 2pr'e'sde,
from which it follows that, whatever positive number 7° stands for,
is negative for all values of p that make 3+2p—p’ positive, that is, for
all values of p less than 3. This Ivory gives, and so far he is correct ; _
is certainly negative, and not zero, so long as p is less than 3. Ivory

wishes to show that al can never bezero. He takes the differential equa-

tion
dV. av
——dp + ——rdr=
dp 7 ge an

he says, “Further, in the differential equation Fcnnnot be zero ; because,

7 increasing without limit, ONedr is essentially positive.”
TAT

This is quite unsound. Regard p as the abscissa and 7 as the corre-
sponding ordinate of a curve determined by V=0; then assuming that

os is always positive, yet = may vanish; that is, there may be a point’
v 'P

or points on the curve at which the tangent is parallel to the axis of abscisse.
Suppose, for example, that V stood for

P—p?+4ap’—hap—B’ ;
then is always positive, = is negative when p is less than a, and
vanishes when p=a or =

_ I do not assert that = can vanish in the present case ; I only maintain

that Ivory’s argument to show that cannot vanish is unsound. I shall
Ne

E 2

52 Mr, I. Todhunter on Jacobi’s Theorem.

| dV
presently demonstrate that we cannot vanish.

20. Ivory concludes the two pages in the Philosophical Temgepmee
for 1839 thus :—

Tf the sign of = be changed, the result will be positive ; and hence,
Tp

observing that wv is contained between 0 and 1, we obtain a condition between
any two values of p and 7* that satisfy the equation (7), namely, the ex-
pression

(S+p—p") (1 +p)+ 2pr*
must be a positive quantity, or, which is the same thing,

P>(p apts) te

This is obscure in its commencement ; but Mh statement to which it pro-

ceeds is intelligible, but is unwarranted. For, granting that iy is always
to be negative, this will be secured if |
(3+ 2p—p°u*) (1 +pa") + 2pr*a*
is always positive ; that is, if
3+ 2p + (3p +p" + 2pr’)a* — pia"
is always positive ; that is, if
3+2
— + 3p+p*-+2pr—pix
is always positive. And as x lies between 0 and 1, this condition is cer--
tainly secured if
34+2p+3p+p’+ 2pr* is greater than p’.
According to Ivory’s statement it would be necessary that
3+4p+2pr? should be greater than p? ;
whereas we see that it would be sufficient that
3+5p+p*+ 2pr* should be greater than p’.

Ivory’ s second statement is inconsistent with his first, but becomes con-
sistent with it if we change +3 to —3; if, however, his second statement
is to be taken as what he intended, and his first statement corrected to
agree with it, his error is aggravated.

In fact, however, I doubt whether any such necessary criterion as Ivory

proposes can be easily deduced from the value of For, granting that
i

S is always negative and never zero, it will not follow that every ele-

e ° e dV v
mené in the integral which expresses ip must be negative, but only that the

“ i
es

Mr. I. Todhunter on Jacobi’s Theorem. 53

ageregate of the positive elements, if such there be, should fall short of the
aggregate of the negative elements. However, be this as it may, there
can be no doubt that the specific criterion which Ivory proposes is quite
unsupported by demonstration.

When p andr are very large, the relation between them is approxi-
mately that given in Art. 15.

21. In Arts. 14 and 16 it is shown that for every given value of p greater
than p,, there is one, and only one, value of 7 which will make V vanish.
We shall now show that corresponding to every value of 7 there is one,
and only one, value of p which will make V vanish.

Whatever be the given value of r, it is obvious that V is positive when
p=0, and negative when p is large enough: thus there must be some in-
termediate value of » which makes V vanish.

We have then to show that there is only one such value; to show this
we shall demonstrate the proposition which Ivory asserted on insufficient

grounds, namely, that = can never vanish simultaneously with V.

(0-2) | aS lies
ao {, are te OP Le opr le Be jaws

dV :
and we know that a cannot vanish so long as p is less than 3. See
Art. 19.

We shall first show that the limit p=3 may be changed to a larger
limit.

If the integral
4
{ wo (1—2x°) {34 2p+ (3p +p? + 2pr’)a? —pru' da
0

is positive, the integral will also be positive when A’ is introduced as a
divisor under the integral sign ; for by introducing this denominator we
diminish all the elements of the integral, but we diminish every negative
element in a higher degree than any positive element.
Now the value of the last integral is
2(3+ 2p) , 23p+p?+2pr*)_ 2p?
5x7 7x9 9x11

we are certain that this is positive if

2p +p?+3p , 342).
eelitee a t th
ae tae is not less than

as
9x11
that is, if

r4iP a is not less than =
On trial it will be found that this condition is satisfied, even when r is
zero, provided p be not greater than 41. Thus we have ouly to consider

54 Mr. I. Todhunter on Jacobi’s Theorem.

the case in which both p is greater than 44, and r — 498+ 2p)
10p

2
is less than S ; and we have to show that ‘ib is negative in this case.

1 :
Put ae ; thus V becomes a function of g and; and we have to show

that Tr cannot vanish when gq lies between 0 and = > and a

9(3q+2) - 7 » _, 3g+))q _, 9(89+2
+ 2\"2 7 *?/ is less than ——., so that 7r7q° Wy Na g Rica | q4+2)7 =.
10 220° ce! 9 == i0 1s less

than = We have

v= (1—2") (¢’—a2? =

D?
where D? stands for g°+ 2qu°+'+9°7°x" ; therefore =
aN oN 1 ¢(1—«a’) 3(¢?—2?) f cE (|=: 2) 2
Sag) | ag q gS) ae
dq gq A) D? [ q D? dx.

Separate the integral into two parts, one-extending between the limits
x=0 and w«=gq, and the other between the limits w=q and v=1. Itis
obvious that the second part is positive, so that we have only the first part
to examine; this is

Es am ee ae ; i z
{. a | —9G+(8q¢4+ 9 —7'¢)a? + (384 2¢4+ 3977) a* } dx
aud we shall show that this is positive.
Let Q stand for

—P+(3q+9¢—7'¢q))x + (34+294+3qr*)a!
then we shall first show that

i (1—2x* )Qda

is positive ; and next that

9 #@°(1—a*)Qda
0 be
is positive.

Now Ke —«*)Qdx will certainly be positive if
0

q 2 2 2 9
i, (l—a’) {-—9+(3q4+ 9 —7 7 )xe + 3qr'a*}da

is positive. The last integral is

iat Jef bleu (Oe. @"
(1 5) +(30+9 *e\(5 1) s0(f- ")

Mr. I, Todhunter on Jacobi’s Theorem. ... -- 55

that is,

¥ (144 0 a 10);
E(1-3-)+ LY;

and this is positive, for g does not exceed <

Now the coefficient of a* in Q is positive, since r°q° is less than 53 and
thus Q cannot change sign more than once; it changes sign once, for it is

negative when «=O, and positive when v=q. ‘The factor _ will be

found to increase continually as x increases from 0 to g. Hence in
q 1 07(1—2*)Qad:
passing fom ( (1—2’)Qda tof a a larger fraction is taken
0 0

of every positive element than of any negative element ; so that since the
former integral has been shown to be positive, the latter is necessarily
positive. |

To demonstrate that = = coatinaally. 3 increases as & increases from 0 to q,

dD
take the differential coefficient with respect to «; the sign of this differ-
ential coefficient is the same as that of

} 20D? —52?(2qe+q°7°v + 22%),
that is, of
2D?— 5a°(2¢+¢77?+ 20),
that is, of
2¢? — (69+: 397r")a*? — 8.24 ;
this is positive when e=0; when v=q it becomes q?(2—6q—3q?r?—8q°),
which we shall now show to be positive. We have by supposition

37°¢? 24 0 +5if less than 5,

and sr anroratB(8 + 3q'r'+8¢')

Pall sre.

and as q does not exceed ~ = q this 1 is greater than 2— 36 23

and so is

positive. Hence we see that when V=0, the value of ig is necessarily

positive, and cannot be zero.
22. We have shown in the preceding Article, that cannot vanish
P

simultaneously with V; the demonstration is rather complex, and perhaps
for this reason Ivory attempted to establish the proposition by unsound
general reasoning. Liouville does not give the proposition, although it is
naturally required to make the discussion of the admissible values of p

‘and 7 complete.
23. Thus we may state the results of Arts. 14, 16, and 21 in the AL

56 Mr. J. M. Heppel on the Theory of Continuous Beams.

lowing manner :—If the curve determined by the equation V=0 be traced
in the first quadrant, every straight line parallel to the axis of p meets the
curve once, and only once, and every straight line parallel to the axis of r,
and at a greater distance from it than p,, meets the curve once, and only

once. Ass vanishes with 7, the curve meets the axis of p at right angles ;
a

and from Art. 15 it follows that when 7 and p are indefinitely great,
the angle which the tangent to the curve makes with the axis of p is very
nearly a right angle. Thus, for small values of 7 the curve is concave to
the axis of p, and for very large values of r the curve is convex to the axis
of p; so that the curve must have a point or points of inflexion.

24, In the very careful account of Ivory’s mathematical researches,
which is given in the fourth volume of the ‘ Abstracts of the Papers .. . of
the Royal Society,’ it is said, with respect to Jacobi’s theorem, “In a
paper in the Transactions for 1838, Mr. Ivory has with great elegance
demonstrated this theorem, and has given, with greater detail than its
authors had entered on, several statements regarding the limitations of the
proportions of the axes.” The language is cautious, but seems to imply
some suspicion with regard to the accuracy of the statements. As we
have now seen, many of Ivory’s statements are inaccurate, and others,
though accurate, are based on unsound reasoning.

“On the Theory of Continuous Beams.” By Joun Mortimer
Heuprret, M. Inst. C.E. Communicated by Prof. W. J. Mac-
QUORN Rankine. Received December 9, 1869%.

In venturing to present to the Royal Society a paper on a subject which
has engaged the attention, more especially in France, of some of the most
eminent engineers and writers on Mechanical Philosophy, the author feels
it to be incumbent on him to state the nature of the claim to their attention

which he hopes it may be found to possess in point of originality or im-

provement on the method of treatment.

To do this clearly, however, it will be necessary to advert to the
principal steps by which progress in the knowledge of this subject has been
made, both in France and in this country.

The theory of continuous beams appears to have first attracted attention
in France about 1825, when a method of determining all the conditions
of equilibrium of a straight beam of uniform section throughout, resting
on any number of level supports at any distances apart, each span being
loaded uniformly, but the uniform loads varying in any manner from one
span to another, was investigated and published by M. Navier. This
method, although perfectly exact for the assumed conditions, was objection-
able from the great labour and intricacy of the calculations it entailed.

* Read January 27, 1870. See vol. xviii. p. 176.

Mr. J. M. Heppel on the Theory of Continuous Beams. 57

Messrs. Molinos and Pronnier, in their work entitled ‘ Traité Théorique et
Pratique de la construction des Ponts Métalliques,’ describe this process
fully, and show that for a bridge of n openings, the solution must be effected
of 32+ 1 equations, involving as many unknown quantities, these equations
being themselves of a complex character ; and they observe, “ Thus to find
the curve of the moments of rupture for a bridge of 6 spans 19 equations
must be operated on; such calculations would be repulsive, and when the
number of spans is at all considerable this method must be abandoned.”

* The method of M. Navier, however, remained the only one available
till about 1849, when M. Clapeyron, Ingénieur des Mines, and Member of
the Academy of Sciences, being charged with the construction of the Pont
d’Asniéres, a bridge of five continuous spans over the Seine, near Paris,
applied himself to seek some more manageable process. He appears to
have perceived (and so far as the writer is informed, to have been the first
to perceive) that if the bending moments over the supports at the ends of
any span were known as well as the amount and distribution of the load, the
entire mechanical condition of this portion of the beam would become known
just as if it were an independent beam. Upon this M. Clapeyron proceeded
to form a set of equations involving as unknown quantities the bending
moments over the supports, with a view to their determination. He found
himself, however, obliged to introduce into these equations a second set of
unknown quantities (‘‘ inconnues auwiliaires’’), being the inclinations of the
deflection curve at the points of support, and not having arrived at a general
method of eliminating these latter, was obliged to operate in each case on
a number of equations equal to twice the number of spans. M. Clapeyron
does not appear, as yet, to have made any formal publication of his method,
but to have used it in his own practice, and communicated it freely to those
with whom he came in contact.

In 1856, M. Bertot, Ingénieur Civil, appears to have found the means
of eliminating this second set of unknown quantities n+ 1 in number for
a bridge of spans, and thus reducing the number of equations to n—1.

Each of these equations involved as unknown quantities the bending
moments over three consecutive supports, and was considered, from its
remarkable symmetry and simplicity, to merit a distinctive name, that of
“The Theorem of the three Moments.”

The method, however, to which this theorem is the key, is still every-
where called that of M. Clapeyron, and, as it appears to the writer, justly
so, as it was an immediate and simple result from his investigations, with
which M. Bertot was well acquainted.

The next important advance was made in 1861, when M. Bresse,
Professeur de Mécanique appliquée & Ecole Impériale des Ponts et
Chaussées, completed the matter of the third volume of his course, which
is exclusively devoted to this subject*. M. Bresse explains and de-

* This was communicated to the Academy of Sciences in 1862, though the volume
was not published till 1865, |

Ne ee a re

58 Mr. J. M. Heppel on the Theory of Continuous Beams.

monstrates the theorem of the three moments, at the knowledge of which
he had himself arrived from M. Clapeyron’s investigations, independently of
M. Bertot. He then goes on to the investigation of an equation of much
greater generality, in which what is termed by English writers “imperfect
continuity ’’ is taken into account, being, however, there replaced by the
precisely equivalent notion of original differences of level in the supports,
the beam being always supposed primitively straight; besides this the loads,
instead of being taken as uniform for each span, are considered as distributed
in any given manner. :

Having obtained this fundamental equation, M. Bresse proceeds to
investigate the nature of the curves, which are the envelopes of the greatest
bending moments produced at each point, by the most unfavourable
distribution of the load in reference to it, and finally gives tables for the
ready calculation of results in a great variety of cases, comprising most of
those likely to occur in practice.

During the time that M. Bresse was engaged in these researches, an
imperial Commission was formed, of which he was a member, for the
purpose of devising rules applicable to practice, and the results of his
labours have been the basis of legislative enactments equivalent to our
Board of Trade regulations prescribing the methods to be followed in
determining the stresses in the various parts of the structure.

About the same time that M. Bresse turned his attention to this sub-
ject, it appears also to have engaged that of M. Bélanger, who in his work
entitled ‘ Théorie de la Resistance et de la Flexion Plane des Solides &c.,
Paris, 1862,’ gives a very complete demonstration—resulting in an equation
which in one point of view is slightly more general than that of M. Bresse,
as it takes in variation of the moment of inertia of the section from one
span to another. In another point of view its generality is slightly less,
as it deals only with loads distributed over each separate span uniformly,
whereas M. Bresse replaces the simple algebraical terms expressing these
by definite integrals expressing the load as a function of the distance from
one of the points of support.

As far as the writer is informed, little has been done in France to
advance this theory beyond the point to which it was brought by the
writers last mentioned, and especially by M. Bresse ; but valuable contri-
butions to its development in reference to application to practice are to be
found in the work of MM. Molinos and Pronnier above referred to, as well
as in various papers by MM. Renaudot, Albaret, Colignon, Piarron de
Mondesir, &c.

In England little or no attention appears to have been paid to this sub-
ject by writers on mechanics till 1843, when the Rev. Henry Moseley,
Professor of Natural Philosophy and Astronomy at King’s College, London,
published his work on ‘The Mechanical Principles of Engineering and
Architecture.’ In part 5 of this work, which treats of the strength of
materials, four cases of continuous beams are fully investigated, and the

Mr. J. M. Heppel on the Theory of Continuous Beams. 59

general case is to a certain extent discussed, the method of M. Navier
being perhaps rather indicated than fully developed.

Prof. Moseley’s work was altogether a most valuable contribution to
engineering science, and, as far as the present subject is concerned, no
doubt furnished the groundwork of the method applied by Mr. Pole to
the solution of other particular but more complex and difficult cases.

The first case which engaged the attention of Mr. Pole appears to have
been that of the bridge over the Trent at Torksey, consisting of two spans
of continuous tubular beams, resting on abutments and a central pier.
For special reasons it had become necessary that the real conditions of
equilibrium of this bridge should be investigated with more than ordinary
precision ; and this Mr. Pole did by a method virtually identical with that
of M. Navier, though it does not appear that he had any previous know-
ledge of that method, except through the medium of Moseley’s work.
Throughout Moseley’s cases, however, the load on the beam is considered
as distributed uniformly over its entire length, whereas Mr. Pole had to
deal with the case of different loads on the two spans, and no doubt had to
devise the method of analysis necessary for its treatment. Mr. Pole’s
paper on this subject is published in vol. ix. of the ‘ Minutes of Proceed-
ings Inst. Civ. En.’ 1849-50.

As far as this went, however, it could hardly be considered to have
advanced the theory of the subject, as M. Navier’s method included this
case, and much more; but about the same time Mr. Pole had to investigate
the case of a much larger work, the Britannia Bridge, where he had to
deal with some new conditions, which, as far as the writer is aware, were
then for the first time successfully treated.

These were that, besides variation of load on the different spans, their
cross sections also varied, and there was imperfect continuity over the
centre pier, that is to say, that the points of support being supposed to
range in a straight line, the beam if relieved from all weight would cease
to remain in contact with them all, and would consist of two equal straight
portions, forming an angle pointing upwards. The process, which for
distinction may be called that of M. Navier, was skilfully extended by
‘Mr. Pole so as to include these new circumstances, and by its means
results were obtained certainly true within a very small limit, and as near
the absolute truth as any existing means of treating the subject would
produce.

Mr. Pole’s researches on this subject are published in Mr. Edwin Clark’s
work on the Britannia and Conway Bridges, 1850. Both from the clear
and accurate treatment of the case and the record of the numerous and
delicate observations by which the theoretical conclusions were continually
verified and kept in check, they are most strongly to be recommended to
the attention of engineers having to deal with works of this character.

_ The sequence of events now compels the writer to advert to some studies
of his own. In 1858-59, being then Chief Engineer of the Madras Rail-

60 Mr. J. M. Heppel on the Theory of Continuous Beams.

way, he had occasion to investigate the conditions of a bridge of five
continuous spans over the River Palar. Having in India no books to refer
to but those of Moseley and Edwin Clark, he found himself unable to extend
the treatment of the cases there given to that of a beam with an increased
number of openings and varying loads. After many attempts and failures,
the same idea occurred to him which appears to have struck M. Clapeyron
nine or ten years before, that if the bending moments over the supports
were known, the whole conditions would become known.

Following this clue, he was fortunate enough to succeed in at once
eliminating the other unknown quantities, which M. Clapeyron had been
cbliged to retain in his equations for many years after his original discovery
of the method, and thus to arrive at an equation precisely identical with
that which had been first published in France by M. Bertot in 1856, and
was known as the “Theorem of the three Moments.”

This was sufficient for the immediate purpose, as the beams in question
were straight and of uniform section throughout, conditions to which this
theorem is strictly applicable without any modification whatever.

As, however, the writer was at this time under the impression that he
was using an entirely new mode of analysis, he was naturally anxious to
check its results by comparison with those obtained in some well-known
case by other means. Fortunately he had at hand that of the Britannia °
Bridge, perhaps the best that could have been selected ; but for this purpose
it became necessary to import into the fundamental equation the conditions
of varying sections in the different spans and imperfect continuity. This,
however, presented no great difficulty, and by means of an equation thus
modified, he had the satisfaction of reproducing all Mr. Pole’s results, and
thus convincing himself of the trustworthiness of the method in question.

The equation thus generalized is absolutely identical with that arrived at
by M. Bélanger in the work above referred to*.

It would appear, then, that the theory of this subject was independently
advanced to about the same state of perfection in France and in England,
though as regards the development of its application to practice no doubt
very much the more has been done in the former country.

The writer will now advert to some inherent defects of this theory, the
cure of which is the principal object of the investigation which follows.

The chief one, which is admitted by all writers on the subject, is the
necessity for supposing the moment of inertia of the section constant
throughout each span ; any more general hypothesis, it is said, would render
the calculation inextricable. Still it is certain that the conclusions arrived
at on the hypothesis of a constant section cease to be true if a variation of
section is introduced, and the amount of error thereby induced, though
considered to be probably small, is still a matter of uncertainty.

The next defect is the assumption of uniformity of load throughout

* A paper on this subject by the writer was published in the Minutes of Proceedings
Inst. C.H, vol. xix. 1859-60.

Mr. J. M. Heppel on the Theory of Continuous Beams. Gl

each span ; for although as far as rolling load is concerned no more correct
hypothesis could be made, the weight of the bridge itself, if a large one,
usually varies considerably in the different parts of the same span.

The equation given by M. Bresse, as has been stated, provides for certain
kinds of variable loads by the use of integrals, but the writer is not aware
that they have been applied, even by that author himself, to the purposes
of calculation, and it seems to him that in most cases the attempt to make
such an application would be beset with difficulties.

It will, however, it is hoped, be seen from what follows, that the dealing
with variations of the above elements does not in fact present any very
formidable difficulty, though no doubt the labour of calculation is greater ;
but what the writer regards as most satisfactory is the very small difference
in the principal results in the case of the Britannia (where these variations
greatly exceed in amount those usually occurring), whether obtained by
the approximate method hitherto followed, or by the more rigorous one to
be explained, affording a strong presumption that in all ordinary cases the
former method may be confidently employed without risk of any important
error.

Should the following treatment of the case be deemed successful, the
author would remark that its success is mainly due to the use of an
abbreviated functional notation, by which a great degree of clearness and
Symmetry is preserved in expressions which would otherwise have become
inextricably complex.

General Investigation of the Bending Moments and Deflections of
Continuous Beams.
A a o
UL 2
Let 1.2 represent any span of a continuous beam, the length of the
span being /.
#.y the coordinates of the deflection curve, the origin being at the
point 1.
a and 6 particular values of 2.
€ €,, €, reciprocals of the products of the moments of inertia of the
sections in the spaces (1. a), (a. 6), (6.2), about their neutral

axes, by the modulus of elasticity of the material (a)

Hy» Ho» Hs loads per unit of length in the same spaces.
T tangent of inclination of deflection curve at 1, to straight line join-
ing | . 2, its positive value being taken upwards.
$,. ¢, bending moments at 1. 2.
P shearing force at 1.
Now let the bending moment at any point (2. y)
between 1 and a be called F,'(2),
between a and 6 be called F,""(z),
between 6 and 2 be ealled Ey:

62 Mr. J. M. Heppel on the Theory of Continuous Beams.

and let the part of this bending moment, which results alone from the.
load on the beam between 1 and 2, be called

between 1 and a f(z),
between a and 0 f,'(z),
between 6 and 2 f,'"(2);

and let the first and second integrals of these functions, as of F,"(v), f,(2),
be denoted by F,'(2), f,(z), and F,(x), f(x), and the value of any one, as
F(z), for a particular value of z, as a by F(a); ;

en Pp en ee ne
Ae@=na(o-$)\ ESP) oe es ®

Wifes p—b f
Ai @)=na(e—$) + nb—@)(e—-"F*) +S, « B)
Also, from equality of moments about the point (w. y),
FY (@)=¢6,—Pa+f (2). eee
F"(@)=¢,—Pat+f,'(#), OE ee eee! (5)
F,'(@)=6,—Pe+f," (2); . » eee
and, from equality of moments about the poiut 2,

Pl=$,—$.+f5 (1);
1 " »
P= (i be4/ ). a
Substituting for P in (4), (5) and (6),
B"(@)= (1-7) n+ Fo.— OK + ++ + @

F@)= (1-9) 4 F6.- OLN - ee

B@= (1-9) it FOO - ee iL

equations from which for a given value of w, F,'(«), F,'(), F,"(#) may
be determined if ¢, and ¢, are known. .
From the nature of the deflection curve,

from 1 to a,

F? It
eee Fe); ee ee

Lp
from a to 8,
d’y

die” A) a) 5 ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° . ° ° ° ° (1 2)

Mr. J. M. Heppel on the Theory of Continuous Beams. 63

from 6 to 2,

d’4 "

ee OR a rin tee al a 1
*. from 1 to a,

Be), wen 20, F(a) 0, 9.

is ; co" ° dat :

7 =e F(w)—T; EE Se ea, eh utsnd es A essing WRN LD
from a to 8,

dy ;

“= ree ne reed Tommie a MNS Shar Wah a ow CUO

WY eB (+O; (15)
making v=a in (14) and (15), and transposing,

C=c,F,'(a)—e,F,(6)—

oo Pack o)—e, GH@EING@) Ue eu oes Gee lo
from 6 to 2, |

Dw e,Fy(a)+C 3 Pe a oe am
making «=6 in (16) and (17), and transposing,
C=eF, (a) +e, (F,(0)— F,(a)) —e,F",(3) ; ?
', oa (a) +e, (#,@)—F,@) +¢,(F,(@)—F,2) —T; . (18)
*, from 1 to a,
_ y=e,F,(w)—Te, no constant; for if v=0, F.w=0,y=0;. . . (19)
from a to 6, |
y=e,F,(a)e+e,(F,(w)—F,(a)v)—Te+C; . . . » » « « (20)
making «=a in (19) and (20), and transposing, |
| C=e,(F,a— F,\(a)a) +¢,(F,(a)—F',(a)a)
2. y=e,(F(a)+F,(a(e—a)) +¢,(E(e)— (Ea) +E, (a(w—a)) )—Tes ss (21)
from 6 to 2, |
y=e,F,'(a)e+e,(F,(6)e—F, (av) +e,(F,(v)—F'(2)")-T#+C; . . . « (22)
making ~=6 in (21) and (22), and transposing, |
y=c,(E,(a)+F,(@(w—a)) +6, | (F0)+F,'@)\(e—8)) -(F,@+F,@—a)) |
+e,| F(w)—(F,(6)+F,(6)(@—6))|—Te «6 wee ee we (88)

_ From the way in which this last equation is formed, it is evident that if

64 Mr. J. M. Heppel on the Theory of Continuous Beams. |

there were any number of particular values of a to be considered; as a. 5
&e., 7, k, l, the corresponding values of ~ being ¢€,, €,, &C., €,-1) En» it
might be written
¢(F\(a) + F(a) (w—a))
y= | +e[ (FG) +F,(2)(e—2)) —( F(a) +F,\(a)(e—a)) | —Tw; (24)
tel (RO+E, (eee) —(F,(2) + Fo)(e—2)) |
+ &e.
teal (Ea) +P \(e—2)) — (Ea) +F nV) |
+e,| F.(v)—(B,A)+F.(A(w—h)) | ;
r—)in((24), y—=()-
e,| F(a) + F(@(U—«) |
'=5 +e,[ (F, (6) +F,(6)(—8)) — (E,(a) +F, (a)(2—a)) | .. . ee
+e,[ (F,(¢)+F, (\@—e)) — (F,(0) + F(2)U—8)) | |
+ &e.
tea[ (Fah) + Fi aAI-2) — (Fa) +F aa) |

+e, [F.O-(B.A)+F.(A0—2) |

If, now, the formation of the functions F,(a), F,'(a) &c. be examined, it ig
evident that this equation may be written
T=A¢,+B¢,+C,

where A and B are known functions of a, 4, c, &c., and e,, e,, €,, &e., and C
is a known function of the same, and p,, p,, pb, &e.

If the adjacent span to the left be now considered, it is evident that a
precisely similar equation may be obtained, which may be written

T’=A'¢,+B'¢,+C ;
adding these, and writing ¢ for T+’, which is known as it is the tangent
of the small angle which the neutral lines of the two spans would make at
the point 1 if relieved from all load,
t=(A+A')p, + Bo, + Big. +C+C,

which may be written

V (go by $3) =0;
similarly for the other bearing points in succession,
Vo, Pos $,)=0,
VC pa» 3» o,)=9, &e.,
where the number of equations is two less than that of the quantities

Mr. J. M. Heppel on the Theory of Continuous Beams. 65

db.» >» &e., so that if two of these are known the rest may be determined.
But the first and last are always known, being usually each =0. There-
fore they may all be determined.

This being so, the bending moment at any point (#.y) may be found
from equations (8), (9), (10) and others of the same form; and the deflection
may be found from equations (19), (21), (23), and others of the same form,
regard being had to the interval of the beam in which the point under
examination lies.

If, now, we suppose that a= Sees =/, equation (25) reduces to

T=; ssl = (FD)
similarly, a ANG
y = (F.C )) 5
1 i '
: t= Ot pp hil y:
EIé=F (D+F, t), writing z for s

3 13
=(5+" Tote ¢,+— ee sole
Clearing of fractions and transposing,

S(+il')o, +416, +4il'9,=Putilp'+24Elé, . . « (26)
an equation which was given by the author in his paper before referred to,
and which is nearly identical with the general equation of M. Bresse, and
allowing for difference of notation precisely so with that of M. Bélanger.

If 2=1 and ¢=0, which is the case of a straight beam of uniform section
throughout,

8(7+1')p, +416, +41'9,=Putl?y, 2. 2. + © + 7)
which is the equation generally known as the theorem of the three
moments.

If in equation (25) we put /=a, it becomes

eae ee
T=ae,(sit 5h gyn) 5 - ee a O8)

and for the central deflection equation (19) becomes

l D2
Y=a'e,(—F5(+9.)+ 384” H:)} tage aay
If we put 6=2a, (= 3a,

aa 19 7 »( 43 7 7
f (G+ Ze (Bint Fert et)
Wis 13 7 7 13 ) . (30)
ta (Fors se alee Gr Int og het 79g hs )

1 7 a her 1 1]
+ €, (s+ oe ee (srt zg bet x6) ;

VOL. XIx. F

66 Mr. J. M. Heppel on the Theory of Continuous Beams.

and central deflection from equation (21),

1 sy Al a 1 ] |

Genet (ont pit set)

bul anieyo 47 5 hey 31

2 ren (Femt Shet ge )) )
1 1 1]

oi -- b+ Bee H+ 7g bet waa’)

If we ia - e— 34, < i—5a-

149 13 iS 13
(Feet one Samer 300" tet ete Tanta gaye)
31 7), 123 31
Tht raph (Sa ug Bin 3 oot a
(32

150': . 50 30 YT G00"

H 6.4 tap? (Geptit ap mt gy goat apne)

3005

4 Si heel
(i+ 150°” \t50'* Go 30° t50™ a00%8

al a pus deflection from equation (23),

(; )
& Si of 37
& sgh j 150 7 Gene an ag eT 190" act syn ))

9 Oe 9 469 27 9
ta (ee qe hte geht Se gy tet gyatet gat aye)

1205

7A 31 7 a 7 161 31 .
+e, Gene 60 say eae a py 90 Het ek aoe 340 tet Ton )

1 13 ce Bel ] 7 7
$e (—z9h— ay et (Gont ap 20 Ga hase 12 Temes Go Mat au)

As an example of the application of the foregoing method to the
purposes of calculation, let the case of the Britannia Bridge be taken, and
let the large span be supposed to be divided into five, and the small span
into three equal parts, and let the moments of inertia of the sections and
loads per unit of length be supposed constant within each part and equal
to their mean values. |

0 1 2
A ai a’ A a D C a ix

2 7 1 ] 1
“ Sat Gott Gott ay lst ag act Gy he )
:
31 1GL oy 7 7
te(— S87 ao tt? (ght grotet Tr tet gy et w))
) (33

Mr. J. M. Heppel on the Theory of Continuous Beams. 67

We have then the following data :—
In spans (1 . 2) and (1. 9),

a——o2. (jet. c= 3a; a=4a: t= a.
a =76°7, 6 =2a, = Ba
Hy 1 1 ts 1 pies 1 ais I
eel h - o20R 8) 1746m * 1664 °. 1867"
/ 1 ' ] 1

er O0r?, 2 = 60K, = 7208:
ee 331, . = 3°57, 349, == 3°65,
i, Seed. iO ae git i232) =

Tey 0, E=1440000.
In span (2. 1),
@= 92. hy C=, =A. l=5a;
PE ce ee
miso 664. 6B 8 1520 OP TIBI E

p,=3°05, p= 3°49, Py= 3°97, =3°31, Ms= 2°89 ;
and from symmetry of loading T= = —0:002035.

Applying equation (30) and (32) to spans (1 . 0) and (1 . 2) respectively,
and eliminating T and T’ by adding them, we obtain
0-1888y, +0:048274,—10481=0;
and applying equation 32 to span (2.1),
0-04827¢, +0:087659,— 5420=0,
whence ¢,= 416206, 9,=36387.

Taking these values of ¢, and ¢,, and applying equation (33) to the
calculation of the deflection at the middle of the large span,

0:3 75 t-—4- oimehes:

If, now, the values of ¢,, ¢,, and Y be calculated from equations (26)
and (19), on the supposition that the moments of inertia of the section
and the loads are constant yy ageus each span and equal to their
mean values, they are

¢,=47030, 9,=35610, Y=4-62,
which are almost identical with the values ascertained by Mr. Pole.

If the variation of section alone be considered, the load being taken at
its mean value,

@,=46382, $,=34465, Y=4:52.

It therefore appears that the amount of variation in the section and
load which occurs in each span of the Britannia Bridge, when taken
strictly into account, produces scarcely any effect on the values of the
bending moments and deflections, which are practically the same as those
resulting from their mean values considered as constant ; and it may be

68 Dr. W. J. M. Rankine on Mr. Heppel’s

considered as demonstrated that, for most ordinary cases of large bridges,
calculations founded on equation (26) may be confidently relied on. It
need scarcely be remarked that these are much more simple and easy than
those founded on the more exact but complex equations above given.

In smaller bridges, however, the error of the approximate process will
be more considerable, and the process above given may be applied with
advantage to its correction.

In concluding this paper, the author desires to record his thanks to his
young friend, Mr. Henry Reilly, for the patience and skill with which he
made, in detail, all the intricate calculations of the numerical values of the
various functions involved in the above demonstration.

“Remarks on Mr. Heppel’s Theory of Continuous Beams.” By W.
J. Macquorn Rankine, C.E., LL.D., F.R.S. Received De-
cember 22, 1869*.

1. Condensed form of stating the Theory.—The advantages possessed
by Mr. Heppel’s method of treating the mathematical problem of the state
of stress in a continuous beam will probably cause it to be used both in
practice and in scientific study.

The manner in which the theory is set forth in Mr. Heppel’s paper is
remarkably clear and satisfactory, especially as the several steps of the
algebraical investigation correspond closely with the steps of the arithme-
tical calculations which will have to be performed in applying the method
to practice.

Still it appears to me that, for the scientific study of the principles of
the method, and for the instruction of students in engineering science, it
may be desirable to have those principles expressed in a condensed form ;
and with that view I have drawn up the following statement of them, which is
virtually not a new investigation, but Mr. Heppel’s investigation abridged.

Let (v=0, y=0) and (2=/, y=0) be the coordinates of two adjacent
points of support of a continuous beam, w being horizontal. Let y and the
vertical forces be positive downwards.

At a given point w in the span between those points let p be the load
per unit of span, and EI the stiffness of the cross-section, each of ‘which
functions may be uniform or variable, continuous or discontinuous.

In each of the following double and quadruple definite integrals, let the
lower limits be x=0.

OH Cx. ‘ fo
ol ae Vist ( {rae =F.

When the integrations extend over the whole span /, that will be denoted
by affixing 1; for example, m,, ,, &c.

* Read January 27,1870. See vol. xviii. p. 178.

Theory of Continuous Beams. 69

Let —P be the upward shearing-force exerted close to the point of sup-
port (v=0), &, the bending moment, and T the tangent of the inclination,
positive downwards, at the same point. Then, by the general theory of
deflection, we have, at any point of the span J, the following equations :—
moment, DO Rae ee ee relia at: emer a2)
deflection, eG O MT En tat je ie eto Ss eo)

Let ®, be the moment at the further end of the span /, and suppose it
given. This gives the following values for the shearing-force P and slope
T at the point (w=0):— ,
Pee mommnnnlene pe | Ce ge ee head

and because y,=0,

paPicteFo(Z_%) Shy Tw

Consider, now, an adjacent span extending from the point of support
(v=0) to a distance (—#=/') in the opposite direction, and let the defi-
nite integrals expressed by the formule (1), with their lower limits still
at the same point (v=0), be taken for this new span, being distinguished
by the suffix —1 instead of 1. Let —T’ be the slope at the point of sup-
port (v=0). Then we have for the value of that slope,

a es es

[!? He l!

Add together the equations (5) and (5A), and let = T—T" denote the
tangent of the small angle made by the neutral layers of the two spans
with each other in order to give imperfect continuity. Then, after clearing
fractions, we have the following equation, which expresses the theorem of
the three moments in Mr. Heppel’s theory :—

0=6,(¢,0? + date SD) —6,¢l"— Ong :
+m,ql?+m_q PF UP—F_ PtP”. f (6)

That equation gives a linear relation between the bending moments
®_,,,, ®, at any three consecutive points of support, and certain known

functions of known quantities. In a continuous girder of N spans there
are N—1 such equations and N—1 unknown moments; for the moments
at the end most supports are each=0. The moments at the interme-
diate points of support are to be found by elimination; which having
been done, the remaining quantities required may be computed for any
particular span as follows :—The inclination T at a point of support by
equation (5); the shearing force P at the same point by equation (4) ;
the deflection y and moment ® at any point in that span by equations (3)
and (2). Points of maximum and minimum bending moment are of course

Lid
found by making —=05 and points of inflection by making &=0.

70 Remarks on Mr. Heppel’s Theory of Continuous Beams.

2. Case of a uniform girder with an indefinite number of equal spans,
uniformly loaded ; loads alternately light and heavy.—The supposition
just described forms the basis of the formule given in a treatise called ‘A
Manual of Civil Engineering,’ page 288; and it therefore seems to me
desirable to test those formule by means of Mr. Heppel’s method.

The cross-section of the whole girder and the load on a given span
being uniform, the definite integrals of the formulee (1) take the following
values :— ;

2 2

pe xv

574 ae px mg Py: (7)

x? F
9B? 6hi. | 24hln oem

The values of those integrals for the complete span are expressed by
making v=,

The values of m and g are the same for every span. In the values of m
and F, the load mw per unit of span has a greater and a less value alter-
nately. Let w, be the weight per unit of span of the girder, with its fixed
load, w, that of the travelling load (increased, if necessary, to allow for
the additional straining effect of motion); then the alternate values of u
are

p=w,s pw tw, Se)

The moments at the points of support are all equal; that is, 6,=,
=i.

Equation (6) now becomes the following (the common factor /* having
been cancelled) :—

0O=—26,n,+F,4+F_,—u;

1
giving for the bending moment at each point of support
@ hak Wee 2w +,

y 2n, 24

t
PEI. 1. . (9)

If ¢ be made =0, so that the continuity is perfect, this equation exactly
agrees with the formula at page 289 of the treatise just referred to; and
the same is the case with the following formule for the shearing-forces
and slopes close to a point of support, and for the moments and deflections
at other points :—

Shearing-force, light load, pastel ; |
ve '
wW + w 4 ® ° ° e . ° ( ] 0)
Shearing-force, heavy load, P,=— : 1 l
— me 3
Slope, light load, Tae Bt at 53 1
3 pat (11)
Slope, heavy load, Meer sen la

On the Action of Chloride of Zine on Codeia. 71

Moment, light Joad, | | 7]
2
b=, —Pe+m=—; 'EI+ aH —— oo ; |
Moment, heavy load, r (12)
o = E14 aeee et gl omey bee |
| 2 J
Central moment, light load, a(« = 5) = FEL ep,
ie cE)
Central moment, heavy load, o(« =5)=— jee |
2 l 2 J
Central deflection, light load,
gr w,—20 4
y=Tx—Pq+6, n+ P( with w=5)=5 LeacerTaT laf

Central deflection, heavy load, r (14)
, : : i\ tl wi,+3w

=m) P'o+0n4 F( aoe = us SS OMS 78

y ¢ ain ie yeh yp 8 384EL ee |

COMMUNICATIONS RECEIVED SINCE THE END OF THE SEssIon.

“ Researches into the Chemical Constitution of the Opium Bases.
—Part IV. On the Action of Chloride of Zinc on Codeia.”” By
Avueustus Marruressen, F.R.S., Lecturer on Chemistry at St.
Bartholomew’s Hospital, and W. Burnsipz, of Christ’s Hos-
pital. Received June 23, 1870.

On endeavouring to prepare apomorphia by a cheap method, Mr. Mayer
and one of us heated morphia with chloride of zinc, to see whether the
elements of water could not be abstracted by this reagent (the results of
this reaction have not yet been published). Apomorphia having been ob-
tained in this manner, it seemed possible that apocodeia, that is codeia minus
the elements of water, might be prepared by a similar reaction. On try-
ing the experiment a new base was clotiaeel which proved on analysis to
be apocodeia.

When hydrochlorate of codeia is heated with an excess of a concentrated
solution of chloride of zinc, to a temperature varying between 170° and
180° C., for about 15 minutes, the decomposition takes place ; on cooling
a yellowish-brown tarry mass separates from the liquid, which on further
cooling may be drawn into thin threads, and thus obtained almost free
from the excess of the chloride of zinc. ‘This amorphous silk-like mass is
almost pure hydrochlorate of apocodeia. ‘To obtain the base in a pure
state from this substance, the following method was employed :—

The hydrochlorate was dissolved in hot water and precipitated by hy-

72 On the Action of Chloride of Zine on Codeia. _[ Recess,

drochloric acid. The liquid containing the precipitated hydrochlorate was
allowed to cool, and the precipitate on solidifying was separated from the acid
solution. The operation of dissolving and reprecipitating with hydrochloric
acid was repeated several times, and lastly the hydrochlorate was dissolved
in water, precipitated with carbonate of sodium, and the base extracted
with ether. On evaporating the ether-solution the base remained behind
as an amorphous, gum-like, reddish mass; this was powdered, dried in
a water-bath, and gave on analysis the following results. All combus-
tions were made with oxide of copper and oxygen.

(1.) 0°3245 gramme of the base, dried at 100° C., gave 0°9150 carbonic
acid and 0°2080 water.

(II.) 0°3150 gramme of the base gave 0°8860 carbonic acid and 0-1960
water.

(III.) 0°4570 gramme of the base, burnt with soda-lime, gave 0°1600
metallic platinum.

Found.
ee = aS
Calculated. (1.) (II.) (IIT.)
‘Ca ee 216 76:87 76°89 76°70
H, Pere 9 6°76 712 6°91
Ne ete 14 4:98 4:97
O, ETRE 32 11°39
281 100°00

The reaction that has therefore taken place is similar to that of hydro-
chloric acid on morphia, viz. that the chloride of zinc has abstracted the
elements of water, thus :—

Morphia. | Apomorphia.
C,H, NO; = H0+¢_ No.

Codeia. Apocodeia.
C,,H,NO, = H,0+C,, H,, NO,.

The base itself is soluble in alcohol, ether, and chloroform, but almost
insoluble in water, and has not yet been obtained in the crystalline state.

The hydrochlorate, obtained by shaking the ether-solution of the pure
base with hydrochloric acid, and evaporating the acid solution to dryness,
gave the following on analysis :—

0563 gramme of the hydrochlorate gave 0°256 chloride of silver.

Calculated. Found.
Th Sy eam 282 88:82
(yi 2S Aaa gee eee re 30D 11°18 11°25
a1 7D 100:00

The hydrochlorate cannot be obtained in a crystalline state ; it is easily
soluble in water, and is precipitated thence by strong hydrochloric acid.

On comparing the actions of different reagents on this base with those
obtained with apomorphia (Proc. Roy. Soc. No. 112, 1869, p. 459), they

c “4

1870. ] On the Action of Claret on the Human Body. 73

were found to be almost identical, the most marked of the few differences
being that the blood-red colour given with nitric acid is much more per-
manent than in the similar apomorphia reaction. Between the two bases
also a very marked difference exists in respect of stability, apocodeia being
far superior in this respect to apomorphia ; in fact it may be precipitated
by ammonia or carbonate of sodium, washed and dried, without undergoing
a marked change of colour.

The hydrochlorates also differ; for that of apomorphia can be easily
crystallized, whereas hydrochlorate of apocodeia has only been cbtained in
an amorphous state. The preparation of apocodeia is easy and sure, yield-
ing avery large product. In this respect it differs materially from apo-
morphia, the preparation of which is tedious, and the amount of yield very
uncertain, hence the high price of this valuable therapeutical agent. The
solutions of the two hydrochlorates also show the same differences that
the bases themselves do. In physiological effects also there is a decided
difference between the hydrochlorates, that of apomorphia being, as ob-
served by Dr. Gee, a very violent emetic, whilst that of apocodeia is, ac-
cording to Dr. Legg’s experiments, a mild emetic; it also produces sub-
cutaneous abscesses at the place of mjection, which the apomorphia salt
does not.

It has been shown in Part II. (Proc. Roy. Soc. vol. xvii. p. 460) of these
researches, that when codeia is heated with hydrochloric acid it splits up
into chloride of methyl, water, and apomorphia. The action of hydriodic
acid on narcotine for the elimination of the methyl contained in it is, how-
ever, more energetic than that of hydrochloric acid. Therefore it was
thought probable that, by means of hydriodic acid, CH, might be ab-
stracted alone, as iodide of methyl, from the codeia, leaving the elements of
water, and thus forming morphia.

On trying the experiment, however, not a trace of iodide of methyl was
obtained, but the iodide of a new base, which is at present under ex-
amination.

The codeia with which the foregoing experiments were made was kindly
presented to us by Messrs. M‘Farlan and Co., of Edinburgh, to whose
liberality we are already so much indebted.

“Experiments on the Action of Red Bordeaux Wine (Claret) on
the Human Body.” By E. A. Parkes, M.D., F.R.S., Professor
of Hygiene in the Army Medical School, and Count Cyprian
Woxtowicz, M.D., Assistant Surgeon, Army Medical Staff.
Received July 5, 1870.

In the Proceedings of the Royal Society (No. 120) is an account of
some experiments with pure alcohol and brandy on a healthy man. This
paper is intended as a continuation, with the substitution in the experi-
ments of red Bordeaux wine (claret) for alcohol and brandy. The same

74 Messrs. Parkes and Wollowiez on the [ Recess,

man was the subject of the experiments, and he was placed on precisely
the same diet as is recorded in the former paper.

The experiments were continued for 30 days, the man having abstained
from any alcoholic beverage for 16 days previously. During the first 10
days, water only was taken at dinner, during the next 10 days red Bor-
deaux wine was substituted for the water; 10 fluid ounces (284 cub.
centims.) being given on the first 5 days, and 20 fluid ounces (568 cub.
centims.) on the last 5 days. The wine was taken at dinner time, at a
quarter past 1 o’clock. In the last 10 days water was again given.

The wine was a good claret, as it was thought best to use a superior
wine ; it was Haut Brion wine of second growth, of the vintage of 1863,
and was sold in London at the price of 60s. per dozen. It contained 11
per cent. of alcohol. The free acidity was equal to about 3 grains per
ounce of tartaric acid (C,H,O,); the total solids amounted to 21°76
grammes, and the fire-proof salts to 2°359 grammes per litre. Of this
amount of salts 2°027 grammes were soluble, and °332 insoluble. In the
former, phosphoric acid and chlorine were present in the amounts of *145
and ‘106 gramme per litre respectively; the insoluble salts contained
only ‘0175 gramme of phosphoric acid per litre. In the 10 ounces of wine
there were therefore only 0°7 grain of phosphoric acid, and 0°46 grain of
chlorine.

The ash was intensely alkaline, and, when neutralized with standard
acid, the alkalinity was found to be equal to 1-679 gramme of tartaric acid
(C,H, O,) per litre.

Only two circumstances (except the taking of wine) were different in
this set of experiments as compared with the former.

The first experiments were made in February and March 1870, when
the weather was very cold; the present were made in May and June
in very hot and dry weather. The only influence we could trace to this
altered condition of climate was that the amount of water allowed was in-
sufficient, and the man suffered some discomfort from thirst. We could
not perceive that any effect was produced on the nitrogenous elimina-
tion ; certainly there was no diminution.

The other alteration was that the man had gained 4 lbs. in weight, and
was still gaining a little when the experiments were commenced ; he con-
tinued to do so slowly until the 24th day, when his health began to give
way and he lost weight.

The experiments included the number of the pulse (taken in the recum-
bent position) every 2 hours from 8 a.m. to 10 p.m., tracings of the pulse
and respirations, the temperature of the axilla every 2 hours from 6 a.m.
to 10 p.m., the temperature of the rectum four times a day (the observa-
tions being taken with the same thermometers as on the former occasion),
the amounts of nitrogen, phosphoric acid, chlorine and free acidity of the
urine, and the weight, and in the two cases the amount of nitrogen in
the stools.

1870. | Action of Claret on the Human Body. 75

1. WEIGHT OF THE Bopy

(taken at 8 a.m. before breakfast and after emptying the bladder).

Weise : |
: Weight, | : Weight, || : Weight,
Days. Weems in Hilo. | Days. Oa isto: | Days. Ween, in ino.
in lbs. in lbs. | in lb
grammes. grammes. | grammes.
1. 140 63:6 ||; Ely | 40-5 63:86 || 21. | 140°5 63°86
2. 140 63°6 12. | 1405 63°86 || 22. | 1406 63°91
3. 140 63-6 13. | 1406 63°91 23. | 1406 63°91
4, 140 63°6 14. | 140°6 63°91 24. | 140°6 63°91
5. 140 63°6 15. | 1406 63°91 25. | 140°5 63°86
6. 140°5 63°86 16. | 1406 63°91 26. | 140-4 63°81
é 140-5 63°86 EZ. 3 406 63°91 27. | 1403 63°77
8. 140°5 63°86 18. | 1406 63:91 28. | 140 63 6
<. 140°5 63°86 19. | 140°5 | 63°86 || 29. | 140 63°6
10. 140°5 63°86 20. | 1405 63°86 30. | 140 63:6
Means| 140°25 | 63°75 || ...... 140°55 | 63-863 || ...... 140-35 | 63-79

Owing to the rather larger supply of food and the lessened exercise the
weight increased slightly, but remained, on the whole, in tolerable equili-
brium until the 24th day, when he became indisposed, and lost weight
regularly every day for 4 days. No obvious change in weight was caused
by the wine. .

2. Tur CiRCULATION.

Pulse before wine (taken in the recumbent position.)

Hours.
Days. Mean of

8 AM. 110 a.a.| 12 noon.| 2 pt. |4 par. | 6 pn. | 8 par. [10 p.x.| “e days-

isiday | 74 | 86 | 74 | 84 | 77 | 84 | 72 | 72 | 77-87
Qnd day..| 67 | 72 | 72 | 82 | 77 | 80 | 75 | 70 | 7437
3rd day ...| 71 | 80 | 72 | 82 | 76 | 82 | 85 | 72 | F775
Miedaye 65. | 75. | 80 | 89 °| 73 1.73 | 78. |-67 175

Sth day ..| 76 | 82 | 72 | 84 | 81 | 82 | 73 | 73 | 77-87
6thday..| 76 | 74 | 77 | 87 | 73 | 76 | 72 | 78 | 760
ith day ..| 72 | 78 | 70 | 90 | 74 | 75 | 90 | 69 | 772
8th day ...| 76 | 7 "3 | 88 | 78 | 8 | 70 | 72 | 76-87
Gteday | 67> 278 | 75) 77° |e | Wes | 7B | WB | 74-9
PGihday| 73 | 80 | 7%, -)879 >, | 74.1. 76.) WS | 67. fe 7a

ee ee OO EEE

| a

The pulse in this man had a daily course of great uniformity, the
changes being chiefly dependent on food and in a less degree on exercise.
If the last line (the mean of the hours) is read, and it is remembered that
breakfast was taken at 8, dinner at 1, and tea at 5, the increase in the
number of beats at 10, 2, and 6 o’clock is at once accounted for. It rose
after breakfast nearly 7 beats; then fell 4 beats; rose after dinner nearly
10 beats; then fell, but not to its previous standard ; rose after tea 3 beats,
and then fell, till at 10 p.m. it was nearly the same as at 8 a.m. The

76 Messrs. Parkes and Wollowicz on the [ Recess,

other cause influencing the heart’s beats was exercise ; we kept the exer-
cise as uniform as we could, but there were variations, and we could often
trace defect or excess of exercise on the next reading of the pulse. The
daily mean of the pulse was fairly uniform, the mean of the 10 days
being 76°3 beats per minute, the extreme mean daily variation was from
74:2 to 77°87.

Pulse during wine; 10 ounces at 1 o'clock during the first 5 days, and
20 ounces during the last 5.

Days. HELE, Mean of

8 a.m. |10 a.m.| 12noon. | 2 p.m. |4 p.m.|6 p.m. | 8 p.m. |10 p.m

11th day...) 67 79 76 79 80 87 80 72 17-5
12th day...| 72 71 72 85 82 90 95 82 oie
13th day...| 76 73 70 86 84 89 80 73 788
14th day...) 67 82 83 92 87 89 76 78 81:7
15th day...) 70 81 77 92 88 93 84 76 82°6
16th day...| 77 80 79 76 94. 86 87 76 81:3
17th day...) 74 82 75 93 88 86 80 74 81°5
18th day...) 76 79 75 94 88 91 78 69 80°7
19th day...| 76 82 69 86 96 89 82 78 82:2
20th day...| 68 86 67 85 89 81 79 71 78:2

Means...... 72°3 | 79-1 73°9 86:8 | 876 | 831 | 821) 748 80 5

The wine increased the frequency of the heart’s action by 4% beats
every minute during 14 hours in the day, and doubtless also in the re-
maining 10, for the pulse at 8 a.m. was still too frequent during the wine
period. In the 24 hours there was then an excess in the heart’s action
of 6120 beats, or nearly 6 per cent. As the amount of alcohol was 1:1
ounces in the first 5 days, and 2:2 ounces in the other 5, the increase in.
the number of the heart’s beats was slightly more than in the days when
an equal quantity of pure alcohol was taken.

This was partly owing to the continuance of the wine, as the first day’s
excess was only 1658 beats, and partly to the fact that whereas in the
former series of experiments the mean pulse-beats in the water period
were 73°, in this they were 76°3. The man’s heart was evidently rather
more excitable in this series than in the former.

When the hourly changes are compared with the water period, it is seen
that the influence of food is marked as before, but that the wine exag-
gerated the effect, and kept the pulse at a greater rate for a longer time.

An extract from the Tables will show this. It must be noted that the
wine was taken at 1 o’clock, or a little after.

Water period. Wine period.

Mean number of pulse at 10 a.m. after breakfast... 78°4 Gout,

Mean at 2°p.mi after dinner -.............css00rmsee0s 83°7 86:8
Mean at, 4-250 or ( tn. He's. j.ekcdee. bi ladies dees 75°83 87°6
Mean atvOur- Macher wea... «sank ssacdon nce teeneee dade 73:8 88:1
Mica At IS Mtr te or ak tock eae sass nth cesee eee 766 82:1

Nisan at 10 ee Bee ede Abate cane 71:3 749

1870.] Action of Claret on the Human Body. 73

It will be seen, then, that the pulse at 4, 6, and 8 o’clock in the wine period
is much above the corresponding numbers in the water period. The
effect of the wine is largely perceptible for eight hours, and is traceable
during all the observations. The mean of the first five days is 80°34
beats per minute, and of the last five days 80°78 beats.

The effect of increasing the wine to 20 ounces is chiefly perceived in the
greater acceleration of the pulse at 4 o’clock in the last five days as com-
pared with the first five. When 10 ounces were taken, the mean pulse at
4 o'clock was 84°2, or two beats per minute less than at 2 o’clock, where-
as in the 20-ounce days the mean pulse at 4 o’clock was four beats above
the 2 o’clock rate.

Pulse after wine.

Days. HOU: Mean of

8 a.m. |10 a.m.| 12 noon.| 2 p.m. | 4.p.m. | 6 p.m. | 8 p.m. [10 p.m. the days:

| 29th day...| 74 82 74 84 84 80 83 79 80°
30th day...) 70 80 70 96 89 79 74 72 78°75

Means...... 71-4 | 806 172 86°7 | 82°3 | 83:8 | 805] 742 | 79°38

The pulse continued high during the whole of this period, the excess
being chiefly in the afternoon hours; even 10 days after the wine was left
off it had not returned to its proper rate; but this was probably in part
owing to indisposition, which will be referred to presently.

Sphygmographic observations were taken three times a day ; but as the
curves from alcohol were so fully given in the former paper, we have thought.
it necessary only to put in nine curves, three before, four during, and two
after wine. We have selected 3 o’clock as the hour, so that the influence
of food is perceptible in all: the effect of the wine was the same as that
of alcohol, though of course in a degree proportional to the amount.

We also attempted to determine the ratio of the radial pulse, heart’s
action, and respiration by means of Dr. Burdon-Sanderson’s ingenious
cardiograph. Unfortunately we did not obtain the instrument in time to
determine the curves properly in the period before wine, and we are there-
fore not able to give proper comparisons. We could not, however, so far
trace any effect on the number or depth of the respirations.

78 Messrs. Parkes and Wollowicz on the [ Recess, |

Before claret.—At 3 p.m., 2 hours after dinner.

{

]

}

aay. of Clavel, > |

8th day P90.

day, PSL,
|

J cay after Claret, -

Spm, 8% 6/70. a7% day, PGB.

3. Tue TEMPERATURE OF THE Bopy

The temperature was taken both in the axilla and rectum, in order to
obtain a control of the observations. The degrees are Fahrenheit.

1870.]

Hours.
Days. Mean of
Giada nee Oe acne lO roorieh) Ol peas | 4 wivpelbGup ante ier Oman oe ars
Ist day 97°83 | 98:0 | 98:0 98-0 98-4 | 984 | 984 | 982 | 98-4 98-17
2nd day 974 | 974 | 98-0 97-6 98:4 | 97:3 | 98:0 | 98:8 | 98:0 97°93
ord day 97°38 | 97:0 | 97-4 97-4 98:2 | 98:0 | 97-2 | 986 | 98:4 SET
4th day 972 | 97:0 | 98:4 97:3 97-4 | 97-4 | 97-8 | 980 | 976 97:56
5th day 978 | 97:4 | 97:2 97:0 976 | 976 | 98:0 | 98:0 | 97-6 97°57
6th day 976 | 974 | 97-6 97:8 DOW ORSy OT Ges Oi Ges) 97-2 97°57
7th day 976 | 97°83 | 97-4 97:0 98:0 | 976 | 97°83 | 976 | 97-4 97:57
8th day 978 | 976 | 97-2 97°38 978 | 97:4 | 976 | 98:0 | 97-4 97:62
9th day 97-4 | 97:2 | 98-2 97-6 98:2 | 976 | 98:0 | 97-4 | 98:0 97:73
10th day...| 97-0 97:4 | 98:0 98:0 982 | 97-4 | 97°83 | 988 | 97-4 OTT
Means..... 97:54! 97°42 | 97°74) 97:55 | 97-98} 97°70) 97:82) 98:10| 97:74! 97-726

Action of Claret on the Human Body.

(a) In the Axilla.

The thermometer «was kept in the axilla for 20 minutes or more, while
the man was in bed and covered with the clothes.

First Period. Temperature of axilla before wine.

It will be seen on reading the last line (mean of the hours) that the tem-

perature follows the same course as the pulse in being manifestly influenced
by food, and rising after breakfast, dinner, and tea. The only exception
(and this is perhaps apparent only) is at 8 p.m., when the mean tempera-
ture is higher than at 6 p.m. while the pulse is falling ; but this was per-
haps accidental, 7. e. a longer series of observations might have given
different results; for in three observations the temperature was higher at
6 o'clock, and in three it was equal, while in the other four, when it was
highest at 8 o’clock, there were two exceptional high temperatures which

augmented the mean amount.

at 8 p.m. was lower than at 6.
We were unable to see any diurnal change of temperature in this man
apart from food ; there was no afternoon or evening rise of temperature,
dependent solely on the time of day.
The temperature was more uniform than in the experiments in February,

Second Period. Temperature of axilla during wine.

In the next period the mean temperature

Hours.

Days Mean of

6 a.m.|8 a.m. |10 a.m.}12noon.|2p.m.|4p.m. 6P.m./8 p.m. |/10 p.m. the days.
Iith day...) 97-0 | 97-2, | 97-6 97°8 98:0 | 976 | 97:6 | 97°83 | 97-4 97-dD
12th day...) 97°2 | 97-4 | 97-0 97-4 97:0 | 97:2 | 98:0 | 97°6 | 97-4 97°35
13th day...| 97:0 | 97:2 | 97°6 97-6 98:0 | 97-4 | 98:2 | 97-4 | 97-0 97:48
14th day...| 96:3 | 97:0 | 97°8 97:2 98:0 | 97:3 | 98:4 | 98:0 | 97-6 97-4
15th day...| 97-4 | 976 | 98:0 97-4 98:2 | 98:2 | 98:0 | 98:2 | 97:8 97°85
16th day...| 97-4 | 97°38 | 97-4 98-0 97°83 | 98:0 | 98:0 | 97:6 | 97-6 Vis
.| 17th day...) 96°8 | 97:0 | 97-4 97°4 98:0 | 97:3 | 97-4 | 97:0 | 97:0 Dea
iechiday:.:| 97:2.) 97:25 | 97-6 98-0 97-3 | 97-6 | 97-4 not|taken | 97:54
19th day...| 97°6 | 98:0 | 97:4 97-4 98:2 | 97-8 | 98:0 | 97-83 | 98:0 97°8
20th day...| 96°38 | 97:0 | 98:0 97:8 98:0 | 974 | 97°83 | 97-6 | 978 97:59
Means..... 97:12| 97°3 | 97:58} 97-60 | 97:90! 97-68 97-88) 97-66 | 97-50| 97:56

80 Messrs. Parkes and Wollowicz on the [ Recess,

If the mean temperature at 2, 4, 6, and 8 o’clock, when the wine was
acting most on the pulse, are placed side by side, we have,—

Temperature. |
Hours. Scan ee
Water period. Wine period.
TAREE eaten HE: 97-98 97-90
TUBING: Ieasectasoesesni 97°70 97°68
ORR IM here eens tase 97:82 97°88
OPPIMEE. Cake re aeas 98°10 97-66

The temperatures of the three first hours are practically identical, and
as already said, the rise at 8 o’clock in the water period seems to us acci-
dental, 7. e. as dependent on two exceptional high temperatures, which
raised the mean amount. In the other 5 hours the mean temperature was
four times slightly higher in the water, and once in the wine period.

The result of all the observations was that, in the water period of ten
days, the mean temperature was 97°°726, and in the wine period was
97°°56, or 0°'166 less, a difference so slight as probably to fall within the
limits of unavoidable error. ‘The mean of the first five days, with 10
ounces of wine, was 97°°526; the mean of the last five days, with 20
ounces of wine, was 97°'590, proving that doubling the amount of wine
caused no lowering of mean temperature, and probably no rise, as the
difference is so slight.

We conclude that in health the apparent heat after wine must be
owing, as in the case of alcohol and brandy, rather to subjective feel-
ings connected with the quickened circulation than with an actual rise
of temperature ; but that, on the other hand, wine in the above quantities
causes no appreciable lowering of temperature.

Third Period. Temperature of Axilla after wine.

Hours.
Days. Mean of
6 a.m. | 8 a.m. [10 4.m.| 12 noon.| 2 p.m. | 4 P.M. |6 p.m. | 8 p.m. |10 p.m. the days

Zist day...| 97-2 | 97-4 | 98:0 98:3 992 | 984 | 986 | 97:6 | 97-6 98
22nd day..| 974 | 97-4 | 982 97°83 98:2 | 97°3 | 98:0 | 97-4 | 97-0 97-6
23rd day...| 97:6 | 976 | 98-0 98-0 98-4 | 98:0 | 97°38 | 98:0 | 98:2 97-9
24th day...| 97°2 | 97-4 | 97-6 97°6 98:2 | 97-6 | 98:0 | 97-6 | 97-0 97-5
25th day...| 97°38 | 98:0 | 97:8 98-4 99-2 | 98:0 | 98:2 | 97-6 | 97-2 98:0
26th day...| 97:0 | 97:0 | 98:2 98-4. 98°83 | 976 | 97:8 | 97-8 | 97-4 SeT
27th day...| 97:0 | 96°83 | 97°8 98-4 99°38 | 98:6 | 98:0 | 97-6 | 97:0 97°8
28th day...| 97-0 | 97:0 | 97:4 98:0 98:6 | 98:2 | 98:0 | 97:8 | 97-6 OTT.
29th day...) 97-2 | 97:0 | 97°6 97°6 98:0 | 976 | 98:0 | 984 | 98:2 97-7
30th day...| 97-4 | 97:6 | 98:0 97-4 98:2 | 97°83 | 98:0 | 97-8 | 97-6 97°8
Means...... 97°28 | 97°32 86] 97:99 | 98:66} 97-96 | 98:04|97-76 | 97-48] 97-86

In this period the diurnal variations were almost identical with the
others, and the mean temperature of the whole period was practically the
same as that of the first ten days.

1870.] Action of Claret on the Human Body.
(6) In the Rectum.

Rectum before wine (thermometer inserted for about 3 inches, and kept in
for 20 minutes).

10th day...

Means

8 A.M.

99:2

Hours.

12 noon.| 4 p.m.
99-6 | 99-95
99:2 99-4
99 99-2
99-4. 99-4.
99-6 99-2
99°8 99-6
99-6 99-2
99-6 99-4
99-4 98-6
99-8 99-4
99:50 | 99°29

Mean of
10: Bea the days.
99°8 99:27
99-2 99°25
99°5 99°37
99°6 99-55
99 99:3
99-6 99°55
99-4 99°45
99:2 99-4
99-0 99
99°8 99°65
99:41} 99°38

The mean temperature of the rectum (taken four times a day instead of
three, as in the former experiments, and at different hours) was rather
higher than the mean of the former experiments, viz. as 99°38 to 99:066.

It was also more uniform, both from day to day and hour to hour.

these four hours be accepted as giving the mean temperature of the 24

hours, the rectum temperature was 1°°654 above that in the axilla.

Days.

11th day...
12th day...
13th day...
14th day...
15th day...
16th day...
17th day...
18th day...
19th day...
20th day...

Means

The mean temperature is 0°16 lower.

.| 98°86

Rectum during wine.

8 A.M.

98°6
98-4
98-6
98:8
99:4
99°8
98°6
98°8
98°6
99

Hours.
12noon.| 4 p.m.
99-9 99-2
99:4. 99°6
99-4 99°8
99°8 99-2
99:6 99
99-4 99°6
99:6 99°8
99:6 99-2
99:5 99
99-8 99-4
99°60 | 99°38

Mean of
teenie the days.
99°6 99°37
99°2 99°15
99 99-2
99 99:2,
99 99°25
99-4 99°55
99 99°25
98 98°9
98°4 98°87
99°8 99°95
99:04} 99°22

It is curious that this is almost

precisely the same change as in the case of the axillary temperature; yet

it is probably an accidental coincidence.

The 4 p.m. temperature, which

ought to show the effect of wine, is slightly higher (0°09) than in the
first period; the 10 p.m. and 8 a.m. temperatures are lower by nearly
0°°3, and the 12 o’clock temperature is higher by 0° 1.

The differences are thus slight, and in contrary directions, so that no de-
cided influence, one way or the other, can, we think, be ascribed to the wine.

VOL, XIX.

82 Messrs. Parkes and Wollowicz on the [ Recess,

Rectum after wine.

Hours.
Days. Mean of

the days.

8 a.m. | 12noon.|4 p.m. |10 pa.

—_——— | |

Means...... 99:16| 99-46 | 99°38) 99:28) 99°32

The temperatures are almost precisely the same as in the first period.
The 4 o’clock temperature is identical with that of the wine-period.

4, ACTION ON THE URINE.
Elimination of water by the kidneys.

Twenty-eight fluid ounces were taken as drink, and the water in the
So-called solid food made the total daily ingress of water 724 fluid ounces,
or 2059 cub. centims.

The following are the means of the three periods :—

Amount of water taken

daily in solid food and as Mean amount of urine

passed in 24 hours.

Ist period (water) ....cccccscsese+- 2059 ¢.¢. 1210 ce.
2nd period (wine) ................+. 2010 c.e. 14S rere:
SLanperiods(water)), ca. ..cuecaen de: 2059 c.c. Ti baxere

As 49 cub. centims. less water were taken in the wine-period, the
amount of urine ought perhaps to be increased by this amount, and this
would make it only 13 cub. centims. less than the first period,

It may be concluded that 10 and 20 ounces of light wine (containing
I'l and 22 ounces of alcohol), when substituted for water, had no diu-
retic effect. The amount of alcohol to act as a diuretic was perhaps too
small, as in the former series with the larger quantities of alcohol there
was certainly some increased flow of urinary water.

Elimination of nitrogen by the kidneys.

The same amount of food being given as in the previous experiments,
the amount of nitrogen passing into the body was 17% or 173 grammes,
or probably a little more. The whole of this passed by the urine and
bowels, so thatin this respect the difference in the temperature of the air
had no effect. In other words, although the weather was so hot, there
was no evidence of urea escaping by the skin.

1870. ] Action of Claret on the Human Body. 83

The substances precipitated by Liebig’s mercuric nitrate were as usual
termed urea, and the nitrogen was calculated from this. It was also for
the sake of control determined by soda-lime.

Nitrogen before claret.

Nitrogen Nitrogen
Days. Urea. calculated from by
urea. soda-lime.
grammes. grammes. grammes.
USEC Aye oh 8 se 30°299 14-139 14-211
DMG GAY seh. <0: 33°343 15-560 16°555
BUG Gaye cuenta. 31094 14-487 14-9179
AGL aver feo 5 <a: 34-960 16°315 16933
told Cle | BBRbae nae 31-038 14-484 15°323
Solu (CRN eacsapunee 40-200 18-760 18-639
UG viens... 37°800 16.640 17-469
Sthiday=.5:.)..- 39°633 18-495 18-024
Shilal CBA copoeades 37050 17-290 16-779
HOthidayae. 0s... : 39-940 18-635
Mieans .2....... 35°530 16°680 16:539

The mean of the nine days of ureal nitrogen, which correspond with
the days of soda-lime nitrogen, is 16°493 grammes. The mean of the ten
first days in the previous series, with an equal quantity of food, was
16°211 grammes of nitrogen as calculated from the urea, and 16°226
grammes as determined by soda-lime. In the present experiments the
amounts are higher in a very trifling degree, viz. °379 gramme, and °313
gramme in excess respectively. The difference is so slight (under 6 grains
in 24 hours) that the two series may be considered identical. Possibly as
the man was 4 lbs. heavier, there might be some additional nitrogenous
tissue furnishing the slight excess of nitrogen.

Nitrogen during claret.

: Nitrogen Nitrogen
Days. Urea. calculated from
urea. soda-lime.
grammes. grammes. grammes.
plibhn clay, aa.ee ove 37137 17:331

P2thidayys se... 30°325 16:485 16°839
T3th day.....:... 38°36 17-899 18:825
Ata deliv ices 0c 34°860 16-268 16-074
Guilt Cleme cadens: 30°040 16°352 17:255
HOt Cay ee ters. 37:570 17:532 16°707
Dita dary ou 41:745 19-486 18886
Isth day,........ 35'048 16:355 15-764
19th days........ 34650 16:170 15-443
20th day... 31-510 14-701 14-600
Micatises 24.3. 36°124 16°858 16:421

The variations from the period before claret are so slight, and indeed
G2

84 Messrs. Parkes and Wollowicz on the [ Recess,

insignificant, as to prove that 10 and 20 fluid ounces of claret, taken for
two periods of five days, caused no alteration in the elimination of nitro-
gen, when the egress of nitrogen was constant.

Thus to express the result in grains, the daily nitrogen calculated from
the urea was, in the first period of ten days, 257°37 grains, and in the
second or wine-period 260 grains. In nine days of the two periods, the
daily nitrogen by soda-lime was 255°19 grains in the water-, and 253°35
grains in the wine-period.

Nitrogen after claret.

Nitrogen Nitrogen
Days. Urea. calculated from by
urea. soda-lime.
grammes. grammes. grammes.
Zist day .....-... 45-500 21:233 20°79
22nd) day ~....- 42-900 20:020
DSEGOMW acs e ose 38112 17-780 18-159
JAth days... 36°960 17-448 17-640
DS th Gaye. sc| oc. Steers le cotemeeeenee 14119
26th day......... 42-900 20-020
PHAN OAY nics. fle: 41-128 21-193
28th days... 44-646 20°805 20110
DO tli aye tase 38°739 18 078 18-548
30th day......... 27:°717 12°938 13°324
WWeans!t2.....: 39851 18-883 17-525

As one determination of urea and three determinations of nitrogen by
soda-lime were lost, .in order to find the daily amount of nitrogen in the
whole of the ten days, the soda-lime nitrogen of the 25th day may be
added to the total ureal nitrogen, and the mean taken. If this be done,
the mean daily excretion of nitrogen was 18°362 grammes. This gives
an excess of no less than 1°682 gramme over the first period, and 1:504
over the wine-period. The excess was so large, and was so unhke any-
thing seen before during any of the experiments, as to prove it was not
accidental.

The question now arises, if the increase was owing to the direct effect
of the wine. This seems unlikely, partly because some evidence of in-
crease would then have been obtained from the ten days during which
the wine was taken, and partly from another reason. During this last
period the man became ill; he was not feverish, but his pulse was quiek.
On the 25th, 26th, and 27th days there was some looseness of the bowels
and headache ; he could scarcely eat his food, and lost weight for the first
time.

On the 29th day he was better, and on the 30th felt quite well, and on
that day the nitrogen (as determined in both ways) fell greatly. He
ascribed his illness to the monotony of his life, the sameness of his diet,
and the comparative want of exercise, whilst it is also possible that the

1870. ] Action of Claret on the Human Body. 85

wine, to which he was unaccustomed, and the small allowance of water,
may have had some effect in deranging his nutrition. It seems, however,
fair to conclude that the wine had only an indirect share, if any, in causing
this illness and increased elimination, which was manifestly caused by some
peculiar morbid state of nutrition. It is noticeable in this case that there
was increased elimination of nitrogen (evidently in the form of urea),
without any increase in the mean temperature of the body. There was,
however, an increase in the temperature at 2, 4, and 6 o’clock, when diges-
tion was most active. The gradual loss of weight of the body was very
striking.

The phosphoric acid, chlorine, and free acidity in the urine.

eee Free acidity
osphoric . calculated as
Days. acid. Chlorine. crystallized
oxalic acid.
rammes, rammes. rammes.
UStidaiype ji5.:ti : 1-886 : 7:295 :
AMOUOAY, «ss ccsla- 2-081 8:571
ord day Hed cis 2338 9:045
et Hi LY oon sels at 2°348 9°242 1:865
Ova hy Paes aee 2:327 7TO11 1-415
(Ts1aG hy ae alee: 2-460 8:307 2°192
Te Mayy sss 2s. 2328 6-134 1:890
Silda. 55.25 3: 2°582 6:688 1:891
DEM? Gay, s04.... se 2°340 IS) 2°538
10th day......... 2:272 7-072 1:892
Ltth day. ....4: 2°132 6:467 1828
HE Goi claiy soy. aeca7 2.234 6:399 1-885
liSthiday....>:5 2°352 5524 1-756
Patina Glaiyeny: =. 2% 2:450 6°658 1:940
Stn day sc. 2.00: 2°333 5-403 1:486
NOthidair.. 2.050: 2:442 5-793 2-709
WZchidaiy ves. s< se: 2-577 5°999 2-972
USthi dayne. shace 2-132 6°498 2:948
LUST C BW opecarns 1:942 © 7:045 2°182
Ath day---...... 1-881 §:235 2°503
Ast Clayrss4.cts 2:678 6-276 2°784
22nd day ...... 2°405 7-422 2-457
23rd day ...... 2°265 6:543 2-782
24th day......... 2°453 7494 2°469
2th day.aec2i. 2-138 TNS 2-013
26th. day......... 2286 10°763 1-968
27th day......... 2°798 7-074 3°339
28th day......... 3040 7-025 2°745
AGA Gaye .ccss! 2°7(22, 6:170 2°308
80th day......... 1182 5-286 1-489

The mean quantities are as follows :—

oe Chlorine. Free acidity.
First period (before wine)........ccsseeeceeess 2296 7°708 1-955
Second period (during wine) ............... 2:247 ~ 6202 2-221
Third period (after wine).........0cccesse+s0s 2396 7-176 2-435

Red Bordeaux wine, in quantities of 10 and 20 ounces per diem, did not

86 Messrs. Parkes and Wollowicz on the [ Recess,

affect the excretion of phosphoric acid. The effect on the chlorine is
uncertain, as that ingredient bas such a wide rangeof variation. It is,
however, interesting to note that the mean daily excretion of the whole
thirty days is almost precisely the same as the mean daily excretion of the
twenty-five days in the previous series (viz. 7028 grammes as against
6°915 grammes), and this proves the equality of the diet.

The acidity of the urine was increased during the wine-period, and this
continued afterwards. It may be observed that the mean free acidity of
the former experiments was almost precisely the same as in these experi-
ments during the water-period (viz. 1°974 as against 1-955 gramme), and
was very nearly the same in the alcoholic as in the wine-period (viz. 2°342
as against 2°221).

It seems fair to conclude that the free acidity was really increased, and
that the increase continued subsequently.

5. Tue Auvine DIscHARGEs.

Weight of Stools.

Days. | Ounces. | Grammes.|} Days. | Ounces. |Grammes.|| Days. | Ounces. | Grammes.
ea SD ll. | 4:25 21. | 33
246 IA er Ranss 22.
ome face. 13. 5°75 23. | 8:33
4h 14 8-1 24.
Da ee 15 4 25. | 6°75
6. | 4:25 16 4 26. 4:5
ian aU AVY Sess: MG 32) D
oh ine acee 1823) 97-25 28. | 3:25
9. 3°75 19. 3°75 29.
LOD OF 20 od 30. | 7
Means| 4:°147 | 117-56° || ...... 4-060 Uae ai cone 3°788 107-4

The nitrogen was determined twice, viz. on the 10th day (last day be-
fore wine), and on the 19th day (last day but one of wine). Unfortunately
there had been some constipation before the 10th day, and the stool was
unusually copious and less watery ; it represented, in fact, some accumula-
tion, and therefore the nitrogen ought to be credited in part to the previous
days.

The following Table gives the results :—

Percentage. Amount of
Days. Weight of stool. | ————>——_______ | nlitrogenminga
Solids. | Water. |Nitrogen. hours.
ounces. | grammes. grammes.
10th day (water
drinking) ...... 7:97 226:0 | 32405 | 67:595 | 1:294 2925

19th day (wine
drinking) ...... 3°75 1063 | 21:820} 78180 | 1:207 1-283

1870. ] Action of Claret on the Human Body. 87

Looking to the mean weight of all the stools, to the particular cireum-
stances of the 10th day’s stool, and the very nearly equal percentage of
nitrogen on the 10th and 19th days, it may be concluded that the wine did
not affect the intestinal discharges either as regards quantity or nitrogen.

6. Tur ELIMINATION OF ALCOHOL.

As in the former series, the numerous experiments we had to perform
prevented us from thoroughly investigating this difficult problem. We
tested the appearance of alcohol in the excreta by the bichromate-of-potas-
sium test as before. The general results were as follows :—

Elimination by the breath.

In the first period the bichromate test was not tried on the first day ;
it was very slightly changed in colour on the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th days,
when the breath was blown through the test for 15 minutes about 2
o'clock. On the remaining Sth, 6th, 7th, 8th, 9th, and 10th days, no
change was produced. On the Ist day of wine after dinner, the colour
became green in eight minutes, on the 2nd day in six minutes, and subse-
quently a little sooner. On the 16th and subsequent days (when the wine
was doubled) the change was much greater. In the evening, except in
one or two cases, no change was produced. On the 21st day (1st day
after wine) and subsequent days there was no alteration.

The breath was condensed by a freezing-mixture on the 9th day about
4 o'clock; about 4 cub. centim. was collected ; it was tested for alcohol by
the Iodoform test, but none was found; it was unfortunately not examined
by the bichromate test. On the 20th day (20 ounces of wine) the breath
was again condensed ; it gave an immediate marked green reaction with
the bichromate test. On the 22nd day (the 2nd after the wine) it was
again condensed, and gave still an immediate reaction, though not so
marked as on the 20th day ; so that two days after the wine was left off,
some was passing off by the lungs, though it was not detected by merely
breathing through the test.

On the 25th and 28th days, when the breath was again condensed, no
effect was produced on the bichromate test.

Elimination by the skin.

In the former series of experiments, when the perspiration was obtained
by putting the arm in an hermetically sealed glass jar, no effect was pro-
duced in the bichromate test by the sweat before alcohol had been taken.

But on this occasion, when 12 cub. centims. of perspiration were collected
in four hours on the 5th day, the bichromate test was at once made green.
No alcohol was detected by the Iodoform test, but we are not certain if
this can be relied upon. This was on the 17th May, and no alcoholic
liquid had been taken since the 25th April.

ee ee. tS oh lhc ee

88 Messrs. Parkes and Wollowicz on the [Recess,

It seemed improbable that alcohol, taken so long before, could be still
passing off; and if not, then the perspiration may at times contain some
non-alcoholic substance capable of reducing the bichromate.

The perspiration of the arm was condensed on the 10th day (before
wine), on the 19th day (during wine), and on the 26th, 28th, and 30th
days (after wine). In all cases an extremely marked green reaction was
at once given.

We conclude, therefore, that fresh experiments are necessary with re-

gard to the correctness of the bichromate test, when applied to the con-

densed perspiration.

Elimination by the kidneys.

The examination was conducted in the same way as on the former occa-

sion, the urine being first distilled, the distillate tested with the bichro-

mate test, and if no reaction was given redistilled.
The following Table gives the results :—

Reaction with bichromate.

Days.
Ist distillate. 2nd distillate.
Gthiday GVALEr)........2...02: A very slight and scarcely) A very slight change, scarcely
perceptible change. to be affirmed*.
15th day (wine, 10 oz.) ... No change. No change*.
16th day (wine, 20 oz.) ... No change. No change*.
18th day (wine, 20 oz.) ... No change. Slight.
20th day (wine, 20 oz.) ... Slight. Marked.
22nd day (water) ..<.....-..: None. None.
Diba day (Water) ......2:..-- None. None.

We conclude from this Table that when 10 ounces of wine (containing
1-1 ounce of absolute alcohol) were taken, no alcohol passed inte the urine.
On the 16th day, when 20-ounces (=2°2 ounces of absolute alcohol) were
taken, none was found in the urine; the next day no examination was
made, but on the 18th day alcohol was detected, and two days later the
reaction was marked. Two days after the wine was left off no alcohol was
found.

Therefore, when this man took 2 ounces of absolute alcohol day after
day, some of it was eliminated by the urine. When he took only 1 ounce,
none was eliminated during the space of five days. If, as has been sur-
mised by Dr. Anstie, the appearance of alcohol in the urine indicates that
there is an excess in the body, it seems clear that this man cannot take
much more than 1 ounce without the urine giving evidence of it, and
thereby proving excess. It soon disappeared from the urine, certainly
on the 2nd day (the first day’s urine was not examined), whereas, on the
former occasion, when a much larger quantity had been taken, it could be
detected five days after it had been discontinued.

* Tested also with the Iodoform test. No reaction.

1870. ] Action of Claret on the Human Body. 89

Llimination by the bowels.

. No experiments were made.

GENERAL CONCLUSIONS,

1. The general results of these experiments are in all respects identical
with the experiments on alcohol and brandy, that is to say, there was a
marked effect on the heart, coinciding tolerably well in amount with the
effect produced by pure alcohol in the former experiments; there was no
unequivocal alteration of temperature in the axilla or rectum, no alteration
in the elimination of nitrogen, for the increase in the last period cannot be
eredited to the direct effect of the wine; no alteration in the phosphoric
acid of the urine; some augmentation of the free acidity of the urine ; no
alteration of the alvine discharges. In other words, claret-wine in the above
quantities cannot so far be distinguished in its effect from pure alcohol. Its
most marked effect, the increase of the heart’s action, must be ascribed to
the alcohol, in great measure, though the ethers may play some slight part.

But it would be going too far to assert that the dietetic effects of red
Bordeaux wine and of dilute alcohol are identical. The difference between
them must probably be sought in their effects on primary digestion and
assimilation, delicate and subtle influences which experiments like those
recorded in the paper do not touch. ‘The infiuence of the sugar, of the salts,
and of the acidity must also be appreciated by other methods. The man
himself affirmed that the wine agreed with him better than the alcohol or
brandy, but the large quantity he took of these last fluids vitiates the
comparison.

These experiments on wine enabled us to define somewhat better than the
previous trials what might be considered moderation for this man. The 10
ounces of wine, containing about | fluid ounce of pure alcohol, did not cause
the least unpleasant feeling of heat or flushing. The 20 ounces (containing

almost 2 fluid ounces of alcoho!) were manifestly too much. He felt hot

and uncomfortable, was flushed, the face was somewhat congested, and he
was a little drowsy. Moreover, as already mentioned, alcohol then began
to appear in the urine. Therefore he ought certainly not to take much
more than 1 fluid ounce of absolute alcohol in 24 hours.

With regard to the propriety of this healthy man taking any alcohol,
we have no hesitation in saying he would be better without it. His heart
naturally acts quickly and strongly enough ; alcohol increases its action too
much, and might lead on to alteration in its condition, or to injury of
vessels, if any degeneration were to take place in them. ‘This man had
gone through the Abyssinian campaign, and stated that when the force was
without rum, owing to deficiency of transport beyond Antalo, he had in
no way felt the want of the stimulant, though some of his comrades did.
This seems to confirm our opinion, that alcohol for him is not a necessity,
and indeed is not desirable. .

VOL, XIX. H

90 Dr. W. J. M. Rankine on the [ Recess,

“On the Mathematical Theory of Combined Streams.” By W. J.
Macquorn Kankine, C.K., LU.D., F.R.SS. Lond. and Edin.
Received Sept. 10, 1870.

1. Object of this Investigation.—The principles of the action of com-
bined streams were to a certain extent investigated by Venturi, and stated
in his essay ‘Sur la Communication latérale du Mouvement dans les
Fluides’ (Paris, 1798). The principle of the conservation of momentum,
so far as I know, was first explicitly applied to combined streams by Mr.
William Froude, F.R.S., in a paper on Giffard’s Injector, read to the
British Association at Oxford, in i860, and published in the Transactions
of the Sections, p. 211. Various other authors have treated the same
problem by different methods, based virtually on the same principle.
A very complete and precise investigation of the theory of combined
streams, in every case in which two streams only are combined, is con-
tained in Professor Zeuner’s treatise ‘ Das Locomotivenblasrohr”’ (Ziirich,
1863), The theoretical conclusions are tested by comparison with experi-
ment, and applied to practical questions, especially those relating to the
apparatus from which the treatise takes its name. The object of the present
investigation is to apply similar principles to the combination of any
number of streams; and the demonstration of the fundamental dynamic
equation differs from that given by Zeuner in method, though not in prin-
ciple, being effected at one operation by the direct application of the prin-
ciple of the equality of impulse and momentum, instead of by the con-
sideration of the loss of energy that takes place during the combination
of the streams.

2. Terms and Notation used, and Suppositions made.—The several
streams which are combined will be called before their junction, the com-
ponent streams; the stream formed by their combination will be called
the resultant stream. ‘The passages through which the component and
resultant streams flow will be called respectively the supply-tubes and the
discharge-tube. The combination of the streams will be supposed to take
place in a short cylindrical chamber, with its axis parallel to the direction
of flow, which will be called the junetion-chamber.

At one end of the junction-chamber are the outlets of the supply-tubes,
which will be called the nozzles; at the other end, the inlet of the dis-
charge-tube, which will be called the throat. It will be supposed, further,
that the supply-tubes are so formed as to direct the component streams at
the nozzles, so that they shall all flow sensibly parallel to each other and
to the resultant stream. The principal symbols used are as follows: for
any one of the component streams :—

a, area of nozzle ;
v, velocity of flow at nozzle ;
S,, bulkiness, or reciprocal of density at nozzle.

The several component streams may be distinguished from each other,
when required, by suffixes; as 1, 2, 3, &c.

1870. | Mathematical Theory of Combined Streams, 91

For the resultant stream :
A, area of throat ;
V, velocity of flow at throat ;
S,, bulkiness, or reciprocal of density at throat.
We tensities of pressure, in absolute units on the unit of area:
Pp» at the nozzle end of junction-chamber ;
P,, at the throat.
(These may be converted into wnits of weight on the unit of area, by
dividing by 4).
The flow of each stream is supposed to be steady. The fluids may be
either liquid, vaporous, gaseous, or mixed.
3. Equation of Continuity.—The mass of fiuid that enters the junction-

‘ 6 O c A : av ;
chamber through a given nozzle in a unit of time is pa The mass

T 0

, SEN
discharged in the same time at the throat is “g_- The flow being steady,
0

the following equation must at every instant be fulfilled:

AV av
S a . . 3 . ° e . (1)

0 0
If S, and the several values of s, are given, that equation gives the velo-
city a the resultant stream in ae of those of the component streams ;
Viz. 3;
VapE Se eee ee es (IA)
If all the fluids are liquids, each of sensibly invariable bulkiness, we
have also AV=3. av; that is, the volume of flow of the resultant stream
is equal to the ageregate of the volumes of flow of the component streams ;
but if any or all of the streams are vaporous or gaseous, the values of s,
will depend upon that of p,, and the value of 8, upon that of P,, and upon
the changes of bulkiness of the fluids which may take place in the junc-
tion-chamber, through change of PTIpEEADEC) change of condition, or
chemical action.
In any case S, may be regarded as a given fuiction of P,, and of the

: au,
mutual proportions of the several values of ae other words, of the
0

ingredients in the resultant stream.
4. Dynamical Equation.—The aggregate momentum of the mass of
fluid that enters the junction-chamber through the nozzles in a unit of

2
time is 2. =. The momentum of the equal mass which leaves the junc-
, |

tion-chamber through the throat in the same time is 5
0

The forward impulse exerted in a unit of time upon the mass of fluid
in the junction-chamber by the pressure at the nozzle end of the chamber
is p,A. The backward impulse exerted in the same time on the same
mass by the pressure at the throat-end of the chamber is P,A. By the

92 Dr. W. J. M. Rankine on the [ Recess,

second law of motion, the difference between those impulses is equal to the
change of momentum produced ; that is to say,

es AV?
A(P,—p,)=3 =2{@0-v)}; le

or dividing both sides by A, .
eee av ]
P,— =32 _f=3{2 —V) i.
Pho ge Va ee oP

0
And this is the general dynamical equation of the combination of any
number of streams of any fluids.

If the preceding equation, as applied to a combination of two streams
only, be compared with the equation not numbered, which immediately
precedes equation 60 in Zeuner’s treatise, it will be seen that they are
virtually identical, although different in form, and Hee by different
methods.

5. Loss of Energy at Junction.—If a given mass of any fluid at the
bulkiness s and pressure p is contained in a reservoir, from which it is
capable of being expelled by the inward motion of a piston loaded with an
external force equivalent to the pressure, it is known that the potential
energy of the mass of fluid and of the piston relatively to a point at the
level of the centre of mass of the fluid is expressed by multiplying the

mass by - sdp, the relation between s and p being that which is called

0
adiabatic ; that is to say, such that no heat is received or given out by the
fluid. Hence the loss of energy in the junction-chamber in each unit of

time is given by the following expression :—

2 {25+ ap) | —5 BY (N. a sa), weer

of which the first, or positive term, we the aggregate energy, actual
and potential, of the component streams as they enter the junction-cham-
ber; and the second, or negative term, expresses the total energy, actual
and potential, of the resultant stream as it leaves that chamber. That lost
energy takes the form partly of visible eddies and partly of invisible
molecular motions—that is, of heat.

The integral expressing the aggregate potential energy of the component
streams may be put in the following form :—

0 € avs
0 So
If no change of total bulkiness arises from the mixture of the component
streams, the volume occupied by a given mass of the mixture is simply the
sum of the volumes of its ingredients; so that we have
AVE 900800 9. a
Ss 8,

Se a

1870. ] Mathematical Theory of Combined Streams. 93

and the expression for the loss of energy becomes

aot_AV?_AV("* gp (3C)
Geass 8

When the fluids are all liquids, whose compressibility may be neglected,

we have Pe SdP=S,(P,—p,); and substituting for the difference of
Po
pressures its value, according to equation (2), the following expression is

found for the loss of energy at the junction,
ef oir. OO ee)
So 2
that is to say, in the case of liquids all the energy due to the several velo-
cities (v—V) of the component streams relatively to the resultant stream
is lost.

When the expression (3 D) is reduced to a single term, it becomes the
well-known value of the loss of energy of a single stream of liquid at a
sudden enlargement in a tube.

6. Efficiency of Combined Streams.—The efficiency of a set of combined
streams may be defined as the fraction expressing the ratio borne by the
total energy of the resultant stream after the combination to the aggregate
energy of the component streams before the combination. It is expressed

as follows :—
=P
AV {V? 0
aense iG SS Sd
: { : +f P|

lef)

7. General Problem of Combined Streams.—In most cases the problem
of combined streams takes one or other of the two following forms. In each
of the two forms the areas of the nozzles a,, a,, &c. are given, and also the
area of the throat, A. ;

First Form.—The quantities given, besides the before-mentioned areas,
are the pressure at the nozzles, p,, and the velocities of the component
streams, v,, &c. The functional values given are those of ,, ,, S995 &c., in

(4)

terms of p,, and of S, in terms of P,, = “ey &c. Those functional
; 0? 1 0? 2
values are to be substituted in the equations (1) and (2); and the solution
of these equations will give the numerical values of V and of P,. In the
case of liquids of sensibly constant bulkiness, s,, ,, &c., and S, are quan-
tities sensibly independent of p, and P,; and then equations (1) and (2)
can be separately solved without elimination, giving respectively V and P,.
Second Form.—Kach of the component streams flows through a passage
whose factor of resistance, f, is given, from a separate reservoir in which
the pressure p and the elevation 2 of the surface above the junction-
chamber are given. The resultant stream flows through a passage whose
VOL. XIX, I

94 On the Mathematical Theory of Combined Streams. [Nov.17,

factor of resistance, F, is given, into a reservoir in which the pressure P
and the elevation Z of the surface above the junction-chamber are given.
These, together with the areas A, a,, a,, &c., are the quantities given.
The functional values given are those of the bulkiness, s,,,, s,,,, &c., and S,,
as before; also the following values of the velocities, according to well-
known principles in hydrodynamics ; for any component stream,

iL
2ge+2f sdp
A e) Po 5 . e ° e e (5)
Ls ay

and for the resultant stream,

2gZ+2 SdP
ee lc as ;
1+F
The functional values given are to be substituted in equations (1) and
(2), whose solution will then give the numerical values of p, and P,; and
from these and the other data the numerical values of », &c. and of V
may be calculated.

November 17, 1870.

General Sir EDWARD SABINE, K.C.B., President, in the Chair.

In pursuance of the Statutes, notice of the ensuing Anniversary Meeting
was given from the Chair.

General Boileau, Mr. Busk, Mr. David Forbes, Sir John Lubbock, and
Mr. Mivart, having been nominated by the President, were elected by
ballot Auditors of the Treasurer’s accounts on the part of the Society.

Mr. Andrew Noble, Capt. Sherard Osborn, and Mr. George Frederic
Verdon were admitted into the Society.

Anders Jéus Angstrom, of Upsala, and Joseph Antoine Ferdinand
Plateau, of Ghent, were proposed for election as Foreign Members, and
notice was given from the Chair that these gentlemen would be ballotted
for at the next Meeting.

The Presents received were laid on the table, and thanks ordered for
them. |

The following communications were read :—

I, “ Researches into the Chemical Constitution of the Opium Bases.
—Part IV. On the Action of Chloride of Zine on Codeia.” By
Aveustus Martuizssen, F.R.S., Lecturer on Chemistry at St.
Bartholomew’s Hospital, and W. Burnsipz, of Christ’s Hos-
pital. Received June 23, 1870. (See page 71.) .

1870. ] Prof. Owen on the Fossil Mammals of Australia. 95

IJ. “ Experiments on the Action of Red Bordeaux Wine (Claret) on
the Human Body.” By H. A. Parxss, M.D., F.R.S., Professor
of Hygiene in the Army Medical School, and Count Cyprian
Woxtowicz, M.D., Assistant Surgeon, Army Medical Staff.
Received July 5, 1870. (See page 73.)

Ill. “On the Mathematical Theory of Combined Streams.” By
W. J. Macquorn Rankine, C.E., LL.D., F.R.SS. Lond. and
Edinb. Received Sept. 10, 1870. (See page 90.)

IV. “On the Fossil Mammals of Australia.—Part IV. Dentition and
Mandible of Thylacoleo Carnifex, with Remarks on the Argument
for its Herbivority.” By Prof. Owrn, F.R.S. &c. Received
September 27, 1870.

(Abstract. )

In this paper the author, referring in the Introductory Section ($ 1) to
objections published to his former restorations and inferences as to the
function of the dentition of Thylacoleo, proceeds to give descriptions, with
figures, of ($ 2) an upper jaw and maxillary teeth, and (§ 3) of a portion
of the mandible with mandibular teeth, from tertiary deposits at Gowrie
Creek, Queensland, presented to the British Museum by Sir Daniel
Cooper, Bart.

He then describes certain specimens and photographs of maxillary teeth
(§ 4), and of mandibular teeth (§ 5) of the Thylacoleo, subsequently ob-
tained by Prof. A. M. Thomson, of Sydney, and Gerard Krefft, Esq., Cu-
rator of the Museum of Natural History, Sydney, New South Wales, from
caves in Wellington valley, for the exploration of which a grant had been
voted by the Local Legislature of New South Wales.

Section 6 is given to a description of the specimen in the British
Museum, and a cast in the Museum at Sydney of an entire inferior in-
cisor, transmitted, with the photograph above mentioned, to the author.
The guiding principle in inferring function from form of teeth is next de-
fined ($ 7), and the author proceeds to discuss the objection from the loca-
tion of laniaries in§ 8. The dentitions of Thylacoleo and of Phascolarctos
are compared in § 9; andthe results contrasted with those of the advocates
of the herbivority of both genera, which were illustrated by the figures
2&4 in the ‘Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society,’ vol. xxiv.
pp. 312, 313 (1868).

In § 10 the deductions from the mandibular characters of carnivorous
and herbivorous marsupials are tested, and those characters illustrated by
descriptions and figures of the lower jaw in Thylacoleo, Cheiromys, Pla-
giaulax, Thylacinus, Sarcophilus, Phascolarctos, and Hypsiprymnus. The
testimony to the native food of the Aye-aye is sifted in§ 11, and the

96 Prof. Owen on the Fossil Mammals of Australia. [Nov. 17,

bearing of the characters of its mandible and dentition on the question of
the carnivority or herbivority of Thylacoleo is weighed. A like comparison
and physiological consideration are applied to the mandibular characters of
Thylacoleo, Plagiaulax, and the true Rodeutia in § 12; and the author
next ($13) proceeds to the consideration of the form, structure, and
growth of the large incisors in the Diprodont paucidentate Marsupials,
and in the lemurine and lissencephalous Rodents. To the affirmation of
“the obviously phytophagous type of the incisors of Thylacoleo and
Plagiaulax,” the author, referring to the descriptions and figures of those
teeth in the preceding part of his paper, enters upon a consideration of
the relations of their differences from those teeth in the truly phyto-
phagous Marsupials and Placentals to interrupted and continuous applica-
tion of teeth ($ 14). The alleged adaptability of the carnassials in Thyla-
coleo to reduction of vegetable food leads next to a consideration of the
work of the molar machinery in known existing Herbivora (§ 15). In
section 16 the place, and especially the family relations, of the Thy-
lacoleo in the Marsupial order are considered. Instances of existing di-
protodonts subsisting on animal food, and of existing polyprotodonts on
vegetable food, are adduced ; and, after comparisons with the genera Ma-
cropus, Halmaturus, Lagorchestes, Heteropus, Petrogale, Osphranter,
Dendrolagus, Hypsiprymnus, Bettongia, Potorous, Dorcopsis, Cuscus,
Phascolarctos, Phalangista, Hepoona, Dactylopsila, Petaurus, Belideus,
Acrobata, Petaurista, Dromicia, Tarsipes, the author is led to assign
Plagiaulax and Thylacoleo to a distinct family of Diprotodont Marsupials
under the name “ Paucidentata,’’ in reference to the reduction of the molar
teeth to one on each side of the upper jaw, and two on each side of the
lower jaw. He then (in § 17) discusses the reality and value of the indica-
tions of tendency from the “ general to the particular’’ in the dentition of
the mesozoic and neozcic Paucidentate Marsupials. The objections to the
predaceous nature of Thylacoleo and Plagiaulax from their alleged feeble-
ness and dwarfishness are discussed in § 18. The groundson which John
Hunter was led to refer the molar of Mastodon ohioticus to either a carni-
vorous or a mixed-feeding animal, and those on which the author refers the
dentition and skull of T’hylacoleo to a carnivorous species, are contrasted,
and the nature of a disparaging comparison is exposed in § 19.

The author concludes by a description of certain unequal phalanges,
which supported a strong claw, bound close by a basal bony sheath, as in
_the Lion, obtained from the breccia-caves of Wellington valley, and for
which, among the fossils thence exhumed, there is not, at present, any
other claimant save Zhylacoleo.

1870. | On the Indian Pendulum-observations. 97

November 24, 1870.
‘General Sir EDWARD SABINE, K.C.B., President, in the Chair.

In pursuance of the Statutes, notice was given from the Chair of the
ensuing Anniversary Meeting, and the list of Officers and Council proposed
for election was read as follows :—

President.—General Sir Edward Sabine, R.A., K.C.B., D.C.L., LL.D.
Treasurer.—William Spottiswoode, Esq., M.A.
( William Sharpey, M.D., LL.D.
Secretaries.— i George Gabriel Stokes, Esq., M.A., D.C.L., LL.D.
Foreign Secretary.—Prof. William Hallowes Miller, M.A., LL.D.
Other Members of the Council_—George Burrows, M.D.; Heinrich
Debus, Hsq., Ph.D. ; Prof. Peter Martin Duncan, M.B.; Sir Philip de M.
Grey-Egerton, Bart.; Prof. George Carey Foster, B.A.; Francis Galton,
Esq. ; John Peter Gassiot, Esq., D.C.L.; Joseph Dalton Hooker, C.B.,
M.D. William Huggins, Esq.,D.C.L., LL.D.; Prof. George M. Zumphry,
M.D.; John Gwyn Jeffreys, Esq.; Sir John Lubbock, Bart.; Charles
William Siemens, Esq., D.C.L.; Prof. Henry J. Stephen Smith, M.A. ;
Prof. John Tyndall, LL.D.; Prof. Alexander W. Williamson, Ph.D.

Pursuant to notice given at the last Meeting, Sir John Rennie proposed
and General Boileau seconded His Grace the Duke of Sutherland for elec-
tion and immediate ballot.

The ballot having been taken, the Duke of Sutherland was declared
duly elected.

Pursuant to notice given at the last Meeting, Anders Jons Angstrom, of
- Upsala, and Joseph Antoine Ferdinand Plateau, of Ghent, were ballotted
for and elected Foreign Members of the Society.

The following communications were read. :—

I. “Communication from the Secretary of State for India relative
to Pendulum Observations now in progress in India in connexion
with the Great Trigonometrical Survey under the Superinten-
dence of Colonel J. T. Warxer, R.E., F.R.S.” Read by order
of the President and Council.

India Office, S.W., 3rd October, 1870.

S1tr,—I am directed by the Secretary of State for India to transmit to
you, for the information of the President and Council of the Royal Society,
the enclosed copy of a letter from Colonel Walker, the Superintendent of
the Great Trigonometrical Survey of India, on the pendulum-observations

that have been carried on since 1865 by Captain Basevi, together with a

note, tabulated results, and a Map of India showing the pendulum-stations,

The Duke of Argyll will be obliged if, in accordance with Colonel
Walker’s wish, the President and Council would be so good as to furnish

98 On the Indian Pendulum-observations. [Noy. 24,

His Grace with any suggestions that may occur to them with reference to
supplementary measures that may appear necessary in order to complete
the operations which were commenced at the suggestion of General Sabine,
and with the concurrence of the Council.
I am, Sir,
Your obedient Servant,
J. Cosmo MELVILL.

The Secretary to the Royal Society.

Enclosure No. |.
Government of India, Home Department—Geogr phen

To His Grace the Right Honourable the Duke of Argyll, Kt., Her
Majesty’s Secretary of State for India.

Simla, the 26th of August, 1870.

My Lorp Duxe,—Referring to Sir Charles Wood’s despatch in the
Military Department No. 271, dated the 23rd of August, 1864, authorizing
the carrying out of certain pendulum experiments in connexion with the
operations of the Great Trigonometrical Survey of India, at the re-
commendation of the President and Council of the Royal Society, we have
the honour to transmit, for your Grace’s information, copy of a letter from
Colonel Walker, No. 49-793, dated the 11th instant, together with its
enclosures, showing what has been done and what remains to be done to
complete the original programme.

2. With reference to the last paragraph of Colonel Walker’s letter,
we beg that the President and Council of the Royal Society may be
invited to suggest, at an early date, any supplementary measures which
they may consider desirable.

We have the honour to be,
My Lord Duke,
Your Grace’s most obedient, humble Servants,
Mayo.
Napier oF MAGDALA.
JOHN STRACHEY.
R. TEMPLE.
J. F. STEPHEN.
B. H. Extis.
H. W. Norman.

Enclosure No. 2.
From Colonel J. T. Walker, R.E., Superintendent Great Trigonometrical
Survey of India, to the Secretary.to the Government of India, Home

Department, Simla.
Dated Mussoorie, 11th August, 1870.

Srr,—I have the honour to report that the pendulum-observations
which have been carried on since the year 1865, by Captain Basevi, in con-

1870. ] On the Indian Pendulum-observations. 99

nexion with the operations of the Trigonometrical Survey of India, at the
recommendation of the President and Council of the Royal Society, are
now nearly completed, in conformity with the original programme of opera-
tions which was sanctioned by the Right Honourable the Secretary of State
for India, in his military letter No. 271, dated 23rd August 1864, to the
Governor-General in Council.

(2.) The results are of much importance, not only as affording inde-
pendent information on the figure of the earth, but as throwing some light
on “the laws of the local variations of gravity which are superposed on
the grand variation from the poles to the equator ;’’ thus it will, I trust,
be conceded that they amply fulfil the purposes contemplated in the
‘Correspondence and Proceedings of the Council of the Royal Society
concerning Pendulum-Observations in India.’

(3.) But, before the operations are brought to a close, I think it is
desirable that the President and Council of the Royal Society should be
informed of what has been done hitherto, and of what remains to be done
to carry out the original programme of operations ; also that they should
be invited to suggest any supplementary measures which they may consider
necessary in order to complete the operations, and thus perfect a work
which was commenced at the suggestion of the President and with the
hearty approval of the Council, and in the success of which they take a
lively interest.

(4.) I have therefore prepared the accompanying note on the opera-
tions in explanation of what has been done hitherto, and of what remains
to be done to complete the original programme; and I beg leave to request
chat the Secretary of State may be moved to communicate it to the
President and Council of the Royal Society, and to invite their opinions
and suggestions. The Note is accompanied with a map on which the
positions of the pendulum stations are indicated,

I have the honour to be, Sir,
Your most obedient Servant,
J. T. Waker, Colonel R.E.,
Supdt. Great Trigonometrical Survey of India.

Note on the Pendulum-observations in India, which are being carried on
by Captain J. P. Basevi, in connexion with the operations of the Great
Trigonometrical Survey of India.

The observations have been made with the two invariable pendulums
of the Royal Society, which are known as No. 4 and No. 1821. The number
of vibrations in twenty-four hours is determined by observing the coinci-
dences of each pendulum with the pendulum of a clock by Shelton, which
is also the property of the Royal Society. The pendulums are swung, one
at a time, in the receiver of a vacuum apparatus out of which as much air
as possible is withdrawn by an air-pump, and the rate of the clock is de-
termined every night.

100 On the Indian Pendulum-observations. [Nov. 24,

(2.) Captain Basevi’s daily course of procedure is as follows. At 6 A.M.
he sets in motion the pendulum which is under observation. At 7 a.m.
he observes three coincidences and reads the thermometers and pressure-
gauge. Between 7 a.m. and 4 p.m. he observes a coincidence and reads
the thermometers and the gauge, five times at intervals of 1} hour. At
4 p.m. he closes this portion of the work by observing three coincidences
and again reading the thermometers and the gauge. Thus for nearly ten
hours of the day Captain Basevi never permits himself to be absent for more
than a few minutes at a time from the pendulums. These frequent ob-
servations are necessary in order that the temperatures may be exactly
determined. At 8 to 10 p.m. he observes transits.

(3.) Originally it was expected that, by employing a vacuum-apparatus,
the pendulum might be vibrated for twenty-four hours before the vibrations
became too small for the observation of coincidences, and consequently that
the rate derived from the coincidences would be wholly independent of
irregularities in the clock’s rate in different parts of the twenty-four hours.
But this would have necessitated observations of the temperature at regular
intervals throughout the twenty-four hours, which, as a rule, would have
been impossible, though a few such groups of observations have been taken
experimentally. Moreover at the commencement of the operations the
vacuum-cylinder could not be made sufficiently air-tight to admit af so
protracted an observation.

(4.) Each pendulum is observed a certain number of days with the
face to the front, and then as many days with the face to the rear. At the
first four stations observations were taken for five days on each face, making
altogether twenty days’ observations for both pendulums; as, however, it
was found that the theoretical probable error of the mean of the ten days’
observations by a single pendulum was only +°05 of a vibration, the
number of observations was subsequently limited to six days on both
faces, making altogether twelve days’ work at each station.

(5.) The observations are now being printed in the office of the Trigo-
nometrical Survey, and a few specimen pages accompany this note. A
preliminary abstract of the mean results by both pendulums is also given,
and a map indicating the positions of the stations of observation*.

(6.) The results obtained hitherto are not final; the coefficients of
the corrections for temperature and pressure have not yet been conclusively
determined, and the reductions to mean sea-level will probably be effected
when the calculations of the influence of local irregularities in the crust of
the earth have been carried to a greater distance from the stations than has
hitherto been practicable.

(7.) Of these corrections the most important is that for temperature ;
the mean temperature of the observations ascends from a minimum of 54°
at the base station Kew, to a maximum of 88° at Namthabad, being a

* [It has not been thought requisite to publish this map.—G. G. S.]

1870.] On the Indian Pendulum-observations. 101

range of 34°; as the correction is approximately equal to one vibration
for 2° of temperature, or seventeen vibrations for the extreme range, the
true value must necessarily be determined with the utmost possible
accuracy.

(8.) In Section XIII. of my General Report on the Operations of the
Trigonometrical Survey for 1866-67, I have fully described certain mea-
sures which were taken to determine the coefficient of linear expansion.
Briefly, they were as follows: vibrations were observed, at high and low
temperatures, under the lowest pressure which could be obtained in the
vacuum-apparatus at Kaliana, and at the natural pressure at Masoori; the
expansions were also determined at high and low temperatures by direct
micrometric measurement, with the following results :-—

Pressure, in Factor of expansion

inches. for 1° Fahrenheit.
At Kaliana .. 3°5 000,011,10 :
,, Masoori .. 235 000,010,01 } LY) ORI
eee Delia ss, 27°7 000,009,73 by direct measurement.

Thus the value of the expansion which was determined from vibrations
under a pressure of 3°5 inches was 14 per cent. greater than the value
determined by direct measurement, at the natural pressure. I stated in
my report that ‘‘ whether this is due to an actual increase of expansion for
a decrease of pressure or to the action of other phenomena which are at
present unknown or only imperfectly known, is a problem for future
solution.”

(9.) Experiments have been made at the Kew Observatory for the
purpose of investigating this question; they are described in the ‘ Pro-
ceedings of the Royal Society,’ No. 113, 1869. Owing, however, to
difficulties which were experienced in working with artificial temperatures,
the results were not conclusive as regards the present difficulty, and the
hope was expressed that the question would find its best solution by our
labours in India.

(10.) The temperature-coefficients which have been employed in the
preliminary reductions are those which were obtained from the observations
at Kaliana, viz. :

For No. 4 pendulum 0°485 vibration per diem for 1° Fahrenheit.

29 No. 1821 9 0:470 : 29 9 99

(11.) The pressure-coefficient which has been employed hitherto is
the mean of the two values determined at Kew, or 0°32 vibration per diem
for each inch of pressure at 32° Fahrenheit.

(12.) In the reductions to the sea-level, the surface-density has been
assumed to be half the mean density of the earth. Dr. Young’s formula
has been used exclusively for stations situated on tolerably level plains,
but for stations on hills the observations have been first reduced to the
general level of the country by computing the vertical attraction of the
elevated mass down to this level, the mass being divided into a number of

102 On the Indian Pendulum-observations. [Nov. 24,

compartments by concentric circles and radii ; they have then been reduced
to the sea-level by Dr. Young’s formula. The stations thus corrected are
Masoori, Usira, Ehmadpur, and Somtana; at Masoori, curvature was taken
into account, and the calculations were extended to a distance of 100 miles
all round; but at the three other stations curvature was not allowed for, as
the calculations were only carried to a distance of one mile.

(13.) The preceding details will suffice to explain all that is necessary
regarding the observations, and the preliminary results which have been
derived therefrom which accompany this note. I will therefore now pro-
ceed to indicate the principles by which we have been guided in selecting
the positions of the pendulum-stations.

(14.) In the first instance, the original programme of observing at a
certain number of stations of the Great Are was duly carried out; the
pendulums were swung at eighteen stations between Cape Comorin and the
Siwalik Hills at the base of the southern slopes of the Himalayas, and at
two stations north of the Siwaliks. 3

(15.) As yet no observations have been taken on the higher ranges,
or on the tablelands, of the Himalayas, and thus the full influence of:
these ranges in producing local variations of gravity has not yet been
ascertained. But the observations at the five northernmost stations indi-
cate that there is much probability that the density of the strata of the
earth’s crust under and in the vicinity of the Himalayan mountains 1s less
than that under the plains to the south, the deficiency increasing as the
stations approach the Himalayas, and being greatest when they are north
of the Siwaliks. On the other hand, the observations at the five southern-
most stations show an increase of density in proceeding from the interior
of the Peninsula to the coast of Cape Comorin. Thus both groups of
observations tend to confirm the hypothesis that there is a diminution of
density in the strata of the earth’s crust under mountains and continents,
and an increase of density under the bed of the ocean.

(16.) In order to test this hypothesis still further, as soon as the
observations at the stations of the Meridional Arc were completed, the
pendulums were taken to an ocean station—the Island of Minicoy, in the
same latitude as Punnez, and about 250 miles from the mainland ; and
afterwards to five stations on the east and west coasts, each in nearly the
same latitude as one of the stations in the Meridional Arc. Thus the
comparisons between the local variations of gravity under the continental,
the coast, and the ocean stations are independent of an exact knowledge of
the normal variation of gravity in proceeding from the poles to the equator.
It will be seen that, without a single exception, gravity at a coast station is
in excess of gravity at the corresponding inland station, and that at the
ocean station it is greater than at the corresponding coast station; thus:

1870. ] On the Indian Pendulum-observations. 103

At Alleppy the pendulum makes 2°41 vibrations more than at Mallapatti.

», Mangalore Ae 2°62 fe Bangalore.
», Madras a 2°42 Me Bangalore.
», Cocanada ce 2°78 Kocundal.
», Calcutta a 3°19 i Ehmadpur.
», Minicoy . 3°90 ey Punne.

(17.) I may observe that the coast stations were selected at places as
far removed as possible from mountain-ranges, in order that the results
might not be affected by the local variations of gravity under mountains.
For this reason additional stations could not be obtained on the west
coast, because to the north of Mangalore there is a range of mountains
running parallel to the coast at a very short distance.

(18.) Having completed these observations, Captain Basevi returned to
the head quarters at Dehra Doon last April, taking a set of observations at
Kaliana en route, in order to ascertain whether the times of vibration of
the pendulums had sensibly altered, through accident or wear of the knife-
edges, in the period of four years which had elapsed since 1866, during
which the apparatus had been transported (chiefly by land, but partly by
sea) over a distance of several thousand miles, and the pendulum had been
swung at twenty-two stations. The result indicates a slight alteration in
the pendulums, probably by wear of the knife-edges, to an extent equiva-
lent to one-third of a vibration in twenty-four hours.

(19.) It now remains for Captain Basevi to investigate the true vacuum
and temperature corrections, by experiments under artificial temperatures.
He is at present making the requisite preliminary arrangements for the
purpose, and will commence the experiments as soon as possible. They
should be completed by the time that the snows of the approaching winter
are sufficiently melted to permit of the passes on the great southern ranges
of the Himalayas being crossed. Captain Basevi will then proceed to take
observations in the inner Himalayas, on three extensive tablelands which are
of great height, and are sufficiently removed from the neighbouring ranges to
obviate the necessity for minute calculations of the masses of these ranges,
calculations for which the requisite data are not forthcoming. The three
tablelands are ‘“‘the plains of Deosai,” lat. 35° 5', long. 75° 30’, height
13,400 feet ; the plains north of the Changchenmo range, lat. 35° 15’,
long. 79° 20’, height 16,000 feet; and “the plains of Hanle,’’ lat. 32°
50’, long. 79°, height 14,200 feet. Captain Basevi also proposes to take
observations in the plains of the Punjab to the south of the Himalayas.
Finally, he will descend the Indus, and take observations on the coast at
Karachi, thus obtaining an additional coast station, which will be comple-
mentary to an inland station on Colonel Everest’s Arc of the Meridian.

(20.) It does not appear necessary that any more observations than these
should be taken in India. But in the proceedings of the Council of the
Royal Society in which the original programme of observations was dis-

104 On the Indian Pendulum. observations. [Nov. 24,

cussed, it was proposed that observations should be taken at points nearer
to the equator, at Ceylon, Singapore, or Borneo; also at Aden, a position
of interest, “from being in a long line of depression where a large gravita-
tion might be expected.’’? But as one of the two pendulums has already
been swung by General Sabine at three stations on or between the equator
and the parallel of Punnze, Captain Basevi’s southernmost station, and as a
pendulum has been swung by Mr. Goldingham at the equator and at the
Madras Observatory, which is also one of Captain Basevi’s stations, I] am
inclined to think that there is no immediate necessity for taking observa-
tions at Ceylon, Singapore, and Borneo, and that Captain Basevi’s opera-
tions need not be prolonged for this purpose. On the other hand, how-
ever, he will be easily able to observe at Aden; and he might also observe
at some point in Egypt, on the plains which are crossed by the Suez Canal,
with the great advantage that the stations would be complementary to
certain of the stations in India; thus Aden would be compared with
Madras and Bangalore, and the plains of Egypt with the Himalayan
Mountains.

(21.) I propose, therefore, that Captain Basevi should proceed from
Karachi to England, taking observations en route at Aden and in Egypt,
and bringing his operations to a close by a series of observations at the
Greenwich Observatory, if the Astronomer Royal has no objections. I
mention the Greenwich rather than the Kew Observatory because the true
time can be obtained there from the astronomical clocks, whereas at Kew
it can only be obtained by observation ; and if (as is probable) Captain
Basevi arrives in the winter, pendulum-observations taken at Kew would
be greatly delayed, as happened when the operations were commenced at
Kew. Moreover, Greenwich appears to have been employed as a refer-
ence station for pendulum-observations more frequently than Kew.

J.T. WALKER, Colonel R.E.,
Supt. Great Trigonometrical Survey of India.

ore Sh a pS Reh A a ree TR SSS 22a NIT Pn ASAT OCP ELECT CLL TAT —— seo oe

‘haaung fo quapuazuwadny handagr
cra urejdeg IAgsSvg ‘qd SANVE

1 ——— Koi oes SP TCH
S
a 8Fr-0— GG.E1198 | 60-FII98 G0. 86.E1198 Seer 1¢.8— ajelere LG.1 GPS es aise te 8G IS US DOOUOERESOODOUGDOL0NT0 1 ay
"U0UDIS svg
06.g— ¢y.8Z6s8 | 8.68698 60-0 18-8698 | 9¢¢.0+ 69.6+ Z0.84658 16-1 4.62 9 Go &Z 41 8 aire sae’ # ie siejatsis'ey is) e\eisiese GAOOTULY (i eee
U0UDIS UDIIOQ
$8.0— 6z.Z0098 | FI-80098 0. 60.80098| ZO. LL. 04.0098 G1.% 6.62 8I FG 88 CEP GG [on oo” en eee ca se ee CFI NO Cae
6+.0— 60.66 89.66 20. 9¢.66 og. 80-8 £6.68 68-1 ¢.8Z 6 81 28 QS OT [Bees ee ee eae PBLLEOO il aara
06.0+ 1-98 Lv.48 £0. OF.F8 &¢. Ol-1 14.28 68-1 P.FL Lz ZI 08 iy il Bt eR eis See eSB Ips Ales | aac
a 6Z.0+ 10.98 62.48 60. LZ.¥8 PP. 02.€ 61.08 SP. L-62 Mh 6r ¥Z GS GI Go paspe etre pleleieeis os OTO]CSOUTAT jl aeeGrs
= og-1— 06.62698 | $%.186¢8 Z0-0 €6+18698| 0S-1+ 18.6+ 26.9468 | &Z-1 0-08 9 0c o£ | of 6 g.iesnar alee cat ieee" Oo] Va eae kee
= *SU0UIDIS' JSD0D
~~
S aes “ere 10.*6098 31.6 68.12098| $0.1+ T1-¢+ 6Z-S1098 £9. 1.38 , ele ie i nda ea es ree OLB) Cee MT
5 GZ.9+ GP.CE 19-6 £6.01 &F.90 £6.9 Ql-I— 99-00 09.8% 9.69 0269 ZL 64 8% OE DOD DOOUOGODIGOOONOCa Hosa |) Vz
a Lz.L 86.16 12.4% 68.¢ 68.81 LL. 08.6— 68.26 09.4 6.19 6826 9 82 0G 08 ee EN or eee eC LUO Cin me Ol
S 1g.¢ GV.0E P6.6G QZ.% 80'°SG GZ. LP.9— 0F.86 6F.Z F.8¢ 188 sp LL 69 66 Bee ye Or DI PUI 14/10) .51 "SI
1 82.0 Q1.66 88.56 GL.S QG'ZS v0.1 18.0+ 1¥-06 bS-E L.6L 978 cy LL [Ss 6B, | see se gee <= (O08) SUel Ge sia aaeeT
= G8. 1S.9@ 09-86 S8.T 18.1% GL. 60.6— GI-FS GPG £.99 612 ig LY Fh 86 tenorni a meme ee LOUIE aye
S €8. £9.06 18.81 GE-G 6-91 (i 89.F+ 61-11 GG.% 8.18 68 or ZL LG 9G aes ate eit naate pes OSS CLE) °ST
3 tl. 18.F 89.01 GG.P 98.90 00-1 PE.6 60-60 OF-E 6.92 IF91 br LL OF Fora] 2 eee nse ee eae cle eer
cs) gg.1 G8.11 62.01 &G.P 92.90 19. F0.¥ T1-10098 G1-G G.08 GOLT op LL L: sre euelee ere) 2h6 So heehee a mae AB
$ VE.G PE-01 00-80 88.7 G9-.60098) G8. PL.O+ 99.96 08-6 6.48 1891 (se It O& & DODOBG 20 NGO DFU OGI OMA UE ZT
A, L1G G§-20098 81.00098 88.6 08-26 08. 09.0— 01.26 62.6 L.0L OZIT 3 44, by 0G geile o:sieineicloke eee COCR DU dia aaeriit
GP.G 61-86 02.96 &V.b 12.16 89. G0.0— 49-06 16.3 6.12 [TZT Cee ¢ 6I Se eee ee oot: pate gee oem Oty ULOG ‘Or
= 8b.P 49-96 gI-16 L6.% 61°98 G8. Z1-0+ 06.98 62.6 P.2Z FS6L sp LL & 8s siereie pie eleie)e) Slee * 8 2a CD Lan EU Gee ee
3 62-6 Zo.66 62.16 L0.¢ 91-98 GQ. GL.¥ 28.08 GL.% 8.18 oZ61 tr LL 8 ZI sea a IEP Pe) hoa o}O Ns CIE 2
aS £8.6 61.68 9&-98 SI. £3.68 19. Ly.L GT.GZ Q1-G L.18 61ST gs LL 9 SI scesiet fe sireie re PUGS UPULUIN a ere,
= 60-6 0F.S8 GE.Z8 6L.L 69-2 09- 6-0 19.84 40-6 6.22 L006 Gh LL bore St ‘ses s+9seg olojesueg pua ‘aN | °9
£9-& L6.S8 F9-18 00-8 $9.82 06. ¥Z.0 06.22 L0.& G.32 QIig LE LL ib t5il “sess -oseg alojedueg pue "MS | °¢
aS 28.1 00.28 €1.08 99.6 Lg.LL 6G. $0.6 66.62 G81 6.94 666 Ir LL 0 Tt wie) 6 9 te ep nie ee Ue COB U Oe elle
+S 90.1+ 68.62 68.82 88. 66.22 O&- 89.L 16.92 66-1 g.gZ &hE fs} SEV 66 6 od ge aie cee ster io Og Bae ens eee
2 1-0— 6.82658 | bP.82 gP. 10-84 GP. 92.9 £8.02 QPel 6.98 got sp ZZ | It 8 pean ower MCP IU Gl oat
o) 62.8258 1T.0+ 81-84698|} *+F-0+ 19.9+ €1.12658 89.1 8.98 vy iw LL ot 8 edt ee diediae) eta aN GEN Ae
RetOU) few “SUOLIDIS I4p UDIPUT
008
“poaresqo|* Andre ‘unnoeA | ‘af otZ | ‘ose qeurs
4 wuung jo “MOTVCAIOS [PAST ~—«|"O19%87.G JO % 04 04 Ajoyuyur ue ‘ganyer | -yo0F ul |‘oapnyisuoy| ‘opnziyeT
*poyndu0p SUII0} UL OT -qo 4q | -eeg ueozy| jaso, ye |WorONpoy |UotJONpoy | 03 poonpox joanssorg| -oduray,| “431077 4seny 4410 NI *13q
La -eyndu109 ke 0} SUOTIVAIQTA SUOTJVIGIA | Wea uvoT *SUOTILIS “TUT NT
(=) WOTJONpIY | pozoa1L0H jo 1oquInyy
tt os pearesqa
ee “sq NS8917 "SUOTJOIIIOD *SoJVUIPIOOD d1}9p004)

“IZ81 pue P ‘SON SWUN[NpUSg YIM s}[NsoY uvoT Jo yoRysqy AreurwMTfe.g

106 Hon. J. W. Strutt on the Theory of Resonance. [Nov. 24,

II. “On the Theory of Resonance.” By the Hon. J. W. Srrurt.
Communicated by W. Sporriswoopg, F.R.S. Received July 2,

1870.
(Abstract.)

An attempt is here made to establish a general theory of a certain class
of resonators, including most of those which occur in practice. When a
mass of air or other gas is enclosed in a space bounded nearly all round by
rigid walls, but communicating with the external air by one or more pas-
sages, there are certain natural periods of vibration or resonant notes
whose determination is a matter of interest. If the dimension of the air-
space is small compared to the wave-length of the vibration, the dy-
namics of the motion is, in its general character, of remarkable simplicity.
It is for the most part under this limitation that the problem is considered
in the present paper. The formula determining the resonant note is

= — a)
u 2a N)

where 7 is the number of complete vibrations per second, a@ the velocity of
sound, and S the capacity of the air-space; ¢ is a quantity proved to be
identical with the measure of electric conductivity between the interior of
the vessel and the external space, on the supposition that the air is re-
placed by a uniform conducting mass of unit specific conducting-power,
and the sides of the vessel and passages by insulators. When there is
more than one passage the formula is still applicable according to the above
definition of c; and when the passages are sufficiently far apart not to in-
terfere with each other, the resultant ¢ is by the electrical law of parallel
circuits simply the sum of the separate values for each passage considered
by itself. When this condition is not satisfied the value of c, thus found
by mere addition, is too great.

The question thus resolves itself into the determination of the conduc-
tivity (or the resistance which is its reciprocal) for different forms of
passages or openings. The case of openings, which are mere holes in the
sides of the vessel, has been already treated, although in a very different
way, by Helmholtz, who, in his celebrated paper on vibrations in open
pipes, compared his theory with the observations of Sondhauss and others
on the notes produced, when such resonators are made to speak by a
stream of air blown across the mouth. Sondhauss has also given an
empirical formula applicable when the connecting passages are of the form
of long cylindrical necks. These previous results are in agreement, as far |
as they go, with the formula here investigated, and which is applicable
whatever may be the length of the neck. If L be the length and R the

L+5R

be 5 .
radius, aa the electrical resistance eaten cae

1870.] Hon. J. W. Strutt on the Theory of Resonance. 107

This supposes the neck a circular cylinder. If the section be an ap-
proximate circle of area o, we may put

a Be fe
—at/t

When the neck is very long the second term may be neglected, and
when L is very small the first term becomes insignificant. In the third
part experiments are described which were instituted to compare the
general formula with observation, and which gave a satisfactory agreement.

The value given above for lis only approximate. It is proved, however,
c

that the resistance of a finite cylindrical conductor whose plane ends lie in
two infinite insulating planes, but join on to conducting masses on the
further side, corresponds to a length La of the cylinder, where

L
10°615—e~ °R

a< 2°305 R L
ie77l Sere

T
>ER.

As a particular case, it appears that the correction to the length of an
organ-pipe, supposed, as in Helmholtz’s paper, to be surrounded at the
mouth by a wide flange, lies between °785 R and °8282 R.

Approximate formulee are investigated for the resistance of tubes which
are not exact circular cylinders. It will be sufficient to particularize here
the case of tubes of revolution. The resistance is shown to lie between the

two limits
1 (‘de

iy | 1 dy\?
2{ ral 143(Z) } as

where y denotes the radius of the tube at the point z.

When there is more than one vessel in the vibrating system, there are
several independent periods of vibration corresponding to the degrees of
freedom. The theory of these vibrations is also considered.

In the experimental part of the investigation the object is to determine
with sufficient precision the pitch of the resonant note. This is generally
done by causing the resonator to speak. For several reasons, which are
detailed, I consider this course unsatisfactory, and have availed myself of
other indications to fix the pitch, which are not, indeed, capable of so great
an apparent precision, but yet are more to be depended on.

and

108 Dr. A. W. Hofmann on the Aromatic Cyanates. [| Nov. 24,

III. “On the Aromatic Cyanates.” By A. W. Hormann,
LL.D., F.R.S. Received July 30, 1870.

The only member of this class which has hitherto been studied is the
phenylic cyanate. About twenty years ago I discovered this compound
among the products of a very complex reaction which took place on sub-
mitting to destructive distillation a substance which I then named ox-
amelanil or melanoximide*, but which at the present time would be con-
sidered as oxalyldiphenylguanidine. The phenylic cyanate, which I then
called anilocyanic acid, is formed only in very small quantity ; I never had
more than a few grammes of the substance in my possession ; and it was
only from the sharply defined properties of the body that I was enabled
to describe it correctly.

Eight years later I again met with this compound. When I found that
diphenylsulphourea, by treatment with anhydrous phosphoric acid, split
up into aniline and phenylic mustard-oil, the idea naturally suggested
itself to utilize this reaction for the preparation of phenylic cyanate, by
distilling normal diphenylurea with anhydrous phosphoric acidf.

In fact, phenylic cyanate can be prepared in this way. On heating dry
diphenylearbamide with anhydrous phosphoric acid, the frightful odour of
the cyanate was immediately developed; and on distilling the mixture of
the two bodies, the phenylic cyanate came over in colourless drops.
When, however, the experiment was made on a somewhat larger scale,
the product was so small that I was compelled to consider this process
more as a mode of formation of the substance than as a method for its
preparation.

Lately my experiments on the mustard-oils led me to a simple process
for the preparation of the phenylic cyanate and its homologues.

In a former paper { I drew attention to the facility with which the mus-
tard-oils combine with a molecule of alcohol. When phenylic mustard-
oil is heated for a considerable time with alcohol, it yields the beautifully
crystalline half sulphuretted phenylurethane, which, when distilled alone,
or, still better, with phosphoric anhydride, again splits into its com-
ponents alcohol and phenylic mustard-oil.

Taking into consideration the result of this experiment, ought we not
to obtain the phenylic cyanate on distilling phenylurethane with phos-
phoric acid ?

Phenyl Series.

Phenylurethane.—The phenylurethane is known; I had already ob-
tained it in the above-mentioned researcn on the phenylic cyanate. When
this substance was treated with methyl, ethyl, or amyl alcohol, the phenyl-
urethane of the methyl, ethyl, or amyl series was obtained §. Since then

* Hofmann, Ann, Chem. Pharm. vol. Ixxiv. p. 9.

+ Hofmann, Proc. Roy. Soc. vol. ix. p. 275.

{ Hofmann, Berichte Deutsch. Chem. Gesell. Jahrg. 1. 8. 116.
§ Hofmann, Ann, Chem. Pharm, vol. Ixxiv. p. 16.

1870. ] Dr. A. W. Hofmann on the Aromatic Cyanates. 109

the phenylurethane of the ethyl series, phenylcarbaminic ether, has been
carefully investigated by Messrs. Wilm and Wischin*, who obtained it by
the action of chlorocarbonic ether upon aniline.

I have repeated the experiment of Messrs. Wilm and Wischin, and can
fully confirm their results. The body prepared in this manner is identical
with that which I formerly obtained. The melting-point of the substance,
after repeated crystallization, was found to be 51°; Messrs. Wilm and
Wischin gave 51°°5-52°. The boiling-point was about 237°, the same as
that found by those gentlemen.

Messrs. Wilm and Wischin state that the phenylcarbaminic ether
(which they call carbanilidic ether) is volatile without decomposition. I
find that although the greater portion escapes decomposition when dis-
tilled, yet part of it splits up mto phenylic cyanate and alcohol,

C, H,, NO,=C, H, NO+C, H, 0,

which is perfectly in accordance with what I expected from the study of
the half-sulphuretted phenylurethane. On distillation, the well-known
and familiar odour of the phenylic cyanate is immediately developed ; and,
in fact, Messrs. Wilm and Wischin must also have observed it; for they
say of the carbanilidic ether, “the vapour of this body excites a copious
flow of tears, but when diffused has a faint resemblance to bitter almond-
oil.’ What Messrs. Wilm and Wischin smelt was the phenylic cyanate.
If the mixture of phenylic cyanate and alcohol, obtained along with a large
quantity of phenylurethane by the distillation of the latter, be allowed to
stand for twenty-four hours, the odour of the cyanate will have disap-
_ peared entirely ; the cyanate and alcohol have recombined with formation
of phenylurethane.

After these results of the behaviour of phenylurethane under the influ-
ence of heat, there could be no doubt that phenylic cyanate would be ob-
tained by the employment of phosphoric anhydride.

Experiment has fully confirmed this expectation.

Phenylic Cyanate.—When phenylurethane is heated with anhydrous
phosphoric acid, a considerable quantity of a colourless liquid distils over
of great refractive power, having a pungent odour, and attacking the eyes
strongly. This liquid is phenylic cyanate, which only requires redistilla-
tion to be obtained pure. As in all operations in the aromatic series in
which phosphoric anhydride takes part, the quantity obtaimed is by no
means that required by theory, although it approaches it.

For more than one reason I had desired to discover a method for the
preparation of the phenylic cyanate. I was now enabled to determine
more accurately the boiling-point of the body ; it is 163°. In my former
determination, for which only a few grammes were available, I had found
ito bell 7/5".

The specific gravity of the phenylic cyanate at 15° is 1:092. Its vapour-

* Ann. Chem, Pharm. vol. exlvii. p. 157.

VOL. XIX. : K

110 Dr. A. W. Hofmann on the Aromatic Cyanates. [Nov. 24,

density was determined in aniline vapour. The numbers obtained con-
firmed the formula already established by analysis.
CO
C,H, NO= 6 } N.
Theory. Expt.
Specific gravity of vapour compared with hydrogen 59:50 58°90
gf x » "compared with am.) stele 4°09

With respect to the behaviour of the body with other substances, I
can refer to my former paper. With water it yields carbonic acid and
diphenylcarbamide ; in contact with alcohol the urethane is reproduced ;
it combines immediately with ammonia and its derivatives, forming an
inconceivable number of ureas. But, besides other combinations, it ex-
hibits a remarkable reaction. I may mention that the possession of a
considerable quantity of phenylic cyanate has given me an opportunity
of again observing the behaviour of this body towards triethylphosphine,
formerly described*. If a glass rod, moistened with the phosphorus
base, be dipped into a considerable quantity of phenylic cyanate, in a few
moments it becomes very hot, and the whole solidifies to a mass of beau-
tiful crystals.

The principal product formed in this reaction is a body insoluble in
water, and not very soluble in boiling alcohol, from which it crystallizes on
cooling in fine prisms, which in an analysis formerly published gave
numbers corresponding to cyanurate of phenyl, and may therefore be re-
garded as phenylic cyanurate. I must, however, leave it an open question,
whether this substance is identical with the phenylic cyanurates, obtained
the one by the action of chloride of cyanogen on phenol+, the other from
triphenylmelamine {.

Now that the necessary material can be obtained, there is no difficulty
in a complete investigation of this body, as well as the by-products formed
by the reaction in question.

We may here find room for some observations on the homologues of the
phenylic cyanurate.

Tolyl Series.

Tolylurethane.—Chlorocarbonic ether acts with the greatest violence on
toluidine, so that it is advisable to conduct the reaction in the presence oj
ether.

COcl C,H _CO(C, H,) HN C,H
earot? [aN [oO Gao? on
The ethereal solution, filtered from the toluidine hydrochlorate, on evapora-
tion leaves the tolylurethane as an aromatic oil, which, when cooled by a

* Hofmann, Ann. Chem. Pharm. Suppl. vol. i. p. 57.
¢ Hofmann, Berichte Deutsch. Chem. Gesell. Jahrg. iii. 8. 275.
{ Hofmann, Berichte Deutsch. Chem. Gesell. Jahrg. iii. 8. 274.

1870. ] Dr. A. W. Hofmann on the Aromatic Cyanates. 111

freezing-mixture, solidifies with difficulty, and, as a rule, only after stand-
ing some time.

Tolylurethane is insoluble in water, but. dissolves with ease in alcohol
and ether, and crystallizes from the former in fine long prisms, which melt
at 32°.

Tolylic cyanate.—When distilled alone, the tolylurethane behaves like
phenylurethane, the greater part passing over undecomposed, whilst a
small portion is resolved into toluylic cyanate and alcohol.

CO (C, H,) HN CO C,H
i Gnjoncm)s* 1)?

When the distillation is performed in the presence of phosphoric anhy-
dride, the alcohol is fixed, and the tolylic cyanate passes over in a nearly
pure state. It only requires rectification to be perfectly pure. Tolylic
cyanate is a colourless liquid, boiling at 185°, of high refractive power,
and a powerful odour exciting a copious flow of tears.

A vapour-density determination in aniline vapour gave the following
results :—

Theory. Expt.
Specific gravity of vapour compared with hy- I. II.
QIRTGTD, OC CRS S ane ie ee mer ieee an 66°5 64°6 65°7
Specific gravity of vapour compared with air 4°61 4-48 4°56

Tolylic cyanate behaves towards water and ammonia and their deriva-
tives like phenylic cyanate. On treatment with water ditolylurea is pro-
duced with evolution of carbonic acid ; with the alcohols it forms the cor-
responding urethanes, and with ammonia and the amines it yields a group
of compound ureas.

Triethylphosphine produces the same change as in the phenyl-com-
pound ; it takes place, however, somewhat more slowly. , The very beau-
tiful crystalline compound thus formed I hope soon to be able to in-
vestigate.

Xylyl Series.

The experiments were precisely similar to those in the phenyl and tolyl
series. The reaction with xylidine is, however, somewhat more sluggish
than with aniline and toluidine.

Aylylurethane,
C,, H,, no,=°° (6, wos | O,
2 5

crystallizes in fine needles, which melt at 58°.
Aylylic cyanate,
C,H,NO=-2 In
: : : WC. H, ‘
is a colourless, highly refractive liquid of feeble odour, and attacking the
eyes but slightly. The boiling-point is about 200°. Its vapour-density
was taken in aniline vapour.

112 Dr. A. W. Hofmann on the Aromatic Cyanates. [Nov. 24

. Theory. Expt.
Specific gravity of vapour compared with hydrogen.... 73°50 74°69
oS is » compared with air. ..2... 4: 5°10 5°18

Xylylic cyanate exhibits the same reactions as those which are so pro-
minent in the corresponding members of the phenyl and tolyl series, but
somewhat weaker. The combinations which take place almost immediately
in the case of phenylic and tolylic cyanates often require days with the
xylylic cyanate. Evenin the presence of triethylphosphine xylylic cyanate
solidifies but slowly.

Naphthyl Series.

Naphthylurethane.—The formation of this analogue of urethane was
effected by the action of chlorocarbonic ether on naphthylamine. It is
insoluble in water, more soluble in alcohol, and crystallizes from the latter
in needles which melt at 79°. Its composition is expressed by the for-

mula
CO(C.,, H.) HN
Ct Noe Yo

Naphthylic cyanate.—A short notice of this compound has already
appeared. When I had found that diphenylcarbamide gave phenylic cya-
nate by distillation with phosphoric anhydride, Mr. Vincent Hall* made
the corresponding experiment in the naphthyl series, but only obtained a
very small quantity of the naphthyl compound. The formation of the
naphthylic cyanate by this method was, however, established.

The naphthylic cyanate is obtained in considerable quantity by the dis-
tillation of naphthylurethane with phosphoric anhydride. It is a colour-
less, not very mobile fluid, whose boiling-point is about 269°-270°. Its
vapour has the pungent odour which is peculiar to the cyanates, but at the
ordinary temperature naphthylic cyanate is almost odourless. Its com-
position is expressed by the formula

I have, moreover, satisfied myself of its correctness by the reactions of the
body. On considering its behaviour with water and alcohol, and their de-
rivatives, there can be no doubt as to the nature of the compound. The
facility with which these reactions take place with the naphthyl compound
is remarkable. The naphthylic cyanate acts with incomparably greater
quickness and precision than the analogous xylyl-compound; this is par-
ticularly shown in the action of triethylphosphine, which causes the cyanate
of the naphthy] series to solidify almost instantaneously.

I have to give my best thanks to Mr. F. Hobrecker for his efficient
assistance in the prosecution of the above research.

* Proc. Roy. Soc. vol. ix. p. 365,

1870. ] Annwersary Meeting. 113

November 30, 1870.
ANNIVERSARY MEETING.

General Sir EDWARD SABINE, K.C.B., President, in the Chair.

General Boileau, for the Auditors of the Treasurer’s Accounts on the
part of the Society, reported that the total receipts during the past year,
including a balance of £324 4s. 7d. carried from the preceding year, and
£800 taken from the Oliveira bequest on deposit, amount to £5410 3s.,
and that the total expenditure inthe same period amounts to#5282 13s8.9d.,
leaving a balance of £91 18s. 3d. at the Bankers, and of £35 11s. in the
hands of the Treasurer.

The thanks of the Society were voted to Mr. Spottiswoode and the
Auditors.

The Secretary read the following Lists:— —
Fellows deceased since the last Anniversary.

Royal.
His Imperial and Royal Highness Leopold the Second.

On the Home List.

Edward William Brayley, Esq. Augustus Matthiessen, Esq., Ph.D.
Alexander Bryson, M.D. William Allen Miller, M.D.,D.C.L.,
The Hon. and Rev. Richard Carle- Treas. R.S.

ton, M.A. Arthur Morgan, Esq.
Sir James Clark, Bart., M.D. The Right Hon. Sir Frederick Pol-
Charles Collier, M.D. lock, Bart., M.A.
James Copland, M.D. | The Rev. William Taylor.

John Thomas Graves, Esq., M.A. James Vetch, Capt. R.E.
WilliamAlexander Mackinnon, Esq., Augustus V. Waller, M.D.

M.A. John Wilson, M.D.
James Prince Lee, Lord Bishop of
Manchester.

On the Foreign List.

Heinrich Gustav Magnus.

114 Anniversary Meeting. _ [Nov. 80,

Change of Title.
The Bishop of Oxford ¢o Bishop of Winchester.

Fellows elected since the last Anniversary.

William Froude, C.E. Capt. Robert Mann Parsons, R.E.
Edward Headlam Greenhow, M.D. | William Henry Ransom, M.D.
James Jago, M.D. George Granville William Suther-
Nevil Story Maskelyne, M.D. land-Leveson-Gower, Duke of Su-
Maxwell Tylden Masters, M.D. therland, K.G.

Robert, Lord Napier of Magdala. Robert H. Scott, Esq.

Alfred Newton, M.A. George Frederic Verdon, O.B.
Andrew Noble, Esq. Augustus Voelcker, Ph.D.

Capt. Sherard Osborn, R.N. Samuel Wilks, M.D.

Rev. Stephen Parkinson, B.D.

On the Foreign List.

Anders Jons ‘Angstrom. | Joseph Antoine Ferdinand Plateau.

The President then addressed the Society as follows :—

GENTLEMEN,
Since our last Anniversary, another volume, the fourth, of the Society’s

Catalogue of Scientific Papers, has been published, bringing the alphabetical
list of titles down to PO Z. Pursuant to the arrangement which I announced
last year, Professor Carus of Leipsic spent some weeks in London during
the spring, in preparing the Index Rerum. It was his intention to come
again in the autumn to continue his labours ; but the outbreak of the war
prevented him from leaving his home and family, so that the resumption of
his work is postponed for the present. The preparation of the Index
Rerum will, however, continue to engage the careful attention of the
Library Committee ; meanwhile I am glad to say that good progress is
being made with the printing of Volume V., of which a fourth part is

now in type.

In the last summer we have had the misfortune of losing our Treasurer,
Dr. William Allen Miller, one of our most valued and distinguished
Fellows, and one who surely enjoyed the regard, as well as the high esteem,
of all who knew him. UHe was also one who, in addition to important
direct scientific work, had for several years shared actively in the cares and
the labours called for by the many and varying subjects referred each
year to the Royal Society, as represented by its Officers and Council, and
by the special Committees appointed by them to deal with each case as it

arises.

1870. ] President’s Address. 115

Tt may be in the recollection of some of the Fellows that, in the Anni-
versary Address delivered in 1863, I ventured to suggest the interest and
probable value of a series of Pendulum Experiments at the principal stations
of the Great Indian Arc. Encouraged by the warm concurrence in opinion
and promised support of Colonel Walker, Superintendent of the Indian
Trigonometrical Survey, a circular note was addressed by myself, with the
concurrence of the Council, to several of the Fellows of the Royal Society
conversant with the subject; and the correspondence, including an outline
of the proceedings which in Colonel Walker’s judgment would be required
in India, should the experiments receive the sanction of the Indian autho-
rities, was submitted through the proper channels to the Secretary of State
for India, and received the sanction of the Indian Government.

The pendulums and accompanying apparatus having been prepared at
the observatory of the British Association at Kew (aided by a special
subsidy from the Government-Grant Fund placed annually at the disposal
of the Royal Society), were embarked for India, in March 1865, under the
charge of Captain Basevi of the Royal Engineers, appointed to conduct
the experiments with them in India. These have been executed in great
part, and are still in progress, under that officer’s superintendence. In the
meantime the Royal Society has been favoured by a recent communication
from the Secretary of State for India, enclosing Col. Walker’s official report
of what has been accomplished, and of what remains to be accomplished in
India, to complete the original programme—and transmitting a despatch
signed by the Governor General and other high authorities of the Indian Go-
vernment, requesting that the President and Council of the Royal Society
may be invited to suggest at an early day any supplementary measures
which they may deem desirable.

It appears that, at the date of Colonel Walker’s report, pendulum ex-
periments had been completed at twenty-five stations on the mainland of
India, extending from Cape Comorin in lat. 8° 5! N. to Mussoorie in lat.
30° 28’ N., and at a 26th station, on the Island of Minicoy, midway between
the Maldives and the Laccadives, in lat. 8° 6’—and that five additional
stations had been allotted as the work of the present year, four of which
are in the high tablelands of India between 32° and 36°N., and one near
the mouth of the Indus.

I had the pleasure of receiving,.about the same time, a letter from
Colonel Walker himself, announcing his intention of being in England, on
furlough, towards the end of December, when he might be personally
informed of any further uses to be made of the pendulums in India—pro-
posing also that, on the return voyage to England, Captain Basevi should
be instructed to obtain the rates of the pendulums at Aden (suggested as
desirable, from its geographical peculiarities, by our Foreign Secretary, in
a letter to myself, printed in the Minutes of Council of June 1864), and
at a station to be selected in the vicinity of the Bitter Lakes. Colonel
Walker also suggested that, on the arrival of the pendulums in England,

116 Anniversary Meeting. [Nov. 30,

their rates should be ascertained. at the Royal Observatory at Greenwich,
in addition to the necessary repetition of the original experiments at the
Kew Observatory.

The documents thus referred to having been read at a recent evening
meeting, and suitable communications having been made to those Fellows
of the Society who participated in the original recommendation of the
experiments, a Committee has been named, with Colonel Walker as one of
its members, to meet as soon as may be convenient after his arrival in
England, to prepare a reply to the Indian Government.

It may perhaps be permissible to notice, on this occasion, that the experi-
ments on the retardation which pendulums experience when vibrated in
different gases, for which a sum was allotted some years since by the
Government-Grant Committee, yet await the supervision of an experimen-
talist having sufficient leisure and interest in the subject. The apparatus
at Kew may be made quite suitable for the purpose ; and the occasion is
favourable.

The successful voyage and safe return of the North-German Polar Ex-
pedition is an event on which the Royal Society may add its sincere con-
gratulations to those of the public at large. The progress of geographical
discovery, connecting with itself, as it does, the advancement of many physical
sciences which require, either for extension or for confirmation, the assu-
rance derived from experimental research, has for nearly three centuries
been carried on in the Arctic Regions, where it has afforded a common
field for the enterprises of the British and of the northern continental
nations—enterprises conducive to hardihood, and to qualities which are the
result of a generous emulation, unmixed with the deteriorating influences
which are but too apt to be generated by the rivalries of war. The earliest of
these undertakings were indeed antecedent to the existence of the Royal
Society ; but on their revival—which took place in 1818, at the termination
of the great War by which Europe had been desolated for so many years—
the British Government, at the instigation of the Royal Society, was the
first to recommence, and for several years to continue, a succession of under-
takings, in which we have now to recognize the successful participation of
more than one kindred and allied people.

The German expedition consisted of the ‘ Germania,’ a steamer of about
80 tons, duly strengthened for encounters with ice, commanded by Captain
Koldeway, who seems to have possessed in an eminent degree the special
qualifications required in such an enterprise. Besides her naval comple-
ment of twelve officers and seamen, four gentlemen were embarked for
special scientific services, to whom were confided, among other objects,
the researches preliminary to the measurement of an arc of the meridian
on the coast-line of East Greenland. The ‘Germania’ was accompanied
by a smaller vessel. not furnished with steam apparatus, named “The

1870. ] President’s Address. 117

Hansa.” Thus unequally provided, the two vessels parted company in the
ice which has to be traversed in the passage from Kurope to Hast Green-
land, and did not subsequently rejoin ; the ‘ Hansa’ having been unable to
force her way through the ice, was finally wrecked by it, the crew escaping
on the ice, and being conveyed, on a constantly lessening ice-raft, to near
the latitude of Cape Farewell, whence they made their way in their boats,
which they had preserved, to the nearest Danish settlements, from which
they have returned without loss of life.

The ‘ Germania’ having forced her way through the ice by the aid of
steam, anchored on the 5th of August, 1869, in ie small but secure bay,
in lat. 74° 32', and long. 18° 53’ W., on the south side of the island on
which my pendulum experiments had been made forty-six years before.
They subsequently visited Cape Philip Broke in lat. 74° 55’, which had
been the first landing-point on the coast when examined by Captain Cla-
vering and myself in the British Expedition of 1823. The highest latitude
reached by the ‘ Germania’ was 75° 31', where she was stopped by the ice,
and returned to winter in the bay, in the Pendulum Island, in which they
had first anchored. The extreme northern point of the coast which had been
seen in 1823, named by Captain Clavering “The Haystack,” in lat.
75° 42', was visited in sledges in the spring of 1870, by parties engaged in
the survey operations, which extended into the 77th parallel.

One of the most noteworthy results of this expedition, and it may
possibly prove one of the most important, is the discovery that the lands
adjacent to the bays and fiords in Kast Greenland abound in flocks of Rein-
deer and Musk-oxen, and in smaller game of various descriptions. It is stated
that during the stay of many months on the coast the crew were rarely
without an abundant supply of fresh food, derived from the country itself.
It is possible that this abundance of game, combined with the magnificence
of the glaciers and of the mountain scenery accessible by the deeply intersect-
ing fiords, may tempt persons who in these days have trained themselves
to arduous mountain-ascents to visit a country in which panoramic
views over yet unexplored regions of the globe might be a recompense
for their toils and dangers. The mountains rising from one of the fiords
visited by the surveying parties of the ‘Germania’ attain a height of
14,000 feet. The view from such an elevation might possibly accomplish
more than many maritime expeditions, to shape out the yet unknown
geography of Northern Greenland *. The distance in a direct line from
the most northern point of the coast visited by the surveying parties of the
‘Germania,’ to the expanse of open ocean seen by Kane and Hayes to the
north of Kennedy’s Channel, and described as abounding in animal life and

* The officers of the ‘Germania’ speak with enthusiasm of the scenery in the deep
fiord in lat. 73°, up which they steamed more than 70 nautical miles in a westerly di-
rection. They say :—“ The further we went the milder we found the temperature ; the
scenery was grand asin the Alps. The true interior of Greenland showed itself with
constantly increasing grandeur and beauty to our admiring eyes.”
pEVOL.: XIX. I

118 Anniversary Meeting. [Noy. 80,

indicating in many ways the proximity of an extensive open sea, is not more
than about 400 geographical miles.

The Survey which has been recently made under the auspices of the
Swedish Government, with a view to the measurement of an are of the
meridian at Spitzbergen, may have suggested the corresponding survey of
the coast of East Greenland. But, without doubt, the extent of con-
tinuous land in the direction of the meridian is much greater in Greenland

than in Spitzbergen; whilst the fiords, which so generally characterize
the Greenland coast, would probably greatly facilitate the access to localities
suitable for trigonometrical stations. The return of the ‘ Germania,’ whilst

the objects of her mission were still incomplete, was occasioned by the -

necessity of replacing her boiler, which had wholly failed ; and she will pro-
bably resume her operations in the coming year. It is understood that
the Swedes also are organizing another Spitzbergen expedition, of which
the special objects have not yet been announced. It may be hoped that the
remeasurement of the Fairhaven Hill may be remembered on this occasion.
Its height in 1823 was determined with great care, both geometrically and
barometrically, by Captain Foster and myself (Phil. Trans. 1824, Art. xvi.).
_ The permanency, or otherwise, in the elevation of marked features of the
land is a subject of considerable geological importance in some countries ;
and Spitzbergen is one of those in which it has been occasionally questioned.
The discrepancy in the action of the currents experienced in 1823 and
1869, on the extensive ice-fields which occupy the middle space between
the coasts of Kurope and of East Greenland, is very noteworthy. In 1823
the most careful observations, of officers greatly practised in such investi-
gations, failed to discover any perceptible surface-current whatsoever, either
by its effect on the ice itself, or on the surface-water of the sea between
the ice and the Greenland coast; whilst in 1869 the crew of the ‘ Hansa,’
having taken refuge on the ice after the loss of their vessel, in the approxi-
mate geographical position of 70° 50’ N. and 21° W., were carried by it
to the lat. of 61° 12’ N. and long. (about) 42° W.,—being a drift extending
over more than 500 geographical miles, accomplished in little less than 200
days, the average being somewhat less than three miles a day. In seas
much encumbered by floating ice, currents are generally ascribed to the
prevailing winds; and there appears to have been in 1869 a considerable
amount of northerly gales. But the frequent existence of a current setting
to the south and south-west down the coast of East Greenland has been
recognized by the highest authorities, and is regarded by Forchhammer,
in his valuable memoir on the Phenomena of the Sea, in the Philosophical
Transactions for 1865, as a returning branch of the Gulf-stream, recog-
nizable as such by the difference in the analysis of the polar and equatorial
waters. This branch of physical research has doubtless received full
attention from the officers of the ‘ Germania;’ and we must await the pub-
lication of the complete account of the voyage for the full details.
The plant-remains of the Miocene epoch, discovered in Spitzbergen and

1870. | President’s Address. HS

Greenland, have given a new feature of interest to future explorations
within the Arctic Circle. The valuable memoir which Professor Oswald
Heer, of Zurich, has contributed recently to the Philosophical Transactions
(1869, Art. XIII.), has added much to the evidence contained in his pre-
vious papers of the existence, at that early period of the earth’s history, of
a vegetation in some cases identical with, and in others scarcely differing
from, that which now lives and flourishes in the Temperate Zone—a vege-
tation comprehending oaks, planes, chestnuts, and even a Magnolia, the
leaves and fruit of which were found in the North-Greenland deposits.
Altogether, Professor Heer has identified no less than 137 species of the
Arctic flora of the Miocene age; and he has moreover inferred, with great
appearance of reason, that at the same era vegetation of the same cha-
racter may have prevailed generally in lands within the Arctic Circle. The
anticipation of future discoveries of plant-remains, adding possibly largely
to the number of 137 species already recognized, must tend to give to
land-explorations and excursions an interest which was. comparatively
wanting to them when all that the explorer could anywhere hope to find
(other than the scanty, though in some respects beautiful, flora which the
rigours of the Arctic region at the present time still suffer to exist) was, at
most, the less attractive fossil remains of much earlier geological ages, to
the climatology of which less interest attaches than to that of the com-
paratively recent (however ancient) Miocene age.

There have been in the past year two vacancies in the list of Foreign
Members of the Royal Society. The two gentlemen who have been elected
are Professor Joseph Antoine Ferdinand Plateau, of Ghent, and Professor

Anders Jons Angstrom, of Upsala. Professor Plateau has been an earnest
worker in the field of physical science for above forty years. His memoirs,
the titles of which (forty-six in number) are given in the fourth vo-
lume of the Society’s Catalogue of Scientific Papers,.give evidence of
the completeness with which he has treated the subjects he has taken
up; and many of his experiments are remarkable for their ingenuity and
originality. Questions in physical optics were the first to engage his at-
tention. In this branch of science his researches were confined to the
laws of visual appearances, including those relating to ocular spectra, the
duration of impressions on the retina, and irradiation ; and though some of
nis conclusions may have to be corrected, there is no doubt that in this special
department he has done more than any one of his predecessors or contempo-
raries. Another subject which has occupied him in his later years, and has
supplied the materials of eleven memoirs, concerns the figures of equilibrium
of a liquid mass without gravity. No one can contest the perfect origi-
nality of this series of investigations, or fail to admire the simple and
effective means by which he has carried out his experiments, and the saga-
city with which he has arrived at results which have formed a new starting-

120 Anniversary Meeting. [ Nov. 30,

point for mathematical investigations relating to the corpuscular theory.
It is much to be regretted that Professor Plateau’s scientific labours for
more than twenty years past have been carried on under a deprivation of
sight occasioned by the ardent pursuit of his favourite science. Although
totally blind, his experiments are of the most exquisite delicacy ; and the
reasoning of which they form the material is as accurate and penetrating
as the experiments themselves are beautiful.

The second gentleman who is elected a Foreign Member, Professor

Angstrom, is distinguished by his researches in many departments of physical
science, and is entitled to rank among the very highest of those who have
within a few years developed the powers of spectroscopy to their present
marvellous extent. In fact, his ‘Optic Researches,’ 1853, contain the
fundamental principles of nearly all that has been done since.

The following notice is from the pen of the Rev. Dr. T. Romney Robin-
son, F.R.S., of Armagh :—

“From Huler’s theory of Resonance, he infers that, as a body absorbs all
‘* the series of oscillations which it can itself assume, it must, when heated so
‘“as to become luminous, emit the same rays which at a lower temperature it
‘absorbs.

“Tt is hardly possible to announce more distinctly this important fact, on
‘which nearly all solar and stellar spectroscopy rests ; and itis much to be
“reoretted that, from the ignorance of the Scandinavian languages which is
“‘so general in this country, it was not known here till 1856. He proceeds
“‘to examine the spectrum of the electric spark. It is traversed by two sets
‘of lines on an obscure ground. ‘The first of these belongs to air. The
‘lines reach across the spectrum, and do not vary with the nature of the
“electrodes. The second set come from the electrodes ; they are in general
‘far brighter than the other, and, unless the discharge is powerful, are con-
‘fined to the vicinity of the electrodes. Hach metal has its own set ; but,
‘owing to the small dispersion of his spectroscope (one prism of 46°), he
“thought some lines were common to two or more metals. Alloys showed
‘the lines of their components with no greater difference than could be ex-
*‘plained by the want of power in his instrument. He shows that these
‘lines are not produced by interference. The solar spectrum may be re-
‘garded as a reversion of the electric one ; and heis convinced that the ex-
‘planation of the dark lines in the former embraces that of the bright
*‘lines in the other. Each gas has its peculiar spectrum ; he notices the
“ faintness of the oxygen-lines in air, and he describes the three bright bands
“of hydrogen, and a fourth fainter.

“Tn 1861, ina second memoir, he developed |. is theory of the reversion of
‘the lines. He had then obtained a better spectroscope and a large Ruhm-
“ korff, with which he compared many of the solar with metallic lines. Many
*‘ double lines belong to two metals. Gas-lines are more diffused and less
‘‘ sharply defined than those of metals, especially metals difficult of fusion.
“He found no evidence of nitrogen or oxygen in the sun.

187 0.] President’s Address. 121

“His third memoir (1863) contains a determination of the wave-lengths
“ of Fraunhofer’s principal lines, and others, 70 inall. As the same matter is
* treated far more completely in a subsequent memoir, it is only necessary to
‘notice that he corrects his measures for the pressure and temperature of
*‘ the air, for the temperature of the grating employed, and for the aberration
“caused by a motion of the instrument in a direction at right angles to the
“incident light. This last will cause a difference between the deviations on
“each side of zero. In the high latitude of Upsala, and in an unfavourable
‘“summer, the observations which he made to test the reality of this correc-
tion were neither sufficiently good nor numerous to satisfy him ; yet the
*« difference which he found agreed very closely with what was computed.

«<A memoir (1865) gives the places and map of the solar lines beyond G,
- © where Kirchhoff’s map terminates. His spectroscope-arrangements are ori-
“oial. He uses two ‘astronomic telescopes’ (probably of 33-inch aper-
*‘ture) as collimator and observing-telescope, and a single bisulphide-of-
‘carbon prism of 60°. The large aperture of the telescopes gives illumina-
“tion enough to permit the use of a high magnifying-power ; and this compen-
‘sates for a less dispersion*; so that the apparatus showed all Kirchhoff’s
«lines with great distinctness. For extreme violet rays an image of the sun
‘‘was formed on the slit by an object-glass like that of the telescope. The
“‘ metallic spectra were obtained, not by an induction-machine, but by the
‘voltaic discharge of a battery of 50 Bunsens between massive electrodes of
“each metal. It may be that in this way a higher temperature is attained
“‘than by the induction-spark (especially if Wilde’s instrument were substi-
‘tuted for the battery); for he found that more lines, and of higher inten-
sity, were thus brought out than even by the large Ruhmkorff.

« He thus found in the solar spectrum 390 iron-lines more than were pre-
“viously known. He also found lines of manganese, and ascertained the
“identity of the line # with the fourth hydrogen-line which he had pre-
‘viously discovered.

“In 1866, he found that the lines A @ B, and some others, though
“telluric, are not due to aqueous vapour; for they are of undiminished
* strength at 16° below zero of Fahrenheit, while the other telluric lines were
“scarcely visible.

“Tn 1869 his researches on the solar spectrum contained determinations
‘of wave-lengths. ‘These were made by means of four gratings by Nobert,
“celebrated for his microscopic test-lines. These determinations appear
“to be exceedingly accurate. The intervals of the gratings were from
** =; inch to =<, and were determined with extreme care.

““They were compared by a microscope of 200 power, carried by a
“* dividing-engine carefully verified with a metre which had been compared
‘with the standard platinum one at the Conservatoire des Arts et Métiers.

“The corrections already mentioned for pressure, temperature, and aber-
%

‘Verz found that, witha telescope of 4 inches aperture, and flint prism of the same
“dimensions, 60°, the line between the two of D was visible.”

122 Anniversary Meeting. [ Nov. 30,

‘ration were attended to; and in the measures of the deviations the 5th
‘‘and 6th spectra were generally taken; his experience indicates that in
‘taking these measures it is best to have the intervals of the grating not
“very close, but covering a surface of some magnitude: the deviations are
“less, but the spectra brighter.

«The result of these measures is given in six beautiful maps, extending
“from B to H*. The places of the lines are laid down on a scale, not of de-
*‘viations, but of wave-lengths, in which the unit is a ten-millionth of a
‘millimetre.

“The advantage of this can scarcely be overrated ; for in other maps
‘the scale depends on the refractive indices of the prisms and their adjust-
“ments, so that no two are comparable; while at ordinary temperatures and
** pressures the wave-lengths are invariable.

** Tn addition to hydrogen he found in the sun thirteen metals, of which
“titanium has 200 lines. The total amount of metallic lines is nearly 800,
‘including most of the strong lines ; so that probably the sun has few ele-
*“ments which are not found on our earth. There are some strong lines
‘between EK and G whose origin as yet is unknown; one coincides with a
‘*line of bromine, whose presence is not probable. There are three strong
“* magnesium lines not present in the sun; and oxygen, nitrogen, and carbon,
“*so common here, are not detected there. He thinks the sun is not hot
** enough to make the first two luminous; carbon in the circuit of his battery
““shows no lines of its own, but those of its compounds. He doubts
‘*Plucker’s notion of the same substance having different spectra, and
*‘ thinks that the change is merely due to the increased temperature, which
“makes faint lines intense—and is disposed to think that the pillar-hke
‘* appearance observed in some star- “spectra indicates a lower fempereite
*‘ than the black sharp lines which occur in others.

«« The aurora and zodiacal light have in common a line (A=5567) whose
‘origin is yet unknown.

“It must be admitted that this list is the exponent of intellectual power
“ of first-rate excellence, and of additions to our knowledge which are not
“‘ only intrinsically valuable, but are also eminently suggestive of ulterior
“progress. Nor can his claim to priority of entrance into this wondrous
“ region be disputed by any unprejudiced judge. ‘Though Stokes and Thom-
“son nearly at the same time drew the same conclusion as to absorption,
«and even satisfied themselves of the identity of D with the sodium lines—
‘though Stewart, and still more successfully Kirchhoff, again brought it
‘before the public three years after, yet this is what happens to every
‘inventor or discoverer: others follow in his track, some perhaps more
“successfully than himself; but his right remains untouched.”

The ‘ Porcupine’ having been again placed by the Admiralty (for three
months of the summer of 1870) at the disposal of the physicists and
naturalists engaged in researches on the temperature of the sea at great
depths, and on the nature of the sea-bottom and of the life existing in its

1870.] President’s Address. 123

vicinity, the coasts of Spain and Portugal and of the Mediterranean have
been the fields of exploration in the present year. As the results will form
the subject of a communication to the Society at its next Evening Meeting,
I abstain from adverting on the present occasion to any of the interesting
particulars with which Dr. Carpenter and Mr. Gwyn Jeffreys have been so
obliging as to furnish me.

Her Majesty’s Government having been pleased to accede to a request
made by a Joint Committee of the Royal and of the Royal Astronomical
Societies, for means of conveyance to and from Cadiz and Gibraltar of
twenty-five persons desirous of observing the Total Solar Eclipse on the 21st
December 1870, and for a sum not exceeding £3000 to defray cost of in-
struments, travelling-expenses of the scientific party, and other miscellaneous
Services and purposes connected therewith, the necessary arrangements have
been confided to an organizing Committee, under the immediate direction
of the Astronomer Royal, and are now in progress.

You are perhaps aware that your President occupies, as such, an official
seat in the Board of Trustees of the British Museum. In attending to
these duties, I became impressed with the benefits which might result if
objects, for the exhibition of which space cannot be found at the British
Museum—and most especially specimens of natural history—were freely
lent, under suitable regulations for their safe custody and safe return when
required, to Provincial Museums. For this purpose it would be necessary
to introduce a modification in the Act of Parliament, under which the
Trustees are now bound not to permit the removal from the Museum of any
article which has been once received into it. I have made this suggestion
known in different quarters, and have found it, generally speaking, so
favourably received, that I even thought it possible that I might be able
on this occasion to inform you that some advance had been made in its
actual realization. I can only say at present that some steps have been
taken in that direction, which, I hope, may yet bear fruit.

I proceed to the award of the Medals.

The Copley Medal has been awarded to Mr. James Prescott Joule, for
his Experimental Researches on Heat.

The researches, for which the Copley Medal has thus been awarded, are
the same for which a Royal Medal was awarded to Mr. Joule in the year
1850. The terms of the award in 1850 were for “his Researches on the
Mechanical Equivalent of Heat;”’ those on the present occasion were for
his ‘‘Experimental Researches on Heat.’? Both awards refer to the
same experiments, and are substantially for the same great step in Natural
Philosophy ; of which, therefore, it is needless for me to give you an account
at thistime. You are all aware that by it a great principle has been added
to the sum of human knowledge—one fruitful in consequences in a thousand
ways, and which, being accepted amongst undisputed truths, is now em-

124 Anniversary Meeting. [ Nov. 30,

bodied, without question, alike in the most wide-ranging speculations and
the most matter-of-fact practice. |

The award of two Medals for the same researches is an exceedingly rare
proceeding in our Society, and rightly so. The Council have on this
occasion desired to mark by it, in the most emphatic manner, their sense
of the special and original character, and high desert of Mr. Joule’s
discovery. No words of mine could add to the value of the award.

Mr. Jouve,
I present you with this Medal, in testimony of the very high sense
which the Royal Society entertains of your researches, and of the results to
which they have led.

The Council has awarded a Royal Medal to Professor William Hallowes
Miller, Foreign Secretary of the Royal Society, for his researches and
writings on Mineralogy and Crystallography, and for his scientific labours
in the restoration of the National Standard of Weight.

These last-named labours appeared to me to have, from their national
importance conjoined with great scientific merit, so peculiar a claim to a
Royal Medal, that it was preeminently on this ground that I ven-
tured myself to propose the award; and for the same reason I have ob-
tained permission from the Astronomer Royal, who is the Chairman of the
Standards Commission, to give here in full a statement from his pen, in
which, as a Member of that Commission, I most entirely concur.

“ For full explanation of the considerations which have guided the Council
“in awarding a Royal Medal to Professor Miller, it appears necessary to
“‘ advert to some circumstances occurring at a time anterior to that which is
*‘ recognized as limiting the claims that can be examined in reference to the
“award of a Medal. When, after the fire which destroyed the Houses of
“‘ Parliament, it was ascertained that the National Standards of Length and
*«‘ Weight (then preserved in the Parliament-buildings) were entirely ruined,
‘‘a Commission was appointed to consider the questions connected with the
‘* Restoration of the Standards. Although Professor Miller was not a
«¢ Member of that Commission, his friendly assistance contributed greatly to
‘‘ ouide the Commission in some of their more important recommendations,
“especially in those which related to the means to be provided for con-
“ tingent restoration of the Standard of Weight. ‘The Commission proposed
‘in their Report (among a number of less conspicuous regulations), the
‘repeal of the law providing a physical principle of restoration of the
‘“‘ standards, substituting for it a reference to existing copies, and the esta-
‘“‘blishment of a Department of Standards. A Commission was then ap-
“pointed for construction of the New National Standards ; and the services
“© of Professor Miller, as Member of this Commission, were invaluable. His
“paper in the Philosophical Transactions, describing the operations for re-
“« storing the value of the Old Standard of Weight, for constructing the New
‘Standard of a different value, for constructing various derived Standards,

1870. ] President's Address. 125

‘and for establishing the relative value of the kilogramme, will long be
‘‘cited as a model of accuracy. To this, however, I refer at the present
“time as introductory to the strict subject of this Medal.

‘At length the principal object for which the successive Commissions
‘(and none of the Members more strongly than Professor Miller) had for
“so many years so earnestly contended, namely the establishment of a De-
“« partment of Standards as a substantive branch of the Government (subor-
“dinate to the Board of Trade), was attained. And, nearly at the same
‘time, a new Royal Commission, of which Professor Miller was a member,
“was appointed for examining and reporting on the state of the Secondary
Standards, and for considering every question which could affect the Pri-
‘mary, Secondary, and Local Standards. As Head of the new Department,
“the Government were most fortunate in being able to avail themselves of
“the talent and energy of Mr. H. W. Chisholm; and to the cordial co-
“ operation of Professor Miller and Mr. Chisholm, principally in regard to
“the questions of Weights, but also on many points applying to lengths
‘and capacities, is to be ascribed in great measure a result which (in the
« hope of Professor Miller’s colleagues) will prove to be an important legis-
“lative success. Without the extensive knowledge and the long experience
«of Professor Miller this result could not have been expected. The field of
“labour was very wide; not only were the state of Standards of all degrees
“ of subordination, and the legislation respecting them, to be considered, but
“‘the Commission and Professor Miller, in a high degree, had the serious
«and responsible charge of offering to the Government their matured opi-
“‘nions on the grave questions of introduction of Metric System, abrogation
‘of Troy Weight, and future arrangement of the entire system of British
‘Standards. It is believed that the fruits of these labours may be correctly
“stated as :—the establishment of an office which for accuracy of standards
“and perfection in the methods of using them, may compare favourably
‘‘with any in the world; the indication of the best direction of legislation
‘in establishment of regulations for their national utility; and the expo-
«‘ sition of the broad views which may advantageously be adopted by nations,
“especially by Britain, in deciding on the course to be followed under the
‘““competing claims of different systems. For this presumed success the
“country is greatly indebted to the ability, the science, and the incessant
‘‘ attention of Professor Miller.”

Though in awarding the Royal Medal to Professor Miller it was natu-
rally impossible not to advert to them, I am not prepared to give you any
corresponding account of those researches in Mineralogy and Crystallo-
graphy which, having been prosecuted for more than thirty years, have
gained for him the highest reputation wherever those departments of
knowledge are cultivated throughout the world, and have accordingly been
translated into different European languages.

Proressor MILLER,
It is with very great pleasure that I present you with this Medal, in
VOL, XIX. L

126 Anniversary Meeting. [ Nov. 30,

recognition of the valuable services which you have rendered to your
country, as well as to science.

The Council has awarded a Royal medal to Mr. Thomas Davidson; for
his works on the ‘ Recent and Fossil Brachiopoda,’ more especially for his
series of monographs in the publications of the Paleeontographical Society.

The publications referred to in this award extend over a period of twenty-
three years, viz. from 1847 to 1870; the plates which illustrate these
works have been drawn by himself upon stone, and freely presented to the
different Societies which have published his writings.

Mr. Davipson,

I have the pleasure of presenting this Medal to you in testimony of the
value which the Royal Society attaches to your writings on British and
Foreign Brachiopoda

The Council has awarded the Rumford Medal to Monsieur Alfred Olivier
Des Cloizeaux, for his researches in Mineralogical Optics.

For nearly thirty years M. Des Cloizeaux has been occupied in investi-
gating the characters of crystallized bodies, and more especially those which
are produced by their action upon light. He has subjected nearly 500
crystalline species to an optical scrutiny, determining the ratio of the velo-
city of light of various colours in air to its velocity in the direction of each
of the axes of optical elasticity within the crystal, the angle between the
optic axes in biaxial crystals, and the dispersion of the optic axes. The
results of these observations are published in vols. xi. and xiv. of the ‘ An-
nales des Mines,’ and in vol. xviii. of the ‘ Mémoires des Savants Etrangers ’.

Assuming the truth of the laws connecting the optical properties of
a crystal and its system of crystallization established by Sir David Brewster,
he has applied them to correct the descriptions of mineral species, by the
methods detailed in his ‘ Mémoire sur l'emploi du microscope polarisant
et sur l’étude des propriétés optiques biréfringentes propres a déterminer
le systéme crystallin dans les cristaux naturels ou artificiels.’ Numerous
instances of these corrected descriptions occur in the ‘Comptes Rendus,’
the ‘ Annales de Chimie,’ the ‘ Annales des Mines,’ the ‘ Transactions of
the Royal Society ’ for 1868, and in his ‘ Treatise on Mineralogy.’

While investigating the effect of heat in modifying the action of crys-
talline bodies, he observed that the positions of the optic axes of felspar,
chrysoberyl], and brookite changed on the application of heat, returning
to their original positions when the crystal regained its initial temperature,
as indeed was known before in the case of felspar; but on increasing the
temperature beyond a certain limit, he made the very unexpected discovery
that the positions of the optic axes were permanently altered. Thus in
felspar the permanent change occurs at a low red heat, or at about 600° C.
M. Des Cloizeaux exhibited this experiment in the presence of the Che-
mical Section of the British Association at the Meeting held in Cambridge

1870. | President’s Adaress. 127

in 1862. This discovery leads to a conclusion of great importance to the
geologist. The optic axes of a crystal of felspar serve as the index of a
self-registering thermometer, and show that the crystal had never been
exposed to a temperature reaching to 600° C. |

Circular polarization was first discovered in quartz by Arago in 1811,
and in chlorate of soda, bromate of soda, and acetate of uranium and soda,
all three belonging to the cubic system, by Marbach in 1854. In
1857 M. Des Cloizeaux detected its existence in cinnabar, producing a
rotation of a plane-polarized beam, sometimes to the right, sometimes
to the left, to from 15 to 17 times the angle of rotation due to an equal
thickness of quartz,—and also, nearly at the same time, in sulphate of
strychnine with 13 combining-weights of water, a crystal belonging to
the pyramidal system, the rotation, in one direction only (Herschel’s
right-handed rotation), the same as that of its solution, and about half
as great as in an equal thickness of quartz. In February 1869 M. Des
Cloizeaux discovered that benzile (C!* H!° O07), a compound obtained by
Laurent from the essence of bitter almonds in 1835, in crystals belonging
to the rhombohedral system, produced a rotation a little greater than that
of quartz. The crystals which came first into his possession were all dex-
trogyre; but he has lately obtained some producing a rotation in the op-
posite direction.

In his memoir on the Crystallization and Internal Construction of Quartz
he has largely employed the method of exploration by polarized light.

During the summers of 1845 and 1846 he paid two visits to Iceland,
in one of which, conjointly with M. Bunsen, he determined the tem-
peratures, at different depths, of the great Geyser and the Strokkur, with
the view of discovering the source of their heat, and the cause of the
eruptions.

Any remarks on his very numerous and valuable determinations of the
forms of crystalline species, as well as on the geological observations made
by him in Iceland, would be obviously out of place in a summary of the
researches on light and heat which render him eligible as a recipient of
the Rumford Medal.

Proressor MILLER,
In Monsieur Des Cloizeaux’s unavoidable absence, I request you, as our
Foreign Secretary, to convey to him this Medal, in recognition of the value
which the Royal Society attaches to his researches.

GENTLEMEN,

If elected for the year which commences this day, andif I should be able
to meet you here at your next anniversary, it will be to deliver over this
Chair, doubtless to a younger, it may well be to a worthier occupant ; it
can hardly be to one having the welfare of the Royal Society more warmly
at heart.

128 Number of Fellows. [ Nov. 30,

On the motion of Mr. Francis Galton, seconded by Colonel Smythe, it
was resolved,—“ That the thanks of the Society be returned to the Presi-
dent for his Address, and that he be requested to allow it to be printed.”

The Statutes relating to the election of the Council and Officers having
been read, and Capt. Sherard Osborn and Mr. Edward Solly having been,
with the consent of the Society, nominated Scrutators, the votes of the
Fellows present were collected, and the following were declared duly
elected as Council and Officers for the ensuing year.

President.—General Sir Edward Sabine, R.A., K.C.B., D.C.L., LL.D.
Treasurer.— William Spottiswoode, Esq., M.A.

Willim Sharpey, M.D., LL.D.
George Gabriel Stokes, Esq., M.A., D.C.L., LL.D.

Foreign Secretary.—Professor William Hallowes Miller, M.A., LL.D.

Other Members of the Council.—George Burrows, M.D.; Heinrich
Debus, Esq., Ph.D.; Prof. Peter Martin Duncan, M.B.; Sir Philipde M.
Grey Egerton, Bart. ; Prof. George Carey Foster, B.A.; Francis Galton,
Esq.; John Peter Gassiot, Esq., D.C.L.; Joseph Dalton Hooker, C.B.,
M.D.; William Huggins, Esq., D.C.L., LL.D.; Prof. George M. Hum-
phry, M.D.; JohnGwyn Jeffreys, Esq. ; Sir John Lubbock, Bart. ; Charles
William Siemens, Ksq., D.C.L.; Prof. Henry J. Stephen Smith, M.A. ; Prof.
John Tyndall, LL.D.; Prof. Alexander W. Williamson, Ph.D.

The thanks of the Society were voted to the Scrutators.

Secretaries.—

The following Table shows the progress and present state of the Society
with respect to the number of Fellows :—

Financial Statement. i29

1870.]

‘qisodeqy ye sourreq “sonbeg vIIeATTQ “PT ‘SLT 9OLF

"puny Tepe Aaveg—yoorg Aemypiey que aed g poojuvaeny seapepy 090F
‘puny [epeyy Aopdog pue uvieyeqg—yooyg yuan aod €% mont “pe “se ECF
‘SoMMMUnY ATR Peyeprosuoy PL Sct 69G bar

‘unuue tod eF ‘suvioisdyg Jo oseT[oH oy} wos} “TPT YoqureyT
‘umnuue sod sf GF Jed ‘xossng ‘somory avou wae 99,7
‘unuue dad ‘so, 6OIF ‘(C4 $1Z “A GV FE) Xoso_ppryy ‘Moy ye oWeISq
‘umnuue tod 9g[F. (4 ZUG VEG) ocatysupooury ‘odaoyyerqeyy 4e o7eISq
‘spung asnuy burpnjour ‘hjnooy yohoy ayp fo hjwadoug pup saqnysy

"(quounog ay? fo asanbou hg)

0 € OLMSF HAOOMSLLLOdS “M
e SI G SOD OOO UIOCO OID eesce yUNODDV ysep 440g 66
EC OR ee ee ae eran JUNOVDW oNsoTeIVO Jo souRpeg
Soe. ee aay Sab «tin aw yueg ye oourpeg
6 &1 G8cGG
(9 QT V4 weve cusenceevesccs 9INqorT UBIO) ‘IOTTRMA Iq
[Die Cte eae amnjooT PLouyy “SuIqqeg “Iq “AeY
| 0 0 + SECC ICICICION EOICECICICECECECEG oInjoory UBLIOYe, “UOSMECT IA
L il GLE < 9 FI > Koo OUIGOUUROUOO DOUG ObDOODOOD puny [PP Aejdog
9 e Ge SOOO SEIOIOE BUICH EOI NOION) pecucee puny UW1BY.OULIGUL AA,
0 IL 9e¢ ss EA a, Saree Nang pun, uoYRuog.
\9 GI CL POICIOI CROC ECHO NC ECR ECCI a Ei (Aqn¢ KovesoT) qsonbog ION Tag
Base ioce a Sy fore gue ae (peutolqns etquy, tod sv) sosuodxa [eroue1
9 FI 980 GUO DO ODDDODOOOODUGUIGUOUCO omiOoodUOd te Aydeasouqry pue ‘SULARLOURT
‘Suipuig ‘aodegq ‘scurpeooorg pur suotorsuery, suyuig
S II G1Z etateietaretavererclapeikioietelelelereiiiey sieves iarerets SUIPULT pure Aarerquys ou} LOF syooq
(3). (0) (OY OSS) sae ee eae ace ig (qunooov uo) edoosejay, ‘ysonbeg vtteal[O
9 el CIF sle.slcie ee Dlelelacafeleverwiors Wrei=iejvicleivialeeftrerelsrsCeLsisjersrerstenene ensolRyeVO OYIJUSLOG ouL
; 61 GOT Rjolska(viatetaleieiers eee vicina o slcisvevele viele cit.c/niute "*TOISUO J pue ‘g9.08 AA ‘SoLeyeg
DS F

‘sorpmuuy quay dod g poonpoy OUO'FIF
ye 07e4S9 UB JO JUET AvaTO OYy JO YIY-2uC

0 Orber
ae
eee
pemee o
et
(eel lee aie gicboletoetans afetelstolaceteieterateictelt7e Sete monterviaterateieve siotetsists squoutedery hynoq
0 61 GZ9 DO OMOMOUOUDOOO CH eoceesescee "On ‘ssulpo0001g ‘suUOTJORSUBLT, jo 9Te9
9 Gl CL eee t tt meee terete rene eee ee etsee (predo. Ayng KovsarT ) qsonbog: Kae
Q ral GG ee oreo seecene Covert ewer eseeecences pooees (qsea0}UT ) (73 6¢
0 0 008 ecco r ose ecene eo eee eee ee eas ee eeree (q1sodoq wWOIF) ysonboq RATOATIO
Il GT aks SOOO OUOOUHODCOOOUOOON enc onsece FOO UIOUDMOCDOBU “* spun qsuay, ‘OIC
} 9 QLET aVa\erncbieva¥oioyatevs) elu teietevevofeie/cielerelaveta\ele/ oe ateveve tals ib iuieistefelevaforetere vielelsisieleintelulateys Spueprlarqy
) LI GGG atafafeiareioletel siejuje’wis/e(sielaleisielelein:iivielaje iste Cree e res vcanescccesunavucecenesace S}Ue yy
0 F OIG, “‘suotztsodmop pur ‘soaq uorsstupy ‘suoydriosqng jenuuy
i, + BE afefete’s sisjelejaiwiste)aih sVeleicletslo\staislelernie eceeces puvy 0 pue yueg qe oouRleg
‘p “9 ¥

‘OLR AG Laquiaaoyr pun “BOR ‘T “aquuacagq: uaanjeg hzowog yohory ay2 fo syuawhng pun spdraoay

“(quowunoy ay2 fo asanbau hg)

S HQOOMSILGOdS “MAM
eG ol S0lte
3 O <2 trroteeeerrereessToreUo(yT ‘sfooyog odaogyajqe
va SG OP serereres*gorBU) Ayjog pue ‘sjoorrg ‘adeysog
(eed | 9 e el Conroe erence ereereence ee meee eee teeters ereee SUISIJAOA PW
, 0 gt cout SURGn ann bork ionebieg Sens saat ah ate goxe Ty,
oe 9 BL GL tts eeesgadaego foaang ayaysay
; QO TL OG ttitteeettes rises sseeeemgoureamsuy ati
V4 eT &% sees Pee emcee eer eres ter aegoreresere . sosuodxqy vay, eel
e QT OI COICIOICIOICnOn a III) saredoyy 19) pue ‘SUlyYOlT ‘TROD 9 6 COLy Be Meee reer eee anasto agate 1H sesrsreeeeseees OL8I ‘og “AON
rie Si) ee toa “+ sosuadxty SNOoURT[OOSITH SuIpus Ivo oY} UI OTMOOUT A0AO oINAIPUEd XM JO SsoOXTT
(OL 8 96 ie ee Sue pure ‘uruvoyy ‘ssunqi Ge GL SOLh se es OL8I ‘OF “AON Surpuo avoX og ur oanqipuedxy
aie (L 61 688 Jed, Ba Le Aqdeas ong eee! put DetGu UGG) ve OLS ‘OE “AON Surpuo avo X o4y oF o[GeTLeAW OUTOOUT
= ie 61 cel ae su ae OnE Sarqomng pue 2 mepUeL 0 SLI Binnie Sera resersseeseesrrretrrsseereeseeerss saurqutkedery Ayoq
S ye @ OZZ esas ype20 it PUES Le TL toy zodeg 8 ZL oS mloleielsiocarelevels etaieinielaleleiitetelsieivieceteinieeis ateistalelets (qse10quT) qsonbog, eataAT[O)
~ pase pede NI Et VIl etiieiats acti a : homme ect ome 9 GI GL Senee it eles mores (predaa Ang AowseryT) ysonbog Lavy
2 er nae Cai eS immed SHE “0. BL Beg: eee ea eee Scan ge
op) e 61 Gre { OL8T gaa - Ti 99F sislolatulecveiaiela(eleleteteratalsintalstetsteretainiatsin ces WOSUeAg4 uo (13
Sg ore ee Oe, [Bee oO8T TE ta SwoRowUBA, Senmeg —|—O gr GIOK ~_(spung snag, J oaeose) soO}S wo spuOpLNE
> I (9) Jil GGG @eeeeeseveese ee ee weer er eereeereeeeeer eee $} UOT
Ss Fee CGH eco a ea se clan cea mae Pye deere ALeIGUT oy} LOZ syoor, 0 0 08g ce naan hh salads egaeeee reeeroe suomtsodul0g
~ 9 oe | GIF aoe e cee e roma srerserressst sees Ons ee eee eenes ansoleyen dyTUEIOG ou 0 0 O9T eee es eee sens eeee weer e ree eeseseseseace Rieiehistne sts Sah gGo gy UOISSTULpY
ce b el CORN Male da aaa eye etetehetssitee ** WOIsueg puv ‘Soat AA ‘SOTIRTEQ Oe TOOT cs ke eae ares toeeeeee teense wees suordraosqng jenuuy
fe F 1/3
“OLS ‘0G “equmaaoyr Supua wax ay, buimp (spung gsnuz woul puodo) aunppuedug pun auoour fo yuauagny
—_—_—_—_—_— Dodi Pols
9 LL PLLF QZ GG ieesteesttrreeeteeseeencensesenecneanres Hetereeseeresees QOIG TO OTRE
fy 1 ipa bea oapserk tia aaa Mosisteitteitatedtel inte pieaienieisletaie's resis ‘gouryeq 00 GIL oC" chan Soa sonpeboaen saree «inhale ss MMs ateerats cies ‘+ gHOIyRUO
0 FI GSE a eee mecca tse e err e set ersn essere rene sss reer re seeees ove qy.sn0g 4040 G 61 SSL COC ee eos ere e ease ees OOOO OE anes rH eee EOF eeeeeerssegarsere® spuoprlalqy
0 0 Glg iieetetestes Hrneeneerestreettrerens gaopug Le ns a (or CTs
‘D [C FF ‘P 7S) F +
oD g OL 16c0F _ ies
ma 0 0. 00k F.: warhead rashes aT OREO Ze ueqodoao pr rT «
= 8 Ol 16lOF “Te sorymmmuy “quep ted g mony ‘OLST Ane 07 dn syueursoauy

‘pung foyaay oufiquarogy

- 1870.] Presents. 131

Presents received November 17, 1870.

Transactions.

Batavia :—Bataviaasch Genootschap van Kunsten en Wetenschappen.
Verhandelingen. Deel 33. 4to. Batavia 1868. Notulen van de
Algemeene en Bestuurs-Vergaderingen. Deel 4. Afl.2; Deel 5,
6,7. No.1. 8vo. Batavia 1867-9. Tijdschrift voor Indische Taal-,
Land-, en Volkenkunde. Deel 16. Afi. 2-6; Deel 17. Afi. 1-6;
Deel 18. Afi. 1. 8vo. Batavia 1866-68. Katalogus der Ethno-
logische Afdeeling van het Museum. 8vo. Batavia 1868. Cata-
logus der Numismatische Afdeeling. 8vo. Batavia 1869.

The Society.

Copenhagen :—Kongelige Danske Videnskabernes Selskab. Skrifter.
5 Rekke. 8 Bind, 6, 7; 9 Bind, 1. 4to. Ajébenhavn 1869. Over-
sigt, 1868, No. 6; 1869, No. 3,4; 1870, No.1. 8vo. Ajébenhaun

1868-70. The Society.
Dublin :—Royal Dublin Society. Journal. No. 39. 8vo. Dublin 1870.
The Society.

Konigsberg: — Konigliche physikalisch-okonomische Gesellschaft.
Schriften. Jahrgang 8-10. 4to. Kénigsberg 1869-70. The Society.
Haarlem :—Hollandsche Maatschappij der Wetenschappen. Natuur-
kundige Verhandelingen. Deel 12, 24. 8vo. Haarlem 1824-44.
Tweede Verzameling. Deel 5. Stuk 2; Deel 13, 20. C. H. Hoff-
mann u. H. Weyenbergh, Die Osteologie und Myologie von Sciurus
Vulgaris. W. F. R.Suringar, Algze Japonice. 4to. Haarlem 1850-
70. Archives Néerlandaises des Sciences Exactes et Naturelles.

Tome VY. liv. 1-3. 8vo. La Haye 1870. The Society.
Haarlem :—Musée Tayler. Archives. Vol. III. fase. 1. 8vo. Harlem
1870. The Museum.

London :—British Museum. Hand List of Genera and Species of Birds,
by G. R. Gray. Part 2. Supplement to the Catalogue of Shield
Reptiles, by J. E. Gray. Part I. 4to. London 1870. Catalogue
of Lithophytes, or Stony Corals, by J. E.Gray. 8vo. London 1870.
Catalogue of the Fishes, by A. Giinther. Vol. VIII. 8vo. London
1870. Index and Guide to the Collection of Minerals. Guide to
the Exhibition Rooms of the Departments of Natural History and
Antiquities. Guide to the Autograph Letters, &. 8vo. London
1870. Catalogue of Prints and Drawings. Division 1. Satires.

Vol. I. 1820-1689. 8vo. London 1870. The Trustees.
Clinical Society. Transactions. Vol. III. 8vo. London 1870.
The Society.
Institution of Civil Engineers. Minutes of Proceedings. Vol. X XIX. ©
XXX. 8vo. London 1870. The Institution.

Linnean Society. Transactions. Vol. XXVI. Part 4; Vol. X XVII.

Te ae tao ae

132 Presents. [Nov. 17,

Transactions (continued). |
Parts 1&2. 4to. London 1870. Journal. Zoology, Vol. XI. No. 49.
Botany, Vol. XI. Nos. 54, 55. 8vo. London 1870. Proceedings,
Session 1869-70, pp. xxxili-exx. Additions to the Library. List.

8vo. The Society.
Royal Agricultural Society. Journal. Second Series. Vol. VI. Part 2.
8vo. London 1870. The Society.

Royal Institution. Proceedings. Vol. V. Part 7; Vol. VI. Parts1&2.
8yvo. London 1869-70. List of the Members, &c. The Institution.
Royal Medical and Chirurgical Society. Medico-Chirurgical Trans-
actions. Vol. LIII. Proceedings. Vol. VI. No. 6. 8vo. London 1870.
The Society.

Science and Art Department of the Committee of Council on Educa-
tion. The First Proofs of the Universal Catalogue of Books on
Art. Vol. II. 4to. London 1870. The Committee of Council.
Society of Antiquaries. Archzologia. Vol. XLII. Part 2. 4to. London
1870. Proceedings. Second Series. Vol. LV. No. 8. 8vo. London

1870. The Society.
New York :—American Geographical and Statistical Society. Journal.
Vol. II. Part 2. 8vo. New York 1870. The Society.

Newcastle :—Natural-History Transactions of Northumberland and

Durham. Vol. III. Part 2. 8vo. Mewcastle-upon-Tyne 1870.
Tyneside Naturalists’ Field Club.
Paris :—Ecole Impériale Polytechnique. Journal. Tome XXYI. (Cahier
43.) 4to. Paris 1870. The School.
St. Petersburg :—Académie Impériale des Sciences. Mémoires. VII.
Série. Tome XIV. No. 8,9; Tome XY. No. 1-4. 4to. St. Péters-
bourg 1869-70. Bulletin. Tome XIV. No. 4-6. 4to. St. Péters-
bourg 1870. The Academy.
Salem (Mass.):—Essex Institute. Proceedings. Vol. V. Nos. 2, 8, 5,
6,7; Vol. VI. Part 1. Bulletin. Vol. I., No. 1-12. @yo, Salem
1867-70. The Institute.
Peabody Academy of Science. First Annual Report of the Trustees,
January 1869. 8vo. Salem 1869. The American Naturalist. Vol.

III. Nos. 1-12; Vol. IV. Nos. 1, 2. 8vo. Salem 1869-70.

The Academy.
Warwick :—Warwickshire Natural-History and Archeological Society.
Annual Report. 1, 2, 5-16, 18, 25-34, 8vo. Warwick 1837-70.
Proceedings of the Warwickshire Naturalists’ and Archeologists’
Field Club. 1865, 1868. 8vo. Warwick. The Society.
Washington :—Smithsonian Institution. Smithsonian Contributions to
Knowledge. Vol. XVI. 4to. Washington 1870. Smithsonian Mis-
cellaneous Collections. Vol. VIII., IX. 8vo. Washington 1869.
Annual Report of the Board of Regents for the year 1868. 8vo.
Washington 1869. The Institution.

1870. | Presents. 133

Wellington :—New-Zealand Institute. Transactions and Proceedings.
1868-69. Vol. L., II. 8vo. Wellington 1869-70. The Institute.

Journals.
Australian Medical Journal. No. 108-112. 8vo. Melbourne 1870.
. The Editor.
Bulletin de Statistique ai oe Ville de Paris. Jan._May 1870. 4to.
Paris. Mons. Chevreau.
Zeitschrift fir Chemie. J ee 9-12. 8vo. Leipzg 1866-69.
The Editors.
Observations.

Dublin :—Astronomical Observations and Researches made at Dunsink,
the Observatory of Trinity College, Dublin. Part 1. 4to. Dublin 1870.

| Dr. F. Brunnow.

Leyton :—Astronomical Observations taken during the years 1865-69
at the Private Observatory of J. G. Barclay, Esq. Vol. II. 4to. London
SLO: J. G. Barclay, Esq.
London :—Meteorological Office. Quarterly Weather Report. Part 1.
Jan.—March 1869. 4to. London 1870. Weather Reports. Jan. 1 to
June 30, 1870. folio. London. Report of the Meteorological Com-
mittee of the Royal Society for the year ending 31st December, 1869.
8vo. London 1870. The Office.
Oxford :—Radcliffe Observatory. Results of Astronomical and Meteoro-
logical Observations made in the year 1867. Vol. XXVII. 8vo.
Oxford 1870. The Radcliffe Trustees.

Brodie (Rev. P. B.) Practical Geology. 8vo. Warwick 1869. Sketch of
the Lias generally in England. 8vo. Warwick 1868. The Author.
Deslongchamps (Eugene E.-) Notes Paléontologiques. Vol. I. 8vo. Caen
1863-69. The Author.
Duhamel (J. M. C.) Des Méthodes dans les Sciences de Raisonnement.
Partie 4. 8vo. Paris 1870. The Author.
Harris (George) The Theory of the Arts, or Art in relation to Nature,
Civilization, and Man. 2 vols. 8vo. London 1869. The Author.
Holland (T. J.) and H. Hozier Record of the Expedition to Abyssinia.
2 vols. 4to, and case of Maps. London 1870.
The Secretary of State for War.
Jardine (Sir Wm.), F.R.S. ‘Natural History and Illustrations of the
Scottish Salmonidee. 12 plates in portfolio.
General Sir Edward Sabine, K.C.B., P.R.S.
Lubbock (Sir John), F.R.S. The Origin of Civilization and the Primitive
Condition of Man, 8vo. London 1870. The Author.
VOL. XIX. M

134 Presents. [Nov. 24,

Métivier (Georges) Dictionnaire Franco-Normand ou Recueil des Mots
particuliers au Dialecte de Guernesey. 8vo. London 1870.

Dr. Hoskins, F.R.S.

Poncelet (J.V.), For. Mem. R.S. Introduction a la Mécanique Industrielle

physique ou expérimentale; troisicme édition, par X. Kretz. 8vo.

Paris 1870. The Editor.

Secchi (A.), For. Mem. R.S. Le Soleil. 8vo. Paris 1870. The Author.

Tayler (William) The Popes of Rome, from the earliest times to Pius IX.

a.d. 1870. 8vo0. London 1870. The Author.

November 24, 1870.

Transactions.
Brinn :—Naturforschender Verein. Verhandlungen. Band VII. 1868.
8vo. Brinn 1869. _ The Society.
Goteborg :—Kongl. Vetenskaps och Vitterhets Samhiille. Handlingar.
Ny Tidsfoljd. X. Hiftet. 8vo. Goteborg 1870. The Society.

London :—Institution of Civil Engineers. The Education and Status of
Civil Engineers in the United Kingdom and Foreign Countries.
8vo. London 1870. ' ‘The Institution.

St. Bartholomew’s Hospital. Reports. Vol. VI. 8vo. London 1870.
The Hospital.
St. Thomas’s Hospital. Reports. New Series. Vol. I. 8vo. London
1870. | The Hospital.

Prague :—Kénigl. Bohmische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften. Abhand-
lungen vom Jahre 1869. Sechste Folge. Band III. 4to. Prag i870.
Sitzungsberichte, Jahrgang 1869. 8vo. Prag 1869-70. Reper-
torium simmtlicher Schriften ... vom Jahre 1769, bis 1868. 8yo.
Prag 1869.

Switzerland :—Schweizerische Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Verhand-
lungen. 53 Jahresversammlung in Solothurn. Jahresbericht 1869.
8vo. Solothurn 1870. The Society.

Vienna :—K. K. Zoologisch-Botanische Gesellschaft. Verhandlungen.
Jahrgang 1869. Band XIX. 8vo. Wren1869. Commelinacee In-
dice, imprimis Archipelagi Indici, auctore C. Hasskarl. 8vo. Vin-
dobone 1870. The Society.

Observations.

Greenwich :—Royal Observatory. Astronomical and Magnetical and
_ Meteorological Observations made in the year 1868. 4to.. London
1870. The Admiralty.
Melbourne :—Observatory. Results of Astronomical Observations made

in the year 1866, 1867, and 1868. 8vo. Melbourne 1869.
Her Majesty’s Government in Victoria.
Washington :—Bureau of Navigation. The American Ephemeris and

1870. | Appropriation of the Government Grant. 135

Observations (continued).
Nautical Almanac for the year 1872. 8vo. Washington 1870.
Tables of Harmonia, by HE. Schubert. 4to. Washington 1869.
The Bureau.

Bastian (H. C.), F.R.S. Facts and Reasonings concerning the Hetero-
genous Evolution of Living Things. 8vo. London 1870.

The Author.

Helmholtz (H.), For. Mem. R.8. Die Lehre von den Tonempfindungen.
Dritte umgearbeitete Ausgabe. 8vo. Braunschweig 1870.

The Author.

Huguet (H. A. B.) Exposé de Médecine Homceodynamique. 12mo. Paris

1869. The Author.

Jones (Joseph) Suggestions on Medical Education. Introductory Lecture

in the Medical College of Georgia. 8vo. Augusta 1860. Agricultural

Resources of Georgia. Address before the Cotton Planters’ Conven-

tion of Georgia at Macon. 8vo. Augusta 1861. Researches upon

“‘ Spurious Vaccination.” 8vo. Nashville 1867. Chemical Analysis of

Louisiana Rock-salt. 8vo. New Orleans 1869. Mollities Ossium.

8vo. Philadelphia 1869. Observations and Researches on Albinism in

the Negro Race. 8vo. Philadelphia 1869. The Author.
Luvini (Giovanni) Saggio di un corso di Fisica Elementare proposto alle
scuole Italiane. 8vo. Torino 1868. The Author.

Walenn (W. H.) Patents for Inventions. Abridgments of Specifications
relating to Aéronautics, a.p. 1815-1866. 8vo. London 1869.
The Compiler.

A.—Account* of the appropriation of the sum of £1000 annually
voted by Parliament to the Royal Society (the Government Grant),
to be employed in aiding the advancement of Science. The present
statement is im continuation of that already given up to April
5, 1855, in Volume VII. pp. 512-522.

1855.

1. To the Rev. F. Bashforth, for inquiries concerning Capillary
RRUDEE MOM ans WL gees elk) che Mey inet en Alto dlg lhl) QUE a tenes Or 2eD0
2. To Dr. Miller, on behalf of the Kew Observatory, for the con-
struction and verification of Standard Meteorological Instruments . 100
* By resolution of the Council of Dec. 15, 1870, it has been ordered that accounts of
the Expenditure of the Government Grant, and of the sums granted from the Donation

Fund, shall be published annually in the Proceedings, with the Report of the Anni-
versary Meeting.

136 Appropriation of the Government Grant.

3. To Dr. Salter, for inquiries in Experimental Physiology ..
4. To Dr. Frankland, for continuation of his researches on Or-
gano-Mietallie:Bodiés ) 0.02... 050.5 oh. ot ee
5. To Mr. Fairbairn, for experiments on the Explosions of Steam-
poilerse........ Hae
- 6. To Professor E. ioletineba oe coneinuies ie experimen
on the Strength of Materials 3). 00.0... 0)
7. To Dr. Carpenter, for researches in Marine Natural History .
. 8. To Mr. H. F. Baxter, for researches in Electro-Physiology..

1856.

1. To Dr. Gladstone, for researches on Chemical Affinity

2. To Dr. Tyndall, for continuing researches in Magnetism. ...

3. To Mr. Cooper, for expense of printing the fourth and last
volume of his Catalogue of Ecliptic Stars ...............0000-

4. To Dr. Harley, for continuing his researches on the Chemistry
of Respiration 2)... id. eas :

do. To Mr. Greville Williams, fore an geetionon of che Products
of Distillation of Coal at low temperatures. . s

6. To Mr. Lockhart Clarke, for iimestieanione no the snteue
of the Medulla oblongata and Pons Varolii of Man, and some of
the Vertebrata. .

fen Lo. Dr. Brown. Séquard, for researches on he vel proper
of Muscles, Nerves, and the Spinal Chord .

8. To Professor William Thomson, for continue Ne Electrical
MESCARE MES EE oc xe ee cote odds se bee cad) sot onan 1.

9. To Professor Eaton Hodgkinson, for continuing his experi-

ments on the Strength of Materials ......5....-.-...-5 see

10. To Dr. Carpenter, for the prosecution of his researches on

Narme Natural Tistory, .... . owe ss sont ence <a e e eee

11. To Professor Owen, for obtaining drawings of the Scelido-

therium leptocephalum and other extinct animals .........-....
18572

1. To Dr. Waller, for prosecuting his investigations on the
MeTVOUS SYStEM 15. a ee soe eres ep eleke lena oo oe
2. To Mr. Hopkins, for continuation of his researches on the effect
of Pressure on the Me!ting-point of Solids.............0.0.0.-
3. To Dr. Roscoe, for prosecuting Photo-chemical researches, in
association with Professor Bunsen ...... ian
4. To Professor W. Thomson, for Hilecenien! reedandhied gs Sale
5. To Mr. Beckles, for further prosecuting the search for Fossil
Remains of Mammalia in the Purbeck Strata 5
- 6. To Dr. Debus, for prosecuting investigations on ie ee i
Witric Acid oueiicohols Wie so i ass seize bee eee ee

100

150

100
50

150

Appropriation of the Government Grant.

7. To Mr. Greville Williams, for continuing his researches on the
preomets of distillation: of Boghead Coal... 2.6... cece edie cess

8. To Mr. Henry Lee, for the investigation of Morbid Processes,
arising from affections of the Blood-vessels and their contents....

9. To Dr. Brown-Séquard, for continuing his researches on the
vital properties of Nerves and Muscles, and on Animal Heat

10. To the Committee of the Kew Observatory, for completing
new Photographic Magnetic Instruments, now in process of con-
perme Moment tie O\SCEVAtOPY «2! ciche sale hs ain slo - 6 Wsntbke alchcv ars

1858.

1. To Dr. Edward Smith, for prosecuting his researches on Re-
SUES FAD, goatee elie At oso ot Ae ile ce ec oe are Maia ere ae

2. To Mr. Mallet, for conducting investigations on the spot, of the
phenomena resulting from the recent Earthquakes in the Neapolitan
LO ECELSTONT Be RAG RS A A te arena mPa ee Ante a

3. To Mr. Greville Williams, for researches on the constitution of
the Oil of Rue, and on the influence of temperature and pressure
GumeePlenictiies Oh, VapOUTS yia6. 2. fe ee sk ss oa es me

4, To Mr. Matthiessen, for researches on the law by which Alloys
conduct Electricity . ee

5. To Mr. Gore, ip an ‘nite io Ts ‘Molecules atten of
Metals . ba

62,10 Mr. iienilen. oe rani on a new series sof bedi con-
taining Potassium and Sodium ....... ae!

7. To Professor Tyndall, for Conenanitie Te. Teseumiee on
en Ee cao OLAS See here SO ADE Gora tale ww ol MNS aie

8. To Dr. Frankland, for continuing his researches on Organo-
metallic Bodies....... ba Miedatatal yoke accieih. ~ fothyerete dacs. al ceakel Sat th sie eines

9. To Mr. Hopkins, for continuing his researches on the Effect
of Pressure on the Melting-points of Solids

10. To Dr. Pavy, for researches on the Physiology ae the een :

11. To Mr. Matthiessen, for researches on the Action of Nitrous
Acid on Natural Organic Bases .

1859.

1. To Mr. Mallet, for obtaining photographs of the Earthquake
ea in the Neapolitan Territory . .

. To Professor Owen, for procuring ‘bpetaes andl shen illus-
eee. of new and undescribed subjects of oe ate Anatomy
and Palzeontology. . be

3. To Professor aiken, Tony ion detraipinags eepence: AL
ready incurred, and continuing his researches on the Electro-
dynamic Qualities of Metals

150

100

150

100

50)

100

150
50

100

138 _ Appropriation of the Government Grant.

4, To the Brixham Cave Committee, for continuing the Exca-
VatiOns.. 2... 2 ett ee ene
5. To De Pyailall oe investigating the nopaer cd Temperate
both of the Air and of the Ice at various elevations on Mont Blane. 100

1860.

1. To Mr. J. P. Joule, for experiments on Surface Condensation 50

2. To Dr. Pavy, for continuing his Chemico-Physiological re-
searches ...... 50

a. Lo Dr. Tew chpen, Be continuing TG) reseorelea on
Glycol .. : 50

4. To Mr. W. Fodainw he ceneacehes on nthe Tighsiey i ican 60
5. To Professor William Thomson, as an Electrical Committee
of the British Association, for the construction of ee

Electrical Instruments. Gaon ; 100
6. To Mr. C. Greville Williams. & occu ihe Tercera on

Enodic Aldehyde, Ge. 0.06 02 Vu ea a Eee es 100
7. To the Rev. Dr. Robinson, for the completion of the Ar-

aachCatalogne Of Stars (200s... ee oe alee 4 2c eee gee a eee 56 15s. 8d.

8. To Mr. A. Matthiessen, for researches on the conducting-
powers for Heat and Electricity, and on the coefficients of expan-
sionot Metals and Alloys (2 101 5.60 08 a 50

9. To Mr. G. Gore, for continuing his researches on Electro-de-
posited Antimony, and for further examining the movements of

Liquid Metals and Electrolytes in the Voltaic Circuit .......... 50
10. To Mr. T. Rupert Jones and Mr. W. K. Parker, for the com-
pletion and publication of Drawings of the Foraminifera ........ 100

11. To Mr. Warren De La Rue, for expenses of conveying the
Kew Photoheliograph to Spain, and travelling-expenses of two
assistants, to obtain Photographs of the Solar Eclipse of 18th

BMRA OU crane Goa nate mie. 3 RODEN, ROE eee oo. aed ae 150
1861.
1. To Dr. Pavy, for continuing his researches on the Physiology
MPI VIOD oie cos o's 215 Safes de wisn oles wee eh amines eee 100
2. To Dr. Joule and Professor Thomson, for completing their
researches on the Thermal effects of Fluids in Motion.......... 150

3. To Professor Beale, for the Augmentation of the Powers of
Microscopes with reference to their eraceks in Physiological

VESCAPTCDES io 5 cia node si 50
4. To Mr. Maxwell See ie apoio on rae Cyeqsiten of
the Diatomic,and TExiatomie Radicals . .ji.he cic) ac) oid des «tne lee 50

5. To Dr. Frankland, for examining the action of Zinc-ethyl
and analogous bodies on Silicic, Carbonic, and Oxalic Ethers...... 100

Appropriation of the Government Grant. 139
6. To Mr. Mallet, for the publication of his Za Report

(to be applied to the illustrations) ...... Here £300
7. To Mr. Balfour Stewart, for Te ceanchies on ithe: Diathermaney
BEM OUIES vat ce ne ele le gels or 50

8. To Mr. Balfour Stewart, for saenmenia. to degrcaine accu-
rately certain Melting-points, to be used as standard points for high
MEOW BETMPCRALUPES! Sta ste thas iid eh ln Js e/a Sb areas Cg bed ed ae Bh 150
9. To Mr. Hopkins, for continuing his researches on the Spe-
cific Heat, Expansibility, and Temperatures of Fusion under

rescues OF Certain SUDStANCES: 2.5. yd ok vee Sees les See wn We 100
10. To Professor Tyndall, for investigating the relations of Gases
anes vanours to Radiant Heats... ii wb ee lv dein. Wee eae a we 200
11. To Mr. Cayley, for certain Analytical Calculations........ 20
1862.

1. To Dr. J. D. Hooker, for procuring drawings to illustrate the

description of a new and remarkable plant discovered in Angola by ©

PPMP IDSC IM ei koe. ors rra see) far Sucts «Sans alen dheum la oc ofal scien odes Re 50
2. To Mr. H.W. Binney, for defraying the expenses attending

the investigation of structural specimens of Coal Fossils of remark-

meamuerest aud perfection... 0)... ce ee eek beh eee eaes 50
3. To Dr. E. Smith, for researches with a view to determine the

relations of Nitrogen in the food and egesta of patients afflicted with

BE UMM MUMISIS gnats etc ee et is ate aNotol wes sale ® 6 ohat vrelie dene oe _ 50
4. To Professor J. Phillips; lio defraying the cost of maintaining,

and the incidental expenses of working, a telescope at Oxford me

the special examination of the Moon’s Surface ................ 100
5. To Professor W.-Thomson, for experimental researches, (1)

on Contact Electricity, (2) on the absolute conducting-powers of

Gimerent substances for Heat 21.4. eed ee ce at eee Os 50
6. To Professor W. Thomson, for observation of Atmospheric

Electricity: for instruments to be entrusted to Mr. B. Stewart,

LEI 0 agaist ie Rie eae che a Re dr WAS Can aC UP Ler An We a 14 10s
7. To Mr. G. Gore, for continuing his experiments on the Elec-
trolytic Vibrations of Mercury, and other allied matters ........ 50
1863.

1. To Dr. Waller, for experiments on a means of avoiding the
danger attending the administration of the Vapour of Ether or

Chloroform, and for investigating Lead-poisoning.............. 50
2. To Professor Maxwell Simpson, for further researches on

Cyanides of the di- and triatomic Radicals.................065 50
3. To Mr. Warren De La Rue, for the continuation at Kew for

one year of the observations with the Photoheliograph .......... 200

4. To Professor Selwyn, for obtaining Autographs of the Sun .. 50

140 Appropriation of the Government Grant.

5. To Mr. Mallet, for determining the Temperature of Volcanos £100

6. To Dr. Matthiessen,—I. for a research into the thermo-elec-
tric behaviour of Alloys, to be carried out in conjunction with
UVTI RGM WS ace ele ve ae oko vede lblle buehe Sinalewes eke haloes

7. Il. For a research into the Expansion by Heat of Metals and
Alloys, to be carried out in conjunction with Dr. Dupré ........

8. ILI. For a research into the Conduction of Heat by Metals
and Alloys, to be carried out in conjunction with Dr. Schunck ....

9. To Mr. Crookes, for continuing his researches on Thallium

10. To Dr. Frankland, for continuing his researches on Organo-
MMEMAUMCMSOMICSs 2p01./uS2. 25.) Gitlsuecalerqeties. ne > Soka, NO

11. To Professor William Thomson, for procuring Instruments for
the observation of Atmospheric Electricity in Nova Scotia ......

12. To Mr. W. R. Birt, for the purchase of a 4-inch Object-
glass for observing the Physical Features of the Moon.. .......

13. To Dr. W. A. Miller, for Apparatus for the investigation of
CHE SPEChEUIN YS. LAO LEE One ieee eee, ee

1864.
1. To Mr. R. C. Carrington, towards defraying the cost of Print-
ing and Publishing his Observations of Solar Spots .......
2. To Mr. T. A. Malone, for investigating the nature af the

Action and Results obtained in the Daguerreotype and Photographic

EMROCEESES (AU oie. oe «oye, ee se, foe tas be Coreg |e le: oer
3. To the Rev. Dr. Robinson, for reducing a series of Anemo-
BIEEIC TRCPISHEALLONS <. 4 cctece alas «je ocean de ths 2 eee Seer
4. To Mr. Gassiot (on behalf of the Kew Committee), for obtain-
ing Copies of Magnetic Curves taken at Kew, for distribution ....
Ditto, ditto, for procuring a self-recording Anemometer for ob-
servations to be taken at the Island of Ascension................
5. To Dr. Pavy, for Physiological Researches into the Stomach
BM AaIVET) ates PE hoe. hgs Hadi oa tan Qt We. PRR ee

6. To Mr. F. Jenkin (on behalf of a Committee of the British |

Association), to supplement Grants voted by the British Associa-
tion for the construction of four Standard Electrical Instruments
“meine Observatory at Kew (2... 0 aie
7. To Dr. Matthiessen, for further researches into Narcotine ..
8. To Mr. Schorlemmer, for investigations into the whole series
pimwe so-called ‘Aleohol Radicals: woiniiewesiiik ohh de SR
9. To Mr. De La Rue, for continuation of Photoheliography at
Mew mime prUAty A SDS 4/352 oh «aga nip he doko ote ania eee
10. To Dr. Richardson, for an Inquiry into the best means of
Testorinespspended AMIMALION | 0): % 50> ninpt ine! sahe only eee
11. To Professor Tyndall, for researches on Radiant Heat as
applied to: Molecular-Phiysies .... 5. s\. i... 3 heen feen eens

150

250.

Appropriation of the Government Grant.

12. To the Rev. H. Tristram, for expenses of a Botanical Col-
lector in the Expedition to the shores of the Dead Sea and adjacent

141

SDULLUUTEY 2 ofl eaten tole asic ub aa ee ac ai aaa erator eer Hiner £50
1865.
1. To Mr. De La Rue, for continuing the observations with the
ner Photoheliograph to November 1865 . 100
. To Mr. Balfour Stewart, for igieoiine ate cost a alate
aia etic Macmetie: © unvesm. <1) Seca ape ele ate 100
Ditto, for repair of Pendulums, and fitting a room at Kew
EUs MOSCEVATIONS: 6 8. ree vidi to oi lige didn dues sie pa qelee my ectis © 200
3. To Dr. Frankland, for continuing his researches on the Syn-
Bie=issorOncame COMPOUNIS.. 25... . 2. cess egile a ueeh pe aees 100
4. To Dr. Maxwell rane for continuing his researches on
the Polyatomic Radicals . 50
5. To Mr. B.C. Quod, oy eaie Weisse’s s anak @cleene S
Ae TIME MOM SLATS: cots «(co sonio7 gine cB ae Whale alent s.Sia drs Bee alee hee 90
6. To the Rev. C. Pritchard, for arranging and computing
Tables for facilitating the construction of Aplanatic Object-glasses . 60
7. To the Rev. Dr. Robinson (on behalf of a Committee of the ©
British Association), for experiments on Submarine Fog-signals. . . . 100
8. To Dr. Falconer, in furtherance of a determination by Levelling
of the exact depression of the Dead Sea (the amount to be placed at
fae disposal of Col. Sir Henry James) 2.6.0. «2 sac velo os lee 6 100
9. To Professor Stokes, for determining, by means of pendulums,
the Index of Friction of Gases and Vapours .................- 100
10. To Mr. F. Galton, for an Apparatus for verifying Sextants
in connexion with Kew Observatory . 80
11. To Dr. Richardson, for canine Hig Inuit Sie the
means of restoring suspended Animation. . 50
12. To Mr. G. J. Symons, for the salary e an Tess 6 be
employed in collecting and classifying Rainfall Statistics ........ 50
13. To Mr. De La Rue, for continuation at Kew Observatory of
Oiiservarians On SuM=spots .. cr 8 Nd. ses ee os he es epee eee we 150
14. To the Rev. G. C. ieee for Actinometrical Instru-
tes ATC AW SEL VALTONS, ie )2, np0r 5) coer farieg e101 kp a eites eyes nh Sceloyravoneles a Ge 30
1866.
1. To Professor Stokes, for continuing his experiments on the
Index of Friction of Gases:and Vapours...:::.2502.6253...65 2. 79
2. To Sir Henry James, for half the excess of the expense of
levelling to determine the exact depression of the Dead Sea, over
the sums granted by the Royal one a. and ean: paee
Society for the purpose ....... EL. (8a hiaic

VOL. XIX. N

142 Appropriation of the Government Grant.

3. To Mr. F. Jenkin, for the construction of a Standard Elec-
trodynamometer ........ ee ak

4. Ditto, for the Eonstrction ve a Standard Condens or hee
den-jar ..

bo To Mr. ‘B. Stewart, Oe dele punt ie Ones CE the Heat
observed ina Revolving Disk ;..0006.... 6 jens ss ie Cee

6. Ditto, for determining the Rate and Length of Kater’s In-
reales Pemd@alun .<!.. oo co's cis) c pues ee eles oe

7. To the Rev. A. Weld, for half the expense of establishing a
Mieenetie Observatory at Stonyhurst .:....5-.-. 30. eee

8. To Mr. G. Bentham and others, for preparing a Catalogue
of all described Pheenogamous Plants

9. To Professor Huxley, towards defraying ‘the cue ae elem
Plates for a work, by Mr. Parker, on the Sternum and Shoulder-
girdle:ot the Vertebrata .t/..0..: 00s c607 0th ae ae ae

1867.

1. To Mr. De La Rue, for working the Kew Photoheliograph
Morne tire eurrent pear yar ste ee oe

2. To Mr. J. N. Lockyer, for the purchase of a large Spectro-
scope, and of fitting the same to his Telescope, to be week in
Spectroscopic Observations of the Sun ...

3. To Dr. Gamgee, for investigating the hickiont of ‘Cakbbnie
Oxide and other Poisonous Agents upon Blood................

4, To the Rev. G. C. Hodgkinson, for continuing his Actino-
micirical researches: 64s. eee Eee a

5. To Dr. Frankland, for continuing his Synthetical researches
on Ethers.

6. To Mr. ‘Breen, for he Gotrecdon of ‘the Hletbiits “of the
Orbits of Jupiter and Saturn ....

7. To Dr. Carpenter, for defraying the expanded Gneurred’ in 1 the
prosecution of his researches in Marine Zoology .....

8. To Mr. De La Rue, for reducing Schwabe’s ‘Observations oF
LIES C0 Cae toe Ae RN Aan Ere oo 5 «

9. To Mr. Scott (as Secretary of the Greenland Committee of
the British Association), for the Exploration of the Tertiary Plant
Berson worth Greenland \. sis cipec cw ev i alee OB ee

10. To Mr. B. Stewart, for an Apparatus for verifying Sextants
in connexion with Kew Observatory (in addition to the former
UA er tops teene fn is eos. so nieve ne © lewepeomim lds: Seem and te. Rape ae

11. To Dr. Frankland, for investigating the Luminosity of various
Flames andlerseressuvre®: wv oi... 64 ticn'si duldein ne (at sie tictnokenteaens

12. To Dr. Bigsby, for assisting in the publication of his work
entitled “Thesaurus Siluricus,”’ it being understood that 50 copies

100

200

40
30
30
100
50
100

200

Appropriation of the Government Grant. 143
would be placed at the disposal of the Royal Society, and 50 copies
at the disposal of the Geological Society for distribution ........ £100
13. To Prof. Roscoe, for continuing his experiments on the
Chemical Intensity of total Daylight............... 100
| 1868.
1. To Mr. Herbert Jenner Fust, for assistance towards the pub-
lication of a paper “On the Distribution of Lepidoptera in Great
ore aMMMA ONCOL AC 28, esas cio ays ool dees Wie« wins seus’ « 1s, wines oleate 25
2. To Dr. Maxwell Simpson, for continuing his researches on
the Cyanides of the Alcohol Radicals and their derivatives ...... 100
3. To Dr. Matthiessen and Mr. Hocken, for a research into the
Conducting-power of Liquids for Electricity . . 40
4. To Dr. Matthiessen and Mr. R. Siting 03 eoectine or
prosecuting a research into the determination of High Tempera-
tures by means of a new Pyrometer ..... 50
5. To Mr. R. Scott (on behalf of the Greaniead Gananne ter a
the British Association), for defraying some additional expenses con-
nected with the Collection of Greenland Fossils................ 25
6. To Mr.G. J. Symons, foracontinuationof Rainfall Observations 100
7. To Mr. C. Brooke, for construction of a Spectroscope with
six Rock-salt Prisms ..... 60
8. To Mr. G. Bentham, for bangin rH the Gonloene. of See
nogamous Plants at the Kew Herbarium to a point from which it
eam be contitiued by the ordinary Staff ...........0.2 2... 046 25
9. To Mr. B. Stewart, for continuing his experiments on a
To elt iri LOTS) lene cae antn ue Ae te tes Onion aN IMeatre Seduete mR 60
10. To Mr. De La Rue, for continuing the Kew Photohelio-
Paap MGM OSC VALIOUS 500 cle c aia's yo cee a tis ote seeps willy aie 200
11. To the Treasurer of the Royal Society, for defraying the
expense of Instruments sent to India.................... 284 18s. 6d.
12. To Mr. W. Carruthers, for Illustrations of British Fossil
Vereen et PA eet ae ster RS ailieg Rw t inthe yah alee wah Gucatent 50
1869.
1. To the Rev. S. Haughton, for investigation of the Granites
PDE OURM TORR EN oGh calee ha aire nee rede aa Oe 50
2. To Mr. G. J. Symons, for comparison of the effect of dif-
ferent forms of Thermometer Stand ~..........5.00 0.0. 2s 15
3. To Mr. F. Guthrie, for prosecuting experiments on the
pultet inal Svesistunce Ol VAQUIAS 9. c44% os wel. osc iate wcasisge bec v eas 50
4. To Mr. G. Gore, for continuing his researches on the Fluorides 150
5. To Mr. EK. T. Chapman, for a research on the Physical Pro-
perties, piOrenmic Bodies ais soci eal lure Ske. Oe oe. 50

&, To Dr. Sanderson, for further researches on Respiration and
Exe meHAtION, Of Hie DIDOUN yar Yt ee Ba Sls id acaee

144: Appropriation of the Government Grant.

7. To Mr. F. Galton, for construction of his Anemometer .... £15
8. To Mr. De La Rue, for continuing the Kew Photoheliographic ?

Observations 2 foe ete OAS er 200
9. To Mr. J. N. Lockyer, for a continuation of his Spectro-

scopic Observations on'the Sun .........000.5 5. . 9. 60
10. To Prof. Cayley, Mr. Clerk Maxwell, Prof. Sylvester, for

the construction of Models of certain Geometrical Surfaces ...... 40
11. To Dr. Carpenter, for the further prosecution of researches

into the Temperature and Zoology of the Deep Sea’............ 200

12. To Mr. Dupré and Mr. F. J. Page, for continuing their in-
vestigations on the Specific Heat and other Physical Characters of

Aqueous: Mixtures and Solutions... . 2. . co: 0-3 es 70
1870.
1. To Mr. G. J. Symons, for comparison of the effect of different
forms of Thermometer Stand, in addition to the former Grant.... 30
2. To Professor Tait, for an Inquiry into Thermal Conductivity . 50
3. To Mr. R. Field, for experiments to determine the amount
of evaporation from a Water-surface ....:.:-.....-~.. 42 25 30

4. To Mr. A. Dupré, for continuing investigations on the Spe-
cific Heat and other Physical Characters of Aqueous Mixtures and
SGMIMONS SS ited as cee nips ot ce ee sb pe be Waele 30
5. To Mr. F. Galton, for excess of cost of his Anemometer..7 19s. 6d.
6. To Mr. De La Rue, for continuing the Kew Photoheliographic

MER VATIONS) Oc... we ne ore» ciate e cicue An 2 os oe 200
7. To Mr. Schorlemmer, for continuing his researches on the

PAGO CATIOIIS 00. os tgs a sess soy y-mye og « oats squad: oe ee 30
8. To Dr. Carpenter, for the Scientific Expenses of a contem-

plated Dredeme Mxpedition. os: we + 5 be sp ee 100

Total Grants and Appropriations.

GRANTS. APPROPRIATIONS.

R ere Sea re EN i 2
cai i, ., 16000. 0,0 13970 12 5
W. De La Rue 269 16 0 Overdrawn in 1854. 7110 8
L. Horner .., 20 00 Petty charges .... 0. 14-2
Prof. Stokes ...175 0O 0 ee
MOLY, sons viens 0 50 2 ”
W. Hopiens. 100 0 0 |
Reaescott..... 7.53 Repaid to the Trea- | 1000 0 0

Soe SUEY eidteer id At
LITT ee ries 97 15 2 | Balance Nov. 30,1870 1627 4 2
GOZO © al £16670, ies

WiLLIAM SPOTTISWOODE, |
V.-P. and Treasurer R.S.

Appropriation of the Donation Fund. 145

B.—Account of Sums granted from the Donation Fund in 1870.

1. Mr. Warren De La Rue, for the enlarging of certain Solar

Negatives obtained at the Kew Observatory ..............- £11 Ils.
2. Dr. Carpenter, for the purchase of a specimen of Pentacrinus
ETILY RN OG DIRE: Alt SRR SRG ie enn i taahee er a 25

3. Mr. Edward Waller, for the exploration of the Sea-bed on

the North-western coast of Ireland by means of the Dredge, in con-

tinuation of the researches made last year in H.M.S.‘ Porcupine’ 100
4. Mr. J. P. Gassiot, to defray expense of making six prints

from the Negatives of Sun-pictures taken at. the Kew Observatory

during the years 1862-72, with the view of presenting them to the

Royal Society, the Royal Astronomical Society, the Imperial Aca-

demy of Sciences of Paris and of St. Petersburg, the Royal Aca-

demy of Sciences, Berlin, and the Smithsonian Institution, Washing-

Same see E WO PAVINELIES i oc ece 0's cos ss gues me mers we eye 60
5. Mr. William Saville Kent, in aid of a Zoological Dredging-

expedition in a private yacht off the west coast of Spain and Por-

ee Ne cece aches alle ol 2 yp -ol wi '3,') 0S og tn Sw led Spat loge 50

6. Dr. Bastian, for carrying on certain experiments with a Di-
gester capable of sustaining high Temperatures...............- 10
£256 11s.

December 8, 1870.
General Sr EDWARD SABINE, K.C.B., President, in the Chair.

The President announced that he had appointed the following Members
of the Council to be Vice-Presidents :—

The Treasurer.

Sir Philip Grey-Kgerton, Bart.
Mr. Francis Galton.

Dr. Huggins.

The following communication was read :—

VOL. XIX. O

146 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [Dec. 8,

“Report on Deep-sea Researches carried on during the Months
of July, August, and September 1870, in H.M. Surveying-ship
‘Porcupine.’ ”? By W. B. Carrenter, M.D., F.R.S., and J.
Gwyn JEFFREYS, F.R.S. Received December 2, 1870.

INTRODUCTION.
Preliminary Proceedings ............; Gaeaaeesecctescuscvewsaanans “sus ote adnateeeeeaeeeee 146
MTG TPIMCIG sis ans ond dgs'vewos on nace cases sans « pecewscicorsiseaesmoyswie 20cet eee ene 150
NARRATIVE.
Hirst Cruise (Atlantic), .....i01-ss0sdasaseesseescnaeguerer sacs ssenéasceeo el ateeeneeeeeee eee 152
second Cruise (Mediterranean): .....i.eccecseestesscscseeneesesesses +s: se ene 162
GENERAL RESULTS.
Temperature ahd Composition of Atlantic Water ...............cscsessesescecseeeses 185
Temperature and Composition of Mediterranean Water ..........scceeesceeeuenees 193
Gibraltar ‘Carrent ..050). ateiis So Sesdsobscudegauscecessscessvesdeseiess eee 203
General Oceamie Circulation. 5.205. 05.0 J jesscndas oaeae svdedis «xviecua deune babe eeeeeeeaeaes 213

[At the time at which this Report was presented, it was hoped that the
General Summary of Results, of which it then consisted, could be amplified
by the insertion of the requisite details, within the time at which the pub-
lication of the Proceedings would be due. It has been found, however,
that in working out these details so many new points arose suggestive of
further inquiries (especially requiring careful comparison of Temperature
observations) that, though devoting to them all the time he could com-
mand, the Member of the Expedition who is responsible for the whole,
save the Narrative of the First Cruise, has found himself unable to com-
plete his portion of the Report at an earlier date. Whilst expressing
his regret for the delay which has hence arisen, he ventures to hope that
some compensation for it will be found in the greater completeness which
the Report now possesses; especially in that Section of it which treats
of the Causal Relation between the double currents of the Straits of Gi-
braltar and Baltic Sound, and the General vertical Oceanic Circulation.—
W..B.C.]

INTRODUCTION.

PRELIMINARY PROCEEDINGS.

The following Extracts from the Minutes of the Council of the Royal
Society set forth the origin of the ‘ Porcupine’ Expedition of 1870, and
the objects which it was designed to carry out.

March 24, 1870.

A Letter was read from Dr. Carpenter, addressed to the President, sug-
gesting that an Exploration of the Deep Sea, such as was carried out
during 1868 and 1869 in the regions to the North of the British Islands,
should now be extended to the South of Europe and the Mediterranean,

1870.] Deep-sea Researches. 14:7

and that the Council of the Royal Society should recommend such an
undertaking to the favourable consideration of the Admiralty, with a view
to obtain the assistance of Her Majesty’s Government as on the previous
occasions.

Resolved,—That a Committee, consisting of the President and Officers,
with the Hydrographer, Mr. Gwyn Jeffreys, Mr. Siemens, Professor
Tyndall, and Dr. Carpenter, with power to add to their number, be
appointed, to consider the expediency of adopting the proposal of Dr.
Carpenter, and the plan to be followed in carrying it out, as well as the
instruments and other appliances that would be required, and to report
their opinion thereon to the Council; but with power previously to com-
municate to the Admiralty a draft of such report as they may agree
upon, if it shall appear to them expedient to do so in order to save time.

April 28, 1870.
Read the following Report :—

“The Committee appointed on the 24th of March to consider a proposal
for a further Exploration of the Deep .Sea during the ensuing summer, as
well as the scientific preparations which would be required for a new expe-
dition, beg leave to report as follows :—

*<'The general course proposed to be followed, and the chief objects ex-
pected to be attained in a new expedition, are pointed out in the following
extract from the letter of Dr. Carpenter, read to the Council on the 24th
ult., which was referred to the Committee.

«© «The plan which has been marked out between my Colleagues in last
year’s work and myself is as follows :—

‘* « Having reason to hope that the ‘ Porcupine’ may be spared towards
the end of June, we propose that she should start early in July, and pro-
ceed in a 8.W. direction towards the furthest pomt to which our survey
was carried last year; carefully exploring the bottom in depths of 400 to
800 fathoms, on which, as experience has shown us, the most interesting
collections are to be made; but also obtaining a few casts of the Dredge
with Temperature-soundings at greater depths, as opportunities may occur.

«<The course should then be nearly due South, in a direction of general
parallelism with the coast of France, Spain, and Portugal, keeping gene-
rally within the depths just mentioned, but occasionally stretching west-
wards into yet deeper waters. From what has been already done in about
400 fathoms’ water off the coast of Portugal, there is no doubt that the
ground is there exceedingly rich. When approaching the Straits of Gi-
braltar, the survey, both Physical and Zoological, should be carried out with
great care and minuteness; in order thatthe important problem as to the cur-
rents between the Mediterranean and Atlantic Seas, and the relation of the
Mediterranean Fauna to that of the Atlantic (on which Mr. Gwyn Jeffreys

o 2

148 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [Dec. 8,

is of opinion that the results of our last year’s work throw an entirely new
light), may be cleared up.

““<«Mr. Gwyn Jeffreys is prepared to undertake the scientific charge of
this part of the expedition ; and if Prof. Wyville Thomson should not be
able to accompany him, it will not be difficult to find him a suitable
assistant.

«© «The ship would probably reach Gibraltar early in August, and there
I should be myself prepared to join her, in place of Mr. Jeffreys, with one
of my sons as an assistant. We should propose first to complete the sur-
vey of the Straits of Gibraltar, if that should not have been fully accom-
plished previously ; and then to proceed eastwards along the Mediterranean,
making stretches between the coasts of Europe and Africa, so as to carry
out as complete a survey, Physical and Zoological, of that part of the
Mediterranean basin as time may permit. Malta would probably be our
extreme point; and this we should reckon to reach about the middle of
September.

«© «Tt is well known that there are questions of great Geological interest
connected with the present distribution of Animal life in this area ; aud we
have great reason to believe that we shall here find at considerable depths
a large number of Tertiary species which have been supposed to be extinct.
And in regard to the Physics of the Mediterranean, it appears, from all
that we have been able to learn, that very little is certainly known. The
Temperature and Density of the water, at different depths, in a basin so
remarkably cut off from the great ocean, and having a continual influx
from it, form a most interesting subject of inquiry, to which we shall be
glad to give our best attention, if the means are placed within our reach.’

‘Considering the success of the two previous Expeditions, and espe-
cially that of the ‘ Porcupine’ last year, the Committee are persuaded that
no less important acquisitions for the furtherance of scientific knowledge
would be gained by the renewed exploration as now proposed ; and they
accordingly recommend that a representation to that effect be made to the
Admiralty, with a view to obtain the aid of Her Majesty’s Government as
on the previous occasions.

«The Committee approve of a proposal made by Mr. Gwyn Jeffreys to
accept the services of Mr. Lindahl, of Lund, in the expedition as unpaid
Assistant Naturalist.

«As regards scientific instruments, the Committee have to report that
those employed in last year’s voyage will be again available for use; and
Mr. Siemens hopes to render his electro-thermal indicator of more easy
employment on ship-board.

“*The Committee, having learned that Dr. Frankland has contrived an
apparatus for bringing up the deep-sea water charged with its gaseous con-
tents, have resolved to add his name to their number; and they request
leave to meet again in order to complete the arrangements and make a final
report to the Council.”

1870. ] Deep-sea Researches. 149

Resolved,—That the Report now read be received and adopted, and that
the Committee be requested to continue their Meetings and report again
on the arrangements when finally decided on.

Resolved,—That the following draft of a Letter to be addressed to the
Secretary of the Admiralty be approved, viz. :—

*“Sir,—I am directed by the President and Council of the Royal
“Society to acquaint you, for the information of the Lords Commissioners
“of the Admiralty, that, considering the important scientific results of the
** Physical and Zoological Exploration of the Deep Sea carried on in 1868
“and 1869 through the aid of Her Majesty’s Government, they deem it
“highly desirable that the investigation should be renewed during the
*“ ensuing summer, and extended over a new area.

“‘The course which it would be proposed to follow in a new Expedition,
‘the principal objects to be attained, and the general plan of operations,
‘are sketched out in the inclosed extract from a Letter addressed to the
* President by Dr. Carpenter, and have in all points been approved by the
** Council.

“The President and Council would therefore earnestly recommend such
“an undertaking to the favourable consideration of My Lords, with the
‘view of obtaining the assistance of Her Majesty’s Government so libe-
“rally accorded and effectively rendered on the previous occasions.

«The scientifie conduct of the expedition would, as in the last year, be
“shared by Dr. Carpenter, Professor Wyville Thomson, provided that
“ ventleman is able to undertake the duty, and Mr. Gwyn Jeffreys. It is
‘also proposed that Mr. Lindahl, a young Swedish gentleman accustomed
**to marine researches, should accompany the expedition as Assistant
** Naturalist. 7

**] have to add that whatever appertains to the strictly Scientific equip-
‘‘ment of the Expedition will, as formerly, be at the charge of the Royal
** Society.

“W. Saarpey, Secretary.”

A sum of £100 from the Government Grant was assigned for the
Scientific purposes of the Expedition.

May 19, 1870.

Read the following Letter from the Admiralty :—

“¢ Admiralty, 10 May, 1870.

“‘ Sir,—Having laid before My Lords Commissioners of the Admiralty
your letter of 2nd inst., requesting that further researches may be made of
the deep sea, I am commanded by their Lordships to acquaint you that
they will spare Her Majesty’s Steam-vessel ‘Porcupine’ for this service,
and that the Treasury have been requested, as on the former occasion, to

150 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [Dec. 8,

defray the expense of the messing of the scientific gentlemen composing
the Expedition.
Pain, Sir,
“Your obedient Servant,
“To W. Sharpey, Esq., M.D., ‘* VERNON LUSHINGTON.”
Secretary of the Royal Society, |
Burlington House.”

EQUIPMENT.

1. The equipment of the ‘Porcupine’ for the previous Expedition had |
been found so complete and satisfactory that nothing more was considered |
necessary to prepare her for the work of the present season than the over-
hauling of her gear, and the manufacture of new dredges, sieves, and other
apparatus, on the patterns of those which had already proved most serviceable.
We had the advantage of the same excellent Commander, now promoted to
the rank of Staff-Captain, with his able staff of Officers ; and we would take
this opportunity of again expressing our deep sense of obligation to them all
for their hearty co-operation in our scientific work, and for the unvarying
personal kindness by which our voyage was rendered a most agreeable one.
A considerable part of the Crew, also, consisted of the same steady and
experienced men. The Meteorological Department supplied eight of the
protected Miller-Casella Thermometers, including the two with the per-
formance of which we had been so thoroughly satisfied last year; and we
usually employed one of these in conjunction with one that had not been
used in the previous Expedition. |

2. At the request of the Committee, Mr. Siemens undertook to devise
an Apparatus for testing the depth of Sea-water to which Light, or at least
the Actinic rays, can penetrate. The foundation of the apparatus which
he constructed for this purpose is a horizontal wheel with three radii, each
of them carrying a glass tube in which a piece of sensitized paper is sealed
up. The rotation of this wheel round a vertical axis brings each of the
tubes in succession out of a dark chamber in which it ordinarily lies,
exposes it to light in an uncovered space, and then carries it into darkness
again. This movement is produced by aspring; but it is regulated by a
detent that projects from the keeper of an Electro-magnet, which is made
and unmade by the completion or breaking of a circuit that connects it with
a Galvanic battery. When the magnet is made, it lifts the keeper with its
projecting detent; and this allows the wheel to be carried by the spring
through one-sixth of its rotation, whereby the first of the tubes is
brought out into the openspace. There it remains until the circuit is
broken, whereby the magnet is unmade; the keeper then falls, and the
wheel is allowed to move through another sixth of a rotation, so as to carry
on the tube into the dark chamber. A repetition of the making and un-
making of the magnet brings out the second tube, and shuts it up again ;

1870.] _ Deep-sea Researches. 151

and another repetition does the like with the third tube. This apparatus,
with a deep-sea lead attached to it, is suspended by an insulating cable
that contains the wires whereby it is connected with the battery in the
vessel. Being lowered down to any desired depth, the circuit is com-
pleted, the magnet made, and one of the tubes exposed for as long a time
as may be wished; the circuit is then broken, the magnet unmade, and
the tube shut up again. The second tube may be exposed for a longer
time in the same place, or the apparatus may be lowered to a greater
depth, at which the experiment may be repeated; and the third tube may
then be dealt with in like manner.—The Committee having been satisfied
with the performance of Mr. Siemens’s apparatus, it had been arranged that
trial should be made of it, and also of his Differential Thermometer, now
provided with an improved Galvanometer ; and he had undertaken to send
out a qualified Assistant to take charge of these instruments during the
Mediterranean Cruise. The declaration of war between France and Ger-
many, however, unfortunately interfered with this arrangement; the As-
sistant (a German) being recalled to his own country, and no other com-
petent person being available on a short notice. Under these circumstances
it was thought better that the Differential Thermometer should not be sent
out ; butit was hoped that snch a trial might be given to the Photometric
Apparatus as should at any rate determine whether satisfactory results
might be anticipated from its use, or whether any modifications in its con-
struction might be needed. The apparatus was sent out to Gibraltar
under charge of Dr. Carpenter, and was got into working order by his Son
and himself in Gibraltar Harbour. It proved, however, that the action of
sea-water on the bearings,—increased as this was by the galvanic current
arising out of the contact of iron and brass in them,—so embarrassed its
Mechanical arrangements, that no fair trial could be made of its Photo-
metric efficiency. But the experiment served the important purpose of
showing the weak points of the apparatus; and neither Mr. Siemens nor
Dr. Carpenter entertains any doubt that it may be so reconstructed as to
answer the purpose for which it was devised.

3. The work of this year’s Expedition was divided, according to the plan
originally marked out, into two Cruises: the firs¢ to examine the Deep-sea
bottom between Falmouth and Gibraltar; the second to make the like |
examination of the western basin of the Mediterranean between Gibraltar ;
and Malta, and to determine its Physical and Biological relations to the
Atlantic, with special reference to the Gibraltar Current.—The First
Cruise was under the scientific direction of Mr. Gwyn Jeffreys, who was
accompanied by a young Swedish Naturalist, Mr. Josua Lindahl, of the
University of Lund, as Zoological Assistant ; whilst Mr. W. L. Carpenter,
as before, took charge of the Chemical department,—his special work, on
this occasion, being the determination, by Volumetric analysis, of the pro-
portion of Chlorine in samples of Atlantic water taken from the surface, the
bottom, and from intermediate depths, so as to serve as a basis of com-

152 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [Dec. 8,

parison with similar determinations of Mediterranean water.—In the
Second Cruise it had been arranged that Dr. Carpenter and Prof. Wyville
Thomson should co-operate as before; but the latter being unfortunately
prevented by serious illness from taking part in it, the whole charge of this
Cruise rested with Dr. Carpenter. He was fortunately able to retain the
assistance of Mr. Lindahl; and the Chemical work was continued (as in
the Third Cruise last year) by Mr. P. H. Carpenter. Mr. Laughrin
throughout acted as dredger and sifter.

NARRATIVE.

First Cruise.

4. After leaving Falmouth on the 4th of July, a thick fog and contrary
wind delayed our voyage to such an extent that Captain Calver considered
it advisable to put into Mount’s Bay, as we could make but little way,
and were uselessly expending coal. We remained there at anchor all the
next day. The wind having moderated, we started at daybreak on the 6th,
and steamed westward. During the day we used a towing-net (constructed
on a plan of Lieut. Palmer), while the vessel was going at a speed of between
five and six knots an hour, and caught myriads of a small oceanic Crusta-
cean, Cetochilus Helgolandicus.

5. In the evening of the ne xt day (7th of July) we reached that part of the
slope extending from the entrance of the British Channel to the Atlantic
deeps, which appeared from the chart and our sounding to be promising
ground ; and here our first dredging was made in 567 fathoms (Station 1).
There being little or no wind, the contents of the dredge were very small,
but proved extremely interesting. Among the Mollusca were Terebratula
septata, Limopsis borealis, Hela tenella, Pecchiolia (or Verticordia) abyssi-
cola, anda fine species of Turbo, which we were subsequently enabled to iden-
tify with Trochus filosus of Philippi, of which his 7. glabratus is a variety.
The last-named species and its variety are only known at present as Tertiary
fossils of Calabria and Messina. The three species first named likewise oc-
eur in the Pliocene beds of Southern Italy ; and these, as well as the Pec-
chiolia or Verticordia, live in the Norwegian seas. The other species of
Mollusca now dredged are also northern, with the exception of Ringicula
ventricosa (one of our Crag fossils), which was obtained in last year’s
expedition, not far from our present position, in 557 fathoms. The Rev. Mr.
Norman notices among the Crustacea new species of Ampelisca and of six
other genera. Of Echinoderms the pretty Echinus elegans was the most
conspicuous. We lay-to at nightfall, so as to keep near the same ground.

6. On the 8th the weather was very fine; but there was not sufficient
wind to give the necessary driftway for dredging. Our first attempt in
305 fathoms (Station 2) was almost a failure. Later in the day dredgings
in 690 fathoms (Station 3) and about 500 fathoms produced some important
results, viz. Motiusca: Rhynchonella Sicula, Seguenza MS. (a Sicilian

1870. ] Deep-sea Researches. 153

fossil), Pleuronectia sp. n., Actzon sp. n., besides Limopsis borealis, L.
aurita, Dentalium abyssorum, Puncturella noachina, Hela tenella, Rissoa
Jeffreysi, Natica Montacuti, Admete viridula, Pleurotoma carinata, and
other northern species. Crustacea: Mr. Norman reports as to the 690
fathoms (No. 3), “A most important dredging; the results among the
Crustacea being more valuable than all the rest put together—at any rate
of the First cruise. It contains almost all the choicest of the new species
in last year’s expedition, and four stalk-eyed Crustaceans of great interest,
three of which are new, and the fourth (Geryon tridens) is a fine Norwe-
gian species.”’ And he adds that ‘ with these are associated two forms
of a more southern character, Inachus Dorsettensis and Kbalia Cranchit,
which I should not have expected at so great adepth.’” KcHINODERMATA:
Cidaris papillata (from which, according to Professor Wyville Thomson,
C. hystriz is not specifically distinct ), Hchinus elegans, Astropecten arcticus,
A. Andromeda, A. Pareli, and A. irregularis. ANNELIDA: Dr. M‘Intosh
notices, as a species supposed to be specially northern, Thelepus circin-
natus of Fabricius from 690 and 500 fathoms. Hyprozoa: anew and beau-
tiful tree-like form of a deep orange-colour. Sponeia: Holtenia Carpen-
teri in considerable numbers and of all ages. Professor Wyville Thomson is
fully convinced that the H. Grayi of Kent is only a variety of this species.
The dredges did not fill; and most of the above results were obtained by
means of the “hempen tangles,’’ which were in 1869 for the first time
attached to the dredge, and used with such wonderful success.

7. July 9th. Dredged all day ; but the wind was too light, and the drift
therefore insufficient for effective work. We began dredging in 717 fathoms
(Station 4), and afterwards shifted the ground, getting 358 fathoms
(Station 6), when we left off. This was about 185 miles from Cape Clear
and Ushant, and 165 miles from the Scilly Isles. The Fauna was generally
of a northern character, and included among the Mollusca Teredratella
Spitzbergensis (Arctic and Japanese), Pecten vitreus, P. aratus, Leda per-
nula, Acinus eumyarius, Rissoa turgida, Trochus suturalis (a Sicilian fossil),
Odostomia nitens (Mediterranean), Taranis Morchi, Defrancia sp. n., and
Pleurotoma hispidula or decussata=P. concinnata, 8. Wood (Sicilian fos-
sils, the last being Coralline Crag also), Ringicula ventricosa, Acteon sp. n.,
and Bulla propingua. Some species were common to the North Atlantic and
the Mediterranean. Among the Echinoderms was a fine specimen of Bri-
singa endecacnemos ; and the Corals were represented by Amphihelia oculata
and Desmophyllum crista-galli. Among the Annelids were Pista cristata
of O. F. Miller, and Zrophonia glauca of Malmgren, both Arctic species.

8. We lay-to on Sunday the 10th; and the next day we resumed our
soundings and dredgings on the Channel slope at depths ranging from
257 to 690 fathoms (Stations 8, 9), occasionally changing the ground.
The Fauna was everywhere northern, with a few exceptions. As to the
Mollusca may be mentioned Zerebratula septata (intermediate in shape
between the typical kind and Waldheimia Floridana), Leda(Yoldia) obtusa,

154 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [Dec. 8,

Pecchiolia granulata, Trochus suturalis, T. reticulatus, Rissoa subsoluta
(the last four Sicilian and Calabrian fossils), Sealaria sp. n., Solarium fal-
laciosum, Fusus Berniciensis, F. fenestratus, Pleurotoma hispidula, and
Bulla propinqua. The Crustacea included Cyclaspis longicaudata (Nor-
wegian) and Polycheles typhlops (Mediterranean), besides some new and
peculiar species. A stony Coral of an undescribed genus and species also oc-
curred, together with Caryophyllia cyathus, var. clavus. Inthe evening we
steamed southwards, with a leading wind, for the deepest water in.this part
of the North Atlantic. We were afraid to continue the dredgings on the
Channel slope towards the French coast, because the submarine telegraph-
cable between Brest and North America might possibly be injured, and no
information had been given, or could be obtained, as to the line of its direction.

9. July 12. On reaching the trough in the Bay of Biscay (or rather in
that part of the Atlantic which lies outside the Bay), the sea became too
high and the wind too strong for either sounding or dredging. This was
from 250 to 300 miles south of the Scilly Isles, and about 200 miles north
of Vigo. Our object was to get acast in the greatest depth; and we lay-to
all the day, waiting patiently for the chance of more favourable weather.
But the wind did not take off at sunset, and the prospect did not improve ;
so it was determined not to lose any moretime. At 10.30 p.m. steam was
got up, and we went on towards Vigo. Rain fellat night; and the sea was
brilliantly illuminated by the phosphorescent Noctiluce and other animals.
Some of these, especially the smaller oceanic Hydrozoa, gave a much
brighter and steadier light than the rest; so that they might fancifully be
compared to planets among stars. The next day (13th) was fine overhead ;
but there was too much swell to have carried out our intention of dredging
in the deepest water.

10. Thursday, July 14, passed Cape Finisterre, and dredged in 81
fathoms (Station 10), about nine miles from the coast of Spain. Fauna
mostly southern; although Mr. Norman notices among the Crustacea a
new species of Mysis, and the following British and Norwegian kinds,
Galathea Andrewsit and Crangon nanus ; and Dr. M‘Intosh gives Tere-
bellides Stremii and Prasilla gracilis, both Norwegian Annelids. We
then steamed out, and dredged in 332 fathoms (Station 11). The bottom
was rocky or stony; and the dredge fouled. On the tangles were two
specimens (one adult and the other young) of that singular Echinoderm,
or soft sea-urchin, belonging to the Diadema family, which was procured
last year in nearly 60 degrees of North Latitude. It will be soon described
by Professor Wyville Thomson under the name of Calverta hystria.
With this Echinoderm were the arms of Brisinga endecacnemos, and a
specimen of a northern Mollusk, Rissoa Jeffreysi. Another dredge being
put down on the same ground, was unfortunately lost, with some rope.

11. The following day (15th) we sounded in 128 and 232 fathoms
(Stations 11, 12) about forty miles from Vigo, but used tangles only in con-
sequence of the rocky nature of the bottom. The only noticeable Mollusk

1870.] Deep-sea Researches. 155

was Rissoa Jeffreysi; and we also got an undescribed Polyzoon (Idmonea
Hispanica, Busk), which was afterwards found in the Mediterranean.—
16th. Dredged twice in Vigo Bay, at a depth of about 20 fathoms. This
may be almost called ‘‘classical”” ground; for it was the scene of Mr.
M‘Andrew’s dredging-operations in the spring and autumn of 1849. We
obtained a few species of Mollusca new to this locality ; and two of these
(Tellina compressa and Nassa semistriata) are interesting, as having been
described. and figured by Brocchi from the Subapennine Tertiaries. The
latter species is one of our Crag fossils, under Mr. J. Sowerby’s name of
Buccinum labiosum. Mr. Busk mentions Lepralia unicornis, a Polyzoon
previously known as from the Coralline Crag and Italian Pliocene, as well
as Mediterranean. Vigo was our first anchorage after leaving England ; and
on Sunday we attended Divine Service, and dined with the late Capt. Bur-
goyne, on board his ill-fated but noble vessel the ‘ Captain,’ which also
had just arrived, after encountering some rough weather on her way out.

12. We left Vigo Bay at daybreak on Monday the 18th. It blew strong
from the north-east ; and after going about forty miles westward, and try-
ing in vain to sound, we drifted along till the evening, and then steamed
slowly in the direction of Lisbon, which was distant about 200 miles. The
following day (19th) we sounded and dredged at depths of 100 and 220
fathoms (Station 13) from thirty to forty miles west of Cape Mondego, on
the coast of Portugal. The Fauna at the lesser depth was southern and
local, and at the greater depth comprised the following interesting species
of Mollusca :—Terebratula cranium, Limopsis borealis, L. aurita, Denta-
lium abyssorum, Trochus amabilis, T. suturalis, Trophon costifer (Coral-
line Crag), Fusus antiquus, monstr. contrarium, F. fenestratus, and Pleu-
rotoma carinata. Among the Foraminifera were specimens of the beau-
tiful Orbitolites tenuissimus (sp. n., Carp.) found last year on the north-
west of Ireland (Report, par. 36), and some other peculiar forms.

13. Wednesday, July 20th. Dredged all day with considerable success
at depths of from 380 to 994 fathoms (Stations 14-16), the wind and sea
having now gone down; and we took with the scoop-net a few living spe-
cimens of Clio cuspidata. 'The dredgings in 380 and 469 fathoms yielded
among the Mollusca Leda lucida (Norwegian, and a Sicilian fossil ; pro-
bably included in Philippi’s description of Nucula pellucida), Axinus eumy-
arius (also Norwegian), Negra obesa (Spitzbergen to the west of Ireland),
Odostomia sp. u., O. minuta (Mediterranean), and Cerithium sp. n.; and
among the Echinoderms were Brisinga endecacnemos and Asteronyx Loveni.
But the results of the Dredging in 994 fathoms were so extraordinary as to
excite our utmost astonishment. It being late in the evening, the contents
of the dredge could not be sifted and examined until daylight the next
morning. We then saw a marvellous assemblage of Shells, mostly dead,
and. consisting of Pteropods, but comprising certain species which we had
always regarded as exclusively Northern, and others which Mr. Jeffreys
recognized as Sicilian Tertiary fossils, while nearly forty per cent. of the
entire number of species were undescribed, and some of them repre-

156 Messrs. Carpe nter and Jeffreys on [Dec. 8,

sented new genera. The following is an analysis of the Moilusca (perfect
and fragmentary) taken in this one haul :—

Total New or
Orders. number of | Recent. Fossil. unde-
species. scribed.
Brachiopoda ...... 1 ]
@onchifera.. 24 kid 50 32 ] 17
Solenoconchia .... 7h 3 bis 4
Gastropoda ....../ 113 42 23 48
Heteropoda ...... 1 ]
iRveropoda /-°.)./c) 5... 14 12 a 2
186 91 24 7d

The Northern species above referred to are 34 in number, and include
Mytilus (Dacrydium) vitreus, Nucula pumila, Leda lucida, L. frigida,
Pecchiolia abyssicola, Neera jugosa or lamellosa, N. obesa, Tectura
fulva, Fissurisepta papillosa, Cyclostrema sp.n., Torellia vestita, Pleuro-
toma turricula, Admete viridula, Cylichna alba, Cylichna ovata, Jeftr.
MS. = Bulla conulus, S. Wood, not Deshayes (Coralline Crag), and
Scaphander librarius. Leda lucida, Neera jugosa, Tectura fulva, Fissurt-
septa papillosa, Torellia vestita, and the undescribed species of Cylichna,
as well as several other known species in this dredging, are also fossil in
Sicily. Nearly all these Shells, as well as a few small Echinoderms, Corals,
and other organisms, had evidently been transported by some current to
the spot where they were found; and they must have formed a thick de-
posit, similar to those of which many Tertiary fossiliferous strata are com-
posed. It seemed probable also that the deposit was partly caused by tidal
action, because a fragment of Melampus myosotis (a littoral Pulmoni-
branch) was mixed with deep-water and oceanic Pectinibranchs and La-
mellibranchs. None of the shells were Miocene, or of an older period.
14, This remarkable collection, of which not much more than one half is
known to Conchologists, notwithstanding their assiduous labours, teaches
us how much remains to be done before we can assume that the record of
Marine Zoology is complete. Let us compare the vast expanse of the sea-
bed in the North Atlantic with that small fringe of the coast on both sides
of it which has yet been partially explored, and consider with reference to
the dredging last mentioned what are the prospects of our ever becoming
acquainted with all the inhabitants of the deep throughout the globe! We
believe, however, that a thorough examination of the newer Tertiaries
would materially assist us in the inquiry ; and such examination is feasible
and comparatively easy. Much good work has been done in this line;
but although the researches of Brocchi, Bivona, Cantraine, Philippi, Cal-
cara, Costa, Aradas, Brugnone, Seguenza, and other able Paleeontologists in
the South of Italy have extended over more than half a century, and are
still energetically prosecuted, many species of Molluscous shells are con-

1870. | Deep-sea Researches. 157

tinually being discovered there, and have never been published.—Besides
the Mollusca in this dredging from 994 fathoms, Professor Duncan in-
forms us that there are two new genera of Corals, and Flabellum distinctum,
which last he regards as identical with one from North Japan. It coincides
with the discovery on the Lusitanian coasts of two Japanese species of a
curious genus of Mollusca (Pecchiolia or Verticordia), both of which are
fossil in Sicily, and one of them in the Coralline Crag of Suffolk. Pro-
fessor Wyville Thomson notices undescribed Sponges from the same dredg-
ing. The weather was very hot, and the sea quite smooth, at 10 p.m.
15. Thursday, July 21st. On deck at 5a.m. Dredged all day in
from 600 to 1095 fathoms (Stations 17, 17 a) with extraordinary success.
Together with many of the new and peculiar species of Mollusca ob-
tained at Station 16 (994 fathoms), some of which were here alive,

-occurred—WNucula delphinodonta, Leda (Yoldia) sp.n., L. abyssicola,

Axinus eumyarius, Siphonodentalium vitreum (the first being North-
American and Norwegian, and the last three Arctic and Norwegian), S.
coarctatum (a well-known Subapennine fossil), Disehides sp. n., Chiton
albus (northern), Molleria costulata (Arctic), Trochus reticulatus (a Cala-
brian fossil), Omphalius monocingulatus, Seg. MS. (a Sicilian fossil), Hela
sp. n., Lulima sp. n., Scalaria frondosa (a Leghorn and Crag fossil), and
Trachysma delicatum (a Sicilian fossil). Of Crustacea, there were Apseudes
spinosa (Norwegian and British), 4. grossimanus (sp.n.), and Paranthura
elongata (sp.u.). Of Polyzoa, Cellepora abyssicola, sp. n. (Busk, MS.). Of
Corals, Cenocyathus sp. n., and an undescribed species of an unknown genus
allied to Bathycyathus. Holtenia Carpenter and other rare Sponges, with
Brisinga endecacnemos and various Echinoderms equally interesting, formed
part of our treasures; but the greatest prize of all was a noble Pentacrinus,
about a foot long, of which several specimens came up attached to the
tangles. This discovery of a true Pentacrinus in the European seas crowned
the day’s work. Mr. Jeffreys has named it P. Wyville-Thomsoni; Dr.
Carpenter will describe it, and give its zoological and geological relations,
as he is especially acquainted with this group of the Echinoderms by
having worked out the structure of Antedon in the Philosophical Trans-
actions for 1866. We may remark that our Pentacrinus was dragged
up from soft mud or ooze, and that its base was entirely free. Portions
of the arms occurred in several other dredgings on the Lusitanian coasts ;
and joints of apparently the same species have been found by Professor
Seguenza in the Zanclean formation or older Pliocene near Messina.

16. July 22nd. We tried to dredge among the Berling Isles, but
could do nothing. The ground was rocky, and the charts were incorrect.
The sounding-lead was deeply indented, and a water-bottle torn away and
lost. A dredge was afterwards put down twice in a trough or gulley
between 900 and 1000 fathoms deep; each time it came up empty. We
then steamed for Lisbon, where we arrived the next day.

17, On the 25th (Monday) we got to Cape Espichel. The wind had in-

158 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [Dec. 8,

creased so much that, after fruitlessly endeavouring to dredge, we anchored
in the evening for shelter in Setubal Bay. ‘We there dredged, with no
special result. Professor Bocage had kindly given us at Lisbon a letter of
introduction to the coast-guard Officer at Setubal, who was said to know
the only place where the deep-sea Shark and the Hyalonema are taken by
the fishermen ; but the state of the weather unfortunately prevented our
availing ourselves of it.

18. July 26th. Although the ad was rather high and the sea rough,
we contrived (owing to the admirable management of Captain Calver) to
dredge off Cape Kspichel in 740 fathoms (Station 20); and later in the
day, having stood out further to sea, in 718 fathoms (Station 22.). Deeper
water is sometimes found to be near land than at a distance from it. The
Mollusca were mostly of the same kind as those from No. 16 (994 fathoms),
but included Leda pusio, Limopsis pygmea (Sicilian fossils), and Pecchio-
lia acuticostata. The last-named species is extremely interesting in a
geological as well as geographical point of view. It is a fossil of our
Coralline Crag and the Sicilian pliocene beds; and it now lives in the
Japanese archipelago. Some Japanese Brachiopods and Crustacea also
inhabit the Mediterranean. It may be difficult to account for this migra-
tion to or from Northern Asia, except through the Arctic ocean; but we
would again venture to call attention to the suggestion made by Mr. Jeffreys
as to the communication which probably existed, at a period subsequent
to the Middle Tertiary or Miocene epoch, between the North Atlantic and
the Mediterranean, in the direction of the Languedoc canal or Canal du
Midi, from the Bay of Biscay to the Gulf of Lyons. The Straits of Gibraltar
do not appear to afford the means of such migration or transport of any
northern Fauna to the Mediterranean, because the current which flows into
it from the Atlantic is superficial only, and does not reach the bottom,
which the Pecchiolia inhabits. This Mollusk has no power of swimming,
like many univalves; nor does its fry rise to the surface and become for a
short time oceanic, as in certain species of Trochus and Dolium. Any
current which flows out of the Mediterranean at its bottom into the
Atlantic would transport the fry of the Pecchiolia southwards, or at any
rate could not withstand the great northern current which brings Arctic
mollusca to the Lusitanian seas. Now the greatest height above the sea
in the line of the Canal du Midi from Bordeaux to Narbonne is stated to
be 189 métres, or about 615 feet. M. Reboul, in his “Mémoire sur les
Terrains de comblement tertiaire ” (Mém. Soc. Géol. de France, 1834) men-
tions, as to the district in question, marine tertiary shells which had been
deposited by a sea higher by about 200 métres than the present sea; and
he says that M. Deshayes considered these shells to be among the most
recent of the Tertiary period. No lists of the shells, or any definite par-
ticulars of the deposits, however, have been published by French geologists ;
aud it is to be hoped either that this deficiency will be supplied by them,
or that Mr. Prestwich may be able to investigate the matter with ‘his usual

~ 1870.) Deep-sea Researches. 159

ability, and give us some satisfactory and reliable information. In the
dredging (Station 22) at 718 fathoms, Mr. Norman reports new species
of Crustacea belonging to four genera.

19. July 27th. Dredged a few miles north of Cape St. Vincent, in 292
and 374 fathoms (Stations 24, 25). Ground rocky; and in the evening a
dredge, with 400 fathoms of 3-inch rope, was unavoidably lost. The last
haul yielded two Siliceous or Vitreous Sponges of an enormous size, one of
them measuring nearly 3 feet in diameter at the top, of the kind called
* Neptune’s Cup”? (Askonema Setubalense, Kent), besides that lovely
sponge, Aphrocallistes Bocageit. The Mollusca were mainly northern, and
included fresh-looking fragments of the gigantic Lima excavata, besides
Limopsis minuta (distinct from L. borealis), Pecchiolia acuticostata, P.
granulata, Trochus suturalis, and Pleurotoma hispidula or decussata, all of
which are Sicilian fossils. Two undescribed species of Crustacea, which Mr.
Norman proposes to name Amathia Jeffreysi and Ethusa mirabilis, were
here obtained.—At night we steamed slowly south, and doubled Cape St.
Vincent. The electric telegraph-cable between Falmouth and Gibraltar
sadly hampered our movements in this part of the cruise, by occupying
the ground which we were most desirous of exploring. It was not con-
sidered safe to dredge within eight or ten miles on either side of it. This
was a serious drawback ; since it obliged us to dredge either in water which
is too deep for systematic or continued exploration, or in comparatively
shallow water near the coast, where the ground is rocky and the dredge
liable to be lost.

20. July 28th. Dredged several times off Cape Sagres in from 45 to
58 fathoms. Fauna southern. Venus multilamella, Tellina compressa,
and Halia Priamus occurred living; and Dr. M‘Intosh says that two
Annelids (Glycera capitata and Praailla pretermissa) had not been
hitherto observed south of the track in last year’s expedition. The sea
being rough and wind high, we anchored off Lagos.

21. July 29th. Steamed south, and dredged in 364 and 322 fathoms
(Stations 26, 27). The water was of an indigo-blue colour. Weather
fine, but rather windy. For the first dredging 700 fathoms of rope were
payed out, and two weights of 100 lbs. were attached at 350 fathoms
from the dredge. The Mollusca comprised some of the new and remark-
able species procured in Station 16 (994 fathoms) and other dredgings, as
well as Terebratula vitrea, T. cranium, Pholadomya sp. u., Trochus ama-
bilis, Pyramidella plicosa (Belgian and Coralline Crag), Tylodina Dubeni
(Norwegian), Cancellaria mitreformis, C. subangulosa (both Coralline
Crag), Pleurotoma galerita, and Acton pusillus. The Crustacea of most
interest were Pagurus platycheles (sp. n.), and an undescribed species of
Munna. The Corals were Flabellum distinctum (the same as in Station

16) and Amphihelia oculata. (The Hydrozoa in 364 fathoms included a

new and beautiful species of Plumularia. But the most remarkable
uovelty here obtained was a large collection of thin sandy disks, from 0°3 to

160 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [Dec. 8,

0-4 inch in diameter, with a slight central prominence; for these proved
on subsequent examination to contain an entirely new type of Actinozoon,
extraordinarily flattened in form, and entirely destitute of tentacles. Dr.
Carpenter, by whom this curious organism will be described, has assigned
to it the name of Ammodiscus Lindahli.

22. July 30th. Sounded and dredged at two stations on our way to
- Cadiz in 304 and 280 fathoms (Stations 28, 28a). At the first of
these stations Flabellum distinctum and a new species of Caryophylha
occurred. At the latter station we got the same undescribed species of
Pholadomya, being the second species known in a recent or living state ;
the other is extremely rare, and West Indian. With the Pholadomya
were Trochus crispulus and Odostomia plicatula (Sicilian fossils), and Ac-
teon exilis, besides undescribed species of Poromya, Mitra, and Mar-
ginella. Anchored off Cadiz, near H.M.S. ‘Cruizer;’ where we had
at first some difficulty in being allowed to land, in consequence of our
not being provided with a bill of health, and there being no wee on
board.

23. Left Cadiz on Tuesday, 2nd August, and steamed west, so as to
get on the seaward side of the provoking ale Dredged in 227 and 386
fathoms (Stations 29, 30). There was an peace of northern and
southern species, including a fragment of Fusus antiquus, var. carinata ;
and the Ammodiscus here also presented itself, with a test composed of
coarser sand-grains than before, and frequently including Foraminifera.

24. Aug. 3rd. Dredged at three more Stations (31, 32, 33), in 477,
651, and 554 fathoms, across the entrance to the Straits of Gibraltar, and
towards the Morocco coast; and we shifted our ground at night. The
Fauna was northern, but scanty ; the bottom being stiff clay, and nearly
unproductive. Undescribed species of Cioniseus and Bulla were among the
Mollusca ; a remarkable Sponge, eighteen inches long, which Prof. Wyville
Thomson considers the type of a new genus allied to Esperia (Chon-
drocladia virgata, Wyv. Th. MS.), another new and exquisitely graceful
Sponge of the Holtenia group, and provisionally named by him Phero-
nema’ velatum, and Aphrocallistes Bocagei; two new species of a compound
stony Coral (Cenocyathus); and a few Crustaceans and Annelids were
taken. Part of a large Ribbonfish (Regalecus gladius) was caught float-
ing on the surface of the sea, the remainder having been apparently
bitten off and devoured by a Shark or Swordfish.

25. Aug. 4th. Dredged again off the Straits and on the coast of Africa
in from 414 to 72 fathoms (Station 34). In the greater depths was the
same stiff and nearly azoic clay; and in the lesser depths were broken
and dead shells of southern species. The Fauna in the former was chiefly
northern, and comprised Rissoa turgida (Norwegian) and Holtenia Car-
penteri. Capt. Spratt suggests that the clayey bottom may have been
formed by continual deposits from the great and muddy rivers Guadal-
quiver and Guadiana. Such deposits would to a considerable extent inter-

1870. ] Deep-sea Researches. 161

fere with the existence and growth of marine animals. An easterly wind
having sprung up, we hove-to off Cape Spartel, between thirty and
forty miles from Gibraltar.

26. Aug. 5th. Steamed into Tangier Bay, after ineffectually trying to
dredge in 190 fathoms (Station 37) off Cape Spartel. The bottom in this
part of the Straits is everywhere rocky; and there is reason for believing that
it must be swept by the undercurrent in the middle, and by the tide at the
sides. Sargasso or Gulf-weed was found floating off the Cape. In Tan-
gier Bay we dredged twice at a depth of about 35 fathoms. Fauna prin-
cipally British, with a few more southern forms: the last include, among
the Mollusca, Pythina ? Macandree, Cyclostrema spheroideum (Coralline
Crag), Rissoa sculpta and R. substriata (Calabrian and Sicilian fossils),
Adeorbis supranitidus (Coralline Crag); and among the Polyzoa, Cupularia
Canariensis, which inhabits Madeira and the Canaries, and occurs in the Co-
ralline Crag as well as other tertiaries of the same age. Sphenotrochus inter-
medius (a Coralline Crag Coral) was the only other acquisition worth notice.

27. On the following day (6th August) we arrived at Gibraltar. Mr.
Jeffreys was there succeeded by Dr. Carpenter ; and the former went on
to Sicily wd Malta, for the purpose of examining the newer tertiary forma-
tion in the south of Italy, and the collections of fossil shells at Catania,
Messina, Palermo, and Naples, in connexion with the results of his cruise.

28. The quantity and variety of Zoological materials is so great that we
have distributed it as follows :—Crustacea, Rev. A. M. Norman and Mr.
George S. Brady; Polyzoa, Mr. Busk ;. Annelida, Dr. M‘Intosh ; Corals
or Stony Anthozoa, Professor Duncan; Horny or Flexible Anthozoa, Mr.
Kent; Hydrozoa, Dr. Allman; Echinodermata and Sponges, Professor
Wyville Thomson. The Mollusca will be worked out by Mr. Jeffreys ;
and the Pentacrinus, Ammodiscus, and Foraminifera by Dr. Carpenter, who
also undertakes to discuss the Physical results.

29. Throughout the whole of this Cruise the Temperature of the Sea-.
bottom was taken by the protected Miller-Casella Thermometers in nearly
every Sounding, with the results tabulated in p. 220. As, for the reason
already mentioned (§ 9), no extreme depths were sounded, and as the
general rate of the diminution of temperature on the margin of the North-
Atlantic basin seemed to have been established by the Serial Soundings
taken in the Expedition of the preceding year, it was not thought necessary
to repeat these; more especially as the variety of depths at which the
Bottom-temperatures were ascertained gave adequate data for comparison
with the results then correlated. It will be shown hereafter (§ 79) that this
comparison leads to some very interesting conclusions, fully confirming the
view advanced in the last Report (§ 119) as to the slow northward move- —
ment of an upper stratum of warm water 700 or 800 fathoms in depth,
and of the southward movement of the whole deeper stratum, bringing
water of an almost icy coldness from the Arctic basin into the Temperate
and even the Intertropical Zone.

VOL. XIX. P

162 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on (Bec. 3;

30. During the whole of this Expedition the Temperature of the surface
of the Sea was ascertained and recorded every two hours, both by day and
by night ; as were also the readings of the Dry and Wet-bulb Thermo-
meters, which were placed in a small penthouse on deck, in which they
were freely exposed to the surrounding Air, but secluded from direct
or reflected Solar heat.—The Temperature of the surface-water, from the
time of our leaving the British Channel in Lat. 48° N. to our turning the
corner of Cape St. Vincent in Lat. 36° 50’ N., increased at a rate which bore
a pretty regular proportion to the Southing. Thus, at the “chops of the
Channel,” it averaged 62° for five days ; whilst by the time we approached
€ape St. Vincent it had gradually risen to above 69°. After passing that
point, however, we found both the surface- and the bottom-temperatures to
present certain variations, which, though not considerable in themselves,
proved to be of great interest when taken in connection with the peculiar
condition of the embouchure of the Strait of Gibraltar. These points,
however, will be more fitly discussed hereafter (§ 73 ef seg.) ; and we
shall now only notice a sudden rise in Surface-temperature of about 3°
which showed itself as we turned the corner of Cape St. Vincent and
entered the north side of the embouchure, and a sudden fall of nearly
6° (to 66°°4) which was encountered when we entered the mid-stream of the
narrower part of the Strait as we proceeded towards Gibraltar.

31. In the course of the First portion of the Cruise between Falmouth
and Lisbon (beyond which point Mr. W. L. Carpenter was unable to pro-
ceed), thirty-six quantitative determinations were made, by Volumetric
analysis, of the amount of Chlorine in as many samples of Atlantic water,
taken (1) from the surface, (2) from the bottom at various depths, and
(3) from various intermediate depths. The greater part of these, as will
be shown hereafter (§ 84), exhibited a very close conformity to a uniform
standard of density, as indicated by a Specific Gravity of 1:0268, and a
Chlorine proportion of 19°84 per 1000*; the chief departures being observ-
able in the lower density of the deepest waters, and in the occasional ewcess
of density in the surface-waters. The former is doubtless attributable to the
fact that the deepest water is essentially Polar, and therefore derives its
more dilute character from that source. The latter we are inclined to
attribute to the influence of slight concentration by evaporation.

SECOND CRUISE.

32. Leaving Gibraltar early in the morning of Monday, Aug. 15, we
steamed out into the middle of the Strait, for the purpose of commencing
our experiments on the Gibraltar Current. The point selected by Capt.
Calver (Chart of Strait of Gibraltar, Station 39) lay midway between
Point Carnero, which forms the south-eastern boundary of Gibraltar Bay,

* The proportion here adopted,—the number of Grammes of Chlorine to 1000

Cubic Centimétres of Water,—is that employed by Prof. Forchhammer in his elaborate
Memoir on the Composition of Sea Water (Philos. Transact. 1865).

1870. ] Deep-sea Researches. 168

and Jebel Musa or Apes Hill, which lies opposite to it, at a distance of only
8 geographical (93 statute) miles, on the African coast, the Strait being here
nearly at its narrowest: and it was also that at which the greatest depth
(510 fathoms) was indicated by the Soundings marked on the Chart.
With this depth our own Sounding, which gave a bottom at 517 fathoms,
agreed very closely ; and having thus at once found the position most ad-
vantageous for our work, that position was precisely determined by angles
taken by sextant from the Ship between conspicuous objects on the shore.
The do¢tom-temperature obtained in the first sounding was between 5° and
6° higher than that which had been met with at corresponding depths on
the bed of the Atlantic about 100 miles to the westward; whilst the
surface-temperature was Jower by from 5°°3 to 6°, as will be seen by the
following comparative statement :—

Surface- Bottom-
Station. Depth. temperature. temperature.
Oo [e)
Strait of Gibraltar.. 39 GY) 66°0 Doro
UCT Cre SH 477 Zs 50°5
PMPaNtIG . sk... se s,s. 32 651 Faas 50:0
PRGIANIEIG. «a 5 's.c.0.0 08.8 33 554 72:0 A49°7
PEGIAMEIC. .5: 5 5 02s we 34 414 racy, 50:0

33. This striking difference led us to take a set of serial soundings at
intervals of 50 fathoms; and these gave a result which, though it appeared
anomalous at the time, was afterwards fully explained, and proved to be
of unexpected import. The Temperature fell, at 50 fathoms from the sur-
face, to 56°; at 100 fathoms it was 55°7; at.150 it was 55°°5; and from
that depth to the bottom, at 517 fathoms, there was no further descent.
Now it will be shown hereafter (§ 88) that the thermal condition which
here so much surprised us by its contrast with that of the Atlantic waters,
is that universally met with in the Mediterranean; the Temperature of
which, whatever may be its surface-elevation, falls to within 1° Fahr. above
or below 56° at a depth of 50 fathoms, to a degree or two lower at 100
fathoms, and then remains uniform down to the greatest depth (1743
fathoms) at which we examined it. And it thus appears that whilst the
surface-water in this part of the Strait is certainly derived from the Atlantic,
the deeper water, partaking of the thermal condition which so remarkably
characterizes that of the Mediterranean basin, may be fairly regarded as
belonging to the latter.

34. This inference is in harmony with another fact ascertained on the
same occasion, viz. the great excess in Salinity shown by water brought up
from the depth of 250 fathoms over the water of the surface. Whilst the
Specific Gravity of the latter was found to be 1°0271, that of the former
was 1°0293; and whilst the proportion of Chlorine in the latter was 20°324
per 1000, it was 21°775 in the former. Now in these particulars the
Surface-water agreed well with what had been found to be the condition

164 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [ Dec. 8,

of the water of the Atlantic ; whilst the water at 250 fathoms agreed equally
well with what proved to be the condition of the bottom water in the adja-
cent part of the Mediterranean ($ 43). We were not a little surprised,
however, to find that the water here taken from the bottom (517 fathoms)
was of much Jess density, as indicated both by Specific Gravity and by
Chlorine percentage, than that of the intermediate stratum ; its Specific
Gravity being 1:0281, and its proportion of Chlorine 21:465. This ap-
parent anomaly (the existence of which was confirmed by observations
made on our return voyage, § 61) pointed to the existence of an owé-cur-
rent in the intermediate stratum as the probable explanation of the over-
laying of the lighter by the heavier water. The Specific Gravity of the
bottom-stratum closely corresponded, as we subsequently found, with that
of the bottom-water over the deepest part of the area of the Western basin
of the Mediterranean (§$ 93).

35. These data having been obtained by the examination of the several
parts of the vertical column at one and the same point, and this point
being in the centre of nearly the narrowest part of the Strait, and at the
deepest part of the channel, we proceeded to test the actual movement of
water on the surface and at different depths beneath it. |

36. The rate of surface-movement was easily determined. The precise
position of the Ship having been ascertained in the manner already stated, a
small flat basket, presenting no such elevation above the water as would
cause it to be influenced in any considerable degree by a moderate wind*,
was sent adrift, so as to be freely carried along by the current; it was
allowed to float for a determinate time, throughout which it was followed
by the ship ; and when it was taken up at the expiration of that time, the
place of the ship was again ascertained as before. The space between the
two points being then determined trigonometrically, the rate of the flow
per hour, and its precise direction, could be readily calculated. Thus on
the morning of August 15th the float was followed by the ship for fifteen
minutes, during which it was found to have moved 4377 feet in the direc-
tion E. by S. 2 S., or at the rate of 2°88 miles per hour (§ 40).

37. For the determination of the movement of the water at different
depths below the surface, a ‘‘ current-drag’’ (see figure, p. 165) had been
constructed by Capt. Calver ona plan suggested by his previous experience,
which had led him to the conclusion that a submerged. basket lined with
sailcloth, which of course fills itself with water, presents a better resisting
surface than any vessel of wood or metal. Such a basket being made
the basis (so to speak) of the apparatus, its resisting surface was aug-
mented by fixing two pairs of arms at right angles to one another across

* It is obvious that the movement of the Ship itself would be liable to be consider-
ably affected by even a slight breeze, on account of the large surface of resistance pre-
sented by its transverse section (especially by its paddle-boxes) above the water. This
would cause its drift to be more rapid than the current, if the direction of the wind
should be with that of the current, and /ess rapid if the wind should be opposed to it.

1870. ] Deep-sea Researches. 165

its upper end, and by stretching a piece of sail-cloth between each arm
and the side of the basket; which device
caused a uniform resisting surface to be
presented to the current, whatever the
manner in which the sails might meet it.
To the lower part of this ‘“‘drag’’ a couple
of sinkers, of 112 lbs. each, were attached ;
and the whole apparatus -was supported =<
by cords meeting in a ring above it, to :
which the suspending line was secured.
38. This “current-drag”’ having been
transferred to a boat, was lowered down by
a couple of men placed in her, to the de-
sired depth; and the boat was then left
entirely free to move, being lightened by
the return of the men into the ship. The
motion of the boat would be the composite
result of (1) the action of wind (if any)
upon the transverse section of the part of
of the boat above the water; (2) the action of the surface-current upon
the transverse section of the immersed part of the boat; (3) the action of
the upper current upon the suspending line; and (4) the action of the
current in which the ‘‘drag”’ is suspended upon the drag itself. Putting
aside the first of these agencies, which will be of very little account if (as
in the experiment now narrated) the boat be small and the breeze be light,
it is obvious that the relative influence of the second and third to that of
the fourth will depend upon the proportion between the surfaces presented
by the boat, the line, and the “drag” respectively, and the strength of
the current acting upon each. The surface given to the “drag” being
larger than that of the boat and line taken together, the force acting on
the “drag’’ will dominate, if it hang in an opposing current superior,
equal, or even somewhat inferior in rate to that which acts on the boat
and line ; so that the boat would be carried along by the drag against the
surface-stream, at a rate proportioned to the excess.—If, again, the rate of
the undercurrent should be greatly inferior to that of the surface, its
action upon the “drag”’ might still be sufficient to neutralize that of the
surface-current upon the boat and line, and the boat would then remain
stationary or nearly so.—A still further reduction in the rate of the op-
posing undercurrent would make its action upon the “‘drag”’ Jess power-
ful than that of the surface-current upon the boat and suspending line ;
and the boat would then move with the surface-current, but at a rate of
which the great retardation would indicate an antagonistic force beneath.—
Supposing, again, the water of the stratum in which the “drag”? is sus-
pended to be stationary, the action of the surface-current upon the boat
and line would be opposed by the resistance offered by the deeper water

Current-drag.

166 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [ Dec. 8,

to the movement of the drag; and the retardation of the movement of the
boat would be less, though still considerable.—If, again, the stratum in which
the ‘“drag’’ is suspended should itself be moving in the direction of the
surface-current, but at a reduced rate, there will still be a resistance to the
movement of the ‘“‘drag’’ at the more rapid rate of the surface-current ;
and this resistance will produce a proportional retardation in the motion
of the boat.—Finally, if the stratum in which the ‘‘ drag” is suspended,
with the intermediate stratum through which the suspending line passes,
move at the same rate with the surface-current, the motion of the boat
with the whole suspended apparatus will have the same rate as that of the
simple float.

39. Putting these respective cases conversely, it may be affirmed (1) that
if the boat, having the “current-drag’’ suspended from it, should move
with the surface-current and at the same rate, the stratum in which the
“drag”? hangs may be presumed to have a motion nearly corresponding
with that of the surface-current; (2) that if the rate of movement of the
boat with the surface-current should be retarded, a diminution of the rate
of the stratum in which the “drag” hangs, to a degree exceeding the retar-
dation of the movement of the boat, may be safely predicated; (3) that
when this retardation is so considerable that the boat moves very slowly
in the direction of the surface-current, it may be inferred that the stratum
in which the “‘drag”’ is suspended is either stationary or has a slow move-
ment in the opposite direction; (4) that if the boat should remain séa-
tionary, a force must be acting on the “drag ’’ which is equal and in the
contrary direction to that of the upper current upon the boat and suspend-
ing line; so that the existence of a counter-current is indicated, having a
rate as much Jess than that of the surface-current, as the resisting surface
presented by the “drag” is greater than that offered by the boat and
upper part of the suspending line; (5) that if the boat should move in a
direction opposed to that of the surface-current, a motion is indicated in
the stratum in which the ‘‘drag’’ hangs which will correspond in drec-
tion with that of the boat, and which will exceed it in rate, the effect of
the “‘drag’’ upon the boat being partly neutralized by the antagonistic
drift of the surface-current.

40. Now our first set of experiments (Station 39) with the “ current-
drag’’ gave the following results :—

J. The surface-movement being first tested in the manner already de-
scribed (§ 36), its rate was found to be 2°88 nautical miles per hour, and
its direction E. by 8. 2S. The wind was W. by N., with a force of 4.

II. The “ drag” having been lowered down to a depth of 100 fathoms,
the rate of movement of the boat from which it was suspended was reduced
to 1:550 mile per hour, or rather more than half the surface-movement.
Its direction was E. 3 8. Taking into account the action of the wind and
surface-current on the boat, it may be safely affirmed that at 100 fathoms
the rate of the current was reduced to less than one half.

1870.] Deep-sea Researches. 167

Ill. The ‘“‘ drag” having been lowered down to a depth of 250 fathoms,
the boat remained nearly stationary, its rate of movement being reduced to
0-175 mile per hour, while its direction (S.E. + E.) was slightly altered to
the southward, though still easterly. From this we felt ourselves justi fied
in inferring that the 250-fathoms’ stratum had a movement in the reverse

Station 39.

a SS = seg Soe SS SS

different Depths; with Force and Direction of Wind.

direction, acting on the current-drag with a force almost sufficient to neu-
tralize the action of the upper stratum on the boat and suspending line.
And this inference, which was strengthened by the indication already
shown to be afforded by the extraordinary density of the water of this
stratum (§ 34), was fully justified by the results of the experiments which
we made on our return voyage (§ 62).

41. While these experiments were in progress, we had the pleasure of
seeing the Channel Fleet, which was expected to meet the Mediterranean
Fleet at Gibraltar, come in sight beyond Cape Tarifa; its approach having
been indicated, long before eventhe tops of the masts of the vessels composing
it showed themselves above the horizon, by the number of separate puffs of
smoke which the experienced eye of our Commander enabled him to dis-
tinguish. As soon as all possibility of doubt was removed by the appearance
of the masts, Capt. Calver communicated ‘“ Fleet in sight *’ by signal to
the Admiral in Gibraltar Harbour, our position being such that we could
be seen by him, though the Fleet could not. In due time, the massive
hulls of the Ironeclads rose above the horizon; and whilst we continued at
our work, all passed us in sailing order at a distance of not more than a
couple of miles,—the ill-fated ‘ Captain’ being the chief object of interest.
A few hours later, the ‘ Monarch,’ which had been detained for repair, but
whose passage had been made ina shorter time by the free use of her steam-
power, came in sight; and passed on in solitary grandeur to join the
Fleets now united in Gibraltar Bay.

42. The whole of our first day having been consumed without our beg
able to work the “ current-drag ” in the deepest stratum, we anchored for
the night near Point Carnero, with a view to resuming our experiments on

SN Ne a ae ie

168 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [Dec. 8,

the following morning. We then ran out to a spot almost precisely iden-
tical with that which had been our starting-point on the previous day ; and
commenced, as before, by testing the rate and direction of the surface-
movement. Its rate proved rather slower, being 2°40 miles per hour,
instead of 2°88; and its direction was E. by N., instead of HE. by 8. 2S.
Both differences seemed to be accounted for by the difference in the force
and direction of the wind; which, having been W. by N. with a force of
4 on the previous day, was now W. 3 S. with a force of only 2. The
‘drag ” was then lowered to a depth of 400 fathoms ; but our expectation
that it would there encounter a westerly (or outward) current sufficiently —
strong to carry the boat in that direction in spite of the antagonistic move-
ment of the easterly (or inward) surface-current, was not verified on this
occasion ; for the boat slowly drifted in an E. 4 N. direction, its rate being
0°650 mile per hour. Whether this result should be taken to indicate a
stationary condition of the deep stratum, or a slight movement in either
direction ($ 39), could scarcely be affirmed with positiveness ; but from the
indication afforded by the Specific Gravity of the water taken up from this
depth ($ 34), it seemed probable that the general movement of this
stratum was at this time rather westerly, or in conformity with that which
we attributed to the intermediate stratum, though at a slower rate.—It will
be shown hereafter (§ 62) that a decisive proof of such a movement was
obtained on a subsequent occasion.

43. Thinking it expedient to postpone the further prosecution of this
inquiry until our return voyage,—when we should be able to repeat our
experiments, not only at this narrow end of the Strait, but also at that
shallowest portion to the westward where the Strait opens out into the |
Atlantic,—we put steam on before mid-day, and entered the basin of the |
Mediterranean, directing our course in the first instance to the spot (Lat. |
36° 0' N., Long. 4° 40’ W.) at which the sample of bottom-water had been
obtained by Admiral Smyth, which, when analyzed by Dr. Wollaston, was
found to possess the extraordinary Specific Gravity of 1:1288, and to yield
a percentage of 17°3 of Salt*. As we were within sight of both shores,
and could distinguish several remarkable mountain-summits which were
accurately laid down on our Charts, the bearings of these enabled the situa-
tion of the Ship to be determined with great precision; and Capt. Calver
undertook to place her within a mile of the point at which Admiral Smyth’s
observation had been taken. Having reached this (Station 40) we took our
first Sounding in the Mediterranean ; and awaited the result with no little
interest. The depth proved to be 586 fathoms, or 84 fathoms less than
that given by Admiral Smyth’s sounding ; but as the latter was not taken
on the improved method now adopted, and as its correctness may have not
improbably been affected by the strength of the easterly current which is
here very perceptible, the discrepancy can scarcely be considered as of any
real account as showing that the two points were otherwise than nearly

* Phil. Trans. for 1829, p.29; and Admiral Smyth’s ‘ Mediterranean,’ pp. 128-130.

187 0.] Deep-sea Researches. 169

coincident *. The specimen of bottom-water brought up by our bottle
was found to have a Specific Gravity of 1:0292, whilst that of the surface-
water was 10270. The volumetric determination of the Chlorine gave
21:419 per 1000 for the bottom-water, as against 20°290 per 1000 for the
surface-water. A decided excess of salt is thus indicated in the bottom-
water, as compared on the one hand with the surface-water of the same
spot, and on the other with the bottom-water of the Atlantic, which had
been generally found to show a rather smaller proportion of Chlorine than
the surface-water. But this excess is extremely small in comparison with
that indicated by Dr. Wollaston’s analysis. For, assuming his factor of
134 as representing, when multiplied by the excess of Specific Gravity
above that of distilled water, the total percentage of Salt, that percentage
is only 3°91, instead of 17°3 as stated by Dr. Wollaston.

44. This result accorded so closely with that obtained by Dr. Wollaston
himself from the analysis of two other samples of bottom-water taken up
by Admiral Smyth, the one in Long. 1° 0' E. from a depth of 400 fathoms,
and the other in Long. 4° 30’ E. from a depth of 450 fathoms,—as well as
with our own determinations of the Specific Gravities and Chlorine per-
centages of a great number of samples taken in different parts of the
Western basin of the Mediterranean,—that we cannot hesitate in regarding
it as representing the ordinary condition of the bottom-water at this spot.
And it seems to us far more probable that the sample furnished by Admiral
Smyth to Dr. Wollaston had been concentrated by evaporation in a badly
stopped bottle, in the three years during which it had remained in Admiral
Smyth’s possession, than that any extraordinary discharge of salt from a
brine-spring at the bottom (a sort of Deus ex machind invoked by Admiral
Smyth to account for the-occurrence) should have given rise, in the spot
at which his Sounding was taken, to an exceptional condition of which no
indication whatever was presented in our own.

45. The Temperature-phenomena presented at this Station proved of
singular interest. The surface-temperature, 74°°5, was higher than any
that had been encountered on the Atlantic side of the Straits, even in a
latitude half a degree further south ; and the observations, which had been
regularly taken every two hours, showed that it had increased nearly ten
degrees as we proceeded eastwards from Station 39, between 10 a.m. and
2p.m. A part of this increase was doubtless due to the heating effect of
the mid-day sun; but as the temperature of the air had not increased quite
siz degrees during the same time, and as it will be shown hereafter (§ 86),

* Thus Admiral Smyth states (Mediterranean, p. 159) the depth in mid-channel
between Gibraltar and Ceuta to be 950 fathoms; whereas it is now known to be but
little more than 500 fathoms. ‘‘ A little further to the eastward,” he says, “there is no
bottom with 1000 fathoms of line up-and-down (upwards of 1300 payed out) ;” whereas
the greatest depth as far east as Malaga Bay is now known not to exceed 750 fathoms.
These errors are noticed in no invidious spirit, but merely to prevent their perpetua-
tion. Admiral Smyth doubtless made the very best use of the means at his disposal ;
but a far more satisfactory method has now entirely superseded that formerly adopted.

170 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [Dec. 8,

by a comparison of the diurnal averages of the surface-temperature of the
Mediterranean with those of the Atlantic, that the latter are at least four
or five degrees higher than the former, it may be fairly assumed that at
least half the increase was due to the passage from the colder Atlantic
water of the mid-channel into the warmer water of the Mediterranean
basin, the temperature of the latter being even here somewhat reduced by
the inflow of the former.—The Jottom-temperature was found to be here
55°; and this corresponded closely with that which we had met with in
the Strait (§ 32), while it was at least 5° higher than had been obtained at
corresponding depths on the Atlantic side. Being desirous of determining
the rate of its diminution, we took serial soundings at intervals of
10 fathoms down to 50, and then at 100 fathoms, with the following re-
markable result :—

Sumlace octet ve as 74°5 5 :
LO fathoms? occa ee ee 69°3 a ve
diff. 4°3
20 a riche he at eae 6520 cw
diff. 2°0
BO diph be tyre pire ene eee 6350. ne:
dir. 13
40 ie Ih cards adunice th AB RE Ge Feces
Gin. 2°0
a eee Reap ce roms amen deg (97) diff. 4-6
HOO sf ween uc ieccameoee Bey Wes

ABGiwabie (seston) ie ano;Oy er
Thus there was a fall of 9°:5 in the first 20 fathoms, of 5°°3 in the next
30 fathoms, and of 4°°6 in the next 50 fathoms; whilst from 100 fathoms
to the bottom at 586 fathoms there was no further descent.

46. Whilst we were prosecuting these inquiries, we found ourselves
surrounded—the surface of the Sea being extremely calm—by great num-
bers of the beautiful floating Velelle, which are occasional visitors to our own
Coast, accompanied by the Porpite, which are more exclusively restricted
to warmer seas. With these was a great abundance of a small species of
Firoloid (Firoloidea hyalina, D. Chiaje?), about 0-4 inch in length, the
extreme transparence of which enabled every part of its organization to be
readily studied microscopically, its Nervous System being specially distin-.
guishable. Of this very interesting Heteropod, a full description will be
hereafter published by Dr. Carpenter.

47. The result obtained by our first Temperature-sounding in the
Mediterranean was fully borne out by that of the Temperature-soundings
taken during three subsequent days, which show an extraordinary uni-
formity of dottom-temperature at depths from 162 to 845 fathoms * :—

* This uniformity, as we have since learned, had been previously observed by Capt.
Spratt, in his Soundings in the Eastern Basin of the Mediterranean; but owing (it
seems probable) to the want of “ protection” in his Thermometers, he had set the
uniform temperature too high, namely 59°. (See his ‘Travels and Researches in
Crete,’ vol. ii. Appendix II.)

1870.] Deep-sea Researches. E71

Station. Depth, Surface- Bottom-
No. : in faths. temp. temp.
Altice nee 730 74:5 55:0
AD a Be en 790 74:0 54:0
APSA aaa a ae ot: OV: 162 74°7 55:0
BAP Regh ikke fe 455 70:0 55:0
Aly Baer oro 207 427 54°7
AGN: eer ee. 493 73°5 Jd70
Aig ae Hit iors Preece 845 69°5 54°7

It will be observed that the surface-temperature varied between 69°°5 and
74°-5 ; and that whilst the highest temperatures were shown at Stations
near the African Coast, the lowest presented itself between Cape de Gat
and Cartagena. Now the Gibraltar inflow is very sensibly felt at Cape
de Gat, where the current usually runs at the rate of a mile an hour; and
of the strength of this current we had unpleasant experience. For on the
19th of August, as we were crossing from Station 46 towards the Spanish
coast, we encountered a strong N.H. breeze, which, meeting the current,
worked up a considerable swell; this prevented us from taking even a
Temperature-sounding on that day, and gave our Ship a peculiar twisting
or screwing movement, from which we were glad to escape by the subsi-
dence of the breeze during the following night. During this day the
Surface-temperature of the Sea came down from the average of 72°°2, which
it had maintained on the 18th, to 66°°9. Had the weather been calm we
might have attributed this reduction to the colder Gibraltar in-current ;
but as the average temperature of the Air also fell from 73°'8 to 69°'8, and
as the strong N.E. breeze must have had a cooling effect upon the surface
of the sea, we should have deemed it probable that the reduction of Surface-
temperature was due at least as much to the latter as to the former of these
causes, had it not been that a set of Serial soundings which we took at
Station 47 showed that the reduction extended very far down, as will be
apparent on comparing the following results with those given in § 45 :—

° Fahr

SUT AGEs cs de ow Abe es oes wees 69°5

PO Mathoms cr ses oe ete kes Santee 59:0

DA) aie Weis Seal Bon PA Raed Sel Te Se ee)

BOR ares ee ea Aa Tod oe atk MeL Arar i

AQ Sig MW es chee a oy Cae Stim ith ielatecrats 55:7

BORE) Scat Foe Siac wat od hl AL Re a 55°3

OO ig ra vee facts hin Be cael pe Asa 547
S45s Lor (Coottom) Ree. Si 8 see 54°7

It will be seen hereafter that the observations made on our return voyage
gave more distinct evidence of the cooling influence of the Gibraltar in-
current (§ 86).

48. At most of these Stations we explored the bottom by means of the
Dredge, with results much less profitable than we had anticipated. Except

172 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [Dec. 8

near the Coast, on either side, where the ground was rocky and unequal,
the bottom was found everywhere to consist ofra tenacious mud, composed
of a very fine yellowish sand mixed with a bluish clay,—the former pre-
dominating in some spots, the latter in others. Large quantities of this
mud were laboriously sifted, often without yielding any thing save a few
fragments of Shells, or a small number of Foraminifera ; and inno instance
was it found to contain any considerable number of living animals of any
description. Our disappointment at this unexpected paucity of life was not
small; and it was destined, as will hereafter appear, to continue through
the whole of our Dredging-exploration of the deeper portions of the Medi-
terranean basin. The operation of Dredging in the shallower portions
nearer shore was rendered difficult by the rocky nature of the bottom, on
which the dredge continually “fouled;’’ and after the loss of two more
dredges and a considerable quantity of rope, Capt. Calver came to the
conclusion that the “tangles” only should be used where the inequality of
the soundings indicated danger to the Dredge. Now the “ tangles,”’ whilst
gathering Polyzoa, Echinoderms, Crustacea, and the smaller Corals, some-
times even better than the Dredge, pick up but few Shells; and hence our
collection of Mollusca is altogether a scanty one. Nevertheless many of the
types we did obtain were of considerable interest. Thus at Station 45, at a
depth of 207 fathoms, we got Turbo Romettensis, Seguenza, MS. (Sicilian
fossil); Scalaria plicosa (Sic. foss.); Odostomia obliquata, Ph.; Philine, two
undescribed species; and an interesting Coral (Dendrophyllia corrugosa).
49. On the afternoon of Saturday, Aug. 20th, we anchored in Cartagena
Bay, in which we got Taranis Morchi, Malm (northern), and Pleurotoma
decussata, Ph. (Sic. and Cor. Cr. foss.). We left this harbour on the fol-
lowing Monday morning, and proceeded to a point (Station 48) at which we
expected to find deeper water than any we had previously sounded in this
year’s work. Bottom was here struck at 1328 fathoms; and its tempera-
ture, 54°°7, proved still conformable to the uniform standard previously ob-
served. The density of the water was not as great as we had found it ona
shallower bed, its Specific Gravity being 10282, and its proportion of Chlo-
rine 21°32. The specimen of the bottom brought up by the Sounding-appa-
ratus was not promising; and when the dredge was hauled in, filled with
stiff mud, but without any sign of Animal life, we experienced the truth of
the beatitude “‘ Blessed are they who expect nothing, for they shall not
be disappointed.” Large quantities of this mud were washed and sifted
without yielding more than a few comminuted fragments of shell; and we
were reluctantly driven to the conclusion that there was “nothing in it.”
The like result attended the exploration we made the next day at another
Station (49), where we found the depth to be 1412 fathoms, and the
Temperature and Density of the bottom-water to be almost exactly the
same as at the last Station. We then steamed towards the Algerine Coast,
and took a dredging in shallow water 5-51 fathoms, which gave us a few
Shells of considerable interest :—Venus multilamella, Lamarck (Monte

1870.] Deep-sea Researches. 173

Mario foss.); Solarium pseudoperspectivum, Brocchi (Sic. foss.); Mitra
zonata, Marryat (Sic. foss.); Mytilus incurvatus, Ph. (Sic. foss.) ; Sportella
Cailleti, Conti (Monte Mario foss.).

50.- During the night we again steamed out into Deep water, and on the
morning of Aug. 26th found at Station 45 a depth of 1415 fathoms, with
a bottom-temperature of 54°-7. The Density of the Bottom-water was
almost exactly the same as that of the two previous deep-water samples.
Our dredging was here more successful, the following species of Mollusca
being obtained :—Nucula, sp. n. (quadrata) ; N. pumila, Asbjornsen (north- -
ern); Leda, sp. n. (Portuguese also); Pecchiolia granulata, Seg. (Sic.
foss.); Hela tenella, Jeffr. (northern, and Sic. foss.); Trochus gemmu-
latus, Ph. (Sic. foss.); Rissoa subsoluta, Aradas (Sic. foss.); Natica affinis,
Gmelin (northern, and Sic. foss.) ; Trophon multilamellosus, Ph. (Sic.
foss.); Nassa prismatica, Br. (Sic. foss.) ; Columbella halieeti, Jeftr.
(northern, and Sic. foss.), ?= Buccinum acuticostatum, Ph. ; Pleurotoma
carinata, Cristofori and Jan (northern, and Sic. foss.) ; P. torquata, Ph.

(Sic. foss.); P. decussata, Ph. (Sic. foss.) ; Planorbis glaber, Jefir. (fresh-

water!) ; Spirialis physoides, Forbes,=8. recurvirostra, A. Costa.

51. Directing our course again towards the Algerine Coast, we kept nearly
parallel to it during the greater part of the next day, occasionally sweeping
the bottom with the ‘ tangles,” which gave us abundance of Polyzoa,
Echinoderms, &c. of well known types, without any specimens of novel or
peculiar interest, except (at Station 50, in 7-51 fathoms) a specimen of
Trochus biangulatus, Kichwald, fide Hornes,= T. ditropis, S. Wood, a Mio-
cene and Coralline Crag shell. We reached Algiers on the afternoon of the
26th; and as it was necessary to take in coal, we remained in harbour until
the 29th, when we resumed our easterly course, still keeping near the Coast.
The weather now began to be oppressively hot, the Surface-temperature of
the Sea rising to 76° or 78°, and that of the Air being often several degrees
higher. Wishing to see what would be the point at which the effect of
this extreme superheating would cease to manifest itself, we took a set
of Serial soundings at Station 53, with the followmg result, which we in-
cline to consider typical of the condition of the proper Surface-water of
the Mediterranean in the Summer season :—

° Fahr
SHUACEs ward aie fobs aides WG
5 fathomag),” s.is'4 bs 76
LO ee at ates pa bier hi, 7]
Mie a ine tig ih Sit as a 61°5
lla ee Mies ote A Ae ae 60
AL Cs canis: Rita ep Yr a8 57°3
Ag te cite iid ea erated i < 56°7
TOO iio kee Fhe Rie cote 55°5

Thus the amount of heat lost in the first 20 fathoms is no less than 15°-5 ;
and as much as 9°°5 of this loss shows itself between 10 and 20 fathoms.

174 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [Dees

Somewhat nearer the shore, at a depth of from 40 to 80 fathoms, we got
the following Mollusca :—Pecchiolia, sp. n. (Sic. foss.) ; Solarium pseudo-
perspectivum (Sic. foss.); Nassa semistriata, Brocchi (Sic. foss., and Co-
ralline and Red Crag)=N. ladiosa, S. Wood, =. trifasciata, H. Adams ;
and Bulla, sp. n.

52. Again proceeding into deep water we perseveringly explored the
bottom with the Dredge; and from a bottom of 1508 fathoms we brought
up some hundredweights of the same barren mud as had previously given
so much trouble and to so little profit. The sieve and the washing-tub
again returned for answer ‘“‘barren all.” Disappointing as this negative
result was to us as Zoologists, there are aspects under which it may be
viewed that may give it no small value to Geologists. On these, however,
we can more fittingly enlarge hereafter (§ 102). Once more, shifting our
ground a few miles, we put down our dredge in 1456 fathoms’ water, and
brought it up loaded with a similar profitless freight.

53. We now determined to keep closer to the Shore, and worked for
several days along the African Coast, for the most part using the “tangles,”
the ground being too rocky for the dredge. Here we came upon a small
fleet of Coral-fishers; and were not a little interested in finding that they
employed ‘‘ tangles” similar to our own as their most effective method of
collecting. We swept the shore with these very assiduously, usually be-
tween 50 and 100 fathoms; and although we obtained Polyzoa, Echino-
derms, and Corals in considerable abundance, there were not many of
special interest. We may note, however, that several of the Polyzoa
which occurred in the region in which the Red Coral is found, had, when
fresh, a red colour nearly as brilliant as that by which it is characterized ;
but this colour, in the Polyzoa, was quite evanescent. At Station 55 we
obtained the following Mollusca:—Leda acuminata, Jeffr. (Sic. foss.),
Dentalium abyssorum, Sars (northern), and Turritella subangulata, Brocchi
(Sic. foss.).

54. The extreme heat of the weather having produced an exhausting
effect upon our crew, especially on the engineers and stokers, Capt. Calver
considered it desirable to give them rest; and we accordingly made for the
Bay of Tunis, which we reached at mid-day on Saturday, Sept. 3rd.
The town itself is situated at the head of a shallow lagoon or salt-lake,
that communicates with the sea by a narrow channel ; and at this entrance
there is a small sea-port named the Goletta, having a basin for vessels of
moderate size. The lake, although about six miles long, has only from
six to seven feet of water at its deepest part; and when the water is un-
usually low, a small Steamer, which plies between the Goletta and Tunis,
is not always able to run, as happened at the time of our visit. Owing to
the great evaporation, and the absence of any stream of fresh water, the
water of this lake is usually very salt; but when heavy rains fall, the
level is considerably raised, and the saltness is diminished. Thus the
condition of this lake in regard to that of the sea outside is sometimes that
of the Mediterranean in regard to that of the Atlantic (§ 122), and some-

1870. ] Deep-sea Researches. 175

times that of the Baltic towards the German Ocean ($ 123); and we would
suggest whether it might not be possible, through our Consulate (which
has an office at the Goletta), to have a regular series of observations made
upon the relative densities of the water of the lake and that of the sea, and
upon the direction of the upper and under current in the channel of com-
munication between them, that might furnish valuable data for the com-
plete elucidation of the subject of currents occasioned by excess of evapo-
ration. We availed ourselves of this short rest to visit the town of Tunis,
which, for the most part, retains its genuine Moorish characters ; as well as
the ruins of Carthage, a few miles off, the most remarkable part of which
consists of a series of immense reservoirs for water, supplied by an aque-
duct that brought it from a range of mountains at no great distance,
from which also the modern town of Tunis is supplied.

55. Quittmg Tunis at mid-day on Tuesday Sept. 6, we resumed our
Dredging-explorations on more productive ground,—the shallow between
the Eastern and Western basins of the Mediterranean, that extends between
the African coast and Sicily, and is termed the ‘‘ Adventure Bank,” from
having been first discovered by Admiral Smyth when surveying in H.M.S.
‘Adventure.’ The depths here range from about 30 to 250 fathoms.
When passing Cape Bon, we fell in with another small fleet of Italian Coral-
fishers ; and were surprised at the large outlay incurred for such small re-
turns as they seemed to be obtaining. We here found, between 25 and
85 fathoms, the following species of Moutuusca: Trochus suturalis, Ph.
(Sic. foss.) ; Xenophora crispa, Konig (Sic. foss.) ; Cylichna striatula,
Forb. (Sic. foss.) ; C. ovulata, Brocchi (Sic. foss.). And seven miles off
the point called Rinaldo’s Chair, between 60 and 160 fathoms, we obtained
Tellina compressa, Brocchi (Sic. foss.), a species possessing the following
synonyms—Tellina striatula, Calcara; T. strigilata, Ph.; Psammodia
Weinkaufi, Crosse; and Angulus Macandrei, Sowerby : also an interesting
ANNELID, Praxilla pretermissa, Malmgren (northern). Here, again, we
brought up a great abundance of Polyzoa ; and many of these have proved
of great interest. One, in particular, of a beautiful, very open reticular plan
of growth, is the type of a new genus, of which another species had been
previously obtained by Mr. Busk from the Canary Islands, and which he will
describe under the name of Climacopora. Many of the species obtained had
been previously known only as Tertiary Fossils. A complete account of them
will be published by Mr. Busk hereafter. Abundance of Shells were here
found ; among them we obtained a considerable number of living specimens
of Megerlia truncata, including a whole series in various stages of growth, the
youngest of which presented a very remarkable character,—a set of sete pro-
jecting from the margin of the shell, the length of which exceeded its own
long diameter. Among other species of interest were :—Kellia, sp. n. (Sic.
foss.); Gadinia excentrica, Tiberi; Rissoa, sp.n.; Scalaria frondosa, J.Sow.
(Sic.&Cor.Cr.foss.); Odostomia unifasciata, Forbes ; Pyramidella plicosa,
Bronn (Sic. & Cor. Cr. foss.)=P. leviuscula, S. Wood ; and Acton pu-

176 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [Dee. 8,

sillus, Forb. (Sic. foss.). Among the dnnelida was an interesting Northern
form, Hyalinecia tubicola, Miller. The Echinodermata were in consider-
able abundance, but were mostly well-known Mediterranean types. The
Cidaris hystriz was especially frequent; and a comparison of the series
of specimens obtained in this and the preceding Cruise, with those obtained
last year in the Northern area, has enabled Prof. Wyville Thomson to
satisfy himself that C. hystrix, C. papillata, and C. affinis are specifically
identical. The Corals found on the Adventure Bank have proved peculi-
arly interesting; and will be the subject of a special Report by Prof. Duncan.
Among the Hydrozoa were two undescribed species of Aglaophenia. Al-
though no new Foraminifera here presented themselves, yet it was very
interesting to obtain (as we had previously done at several points on the
African coast) specimens of the beautiful Orbztolites tenuissimus first dis-
covered last year in the Atlantic (Report, § 36), of which we had ventured
to predicate the existence in the Mediterranean from having discovered an
extremely minute fragment of it in one of Captain Spratt’s Algean dredg-
ings ; also peculiarly large and elaborately finished specimens of the great
Nautiloid Litwola, first met with last year, the “test”’ of which is built up ~
of sand-grains united by a ferruginous cement, with passages extending
from the principal chambers into their walls, forming what is known as the
“ labyrinthic structure,’ of which the greatest development is found in the
two gigantic Fossil types (Parkeria and Loftusia) recently described by
Dr. Carpenter and Mr. H. Brady*.

56. This part of our work having brought us to the neighbourhood of
the Island of Pantellaria, we landed on it with the view of visiting, if pos-
sible, a cavern which had the reputation of being “of icy coldness.” As
we found, however, that a whole day’s delay would be involved, we gave
up the idea ; and we afterwards obtained elsewhere the information we de-
sired (§ 89).—The continuance of the very hot weather having brought a
large part of our Crew to a state of such exhaustion as to render a con-
tinuation of our operations undesirable, Captain Calver considered it ex-
pedient to proceed to Malta without further delay ; and we anchored in the
Harbour of Valetta on the morning of Saturday, Sept. 10th. Here we
found it necessary to remain for ten days, the illness of our Chief Engineer,
which we at first hoped might be only temporary, proving sufficiently
serious to require that a substitute should be found for him. Our time
was passed very pleasantly in visits to the various objects of interest in
which the Island abounds, and in the enjoyment of the kind hospitality of
His Excellency the Governor, Vice-Admiral Key, and other Officers.—The
time was too short for any careful examination of the Geology of the
Island ; but one point which struck us as of special interest in relation to
the deposit at present forming on the Mediterranean bottom will be spe-
cially noticed hereafter (§ 102).

57. As the instructions which we received at Malta required us to

* Philosophical Transactions, 1869.

1870.] Deep-sea Researches. 177

proceed homewards without unnecessary delay, and as Capt. Calver was
desirous of avoiding, if possible, the necessity of going into port for coal
between Malta and Gibraltar, we found ourselves obliged to relinquish the
hope we had entertained of being able to resume our Dredging-explora-
tions in deep water along a different line on our return voyage. But, de-
siring to gain what addition we could to the information already acquired
respecting the Physical condition of the Mediterranean, we arranged so to
shape our course on leaving Malta as to enable us (1) to obtain a deep
Sounding in the Eastern basin, and (2) to ascertain the Bottom-tempera-
ture on an area of Volcanic activity.

58. Quitting Valetta’ Harbour at mid-day on September 20th, we
steered in a N.E. direction towards a point about 70 miles distant, at
which a depth of 1700 fathoms was marked on the Chart. This we
reached early the next morning (Station 60); and a Sounding being taken,
1743 fathoms of line ran out. As this was the greatest depth we had
anywhere met with in the Mediterranean, and as the Basin in which the
Sounding was taken is cut off by the shallows between Sicily and Tunis
from all but superficial communication with the Western basin, we watched
the heaving in of the Sounding-apparatus and its accompaniments with no
little interest. The Thermometers recorded a Temperature of 56°, which
was one degree higher than that which we had met with in our two deepest
Soundings (1456 and 1508 fathoms) in the Western basin. The sample
of the bottom brought up in the tube of the Sounding-apparatus indicated
the prevalence of a yellowish clayey deposit so similar to that which had
elsewhere proved so disappointing, that we could not feel justified in pres-
sing Capt. Calver for the sacrifice of nearly a whole day, which would have
been required for a single cast of the Dredge at this depth. The speci-
men of Bottom-water brought up by our Water-bottle surprised us by its
very small excess of Density above the Surface-water ; the Specific Gravity
of the former being only 1°0283, whilst that of the latter was 1:0281] ; and
the proportion of Chlorine per 1000 being 21°08 in the former, whilst that
of the latter was 20°77. The Surface-water being here more dense than
the average, the Bottom-water was Jess dense—a result which a good deal
surprised us at the time, but which subsequent comparison with the densi-
ties of specimens taken from the greatest depths we had sounded in the
Western basin ($ 93) showed to be by no means exceptional; and when
we came to reason out the mode in which surface-evaporation may be pre-
sumed to operate in augmenting the density of the water beneath, we found
it to be quite in accordance with @ priori probability, that the deepest
water should show the least excess of density above the water at its sur-
face (§ 94).

59. Having thus satisfied ourselves, so far as we could do by a single
set of observations, that the Physical conditions which we had found to
prevail in the Western basin of the Mediterranean present themselves also
in the Eastern, we steered for the Coast of Sicily; and in a few hours

VOL. XIX. Q

178 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [ Dec. 8,

came in sight of Syracuse, with the lofty mass of Etna as a magnificent
background in the remote distance. The clouds which lay upon its
summit during the earlier part of the day gradually dispersed as we ap-
proached it, so that we could distinctly trace the outline of its cone, save
where this was obscured by a constantly shifting semitransparent cloud.
Whether this was a light smoke given off from the crater, or a film of va-
pour condensed by the contact of a current of warm moist air with the
colder surface of the mountain-summit, we were unable to distinguish,
though we watched it with great interest during the whole afternoon.—
We steamed quietly along the Sicilian coast during the night, so that
sunrise the next morning found us in the narrowest part of the Strait of
Messina, between Messina and Reggio; and we shall not easily forget the
beauty of the spectacle we then beheld on either shore. Passing through
the once-dreaded Charybdis, the dangers of which are rather poetical than
real, and leaving on our right the picturesque castle-crowned rock of
Scylla, we passed out of the “Faro,” which narrows at its northernmost
extremity to about 31 miles, into the open sea to the North of Sicily,
studded by the Lipari Isles, and steered direct for Stromboli, stopping at
10 a.m. to take a Sounding (Station 61). This gave us a depth of 392
fathoms, and a Bottom-temperature of 55°°7, which afforded no indication
of unusual elevation. Here again we found the Density of the Bottom-
water scarcely in excess of that of the Surface-water; and it was even
lower than that of the Surface-water in another Sounding taken somewhat
further on (Station 62), and at the depth of 730 fathoms, which gave a
Bottom-temperature of 55°°3.

Sp. Grav. Chlorine.
Surfaces ool ee ters ee 1:0281 21°32
Bottom, 392 fathoms ...... 1°0282 21°36
Bottom, 730 fathoms ...... 1°0280 20:22

60. This result, again, surprised us much at the time; but we are now
inclined to attribute it to the decrease of surface-evaporation consequent
upon the marked decrease in the heating-power of the Sun, which showed
itself in the change of the relative Temperatures of the Sea and Air; for
whilst, for some days before we put into Malta, the Surface-temperature of
theSea had ranged between 76° and 78°, and the Temperature of the Air had
been usually about 1° higher, we now found that while the Surface-tem-
perature of the Sea ranged between 73°°6 and 76°°6, the Temperature of
the Air was between 2° and 4° lower. This difference continued to show
itself nearly all the way to Gibraltar ; the daily averages of the Surface-
temperature of the Sea ranging between 73°11 and 75°°6, whilst those of
the temperature of the Air ranged between 68°5 and 72°. We now ap-
proached the rugged cone of Stromboli, from the summit of which there
was constantly issuing,—as has been the case since the time when the neigh-
bouring island of Hiera was fabled to be the workshop of Vulcan,—a cloud

1870. ] Deep-sea Researches. 179

of smoke, indicative of active changes in the molten depths beneath. Of
this activity, however, we had found no special indication in the Tempera-
ture-soundings taken nearest to the island. Whether the general prevalence
in the neighbourhood of Sicily of a Bottom-temperature averaging about
a degree above that of the Western part of the Mediterranean is due
to Subterranean heat, is a question which can only be determined by a
larger number of observations than we had the opportunity of making.
As we neared Stromboli, we were much struck with the height to which the
energetic industry of its inhabitants had carried the vine-cultivation all
round the cone, save on two slopes looking N.W. and S.E., over one or
other of which there is a continual discharge of volcanic dust and ashes.
Although no flames were visible during daylight, we could distinctly per-
ceive occasional flashes as night came on.—Our course was now laid straight
for Cape de Gat, which we passed on the 27th of September, arriving at
Gibraltar on the evening of the 28th. The only Scientific observations
which we had the opportunity of making during this part of our voyage
were confirmatory of those which we had made at the commencement of
our Mediterranean Cruise, as to the lower Temperature and inferior Den-
sity of the Surface-water, both which we attribute to the inflow from the
Atlantic. (See §§ 86, 92).

61. Having taken in at Gibraltar as much coal as we could carry, we
left the harbour at 9 a.m. on the 30th Sept., and proceeded at once towards
the scene of our previous observations. We thought it worth while, how-
ever, to take a Sounding in our way towards this, near the 100-fathom line
(Station 63), for the sake of ascertaining the Temperature and Specific
Gravity of the bottom-water. The depth was found to be 181 fathoms,
showing that the slope from the shallow to the deep portion of the channel
is here very rapid.. The bottom-temperature was 54°-7, that of the surface
being 68°; and the Specific Gravity of the bottom-water was 1°0280, that
of the surface being 10271. This bottom-water thus agreed closely in both
particulars with that of the deep mid-channel, as ascertained in our first
set of observations (§ 34), which were afterwards confirmed by our second.
We then steamed out to a point (Station 64) nearly identical with
that from which our previous investigations had been carried on; and
commenced our work with a Temperature-sounding. The surface-tempe-
rature (65°°6) proved to be here less by 2°°4 than it had been found to be
at Station 63; and this although it was taken an hour later in the forenoon,
when an increase might have beenexpected. It thus corresponded closely
with what had been previously found to be the average temperature of the
Strait in mid-channel, both during the first approach to Gibraltar from the
westwards (§ 30), and during our own experiments at the commencement
of the Mediterranean Cruise (§ 32); and the continuation of the like ob-
servations during the remainder of the day and ensuing night (§ 65) gave the
same remarkable result, the rationale of which will be considered hereafter
($ 74). The depth was somewhat less than at the neighbouring Station 39,

180 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [Dec. 8,

being 460 fathoms instead of 517; but the bottom-temperature was a little
lower, being 54°-7 instead of 55°°5. The respective Specific Gravities of
the Surface- and Bottom-waters, and of that of the Intermediate stratum of
250 fathoms, were found to coincide almost exactly with those previously
determined, as the following comparative statement shows :—

Specific Gravity. Specific Gravity.
Station 39. Station 64.
Surtace 2. cee se LOZ Zea 1027°1
250 fathoms... <6... o.12 L02933 1029-2
BOLCOM woe. ete oe Lue 1028°1 1028°3

Now the density of the dottom-water here corresponds so exactly with
that which prevails over the deeper bottom of the Western basin of the
Mediterranean, whilst it so considerably exceeds that of the dottom- as well
as of the surface-water of the Atlantic, that we cannot fail to recognize it
as belonging to the Mediterranean basin; so that, if it has any motion at
all, we should expect that motion to be from east to west. Still more cer-
tainly may this be affirmed of the intermediate stratum, the density of
which corresponds with that of the bottom-water of the shallower part of
the Mediterranean basin; the greatest depth (586 fathoms) at which such
water was obtained being at Station 40, the nearest point to the Strait from
which a specimen of bottom-water was obtained ($ 43). And it may be
further predicated that a stratum of water of a density of 1029°3 could not
overlie water of the density of 1028-1, unless it moved over the stratum
below, —that is, unless (1) the two strata were moving in opposite directions,
or (2) were moving at different rates in the same direction, or (3) the upper
stratum were in motion in either direction, and the lower stratum were
stationary. It will presently appear that the second of these conditions is
the one which obtains in the present case.

62. We now proceeded to repeat our experiments with the “ current-
drag,” with the view of obtaining, if possible, unequivocal evidence of the
existence of that Westerly undercurrent which so many considerations
combined to render probable.—The direction of the Wind during this set
of experiments was from the Kast, or opposite to that of the surface-current ;
and its force (3 to 4) was sufficient, by its meeting the current, to produce
a considerable swell, which necessitated the employment of a larger boat,

and rendered it unsafe to allow her to drift without men. The sectional
area of the boat was therefore greater than on the former occasion, giving
the in-current a stronger hold upon her; but, on the other hand, the
surface she presented to the wind was also greater; and as this acted’ in
the opposite direction, the latter increase might be considered to neutralize
the former, or even rather to exceed it, so as to render the boat more
capable of being carried westwards by the “‘ current-drag,”’ if this should be
acted on by an outward undercurrent. The rate of surface-movement was
tested as before (§ 36), and proved to be 1823 mile per hour, its direction

1870. ] Deep-sea Researches. 181

being N.K. by E. 3H. This was a retardation of more than a mile per
hour, as compared with the former observation; and that it was not attri-
butable to the mere surface-action of the easterly wind, was clear from the
result of the next observation, which showed that the retardation extended
to a depth far below the influence of surface-action The “‘current-drag ”’
having been lowered to 100 fathoms’ depth, the drift of the boat was
reduced to 0°857 mile per hour, or less than half its surface-drift ; its
direction was nearly the same as that of the surface-current, viz. E. by
N.3N. The “current-drag’’ was then lowered to a depth of 250 fathoms ;
and in a short time the boat was seen to be carried along by it in a direction
(W.N.W.) almost exactly opposite to that of the middle in-current of the
Strait. The rate of outward movement of the boat was 0°400 mile per

Station 64.

Te eh LS

Bee, Sf CLLE
a z .

Rate (per hour) and Direction of Movement of Surface-float and of Current-drag at
different Depths ; with Force and Direction of Wind.

hour; but from the considerations formerly stated (§ 39), it is clear that
the actual rate of the undercurrent must have exceeded that of the boat
on the surface.—The ‘‘ current-drag”’ was then lowered down to a depth of
400 fathoms; and again the boat was carried along in nearly the same
direction as in the previous experiments, namely N.W. 3 N.; but more
slowly, its rate of movement being 0°300 mile per hour.

63. Thus, then, our previous deductions were now justified by a con-
clusive proof that there was at this time a return-current in the mid-
channel of this narrowest part of the Strait, from the Mediterranean
towards the Atlantic, flowing beneath the constant surface-stream from
the Atlantic into the Mediterranean; and it will be shown hereafter
(§ 115), by a comparison of all the results of our observations, that a
strong presumption may be fairly raised for the constant existence of such
a return-current, though its force and amount are liable to variation.

64. As the determination of the boundaries of this return-current, and
of the amount and conditions of its variation, could only be effected by
multiplied simultaneous observations at different points, with ample license
as to time, neither of which fell within the scope of the present Expedi-
tion, we were obliged to content ourselves, as regards this locality, with
what we had found ourselves able to accomplish ; and at the conclusion of
this day’s work we proceeded westwards under easy steam, so as to be able

182 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [ Dec. 8,

to resume our experiments the next morning in the shallowesé part of the
Strait.

65. The average Surface-temperature of the Mid-stream during our
outward passage through the Strait proved to be 66°, thus corresponding
exactly with what we had found it to be on our inward passage seven
weeks previously ($ 30). This depression, as compared with the surface-
temperature of the Strait itself nearer the shore, both north and south,
and with the temperature of the Mediterranean to the eastward and that
of the Atlantic to the westward, is extremely remarkable. We shall here-
after inquire how it is to be explained (§ 74).

66. The breadth of the Channel between Capes Spartel and Trafalgar
(Chart II.) is about 23 nautical or 263 statute miles. Its northern half
is much shallower than the southern, as is shown in Section BB; the
100-fathom line off the Spanish coast running .at about twelve miles’
distance from Cape Trafalgar, whilst along the African coast it keeps much
nearer the shore, being at only two miles’ distance from Cape Spartel.
Between these two lines, the greatest depth marked in the Chart is 194
fathoms ; and this occurs off Cape Spartel, at less than a mile from the
100-fathom line. Between this and the opposite border of the deeper
chanvel, the depths vary from 130 to 180 fathoms; the abruptness of the
differences at neighbouring points indicating a rocky bottom, of which we
soon had unpleasant experience.

Stations 65, 66.

; Wind y
SN iy few

Rate (per hour) and Direction of Movement of Surface-float and of Current-drag at
different Depths; with Force and Direction of Wind in No. 3. (No Wind in
Nos. 1, 2.)

67. We commenced our observations on the morning of Oct. Ist at the
point of greatest depth (Station 65). The temperature of the surface at
6 a.m. was only 63°, which was at least eight degrees lower than the
average temperature at that hour within the Mediterranean. The bottom-
temperature at 198 fathoms was 54°5, and the Specific Gravity of the
bottom-water was 1028°2. The coincidence both in temperature and Sp. Gr.
with the bottom-water at Station 64 was thus very close. The place of

1870.] _ Deep-sea Researches. 183

the Ship having been determined by angles taken with the shore, the rate
of the surface-movement was tested as on former occasions, and was
found to be 1:277 mile per hour, its direction being EK.38. The
*‘current-drag”’ was then sunk to 150 fathoms, the greatest depth at
which it was thought safe to use it; and the boat from which it was
suspended moved E. 2? N. at the rate of 0°840 mile per hour. This
observation indicated a very considerable retardation in the rate of inflow,
but gave no evidence of an outflow. It did not, however, negative the
inference deducible from the Temperature, and still more from the Specific
Gravity, of the water beneath, that an outflow takes place in that lowest
stratum which we could not test by the “ current-drag.”’

68. We then steamed across the deep channel towards the Spanish
side ; and passing a bauk of 45 fathoms which rises near its middle, we
sounded again at Station 66, about six miles to the northward of Station
65. The surface-temperature at 9 a.m. was here found to have risen to
69°; and since not more than half this increase could be attributed,
according to our general experience, to the increase of direct solar radiation
at this period of the day, the cause of the additional elevation has to be
sought elsewhere (§ 78). The length of sounding-line run out was 147
fathoms ; but on attempting to reel it in, the lead was found to have fixed
itself between rocks; and all Capt. Calver’s skill in the management of
his ship proved inadequate to free it. As we were thus anchored by our
sounding-line, it was requisite to set ourselves free, by putting a breaking
strain upon it; and we thus lost, with the lead, one of our Water-bottles,
and a pair of Thermometers, one of which was specially valued by us as
having been used throughout the ‘ Porcupine’ Expedition of 1869, in
which the Temperature-soundings had proved of peculiar importance. The
*current-drag’’ was here let down to 100 fathoms; and the boat from
which it was suspended moved along in the direction of the surface-
current, and at the rate of 1-280 mile per hour, which was almost precisely
that of the surface-current in the previous observation.

69. Deeming it important to obtain the Temperature and Specific
Gravity of the bottom-water on the Spanish side of the deeper portion of
the channel, we slightly shifted our ground, and again let down our lead,
with Thermometers and Water-bottle, at Station 67, where the depth
proved to be 188 fathoms. On beginning to reel in the line, we found the
lead to have anchored as before, and for some time feared that we should
sustain a second loss of the Water-bottle and Thermometers attached to it.
The means taken by Capt. Calver for its extrication, however, proved on
this occasion successful ; and we had the satisfaction of seeing the whole
apparatus safely brought up,—the lead bearing evident marks of having
been jammed between rocks and then violently strained. The Temperature
of the bottom proved to be 55°°3, that of the surface being 73°; and the
Specific Gravity of the bottom-water was 1028-1, that of the surface
being 1026°8. Here again, therefore, the evidence afforded by the Tem-

184 Messrs. Carpenter and J effreys on [Dec. 8,

perature and Specific Gravity of the dottom-water was conclusive as to its
Mediterranean character. Its Density corresponded rather with that of
the dottom-water than with that of the intermediate stratum, at the
opposite end of the Strait; but the more rapid Westerly motion of the
latter (§ 62) would seem to indicate that the water which here flows
over the “ridge ” is derived from it, rather than from the deeper layer, and
that its diminution in density is due to the dilution it sustains in its
course. In either case the denser Mediterranean water discharged by this
undercurrent must flow up-Aill ; but the incline is so gradual that a very
small force, if constantly sustained, would suffice to produce the elevation
needed to carry it over the ridge.

70. Whilst we were prosecuting these inquiries, our attention was at-
tracted by the long chains of Aggregate Salpe which were floating close to
the Ship near the surface of the very calm sea. We were able to collect
four or five different species of these, and to submit them, during life, to
Microscopic examination. The reversal of the direction of the Circulation
took place in all at more regular intervals than we have usually found to be the
case in the Compound Ascidians ; and we were able to distinguish an unmis-
takable rudimentary eye, which had not, we believe, been previously noticed.
We hope to be able hereafter, by the detailed study of these specimens,
to make some additions to the knowledge previously acquired of this very
interesting group.—As the nature of the bottom put it out of the question
to attempt to dredge on this ridge, our only means of investigating its
Zoology lay in the use of the “‘ hempen tangles.’ A “sweep” taken with
these brought up a few Echinoderms and Polyzoa of no special terest ;
but with these there was a new species of Amphihelia, allied to A. oculata.

71. We now took our final leave of the Mediterranean basin with min-
gled feelings of disappointment and satisfaction. The Zoological results
of our Cruise had been by no means equal to our expectations; but, on
the other hand, we could console ourselves with the belief that our deter-
mination of the peculiar Physical conditions of this great Inland Sea, and
in particular our elucidation of the mystery of the Gibraltar current, would
be fairly regarded as a success; and we venture to think that this will
be admitted by such as may follow us through the discussion of General
Results to which we shall presently proceed.

72. As Capt. Calver considered himself bound not to make any unne-
cessary delay in returning homewards, and to take every advantage of the
continuance of the fair weather and favourable breeze which we enjoyed
during nearly the whole remainder of our voyage, we were reluctantly com-
pelled to give up the idea of prosecuting any further researches in the Deep
Sea; and devoted ourselves to the examination of the specimens previously
collected, and to the correlation of our Temperature and other results,—spe-
cially directing our attention, however, to the Surface-temperature of the
embouchure of the Strait, with the view of ascertaining whether a sudden
fall would be observable on quitting it, corresponding to the vise which had

1870. ] Deep-sea Researches. 185

been noticed on the outward voyage on entering it (§ 30). This change
proved to be very decided. As we kept along the Southern Coast of Por-
tugal towards Cape St. Vincent, the Surface-temperature averaged 73°-5.
At 6 p.m. we were turning the corner of the Cape, and found the Surface-
temperature 72°°5; and at 8 p.m., when we were fairly in the Atlantic,
we found that the Surface-temperature had fallen to 69°, thus showing a
difference of 4°°5. On the following day, when we were off Lisbon, the Sur-
face-temperature was 69°°5; and it gradually diminished as we proceeded
Northwards from that point.—Although the season of the year led us to
expect a rough passage across the Bay of Biscay, the weather continued
remarkably fine until we reached the ‘‘ Chops of the Channel,” where we
fell in with a rather fresh breeze; this did not interfere, however, with our
anchoring at Cowes on the afternoon of the next day (Oct. 8th), after an
absence of just two months, during which a greater number of most im-
portant Public events had occurred than had ever before been crowded
within so short a period.

GENERAL RESULTS.
TEMPERATURE AND COMPOSITION OF ATLANTIC WATER.
[For this portion of the Report Dr. Carpenter is alone responsible. |

73. Surface-Temperature.—The Temperature of the surface-water at
the Chops of the Channel (Stations 1-9) averaged 62° for five days; and
it rose gradually in conformity with the Southing, until at Cape St. Vincent
it stood at 69°. The Temperature of the dir, which averaged 63°4 in the
former locality, rose to about 69° in the latter; but it is specially note-
worthy that whilst, as we crossed the Bay of Biscay and drew southwards
along the coasts of Spain and Portugal, the temperature of the Air was
almost always higher by from 2° to 5° than that of the Sea, this difference
ceased to show itself as we neared Cape St. Vincent, and was even replaced
by a slight difference in the contrary direction. The excess in the Surface-
temperature of the Sea above the temperature of the Air became still more
marked after we had passed the Cape, and had changed our course to the
East ; a sudden rise of from 2° to 4° then showing itself in the former,
whilst the latter did not rise by more than half that amount. Thus on
July 30, between Stations 27 and 28, on our way to Cadiz, in about
Lat. 364° N. and Long. 73° W., the surface-temperature of the Sea exceeded
74°, whilst the temperature of the Air was only 72°. The like condition
showed itself after leaving Cadiz, on August 2, between Stations 29 and 30 ;
the surface-temperature of the Sea being 73°°2, whilst the temperature of
the Air was 71°°4. That this excess did not depend upon a reduction of
evaporation, consequent upon a peculiarly damp condition of the atmo-
sphere, appeared from the fact that the Wet-bulb thermometer during this
period stood at from 3° to 4° below the Dry a difference fully equal to

186 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [ Dee. 8;

the general average of our observations.— Having thence crossed the em-
bouchure of the Strait of Gibraltar, so as to approach the coast of Africa,
the three following days were passed in Latitudes averaging about a degree
further south than those in which the previous observations had been
noted ; yet the surface-temperature of the Sea then /e// again to an average
of 72°, whilst that of the Air averaged 73°°7, thus nearly restoring the
usual ratio between the two.—It was not a little perplexing to find, when
we had fairly entered the Strait and were proceeding along the mid-channel
towards Gibraltar, that the surface-temperature of the Sea fed/ still further
to 66°°4, whilst the temperature of the Air rose to 76°°6, thus showing the
then unprecedented difference of i10°:2 between the two.

74. These remarkable phenomena caused us to give particular attention
to the Surface-temperature in the mid-stream of the Strait, and on the
northern side of its embouchure, on our return voyage ; when our first series
of observations derived full confirmation from another series taken with
the greatest care nearly two months afterwards. Tor when we left Gibraltar
Harbour on the morning of September 30th, we found, on proceeding into
the mid-stream, that the surface-temperature fell from 70°°7 to 65°°6, al-
though the latter observation was made towards noon; that it remained at
nearly the same point through the remainder of that day and the succeed-
ing night, during which we were slowly proceeding eastwards,—still in
the mid-current ; and that it stood as low as 63° at six o’clock on the fol-
lowing morning (Oct. 1), when we had reached Station 65, in the deepest
part of the channel over the ridge not far from the African coast. Having
thence moved towards the Spanish coast, we found the surface-temperature
at Station 66 to have risen to 69°; and a little further, at Station 67, it
was found to have risen to 73°.—These observations make it clear that in
the line of the strongest surface-inset, the temperature of the current is
several degrees lower than that of the surface-water of the Atlantic from
which it is directly derived ; and the fact would seem to indicate either that
the water of which this current consists is drawn from a part of the Atlantic
at least as far north as Lisbon, or (which may be thought more probable)
that it is derived from a stratum of the neighbouring ocean somewhat beneath
the surface, so as to have received less of the solar superheating than the
actual surface-water.—it would be a matter of much interest to trace this
colder current to its source, and thus to ascertam how it makes its way
through a sea at least five degrees warmer than itself.

75. Our second series of observations upon the Surface-temperature of
the Northern side of the wide embouchure of the Strait were also quite con-
firmatory of the inference to which the first seemed to point,—that there
is a surface-outflow of Mediterranean water along the Spanish coast, by
which the Temperature is kept up above the ordinary standard of Atlantic
water in that latitude ; for during the remainder of Oct. 1, the following
night, and the greater part of the next day, the surface-temperature was
between 70° and 72°°5, being a degree or two higher than the temperature

1870. ] Deep-sea Researches. 187

of the Air: at 4 p.m. it was 73°°5; at 6 p.m., when we were passing
Cape St. Vincent, it was 72°°5; and at 8 p.m., when we were fairly in the
Atlantic, it was at 69°. The average of the next two days, while we were
proceeding steadily Northwards, was maintained at nearly the same point ;
and the surface-temperature of the Sea was now pretty constantly /ower
than that of the Air.

76. The most probable explanation of this excess seems to lie in
the fact that, besides the mid-current almost invariably setting eastwards,
there are two lateral streams, of which the direction is sometimes reversed
under tidal influences (§ 106); and that warmer water from the Mediter-
ranean basin thus finds its way outwards, chiefly along the Spanish shore.
—That the surface zndraught is greatest on the African side of the Strait,
and that the surface outflow is greatest on the Spanish side, is, we under-
stand, a fact well known to those who are in the habit of navigating it,
though we do not find it mentioned in the ‘ Sailing Directions ;’ and this is
just what our observations of surface-temperature in the embouchure of the
Strait would lead us to infer.

77. It is a cireumstance worthy of remark, that an abnormally low tem-
perature showed itself during the whole of our first stayin Gibraltar Bay,
from Aug. 7 to Aug. 14; the surface-temperature of the Water ranging
between 64°'1 and 65°°6,—being apparently that of the mid-strait to the
eastward,—whilst the temperature of the Air ranged between 72°°9 and
77°°2, the greatest difference between the two being 12%5. During
most of this time the wind was easterly, and the wet-bulb thermometer
ranged from 4°1 to 8°°2 below the dry ; but the increased evaporation
that would result from the atmospheric condition thus indicated, could
scarcely have produced the marked depression observable in the surface-
temperature of the water; more especially as our general experience was that
the surface-temperature in the comparatively shallow water of a Harbour
was rather higher than in the deeper sea outside.—No such depression
presented itself on our return voyage. On approaching Gibraltar from the
Mediterranean side, there was a gradual reduction from 74°, which had
been the average of several previous days, to 72°, apparently in conse-
quence of the influx of the colder Atlantic water; the water in the Bay
itself had an average surface-temperature of nearly 71°; and the surface-
temperature did not fall until we came out into the mid-channel, where we
encountered the colder indraught as already described ($61). Hencethe
depression observed during our first visit must be occasional only; and may
perhaps be attributable to a deflexion of the mid-current into the Bay, by
the opposing influence of the easterly wind which then prevailed.—This is
one of the points as to which further inquiries, such as may be easily in-
stituted by the Government authorities at Gibraltar, would doubtless fur-
nish information of great interest.

78. Bottom-Temperature.—The Temperature-soundings taken during
the Atlantic Cruise (see p. 220) may be arranged in three sets :—

188 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [ Dec. 8,

I. Those taken in the “ Chops of the Channel,”’ about Lat. 48° N., cor-
responding closely in geographical position with several of those of the
Second Cruise of 1869.

II. Those taken off the Atlantic Coast of Spain and Portugal, between
Lat. 423° N. and Lat. 37°N.

III. Those taken within the embouchure of the Strait of Gibraltar, ex-
tending westerly as far as Cape St. Vincent and Tangier, and lying between
Lat. 37° N. and 352° N. .

79. The first two sets may be advantageously compared with each other,
and with a Set of Bottom and Serial (No. 42) Soundings taken last year
nearly in the same locality as the first; these are presented in the fol-
lowing Table.

Temperature of the Sea at different Depths near the Western margin of
the North-Atlantic Basin.

lis ile iil.
Chops of the Channel, 1869.||Chops of the Channel, 1870.||Coastof Spain and Portugal
Depth, |Surface-|Bottom- Depth, |Surface-} Bottom- Depth, |Surface-| Bottom-
No. in Temp. | Temp. || No. in Temp. | Temp. || No. in Temp. | Temp.
fathoms.| ° Fahr. | ° Fahr. fathoms.| ° Fahr.| © Fahr. fathoms.| ° Fahr. | ° Fahr.

SS nn ee ee eS

42 6

42.| 800 | 62:6 | 42:0 23. | 802 | 665] 493
42.) 862 | 626 | 39:7 16. | 994 | 695 | 403
38.} 1000 | 64:0 | 38:3 18. | 1065 | 650 | 39-7
38. | 1250 | 64:0 | 37°7 17. | 1095 | 68:0 | 39-7

Between Nos. I. and II., as might be anticipated, the accordance is
extremely close; and this accordance extends to the upper stratum (ex-
cluding the actual surface) in No. III., allowance being made for difference
of Latitude. Notwithstanding that the suzface-temperatures in No. III.
range as high as 69°°7, the average excess at depths between 81 fathoms (at
which the superheating of the surface has but little effect, § 87) and 350
fathoms is not above 2°, the reduction of temperature encountered in de-
scending this upper stratum being very small in each case. But whilst
this slow rate of reduction continues in No. III. down to 800 fathoms,—
the bottom-temperature at 802 fathoms being 49°°3,—the reduction is more
rapid in Nos. I. and II., so that the temperature of 45°5 is reached in
the one at 600 fathoms, and in the other at 717; whilst at 800 fathoms
in No. I. the temperature has fallen to 42°. Below 800 fathoms, how-

1870. ] Deep-sea Researches. 189

ever, in No. III., the temperature undergoes so extraordinarily rapid a de-
pression, that it is reduced nine degrees within the next 200 fathoms; the
water at 994 fathoms being only 2° warmer than it is at 1000 fathoms
in No. I. A slight further reduction of temperature is noticeable in the
two deepest Soundings taken in the Atlantic Cruise of 1870, the tempe-
rature found at nearly 1100 fathoms being just 2° higher than that found
at 1250 in No. I.

80. Considering these facts in the light thrown upon the Temperature
phenomena of the Atlantic Basin by those of the ‘‘ Cold Area”? explored in
1869, it appears clear that we have in the Latitude of Lisbon the same
distinct separation between an upper warm and a lower cold stratum as
presented itself in the channel between the Shetland and the Faroe Islands ;
but whilst the ‘stratum of intermixture ” in the latter lies between 150 and
300 fathoms, it lies in the former between 800 and 1000 fathoms. It
seems perfectly clear that the Jower stratum must have had a Polar source ;
but there is at present no distinct evidence that the upper stratum is de- |
rived from any source nearer the Equator. Its temperature, indeed, is lower
by 4 or 5 degrees than that of the Mediterranean in the same parallel of
Latitude at corresponding depths; and since the temperature of the latter
may be considered as the normal of the Latitude,—this great Inland Sea
being virtually excluded from participation in the general Oceanic Cir-
culation,—it would seem that the effect of that circulation is rather to
lower than to raise the temperature of the upper stratum of this portion
of the Atlantic. Its surface-temperature also, as already shown (§ 45),
is decidedly iower than that of the Mediterranean under the same parallel ;
and the limitation of the suwperheating to its most superficial layer is in
entire accordance with our Mediterranean observations upon this point
(§ 87).—Hence it seems a justifiable conclusion that neither the super-
ficial layer nor any portion of the upper stratum of the Atlantic water
that laves the coasts of Spain and Portugal receives any accession of heat
from the extension of the Gulf-stream into its area*,

81. When, however, we compare the Temperatures of this upper stratum
at different depths with those which are met with at Stations much further
North (as tabulated in Par. 110 of the Report for 1869), there is found to
be a remarkable correspondence in the general rate of reduction with depth,
except in this particular,—that the influence of the cold stratum beneath
begins to be decidedly marked much nearer the surface; so that instead of a
very slight reduction between 500 and 800 fathoms, and then a very rapid
passage through a “stratum of intermixture’’ of 200 fathoms, as in the

* It may be said that this conclusion, though it may be true as regards the swmmer
temperature of this marine area, is “not proven” as regards its winter temperature.
The data furnished, however, by the comparison of the Winter climates of stations
along the Atlantic Sea-bord, with those of Mediterranean Stations in corresponding
Latitudes, indicate that it is as true for Winter as for Summer. (See ‘ Proceedings of
the Royal Geographical Society’ for Jan. 9, 1871.)

190 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on | Dec. 8,

Southern stations, there is a more gradual reduction of about the same
amount (9°) between 500 and 1000 fathoms. Now this resul tis in remark-
able conformity with what might be anticipated on the hypothesis advanced
in the last Report. For if the whole upper stratum of Oceanic water be
slowly moving northwards from the region with which we are now concerned
towards that explored in the Third Cruise of 1869, whilst the lower stratum
is slowly moving southwards beneath this, it might be expected that the
further North the warm stratum advances, the more would it show the
influence of the colder stratum beneath, in the lowering of the Temperature
of the portion that immediately overlies it. And conversely, in proportion as
the cold stratum advances Southwards, we might auticipate that the tem-
perature of ifs upper layer would be gradually raised, so that even when
the ‘‘ stratum of intermixture”’ has been entirely passed through, we should
find the Temperature at corresponding depths somewhat higher than at
stations further north,—which is just what seems actually to be the case*.

82. The data at present in our possession seem to point to the inference that
the relation between the upper warm and the lower cold strata of the Ocean,
on different parts of the surface of the Globe, is such as may be diagram-
matically expressed thus :—

P. E. oes

tae

<—« Warm stratum. 29>
Cold Stratum, 2». <= Cold See

iP. E. Ue

At the Poles (pp, pp) the cold stratum occupies the whole depth, from
the surface to the bottom ; but as we pass towards the Equator we find it
lying further and further down, its surface forming an inclined plane
on which the warm stratum rests. The warm stratum, on the other hand,
has its maximum depth at the Equator, and gradually thins-off towards the
Poles.—This is just what would be expected on the hypothesis of a General
Vertical Circulation (§ 124 et seq.); since in the Polar-Equatorial flow of the
cold stratum its surface would be continually gaining heat by contact
with the warm stratum above, so that its superficial portion would be (so to
speak) progressively transferred to the warm stratum ; whilst, on the other

* Prof. Wyville Thomson, in his Lecture on “ Deep-Sea Climates” (‘ Nature,’
July 28, 1870), has expressed the opinion that the cold stratum in the North Atlantic
is derived rather from the Antarctic than from the Arctic basin. Putting aside the
difficulty of accounting for a constant flow of Antarctic water into the Northern
Hemisphere, without a corresponding owtflow, a strong argument against it may be
drawn from the facts stated above. For if the co/d stratum have a Southern source, we
should expect its own temperature to be lower, and its effects upon the superincumbent
stratum to be more marked, the further sowth it is examined,—the contrary of which

proves to be the case.

1870.] Deep-sea Researches. 19]

hand, in the Equatorial- Polar flow of the warm stratum its lower layer would
be gradually reduced in temperature by moving over with the cold stratum
beneath*. Moreover as its surface would be exposed to a lower and
yet lower Atmospheric temperature the further North it moves, each super-
ficial layer as it is cooled will descend into the colder stratum, of which the
thickness will be progressively augmented at the expense of that which
overlies it.

83. The Third group of Bottom-temperatures, which includes those taken
within the embouchure of the Strait of Gibraltar (Nos. 25-28, p. 220),
presents some peculiarities which are worthy of notice, when taken in con-
nection with the fact already stated as to the constant Temperature of about
55° found in the water of the Mediterranean at depths greater than 100
fathoms. For if we compare the Bottom-temperatures of Stations 25, 28,
29, 30, and 38, with those of Stations 31, 32, 33, and 34, we find in the
former a distinct elevation above the latter. Thus at Stations 25 and
28 the temperature was 53°°5, at 374 and 304 fathoms respectively ;
at Station 29 it was 55° at 227 fathoms; at Station 30 it was 52°7 at
386 fathoms; and at Station 58 it was 54° at 503 fathoms: whilst at
Station 31 it was 50°°5 at 477 fathoms; at Stations 32 and 34 it was 50°
at 651 and 414 fathoms respectively ; and at Station 33 it was 49°-7 at
554 fathoms. This difference seems fairly attributable to the influence of
the undercurrent which is now known to carry out the warmer Mediterra-
nean water to mingle with the colder water of the Atlantic, and which, after
flowing over the ridge between Capes Trafalgar and Spartel (§ 69), may
still for a time maintain its distinctness on the descending slope of the
Atlantic basin. It would probably not be difficult to trace its further
course by a sufficient number of observations on the Temperature and Spe-
cific Gravity of the bottom-water to the west of the Strait ; and it would
be very interesting thus to ascertain how far this undercurrent makes its
way before blending with the general mass of Atlantic water.—If a detailed
examination of the phenomena of the double current should be undertaken
by the Authorities at Gibraltar, this point should not be neglected.

84. Density.—In order to determine the Salinity of the water of the At-
lantic Ocean as a basis for comparison with that of the Mediterranean Sea,
the proportion of Chlorine in 34 samples of the former, taken between Fal-
mouth and Lisbon, was determined by Volumetric analysis. Of these sam-
ples, 12 were of surface-water, 12 of bottom-water from various depths
down to 1095 fathoms, and 12 of intermediate water. The results are
expressed in Grammes per 1000 Cubic Centimetres of water.

* It was long ago shown by Dr. Arnott, in his ‘Hlements of Physics,’ that if two
layers of water originally of different temperatures, separated by a good conductor, move
in contrary directions, they will gradually exchange temperatures; and this principle is
now applied in the construction of Coolers for Breweries and Distilleries, in which a
hot liquid which it is desired to cool is made to impart nearly all its heat to a cold
liquid whose temperature it is desired to raise.

192 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [Dec. 8,

Surface-water. Intermediate water. Bottom-water.

Average...... 19°94 19°85 19°75
Maximum.... 20°19 19°94 19°98
Minimum.... 19°81 19°70 19°46

It appears from these Analyses that there is a slight excess of Salinity
in the suxface-water of the Atlantic, as had been previously observed by
Forchhammer *; the excess, however, being so small as not to neutralize —
the excess of Density which the deeper water derives from its lower Tempe-
rature and from the Pressure of the superincumbent column. Five de-
terminations of the Chlorine contained in samples taken at the same spot,
from the Surface, and from 10, 25, 50, and 100 Fathoms, gave the follow-
ing results :-—

SUTideen Shs ies sa See 20°013
10 fathoms...... 19-909
DO UN AR an oe Ws 19:909
50S Fan 19-909
LOO SS Ae Be eee 19°805

A comparison of these seems to indicate that the excess of density, being
limited to a mere superficial film, is entirely due to evaporation ; and the
reason why this more concentrated film does not sink, as it does in the
Mediterranean (§ 90), is that its excess of Salinity is so small, that even at
the depth of 10 fathoms its effect on Specific Gravity is neutralized by the
greater density arising from reduction of Temperature.—The differ-
ence between the maximum and minimum, which in Surface-water is only
1-52nd part of the whole, and in Intermediate water only 1-83rd part
of the whole, is in Bottom-water 1-38th of the whole; and the minimum
of the whole series, namely, 19°46, presented itself in a specimen of
Bottom-water taken from a depth of 994 fathoms. This proportion might
have been presumed to represent the inferior Salinity of the Polar stream,
from which the Temperature of the sample indicated its derivation, were
it not that another sample from a depth of 1095 fathoms was found to
yield 19°73, or nearly the average proportion, of Chlorine. Two samples,
taken respectively from 700 and 322 fathoms, gave 19°63; and the maxi-
mum of 19:98 occurred in a sample from 717 fathoms. These anomalies are
somewhat perplexing, yet the whole range of variation is really very small.
Similar anomalies presented themselves in the results of Dr. Frankland’s
Analyses of samples of Bottom-water collected in the Cold area (Report
for 1869, p. 489); for whilst the proportion of Chlorine in a sample
(No. 64) taken from a depth of 640 fathoms, at a Temperature of 29°-6, was
19°88, that of the Surface at 49°-7 being 19:96, it was 20°14 in another
sample (No. 54), which, though taken at little more than half the depth
(363 fathoms), was shown by its Temperature to have been brought up

* See his Memoir on the “ Composition of Sea-water” in the Philosophical Trans-
actions for 1865, p. 247.

1870. | Deep-sea Researches. | 193

from the Polar stream, that of the Surface at 52°°5 being 20°17. Pos-
sibly, as suggested by Dr. Forchhammer (/oc. ci¢.), the several parts of the
Polar stream may vary in density, according to the amount of nearly fresh
water which each may have derived from the icebergs that have liquefied
in it.

85. Specific Gravity.—As the determination of Specific Gravity by obser-
vations taken with the Hydrometer on board ship is open to two sources of
error,—that of the instrument, and that of the reading (which, when the
vessel is unsteady, cannot be precise),—we deem it safer to depend upon
the more exact determination of the Specific Gravity of a smaller number
of samples by means of the Balance, and to estimate that of others by the
Chiorine-determinations. In this manner we arrive at a range of from
1:0261, the Specific Gravity of the sample of Bottom-water of minimum
density, to 1:0269, the Specific Gravity of the sample of Surface-water of
maximum density ; the average of all being 1:0265. This agrees very well
with the results obtained by Forchhammer.

TEMPERATURE AND COMPOSITION OF MEDITERRANEAN WATER.

86. Surface-Temperature.—With only two days’ exception, the range of
the daily average Surface-temperature of the Mediterranean, between the
16th August on which we entered it, and the 28th September on which we
quitted it, was between 73° and 79°. The increase at once experienced
as we passed into it from Gibraltar Strait was extremely marked (§ 45);
and this was maintained for the next two days. On the 19th, however,
the average of the day fell from 72°°2 to 66°°9, the average of the Air
being 69°-8; and on the 20th it was 68°°9, the average of the Air being
74°°3. On the first of these days we were crossing from the African
towards the Spanish coast, and experienced very strongly the effect of the
in-current on the movement of our vessel (§ 47); and it can scarcely
be doubted that the low surface-temperature was due to the colder
stratum introduced from the Atlantic. On the following day we were
between Cape de Gat and Cartagena; and were still within the influence
of the cold in-current, which is known to flow past Cape de Gat at
the rate of about a mile per hour. On leaving Cartagena, we
came into a surface-stratum of true Mediterranean water, as indicated
by its temperature of 73°; and the daily average never afterwards fell
below this. The greatest heat was experienced in the neighbourhood of
the Tunisian coast, when for several days the average Surface-temperature
was 78°. The average Temperature of the Air during the greater part of
our Mediterranean Cruise was from 1° to 2° above that of the Sea; but
during our return from Malta towards Gibraltar, between the 20th and 26th
September, the temperature of the Air averaged about 3°°5 delow that. of
the surface of the Sea, the former having fallen, while the latter remained
nearly stationary until we neared the Strait of Gibraltar. As we approached

VOL. XIX. R

194 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [Dec. 8,

it, a progressive reduction was observable, from 74°, which had been the
average of several previous days, to 72°, with a further reduction to 71°
when we entered Gibraltar Harbour. The scorching power of the Sun’s rays
was often very strongly felt ; and we much regretted that we were not provi-
ded with a Thermometer having a range sufficiently high to enable us to esti-
mate the influence of direct solar radiation*, There can be no question that
the effect of this radiation upon the surface must be to produce a rapid. eva-
poration, especially when the air is dry. The difference between the Dry-
and Wet-bulb thermometers averaged about 4°, but rose occasionally to
above 8°; we could not, however, trace any relation between this difference
and the Surface-temperature of the Sea.

87. Temperature of the Upper Stratum.—Finding that the reduction in
Temperature with depth was so extremely rapid as to show that the direct
influence of Solar radiation is limited to a comparatively thin stratum
of surface-water, we took Serial soundings at three Stations, at intervals
near enough to show the rate of diminution. The first of these Stations
(Stat. 40), although the nearest to the Strait, seems to have been out of the
direct influence of its cold in-current, which is shown very strongly in the
second (Stat. 47) ; the third (Stat. 53) may perhaps be taken as representing
most characteristically the thermal condition of the upper stratum of the
water of the Mediterranean during the season of greatest heat :—

I. II. III.
° Fahr. Diff. ° Fahr. Diff, ° Kahr. Diff.
BMTHACE saa eco. 642 F400 69°5 ia
5. fathoms ...... 52 10°5 76°0(6°0
On, 69°3) 59°02. 71:0)
a0 65015 B75 10 615{ 9
ag i 63:0} af elise Ae 60-0} a
40 D5 ee 2-0) oe 0-4 5773 0-6
Bile $s, rte cee 59°74 4. 55°3f 56-74
Ry eg a rare pil to. gagh OO. | eee

Taking No. III., therefore, as the standard of comparison, we ob-
serve that while the Thermometer fell only 1° in the first five fathoms, it
fell 5° in the second five, and no less than 9°°5 between 10 and 20 fathoms,
below which depth the reduction was very slow. In No. I., with a lower
surface-temperature, the reduction in the first ten fathoms was nearly the
same; but it was much less between 10 and 20, so that for depths between
20 and 50 it was between 3° and 4° higher than at corresponding depths
in No, III.; at 100 fathoms, however, the two were brought to an almost
precise accordance by the larger reduction which took place in No. I.
between 50 and 100 fathoms. In No. II., on the other hand, the great

* We learned from Colonel Playfair, the Consul General at Algiers, that whilst he
was at Aden, a Thermometer with a blackened bulb having been laid upon a black
surface, and exposed to the full glare of the Sun, had risen to 215°.

1870.] | Deep-sea Researches. 195

reduction showed itself in the uppermost stratum of 10 fathoms; but
though the further reduction took place at a very slow rate, the tempera-
tures at this Station were decidedly below those at the other two, down to
100 fathoms, at which there was not a difference of 1° among the three.

88. Bottom-Temperature.—The uniformity which showed itself in the
Temperature of the bottom (see Table, p. 221), at all depths below 100
fathoms, was very remarkable. The /owesé bottom-temperature we anywhere
met with was 54°; and this presented itself at a depth of 790 fathoms. The
highest we anywhere met with was 56°5; and this presented itself in three
instances, at depths of 266, 390, and 445 fathoms. But that the trifling
elevation was not in any way dependent upon the smaller depth of these
Soundings, was obvious from two considerations :—first, that our deepest
sounding gave a temperature of 56° on a bottom of 1743 fathoms, whilst
we found 55° at depths of 1456 and 1508 fathoms; and second, that the
slight variations observable among the doffom-temperatures occurred also
- between the temperatures taken at 100 fathoms. In fact, whatever the
temperature was at 100 fathoms, that was the temperature of the whole
mass of water beneath, down to the greatest depth explored. In that part
of the Western basin of the Mediterranean which lies between Gibraltar
and Sardinia, the bottom-temperature ranged between 54° and 55°5, the
average being 54°-9, East of this, in the neighbourhood of Sicily, the
bottom-temperature ranged between 55° and 56%5, the average being
55°°8. It was because we thought it possible that the slight excess of
Bottom-temperature on this area might be due to Volcanic heat beneath,
that we directed our homeward course by way of Etna and Stromboli, for
the purpose of ascertaining if the near neighbourhood of a constantly
active Volcano has any influence in raising the temperature of the bottom.
No such influence, however, was perceptible; the Temperatures obtained
at Stations 61 and 62,—namely 55°-7 at 392 fathoms, and 55°:3 at 730
fathoms,—being rather delow than above the average.

89. The remarkable contrast thus presented to the slow but continuous
reduction of temperature encountered in the successive strata of Oceanic
water in the great Atlantic basin, and to the sudden fall which presents itself
as the Thermometer descends to its lower depths (§ 79), excites enquiry
into the cause of the difference. It is now clear that no amount of surface-
heat has power directly to affect the temperature of sea-water to a greater
depth than 100 fathoms, the elevation of temperature it produces below
30 fathoms being very slight; and it seems also clear that the uniform
temperature of from 54° to 56°°5 encountered below the 100 fathoms’
stratum, represents the permanent temperature of the great mass of water
which occupies the Mediterranean basin. Now this mass is entirely cut off
from the influe of the General Oceanic Circulation, the surface-inflow
through the Strait of Gibraltar having no other effect than slightly to lower
the general temperature at the western extremity of the basin. And the
uniform permanent temperature of the mass of Mediterranean water may

R 2

196 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [Dec. 8,

thus be considered as representing the mean temperature of the Earth in
that region, slightly raised, perhaps, by a downward convection of heat from
the surface in the manner to be presently described (§ 90). With such an
allowance it corresponds closely with the determinations of the mean tempe-
rature of the Crust of the Earth, made by sinking Thermometers into the
eround tosuch a depth as to seclude them from the direct influence of Semmer
heat or Winter cold, but not to bring them within the direct influence of
the Internal Heat of the earth. Thus Quetelet found that a Thermometer
sunk to a depth of 24 feet at Brussels showed an annual average of 53°°4,
the range of variation being only 2°°5; and Bischoff found a Thermometer
sunk to a depth of 36 feet at Bonn give an annual average of 51°, with a
range of only 1°°5. The Temperature of deep Caves gives another set of
data of the like kind, which accord very closely with the foregoing.
Thus we have been informed by Mr. Pengelly that the temperature in the
part of Kent’s Hole at Torquay which is furthest from its entrance varies
but little from 52° throughout the year. ‘There is a cave in the island of ~
Pantellaria, lying between Sicily and the African Coast, which is reputed
to be of “icy coldness;’’ but Lieut. Millard, of H.M.S. ‘ Newport,’ who
has lately been making a careful survey of the Island, informed us that,
although he felt it “very cold”’ on passing into it out of a very hot sun-
shine, its actual temperature, taken by Thermometer, was 54°. And
we have also learned on good authority that this is the temperature of
the bottom of the deepest tanks in which water is stored up in Malta,
provided that these are excavated (as is very commonly the case) be-
neath the houses, or are in any other way secluded from the direct rays of
the sun.

90. Now let it be supposed that the superficial stratum of the water of
the Mediterranean had been cooled down by a severe winter to the uniform
temperature of the depths below; we have to enquire in what manner
it would be affected by the heating-power of the summer sun. ‘This, it is
obvious, can be only exerted directly upon the actual surface; for the~
conducting-power of water is so small that very little downward trans-
mission of heat would take place through its agency. Further, as the
application of heat at the surface will render the superficial layer specifically
lighter, no such convection will take place in the downward direction as
takes place upwards when heat is applied at the bottom. But another
agency comes into play in the case of Sea-water. The rapid evaporation
produced by powerful solar radiation, especially when aided by the hot dry
winds of Africa, occasions such a concentration of the surface-film, that, in
spite of its elevation of temperature, it becomes specifically heavier, and
descends,—to be replaced by a fresh layer. In this manner it will carry
down an excess of heat, which diffuses itself through the subjacent layer,
of course producing the greatest elevation of temperature in the stratum
nearest the surface. ‘The continual repetition of this process through the
hot season will carry the elevation of temperature further and further

1870.] Deep-sea Researches. 197

down; but so soon as the temperature of the Air falls much below that
of the Sea, the surface-layer being cooled will become heavier and sink, and
wil thus carry down cold instead of heat, so as to lower the temperature
of the stratum below. In no instance, however, so far as we can learn, hag
the surface-temperature of the Mediterranean ever been seen so low as 56°,
even in midwinter.

91. That it is by this sinking of the surface-films successively concen-
trated by evaporation that the Solar heat, which acts so powerfully on
the Mediterranean basin during the summer, is transmitted downwards,
appears certain from the fact, of which the particulars will be presently
given, that the Salinity of the water of the Mediterranean is greater below
the surface than a¢ the surface, instead of diminishing as it does in the
Atlantic ($ 84); and we thus see how important an influence is exerted by
that Salinity in diffusing the heat imparted to the surface through the waters
beneath. In the great fresh-water lakes of Switzerland, the deeper water
retains all through the year a temperature but little above 39°, the small
excess being probably derived from the warmth of its bed; for the whole
mass of water down to the bottom must be cooled to this degree in winter
before any ice can form on its surface; and as the heating of the surface
in summer makes all the water affected by it specifically lighter, none
of it will descend and carry heat downwards, as it does in the Mediter-
ranean.

92. Density.—The determination of the actual Salinity of the water of
the Mediterranean basin, alike at the Surface and at various Bottom-depths,
was one of the special objects of our inquiries ; for although various Ana-
lyses had been previously recorded, they had been made upon samples of
water which had been kept in bottles for a more or less considerable period ;
and the depths from which those samples had been collected were not by
any means the greatest known to exist in this basin.—The number of Chlo-
rine-determinations of Surface-water was 25; and their Geographical
range was from the Strait of Gibraltar to the edge of the Eastern basin
(Station 60). A marked difference in density was observable between the
Surface-waters of the Western and of the Eastern portions of this area ; for
whilst those of the latter invariably showed a considerable excess in Salinity
above the maximum of Atlantic water, that excess was so much reduced in
some of the samples taken nearer to the Strait, as almost certainly to show
that the surface-stratum there consists in great degree of Atlantic Water.
Thus at Station 47, in which a like indication was given by the Tempera-
ture of the Surface-water (§ 87), we found the proportion of Chlorine to
be 20°46, or only 0°27 above the maximum we had encountered in Atlantic
water ; and when we crossed to the neighbourhood of the opposite Algerine
Coast (where, however, the density of the Surface-water was probably re-
duced by the entrance of River-water), we found the proportion of Chlo-
rine as low in one case as 19°69, and in another as 19°99. When ap-
proaching the Strait on our return voyage, we took a series of five samples

198 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on : [ Dec. 8,

for the purpose of testing the reality of this difference ; and we found the
proportions of Chlorine to be respectively 20°77, 20°67, 20°56, 20°51, and
20°47. The mean of these five determinations, together with the one pre-
viously taken at Station 47, but excluding the two taken on the coast of
Algiers, is 20°57; and the mean Specifie Gravity was 1:0274. On the
other hand, at the Sicilian end of the basin, where the water was that of
the Mediterranean proper, the mean of ten Chlorine-determinations was
21°05, with a corresponding Specific Gravity of 1:0280. The maximum of
Chlorine was there 21°32, with Specific Gravity 1-0264 ; and the minamum
20°77, with Specific Gravity 1:0277. The combination of these 16 obser-
vations gives a mean of 20°87 for the Chlorine, and 1:0278 for the Specific
Gravity, of the Surface-water of the Mediterranean generally *.

93. The number of Chlorine-determinations of Bottom-water taken in
the proper Mediterranean basin, at depths between 207 and 1700 fathoms,
was 20. They show a general excess of Salinity over the Surface-water,
the mean of the whole being 21°38 (as against 20°87), with a maximum of
21°88 (Sp. Gr. 1:0292) and a minimum of 21:08 (Sp. Gr. 10281). On
grouping them into three Series according to their depth, we arrive at a
curious result :—

Fathoms. Chlorine. Sp. Gr.
200 to 400, Mean of 7 observations...... 21°53 | We02Se
400 to 800, ,, Zi 33 ssc SC 1:0285

1300 to 1700, _ i, 6 5 ene OF 1 0283

94. Thus it appears that the excess of Salinity is greatest in the shallower
water, and that it gradually diminishes with the depth. Thisis also shown
most strikingly by comparing the sample taken from the least depth
(207 fathoms) with that taken from the greatest depth (1703 fathoms) ;
for it was the former that showed the maximum of 21-88, and the latter
that showed the minimum of 21-:08.—Now this fact, though at first unex-
pected (since we had supposed that the heaviest water would gravitate
to the greatest depths), seems not difficult to account for, if we consider
the mode in which the concentration of the surface-film will be likely to
affect the water below. For it can be shown experimentally, by pouring a
strong saline solution tinged with colour upon the top of a weaker colour-
less solution, that the former will in the first instance sink “bodily,” but
will gradually impart its excess of salt to the liquid through which it falls ;
the descent of the coloured stratum becoming slower and slower, and its

* This mean accords closely with that of 20:845 obtained by Prof. Forchhammer from
his examination of samples collected at different times and by different persons from
various parts of the surface of the Mediterranean (Phil. Trans. 1865, p. 252). His
maximum of Chlorine, 21:718, was higher than ours; but this seems to have been an
exceptional case; and the sample may have undergone some concentration in keeping.
On the other hand, his minimum was lower, being only 20:16 ; but this sample, having
been taken in the Strait of Gibraltar, contained a large proportion of Atlantic water.

1870. ] Deep-sea Researches. 199

colour being more and more imparted to the general mass of the liquid.
The proportion of salt will in time be made uniform throughout the whole
column by ‘diffusion.’ Now it is obvious that if each column rests (so to
speak) on its own base, the degree in which the Salinity of the whole mass
is raised by the addition of a more concentrated solution will depend ceéeris
paribus upon its height; and thus where the depth of the Mediterranean
basin is only between 200 and 400 fathoms, we should expect the Specific
Gravity of its water to be more raised by the successive concentration of its
surface-films, than where the depth ranges from 1300 to 1700 fathoms.

95. Since this proves actually to be the case, the further conclusion
appears justifiable—that there is an extremely small amount of movement
in the abyssal waters of the Mediterranean basin. The uniformity of
Temperature throughout the whole of it, and the restriction of seasonal
changes in temperature to its upper stratum, will prevent it from being
subjected to any thing like the vertical circulation which is produced in
the great Oceanic basins by the antagonistic action of Heat and Cold on
the Equatorial and Polar areas (§ 125). And from any horizontal dis-
placement they would seem altogether excluded by the depth at which
they lie; for the action of winds cannot disturb more than that compa-
ratively superficial stratum which is affected by the Gibraltar current.
The infiow of lighter surface-water through the Strait, and the outflow of
denser water from the comparatively shallow stratum of the neighbourhood,
will probably produce no change whatever at depths greater than 500
fathoms. And the same may be said of the supply of fresh water brought
in either by rain or rivers; for this will at once go to make up the loss
produced by surface-evaporation ; and whilst helping to maintain the
purity of the upper stratum inhabited by fishes &c., will do nothing for
the waters of the abyssal depths. If these waters were continually subject
to horizontal displacement, it might be expected either that the heaviest
water would gravitate to the greatest depths, or that the density of the
entire contents of the deeper portion of the basin would be equalized ;
neither of which happens. On the contrary, as just shown, the density
varies with the depth in so marked a degree, as to indicate that the water
in each part of the basin retains its distinctness from the rest through long
- periods of time.

96. Solid Matter in Suspension.—The water of the Mediterranean is di-
stinguished from that of the Atlantic, not only in the larger proportion of
Saline matter which it holds in solution, but also in having diffused through
its whole mass, in a state of suspension, particles of solid matter in an ex-
tremely fine state of division. This statement may seem strange to those
who are familiar, either by personal observation, pictorial representation, or
verbal description, with the (apparently) clear deep blue of the Mediter-
ranean Sea. But the two phenomena will be presently shown not only to
be compatible, but to stand to each other in the relation of cause and
effect.

200 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [ Dec. 8,

- 97, Our attention was drawn to this point, in the first instance, by
finding that the bottom-water brought up by the Water-bottle was nearly
always turbid, and that this turbidity was with difficulty removed by fil-
tration, The bottom-water brought up from sandy or gravelly bottoms
is always clear; and though that which was brought up from the area
covered by the “Atlantic mud”’ was often turbid, it was readily cleared
by passing through filtering-paper, the deposit on which was found to
consist of very minute Globigerine, which had been apparently floating
in the stratum immediately above the Sea-bed. As the clearing of the
Mediterranean water was requisite for our Chlorine-determinations, it was
passed twice or thrice through the filter, and the solid matter left upon
the paper consisted entirely of Inorganic particles of extreme minuteness.
Now it is a fact well known to Chemists and Physicists, that the length of
time required for the deposit of a precipitate increases with the fineness
of the division of its particles, notwithstanding that the material of which
they are composed may be of very high Specific Gravity. Thus it was
shown by Faraday that precipitates of Gold may not subside for a month ;
and Mr. Babbage has calculated that, in the case of lighter substances, a
period of hundreds of years may be required for the gravitation of very
finely divided particles through a considerable mass of fluid.

98. Taking into account, therefore, that the deep waters of the Medi-
terranean are not only cut off from the General Oceanic Circulation, but
that they are almost entirely destitute of vertical circulation amongst
themselves (§ 95), it may be fairly considered that the perceptible turbi-
dity of the bottom-water is due to the imperceptible diffusion of the same
finely divided matter throughout the entire mass of superincumbent water.
And that this is really the case, is shown by two different methods of
proof. We learned from the Engineer of the Peninsular and Oriental
Company’s Steam-ship by which we proceeded to join the ‘ Porcupine’ at
Gibraltar, that the deposit removed from the boilers after working in the
Mediterranean differs from that left by Atlantic water, not only in its
larger proportion of sa/¢, but in having a very finely divided mud diffused
through it, which is, of course, derived from the evaporation of surface-
water. The result of this large-scale experiment harmonizes exactly with
that of Prof. Tyndall’s examination of a small sample of the surface-water
of the Mediterranean by the Electric light; for he found it to be highly
charged with minute particles in suspension, as is also the water of the
Lake of Geneva. And he has further shown that it is in each case to the
presence of these particles that we are to attribute the peculiar intensity
of the blue colour by which both these waters are characterized *.

* See ‘Nature,’ Oct. 18, 1870.—We may take leave to mention that the same idea
of the agency of the suspended particles in intensifying the blue colour of the water
had previously occurred to ourselves, and had been made the subject of conversation
on our voyage home, the probable community of the source of the suspended particles
in the Mediterranean and the Lake of Geneva respectively having especially presented

1870. ] Deep-sea Researches. 201

- 99. But further, when we come to enquire into the source of these sus-
pended particles, the progressive subsidence of which gives rise to the fine
muddy deposit that covers all the deeper parts of the Mediterranean, we
find that (so far, at least, as the Western basin is concerned) they have
been in all probability brought down into it by the Rhone. The upper
part of that river, as is well known, is constantly transporting a vast mass
of sedimentary matter into the Lake of Geneva; and while the deposit of
the coarser particles of the sediment at the upper end of the Lake is causing
a progressive formation of alluvial land, the water which passes off at the
lower end, though apparently clear, is still charged with particles ina
finer state of division. ‘‘ Scarcely,”’ says Sir C. Lyell*, “has theriver passed
out of the Lake of Geneva, before its pure waters are again filled with sand
and sediment by the impetuous Arve, descending from the highest Alps,
and bearing along in its current thé granitic sand and impalpable mud
annually brought down by the glaciers of Mont Blanc. The Rhone after-
wards receives vast contributions of transported matter from the Alps of
Dauphiny and the primary and volcanic mountains of Central France ; and
when at length it enters the Mediterranean, it discolours the blue water
of that sea with a whitish sediment for the distance of between six and
seven miles, throughout which space the current of fresh water is percep-
tible.”—Thus the Western basin of the Mediterranean stands in the same
relation to the lower part of the Rhone and to the tributaries which dis-
charge themselves into it, that the Lake of Geneva does to its upper part.
And a like universal diffusion of fine sedimentary particles through the
Eastern basin is probably effected by the transporting agency of the Nile.
100. The very slow, but constant, subsidence of these minute sedimen-
tary particles, then, is the source ofa large part of the material of that fine
tenacious Mud which, mingled with a larger or smaller proportion of Sand,
partly calcareous and partly siliceous, constitutes the deposit at present in
progress on the deeper parts of the Mediterranean sea-bed. The source of
the Caleareous sand, which is itself in a state of very minute subdivision, is
probably to be found in the abrasion of the Calcareous Tertiaries which
form the shore-line round a large part of the Western basin. This abra-
sion is specially noticeable at Malta, where, for the security of the fortifi-
cations, it has has been found necessary to check it by artificial means.
The singular barrenness of this deposit in regard to Animal life forced itself
upon our attention during the whole of our dredging-operations in the
Mediterranean ($§ 48-52) ; and whilst disappointed as Zoologists in not
meeting with the novelties we hoped to encounter, we venture to hope that

itself to us: and it was with great satisfaction, therefore, that we found our notion so
fully confirmed by Prof. Tyndall’s investigations; whilst it was not a little interesting
to him to find that our independent inquiries had led us to affirm the presence of these
suspended particles through the whole mass of Mediterranean water, and to attach so
much importance to the fact in its Geological and Biological relations.

* Principles of Geology, 10th ed. vol. i. p. 427.

202 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [Dec. 8,

the negative result of our sedulous investigations may have an important
Geological bearing.

101. It will be borne in mind that our previous researches have fully
demonstrated the fact that the Depth of from 600 to 1200 fathoms is not
per se inconsistent with the existence of a varied and abundant Fauna; and
that the reduction which shows itself at from 1200 to 2435 fathoms seems —
to depend as much on depression of Temperature, as on increase of Depth.
Hence it was fairly to be expected that a varied and abundant Fauna—
probably containing a number of Tertiary types supposed to have been ©
long extinct—would have been found between 500 and 1500 fathoms, on a
bottom of which the temperature seems never to fall below 54°. Now
the question as to the cause of the deficiency of Animal Life on this
bottom naturally connects itself with the old Geological difficulty, of which
the inquiries of Prof. Edward Forbes were long supposed to afford a
satisfactory solution ; viz. the existence of vast thicknesses of sedimentary
strata, almost or entirely destitute of Organic Remains. The explanation
which has been accepted for many years,—that these deposits were formed
in Seas too deep to allow of the existence of Animals on their bottom,—
having been now shown to be untenable, the old difficulty recurs; and it
is obvious that if it can be shown that a condition prejudicial to Animal
Life now prevails on the Mediterranean bottom, which also prevailed
when other azoic deposits were formed, a great step will have been gained.
Such a condition is to be found—we are disposed to think—in the turbidity
of the bottom-water. All Marine animals are dependent for the aeration
of their fluids on the contact of water either with their external surface,
or with special (branchial) prolongations of it. Now if this water be
charged with suspended particles of extreme fineness, the deposit of these
particles upon the respiratory surface will interfere with the aerating
process, and will tend to produce asphyxia. This is not a mere hypothesis.
It is well known that Oyster-beds cannot be established in situations to
which fine mud is brought by any fluvial or tidal current. And our
Colleague Mr. Jeffreys, when dredging some years ago in the neighbour-
hood of Spezzia, having on one occasion passed a little out of the Bay, from
a sandy bottom rich in Animal life to a muddy bottom (this mud being
doubtless a part of the Rhone deposit), without any considerable increase
of depth, was forcibly struck by the barrenness of the latter.

102. It will be for Geologists to say how far this explanation can be
applied to the case of the azoic sedimentary deposits of former epochs.
One very notable case of the kind has been communicated to us by Dr.
Duncan, that of the Fleisch, a stratum not less than 6000 feet thick,
extending from Mont Blanc to the Styrian Alps, which must have been
deposited in the condition of extremely fine arenaceous mud, and in which
there is an almost entire absence of Fossils. We are disposed to believe,
also, from the results of such inquiries as we have been able to make, that
the extremely fine Calcareous sandstone of Malta, though reputed to be

1870.] . Deep-sea Researches. 203

rich ia Fossils, will be found to contain these fossils, for the most part,
in its coarser beds; which were probably deposited in shallower waters,
like those which we found rich in Animal life along the shores of the
Mediterranean. ‘The extremely fine stone that is used for carved work,—
so entirely wanting in “ grain” that carvings executed in it look like casts
in Plaster of Paris,—contains, we were assured, few fossils except Sharks’
teeth, which, of course, dropped into it from above. We commend this
enquiry to the attention of Maltese Geologists, as one having an impor-
tant bearing on the solution of a problem of the highest interest.

103. There is another condition, however, which may be not less potent
in restraining within very narrow limits the Animal Life of the deeper parts
of the Mediterranean Basin,—namely, the stagnation produced by the
almost entire absence of Vertical Circulation. In the great Oceanic ba-
sins, if our doctrine (§ 124 e¢ seq.) be correct, every drop of water is in
its turn brought to its surface and exposed to the purifying influence of
prolonged exposure to the air. From this movement, the water of the
Mediterranean. may be said to be virtually excluded; and, as has been
already shown (§ 95), the deeper part of the basin has no Circulation of
its own, either horizontal or vertical, which will have the effect of bring-
ing its water to the surface. It is difficult, im fact, to conceive of any
agency that can disturb the stillness of the abyssal depths of a basin which
is completely shut in by a wall that rises more than 10,000 feet from
its bottom. How far this affects the condition of such depths, in respect
to the diffusion of the Organic matter and the Oxygen required for
the support of Animal life, must be a matter of future inquiry.

GIBRALTAR CURRENT.

104. The term “Strait of Gibraltar” is usually applied to that space
between the coast-lines of Spain and Morocco which is bounded on the
west by Capes Trafalgar and Spartel, and on the east by the two
* Pillars of Hercules,’—namely Europa Point, which forms the southern
extremity of the Rock of Gibraltar, and Jebel Musa or Apes Hill on the
Barbary side. As Admiral Smyth justly remarks*, however, we may cor-
rectly include in the Strait the whole of that funnel-shaped entrance from
the Atlantic, of which the western boundary is formed by a line from Cape
St. Vincent on the north to Cape Cantm on the south, the whole of the
water within this entrance being affected by the surface-draught into the
Mediterranean. It was considered by Major Rennell that there is a general
“set.” of Atlantic water between Lat. 30° and 45° N., and from 100 to
130 leagues off the land, towards the entrance of the Strait, the rate of
movement being as much as from 14 to 17 miles per day. This estimate,
however, is regarded by Admiral Smyth (Joc. cit.) as excessive; although
he thinks that such an indraught may possibly occur during the long pre-

* The Mediterranean, p. 158.

204 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [ Dec. 8,

valence of particular winds. We have been informed by Admiral Onymaney
that, according to his own experience, the zmse¢ is most considerable towards
the African coast, while the oufset occasionally observed (§ 106) is most
decided on the Northern coast ; and this statement derives very remarkable
confirmation from the Thermometric observations already detailed. For
these show that the lower temperature of the zm-current is specially notice-
able near Cape Spartel (§ 73); whilst the higher temperature, which is
traceable westwards along the Spanish and Portuguese coasts as far as Cape
St. Vincent, and there suddenly falls to the ordinary standard of the Atlantic,
seems to be derived from an efflux of the Mediterranean water (§ 75).

105. The length of the narrower portion of the Strait (see Chart II.),
sometimes distinguished as the Gut, is about 35 miles. __Its width, which
is about 22 miles between Capes Trafalgar and Spartel, gradually diminishes
to somewhat more than 9 miles between Tarifa and Alcazar point; and
then increases until it reaches 12 miles between Gibraltar and Ceuta, east-
ward of which the Strait terminates abruptly in the wide basin of the Medi-
terranean. The deepest portion of the Strait is at its eastern extremity ;
its depth between Gibraltar and Ceuta reaching 517 fathoms, and averaging
about 300 (Section c p.). From this the bottom gradually but irregularly
slopes upwards (Section a B) as far as the western extremity of the Gut,
where the shallowest water is to be found. The northern half of the
channel across the section between Capes Spartel and Trafalgar (Section & F)
scarcely anywhere exceeds 50 fathoms; whilst its southern half does not
seem anywhere to reach 200, and may be considered to average 150 fathoms.
On the Atlantic side of this ridge the bottom gradually slopes downwards,
until it reaches, at 40 miles westward, a depth about equal to that which
it has between Gibraltar and Ceuta. This ridge, therefore, constitutes a
kind of marine “ watershed,” separating the Inland basin of the Medi-
terranean from the great Oceanic basin of the Atlantic.

106. Through the central part of this Strait a current almost invariably
sets eastward, or from the Atlantic into the Mediterranean. This current
is most rapid in the narrower part of the Gut, where the znflow usually
has a rate of from two to three miles an hour; this rate sometimes rising
to four miles, or even occasionally (as stated by Gibraltar pilots to Admiral
Smyth) to five; whilst the current is sometimes so reduced in speed as to
be scarcely perceptible, even giving place (though very rarely) to a con-
trary movement or outflow from the Mediterranean towards the Atlantic.
These variations are partly due to Tidal influence, which is here very de-
cided, and which may either concur with or oppose the general current.
When the tide is flowing, its motion 1s westwards, or in opposition to the
current; and at spring-tide this motion may be sufficiently powerful to
check the current, or even to reverse its direction for a short time. When
the tide is ebdzng, on the other hand, its motion is eastwards, or in the
direction of the current ; and it is to the ebb of spring-tides that the occa-
sional augmentation in the rate of the current to 5 miles an hour is probably

1870. ] Deep-sea Researches. 205

attributable. These effects will, of course, be most marked when the tidal
movement is augmented by a strong wind in its own direction *.—The
constant current does not occupy by any means the entire breadth of the
Strait. In its narrowest part the rapid central in-current is said by Admiral
Smyth not to average more than 4 miles in width; and on either side the
stream when moving inwards is usually much less rapid, its rate, indepen-
dent of tide, being about 1 mile per hour in the neighbourhood of Tarifa,
and 2 miles an hour on the coast of Africa. These lateral currents are
much more affected than the central current by the Lunar tide, which
produces a complete periodical reversal of them; the flood at springs run-
ning westwards off Tarifa at the rate of from 2 to 3 miles per hour, whilst
even at neaps it runs westwards at 1 mile per hour. The ebb, on the other
hand, concurs with the general current, and augments both its volume and
its rate. Thus, when the water is falling, the whole stream is running
eastwards ; but when it is rising, the tide on either shore sets westwards.
By taking advantage of this periodical westerly flow in the lateral streams,
it is possible for sailing-vessels to make their way outwards + in opposition
to a continued westerly wind.

107. The rate of the general in-current diminishes immediately that it
discharges itself into the Mediterranean basin, over the surface of which
it seems to spread itself, in virtue of its lower Specific Gravity (§$ 92).
But the influence of its motion is sensibly experienced along the Spanish
Coast as far as Cape de Gat, and along the African Coast even as far as
the Bay of Tunis,—its force and direction, however, being greatly affected
by the prevalent winds. |

108. Various hypotheses have been put forward at different times to ac-
count for this continual influx of Atlantic water into the Mediterranean.
The motion of an undercurrent flowing in the opposite direction was very
early suggested by Dr. Smith{; but he did not attempt to show in what
way motion is given either to the surface inflow or to the deep outflow.
Quite recently the extraordinary hypothesis has been seriously put forward,
that the influx through the Strait may be due to a gradual depression of
the bottom now going on§. The explanation usually received is that first
offered by Dr. Halley||, who attributed it to the excess of evaporation
from the surface of the Mediterranean Sea over the whole amount returned
to its basin either directly by rainfall or by the rivers which discharge
themselves into it; so that the level would be progressively lowered, if not
kept up by an inflow from the Atlantic. The obvious objection to this
explanation is, that as the water which passes off by evaporation leaves
its Salt behind it, and as the water which enters through the Strait is

* Admiralty Sailing Directions, p. 309.

+ See Admiral Smyth’s ‘ Mediterranean,’ p. 176.

¢ Philosophical Transactions, vol. xiv. p. 364.

§ Mr. George Maw in Geological Magazine, December 1870, p. 550.
|| Philosophical Transactions, vol. xvi. p. 866.

206 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [Dec. 8,

charged with the ordinary proportion of salt, there must be a progressive
increase in the density of the water of the Mediterranean until it reaches
the point of saturation. This objection has been met by another hypo-
thesis, viz. that although the surface-water of the Mediterranean shows
very little excess of density, there may be a great increase in the propor-
tion of salt held in solution in the waters of its abyssal depths; and it has
even been surmised that a deposit of salt is taking place on its bottom.

109. This hypothesis seemed to derive support from the analysis made
by Dr. Wollaston in 1828*, of a sample of bottom-water brought up by
Admiral Smyth from a depth of 670 fathoms, at a point about 50 miles
within the Strait; which analysis gave the extraordinary percentage of
17°3 parts of Salt, with a Sp. Gr. of 1°:1288,—the proportion of Salt in
ordinary sea-water being about 3-5 per cent., and its usual Sp. Gr. about
1027. But as Dr. Wollaston’s analyses of two other samples of Mediter-
ranean water, taken respectively from depths of 450 and 400 fathoms, at
distances of 680 and 450 miles eastward of the Strait, showed that their
density but little exceeded that of ordinary sea-water, it was pretty clear
that the first result was anomalous, and that in whatever way it was to be
accounted fory, it did not represent the general condition of the deep
water of the Mediterranean. (See §§ 43, 44.)

110. The inquiries detailed in the previous Section of this Report have
conclusively shown (1) That there is a general excess of Salinity in the
water of the Mediterranean over that of the Atlantic; (2) That this
excess does not pass beyond very narrow limits; (3) That it is least in
surface-water the proportion of salt in which is only about 4°7 per cent.
above that contained in the surface-water of the Atlantic; (4) That
it is greatest in bottom-water the proportion of salt in which may reach
about 9 per cent. above that contained in the bottom-water of the Atlantic,
this last not being more—and apparently somewhat Jess—dense than the
surface-water of the same ocean. Our inquiries were almost entirely
limited to the Western basin, in which bottom-water of the highest density
seemed to prevail at the shallower depths ($93). The single sounding
which was taken in the Eastern basin, at a depth greater than any else-
where reached, gave us a sample of which the excess was 6°7 per cent.

111. From these results it seems a justifiable inference that the evapora-
tion from the water of the Mediterranean basin is in excess of the amount
of fresh water returned into it, occasioning an increase of its density; but
that this increase, notwithstanding the constant influx of salt water from
the Atlantic, is in some way kept in check, probably through an efflux of
the denser water by an undercurrent, as originally suggested by Dr. Smith
in 1673. This is the view adopted by Sir John Herschel (Physical Geo-
graphy, 1861, p. 28); and it has been considered to derive support from

* Philosophical Transactions, 1829, p. 29.
+ It was suggested by Admiral Smyth (‘ Mediterranean,’ p, 131) that a brine spring

might have been struck upon.

1870.] . 3 Deep-sea Researches. 207

accounts that have been recorded of vessels sunk in the narrower part of
the Strait having floated up near Tangier*. But to these accounts no great
importance is assigned by Admiral Smyth, who seems inclined to attribute
the occurrences—if they really took place as narrated—to the action of
the lateral Surface-outflow.

112. The only objection that has been advanced, so far as we are aware,
to the hypothesis of a westerly undercurrent, is based on the existence of
the comparatively shallow ridge which (as already stated) crosses the
western end of the Gut between Capes Trafalgar and Spartel. The exist-
ence of this ridge, in the opinion of Sir Charles Lyell f, ‘“‘ has dispelled the
idea which was once popular that there was a counter-current at a consi-
derable depth in the Straits of Gibraltar, by which the water which flows
in from the Atlantic is restored to that ocean.’?—But the validity of this
objection has been disputed, and we think successfully, by Captain Maury,
who, after citing many cases in which a deep current comes up to near the
surface, concludes as follows :—‘‘ To my mind the proofs derived from rea-
son and analogy are as clear in favour of this undercurrent from the Me-
diterranean, as they were in favour of Leverrier’s planet before it was
seen through the telescope at Berlin’’§.

113. The analogy of the Red Sea and the incurrent through the Strait
of Babelmandeb, which is adduced by Capt. Maury in support of this view,
is a very cogent one. The evaporation from the Red Sea is well known to
be enormous, its annual amount being estimated by Dr. Buist as equal to.
a sheet of water eight feet thick, corresponding in area with the whole ex-
-panse of that sea. Of the whole amount of fresh water thus drawn off,
scarcely any is returned either by rivers or rains. But the level is kept
up by a strong current that continually sets in through the Strait of
Babelmandeb; and as this current brings in salé water, there would be
a continual and very rapid accumulation of salt in the trough of the Red
Sea if the denser water were not carried off by an outward current beneath.
Now since all the observations hitherto made upon the density of the water
of the Red Sea show it to be very little greater than that of the Indian
Ocean ||, there would seem no escape from the conclusion that such a re-
verse undercurrent must really exist.

114, We shall now present, in a concise and connected form, the General
Results of the inquiries we have ourselves made to determine this ques-°
tion; the particulars having been detailed, as they presented themselves, in
the preceding Narrative. These results were of a twofold character. It
was our object, (1) to detect if possible by mechanical means any movement
which may be taking place in the lower stratum of water in opposition to

* Philosophical Transactions, vol. xxxiii. p. 192.

Tt Mediterranean, pp. 154-157.

¢ Principles of Geology, 10th edit. vol. i. p. 563.

§ Physical Geography of the Sea, 1860, pp. 194-196.

|| Transactions of Bombay Geographical Society, vol, ix. p. 39.

208 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [ Dec. 8,

the surface inflow; and (2) to determine, by the Temperature, the Specific
Gravity, and the Composition of samples of water taken up at different
points and from different depths, whether they had been drawn from the
Atlantic or from the Mediterranean basin.—The mechanical method was
entirely devised and carried out, with the practical ability for which he is
eminently distinguished, by our excellent friend Staff-Captain Calver (see
§ 37). The physical and chemical observations, which were made under
our own direction, gave results which harmonize completely with those of
the mechanical, where both could be employed together; and supply a
deficiency which the impossibility of applying the mechanical test on the
uneven bottom of the shallow ridge would otherwise have left, in the proof
of the outfiow of Mediterranean water over it.

115. Our investigations were first made in the mid-stream between
Gibraltar and Ceuta, at nearly the narrowest part of the Strait, where its
depth exceeds 500, fathoms (Chart II. Section c p). The decided retarda-
tion of the boat by the ‘‘ current-drag’’ at 100 fathoms in both sets of experi-
ments (§§ 40, 62) showed that the in-current at that depth has less than half
the velocity of the surface-current. When the “ current-drag”’ was lowered
to 250 fathoms, there was in the First set of experiments simply a further
increase of retardation, the boat being kept almost in a stationary position :
we felt justified, however, in inferring that the strain of the “ current-drag ”’
could not have so nearly neutralized the action not only of the surface-
current, but also of the wind, upon the boat from which it was suspended,
if it had not been itself acted on by a counter-current. And this view
derived very strong confirmation from the evidence afforded by the Tem-
perature, the Specific Gravity, and the Density of the water in the 250
fathoms’ stratum. For, in the first place, the surface-temperature being 66°,
and the temperature at 100 fathoms having fallen to 55°-7, no further reduc-
tion showed itself below that stratum ; the water at 250 fathoms, like the
bottom-water at 517 fathoms, having exactly the same temperature as the
water at 100 fathoms. This, as we have seen, is the uniform rule in the Medi-
terranean, whilst far otherwise in the Atlantic. Further, the Specific Gravity
and the proportion of Salt in the water at 250 fathoms indicated a density
which no Atlantic water possesses, and which was not exceeded in any
sample obtained from the Mediterranean. There could be no question,
‘therefore, that the stratum at 250 fathoms must be Mediterranean water ;
so that, if not absolutely stationary, it must be moving westwards. Now
this westerly movement was distinctly demonstrated in our Second set of
experiments, by the motion of the boat from which the “ current-drag”’
was suspended (§ 62); and since the observations on the Temperature,
Specific Gravity, and Salinity of the water in this stratum, which were
then repeated, gave results almost precisely identical with those made on
the previous occasion, it seems fair to conclude that there was a westerly
current in this stratum in the First, as well as in the Second instance,
though its effect on the current-drag was masked by the stronger antago-

1870. ] Deep-sea Researches. 209

nistic forces acting on the boat.—The same observations apply to the 400
fathoms’ stratum. In the First set of experiments, the boat moved with
the surface-current, but at little more than @ quarter its rate; and this
retardation, taken in connection with the distinct Physical and Chemical
indications that the 400 fathoms’ stratum was Mediterranean and not
Atlantic water, might fairly be taken as evidence that the force acting on
the “ current-drag”’ was antagonistic in its direction to the surface-forces
acting on the boat, though less powerful than in the 250 fathoms’ stratum.
This inference also was justified by the results of the Second set of experi-
ments (§ 62), which showed us the boat carried westwards, though at a
less rate than when the “ drag’’ hung in the 250 fathoms’ stratum.—lIt was
not a little remarkable to find in both sets of observations, that the water
of this Jower stratum is of Jess density than that which overlies it at 250
fathoms, though still unmistakably Mediterranean ; and it may hence be
pretty certainly inferred that the denser middle stratum is drawn by cur-
rent-action from some intermediate part of the Mediterranean basin at
which the maximum density prevails (§ 93), and that it is flowing with a
gradual upward inclination, so as at last to pass over the ridge at the op-
posite extremity of the Strait. On no other hypothesis does it seem pos-
sible to explain the persistence of this condition,—supposing it to be uni-
form, as the close conformity of observations made after an interval of six
weeks would indicate that it is.

116. Although we should have been very glad to repeat our experiments
at some intermediate Section, yet, as our time did not allow of our carrying
them out in more than one other locality, we considered it desirable to
proceed at once to the western extremity of the Strait, where its breadth
greatly increases, whilst its depth is yet more than proportionally reduced.
As already stated ($ 66), the bottom is here characterized by great in-
equalities; channels of from 150 to 190 fathoms’ depth existing in the
immediate neighbourhood of shallows of not less than 50 fathoms (see
Section EF). In accordance with the greater breadth of this part of the
Strait, the easterly surface-current flows at a much lower speed than in
its narrower channel; its rate being reduced from nearly 3 miles to little
more than 13 mile per hour. The use of the “current-drag” at 100
fathoms from the surface, in a part of the channel of which the depth was
147 fathoms, did not indicate any reduction in this rate; but a decided
reduction was shown when the ‘‘drag”’ was lowered to 150 fathoms in a
part of the channel of which the depth approached 200 fathoms (§ 67).
As Capt. Calver deemed it inexpedient to lower the ‘“current-drag”’ to a
greater depth, since it would have been certain to foul against the rocky
bottom, we were unable to ascertain by Mechanical means that the stratum
of water immediately overlying that bottom has an outward movement ;
but whilst the existence of such an outflow may be regarded as a necessary
inference from the existence of a powerful outward undercurrent at the
opposite extremity of the Strait, valid evidence of it was afforded by the

VOL. XIX. s

210 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [ Dee. 8, ©

fact that both the Temperature and the Density of the bottom-water
brought up at two stations (Nos. 65 and 67), from 198 and 188 fathoms
respectively, unmistakably indicated its derivation from the Mediterranean
basin. Although its density corresponded rather with that of the 400
fathoms’ stratum than with that of the 250 fathoms’ stratum at the other
end of the Strait, yet it may be very well conceived to be the water of the
250 fathoms’ stratum reduced in density during its outward flow through
the Strait by intermixture with the less dense water of the in-current.

117. It nowno longer then admits of doubt that the water of the deeper
part of the Mediterranean basin, which has undergone concentration by
evaporation, is continually flowing outwards into the Atlantic, notwith-
standing that in doing so it has to be brought nearer the surface, so as to
pass over the ridge; and that the increase of density in the Mediter-
ranean water, which would otherwise go on without check so long as the
loss by evaporation is in excess of the fresh water returned into the basin,
is thus kept within a very narrow limit.

118. The essential phenomena of the Gibraltar Current having been
thus determined, we have to consider how they are to be accounted for ;
that is to say, to inquire (1) what is the power which gives motion to
the enormous body of water continually flowing from the Atlantic into
the Mediterranean; (2) what it is which not only gives motion to the
undercurrent flowing from the Mediterranean to the Atlantic, but draws.
up the heavier water from the depths of the former to the comparative
shallow of its limiting ridge; and (3)in what way the power is generated
in each case.

119. These questions have been answered—as we believe correctly-—by
Captain Maury*, on the hypothetical assumption of the existence of an
undercurrent, which has now been verified. He shows that in each case
Gravity is the impelling power; and that in both cases this power ori-
ginates from a common source—the excess of evaporation beyond the
return of fresh water by rain and rivers, which produces at the same time
a reduction of the level, and an increase in the density, of the water
within the Mediterranean basin; the former drawing in surface-water by
gravitation from the higher level outside, whilst the latter forces out deeper
water by the excess of pressure of the superincumbent column. As the
vertical circulation thus occasioned has not yet, so far as we are aware, been
formularized under First Principles, and as these principles have a much
more extended application than Capt. Maury himself seems to have sup-
posed, we shall now present them in a systematic form.

120. The following appear to be self-evident propositions :—

I. That wherever there is a difference of Jevel between two bodies of Water
in free communication with each other, there will be a tendency towards
the equalization of their levels by a surface-fow from the height towards
the lower.

Physical Geography of the Sea, 1860, pp. 194-196.

1870. ] Deep-sea Researches. 211

If. That so long as the difference of level is maintained, so long will

this flow continue ; and thus any agency which permanently keeps the level
of one body of water below that of the other (unless it directly antagonize
the downward pressure of the higher water*), will maintain a permanent
surface-flow from the higher towards the lower. This constant tendency
to equalization will keep the actual difference of level within very narrow
limits.
_ IIE. That wherever there is a want of equilibrium arising from difference
of density between two columns of water in communication with each other,
there will be a tendency towards the restoration of equilibrium by a flow
from the lowest stratum of the denser column towards that of the lighter,
in virtue of the excess of pressure to which the former is subjected.

IV. That so long as the like difference of density is maintained, so
long will this flow continue ; and thus any agency which permanently dis-
turbs the equilibrium in the same sense, either by increasing the density
of one column, or by diminishing that of the other, will keep up a perma-
nent flow from the lower stratum of the denser towards that of the less
dense.—This constant tendency to restoration of equilibrium will keep the
actual difference of density within definite limits.

V. That if there be at the same time a difference of level and an
excess of density on the side of the shorter column, there will be a ten-
dency to the restoration of the level by a surface-flow from the higher to
the lower, and a tendency to the restoration of the equilibrium by an under-
flow in the opposite direction from the heavier to the lighter column.

VI. That so long as the difference of level and the difference of
density are maintained, in the same sense, so long will each flow continue ;
and thus a vertical circulation will be kept up by any continuous agency
which alters at the same time both the level and the density of the two
bodies of water,—provided that the excess of density is on the side of the
lower column. |

VII. That the rate of each flow, where it ig not confined within defi-
nite limits, will depend simply upon the amount of disturbance, in the one
case of Jevel, and in the other of density; and when this disturbance is
small, it may be so slow as to be almost imperceptible, though not less
real and effective. But if the communication between the two bodies of
water take place through a long narrow channel, the rate of movement will
increase so as to produce a decided current in each direction; since the

*Thus it has been shown by Archdeacon Pratt, that in consequence of the local
attraction produced by the high land of Asia, with nothing but Ocean to the southward,
the sea-level at the mouth of the Indus is no less than 515 feet above that at Cape
Comorin (Philosophical Transactions, 1859, p. 795). So, again, if Barometric pres-
sure be Jower over any Oceanic area than on other parts of the surface, there will be an
elevation of the water-level in that area, equilibrium being reached when the excess of
Water-pressure becomes equal to the desiciency of Air-pressure. (See Mr. T. G. Brent
in Philos. Transact. 1867, p. 5.)

s 2

212 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [Dee. 8,

moving force will then act as a constantly accelerating one, until any further
increase in rate is prevented by the opposing influence of friction, &c.

121. Now such an agency as that which is required by Principles VI.
and VII. to maintain a double current in a narrow Strait actually exists
in the cases of the Mediterranean and the Red Sea. It must be borne in
mind in considering these, that whilst their basins are limited, the Ocean-
basins at the other end of their respective Straits are practically unlimited ;
so that the levels and densities of the latter may be regarded as constant.
Now as the excess of evaporation in the Mediterranean basin at the same time
lowers the level and increases the density of the water which remains, the
reduction of the level gives rise to a continual surface-inflow. But, on the
other hand, the restoration of the level by an inflow of salt water, the den-
sity of the contents of the Mediterranean basin being already in excess,
occasions a constant want of equilibrium between the columns of water at
the two extremities of the Strait; and as the lighter water of the Atlantic
cannot balance the heavier water of the Mediterranean, a portion of the
latter is forced outwards as an undercurrent,—thus again producing a de-
pression of the level, to be again restored by a surface-inflow from the At-
lantic.—Thus the original moving force of both currents is the heat of the
Sun.

122. The case may perhaps be made still plainer, by considering the effect
of changes in its conditions. Ifthe whole amount lost by the evaporation
from the surface of the Mediterranean were replaced by the fresh water of
rain and rivers, there would be neither lowering of its surface nor increase
of its density; and there would be neither influx nor efflux through the
Strait of Gibraltar. If, again, with the present excess of evaporation, the
Atlantic were to supply fresh water instead of salt, the influx through the
Strait of Gibraltar would be only that required to maintain the level, and
thus to supply the loss by excess of evaporation ; and as the columns at the
two extremities of the Strait would remain in constant equilibrium, there
would be no efflux. But as the water which flows in from the At-
lantic is salt instead of fresh, and is itself rendered still more dense by con-
centration in the Mediterranean, the constantly renewed excess in the
weight of the Mediterranean column can only relieve itself by as continual
an efflux: this efflux, by lowering the surface-level, in its turn occasions
an indraught to maintain it; and thus the in-current has to replace not
only the fresh water lost by excess of evaporation, but also the denser water
forced out by its excess of weight. These two agencies, like the pertur-
bations of the Planets, are so balanced against one another, as to maintain
a constant mean. If the evaporation were to increase, more Atlantic water
would flow in; but the increase of density in the Mediterranean water
would cause more of it to flow out, which again would occasion a larger
indraught of the less dense water of the Atlantic. And thus the excess
of density would be kept down to a very moderate amount,—as is actually
found to be the case in the Red Sea, notwithstanding that the enormous

1870.] Deep-sea Researches. 213

loss by evaporation from its surface is scarcely at all replaced by fresh water
either from rain or rivers.

123. Now if it can be shown that a similar vertical circulation is main-
tained in the opposite direction, when the conditions of the case are altogether
reversed, the explanation above given may, it is submitted, be regarded
as having a valid title to acceptance. Such a converse case is presented
by the Baltic, an inland basin which communicates with the German Ocean
by three channels—the Sound, the Great Belt, and the Little Belt—ot
which the Sound is the principal. The amount of fresh water discharged
into the Baltic is largely in excess of the quantity lost from its surface by
evaporation ; and thus its Jevel would be continually raised, if it were not
kept down by a constant surface-current, which passes outwards through
the channels just mentioned. But the influx of fresh water reduces the
density of the Baltic water; and as the water which the outward current
is continually carrying off contains a large quantity of salt, there would be
a progressive reduction of that density, so that the basin would at last come
to be filled with fresh water, if it were not for a deeper inflow. Such an
inflow of denser water might be predicted on Principle VI. as a Physical
necessity, arising from the constant want of equilibrium between the lighter
column at the Baltic end of the Sound and the heavier column at its out-
let in the German Ocean; and that such an undercurrent into the Baltic
has an actual existence, was proved two hundred years ago by an experiment
of the same kind as that by which we have recently proved the existence
of an undercurrent out of the Mediterranean. This experiment is cited by
Dr. Smith (Joc. cit.) in his discussion of the Gibraltar Current, as supply-
ing an analogical argument for his hypothesis of the existence of an under-
current in the Strait of Gibraltar ; but he does not make any attempt to
assign a Physical cause for the movement in either case*.—The condition of
the Euxine is precisely parallel to that of the Baltic ; and a surface-current
is well known to be constantly flowing outwards through the Bosphorus
and the Dardanelles, carrying with it (as in the case of the Baltic) a large
quantity of salt. Now as the enormous volume of fresh water discharged
into the Euxine by the Danube, the Dnieper, and the Don would in time
wash the whole of the salt out of its basin, it is obvious that its density can
only be maintained at its constant amount (about two-fifths that of ordinary
sea-water) by a continual inflow of denser water from the Aigean,—the
existence of which inflow, therefore, may be predicted on the double ground
of & priori and & posteriori necessity.

GENERAL OCEANIC CIRCULATION.

124, The difference as to Level and Density between two bodies of sea-
water, which produces the vertical circulation in the Strait of Gibraltar

* Prof. Forchhammer fully confirms Dr. Smith’s statement; and further shows that
the water which thus returns to the Baltic has the density of Sound water, the surfaces
current being formed of the much lighter Baltic water.

ee ee er ae |
ae |

214 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [Dec. 8

and the Baltic Sound, may be brought about otherwise than by the
excess of evaporation which maintains it in the one case, or by the
continual dilution with fresh water which maintains it in the other.
It may be easily shown that a constant and decided Difference of Tem-
perature must have exactly the same effect. Let the Mediterranean
basin be supposed to be filled with water of the same density as that of
the Atlantic, and up to the same level; and to be then cooled down below
the freezing-point of fresh water by the withdrawal of Solar heat, whilst
the surface of the Atlantic continues to be heated, as at present, by the
almost tropical sunshine of the Gibraltar summer. The cooling of the
Mediterranean column, reducing its bulk without any diminution of weight,
would at the same time lower its level and increase its density. An in-
draught of Atlantic water must take place through the Strait to restore that
level ; but this indraught would augment the weight of the column, giving
it an excess above that of the column at the other end of the Strait; and
to restore the equilibrium a portion of its deeper water must be forced out
as an undercurrent towards the Atlantic, thus again reducing the surface-
level of the Mediterranean. Now so long as the warm Atlantic water
which comes in to maintain that level is in its turn subjected to the same
cooling, with consequent lowering of level and increase of density, so long
would the vertical pressures of the two columns, which would be speedily
restored to equilibrium if both basins were subjected to the same heat or
the same cold, remain in a constant state of inequality; and so long,
therefore, on Principles V. & VI. (§ 120), must this vertical circulation
continue.

125. Now the case thus put hypothetically has a real existence. Jor the
Mediterranean cooled down by the withdrawal of Solar heat, let us sub- |
stitute the Polar Basin; and for the Atlantic, the Equatorial Ocean. ‘The
antagonistic conditions of Temperature being constantly sustained, a con-
stant interchange between Polar and Equatorial waters, through the seas
of the Temperate Zone, must be the result. The reduction in the tem-
perature of the Polar column must diminish its height whilst augmenting
its density; and thus a flow of the upper stratum of Equatorial water
must take place towards the Poles, to maintain the level thus lowered.
But when the column has been thus restored to an equality of height, it
will possess such an excess of weight that its downward pressure must
force out a portion of its deeper water; and thus an underflow of ice-cold
water will be occasioned from the Polar towards the Equatorial areas.

126. The agency of Polar Cold will be exerted, not merely in reducing
the bulk of the water exposed to it, and thereby at the same time lowering
its level and increasing its density, but also in imparting a downward
movement to each new surface-stratum as its temperature is reduced,
whereby a continual indraught’will be occasioned from the warmer surface-
stratum around. For the water thus newly brought under the same cool-
ing influence will descend in its turn; and thus, as the lowest stratum will

1870.] Deep-sea Researches. 215

be continually flowing off, a constant motion from above downwards will
continue to take place in the entire column, so long as a fresh stratum is
continually being exposed to the influence of surface-cold.

127. On the other hand, the agency of Equatorial Heat, though directly
operating on only a thin film of surface-water, will gradually pump-up (so
to speak) the Polar water which has reached its area by creeping along
the deepest parts of the intermediate Oceanic basins. For since, as already
shown, an indraught of the upper stratum surrounding the Polar basin must
be continually going on, the place of the water thus removed must be sup-
plied by water drawn from a still greater distance ; and thus the movement
will be propagated backwards, until it affects the upper stratum of the
Equatorial area, itself, which will flow off Pole-wards, bearing with it a
large measure of Heat. The cold and dense Polar water, as it flows in at
the bottom of the Equatorial column, will not directly take the place of
that which has been draughted off from the surface; but this place will
be filled by the rising of the whole superincumbent column, which, being
warmer, is also lighter than the cold stratum beneath. Every new arrival
from the Poles will take its place below that which precedes it, since its
temperature will have been less affected by contact with the warmer water
above it. In this way an ascending movement will be imparted to the
whole Equatorial column, and in due course every portion of it will
come under the influence of the surface-heat of the Sun. This heat will
of course raise the level of the Equatorial column, without augmenting its
absolute weight; and will thus add to the tendency of its surface-stratum
to flow towards the lowered level of the Polar area. But as the super-
heating extends but a short way down, and as the temperature of the
water beneath, down to the “stratum of intermixture”’ (§ 80), is very mo-
derate, whilst the water below that stratum is almost as cold as that of
the Polar basin, it is evidently in the latter that the force which maintains
this vertical circulation chiefly originates.

128. Here, then, we have a vera causa for a General Oceanic Circulation,
which, being sustained only by the unequal distribution of Solar Heat,
will be entirely independent of any peculiar distribution of Land and
Water, provided always that this does not prevent the free communication
between the Polar and Equatorial Oceanic areas, at their depths as well as
at their surface. That this agency has been so little recognized by
Physical Geographers, we can only attribute to the prevalence of the
erroneous idea of the uniform deep-water temperature of 39°, of which
the Temperature-observations made in our Expeditions of 1868 and
1869 have shown the fallacy. Until it is clearly apprehended that Sea-
water becomes more and more dense as its temperature is reduced, and that
it consequently continues to sink until it freezes, the immense motor
power of Polar Cold cannot be apprehended ; but when once this hag
been clearly recognized, it is seen that the application of cold at the
surface is, in the case of Sea-water, precisely equivalent as a moving force

216 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [Dec. 8,

to the application of heat at the bottom, the motor power of which is
universally admitted,—being practically utilized in keeping up the circula-
tion through the hot-water Warming-Apparatus now in general use *. The
movement thus maintained would not, on the hypothesis, be a rapid one,
but a gradual creeping flow ; since the absence of limit would prevent the
power which sustains it from acting as an accelerating force, as it would
do if the Equatorial and Polar areas were connected only by a narrow
channel, like the Atlantic Ocean and the Mediterranean Sea (§ 120,
Princ. VITI.).

129. That the Vertical Circulation here advocated on @ priori grounds
actually takes place in any mass of Salt water of which one part is exposed
to surface-Cold and another to surface-Heat, is capable of ready experi-
mental proof :——Let a long narrow trough with glass sides be filled with
salt water; and let heat be applied at one end (the Equatorial) by means
of a thick bar of metal laid along the surface, with a prolongation carried
over the end of the trough into the flame of a spirit-lamp ; whilst cold is
applied at the other (the Polar) by means of a freezing-mixture contained
in a metallic box made to lie upon the surface, or (more simply) by means
of a piece of ice wedged in between the sides of the trough. A circulation
will immediately commence in the direction indicated by the theory; as
may be readily shown by introducing some 6/ue colouring liquid at the
Polar surface, and some red liquid at the Equatorial surface. The blue
liquid, as it is cooled, at once descends to the bottom, then travels
slowly along it until it reaches the Equatorial end of the trough, then
gradually rises towards the heated bar, and thence creeps along the surface
back to the Polar end; the red liquid first creeps along the surface
towards the Polar end, and then travels through exactly the same course
as the blue had previously done +.

130. That such a Vertical Circulation really takes place in Oceanic Water,
and that its influence in moderating the excessive Cold of the Polar Areas
and the excessive Heat of the Equatorial region is far more important than
that of any surface-currents, seems to us a legitimate deduction from the
facts stated in the Report of the ‘ Porcupine’ Expedition for 1869. For,
on the one hand, it was shown ($§ 116-118) that there is a general diffusion
of an almost glacial temperature on the bottom of the deep Ocean-basins,

* The only scientific writer who has even approached what appears to us the truth
on this point is Captain Maury, who has put forward the doctrine of a general inter-
change of water between the Equator and the Poles, resulting from a difference of
Specific Gravity caused inter alia by difference of Temperature. But, as Mr. Croll .
remarks, ‘although Capt. Maury has expounded his views on the cause of Ocean-
currents at great length in the various editions of his work, yet it is somewhat difficult
to discover what they really are. This arises from the generally confused and sometimes
contradictory nature of his hydrodynamical conceptions.’ See Mr. Croll’s Paper “ On
the Physical Cause of Ocean-currents ” in the Philosophical Magazine for October, 1870.

t This experiment has been exhibited, by the kindness of Prof, Odling, at the Royal
Institution and at the Royal Geographical Society.

1870.] Deep-sea Researches. 917

which, at depths exceeding 1000 fathoms, are occupied by Polar water, more
or, less diluted by admixture according to the Jength of the course it has
had to travel ; whilst between this stratum and that other stratum of warmer
water which (on the hypothesis) is slowly moving Pole-wards, there is a
‘‘stratum of intermixture,” in which there is such a rapid change of Tem-
perature as might be expected from the relation of the upper and lower
masses of water. This “stratum of intermixture’’ showed itself in a
most marked manner in the Atlantic Temperature-observations of the
present Expedition (§ 80); the descent of the Thermometer, which had
been very slow with increase of depth between 100 and 800 fathoms,
becoming suddenly augmented in rate; so that between 800 and 1000
fathoms it fell nine degrees, namely from 49°°3 to 40°°3.

131. On the other hand, it was shown in the previous Report (§§ 119-
121) that there is evidence of the slow Pole-ward movement of a great upper
stratum of Oceanic Water, carrying with it a warm temperature ; which
movement cannot be attributed to any such local influences as those which
produce the Gulf-stream or any other currents put in motion by surface-
action. Of such a movement, it was contended, we have a marked example
in that north-easterly flow which conveys the warmth of Southern latitudes
to the West of Ireland and Scotland, the Orkney, Shetland, and Faroe
islands, Iceland, Spitzbergen, and the Polar basin generally. This flow,
of whose existence conclusive evidence is derived from observations of the
Temperature of these regions, is commonly regarded as a prolongation of
the Gulf-stream ; and this view is maintained not only by Dr. Petermann*,
who has recently collected and digested these observations with the
greatest care, but also by Prof. Wyville Thomson ft, as well as by Mr.
Croll {. Having elsewhere fully stated our objections to this doctrine, and
discussed the validity of the arguments adduced in support of it $, we
shall here only record the conclusions which a careful examination of the
present state of our knowledge of the subject has led us to form :—

I. That there is no evidence, either from the Surface-temperature
of the Sea or from the temperature of sea-bord Stations along the
western coast of Southern Europe, that the Climate of that region is
ameliorated by a flow of Ocean-water having a temperature higher than
that of the Latitude,—the surface-temperature of the Mediterranean Sea,
which is virtually excluded from all Oceanic Circulation, being higher than
that of the eastern margin of the Atlantic in corresponding latitudes, and
the Climate of sea-bord Stations on the Mediterranean being warmer than
that of Stations corresponding to them in Latitude on the Atlantic Coast ;
and this not merely in summer, but also in winter. This Oceanic
region may therefore be designated the neutral area.

* Geographische Mittheilungen, 1870, p. 201.

+ Lecture “On Deep-sea Climates,” in Nature, July 28, 1870.

{ Memoir “ On the Physical Cause of Ocean-Currents,” in Phil. Mag. Oct. 1870.
§ Proceedings of the Royal Geographical Society, for Jan. 9, 1871.

218 Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on [Dee. 8,

II, That the evidence of Climatic amelioration increases in propor-
tion as we pass Northwards from the neutral area, becoming very decided
at the Orkney, Shetland, and Faroe islands ; but that, as was shown by
the ‘ Porcupine’ Temperature-soundings of 1869, the flow of warm water
which produces this amelioration extends to a depth of at least 700
fathoms.

IIT. That this deep stratum of Warm water can be shown, by the corre-
spondence in the rate of its Diminution of Temperature with depth, to be de-
rived from the neutral area to the south-west ; where, as is shown by the
‘ Porcupine’ temperature-soundings of 1870, it is separated by a distinct
‘stratum of intermixture’’ from the deeper stratum that carries Polar
waters towards the Equator.

IV. That the slow north-easterly movement of such a mass of water
cannot, on any known Hydrodynamical principles, be attributed to pro-
pulsive power derived from the Gulf-stream; the last distinctly traced
edge of which is reduced to a stratum certainly not exceeding 50 fathoms
in depth, and not improbably less. +

VY. That, on the other hand, this slow Pole-ward movement of the upper
warm layer of the North Atlantic, down to the “stratum of intermixture,”
is exactly what might be expected to take place as the complement of the
flow of glacial water from the Polar to the Equatorial area, the two
movements constituting a General vertical Oceanic Circulation.

VI. That there is a strong probability that the quantity of Water dis-
charged by the Gulf-stream has been greatly over-estimated, in consequence
of the rate of the surface-current having been assumed as the rate of
movement through the whole sectional area, which is contrary to all
analogy ; whilst there is also a strong probability that there is a reverse
undercurrent of cold water through the Narrows, derived from the Polar
current that is distinetly traceable nearly to its mouth. The upper stratum
of this southerly current comes to the surface between the Gulf-stream —
and the coast of the United States; whilst its deeper and colder stratum
underlies the Gulf-stream itself *.

VII. That there is a strong probability that the quantity of Heat
carried off by the water of the Gulf-stream has been greatly over-estimated ;
the Temperature-soundings taken during the Cruise of the ‘ Porcupine’ in
the Mediterranean having shown that the very high temperature of the
surface extends but a little way down, whilst the Temperature-observa-
tions in the Atlantic show that the descent into a cold stratum beneath

* That there is a slow southerly movement of Arctic water beneath the Gulf-stream
is indicated by the fact that icebergs have been seen moving southwards in direct op-
position to its surface-flow, their deeply immersed portion presenting a larger surface
to the lower stratum than their upper part does to the more superficial layer,—as in
the case of our “current-drag.” And similar evidence is afforded by the southward
drift of the buoy which was attached to the Atlantic Cable of 1865, but which broke
away from it, apparently carrying with it a great length of the wire rope by which it
had been attached.

.1870.] .» Deep-sea Researches. 219

may be very rapid. Uence the average of 65° assumed by Mr. Croll on
the basis of observations made at considerable intervals of depth is alto-
gether unreliable.

VIII. That the most recent and trustworthy observations indicate
that the edge of the Gulf-stream to the north-east of the Banks of
Newfoundland, is so thinned out and broken up by interdigitation with
Polar currents, that its existence as a continuous current beyond that
region cannot be proved by observations, either of a or Move-
ment.
IX. That the Gulf-stream and other local currents put in motion
by the Trade-winds or other influences acting on the surface only, will
have as their complement in a horizontal circulation return surface-
currents; and that the horizontal circulation of which the Atlantic Equatorial
Current and the Gulf-stream constitute the first part, is completed—so far
as the Northern Hemisphere is concerned—partly by the direct return of
one large section of the Gulf-stream into the Equatorial Current, and,
as to the other section, by the superficial Polar currents, which make
their way southwards, the principal of them even reaching the commence-
ment of the Gulf-stream.

132. In conclusion it may be added that the doctrine of a General
Vertical Oceanic Circulation is in remarkable accordance with the fact now
placed beyond doubt by the concurrent evidence of a great number of
observations, that whilst the Density of Oceanic water, which is lowest in
the Polar area, progressively increases as we approach the Tropics, it again
shows a decided reduction in the Intertropical area. It has been thought
that an explanation of this fact is to be found in the large amount of rain-
fall, and of inflow of fresh water from great rivers, in the Intertropical
region; but it is to be remembered that the surface-evaporation also is
there the most excessive ; so that some more satisfactory account of the
fact seems requisite. Such an explanation is afforded by the doctrine here
advocated, the Polar water which flows towards the Equator along the
bottom of the ocean-basins being there (so to speak ) pumped up and brought
to the surface *. And it is nota little confirmatory of the views advanced in
this Report, that in a recent elaborate discussion of the facts relating to
the Comparative Density of Oceanic Water on different parts of the Earth’s

surface, the doctrine of a General: Vertical Circulation is advocated as

affording the only feasible rationale of them +.

* That water of a ower should thus underlie water of a higher degree of Salinity,
in travelling from the Pole to the Equator, is not difficult toaccount for, when the rela-
tive Temperatures of the two strata are borne in mind.

tT “ Densité Salure et Courants de Océan Atlantique,” par Lieut. B. Savy, Annales
Hydrographiques, 1868, p. 620.

220 “Messrs. Carpenter and Jeffreys on = — [Dee 8,
First Cruise oF THE ‘ Porcupine’ (Chart I.).
: Depth Surface Bottom
Station North West .
No. Latitude. | Longitude. Fathoms. Temp ans Ppigberaiaite,
me) AB” Be 1 015 567 fo ae.
2. 48 37 10.9 305 61°5 48°5
3. 48 31 10 3 690 sakes ae
4. 48 32 9 59 ree 61:5 45°3
5. 48 29 9 45 100 62°3 51:5
6. 48 26 9 44 308 62-0 50:3
a 48 18 ars le 93 61-0 51:3
8. 48 138 oo Th 257 60:7 50:0
9. 48 6 9218 539 64:0 - 48:0
10. 42 44 9 23 81 60°5 53'D
Hs 42 32 9 24 332 60°5 51°5
12. 42 20 Dy 128 61°5 52°3
13. 40 16 9 37 220 64:5 52:0
14, 40 6 9 44 469 65°3 d1°5
15. 49 2 9 49 722 67:5 49-7
16. 39 55 9 56 994 69°5 40:3
B/G 39 42 9 43 1095 68-0 39°7
NGA 90) 9 9 39 740 67°5 49°3
18. 39 29 9 44 1065 65:0 39°7
19, 39 27 9, 2309 248 64:7 BLT
21. 38 19 9 30 620 67:3 50°5
22, 38 15 9 33 718 66°3 52:0
23. a4. 20 9 30 802 66°5 49:3
24. 37. «19 9 13 292 67:5 52:7
20. BP «Al voi 374 69-7 53'5
26. 36 44 8.258 364 (Ase 52°7
27. 36 37 7 383 322 73°0 51:3
28, 36 29 f oh 304 71:5 53°3
29. 36 20 6 47 227 73°3 550
30. 36 15 6 62 386 73°0 52-7
31. 35 56 T° 477 71:3 50°5
32. 35 41 FOS 651 71:5 50:0
33. 35 «3d 6 54 bo4 72:0 49-7
34. 35 44 6 53 414 ray 50:0
30. 35 39 6 38 335 73°5 51°5
36. 35 39 6 26 128 75:0 55°0
37. 35 650 6 0 190 72:0 53:7
38. 35 «58 5 26 503 117 54:0

;
;
?

Chart I.

GULF or LYON

Sie _ oNAPLES
oO p o
to”
| payor NAFY™ @

B fe)
5° ; 15°
ee Engraved by Malby & Sons.

D? Grpenter

CRUISE

OF THE

PORCU PINK
1870.

MADRIDo

4 sa s = =e = c=

A iN c
le AS ee

GULF or LYON

Barcelona

St:fof Bonafacio

Ne
altar 38 555
ie

Valenciao

Tong. 5° West from Greenwich

———— Sf
Long. East from Greenwich

1359
== a. )
°
Jb aaeeeereeeeee|
Engraved by Milby & Sons.

. ‘

gary hae

OMA Le oan BOA greatiapiS

: cara

i
Nyt hmany staat or

apres

i
pe ia Foes re enor BR
AM ae Ded vepignes gg 2
r t ait Lae

‘ee

D* Carpenter

‘S

SCALE of FATHOMS
DH &
|

Ne Gee

=
103
| a7,
Pk 2 ee ee re
i
TOOTS es oe
if
1
138 j
| 152
aoe 180 66) 167
{
225 |
142 106
A Gea a ee Sea ae ‘tae ESE AR. Gil
er {
a 45
139
1
i
IT 1
1
155!
1 :
/
133 /
7
132 167
ih
@
194. \ 166 31."
50’. 37 se 35
t
00
| © Spartey aj NUN NTA
| nen : Va Nain
ESESSISS SSE SURGES en Cet ES TES —r
Long -West 6|° from Greenwich bon

Engr aved. by Malby & Sons

1870.) Deep-sea Researches. Aan 221

Srconp CrviseE or THE ‘ Porcupine’ (Charts I. and IT.).

Station North Ris Depth Surface Bottom
Be crude | eMeeee Ee | Pepeecinm (Tempter
Sau 35) 59 |. os QW. 517 66-0* 55-5
Hoe 36°. 01. | 4. 40 W, 586 74-5 55-0
41. | 35 57°) 4 12. 730 44-5 55-0
Hoe 385 «45 = 8.57 W. 790 74-0 54-0
43. | 35 24 | 3 54W. 162 re 55-0
ee 85 4914 3 (1 W. 455 70-0 55-0
45, | 35 36 | 2 29W. 207 72-7 54-7
4G.) 35 39 | 1 BOW. 493 73-5 55-5
ee 37 95 |) 1 10 W. 845 69-5 54-7
A a7 - | oO B1W.|. 1398 735 54-7
49..| 36 29 | 0 31W.| 1412 rats 54-7
50. : 51
BOa,|{ Algerine; 152 r4.Ae
50p. || Coast 510
mies 55 .|.1,.103%..(. 1415 75-0 54-7
52. } Algerine 660 } 76-9%
52a. Coast nea 590
Bf) 36 58..| 52555. 112 77-0 55D
54.) 37 41 | 63.27E. | 1508 76-0 55-0
55. | 37 30 | 6S51E.| 1456 76-5 55-0
ee owe 3-11 - 365. 390 78-0 56-5
ee 36° G6 (18 10. 294 76-83%
BS'|*36 43° 113 368. 266 5-5 56-5
59. | 36 32 |14 198. 445 76-5 56-5
60. | 36 31 M5 46k. | 1743 74-0 56-0
61, | 38 26 |15 328. 392 79-5 55:7
62..| 38 38 |15 Q1E. 730 72-5 55-3
63. 1) 181 68-0 54-7
64. 460 65-6 BAT
65. | RecA aE 198 63-0 54-5
66. cuca 147 69-0 Therm. lost

188 73-0 55:3

* These temperatures are the averages of the day.

45° 40

LONGITUDINAL SECTION ON THE LINE A.B.
sa 3390

ue | ia fit sea

Pistia
i b

N.36°Lat.

-~—

nae
i

ane a
ay lines

a
’

1870.) | Deep-sea Researches. ue 221°

Seconp CrvissE or THE ‘ Porcupine’ (Charts I. and II.).

“Station North Depth Surface Bottom
| RRs Ba ime a co
99. | 35. 59-| 5. 27W. 517 66-0* 55-5
40,| 36 0 | 4. 40W. 586 74-5 55-0
A 35 57 e412. 730 4-5 55-0
ae) 35 «45 =| (857 W. 790 74-0 54-0
a3. | 35 24°19 54, 162 74-7 55-0
Pees 498" 8 LW. 455 70-0 55-0
45,| 35 36 | 2 29W. 207 79.4 54-7
46.1 35 39 | 1 56W. 493 13-5 55-5
eee 37 95 | 1 «10W. 845 69-5 54-7
a 37°97. | 0 31 w.|. 1398 73-5 54-7
aoe 36.99. |. 0 31 W.| W412 15 54-7
50. 51
50a,|{ Algerie) 152 eae
50b, || Coast 510
pea: 55 .| 1. 10Ei|:. 1415 75-0 54-7
52. } Algerine 660 } 76-9%
52a. Coast beats 590
53. | 36 53 | 5E55E. 112 77-0 555
a 87. 41. «| 63.27 B. | 1508 76-0 55-0
Se | 37 30.| 6251E. | 1456 76-5 55-0
ee ore od 96 5. 390 78-0 56-5
nee 36 6 «18. 10 F. 294 76-3%

58.) 36 43 113 36E. 266 5-5 56:5
59. | 36 32 |14 128. 445 76-5 56-5
60. | 36 31 115 46K. | 1743 74-0 56-0
61. | 38 26 |15 32E. 392 79-5 55-7
62..| 38 38 115 QE. 730 72-5 553
63. |) 181 68-0 54-7
64. 460 65-6 54-7
65. oer Me 198 63-0 54-5
66. 147 69:0 Therm. lost
| 188 73-0 553

* These temperatures are the averages of the day.

203 Mr. E. Hull on the Coalfiélds beneath (Dec. 15,

December 15, 1870.

General Sir EDWARD SABINE, K.C.B., President, in the ee

"The Duke of Sutherland was admitted into the Society.

The reading of the Report on Deep-sea Researches carried on during
the months of July, August, and September 1870, in H.M. Surveying
Ship ‘ Porcupine,’ by Dr. Carpenter, F.R.S., and. Mr, J. Gre Jeffreys,
F.R.S., was resumed and concluded.

December 22, 1870.
General Sir EDWARD SABINE, KG: - President, in the Chair.

‘The following communications were read :—

I. “ On the Extension of the Coal-fields beneath tlle Newer Forma-
tions of England; and the Succession of Physical Changes whee
the Coal-measures have been reduced to their present dimensions.”

By Epwarp Hutt, M.A., F.R.S., E.G. S., Director of the Geolo-
gical Survey of Ireland. ‘Received Noverber 30, 1870.
: (Abstract.)

In this paper the author, embodying with his own the observations of
previous writers on the physical geology of Great Britain, especially those
of Murchison, Godwin-Austen, Ramsay, Phillips, and the late Professor
Jukes, showed that the Coal-measures were originally distributed over
large tracts of England, to the north and to the south of a central ridge or
barrier of Old Silurian and Cambrian rocks, which stretched across the country
from North Wales and Shropshire into the Eastern Counties, skirting the
southern margin of the South Staffordshire Coal-field. This barrier, or
ridge, was a land-surface till the close of the Carboniferous period.

To the north of the central barrier, the highlands of Wales, the moun-
tains of the Lake-district, and probably small tracts of the southern uplands
of Scotland formed land-surfaces skirting portions of the Carboniferous
area, while the Carboniferous tract to the south of the central barrier was
probably bounded by a land-surface trending along the southern coast of
England. The distribution of the Coal-measures at the close of the Car-
boniferous period was illustrated by a Map, No. 1.

It was then shown that the whole Carboniferous area was subjected to
disturbances through the agency of lateral forces, whereby the strata were
thrown into folds along axes ranging (approximately) in east and west
directions ; and as denudation accompanied and followed these disturbances,
and acted chiefly over the arches (or anticlinals), large tracts were divested
of Upper Carboniferous strata, and thus the first phase in the marking out
of the limits of our present coal-fields was brought about. The effects of
these movements and denudations were illustrated by Map No. 2.

The disturbances which ensued after the deposition of the Permian

1870.] =. ~—sthe Newer Formations of England. 223

strata, and which produced the discordances of stratification between the
newer Palzeozoic and Mesozoic formations, were shown to have acted along
lines ranging approximately north and south, parallel to the axis of the
Pennine Chain, and consequently in a direction transverse to those of the
previous period. These disturbances were also accompanied by the denu-
dation of strata from off the anticlinal arches, and the consequent dis-
severance of the Coal-measure tracts over certain definite areas. ‘The re-
sults of these movements (the second phase in defining the bounds of the
coal-fields) were illustrated by Map No. 3.

From a consideration of the foregoing observations, the author came to
the conclusion that the tendency of the British coal-fields to arrange them-
selves into the form of ‘basins’? (sometimes partially concealed by newer
strata), a tendency strongly insisted on by Prof. Ramsay, F.R.S., was due
to the intersection of the two systems of flexures above described, one
anterior to the Permian period, the other anterior to the Triassic period,
and that the actual disseverance of the coal-fields into basins was due to
denudation acting with greatest effect along the anticlinal arches of these
flexures.

The inference that the Yorkshire and Durham coal-fields are really
basins rising to the eastward under the Mesozoic strata was drawn, an in-
ference supported by the easterly rise of the Coal-measures along the
sea-coast from the Coquet to the Tyne.

Guided by these principles, the author maintained that we are now i
a position to determine with great accuracy the actual limits of the Coal-
measures under the Mesozoic formations over the area to the north of the
central barrier ridge (as indicated on Map No. 3); and that to the south
of the ridge the application of the same principles would assist towards
the solution of the question, though in a less degree, owing to the fewer
opportunities for observation of the Paleozoic formations.

The author, however, concurred in the views advanced by Sir R. I.
Murchison*, that in consequence of the great amount of denudation which
the Carboniferous rocks had undergone over the area of the south of
England previous to the deposition of the Mesozoic formations, little coal
was to be expected to remain under the Cretaceous rocks.

II. “On the Constitution of the Solid Crust of the Earth.’ By
the Ven. Joun Henry Prart, Archdeacon of Caleutta, M.A.,
F.R.S. Received September 19, 1870.

(Abstract.)

In this paper the author applies the data furnished by the pendulum-ob-
servations recently made in India to test the truth of the following hypo-

* In his Address at the Meeting of the British Association at Nottingham, 1866.
On the other hand, the views of Mr. R. Godwin-Austen, F.R.S., which tend rather in an
opposite direction, should be well weighed by all who are interested in this question,
(Quart. Journ. Geol. Soe, vol. xii.)

224: On the Constitution of the Crust of the Earth. [Dec.22,

thesis regarding the Constitution of the Earth’s Crust, which he pro-
pounded in 1864, viz.: that the variety we see in the elevation and depression
of the earth’s surface in mountains and plains and ocean-beds has arisen
from the mass having contracted unequally in becoming solid from a fluid
state ; and that below the sea-level, under mountains and plains, there is
a deficiency of matter approximately equal in amount to the mass above
the sea-level ; and that below ocean-beds there is an ‘excess of matter ap-
proximately equal to the deficiency in the ocean when compared with rock ;
so that the amount of matter in any vertical column drawn from the sur-
face to a level surface below the crust is now, and ever has been, approxi-
mately the same in every part of the earth.

In order to make this hypothesis the subject of calculation, the author

takes the case of the attenuation of matter in the crust below mountains
and plains, and the excess of matter below ocean-beds, to be uniform to
a depth m times the height above the sea-level or the depth of the
ocean, as the case may be.
- The results are shown in the following Table, in which the numbers are
the last figures in the ratio of the differences of gravity to gravity itself,
carried to seven places of decimals. The decimal point and ciphers are
omitted for convenience.

Differences of gravity.

Residual errors after correction by the
Stations. Relative method of
effects of local
attraction

deduced from This hypothesis.
pendulum- | Dr, Young.
observations.
m=50. m=109.
Indian are stations.
PODER en cs ses ce enteral tty seeeee a: lh focmmeneieeeitdlin acaeetce aaa tan
Bangalore ......000... +384 — 562 — 78 —557
Damarvida <.. ssc. s- — 323 — 926 —455 — 584
MaMa oss oa's xs oe +341 — 208 +338 +315
ataM a, Sac cken ae eee — 707 —957 + 69 +320
Coast stations.
PUTIN A rece degediwel assent” Gb. WSAaee | Ma eee en
Plloppy tits sive. dea noes +302 +514 +331 +360
Mangalore ............ —166 —154 —122 — 79
MATHS, "2. .pacses rence: —197 —192 —138 — 78
Woeanada ‘00005 eekt. +142 +153 +216 +291
Ocean station.
Minicoy Island ...... +894 +906 + 31 +102

The author points out from this Table that Dr. Young’s, or the usual
method of correction for local attraction, so far from improving matters,
introduces very large residual errors of the arc and ocean stations; and, at
places on the are of meridian, all lying on the same side with reference to
Punne. He observes that neither the usual method nor his own much

1870. ] On Actinometrical Observations in India. 225

affects the coast stations; and attributes this to the want of more complete
knowledge of the contour of the surface, both above and below the sea-
level, in these parts. But his own method, in the case m=50, remarkably
reduces the effects of local attraction at stations on the are of meridian
and out at sea (in Minicoy, an island 250 miles west of Cape Comorin or
Punneze); for the sensible negative quantity at Damargida and positive quan-
tity at Kalianpur indicate a deficiency of matter below the first and an
excess below the second, which exactly tally with the results independently
brought out by relative deflections of the plumb-line as obtained by the sur-
vey: and the two large and most important effects, negative at Kaliana and
positive at Minicoy, may be said to be almost annihilated by this method
of correction. This last case of an excess of gravity out at sea (where the
surrounding ocean has a deficiency of matter) being explained by his me-
thod, he regards as a very strong argument in its favour. And he finishes
by saying that if his method is thus far successful in the particular sup-
position of the distribution below, whether in excess or defect, being wnr-
form, which is most likely not strictly the case, there is every reason for
concluding that pendulum-observations give support to the hypothesis
regarding the Constitution of the Earth’s Crust, when viewed on a large
seale, admitting of local peculiarities, like the deficiency of matter near
Damargida and the excess near Kalianpur, and the similar deficiency near
Moscow.

III. “ Actinometrical Observations made at Dehra and Mussoorie in
India, October and November 1869, in a Letter to the Pre-
sident.” By Lieut. J. H. N. Hennessey. Communicated by
the President. Received September 7, 1870.

Mussoorie, July 22, 1870.

My pear Srr,—In continuation of my last communication, dated April
25, 1870, I have now the pleasure to forward the actinometrical observa-
tions taken, during portions of October and November 1869, with the in-
straments of the Royal Society, and in compliance with the suggestions
which the Committee of the Society made for my benefit.

(2) The two actinometers are of the kind invented by the Rev. G. C.
Hodgkinson, and described by him in the Proceedings of the Royal
Society, No. 89, vol. xv. Further description or allusion is therefore un-
necessary, unless I add that the instrument is easily and accurately worked
after but moderate practice, and that it is little liable to accident if rolled
up in a padded sheet and packed within its own metal tube. It, however,
imposes sensible drawbacks, from the delays incurred in throwing off a
suitable amount of fluid into the chamber ; and as this adjustment becomes
deranged by any considerable alteration in the radiation, it is impossible to

VOL. XIX. | T

2260 Lieut. Hennessey on Actinometrical [Dec. 22,

continue a series of observations for any lengthened period (as, say, two
hours) without introducing breaks of several minutes in its continuity.

(3) The two instruments used have been lettered by the observers A
and B. The glasses, too, have been suitably marked as suggested by Sir
John Herschel in the ‘Admiralty Manual of Scientific Enquiry.’ Actino-
meter B was used at Dehra by Mr. W. H. Cole, M.A., whose observations
in sun and shade number 405 in all. The observations at Mussoorie were
made by myself with actinometer A; they are 315 in number. And as
respects the chronometers, barometers, and thermometers employed, 1
need hardly add that these instruments were of a superior order and well
verified, or that they are in ordinary use at the head-quarters of Colonel
Walker, R.E., Superintendent of the Great Trigonometrical Survey of
India.

(4) And with every facility for reading the last-named instruments, I
regret having omitted to arrange for a more frequent reading of the baro-
meter, and that the wet- and dry-bulb thermometers were not recorded.
It, however, so happened that during the days of observation in October
and November last the sky was beautifully clear, with the trifling excep-
tions noted in the records of observations ; and there is no reason to sup-
pose that any sudden changes occurred in the hygrometric conditions of
the atmosphere. In future, however, when the actinometers can again be
worked, more numerous readings of the barometer and thermometers will
be duly recorded.

(5) The stations of observation were Mussoorie and Dehra. The direct
distance; between them is about nine miles. The former stands on one of
the southernmost ranges of the Himalayas; the latter is in the valley Dehra,
or Dehra Dhoon. The hypsometrical elements for these stations, given in
the result-abstract and elsewhere, are taken from the records of the Trigo-
nometrical Survey of India. It appears from these values that Mussoorie
station is above that at Dehra about 4700 feet.

(6) The procedure agreed on between Mr. Cole and myself was to ob-
serve daily a simultaneous series at 11" 40" a.m. (mean of all the observed
times), another series at noon, and a third at 0> 20" p.m., the reckoning
being in apparent time. The slight deviations from these times which
appear in the result-abstract are due to little accidental causes almost in-
separable from simultaneous work. After four days of these series, each ob-
server was to determine the amount of heat stopped by the glass of his instru-
ment employed. In these experiments I was too busy otherwise to recipro-
cate Mr. Cole’s observations of November 1. On the 3rd of November,
however, we both observed the intended succession of groups (nearly); so
that several of these are made to discharge a double duty, and are intro-
duced in the after-discussion of relative radiation. On November 4 we >
each obtained a complete hourly series about the hours of 8 a.m. to
4 p.m. These results terminated for the time the reciprocal series of ob-
servations Mussoorie-Dehra. Subsequently, in April 1870, when we were

1870.] Observations in India. 227

both at Dehra, we carefully compared the two actinometers A and B
together. This was the only occasion during all our observations when
light clouds occasionally passed over the sun. But as the two instruments
were set up within 3 or 4 feet of one another, and as we both used the
same chronometer and read our scales at the same instant of time, there
appears no reason why the results should not be accurate, relatively
speaking.
(7) The constants thus determined are as follows :—

Obtained from six groups
glass off and five groups
glass on, comprisingsixty-
five observations in all.

( Obtained from two sets of

| observations, each con-

| sisting of four groups

” B Factor No.2, ,, ” =1-04 4 glass offand three glass on,

and comprising ninety-
six observations in all.

Factor No. 3, obtained from comparisons between A and B comprising

112 simultaneous observations, of which the following is a result-abstract

reduced to 32° Fahr. and expressed in tenths of A’s scale (both glasses on): —

Factor No. 1, to convert readings |
Actinometer A with glass on into readings =1:09

glass off.

A. B. A. B.
oes Observed Observed B—A. abpatent Observed] O bserved) B—A.
y by y. by
J.H.N.H./W. H.C. W. H.C. | J.H.N.H.
hm s hm s
11 26 o| 819 832 130 it 445. oF 783 806 18
oO 8 oO} 3828 $30 2 OrZ5 Ol con 817 13
o 51 o| 758 781 23 St 4Olae794 816 22
ZAI, 0} 786 794 3 PARC ay (6) 681 15
Mean...| 798 809 12 ||Mean...| 763 780 17

mean A __
nee aa B mean B 794°5

We may also deduce

(W. H.C. at B) —(J. H.N. H. at A)=11.
(J. H. N. H. at B)—(W. H. C. at A)=17.

The accordance of these two average differences shows that no sensible
“ personal equation”’ appeared to exist between the observers.

(8) The observations simultaneous at Mussoorie and Dehra were, in
the first instance, separated into groups, and combined group by group
for a result. Subsequently groups were formed so as to include all the
observations taken, subject to the following conditions :—

Seven (or fewer) sun-observations, with the intermediate observation i in
shade, were combined to produce one result.

Eight sun-observations, with the intermediate observations in shade, gave

r?2

228 Lieut. Hennessey on Actinometrical [Dec. 22,

groups of 5 and 4 sun-observations respectively (those in shade are here
understood), the fifth sun being common to both groups.

Nine ditto, ditto, gave 5 and 5.

Ten ditto, ditto, gave 6 and 5.

Eleven ditto, ditto, gave 5, 4, and 4; and so on.

(9) The mean results by each group were next all corrected for excess
of temperature above 32° Fahr., the Table of expansion for alcohol by
Kopp, given in Gmelin’s ‘Chemistry,’ being employed for this purpose.
After this step the results by A were entered in the result-abstract Table
and the corresponding values, in terms of A glass off, found by means of
factor No. 1. The results by B were further corrected in the record of
observations by means of factor No. 3. Being now in terms of A glass on,
they were introduced into the result-abstract Table, and there reduced to
A glass off, by means of factor No. 1.

(10) Thus the result-abstract Table contains the values obtained by
each actinometer expressed in terms of A glass on as well as glass off.
The latter values are those made use of in projecting the actinometric
curves, and in the discussion of the observations. The former values will
be useful should the Royal Society see fit to send me a third actinometer
whose constant for reduction to the Kew standard has been duly ascer-
tained. At present the required relation is wanting ; for though Professor
Stokes was so exceedingly kind as to visit Kew with the object of getting
the actinometers A and B verified, the necessary observations could not be
made from want of time.

(11) Turning, now, to the diagram of actinometric curves and to the re-
sult-abstract Table, it is readily seen that the solar radiation decreases
from some time about apparent noon both towards sunrise and sunset. This
hour-angle change is least perceptible for some +1 hour (or less) from
noon—a condition which indicates that observations for relative or abso-
lute intensity are most valuable when made during this interval. Indeed
even desultory observations might acquire importance by being restricted
to these hours, the absence of cloud, mist, haze, or other abnormal inter-
position being always supposed.

(12) But besides the hour-angle change, the intensity is liable to rises
and falls brought about in only a few minutes of time. Any observer who
has used the instrument could venture to affirm that these fluctuations are
not due to fallibility of observation. Whether their magnitude varies with
that of the intensity or otherwise may be a matter of interest to ascertain ;
and to this end series of observations, continued for as long a period as the
construction of the instruments will permit, appear desirable.

(13) Again, there is a change of intensity from day to day, apparently
not due to alteration in the sun’s declination, so that the average daily
curve (about noon) is higher or lower without any visible reason. It is
interesting to notice that this daily change was common to Mussoorie and

1870.]- | Observations in India. 229

Dehra. The two stations, it will be remembered, are about nine miles apart,
and situated nearly on a common meridian.

(14) Collecting the results of observations, we obtain the following
from simultaneous groups only :-—

TaBLe I.
| M* | D*® |M—D. M. D. |M—D.

hm s beans

27th. | 11 49 30 | 1007 | 876 | 131 3rd. | 11 14 30
© 9 30} 968 | 904 64 Outs: © Tee lp ae te

© 29 30 | 941 | 888 53 II 46 o
Ba St oe = Gas to fo se oe ane
Mean (.2:<. 972 | 889 $3 © 0 O|} 1006} 908 98
OUTS). O:)|% LOns|cQz9 36
28th.| 11 40 0 | 955] 887 68 © 30 O]| 1005} 924 31
© 0 of 969 | 883 86 045 ©] 1020] 937 83

4th.| 8 3 30 847| 718 | 129

|
|
2gth. 1 O: 3 30 aE bp 4-0 943) 821) izze4|
me 4, 30 G24 1 O95 BS 1G 8), 10 996| 876 | 120 |
° 6 ° 8 °

oS Pe | OE he % a 1000] gog gI

Mean ...... 975 | 901 74 o 6 30 986) 913 73

Be OF-\0 984} 892 92

goth.| 11 40 0 | 980] g12 68 21D 30 6

0 1 30} 977| 903 | 74 eo elt ee a

o 18 30} 983] 919 | 64 | 3 9 30 911) 758 | 153

ae aimee) oS 775} 549 | 235

Mean ...... 980 | git 69
Mean from)
115 10™ to| 999} 905 85

eonees

Collecting these average daily results for +1 hour (about) from noon,
we have :—

TABLE II.
M. DES iM] Dp:

1869. Oct. 27. | 972 | 889 83
235) (ObR | "S85 66

295 | > 9255 | 199% 74

g05, |. 980) |" (O98 69

Nov. 3. | 1oro | 923 87

4-| 999} 905 |. 35

Mean. ...-- 980 | 902 77 | and = =1'086.

(15) In Tables I. and II. I have availed myself of none but actually si-
multaneous observations. We may, however, include every result at either
station, provided the curve at the other station exists for the required time.

* M stands for Mussoorie, D for Dehra.

230 Lieut. Hennessey on Actinometrica: [Dec. 22,

Thus at Dehra, October 28, we have the result 880 observed. The corre-
sponding result at Mussoorie (7. e. at 11" 15™) is found from the diagram
to be 945. Proceeding in this manner, and taking averages of all results
within 5 minutes of one another to make one result, we find :—

Taste III.
M. | D. |M—D. M. | D. M—D.

hms hy tas
27th. | 11 49 30 | 1007 | 876 | 131 grd.| 11 15 45 | 1002 | 927 75
© 9 53 | 969 | 904 65 II 30 © | 1008 | 918 go
© 29 30} 941 | 888 53 II 36 30 | ror0 | 916 94
—_—— |—_—_— |—_—_— II 45 30 | 1013 | 912 | 10K
Mean ice. 972 | 889 83 © © 0] 1006 | 908 98
0. ¥5 ..0.| 10nd 4 B28 36
2Sthe |, 12215 0% O45 1780 65 © 30 O| 1005 | 924 81
Ii 20-0"! 943 | 1S8x 62 945 ©} 1020 | 5937 83

| © 33 39 | 937 | 885 | 52 4th.| 8 3 30 | 847 | 718 | 129
| Mean ...... 946 | 883 63 9 11 23 | 943 |) 8230) 20
10 68 45 996 | 870 | 120
| Z2Oth. Ou 304-5 984 | 897 87 II 9 45 | 1001 | 905 96
© 21/307) 965-907. 58 II 19 OQ] ggo |] g10 80
O32 4:02) (964, || 805 69 o 8 0] 987 ) sare 74.
O/AI O| 962: 1-906 62 1 8 45 984 | 894 go
120 0} 958 | 891 67a 2:10 ©j| 964 15845 15g
I 33 30 | 954 | 889 | 65 3.930] 911 | 758 | 153
Ss 4 8 oO} 780 | 546 | 234
Mean ...... 965 | 897 63 |!
Mean from
goth.| 11 41 48 | 981 | 917 64. 115 9™ to | so 906 85
opr rs0) |. 1978.| “god 74 se

And coilecting the average daily results of Table III. for +1 hour from
noon, we obtain :—
TABLE IV.

Macon. M—D.

1869. Oct. 27. | 972 889 | 83
28. 946 $83 63

Mean 3S 978 902 76 |and == 1084,

M
which values of M—D and 7 are practically identical with those of
Table IL. .
(16) As regards the complete day-curve observed on November 4, it

]

|
2d
%
-
‘

kia

ee ee ee oe atl dhe

1870. ] Observations in India. 231

appears that while the radiation at both stations increases from 8 a.m. and
4 p.m. towards some time about noon, the difference M—D diminishes.
In other words, the radiation at the lower station increases more rapidly
than at the upper ; and while at both stations the change is more rapid
in the afternoon than in the forenoon, the relative change between forenoon
and afternoon is greatest at the lower station.

(17) Mr. Hodgkinson, in his paper already referred to, quotes certain
numbers obtained by Principal Forbes from his “ free hand curve” of ob-
servations on the Faulhorn and Brienz, showing the relative intensity of

the two stations. Calling his ratio BR the following may be contrasted :—

By Mr. Forbes. From Table III., Nov. 4th, 1869.
a SQ Cone SSS SSR
Hour. ~ hm s
Su S215 Y174
9 ORAS en ore 9 II 23 1°146
10 Wel Avera cetaceans 10 8 45 137
11 QAR Bera ah sito Il 14 22 1'097
12 Hees (ys eon osocudan Ol oe aO 1'081
I rol kee ee ceremaes r 8 45 1101
2 TODO Tp ccs see ce 2 O30 I'l4i
3 1 ah leone car 2) Ags 1°202
458" 0 I°429

where the heights of the stations are :—

feet
Waulhorn....... 8747 i ieee
Brienz ........ ices ee
Mussoorie .... 6937 } from the records of the Great Trigonometrical
DST eS 2229 Survey of India.

In conclusion I gladly acknowledge that I am much indebted to my
friend Mr. Cole, not only for his skill and industry in taking the obser-
vations at Dehra, but for his cordial cooperation in reducing and discussing
them.

Hoping you continue in the enjoyment of good health, I am, dear Sir,
with kind wishes,

Yours very truly,
| J. H. N. HENNEssEY.

General Sir Edward Sabine, K.C.B., &c.,

Pres, Roy. Soc., London.

The record of actinometer observations has been posted in a separate
packet *. The papers enclosed with this letter are the paper of actinome-
tric curves and the result-abstract Table.

[ * This record is preserved in the Archives for reference.—G. G. S.]

Lieut. Hennessey on Aciinometrical

Result-abstract of Actinometrical Observations at Mussoorie on an outer
range of the Himalayas, and at Dehra in the Dehra Dhoon, made by
J. H. N. Hennessey, Esq., and W. H. Cole, Esq., M.A., of the
Great Trigonometrical Survey of India.

Observations.

Mean of the

Mean results at Mussoorie observed
with A and reduced to 32° Fahr.

Mean results at Dehra observed
with B and reduced to 32° Fahr.

In terms In terms In terms In terms

In | In apparent of A, of A, Nos. of A, of A,
G@).| X times. glass on. glass off. glass on. glass off.
October 27, 1869.
he aay jos
3. | 2] 11 49 30 ris 924 1007 1S 804 876
selea OG 30 6 10 388 968 6 10 $29 904
Ares 4) OREO 6> 12 890 970
2/52 1 © 29-30 rq a7 863 941 tr 25 815 888
AN 3 4 O31 05) 13” 19 878 957
3}2]/ 945 30] 20 24} 885 965
Bes Wyn eg One Bg 73k 869 947
October 28, 1369.
4|3)|19 57 oO} 32 38 874 953
ORIG S.. Ou cok can alte ence eee Me cease 16 26 807 880
4) 3 | 11 20 0} 39 45 865 943
Regio dt 40101 AG feo 876 955 217 38 814 887
“SAMUS: Fa lee Paco Miata ae | I BE gia (Ra SU 27 a7 818 8g2
For 3ul 20m OC) $3. 594» 889 969 38 44] 810 833
[eats OP CARS IE Pict eee eet ema So a lcoraiat 38: 5 A7 796 868
Kpeseicn © 21 Or) 60. 68 851 928 48 56 811 884
eel en OP 3430 Paste Po eee cage Wi) Skee 56 64 812 385
Red 80543; 30. |5 69. 177 868 946
October 29, 1869.
Sea ORO NRONN. detaches io cseseh ut as aces G5 75 822 896
CORES 0 SO Lo cewewct > Hime itonkieaee” Gui ieiee Sate Te O38 816 889
BM AC Piet ZO eax econs 4gobes Soss6o 83. 91 $21 895
SME ELBA BIO) ete inncm ced becase lye ceuacs g2 102 $27 gol
Galas OV eu wecece sae te a pileisateie Mid bo dow aks 103 113 825 399
Zitat ar wges0u! 7s 82 903 984
Binlie “Cine ay. ae CO Mey Iemas Seemeyir scare a1 UR ear Og) Wea tea 107 III 821 895
Baas, YOl2a a0 83. 91 835 965 114/22 $32 907
vet he E32 SON enencrcdee lt: Penceee seas 122 128 821 895
Aes etirO patie IO tc Lanth noe halts oce chee aah) Ligstyaee 128 134 826 goo
6] 5 fez 0 jn 02 07, 879 958
ee 1 33 30.) 102 “110 875 954
BaZa. 233) 30. | | sotsscces pasts: saeaee 135 139 B05 877
Bee Se SO ieee Fieet | | gases | wan ee 140 148 733 853
Bee ORO! SO | ees s ees | sean) ( eennae 149 157 765 834
443 ga2z1 “0 ae eae ao oa | RES Se 157 163 739 806
October 30, 1869.
A} 3] 11 40-0 | 133 119 899 980 164 170 337 gi2
64 63) At 48770 7 1 bss... aestiienenl ewes 164 174 845 921
5 | 4 | 11 43 30 | 111 119 902 983
64-5 O° 102 0)| 520 130 899 980
ole © 1 30 | 122 130 $96. 1g 77 175 183 $28 903
6) 5 re Maas (ae ©) “ESS, Maer er time Fame tesoe 175 185 831 906
Aa 3g OAT, wom at, 137 905 986
S42.) OO 8goama33 137 go2 983 186 190 $43 919
BS AO Oe Gee veer in| Asa swe ool cence 186 196 842 918

[ Dec. 22,

:
n = i, at ,
a ee Se

— ss ag Bat BIE

1870.) Observations in India. 233°

: Mean results at Mussoorie observed Mean results at Dehra observed

+ EES with A and reduced to 32° Fahr. with B and reduced to 32° Fahr.
hao hin Mean of the In terms In terms In terms In terms
apparent Nos. of A, of A, Nos. of A, of A,
©.| X. times. glass on. glass off. glass on, glass off.
November 1, ee ET November 1, 1869.0
Anh 3 lr Bee Oh Paw acwasecee bP cutee ~ ir," se<se3 EQ ZOMey vacme ee 916
RPE 20 SOP ase. ss. SP ocak. |. seer 204 208 859 936
MEAG ees, rk Pee acne © Se neaee ZOO BeAy |) baa 935
4 | 3 SCRE SY RAPA eo ecaes (aime iene DEG 228 348 924.
PEE ES UCM Asc. fF tet fs eyes BUD DIS Pe Teor 932
re PRO Ore sca) | kc seates << lo poanees 229 235 $56 933
a bes OU) AE CS] a i |e Seeger enice BARODA Det teens 917
Sere FS November 3, 38605 | ee Been Bt Piece ) | November. 35,5869) ns ee ee
Baie | FI AGO f 13S 842i [ss IOo1
Pepe POE BBs Or teens. § fh. scge ses soy. T aesecs BASED AN ve 930
Pome BT Rea Et eee PO aaeman Pte vance BABE Omit sees 923
Peet EE WAG ele) oth ed PROS a ey Eee, ac 251 257 842 918
ze.) EI 30:30. | 143°147 927 IOIO
Pe Et Wee Of cae Li weeks fh anciaes DEOL DOAw eae veers gi2
maa ET 40.07) EAR.154:/ - ...... 1013
Aeles [LO OO | hss, 261 923 1006 265 271 833 908
4|3 OaFay G)| £02- FOS") =. 2s. 1015 27 2h 27 Owe se ee 929
rae 0730.4 G:) 5691275 922 1005 279 285 $48 924
Mest Oi | 876.182 | oo... 1020 286,292 = tax. 937
3 | 2 Ei *Se30 | 483 1874 908 990
3 | 2 LEPQEGO | ESS. EQZ xc: 945
3} 2] 1 30 30] 193 197 879 958
a2 | -Ti4h, 907) 198 202 | -.....- 973
MEM OR We ee) | Novetiber 4. 1S690 a ee ek Me ee et ey Noveniber'4, Fe Gge Oe) oe 1869.
ermeg a ee Cay rset rt al Ash Soe abo et Pho oe
3} 2] 3 3 30| 203 207} 777 847 | 293 297 | 859 718
Sis 3) 8.0. | 203 233 789 860
PET 0 BECP ROOD Gacccwede tf - adcas 4 hd -saciaes 298 304 688 750
615} 9 8 oO| 214 224 862 940
41/3] 9 IF of 218 224 865 943 305 311 753 821
Pe Gif & OREGISG byrcscc. os pet a ctra ey kay enn araie 205 347; 763 $32
6} 5| 10 8 oO} -225 235 914 996 318 328 804. 376
nr EO aCe (arene oo tn et ecco a ema 318 330 804 876
5 PA} EI 8.30.) 296 244 918 1001 i
tee | PE MOLIG b Gi. ace Ste otingsss enone 331 343 828 903
GES | EI: iG:-0 | 236 ‘246 917 1000
GBS | £9GhR On Nae (elas: 333 343 834 909
Avie? |) TIL8Q); O-) 244 250 908 990
gra) OF 630) 261 256 905 986 344 352 $38 913
716.| oF Gi30 F251 263 906 988
Gls 1 8 0} 264 274 903 984 354 364 $18 892
i hE rat ST eo eS NS) ie eae ey ae er 354 366 $21 895
ee OR RON eae eh cae oe ne noth 367 379 775 84.5
me he 20 30 | 275.287 884 964.
at 6) 3 Gg 39 | 288 300 $36 gI1 380 392 695 758
514] 4 6 30] 301 309 720 785
7/6} 4 9 30] 301 313 7i1 775 | 393 405 495 540
4/3] 417 ©} 309 315 684 746

Remarks.

Lat. N. Long. E. Height, in feet, above
ee: mean sea-level.
BIWSSODFIC’ sc. f0.Siuossssrees 30 28 78 7 6937

DME a eds s scec aekeaar bees 30 19 78 6 2229

[Dec. 22,

1a.

in Ind:

“ypations

D
w
a)
oO
Lo)
S
S
"SS
—
“>
D
=
>
g
a)
~
3
&
S

OOL\F Ite? DUPM IY YP
7

"g pus Y SioJOMIOUTZOV U99Mj04 sUOSIAudULOd Og SepIseg ‘BAyo( 4B GOP PUL o1OOSSN AT

qe UdHV} OOM SUOIZBAIOSGO GIE “Ie UT ‘Joywo1S ACJ Sl [NSO v 1OJ SUOTJBAIOSGO Jo daqiunuU ay4
‘{QAQMOY ‘BINAVSY ‘SUOFBAIOSqO-opeYys Z PUB -UNS F UBT} sso] JOU JO [NSAI ay} Sjuosetdor yuIod
youd ‘G698t ‘19quIOAON JO YIP PUB 10G0}9O Jo YQZz OY} USIAJEq OPC ALOM SUOTIVAIOSGO TLL,

*g194}0 OY}
eytur UL

WoIy WY} YSINTuTstp 07 aJoa10 B Aq Papunosins aie V7eP Yous TOF syutod jeuruii8; pue
‘Q[OAIO [VULULO} PUL [ELIT YOU OAD UMOYS ST UOLBAIISGO JO ojep oy, ‘eayod

op saury pozdnas9jzur UL es0y} ‘o1xoossnyAT OF ureyzoddy soul, SnonuTzUOD Ul s9AINd 9. —*970NT

\é

is CaP4 4 é OL

TULIP QUI bid

Y YU ; i]

929} 6266 yooy Z8@9 * [eAd|-Bas ULAUT DAOGe qy soy
19 084 AB y es : 79+ + UTMUIAIL) JO JSG ‘SUO'T
jOL 90 186 005 savage aie YUWON 3VT
*elyod *a1100SSN JL

° ¢
DLYa(] pun IULOOSSTNIAT SIAUNY) J1.7OUW0UI20 fF

&
‘

(SI? 88771D) 2S

OOTE

SY7UAL

hAZIMIUNIJIP fe

to Thursday,

s Recess

hristma

‘
J

‘ned over the C

joul

ty then ad

ocie

The §

January |:

1871.

)
—)

1870.] Mr. G. Gore on Fluoride of Silver. 235

January 12, 1871.
General Sir EDWARD SABINE, K.C.B., President, in the Chair.

Prof. Benjamin Peirce (elected Foreign Member in 1852) and Col. J.T.
Walker, R.E., were admitted into the Society.

The following communications were read :—

I. “On Fluoride of Silver.—Part II.” By Grorcr Gorg, F.R.S.
Received September 22, 1870.

(Abstract.)

This paper contains an exhaustive account of the behaviour of argentic
fluoride in vessels of platinum, carbon, and various fluorides in contact
- with chlorine, bromine, and iodine at various temperatures. When argentic

fluoride is completely decomposed by chlorine in platinum vessels at a red
heat, the reaction agrees with the following equation :

4AgF+44Cl+ Pt=4AgCl, PtF,.

Vessels of cryolite and of fluor-spar were found incapable of retaining
argentic fluoride in a melted state. Other vessels were also made by melt-
ing and casting various. mixtures of earthy fluorides at a high temperature ;
and although forming beautiful products, probably capable of technical
uses, they were not capable of retaining silver fluoride in a state of fusion.
Numerous vessels were also made of seventeen different fluorides by
moulding them in the state of clay and baking them at suitable tempera-
tures; these also were found incapable of holding melted fluoride of silver.
Argentic fluoride was only superficially decomposed by chlorine at 60° Fahr.
during thirty-eight days. When heated to 230° Fahr. during fifteen days
in a platinum vessel in chlorine, it was very little decomposed. Chloride
of silver heated to fusion in a platinum vessel in chlorine corroded the
vessel and formed a platinum-salt, as when fluoride of silver was employed.

An aqueous solution of argentic fluoride agitated with chlorine evolved
heat and set free oxygen, in accordance with the following equation :—

SAgF+8C1+4H, O=5AgC1+3AgC1I0 +8 HF+0,
or :

7Ag(1+AgClO, +SHF+0.

Dry hydrochloric acid gas completely decomposed argentic fluoride in a
melted state, but only acted upon it superficially at 60° Fahr. A satu-
rated aqueous solution of argentic fluoride was not precipitated by chloric
acid.

Perfectly avhydrous fluoride of silver was only superficially decomposed
by contact with bromine in a platinum vessel during thirty-six days at
60° Fahr., or during two days at 200° Fahr. Ata low red heat in vessels
of platinum, argentic fluoride was completely decomposed by a current

236 Mr. C. F. Varley on the Discharge of Electricity [Jan. 12,

of bromine vapour, a portion of its fluorine being expelled and a portion
corroding the platinum and forming an insoluble compound of fluoride of
platinum and bromide of silver. In carbon boats at the same temperature
the whole of the silver-salt was converted into bromide, the boat being cor-
roded and the fluorine escaping in chemical union with the carbon. The
action of bromine on an aqueous solution of argentic fluoride was similar to
the action of chlorine. A solution of argentic fluoride yielded copious pre-
cipitates both with hydrobromic and bromic acids.

Under the influence of a temperature of 200° to 600° Fahr. in closed

platinum vessels, iodine very slowly and incompletely decomposes argentic
fluoride without corroding the vessels, and produces a feeble compound of
argentic iodide, fluorine, and iodine, from which the two latter substances
are expelled at ared heat. Ata red heat in platinum vessels, iodine pro-
duces argentic iodide, and in the presence of free argentic fluoride corrodes
the vessels in consequence of formation of platinic fluoride ; iodine and
fluorine pass away together during the reaction. In vessels of carbon at
the same temperature argentic iodide is formed, the vessels are corroded,
and a gaseous compound of fluorine and carbon is produced. By treating
an aqueous solution of argentic fluoride with iodine, similar results are
produced as with bromine and chlorine; a similar solution yields copious
precipitates both with hydriodic and iodic acids.
_ A mode of analysis of iodine is also fully described in the paper. A
known weight of iodine was dissolved in absolute alcohol, a strong solution of
argentic nitrate of known strength added to it, in portions at a time, with
stirring until the colour of iodine exactly disappeared. The mixture was
evaporated, the free nitric acid expelled by careful heat, and the residue
weighed. The residue was then heated to fusion, to convert the iodate of
silver into iodide, and again weighed. Two experiments of this kind yielded
accurate results, and the process was easy and expeditious.

II. “Some Experiments on the Discharge of Electricity through
Rarefied Media and the Atmosphere.” By Cromwe.u FLEET-
woop VartEy. Communicated by Prof. Stoxzs, Sec. R.S.
Received October 5, 1870.

After the labours of Mr. Gassiot, one approaches this subject with diffi-
dence, lest he should appear to be attempting to appropriate the glory
which so justly belongs to that gentleman and to Professor Grove. The
nature of the action inside the tube is at present involved in considerable
mystery, but some light is thrown upon the subject by the following
experiments. Before describing them, however, the author wishes to ob-
serve that he has seen Mr. Gassiot’s last paper*, and finds that, so far
as regulating the strength of the current is concerned, he has been pro-
ceeding in asimilar manner to the author.

* Proceedings of the Royal Society, vol. xu. p. 329.

1871.] through Rarefied Media, &c. 237

The tube principally used in these experiments is shown full size in pho-
tograph No. 1 (PI. II.); it contains two aluminium wire rings, the one ;4; inch
in diameter, the other 5%, inch, and separated 58; inch: the tube was 14 inch
in diameter, 34 inches in length ; it was one of Geissler’s manufacture, was
very well exhausted, and professed to contain hydrogen. A U-shaped glass
tube containing glycerine and water was placed in circuit. Two aluminium
wires inserted in this tube gave a ready means of reducing or augmenting
the resistance at pleasure. Glycerine affords an easy means of producing
very great resistances.

The battery used in this experiment was a Daniell’s battery, each cell
having a resistanceof from 50 to 100ohms. The resistance of the glycerine-
and-water tube was between 2 and 3 megohms ; this latter resistance was
made large, in order that the resistance of the tube and battery might be
neglected without entailing error.

The following laws were found to govern the passage of the current :—
Ist, each tube requires a certain potential to leap across; 2nd, a passage
for the current having been once established, a lower potential is sufficient
to continue the current; 3rd, if the minimum potential, which will maintain
a current through the tube, be P, and the power be varied to P+1, P+ 2,
&c. to P-+n, the current will vary in strength, as 1, 2, &e. n.

Tables I. & II. (p. 242) illustrate this; there is a little irregularity in
the figures due to the irregularity of the battery, although it was recharged
for the occasion.

It thus appears that a certain amount of power is necessary to spring
across the vacuum; after that it behaves as an ordinary conductor, ex-
cluding that portion of the battery whose potential is P, and which is used
to balance the opposition of the tube. In these experiments P was 304
cells. ‘The tube in question could not be persuaded to allow a current of
less than 323 cells to pass ; but when once the current had established a
channel, on lowering the potential by short circuiting portions of the
battery, so as not to break the circuit, the current would flow wlien the
battery was reduced to 308 cells. By, however, passing a current from
600 cells, in the manner shown in PI. III. fig. 1, through the second tube,
filled with pure glycerine, and offering several thousand megohms resistance,
an extremely feeble current, too weak to affect the galvanometer, kept a
channel open by its passage ; with this arrangement the figures in Table IT.
were obtained, which are more regular at the commencement, and a power
of P+1 would pass across the tube.

The positive pole alone was observed to be luminous when the current
was very minute, and the negative only was luminous when the current
was strong. The following experiments were tried, and the results, which
have been photographed, accompany this.

A current was passed through the U tube and the vacuum ; the U tube
contained pure glycerine, and had a very large resistance, which was gra-

238 Mr. C. F. Varley on the Discharge of Electricity [Jan. 12,

dually reduced. At the commencement it was more than 10,000 Hee ONS 5 ;
the upper or small ring was positive, the lower ring was negative.

The power was so reduced that the faintest possible light only was visible ;
in this case the positive wire alone was luminous, whether it were the
large or small ring that was positive. No. 2 (Pl. II.) is a photograph of this.
The light was so feeble that, though the experiment was conducted in a
perfectly dark room, we were sometimes unaware whether the current was
passing or not. An exposure of thirty minutes’ duration left, as will be
seen, a very good photographic record of what was taking place; this
means of viewing light too feeble for the eye may receive other applica-
tions. The resistance was then reduced, when the light became much
more brilliant,—a tongue of light projected from the positive pole towards
the negative, the latter being still almost completely obscure.

The light around the positive pole was to. all of our eyes white, while the
projecting flame was a bright brick-red. This bright brick-red, however,
possessed great photographic power, as will be seen by photograph No. 3.
The negative wire at this stage began to show signs of luminosity.

As the power was increased, the flame became detached from the
positive pole, as shown in photograph 4.

On still further increasing the power, the positive pole ceased to be
luminous, as in photograph 5; and on still further increasing the power, by
removing the U tube altogether, the phenomena presented themselves which
are shown in photograph 6, in which the light surrounded the negative wire.
The photograph shows a white flattened hour-glass, apparently detached
from the wire ; to the eye, however, the wire appeared to be surrounded by a
bright blue envelope z inch in diameter, which did not possess sufficient
photographic power to leave a record of itself, while the red portion did so :
this photograph was exposed only ten seconds to the light.

A large condenser was now attached to the battery, and discharged
through the tube (the condenser had a capacity of 27 microfarads) ; this
was equivalent to a momentary contact with a battery of little or no re-
sistance. The flash was exceedingly brilliant to the eye: it could be
heard outside the tube with a sharp click ; the eye, however, was so dazzled
as not to be able to see its shape.

Photographs 7 a and 7 6 show that the light was confined entirely to
the positive pole; thus, then, as the power is increased from nothing up-
wards, the first pole to become luminous is the positive ; secondly, the
two poles become luminous ; thirdly, the negative pole alone is luminous ;
and fourthly, with au instantaneous discharge, the positive pole only is
luminous. The eye and the collodion-plate do not, however, tell the same
tale in photograph 6.

When the resistance in the U tube was greatly reduced, and a galvano-
meter (not very sensitive) was inserted, so that the chief resistance in
circuit was that of the exhausted tube, as the potential was augmented cell

Pit

Proc. Roy Soc. Vol.

amp.

West ZC

W HY esley 1

ie ‘
West £C° imp

‘S7792 OOO |

Ss
| fa

roc, Foy. 50t, Vol. XIX (PUL

ae Ss [auptaslizh 3. cr) ] i /, Wi . == ——
i ee ) DIUIDYGE2GPL PRDOLO (2.14) Ss / f vi y \ R a
: Nee recta, a ®
—— ene s
t / NYGON
: | Slee | 28
VA | Peers YS
d ons as
Seu <<.
Cajon suIt07kj, 6) —$<$<—$>-<<$———— RAO ee . N43
c i eee aac! LEAL LAS ) } eae Sere > Sy | fe
cs N \ / E
| & »
MAI | i I Mh 38
N nL

WH Wesley lith.

Varley
\
x

1871.} through Rarefied Media, &c. 239

by cell, the changes took place abruptly and suddenly. For example,
when the power was so low that the positive pole only was visible, the
current was feeble, and kept augmenting in power as cell after cell was
added on. Suddenly the luminous red flame (phot. 3) made its appearance,
and the galvanometer showed that the current had suddenly augmented
three or four times in power. As the power was again further increased
cell by cell, the current again steadily augmented in proportion, until the
luminous tongue suddenly disappeared, and the appearance in 6 was
shown, the galvanometer showing a still further sudden increase in the
current.

The phenomena shown in 4 and 5 can only be obtained by inserting a
large resistance.

Nature of the luminous cloud.— Plucker has shown that when such an
exhausted tube, with a current through it, is placed between the poles of
an electro-magnet, a luminous arch is produced, which arch follows the
course of the magnetic rays. (See photograph 8, in which the negative pole
was a small ring. Photograph 9 shows the arch when the large ring was
negative.)

As the electro-magnet is magnetized, the tube, which before was full of
a luminous cloud, is seen gradually to change ; the magnet gathers up this
diffused cloud, and builds up the arch shown in 8 and 9.

Inasmuch as the electricity was passing in a continuous current from the
battery, from wire to wire, it is evident the light is projected right and left
into those parts of the tube where there is no electric current flowing.

To endeavour to ascertain the nature of this arch, a tube (Pl. III.
fig. 2) was constructed. A piece of tale, bent into the form U, had a fibre
of silk stretched across it ; on this fibre of silk was cemented a thin strip
of tale, 1 inch in length, +45 inch broad, weighing about 7 of agrain. The
tube was sealed up and exhausted; carbonic acid and potash were used to
get a high vacuum. When the magnet was not magnetized, the passage of
the current from wire to wire did not affect the piece of tale. When the
magnet was charged, and the luminous arch was made to play upon the
lower portion of the talc, it repelled it, no matter which way the electric
current was passing.

When the tube was shifted over the poles of the magnet so as to project
the luminous arch against the upper part of the talc, the upper end of the
tale was repelled in all instances; the arch, when projected against the
lower part of the tale, being near the magnet, was more concentrated, and
the angle of deviation of the talc was as much as 20°. When the upper
part of the arch, which was much more diffused, was thrown upon the
upper part of the talc, it was repelled about 5°.

This experiment, in the author’s opinion, indicates that this arch is com-
posed of attenuated particles of matter projected from the negative pole
by electricity in all directions, but that the magnet controls their course; and

240 Mr. C.F. Varley on the Discharge of Electricity [Jan. 12,

these particles seem to be thrown by momentum on each side of the nega-
tive pole, beyond the limit of the electric current.

This arch requires time for its formation, for when a charged condenser
is discharged through the tube no arch is produced. ‘he arch from the
negative pole is a hollow cylinder; the little talc tell-tale against which
the arch was projected cut out the light, and a corresponding dark space
existed throughout the remainder of the course of the arch.

There was on the tale, at the spot where the arch struck it, a little bright
luminous cloud, as though the attenuated luminous vapour were condensed
by this material obstruction.

Great care had been taken not to let the arch strike the single filament
of silk which suspended the tale. Having demonstrated that the tale was
repelled as described, the arch was allowed to play against the silk fibre,
which the author expected would have been instantly burnt ; such, however,
was not the case. Even when a powerful induction-coil replaced the battery,
the fibre remained unhurt.

Comparison of the above Phenomena with Discharges between the Poles of
a Holtz’s Machine in air.

In the first part of this paper four different kinds of discharges were de-
scribed in vacuo. With a ‘Holtz’s”’ machine, which will give 11-inch sparks
in the air, four well-marked different kinds of discharge have been ob-
tained én the air; one of which, the author thinks, will explain the curious
and rare phenomenon known as “ ball lightning.”’

In the experiments hereafter referred to, the condensers were in all cases
attached to the ‘‘ Holtz’s”” machine. The first discharge is the long 11-inch
zigzag spark or lightning-flash ; the second is the well-known “ brush,”’
which is best obtaimed by connecting the negative pole of the ‘ Holtz’s”’
machine to the earth ; the third kind of discharge is a hissing red flame,
+ inch in length, playing about the negative pole, the positive pole being
scarcely luminous at all, and if luminous, at one or two points only; the
fourth or most remarkable phenomenon is best obtained in the following
manner (it should be understood that the brass balls on each of the poles are
about an inch in diameter) :—Tie to the negative pole a small thin strip or
filament of wood, 3 inches in length, and bent so as to project on each side
of the negative pole, and a little beyond it towards the positive. On
rotating the machine, two bright spots are seen upon the positive pole. If
the positive pole be made to rotate upon its axis, the luminous spots do not
rotate with it ; if, however, the negative pole, with its filament of wood, be
rotated, the spots on the positive pole obey it, and rotate also. The in-
sertion of a non-conductor, such as a strip of glass, in front of the pro-
jecting wooden end, obliterates the luminous spot on the positive pole.
When the author first discovered this, he, seeing apparently pieces of dirt
on the positive pole, wiped it clean with a silk handkerchief, but there

1871. ] through Rarefied Media, &c. 241

they remained in spite of all wiping ; he then examined the negative pole,
and discovered a minute speck of dirt corresponding to the luminous spots
on the positive pole.

When the filament of wood is removed from the negative pole, there is
sometimes a luminosity or glow over a large portion of the surface of the
positive ball. If in this state three or four little pieces of wax, or even a
drop or two of water, be placed upon the negative pole, corresponding non-
luminous spots will be found upon the positive pole, which rotate with the
former, but do not with the latter.

It is therefore evident that there are lines of force existing between the
two poles, and by these means one is able to telegraph from the negative
to the positive pole to a distance of 8 inches through the air, without any
other conductor than that which the electrical machine has constructed for
itself across the non-conducting gas.

The foregoing seems to the author to give a possible explanation of
*‘ball-lightning.” Ifit be possible for there to be a negatively electrified
cloud sufficiently charged to produce a flash from the earth to the cloud, a
point in the cloud would correspond to the wood projection on the negative
conductor: if such a cloud exist, a luminous spot would be seen moving
about the surface of the earth, corresponding to the moving point of cloud
over it, and thus present phenomena similar to those described by the pri-
vileged few who have witnessed this extraordinary natural phenomenon.

The following experiment shows that, prior to the passage of the electric
spark, a channel is prepared for this spark to pass.

The positive and negative balls of the machine were separated to a
distance of 6 or 7 inches, and a common candle-flame was placed midway be-
tween them. On rotating the machine, the flame was drawn out on each side
just prior to the passage of the spark, as shown in the accompanying sketch
(PL III. fig. 3). Sometimes it extended to a width of 5 or 6 inches; this
took place every time the spark passed. It is well known that the dura-

tion of this spark is less than the ha part of a second; the flame occu-

pied the 3 or ;}, part of a second in flying out to make the conducting chan-
nel through which the discharge went.

The author has been informed more than once, by captains of vessels,
that when men have been struck by lightning a burn has been left upon the
skin of the same shape as the object from which the discharge flew. In
one instance he was informed that some brass numbers attached to the
rigging, from which the discharge passed to the sailor, were imprinted upon
his skin. ,

It is now seen that this is perfectly possible if the discharge be a nega-
tive one —that is, if the man be+ to the brass number.

VOL. XIX. U

242 Discharge of Electricity through Rarefied Media. [Jan. 12,

TaBLe I.
ik. oO 3. 4,
Cells of Daniell’s Observed Deflections of M 3rd Col.
Battery, P+-n. Reflecting Galvanometer. can. Idivided by x.
307=P+ 3 0 0 0 0) 0 0
808=P+ 4 5 54 5 5i dF 1:3
309=P+ 5 9 9 9 9 9 1:8
310=P+ 6 12, 12: 12 123 124 2:04
3ll1=P+ 7 14 14 a “i 14 2
312=P+ 8 16 a ay via 16 2
818=P+ 9 17i—s 18 18 at 173 1:97
314=P+10 193 193 aye nae 192 1:95
31l5=P+11 214 21 22 213 214 1:95
316=P+4+12 234 233 232 a 234 1:96
317=P+13 254 tae ee ts 254 1:96
318=P+414 274 a =i ee 274 1:97
319=P+4+15 292 ee Tih panes Pee 292 1:97
320= P+16 381i 313 «31 3l 31; 1:95
*393=P+4+19 3874 = 338 37 374 37k 1:97
325= P+21 40% 41 403 Be 4132 1:94.
330= P+26 51 51 75 ro 51 1:96
335=P+31 604 6024 e; 4 604 1:95
840= P+36 70 70 fs at 70 1-94.
345 =P+41 794 794 Be ae 793 1:94
850=P+46 89 89 ase pod &9 1:94.
355=P+51 98 983 ae ae 983 1:93
360=P-+56 108 108 ae ie 108 1:93
865=P-+61 118 #118 a a 118 1:94.
370=P+66 1238 128 * a 128 1:94
375=P+71 1389 #8140 As wh 1393 1:96
380=P+76 150 150 bi a 150 1:97
Taste IT.
304=P+ 0 0 ane 0 0
3805=P-++ 1 2 2 2 2
a06=P-+ 2 4 4 4 2
307=P-+ 3 6 6 6 2
Bus=P- 4 8 8 8 2
309=P+ 5 10 10 10 2
310=P+ 6 12 12 12 2
320=P+16 314 82 ae ue 312 1:97
330=P+26 ol 51 ay) ea 51 1:96
340—=P-+36 71 713 a A (al 1:97

* This power (323) was the lowest at which the current would jump.

1871.] Polarization of Metalhe Surfaces in Aqueous Solutions. 243

III. “ Polarization of Metallic Surfaces in Aqueous Solutions, a new
Method of obtaining Electricity from Mechanical Force, and certain
relations between Electrostatic Induction and the Decomposition
of Water.” By CromweELt FLEETWOOD VaRLEY. Communicated

_by Prof. Sir W. Toomson, F.R.S. Received October 5, 1870.
(Abstract. )

Platinum plates immersed in sulphuric acid and water, as in a decompo-
sition-cell, require a potential of about 1°7 Daniell’s cell to decompose the
water ; with potentials of less amount the platinum plates can be charged
and discharged like condensers. They have enormous electrostatic capa-
city. Mercurial surfaces equally admit of polarization with hydrogen. A
surface of mercury in dilute sulphuric acid, when made negative to the water
by means of a powerful battery, flattens out. Ifthe mercury be replaced
by an amalgam of proper consistency, the flattening out is increased ; the re-
versal of the current restores the amalgam to its original dimensions. By
reversing the process, electric currents can be obtained from mechanical force.

A large vessel on a board has within it two shallow funnels, which are
connected by means of glass tubes with similar vessels outside of the large
one. Pure mercury is poured into the funnels until they and the outside
vessels are one-third filled. By tilting the board, mercury runs into the
one funnel and out of the other, and thus the surface in the one is made
to increase while that in the other decreases. Dilute sulphuric acid is
poured into the larger vessel so as to cover the two funnels; the latter
are connected together through a galvanometer.

If the mercury be pure and free from polarization, the tilting of the
board produces no electric current. On polarizing one of the surfaces with
hydrogen by a battery, it gives rise to a current through the galvanometer,
and thus shares the polarization over the two surfaces. If the battery be
removed, on augmenting the one surface and diminishing the other, a cur-
rent of electricity is seen to pass through the galvanometer.

A convenient method of showing this experiment on a large scale is to
procure a gutta-percha trough 4 inches deep and 4 by 2 inches broad. A
partition of the same material 2 inches high divides the lower half into two
separate chambers: these are partly filled with mercury; amalgamated
platinum plates, hung from a balance-lever, dip into the mercury. On
depressing one set of plates the others are elevated, and thus the mercurial
surface exposed to the fluid is alternately augmented and diminished to a
large amount. Twelve of these arranged in series give a current of rather
more potential than one cell of Daniell’s battery when the mercury is polar-
ized with hydrogen. The addition of a minute fragment of zinc to the
mercury maintains the polarization for a very long time, and the power is
considerably increased thereby. When a large surface of mercury (25 cir-
cular inches) has been polarized with a power of half a Daniell’s cell and is
rapidly reduced to the diameter of 2, inch, by letting the mereury flow out

u 2

244 Mr. C. F. Varley on Polarization of [Jan. 12,

of the funnel, some bubbles of hydrogen gas appear just as the last of the
mercury is running out, the decrease of surface evidently augmenting
the potential sufficiently to decompose the water: floating a small piece of
platinum on the mercury renders this phenomenon much more distinct.

All attempts to polarize the mercury with oxygen have failed to give a
current. . By depolarizing the mercury with a battery until no current is
generated by varying the dimensions of the exposed mercury surface, a me-
tallic surface neutral to the fluid is obtained.

The second part of the paper refers to the electrostatic capacity of plati-
num plates in dilute acid and water.

In order to determine this point, it is necessary to use sensitive, rapidly
oscillating, reflecting galvanometers of very small resistance. The author
has succeeded in measuring the charge which a square inch of platinum ex-
posed to another square inch of platinum surface receives from potentials
varying from 0:02 of a Daniell’s cell up to 1°6 Daniell’s cell. From a po-
tential of 0:02 to 0°08 the capacity remains sensibly constant; that is,
the discharge from the plates varies directly as the potential. When the
potential increases beyond 0:08, the charge which the plates receive in-
creases in a greater ratio, the capacity being 3°3 (in one experiment)
and 3°1 (in another experiment) times as great with a potential of 1:6
as it was with the potential of 0:1.

There is great difficulty attending accurate determination of the latter
amounts ; but the author expects that this increase of capacity will be
found to vary as the square root of the potential. The capacity of the
platinum plates with varying powers is shown in the accompanying Tables.

The author thinks these experiments tend to show that the fluid does
not actually touch the platinum plate, but is separated from it by a film,
which film, if a pure gas, must be less than the =e part of an inch,
when very small potentials are used. This distance decreases as the poten-
tial rises. Inasmuch as two surfaces equally electrified with the opposite
electricities attract each other with a power varying inversely as the square
of the distance, the experiment would seem to indicate that at very small
distances the platinum repels the water with a power varying inversely as
the cube of the distance.

The phenomena of electrification render accurate determinations of the
capacity extremely difficult. The fact of the phenomena of electrification
being present, leads the author to think that the separating film (Gf
such a film exists) is not a pure gas, but has five or more times as much
electrostatic capacity as pure gas.

A useful inference drawn from the above experiments is the impossibility
of working through any considerable length of uninsulated wire in the ocean.

The French Atlantic cable from Brest to St. Pierre works, upon the
average, tea words per minute; the author calculates that a solid con-
ductor of the same weight per mile as that used between the above stations
must be reduced to a length of less than 1100 yards in order that the rate
of signalling through it shall be not slower than through 2500 miles of

1871.] Metallic Surfaces in Aqueous Solutions. 245

the same conductor insulated ; and the bare wires can only be practically
worked on circuits not exceeding a mile.
Taste I.
Two platinum bulbs about 0°75 inch in diameter in dilute saahere acid.
Owing to the large resistance (1000 Ohms) used in R and R’, the actual
potential is uncertain in this experiment, because the conduction across the
fluid reduces it.

is 2. ey 4, 5. 6. rie
Mean
Potential divided by
in terms | Duration Swing of reflecting Current Mean potential | Approxi-
of acell jof electrifi- galvanometer hy the after minus the | and 100 |mate capa-
of cation in discharge of the bulbs magnet |remaining| to give city in
Daniell’s | seconds. on raising the key. came to | current, | relative micro-
battery. rest. capacity farads.
for various
potentials.
0-02 10 LE oe a 4 |
; ai of of 2 Oh ; 2 1 348
0-04 10 42 42 42 43 - 4 1 ‘
0:06 10 64 6 6h 62 : 6 1 :
i 2 a ry
- oe eee : ; ie 102 0p 365
0-16 10 18 17% 18 es .
| pee yee : } 163 | 1-09 379
0-2 10 24 24 24 13
S 20 24 24 24 ee | 2am 1-12 390
: 30 24 24 24 2
0-4 10 Idee IS 30S 2k |
A: 20 D8... 58 4 | DOF 1°39 484
3 30 Romo tommnaaa (| »
0-6 10 105 1053 104 %9
. 20 105 104 105 | 1043 ee 606
A 30 104 105 103 23
08 10 164.163 162 162 3
P 20; | 162,162 4161 » 159 1-99 693
30 162 162 161 0
1:0 10 230 235 230 280 5
- 20 232 231 230 231 ‘5 226 2°26 786
30 | 231 231 7
12 30 318 320 314 14 303 2°53 880
*1-4. 30 440 446 451 23 426 3°04 1057
EG 30 about 603 30, 41, 52) 562 35 1218

* Last three readings doubtful, the current remaining after the discharge being con-
siderable. The true reading would be Bila than indicated.

$$$

0-02 pens REC a ee (eer0S 311
0:04 Spare inca 3 2 :
0:06 Baie Ae ei a 42 i ‘
0:08 Gia) Ger Gyn To ag 6 ss f
0-10 par art tye Malia Ma eae i ‘ f
0-2 Mee ORO TAR YD oS hc ele :
0-4 De DON ISU Ue a aie 29 4
06 Big eyeh date kis) Recah La B3ue |,
08 DOR Donk Dom wh eo 58 : ‘
1-0 2 eT To ee hee 73 : :
1-6 Bar hase Elton whl one 116 ‘ ;
2:0 ge od 1 oa Cm 143 i ‘

The condenser of 311 microfarads capacity consisted of 24,300 square feet of metal
surface insulated by thin paper and paraffin wax.

246 Mr. W.K. Parker on the [Jan. 19,

TaBLe II.

Two platinum plates in acid and water, each exposing 1 square inch
surface. The resistance of R+R’=100 Ohms in this Table; by experi-
ment the potential of the two cells was found to be reduced 8 per cent.,
and was therefore very nearly 200 Ibs. instead of two cells Daniell’s.

: Ratio of
A 4 : C t : i
mate aime of Throw of aE by discharge remaining Porehcan cape Meee
tent: i ; tes. t ‘
ae he: tion. a discliarpe: current. ae farads.
seconds.
0 10 LO QO" 9 1
i Bo 1g 19. M19 a 18. bie
0:4 10 45 46 46 3
A 20 46 46 z 43 1:2 210
0:8 10 175 170 170 165 FL 159 2-2 3885
1:0 10 230 228 226 18 210 2°33 408
*1°2 10 310 308 3iil 22 288 26% 467
#14 10 373 380 382 30 350 pth 484
¥1°6 10 460 460 467 475 30 428 3:10 542
Condenser of 311 microfarads.
0:2 32 32 32 0) 32 1 ou
0:4 63 64 634 ” 63% ” ”
0°8 127 127 ” 127 ” ”
1:0 159 159 9 159 ” ”
1:2 188 187 189 % 188 ” ”
1-4 220 220 221 * 220 an »
16 252 254 252 254 45 253 ” ”
1:8 284 283 284 x 284. > ”
2:0 316 317 317 » 317 ” ”

* These readings are uncertain, being obliged to guess how much current remained
after the image had swung out and back, its momentum lasting longer than with
smaller deflections; the true reading would therefore be greater than those observed.

January 19, 1871.
General Sir EDWARD SABINE, K.C.B., President, in the Chair.

Prof. Alfred Newton was admitted into the Society.

The following communications were read :—

I. “ On the Structure and Development of the Skull of the Common
Frog (Rana temporaria).”’ By W. Kircunn Parker, F.R.S.
Received October 10, 1870.

(Abstract.)

At the close of my last paper “‘ On the Skull of the Common Fowl,” I
spoke of bringing before the Royal Society another, treating of that of

1871.] Skull of the Common Frog. 24:7

the osseous fish. I was working at the early conditions of the salmon’s
skull at the time.

I was, however, led to devote my attention to another and more instruc-
tive type early in the following year ; for it was then (January 1869) that
Professor Huxley was engaged in preparing his very important paper “ On
the Representation of the Malleus and Incus in the other Vertebrata”’ (see
Zool. Proc. May 27, 1869).

In repeating some of his observations for my own instruction, it occurred
to me to renew some researches I had been making from time to time on
the frog and toad. The results were so interesting to us both, that it was
agreed for me to work exhaustively at the development of the frog’s skull
before finishing the paper on that of the salmon. On this account Pro-
fessor Huxley mentions in his paper (op. cit. p. 406) that he leaves the
Amphibia out of his demonstration, and that they are to be worked out
by me. The amount of metamorphosis demonstrable in the chick whilst
enclosed in the egg suggested a much more definite series of changes in
a low, slow-growing Amphibian type. I think that this has been fully
borne out by what is shown in the present paper.

The first of the ten stages into which I have artificially divided my sub-
ject is the unhatched embryo, whilst its head and tail project only mode-
rately beyond the yelk-mass. Another stage is obtained by taking young
tadpoles on about the third day after they have escaped from their glairy
envelope; a few days elapse between the second and third stages, but a much
longer time between the third and fourth, for the fourth stage is the perfect
tadpole, before the limbs appear and whilst it is essentially a fish with
mixed Chimeroid and Myxinoid characters. Then the metamorphosing
tadpole is followed until it is a complete and nimble frog, two stages of
which are examined ; and then old individuals are worked out, which give
the culminating characters of the highest type of Amphibian.

The early stages were worked out principally from specimens hardened
in a solution of chromic acid; and the rich umber-brown colour of these
preparations made them especially fit for examination by reflected light.

Without going further into detail as to the mode of working my subject
out, and without any lengthened account of the results obtained, I may
state that the following conclusions have been arrived at; namely, that the
’ skull of the adult is highly compound, being composed of :—

Ist. Its own proper membranous sac ;

2nd. Of a posterior part which is a continuation, in an unsegmented
form, of the vertebral column ;

3rd. Of laminz which grow upwards from the first pair of facial arches,
and which enclose the fore part of the membranous sac, just as the “ in-
vesting mass ”’ of the cranial part of the notochord invests the hinder part.

4th. The ear-sacs and the olfactory labyrinth become inextricably com-
bined with the outer case of the brain. And

oth. The subcutaneous tissue of the scalp becomes ossified in certain

248 Mr. H. Mance on the Measurement (Jan. 19,

definite patches; these are the cranial roof-bones. Around the mouth
_ there are cartilages like those of the Lamprey and the Chimera; but
these yield in interest to the proper facial bars, which are as follows,
namely :—

First pair, the “trabecule.”

Second pair, the mandibular arch.

Third pair, the hyoid arch.

And fourth to seventh pairs: these are the branchials. :

These are all originally separate pairs of cartilaginous rods; and from
these are developed all the complex structures of the mouth, palate, face,
and throat. The pterygo-palatine arcade is merely a secondary connecting
bar developed, after some time, between the first and second arches.

Meckel’s cartilage arises as a segmentary bud from the lower part of the
second, and the ‘stylo-cerato-hyal,” as a similar secondary segment,
from the third arch.

By far the greater part of the cranium (its anterior two-thirds) is deve-
loped by out-growing lamine from the trabeculz, which after a time be-
come fused with the posterior or vertebral part of the skull.

When the tadpole is becoming a frog, the hyoid arch undergoes a truly
wonderful amount of metamorphosis.

The upper part, answering to the hyomandibular of the fish (not to the
whole of it, but to its upper half), becomes the “ incus,” and a detached
segment becomes the “ orbiculare,”’ which wedges itself between the ineus
and the “stapes.” The stapes isa “bung” cut out of the “ ear-sac.”
The stylo-cerato-hyal is set free, rises higher and higher, and then articu-
lates with the “ opisthotic ” region of the ear-sac ; in the toad it coalesces
therewith, as in the mammal. The lower part of the hyomandibular coa-
lesces with the back of the pair of the mandibular arch; and the “sym-
plectic ” of the osseous fish appears whilst the tadpole is acquiring its limbs
and its lungs, and then melts back again into the arch in front; it is re-
presented, however, in the bull-frog, but not in the common species,
by a distinct bone.

This very rough and imperfect abstract must serve at present to in-
dicate what has been seen and worked out in this most instructive vertebrate.

II. “ Method of measuring the Resistance of a Conductor or of a
Battery, or of a Telegraph-Line influenced by unknown Earth-
currents, from a single Deflection of a Galvanometer of unknown
Resistance.” By Henry Mancs, Superintendent Mekran Coast
and Persian Gulf Telegraph Department, Kurrachee. Commu-
nicated by Sir Wm. Tuomson. Received January 12, 1871.

“The resistance of each part of a circuit, such as that shown in fiz. 15
being known, the influence exercised by the shunt A B, as well as the

1871.] of Electrical Resistance. 249

total resistance of the whole between and y, can be easily ascertained by
simple and well-known formule.

Rieck. |
G
1 ¥, i RR
PROS EEE eras De
im & 13} 48 958 mim

But let a leakage 7, which we will suppose gives perfect earth, be
applied at some point in the shunt A B, the deflection previously produced
on G by a current arising in L will probably be considerably changed. I
say probably, because by sliding the leakage r along the whole length of
the shunt, we shall at last find a point Zat which the needle will return to
its original deflection ; the position of Z being ascertained, any resistance
varying from infinity to “‘dead earth’? may be applied without causing
any change in the deflection of the needle.

It is evident that, although the total resistance of the circuit between x
and y has been lessened by the insertion of the leakage, a proportionately
larger amount of current is diverted from the galvanometer by that part of
the shunt between L and the leakage at Z.

Presuming the electromotive EK in L to remain constant, and taking
7r=0, we have the intensity of the current passing through G represented
by the equation

ee Na Ra cel Noe
{ 7 Ga GaseBy A+B }
but after r is connected, the equation becomes
E
RB RB ;
Bee eg Geen Se
eam) Sed
AG eee =
== ng

As the condition that the galvanometer deflection remains unchanged, the
first of these equations must be equal to the second, from which we obtain
the formula
A
‘Be
the resistance G being immaterial. It will therefore be seen that R
always bears the same proportion to L that B does to A, the latter
branches bearing some analogy to the proportion-coils of a Wheatstone
testing bridge.

Under certain circumstances a test might be taken without any battery

L=R.

250 Mr. H. Mance on ihe Measurement (Jan. 19,

at all. In asubmerged cable there is frequently sufficient earth-current
to supply the electromotive force in the branch L ; if not, a small battery
can be inserted to maintain a steady current, and the internal resistance of
the cells afterwards deducted. The polarization-current from a leakage of
low resistance in a cable would enable us to find the resistance from either
side through the fault without the application of a battery. And, lastly,
this method may be used to ascertain the internal resistance of a battery.

The above method occurred to me about two years since during some
experiments made to determine the resistance of the bridge-circuit and
the exact proportion of current traversing each branch of the Wheatstone
balance when the potentials at W and Z are unequal.

Fig. 2.

If I equals the intensity of the current at « or y, and 2,, 7, 2, ty 2, the
intensities in the sections G, R, A, 7, B, then

G.(B+R+r)+BR

SS SS SS l=
A (B+ R+7)+ Br Us z, PPO ceo So Ss (1)
AC (BEE Reb) le i
G.(B+R+r)+BR + i, «bey a ts ae ( )
Re (AbD PG) 1 8G a2 (3)
r.(A+B+G)+AB i,
7 (A+B+G)+BA rae ms
Ro CA++) 256 jo ae
B(R4r)+(B+R+1) (AFG) _1 2
Gr—AR 7, ae
Or if the current in the branch B passes from W to Z,
AR—Gr

should be substituted for the denominator of the last equation.

Equations (1), (2), (3), and (4) give the shunt-coefficient of the respec-
tive branches A, G, r, R; thus if G were a galvanometer, the strength of
the deflection recorded multiplied by equation (1) would give the value of
intensity I.

If, then, we consider G a galvanometer and the resistance r a leakage
applied at Z, we have a similar diagram to that given in fig. 1; and the
first of the five equations given above will enable us to determine the shunt-
coefficient for the part A which lies between L and the leakage at Z.

1871.| of Electrical Resistance. 251

Now this, together with the plan of testing described in the first para-
graph, suggests an easy method for ascertaining by calculation the com-
bined resistance of any system of derived circuits connected in the form of
the Wheatstone’s parallelogram ; thus if I wish to know the resistance
offered to the passage of acurrent between a and y in fig. 3, I can find it

Fig. 3.
; 200 ca 200
& R
ee B of,
mmm
7 Ee > so

in the following manner.

First assume the existence at 2 of a sixth branch bearing (in resistance)
the same proportion to R that A does to B; that is to say, the supposititious
braach

A
=R.—.
: B

Now disconnect r from the point Z, and we have again a diagram similar

to that in fig. 1; and as we have provided that == a the connexion

or disconnexion of r at the point Z will make no difference whatever in the
quantity of current passing from L into the branch G. I may therefore
assume that, although the total resistance of the circuit between g and y
has been decreased, the branch A has at the same time been able to divert
a proportionately greater amount of current from the side G, in which the
intensity remains unaltered.
If, then,
R, equals the resistance between g and y when the branch r is dis-
connected,
S, the shunt-coefficient of A B which forms a shunt in the absence of r,
R, the resistance between g and y after r is connected at Z,
S, the shunt-coefficient for the part A ascertained by equation (1),
we have
R, x S —Rh, x Se
ne ues

Bo R
and R, minus the supposititious branch (=) will give the required com-

bined resistance of the circuit between x and y.
Let R, be the combined resistance. Commencing with the equation

RA | G.(A+B) \ A+B+G
roe ie, kA,

G(BTE+)+BR | eae
A.(B+R+7)+Br

252 On the Internal Resistance of a Multiple Battery. [Jan. 19,

we obtain
R.(A+B+G)
= B oa _ RA
G.(B+R+r)+BR | | ‘S

A. (B+R+4r)+Br
If the potential at Z equalled that at W, the formula

R _(G+R).(A+R)
; G+R+A+r

would of course be sufficient.

III. “ Measurement of the Internal Resistance of a Multiple Battery
by adjusting the Galvanometer to Zero.” By Henry Mancz.
Communicated by Sir Wo. Tomson, LL.D.,F.R.S. Received
January 12, 1871.

The following method of taking the internal resistance of a battery will
be found to give excellent results when several cells are to be tested.

Take one element from the rest of the cells and arrange the circuit as in
the annexed figure. Connect the poles of the battery under observation
by a shunt 8S, and adjust the resistance of the latter till zero is obtained
on the galvanometer. E

Let E be the number of cells tested, ating,

+ »* pp
e number of cells opposed, s A
S = resistance of shunt,
R= internal resistance of E.
Then

R—s# _s.
é

In practice I usually returned the detached cell to the battery when
Sx E gave the internal resistance of the whole within a fraction of a unit.
It is assumed that the electromotive force in e equals that of the whole

battery multiplied by - ; the chance of error on account of this not being

exactly the case would be lessened by detaching a larger number of cells
than one when the internal resistance of the remaining portion would be
given by the first formula.

ce ae”
ane

1871.] On a Constant Form of Daniell’s Battery. 253

IV. “Modification of Wheatstone’s Bridge to find the Resistance of
a Galvanometer-Coil from a single deflection of its own needle.”
By Prof. Sir Witx14am Tuomson, F.R.S. Received January
19,1871.

Tn any useful arrangement in which a galvanometer or electrometer and
a galvanic element or battery are connected, through whatever trains or
network of conductors, let the galvanometer and battery be interchanged.
Another arrangement is obtained which will probably be useful for a very
different, although reciprocally related object. Hence, as soon as I learned
from Mr. Mance his admirable method of measuring the internal re-
sistance of a galvanic element (that described in the first of his two pre-
ceding papers), it occurred to me that the reciprocal arrangement would
afford a means of finding the resistance of a galvanometer-coil, from a
single deflection of its own needle, by a galvanic element of unknown re-
sistance. The resulting method proves to be of such extreme simplicity
that it would be incredible that it had not occurred to any one before,
were it not that I fail to find any trace of it published in books or papers ;
and that personal inquiries of the best informed electricians of this country
have shown that, in this country at least, it is a novelty. It consists
simply in making the galvanometer-coil one of the four conductors of a
Wheatstone’s bridge, and adjusting, as usual, to get the zero of current
when the bridge contact is made, with only this difference, that the test of
the zero is not by a galvanometer in the bridge showing no deflection, but
by the galvanometer itself, the resistance of whose coil is to be measured,
showing an unchanged deflection. Neither diagram nor further explana-
tion is necessary to make this understood to any one who knows Wheat-
stone’s bridge.

V. “Qn a Constant Form of Daniell’s Battery.” By Prof. Sir
Wixti1aM Tuomson, F.R.S. Received January 19, 1871.

Graham’s discovery of the extreme slowness with which one liquid
diffuses into another, and Fick’s mathematical theory of diffusion, cannot fail
to suggest that diffusion alone, without intervention of a porous cell or
membrane, might be advantageously used for keeping the two liquids of a
Daniell’s battery separate. Hitherto, however, no galvanic element with-
out some form of porous cell, membrane, or other porous solid for sepa-
rator, has been found satisfactory in practice.

The first idea of dispensing with a porous cell, and keeping the two
liquids separate by gravity, is due to Mr. C. F. Varley, who proposed to
put the copper-plate in the bottom of a jar, resting on it a saturated solu-
tion of sulphate of copper, resting on this a less dense solution of sulphate
of zinc, and immersed in the sulphate of zinc the metal zinc-plate fixed

254 Sir William Thomson on a [Jan. 19,

near the top of the jar. But he tells me that batteries on this plan, called
** sravity-batteries,” were carefully tried in the late Electric and Inter-
national Telegraph Company’s establishments, and found wanting in
economy. ‘The waste of zinc and of sulphate of copper was found to be more
in them than in the ordinary porous-cell batteries. Daniell’s batteries
without porous cells have also been tried in France, and found unsatisfactory
on account of the too free access of sulphate of copper to the zine, which they
permit. Still, Graham’s and Fick’s measurements leave no room to doubt
but that the access of sulphate of copper to the zinc would be much less rapid
if by true diffusion alone, than it cannot but be in any form of porous-cell
battery with vertical plates of copper and zinc opposed to one another, as are
the ordinary telegraphic Daniell’s batteries which Mr. Varley finds superior
to his own ‘‘ gravity-battery.” The comparative failure of the latter, there-
fore, must have arisen from mixing by currents of the liquids. All that seems
necessary, therefore, to make the gravity-battery much superior instead of
somewhat inferior to the porous-cell battery, is to secure that the lower
part of the liquid shall always remain denser than the upper part. In seek-
ing how to realize this condition, it first occurred to me to take advantage
of the fact that saturated solution of sulphate of zinc is much denser than
saturated solution of sulphate of copper. It seems* that, at 15° tempera-
ture, saturated aqueous solution of sulphate of copper is of 1°186 sp. gr.,
and contains in every 100 parts of water 33:1 parts of the crystalline salt ;
and that at 15° the saturated solution of sulphate of zine is of sp. gr.
1:44, and contains in every 100 parts of water 140°5 parts of sulphate of
zinc, both results being from Michel and Krafft’s experiments+. Hence
I made an element with the zinc below; next it saturated solution of sul-
phate of zinc, gradually diminishing to half strength through a few centi-
metres upwards ; saturated sulphate of copper resting on this; and the
copper-plate fixed above in the sulphate-of-copper solution. In the be-
ginning, and for some time after, it is clear that the sulphate of copper can
have no access to the zinc otherwise than by true diffusion. I have found
this anticipation thoroughly realized in trials continued for several weeks ;
but the ultimate fate of such a battery is that the sulphate of zine must
penetrate through the whole liquid, and then it will be impossible to keep
sulphate of copper separate in the upper part, because saturated solution
of sulphate of zine certainly becomes denser on the introduction of sul-
phate of copper to it. To escape this chaotic termination I have intro-
duced a siphon of glass with a piece of cotton-wick along its length inside
it, so placed as to draw off liquor very gradually from a level somewhat
nearer the copper than the zinc; and a glass funnel, also provided with a
core of cotton-wick, by which water semisaturated with sulphate of zine
may be continually introduced at a somewhat lower level. A galvanic

* Storer’s Dictionary of Solubilities of Chemical Substances. Cambridge, Massa -

chusetts: Sever and Francis, 1864.
{+ Ann. Ch. et Phys. (3) vol. xli. pp. 478, 482: 1854.

1871.] Constant Form of Daniell’s Battery. 255

element thus arranged will undoubtedly continue remarkably constant for
many months; but it has one defect, which prevents me from expecting
permanence for years. The zine being below, must sooner or later, ac-
cording to the less or greater vertical dimensions of the cell, become
covered with precipitated copper from the sulphate of copper which finds
its way (however slowly) to the zinc. On the other hand, if the zinc be
above, the greater part of the deposited copper falls off incoherently from
the zine through the liquid to the copper below, where it does no mischief,
provided always that the zinc be not amalgamated,—a most important con-
dition for permanent batteries, pointed out to me many years ago by Mr.
Varley. Placing the zinc above has also the great practical advantage that,
even when after a very long time it becomes so much coated with metallic
copper as to seriously injure the electrical effect, it may be removed,
cleaned, and replaced without otherwise disturbing the cell; whereas if
the zinc be below, it cannot be cleaned without emptying the cell and
mixing the solutions, which will entail a renewal of fresh separate solutions
in setting up the cell again. I have therefore planned the following
form of element, which cannot but last until the zinc is eaten away so
much as to fall to pieces, and which must, I think, as long as it lasts, have
a very satisfactory degree of constancy.

The cell is of glass, in order that the condition of the solutions and
metals which it contains may be easily seen at any time. It is simply
a cylindrical or rectangular jar with a flat bottom. It need not be
more than 10 centimetres deep; but it may be much deeper, with ad-
vantage in respect to permanence and ease of management, when very
small internal resistance is not desired. A disk of thin sheet copper is laid
at its bottom. A properly shaped mass of zinc is supported in the upper
part of the jar. A glass tube (which for brevity will be called the charging-
tube) of a centimetre or more internal diameter, ending in a wide saucer or
funnel above, passes through the centre of the zinc, and is supported so as
to rest with its lower open end about a centimetre above the copper. A
glass siphon with cotton-wick core is placed so as to draw liquid gradu-
ally from a level about a centimetre and a half above the copper.
The jar is then filled with semisaturated sulphate-of-zinc solution. A
copper wire or stout ribbon of copper coated with india-rubber or gutta-
percha passes vertically down through the liquid to the copper-plate
below, to which it is riveted or soldered to secure metallic communication.
Another suitable electrode is kept in metallic communication with the
zinc above. To put the cell in action, fragments of sulphate of copper,
small enough to fall down through the charging-tube, are placed in the
funnel above. In the course of a very short time the whole liquid below
the lower end of the charging-tube becomes saturated with sulphate of
copper, and the cell is ready for use. It may be kept always ready by
occasionally (once a week for instance) pouring in enough of fresh water,
or of water quarter saturated with sulphate of zinc at the top of the cell,

256 Sir William Thomson ona ~ [Jan. 19,

to replace the liquid drawn off by the siphon from near the bottom. A
cover may be advantageously added above, to prevent evaporation. When
the cell is much used, so that zinc enough is dissolved, the liquid added
above may be pure water; orif large internal resistance is not objected to,
the liquid added may be pure water, whether the cell has been much used
or not; but after any interval, during which the battery has not been
much in use, the liquid added ought to be quarter saturated, or even
stronger solution of sulphate of zinc, when it is desired to keep down the
internal resistance. It is probable that one or more specific-gravity beads
kept constantly floating between top and bottom of the heterogeneous
fluid will be found a useful adjunct, to guide in judging whether to fill up
with pure water or with sulphate-of-zinc solution. They may be kept in a
place convenient for observation by caging them in a vertical glass tube
perforated sufficiently to secure equal density in the horizontal layers of
liquid, to be tested by the floaters.

An extemporized cell on this plan was exhibited to the Royal Society,
and its resistance (measured as an illustration of Mance’s method, de-
scribed in the first of his two previous communications) was found to be
°29 of an Ohm (that is to say, 290,000,000 centimetres per second). The
copper and zinc plates of this cell, being circular, were about 30 cen-
timetres in diameter, and the distance between them was about 7*5 centi-
metres. A Grove’s cell, of such dimensions that forty in series would give ~
an excellent electric light, was also measured for resistance, and found to
be ‘19 of an Ohm. Its intensity was found to be 1°8 times that of the
new cell, which is the usual ratio of Grove’s to Daniell’s ; hence seventy-
two of the new cells would have the intensity of forty of Grove’s. But the
resistance of the seventy-two in series would be 209 Ohms, as against 76
Ohms of the forty Grove’s; hence, to get as powerful an electric light,
threefold surface, or else diminished resistance by diminished distance of
the plates, would be required. How much the resistance may be dimi-
nished by diminishing the distance rather than increasing the surface, it is
impossible to deduce from experiments hitherto made.

Two or three cells, such as the one shown to the Royal Society, will be
amply sufficient to drive a large ordinary turret-clock without a weight ;
and the expense of maintaining them will be very small in comparison
with that of winding the clock. The prime cost of the heavy wheel-work
will be avoided by the introduction of a comparatively inexpensive electro-
magnetic engine. For electric bells, and all telegraphic testing and signal-
ing on shore, the new form of battery will probably be found easier of
management, less expensive, and more trustworthy than any of the forms
of battery hitherto used. For use at sea, it is probable that the sawdust
Daniell’s, first introduced on board the ‘ Agamemnon’ in 1858, and ever
since that time very much used both at sea and on shore, will still probably
be found the most convenient form; but the new form is certainly better
for all ordinary shore uses.

1871.] Constant Form of Daniell’s Battery. — 257

The accompanying drawing represents a design suitable for the electric
light, or other purposes, for which an interior resistance not exceeding ;%,
of an Ohm is desired. The zinc is in the form of a grating, to prevent

the lodgment of bubbles of hydrogen gas, which I find constantly, but very
slowly, gathering upon the zincs of the cells I have tried, although the

solutions used have no free acid, unless such as may come from the ordi-
nary commercial sulphate of copper and commercial sulphate-of-zinc
erystals which were used.

POSTSCRIPT.
Received February 2, 1871.

The principle which I have adopted for keeping the sulphate of copper
from the zinc is to allow it no access to the zinc except by true diffusion.
This principle would be violated if the whole mass of the liquid contiguous
to the zinc is moved toward the zine. Such a motion actually takes place
in the second form of element (that which is represented in the drawing,
and which is undoubtedly the better form of the two) every time crystals
of sulphate of copper are dropped inte the charging-tube. As the crystals
dissolve, the liquid again sinks, but not through the whole range through
which it rose when the crystals were immersed. It sinks further as the
sulphate of copper is electrically precipitated on the copper plate below in
course of working the battery. Neglecting the volume of the metallic
copper, we may say, with little error, that the whole residual rise is that
corresponding to the volume of water of crystallization of the crystals which

VOL, XIX. =

258 On a Constant Form of Daniell’s Battery. [Jan. 19,

have been introduced and used. It becomes, therefore, a question whether
it may not become a valuable economy to use anhydrous sulphate of copper
instead of the crystals; but at present we are practically confined to the
‘blue vitriol’’ crystals of commerce, and therefore the quantity of water
added at the top of the cell from time to time must be, on the whole,- at
least equal to the quantity of water of crystallization introduced below by
the crystals. Unless a cover is added to prevent evaporation, the quantity
of water added above must exceed the water of crystallization introduced
below by at least enough to supply what has evaporated. There ought to
be a further excess, because a downward movement of the liquid from the
zinc to the level from which the siphon draws is very desirable to retard
the diffusion of sulphate of copper upwards to the zinc. Lastly, this down-
ward movement is also of great value to carry away the sulphate of zinc as
it is generated in the use of the battery. The quantity of water added
above ought to be regulated so as to keep the liquid in contact with the
zinc a little less than half saturated with sulphate of zinc, as it seems,
from the observations of various experimenters, that the resistance of water
semisaturated with sulphate of zinc is considerably less than that of a sa-
turated solution. A still more serious inconvenience than a somewhat in-
creased resistance has been pointed out to me by Mr. Varley as a consequence
of allowing sulphate of zinc to accumulate in the battery. Sulphate of zinc
crystallizes over the lip of the jar, and forms pendents like icicles outside,
which act as capillary siphons, and carry off liquid. Mr. Varley tells me
that this curious phenomenon is not unfrequently observed in telegraph-
batteries, and sometimes goes so far as to empty a cell and throw it alto-
gether out of action. Even without this extreme result, the crystallization
of zinc about the mouth of the jar is very inconvenient and deleterious.
It is of course altogether avoided by the plan I now propose.

In conclusion, then, the siphon-extractor must be arranged to carry off
all the water of crystallization of the sulphate of copper decomposed in the
use of the cell, and enough of water besides to carry away as much sulphate
of zinc as is formed in the use of the battery. Probably the most conve-
nient mode of working the system in practice will be to use a glass capillary
siphon, drawing quickly enough to carry off in a few hours as much water
as is poured in each time at the top ; and to place, as shown in the draw-
ing, the discharging end of the siphon so as to limit the discharge to a
level somewhat above the upper level of the zincgrating. It will no doubt
be found convenient in practice to add measured amounts of sulphate of
copper by the charging-tube each time, and at the same time to pour ina
measured amount of water, with or without a small quantity of sulphate of
zinc in solution.

As 100 parts by weight of sulphate of copper crystals contain, as nearly
as may be, 36 parts of water, it may probably answer very well to put in, for
every kilogramme of sulphate of copper, half a kilogramme of water. Expe-
rience (with the aid of specific-gravity beads) will no doubt render it very

1871.] Altitude Determination of a Ship’s Place. 259

easy, by a perfectly methodical action involving very little labour, to keep
the battery in good and constant action, according to the circumstances of
each case.

When, as in laboratory work, or in arrangements for lecture-illustrations,
there may be long intervals of time during which the battery is not used,
it will be convenient to cease adding sulphate of copper when there is no
immediate prospect of action being required, and to cease pouring in water
when little or no colour of sulphate of copper is seen in the solution below.
The battery is then in a state in which it may be left untouched for months
or years. All that will be necessary to set it in action again will be to fill
it up with water to replace what has evaporated in the interval, and stir
the liquid in the upper part of the jar slightly, until the upper specific-
gravity bead is floated to near the top by sulphate of zinc, and then to
place a measured amount of sulphate of copper in the funnel at the top of
the charging-tube.

VI. “On the Determination of a Ship’s Place from Observations of _
Altitude.” By Sir Witi1am Tuomson. Received Feb. 6, 1871.

The ingenious and excellent idea of calculating the longitude from two dif-
ferent assumed latitudes with one altitude, marking off on a chart the points
thus found, drawing a line through them, and concluding that the ship was
somewhere on that line at the time of the observation, is due to Captain
T. H. Sumner *. It is now well known to practical navigators. It is de-
scribed in good books on navigation, as, for instance, Raper’s ($§ 1009-
1014). Were it not for the additional trouble of calculating a second
triangle, this method ought to be universally used, instead of the ordinary
practice of calculating a single position, with the most probable latitude
taken as if it were the true latitude. -I believe, however, that even when
in a channel, or off a coast trending north-east and south-west, or north-
west and south-east, where Sumner’s method is obviously of great practical
value, some navigators do not take advantage of it; although no doubt the
most skilful use it habitually in all circumstances in which it is advantageous.
I learned it first in 1858, from Captain Moriarty, R.N., on board H.M.S.
‘Agamemnon. Heused it regularly in the Atlantic Telegraph expeditions
of that year and of 1865 and 1866, not merely at the more critical times, but
in connexion with each day’s sights. Instead of solving two triangles, as di-

rected by Captain Sumner, the same result may be obviously obtained by

* ‘A new and accurate method of finding a Ship’s Position at Sea,’ by Capt. I. H.
Sumner. Boston, 1843. ‘In 1843, Commander Sullivan, R.N., not having heard of
“this work, found the line of equal altitude on entering the River Plate ; and identifying
‘the ship’s place on it in 12 fathoms by means of the chart, shaped his course up the
“river. The idea may thus have suggested itself to others; but the credit of having
“reduced it to a method and made it public belongs to Capt. Sumner.”’ (Raper’s Na-
vigation, edition 1857.)

x 2

260 Sir W. Thomson on the Determination of a ([Jan. 19,

finding a second angle (Z) of the one triangle (P ZS) ordinarily solved (P
being the earth’s pole, Z the ship’s zenith, and S the sun or star). The
angle ordinarily calculated is P, the hour-angle. By calculating Z, the
sun’s azimuth also, from the same triangle, the locus on which the ship must
be is of course found by drawing on the chart, through the point which
would be the ship’s place were the assumed latitude exactly correct, a line
inclined to the east and west at an angle equal to Z. But, as Captain Mo-
riarty pointed out to me, the calculation of the second angle would involve
about as much work as solving for P a second triangle with a slightly dif-
ferent latitude ; and Capt. Sumner’s own method has practical advantages
in affording a check on the accuracy of the calculation by repetition with
varied data.

A little experience at sea suggests that it would be very desirable to
dispense with the morning and evening spherical triangles altogether,
and to abolish calculation as far as possible in the ordinary day’s work.
When we consider the thousands of triangles daily calculated among all the
ships at sea, we might be led for a moment to imagine that every one has
been already solved, and that each new calculation is merely a repetition of
one already made ; but this would be a prodigious error; for nothing short
of accuracy to the nearest minute in the use of the data would thoroughly
suffice for practical purposes. Now, there are 5400 minutes in 90°, and
therefore there are 5400? or 157,464,000,000 triangles to be solved each for
a single angle. This, at 1000 fresh triangles per day, would occupy above
400,000 years. Even with an artifice, such as that to be described below,
for utilizing solutions of triangles with their sides integral numbers of de-
grees, the number to be solved (being 90° or 729,000) would be too great,
and the tabulation of the solutions would be too complicated (on account
of the trouble of entering for the three sides) to be convenient for prac-
tice; and Tables of this kind which have been actually calculated and
published (as, for instance, Lynn’s Horary Tables *) have not come into ge-
neral use.

It has occurred to me, however, that by dividing the P
problem into the solution of two right-angled triangles,
it may be practically worked out so as to give the ship’s
place as accurately as it can be deduced from the ob-
servations, without any calculation at all, by aid of a table
of the solution of the 8100 right-angled spherical triangles Z
of which the legs are integral numbers of degrees.

Let O be the point in which the arc of a great circle ,
less than 90° through S, perpendicular to P Z, meets P Z
or P Z produced.

If the data were S P, P Z, and the hour-angle P, the solution of the
right-angled triangle SPO would give PO and SO. Subtracting PZ

* Horary Tables for finding the time by inspection &c., by Thomas Lynn, late Com-
mander in the sea-service of the Hast-India Company. London, 1827, 4to.

0 46190 0 | O 9610 010 S$|0 0 lo 8/0 0 | 0 €¢10 0 | 0 @)/0 0 | 0 T¥|)0 0
0 4|¢ee0 || 0 99/1780 | 0 Go| F80 Io F8| 680 |O Se) 980 | 0 zw] £60 | 0 19] st 0
Leff | [iN ee | 1 ec¢\6é 1 1 *¢| Itt le eS ole I 2¢ | PLT I 1¢| 911
@ 49/se1 | 8 99) Wt & Ge | SVT z ro | ort ZB eG \"ep Pale coo) 1a @ 1¢| eo
y £4O\ tise |v 99 |Ftze | F GS| Ste |lp FE} 12@%@ | b EF) FBG | F we] see | V If | 18S
9 £42\erz ||9 98\erze 19 Ge¢|\see |g PE\ 99% | 9 Socio € 9 wig ¢€ 19 19/6 €
6 £48) 912@ | 6 9¢| 18 | 6 e ¢ 6 988 6 6¢\I1FE | 6 I1¢| 9FE
ol £9 | gp e@ || Gl 9¢| cee | GI p Pv cir | giao] siPr || €l 1S | PF
Eyal AG | 1p || OI 9S 86 F. 91 gs v pv gr Fh || or 9LIg|1I ¢
vo OL | HE 0E || GZ OL | 8S 1 | SE [l Fé 67 &2 | 6G Ge
66 ££ LV Of || L LL | 2 IE || @ GZ FE 1g FZ | ST 98
yr 84/10 Te \l Ze 421 Ge 12 || 6 44) 1G Ge || er 94 | OF CE | eT Of | IF PE FI GL | 18 98
62 8Z| GE ie || Pr 3418 ei 4h 42) Fh 88 || 1g 42) 6S SE || HS 94 | Ge PE LG cL | 9F 9E
cl 64 | 23 1¢@ || le gf | 0 ze || 92 8Z | 91 G8 || O BL) GI FE | Ge £2) 8 Ge Iv 94/10 LE
1G 6Z | Ff 12 || 9z 6£ | Te ze || & GL) 8S SE || Ip 8Z | Ve VE || OT SZ | Ie Ge eg JL er eS
82 08 | Fh Te || 9 og | ah ze || PF GL | 6E EE || 1% 62 | 9E VE |) 8g Bf | EE GE OL 8Z | 9% LE
Fy 181 Fo 1e || P08 | Zo Ze || G&S OS | GF SE | S 08 | 9F VE || OF GL | HV GE cg gf | 8& LE
Ir 18\& sell cz igit e2 | 18 | 69 Se || Sh 08 | 9G FE || Gs 08 | FE GE Ib 6£ | 6h LE
61 28 iil zell tl 28| ol ee] ey ig |s8 re] se 18 |9 SE] 9 I8|F 9E 1208 |0 8
9¢ ZB | GI Ze || OF ZB | ST Se || Sa GB | VE ve || 9. ZB | FL GSE | GF 18 | EL 9E €1 18 |6 8&
re @3 | 9% ze || 6L 28 | cs ge || P G8 | FS FE || Gh GB | GS GE || CE ZB | IG OE 0 & | SI 8&
ZL #8 | @ ze || 6G eg | BE ee || SF ES | OF FE || TE 8 | 6e GE | LE €8 | 8G YE LP GS | 93 SE | 6
0¢ $8 | 8@ ze | ge FQ | Ze Ge || 96 F8 | Ze Fe | FI HS | 9E SE T FS] GE OF re €8 | Ge 8E | 8
6% 98 | &F ze || 81 eg | ze ge || 2 G8 | SF ve | 9¢ F8 | lh GE | Gh P8 | IP OE GB FS | GE BE | Z
4 98 | 8P ze || se eg | Ze Ge || GF G8 | Lh Fe || GE 8 | OF GE || OF G8 | OF 9E OL &8 | Sk se | 9
9F 98 | Zo ze || 82 98 | 1¢ Se || 08 98 | 1S FE || GS 98 | OG GE || ST 98 | OF YE g¢ G8 | 6F 8e | §
ro 28 | Gc se || 8ST £8 | FG ef || SI £8 | PS FE || 9 48] FE SE || 6g 98 | FE 9E oF 98 | &¢ SE | F
e 98/| se ze |l 6c £8 | £¢ ee || FS £8 | LE FE || GF £8 | Lo GE || PH L8 | OG 9E rE £8 | 9E BE
Ze 88 | GE se || Ge 88 | 6S ee || 9E 88 | GE FE || EF 88 | 6S GE | OF 88 | 8G OE @Z 88 | 8g 8E | &
1% 68/9 £2 || 03 68 | 0 Fe | $1 68/9 SE] 91 G8) O ge] Al es) Ze It 68) 9 ge) ft
‘Vv ddqy-00 Vv ‘d£y-00 Vv ‘dy-00 ‘Vv dAy-00 Vv dAy-00 V ‘dAy-09
9
“Lg —=9 "9G=0 "Gg=0 (pe=v “ofS =P rola =a

1871.] Ship’s Place from Observations of Altitude. 261

from PO, we have ZO; and this, with S O in the triangle S ZO, gives
the zenith distance, S Z, and the azimuth, S ZO, of the body observed.

Suppose, now, that the solution of the right-angled spherical triangle
S PO for PO and S O to the nearest integral numbers of degrees could
suffice. Further, suppose P Z to be the integral number of degrees closest
to the estimated co-latitude, then ZO will be also an integral number of
degrees. Thus the two right-angled spherical triangles SPO and SZO
have each arcs of integral numbers of degrees for legs. Now I find that.
the two steps which I have just indicated can be so managed as to give,
with all attainable accuracy, the whole information deducible from them~
regarding the ship’s place. Thus the necessity for calculating the solutions
of spherical triangles in the ordinary day’s work at sea is altogether done
away with, provided a convenient Table of the solutions of the 8100 triangles
is available. I have accordingly, with the cooperation of Mr. E. Roberts,
of the ‘ Nautical Almanac’ Office, put the calculation in hand; and I hope
soon to be able to publish a Table of solutions of right-angled spherical
triangles, showing co-hypotenuse* and one angle, to the nearest minute,
for every pair of values of the legs from 0° to 90°. The rule to be pre-
sently given for using the Tables will be readily understood when it is con-
sidered that the data for the two triangles are their co-hypotenuses, the
difference between a leg of one and a leg of the other, and the condition
that the other leg is common to the two triangles. The Table is arranged
with all the 90 values for one leg (4) in a vertical column, at the head of
which is written the value of the other leg (a). Although this value is
really not wanted for the particular nautical problem in question, there are
other applications of the Table for which it may be useful. On the same
level with the value of 4, in the column corresponding to a, the Table shows
the value of the co-hypotenuse and of the angle A opposite to the leg a.
I take first the case in which latitude and declination are of the same name,
the latitude is greater than the declination, and the azimuth (reckoned from
south or north, according as the sun crosses the meridian to the south or
north of the zenith of the ship’s place) is less than 90°. The hypotenuses,
legs, and angles P and Z of the two right-angled triangles of the preceding
diagram are each of them positive and less than 90°, and the two co-hypo-.
tenuses are the sun’s declination and altitude respectively. We have then
the following rule :—

(1) Estimate the latitude to the nearest integral number of degrees by
dead reckoning.

(2) Look from one vertical column to another, until one is found in
which co-hypotenuses approximately agreeing with the declination and
altitude are found opposite to values of 6 which differ by the complement
of the assumed latitude.

(3) The exact values of the co-hypotenuse and the angle A corresponding

* It is more convenient that the complements of the hypotenuses should be shown
than the hypotenuses, as the trouble of taking the complements of the declination and
the observed altitude is so saved.

i ees loa = eee ae oes Sie i
| co-hyp. : yp- |co-hyp.| A. |ico-hyp.) A. jeo-hyp.| A. || co-hyp. | A. ||co-hyp.| A.

Cenawvs woo

asec —b

ots ete
: Aa ea a ee ee

I dr ie

commence

° ‘ ° ‘ ° ‘ al 5 :

§ 6 36 6| 8916) 35 6| 8918 | af 6| 89.20) 33 6 | shat | 33 6) 8h 98
37 58 35 59 | 88 33 | 34 59 | 88 36 | 33 59 | 88 39 || 32 59 | 88 42 | 31 59 | S88
37 56 35 57 | 87 49 || 34 57 | 87 54 | 33 57 | 87 59 || 32 57 | 88 3 | 31 57 | 88
37 53 35 54 | 87 6 || 34 54 | 87 12 | 33 54 | 87 18 | 32 55 | 87 24 | 31 55 | 87 30

7 50 35 50 | 86 23 || 34 51 | 86 30 | 33 51 | 86 38 || 32 52 | 86 46 | 31 52 | 86
37 45 35 46 | 85 39 || 34 47 | 85 49 | 33 47 | 85 58 || 32 48 | 86 7 | 81 48 | 86
37 40 35 41 | 84 56 | 34 42 | 85 7 | 33 42 | 85 18 || 32 43 | 85 29 || 31 44 | 85

35 36 | $4 14 | 34 37 | 84 26 | 33 37 | 84 38 || 32 38 | S4 50 | 31 39 | 85
35 29 | 83 31 || 34 30 | 83 45 | 33 32 | 83 59 | 32 33 | 84 12 | 31 34) SH:
35 22 | 82 49 || 34 24] 83 4 || 33 25 | 83 19 || 32 26 | 83 34 || 31 27 | 88
35 14 | 82 6 || 34 16 | 82 28 || 33 18 | 82 40 || 32 19 | 82 56 | 31 21 | 83
35 61} 8125 || 34 8 | 81 43 || 38 10| 82 1 || 82 11 | 82 19 || 31 13 | 82 ¢
34 56 | 80 43 || 33 59 | 81 3 || 38 1] 81 22 | 82 3 | 81 41 | 81 5 | 82
34 46 | 80 2 || 33 49 | SO 23 | 32 52 | 80 44 | 31 54 | 81 4 | 3057/81 2
34 36 | 79 21 || 33 39 | 79 44 32 42 | 80 6 || 31 44 | 80 28 | 30 47 | SO
34 24 | 78 41 || 33 28 | 79 5 || 32 31 | 79 28 || 31 34 | 79 51 || 30 37 | 80
3412 | 78 0 || 83 16 | 78 26 | 32 20 | 78 51 || 31 23 | 79 15 | 80 27 | 79 &
33 59 | 77 21 || 8338 4 | 77 47 || 32 8 | 78 14 || 81 12 | 78 39 || 30 16 | 79
i ‘ 55 | 77 87 || 31 0 |
33 32 | 76 3 || 32 37 | 76 32 || 31 42 | 77 1 || 80 47 | 77 29 || 29 52 | 77
33.17 | 75 24 || 82 23 | 75 5d | 31 28 | 76 25 | 80 34 | 76 54 | 29 39 | 77
i | 74 46 | 32 8 | 75 18 | 81 14) 75 49 |) 80 20 | 76 20 | 29 20 | 76

245 | 74 9 || 31 52 | 74 42 | 30 59 | 75 14 | 30 5 | 75 46 | 29 12 | 76
32 29 | 74 82 || 31 36 | 74 6 || 80 43 74 40 || 29 50 | 75 12 || 28 57 | 75
32 11 | 72 56 || 31 19 | 73 81 || 380 27 | 74 5 || 29 35 | 74 39 |) 28 42 | 75

os
=

=
o
~_
oc
te

tw
Cc
os
tw
> So
be")
nw
oO

hob

wc
ors

cme OONNIS

3S SY

SSe

—

~“

to
I
—
to
ce
te
“
_
ior)
“I
i)
=
S
ce
be
7
1
corns
-
S
o
cs
“I
a
nm
cr
te
ou
w
©

=
Ge
n
te
or
cs
eG
tw
we
bo bo
" —)
co
oa
co
a
te
uo
=:
cs
i=r)
oc

SS
So
or
rae
ao
-
=
rw
oa
=
~
a
=
co
-

i
_
oe
_
a
a
—
ss
—
ao
a
ir)
a
co
o
ns
—
tw
_
a
_-

19 11 | 68 56 || 18 42 | 59 52 || 18 13 | 60 47 || 17 44 | 61 42 || 17 14 | 62
18 40 | 58 39 || 18 12 | 59 35 || 17 44 | 60 80 | 17 15 | 61 26 || 16 46 | 62
18 9 | 58 22 || 17 42 | 59 18 || 17 14 | 60 14 || 16 46 | 61 9 | 16 19} 62
17.37/58 5 || 17 11| 59 2) 16 44 | 59 58 | 16 17 | 60 54 | 15 50 | 61
17. 5 | 57 49 || 16 40 | 58 46 || 16 14 | 59 43 | 15 48 | 60 39 || 15 22 | 61
16 33 | 57 84 || 16 9 | 58 31 || 15 44 | 59 28 || 15 19 | GO 24 |) 14 58 | GL
16 1157 19 || 15 87 | 58 16 || 15 13 | 59 13 | 14 49 | GO 10 | 14 24 | 61
15 29|57 5] 15 6] 58 2] 1442/59 0 | 14 19 | 59 57 || 13 55 | 60 54
14 56 | 56 51 || 14 34 | 57 49 || 14 11 | 58 46 | 13 49 | 59 44 | 13 26 60 41
14 23 | 56 88 || 14 2 | 57 36 | 13 40 | 58 34 | 18 18) 59 31 |) 12 56 60 29
13 50 | 56 26 || 13 29 | 57 24 || 18 9] 58 22 || 12 48 | 59 19 || 12 27 | 60 17
13 17 | 56 14 | 12 57 | 57 12 | 12 87 | 58 10 | 12 17 | 59 8 | 11 57 | 60 8
243/56 2 || 1224157 0] 12 6} 57 59 || 11 46 | 58 57 || 11 27 | 59 55
53 ¢ 210/55 51 |] 11 52 | 56 50 || 11 34 | 57 48 || 11 15 | 58 46 || 10 57 59 45
5 1 36 | 55 41 |} 11 19 | 56 39 || 11 2} 57 38 || 19 44 | 58 36 || 10 27 | 59 35
53 1 2| 55 31 || 10 46 | 56 30 || 10 29 | 57 28 | 10 13 | 58 27 || 9 56 | 59 25
58 | 53 : 0 28 | 55 21 || 10 13 | 56 20 |) 9 57 | 57 19 || 9 41 | 5818) 9 25 | 59 17
22 | 5 9 54] 55 13|| 9 39'| 56 12]| 925/57 11 || 9 10] 58 9 || 8 55 59 8
9 3 ar 5 i 919|55 4] 9 6) 56 3|) 852) 57 2) 8 38 | 58 2]| 8 24 59 1
910] 5258 ]| $58|53 57 | 845] 5456 | 8 32] 55 56 || 8 19 56 55 || 8 6 | 57 54 7 53 58 53
8 34] 5250 || 8 22) 5350] 811 | 5449 || 759/55 48) 7 46 | 56 48 || 7 34 | 57 47 | 7 22 | 58 46
7 58 | 52.43) 7 47 | 53 43 |) 7 36 | 54 42 |) 7 25 | 55 42) 7 14 | 56 41) 7 2) 57 41 || 6 51 | 58 40
721 | 5237 || 711/53 36] 7 1| 5436 |} 6 51 | 55 36 || 6 41 | 56 35 || 6 30) 57 35 || 6 20 | 58 34
6 45 | 5231 | 636) 53 31 || 6 26| 53 80] 617| 55 30] 6 8| 5629) 5 58) 57 29) 5 48 | 58 29
6 85226) 6 0|5325|| 5515423) 543] 55 95) 5 34| 5624 | 5 26/57 24|| 5 17 | 58 24
5 32 | 52 21 | 5 a4]53 20) 5317] 5420 1 5 9155 20 || 5 1} 56 20 || 453) 57 19 || 4 45 | 58 19
455/52 16) 448] 5316 || 442] 5416) 435) 55 16) 428) 5616 || 4 21 57 15 | 414 | 58 15
418]/5212]) 419/53 12] 4 6|5412 | 4 0/5512 | 355 | 5612) 348) 57 12)) 3 42 | 58 12
341]/52 91 336|53 9] 331]/54 9] 326)55 9) 321/56 9) 316)57 9) 311 58 9
3 5/52 6] 3 0153 6] 956/54 6) 2959|55 6 | 248) 56 6] 243) 57 6 || 239/58 6} 8
298]/52 4]| 994/53 4] 921/54 4] 218/55 4] 214/56 4)) 211) 57 4 2: 7 pes) Sees
151|52 2]} 148/53 2] 146/54 2] 143/55 2] 141/56 2] 138)57 2) 1 45 ae dl
114152 1] Vis]58 1) 212)54 1} 1 9) 55 TH 1 7) 56 1 1 Bor 1) 6 ee
037/52 0] 036/53 0! 035/54 0] 034/55 0] 034/)56 0} 033) 57 0} 032 ne S| od
0} 52 0 0 0;53 OF O 0} 54 O 00,55 O 0 0/56 0} 0 0/57 0 0 0;}5 |

|
|
/
:
;
:
}
j
|

CHIT Crm Coho mo

1871. | Ship’s Place from Observations of Altitude. 261

from PO, we have ZO; and this, with S O in the triangle S ZO, gives
the zenith distance, S Z, and the azimuth, S ZO, of the body observed.

Suppose, now, that the solution of the right-angled spherical triangle
S PO for PO and S O to the nearest integral numbers of degrees could
suffice. Further, suppose P Z to be the integral number of degrees closest
to the estimated co-latitude, then ZO will be also an integral number of
degrees. Thus the two right-angled spherical triangles SPO and SZO
have each arcs of integral numbers of degrees for legs. Now I find that.
the two steps which I have just indicated can be so managed as to give,
with all attainable accuracy, the whole information deducible from them-
regarding the ship’s place. Thus the necessity for calculating the solutions
of spherical triangles in the ordinary day’s work at sea is altogether done
away with, provided a convenient Table of the solutions of the 8100 triangles
is available. I have accordingly, with the cooperation of Mr. E. Roberts,
of the ‘ Nautical Almanac’ Office, put the calculation in hand; and I hope
soon to be able to publish a Table of solutions of right-angled spherical
triangles, showing co-hypotenuse* and one angle, to the nearest minute,
for every pair of values of the legs from 0° to 90°. The rule to be pre-
sently given for using the Tables will be readily understood when it is con-
sidered that the data for the two triangles are their co-hypotenuses, the
difference between a leg of one and a leg of the other, and the condition
that the other leg is common to the two triangles. The Table is arranged
with all the 90 values for one leg (4) in a vertical column, at the head of
which is written the value of the other leg (a). Although this value is
really not wanted for the particular nautical problem in question, there are
other applications of the Table for which it may be useful. On the same
level with the value of 4, in the column corresponding to a, the Table shows
the value of the co-hypotenuse and of the angle A opposite to the leg a.
I take first the case in which latitude and declination are of the same name,
the latitude is greater than the declination, and the azimuth (reckoned from
south or north, according as the sun crosses the meridian to the south or
north of the zenith of the ship’s place) is less than 90°. The hypotenuses,
legs, and angles P and Z of the two right-angled triangles of the preceding
diagram are each of them positive and less than 90°, and the two co-hypo-
tenuses are the sun’s declination and altitude respectively. We have then
the following rule :—

(1) Estimate the latitude to the nearest integral number of degrees by
dead reckoning.

(3) The exact values of the co-hypotenuse and the angle A corresponding

262 Sir W, Thomson on the Determination of a [Jan. 19,

to these values of 4 are to be taken as approximate declination, hour-angle,
altitude, and azimuth.

(4) Either in the same or in a contiguous vertical column find similarly
another set of four approximate values, the two sets being such that one of
the declinations is a little less and the other a little greater than the true
declination.

(5) On the assumed parallel of latitude mark off the points for which
the actual hour-angles at the time of observation were exactly equal to the
approximate hour-angles thus taken from the Table. With these points as
centres, and with radii equal (miles for minutes) to the differences of the
approximate altitude from the observed altitude, describe circles. By aid
of a parallel ruler and protractor *, draw tangents to these circles, inclined to
the parallel of latitude, at angles equal to the approximate azimuths taken
from the Table. These angles, if taken on the side of the parallel away
from the sun, must be measured from the easterly direction, or the westerly
direction, according as the observation was made before or afternoon. The
tangent must be taken on the side of the circle towards the sun, or from
the sun, according as the observed altitude was greater or less than the ap-
proximate altitude taken from the Tables in each case. The two tangents
thus drawn will be found very nearly parallel. Draw a line dividing the
space between them into parts proportional to the differences of the true
declination, from the two approximate values taken from the Tables. The
ship’s place at the time of the observation was somewhere on the line thus
found.

To facilitate the execution of clause (2) of the rule, a narrow slip of card
should be prepared with numbers 0 to 90 printed or written upon it at
equal intervals, in a vertical column, equal to the intervals in the vertical
column of the Table, 0 being at the top and 90 at the bottom of the column
as inthe Table. Place number 90 of the card abreast of a value of co-hy-
potenuse in the Table approximately equal to the declination, and look for
the other co-hypotenuse abreast of the number on the card equal to the
assumed latitude. Shift the card from column to column according to
this condition until the co-hypotenuse abreast of the number on the card
‘ equal to the assumed latitude is found to agree approximately enough |
with the observed altitude. ;

When the declination and latitude are of contrary names and the
azimuth less than 90°, or when they are of the same names, but the
declination greater than the latitude, the sum, instead of the difference, of
the legs } of the two triangles will be equal to the complement of the
assumed latitude; and clause (2) of the rule must be altered accordingly.
The slip of card in this case cannot be used; but the following scarcely
less easy process is to be practised. Put one point of a pair of compasses
on a position in one of the vertical columns of the hypotenuse abreast of

* A circle divided to degrees, and having its centre at the centre of the chart, ought

to be printed on every chart. This, rendering in all cases the use of a separate pro-
tractor unnecessary, would be usgful for many purposes.

1871.] Ship’s Place from Observations of Altitude. 263

that point of the column of values of & corresponding to half the comple-
ment of the assumed latitude; this point will be on a level with one of
the numbers, or midway between that of two consecutive numbers, accord-
ing as the assumed latitude is even or odd: then use the compasses to
indicate pairs of co-hypotenuses equidistant in the vertical column from
the fixed point of the compasses, and try from one column to another until
co-hypotenuses approximately agreeing with the observed altitude and the
correct declination are found. It is easy to modify the rule so as to suit
cases in which the azimuth is an obtuse angle; but it is not worth while to
do so at present, as such cases are rarely used in practice.

The following examples will sufficiently illustrate the method of using
the Tables :—

(1) On 1870, May 16, afternoon, at 5h. 42m. Greenwich apparent
time, the Sun’s altitude was observed to be 32° 4!: to find the ship’s place,
the assumed latitude being 54° North.

The Nautical Almanac gives at 1870, May 16, 5h. 42m. Greenwich
apparent time, the Sun’s apparent declination N. 19° 10’. On looking
at the annexed Table (which is a portion of the solutions of the
8100 right-angled spherical triangles) under the heading a = 56°, and
opposite 6 = 54°, the co-hypotenuse (representing the Sun’s declination)
is 19° 11’, and opposite 6 = 18° (differing from 54° by the complement of
the assumed latitude), the co-hypotenuse (representing the Sun’s altitude)
is 32° 8', which are sufficiently near the actual values; we therefore select
our sets of values from these columns as follows :—

Co-hyp. A.

-1. b=54 1911 61 28=Sun's hour-angle.
| 6=18 32 8 78 14=Sun’s azimuth (S. towards W.).

= 56°
[2 6=55 18 42 61 5=Sun’s hour-angle.
b=19 dL 55 77 37 =Sun’s azimuth (S. towards W.).

from which we have the following :—

Greenwich apparent time (in arc) CTE saeeaeea 85 30
Sun’s hour-angle (8 SI RS eee eee (2) 61 5
Diff. = Longitude 24 7 W. 24 25 W.
Sun’s altitude (observed) So cee ee 32 4
Sun’s altitudes (auxiliary) (Ee o2. & ee, (2) 38155
Sun’s declination from N. A. TRO ee 2°42) 19 16
Sun’s declinations (auxiliary) (1) 1911 ............ (2) 18 42

Dif= — 28

264 Sir W. Thomson on the Determinatian of a [Jan. 19,

This example is represented graphically in the first diagram annexed.
The second set of values could have been selected equally well from the
contiguous columns (a=57°), which on trial will be found to give an
almost identical result.

Again, (2), on 1870, May 16, afternoon, at 5h. 42m. Greenwich ap-
parent time, the Sun’s altitude was observed to be 30° 30': to find the
ship’s place, the assumed latitude being 10° North.

The Sun’s declination from N. A. is N. 19° 10!, and the half comple-
ment of the assumed latitude 40°. By a few successive trials, a=56° will be
found to contain values of co-hypotenuses approximately equal to the Sun’s
declination and altitude at the time, and which are equidistant from 40°;
we therefore select the following sets of values from this column as
follows :— :

Co-hyp. A.

(1. b=a4 19 11 61 23=Sun’s hour-angle.
| b=26 30 10 73 32=Sun’s azimuth (N. towards W.).

ae 18 42 61 5=Sun’s hour-angle.
\ 627 29 53 72 58 =S8un’s azimuth (N. towards W.).

from which we have the following :—

Greenwich apparent time (in arc) 65.30: a2 85 30
Sun's hour-angle (Cl) 5 Gl i23).2s eat (2) 61 5
Diff. = Longitude 24 7 W. 24 25 W.
Sun’s altitude (observed) 30.80 ae see 30 30
Sun’s altitudes (auxiliary) (1) S010 eee (2) 29 53
Diff = + 20 + 37
Sun’s declination from N. A. 19: 10-23 eee 19 16
Sun’s declinations (auxiliary) (1) 1911............ (2) 1842
DT, =) 1 + 28

In this,case the sun passes the meridian to the north of the ship’s
zenith, the azimuth, from the Tables being less than 90°, is measured from
the north towards the west. -In this case also the second set of values
might have been taken from a=57°, which will be found on trial to give
a position nearly identical with the above.

This example is represented in the second diagram annexed.

Again, (3), on 1870, May 16, afternoon, at 5h. 42m. Greenwich ap-
parent time, the Sun’s altitude was observed to be 18° 35': to find the
ship’s place, the assumed latitude being 20° South.

The Sun’s declination from N. A. is N. 19°-10!', and the half complement
of the assumed latitude is 55°, to be used because the Sun’s declination and
the assumed latitude are of different names. Proceeding as in the previous

ee ee es oe

SS
=
“~~
a)
ss
NX
>
f
=
Ss
s
Ss
rc)
rig
D
H-
SS
(5)
S
=
a,
DD
©
ss
au
x)
3
DW

1871.]

266 Prof. Story Maskelyne on the” — [Jan. 26,

example, we find the column @=56° again to contain values of co-hypo-
tenuses approximately equal to the given values; and therefore have :—

Co-hyp. A.

(lOO: 19 1 61 23=Sun's hour-angle.
| b=56 18 13 60 47 =Sun’s azimuth (N. towards W.).

a=56° 4
|2. b=55 18 42 61 5=S8un’s hour-angle.
\ b=57 1744 60 380=Sun’s azimuth (N. towards W.).
which give
Greenwich apparent time (in arc) yee wren a 85 30
Sun’s hour-angle CU) Ob 2oRenkea es (2) 61 5
Diff. = Longitude 24 7 W. 24 25 W.
Sun’s altitude (observed) 1S 30) ota ine 18 35
Sun’s altitudes (auxiliary) GO Meee rok li pene pane (2) 1744
Diff. = + 22 + 51
Sun’s declination from N. A. 1910 ees 19 10
Sun’s declinations (auxiliary) (1) 1911............ (2) 1842
iS + 28

This example is represented in the third diagram annexed..

January 26, 1871.
General Sir EDWARD SABINHE, K.C.B., President, in the Chair.

The following communications were read :—

I. “On the Mineral Constituents of Meteorites.” By Nreviu Story

_ Masxetyne, M.A., F.R.S., Professor of Mineralogy, Oxford,

and Keeper of the Mineral Department, British Museum. Re-
ceived November 3, 1870.

(Abstract. )

In the memoir now offered to the Society the author gives the results of
his investigation of the meteorites of Breitenbach and of Shalka. A
preliminary notice of two of the minerals occurring in the former, which
is of the Siderolite class, was read before the Society in March, 1869
(Proc. R. 8S. vol. xvii. p. 370).

After entering upon the probable history of the Breitenbach Siderolite,
and endeavouring to identify it with certain other Siderolites that have
been found, or have been recorded as found, in the region extending from

1871.] Mineral Constituents of Meteorites. 267

Meissen to Breitenbach, the author proceeds to describe the individual’
minerals which constitute the mass of the Siderolite.

These are: first, a bronzite with the formula (Mgs Fe: ) Si O3, or-
thorhombic in its crystalline form. The crystallography of the mineral
was investigated by Dr. Viktor von Lang at the British Museum, and has
been published in Pogg. Annalen, vol. cxxxix. p. 315. Secondly, a mineral
composed of silica, having the specific gravity of quartz after fusion, and
crystallized in the orthorhombic system.

Since his preliminary notice was published, the crystallography of this
substance has been carefully studied by the author, and the details are
given in the memoir.

The elements of the crystal are

Gee Gis lf 457 2) le ool 20:

The angles are :—

100:101 = 27°46'
100:110 = 60°10’
110:101 = 63°19’

The optic axes lie in a plane parallel to the plane 010 ; the first mean
line being the normal to the plane 100.

They are widely separated, presenting in air an apparent angle of
about 107°.

There can thus be no question that this mineral is orthorhombic ; and
if the tridymite of Vom Rath is, as that distinguished crystallographer
asserts it to be, hexagonal in its symmetry, the mineral in the Breitenbach
meteorite will be a trimorphic form of silica. Such a result obtained
from the investigation of a meteorite is one of no small interest.

The nickeliferous iron, the chief constituent of the Siderolite, proved on
analysis to be an alloy of the formula Fe,, Ni, and contaimed a trace of
copper. In addition to the two siliceous minerals, the iron encloses
occasional crystals of chromite in well-developed octahedra, an iron sulphide,
probably troilite, and a small amount of Schreibersite.

The author then proceeds to detail the results obtained from the analysis
of the Shalka meteorite. In 1860, Haidinger, in his paper on this
meteorite (Sitzber. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, vol. xli. p. 251), held the entire
stone to be made up of a mineral, which he termed Piddingtonite, and
which, according to Von Hawr’s analysis, might be a compound of bisili-
cate and trisilicate of iron and magnesium. This latter acid silicate,
however, which has long haunted the mineralogy of meteorites, no more
forms a constituent of this meteorite than does the other acid silicate
Shepardite, as Dr. Laurence Smith has shown, enter into the composition
of the Bishopville meteorite.

The view held by Haidinger, that this meteorite, though apparently
made up of two silicates, a grey and a mottled variety, was nevertheless

* the British Museum.

268 Prof. Williamson on the Organization of the [Jan. 26,

composed of a single mineral species varying in colour, is proved by the
analytical results given in this memoir. It has been found to bea bronzite
of the formula (Mg, Fe) Si O;, and in association with it there occurs
some chromite in distinct crystals.

Rammelsberg has also recently published the results of an examination
of this meteorite (Pogg. Annalen, vol. cxlii. p. 275), and finds in it a
bronzite associated with 12 per cent. of olivine. It is probable that the
meteorite varies in its composition in different parts, and that Prof. Ram-
melsberg analyzed that portion where an olivinous ingredient was in ap-
preciable preponderance.

The mottled kind was treated with hydrogen chloride in the cold, and
subsequently with potash, and again with hydrogen sulphate and potash,
but in each case it was noticed that the action of the acid was confined to
that of a solvent. A little meteoric iron was dissolved, but no appreciable
amount of olivine was found in the portion examined in the Laboratory at

II. “On the Organization of the Calamites of the Coal-measures.”
By W. C. Wiuiamson, F.R.S., Professor of Natural History in
Owens College, Manchester. Received November 11, 1870.

(Abstract.)

Ever since M. Brongniart established his genus Calamodendron, there
has prevailed widely a belief that two classes of objects had previously
been included under the name of Calamites—the one a thin-walled Equise-
taceous plant, the Calamites proper, and the other a hard-wooded Gymno-
spermous Exogen, known as Calamodendron. This distinction the author
rejects as having no existence, the thick- and thin-walled examples having
precisely the same typical structure. This consists of a central pith, sur-
rounded by a woody zone, containing a circle of woody wedges, and enclosed
within a bark of cellular parenchyma.

The Pith has been solid in the first instance, but very soon became
fistular, except at the nodes, at each one of which a thin diaphragm of
parenchyma extended right across the medullary cavity. Eventually the
pith underwent a complete absorption, thus enlarging the fistular interior
until it became coextensive with the inner surface of the ligneous zone.

The Woody Zone——This commenced in very young states by the
formation of a circle of canals stretching longitudinally from one node to
the adjoining one. Externally to, but in contact with, these canals a few
barred or reticulated vessels were found ; successive additions to these were
made in lines radiating from within outwards ; hence each wedge consisted —
of a series of radiating laminze, separated by medullary rays, having a
peculiar mural structure. At their commencement these wedges were
separated by wide cellular areas, running continuously from node to node ;

1871.] _ Calamites of the Coal-measures. 269

as the woody tissues increased exogenously, these cellular tracts also ex-
tended outwards. Radial longitudinal sections exhibited in these the same
mural tissue that occurs in the woody wedges. Hence the author gives to
the former the name of primary medullary rays, and to the latter that of
secondary ones. The structure of the medullary and ligneous zones is
compared with that of the stem of a true Exogen of the first year, of which
transitional form Calamites may be regarded as a permanent representative.
Tangential sections of this woody zone exhibit parallel bands of alternating
vascular and cellular tissue, running from node to node. At the latter
points each vascular band dichotomizes, its divergent halves meeting cor-
responding ones from contiguous wedges, and each two unite to form one of
the corresponding bands or wedges of the next adjoining internode.

The Bark, hitherto undescribed, consists of a thick layer of cellular
parenchyma, undivided into separate laminee, and not exhibiting any special
differentiation of parts. This structure exhibits no signs of external ridges
or furrows, being apparently smooth. The stem was enlarged at each node,
but the swelling was less due to any increased thickness of the bark at these
points, than to an expansion of the woody layer at these points, both ex-
ternally and internally. This was the result of the intercalation of nume-
rous short vessels, which arched across each node, their concavities being
directed inwards, and which constituted the portion of the woody zone
that encroached upon the constricted pith at these nodes. Several modi-
fications of the above type have been met with, most of which may have
had a specific value. In one form no canals exist at the inner angles
of the woody wedges; in another, lamine, like those of the woody
wedges, are developed in the more external portions of the primary me-
dullary rays, those occupying the centre of each ray being the most ex-
ternal and latest formed. The primary ray is thus transformed into a
series of secondary ones.

In another type the vascular laminze of each woody wedge are few in
number, and the component vessels are the same; but the latter are re-
markable for their large size. In a fourth variety, the exterior of the
woody zone has been almost smooth, instead of exhibiting the usual ridges
and furrows: this variety is also remarkable for the large size of its me-
dullary cells, compared with that of the cells and vessels of the woody
zone. :

But the most curious modification is seen ina plant previously described
by the author under the name of Calamopitus, in which round or oblong
canals are given off from the medullary cavity, and pass horizontally
through each primary medullary ray of the woody zone to the bark. These,
being arranged in regular verticils below each node, are designated the
infranodal canals. The verticils of small round or oblong scars, seen at
one extremity of the internodes of some Calamites, are the results of this
peculiar organization. In one species of this Calamopitus, instead of the
longitudinal canals of the woody wedges terminating at the nodes, they

270 On the Calamites of the Coal-measures. [Jan. 26,

bifurcate, like the wedges with which they are associated, and are con-
tinuously prolonged from internode to internode.

The ordinary structureless fossils found in shales and sandstones receive
a definite interpretation from the specimens described. The fistular me-
dullary cavities due in the first instance, not to decay of the tissues, but to
the rapid growth of the stem, became further enlarged by the entire absorp-
tion of the true pith, which commenced after the latter had fulfilled
its purpose in the origination of the woody wedges. This process ter-
minated at an undulating line of arrested absorption, the convexities of
which projected outwards, opposite the primary medullary rays, and in-
wards, opposite the woody wedges ; and the inorganic cast of the cavity thus
formed by a physiological action constitutes the Calamites commonly seen
in collections. Hence they are not, like the Sternbergiz, casts of a cavity
within a true pith, but their form represents that of the exterior of the
medullary tissue. The ridges and furrows of these internal casts are not
identical in position with the similar undulations of the exterior of the
woody zone, but alternate with them; so that the ligneous cylinder pro-
jects both externally and internally where the woody wedges are located,
and contracts, in like manner, at the intermediate points opposite to the
primary medullary rays. The thin carbonaceous film which frequently
invests these casts is the residue of the altered elements of the woody
zone, and possibly also of the bark, which latter has been very liable to
become detached from the former. The surface-markings of this carbo-
naceous film have usually no structural significance, being merely occasioned
by the impression of the hardened casts which they invest.

Two kinds of branches are given off by Calamites,—the one subterranean,
springing from peculiarly formed rhizomes, and the other aérial, attached
to the upright unbranched stems. The former of these are of compara-
tively large size, the nodes from which they have been detached being
marked by large concave lenticular scars as phragmata. These branches
appear to have been given off from central rhizomes in accordance with a
regular phyllotaxis, but which varied in different species. The aérial
branches, on the other hand, were merely slender appendages to a virtually
unbranched stem; they were arranged in verticils round the nodes, in
variable numbers. Each branch sprang from the interior of one of the
woody wedges, the two halves of which were forced asunder to admit the
base of the appendage, and from which its constituent vessels were derived.
The branch, deprived of its bark, never appears to have had a diameter
equal that of two of the woody wedges, and the rarity of their occurrence
attached to the stem seems to indicate that they were deciduous. The bark
investing them is not yet known, and the exact nature of the foliage which
they bore is also uncertain, owing to discordant testimony respecting it;
but there appears no reason for doubting that some of the verticillate
Asterophyllites or Annulariz represent it, though there is uncertainty
respecting the actual forms to be identified with Calamites. The roots

1871.] Sir W. Thomson on Approach caused by Vibration. 271

were given off from the lower part of each internode, but above the
node, and were apparently epidermal.

There is also considerable doubt respecting the fructification of Calamites.
Some of the Volkmanniz have evidently belonged to this group ; but only
one example retaining its minute organization has yet been found in which
the structure of the central axes corresponded with that of the Calamites.
The relationship to Calamites of the fruits figured by Binney, under the
name of Calamodendron commune, which are identical wth the Volkmannia
Binneyi of Carruthers, is more than doubtful, because of the anomalous
structure of their central axes.

After a careful comparison of the organization of Calamites with
that of the recent Equisetacee, the author prefers constituting the former
an independent order, distinct from, though allied to, the Equisetums,
under the name of Calamitacee, and characterized by cryptogamic fructifi-
cation and verticillate foliage, associated with an exogenous axis. The
latter feature probably involved the existence of something resembling a
cambium layer, furnishing the material for the new tissues.

It is further proposed to divide these plants into two generic groups,
viz. Calamites and Calamopitus; the former to comprehend those un-
provided with infranodal canals, and the latter those which possess them.
The existing specific distinctions appear to have little or no scientific
value.

III. “On Approach caused by Vibration.” A Letter from Prof. Sir
W. Tuomson, LL.D., F.R.S., &c. to Prof. Freperick Guturin, -
B.A. Communicated by Sir W. Tuomson. Received November
7 LO70.

Dear Sir,—I have to-day received the ‘ Proceedings of the Royal
Society’ containing your paper ‘‘ On Approach caused by Vibration,’ which
I have read with great interest. The experiments you describe constitute
very beautiful illustrations of the established theorem for fluid pressure in
abstract hydro-kinetics, with which I have been much occupied in mathe-
matical investigations connected with vortex-motion.

According to this theorem, the average pressure at any point of an in-
compressible frictionless fluid originally at rest, but set in motion and
kept in motion by solids moving to and fro, or whirling round in any
manner, through a finite space of it, is equal to a constant diminished by
the product of the density into half the square of the velocity. This im-
mediately explains the attractions demonstrated in your experiments ; for
in each case the average of square of velocity is greater on the side of the
card nearest the tuning-fork than on the remote side. Hence obviously
the card must be attracted by the fork as you have found it to be; but it
is not so easy at first sight to perceive that the average of the square of
the velocity must be greater on the surfaces of the tuning-fork next to the

272 Sir W. Thomson on Approach caused by Vibration. { Jan. 26,

card than on the remote portions of the vibrating surface. Your theoreti-
cal observation, however, that the attraction must be mutual, is beyond
doubt valid, as we may convince ourselves by imagining the stand which
bears the tuning-fork and the card to be perfectly free to move through
the fluid. If the card were attracted towards the tuning-fork, and there
were not an equal and opposite force on the remainder of the whole surface of
the tuning-fork and support, the whole system would commence moving, and
continue moving with an accelerated velocityin the direction of the force acting
on the card—an impossible result. It might, indeed, be argued that this
result is not impossible, as it might be said that the kinetic energy of the
vibrations could gradually transform itself into kinetic energy of the solid
mass moving through the fluid, and of the fluid escaping before and closing
up behind the solid. But ‘common sense’ almost suffices to put down
such an argument, and elementary mathematical theory, especially the
theory of momentum in hydro-kinetics explained in my article on “ Vor-
tex-motion,” negatives it.

The law of the attraction which you observed agrees perfectly with the
law of magnetic attraction in a certain ideal case which may be fully speci-
fied by the application of a principle explained in a short article communi-
cated to the Royal Society of Edinburgh in February last, as an abstract
of an intended continuation of my paper on ‘“‘ Vortex-motion.”’ Thus, if
we take as an ideal tuning-fork two globes or disks moving rapidly to and
fro in the line joining their centres, the corresponding magnet will be a
bar with poles of the same: name as its two ends and a double opposite
pole in its middle. Again, the analogue of your paper disk is an equal
and similar diamagnetic of infinite diamagnetic inductive capacity. The
mutual force between the magnet and the diamagnetic will be equal and
opposite to the corresponding hydro-kinetic force at each instant. To
apply the analogy, we must suppose the magnet to gradually vary from
maximum magnetization to zero, then through an equal and opposite mag-
netization back through zero to the primitive magnetization, and so on
periodically. The resultant of fluid pressure on the disk is not at each in-
stant equal and opposite to the magnetic force at the corresponding in-
stant, but the average resultant of the fluid pressure is equal to the
average resultant of the magnetic force. Inasmuch as the force on the
diamagnetic is generally repulsion from the magnet, however the magnet
be held, and is unaltered in amount by the reversal of the magnetization,
it follows that the average resultant of the fluid pressure is an attraction
on the whole towards the tuning-fork into whatever position the tuning-
fork be turned relatively to it.

Your seventh experiment * has interested me even more than any of
the others. It illustrates the elementary law of pressure in hydro-kinetics,
not by showing effects of fluid pressure on portions of a solid bounding

* Experiment 7 in Proceedings Roy. Soc. vol. xix. p. 38, or experiment 10, Phil.
Mag. Nov. 1870.—F. G.

1871.] Presents. 273

surface, as all other illustrative experiments hitherto known to me have
done, but by showing an effect of diminished fluid pressure throughout
more rapidly moving portions of the finite mass of the fluid itself. This
effect consists of a slight degree of expansion, depending on the air not
being perfectly incompressible. The volume occupied by the more rapidly
moving portions becoming slightly augmented, the remainder of the fluid
would be condensed were the whole contained within an altogether fixed
boundary. A moveable portion of this boundary (that is, the surface of
the liquid in your tube) yields and shows to the eye the effect of the di-
minished pressure through the rapidly moving portions.

No branch of abstract dynamics has had a greater charm for the ma-
‘thematical worker than hydro-kinetics, but it has not hitherto been made
generally attractive by experimental illustrations. Such refined and beau-
tiful experiments as those you describe, and especially your seventh, tend
notably to give to this branch of dynamics quite a different place in popular
estimation from that which it has held; but what is perhaps of even
greater importance, they help greatly to clear the ideas of those who have
made it a subject of mathematical study.

Yours truly,
WiLi1AM THOMSON.

Lo Presents recewed December 8, 1870.
Transactions.
Batavia :—Koninklijke Natuurkundige Vereeniging in Nederlandsch
Indic. Natuurkundig Tijdschrift. Deel 31. Afl. 1-3. 8vo. Batavia

ie) AL Soe. The Society.
Bern :—Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Mittheilungen, aus dem Jahre
1869. Nr. 684-711. 8vo. Bern 1870. The Society.
Bremen :—Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein, Abhandlungen. II. Bad,
II. Heft. 8vo. Bremen 1870. The Society.

Cambridge, Mass.:—American Association for the Advancement of
Science. Proceedings. Seventeenth Meeting held at Chicago, Ili-

nois, August 1868. 8vo. Cambridge 1869. The Association.
Graz :—Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein fiir Stelermark. Mittheilungen,
II. Band. Il. Heft. 8vo. Graz 1870. * The Society.

Leipzig :—Konigl. Sachsische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften. Abhand-
lungen. Math.-phys. Classe, Band IX. No. 4,5. Phil.-hist. Classe,
Band VY. No. 6,7. 8vo. Leipzig 1870. Berichte tiber die Verhand-
lungen. Math.-phys. Classe, 1869, 2,3,4; 1870, 1,2; Phil.-hist.
Classe, 1868, 2,3; 1869, 1, 2, 3. 8vo. Leipzig 1869-70.

The Society.

London :—Pathological Society. Transactions. Vol. XXI. 8vo. London
1870. The Society.

VOL. XIX. Y

274: Presents. [Dee. 15,

Transactions (continued). | )
Neuchatel :—Société des Sciences Naturelles. Bulletin. Tome VIII.
cahier 3. 8vo. Neuchatel 1870. The Society.

Observations.

Edinburgh :—Royal Observatory. Report to the Board of Visitors, by
C. Piazzi Smyth, F.R.S. 4to. Hdinburgh 1810. The Observatory.
St. Petersburg :—Physikalisches Central-Observatorium. Jahresbericht

fiir 1869, von H. Wild. 4to. St. Petersburg 1870.
The Observatory.
Utrecht :—Koninkljk Nederlandsch Meteorologisch Instituut. Zeilaan-
wijzingen van Java naar bet Kanaal. Deel 1, 2. 4to. Utrecht
1868-70. The Institute.

Archer (Wm. H.) Patents and Patentees. Victoria. Vols. I-III. 4to.
Melbourne 1869-70. Abstracts of Specifications of Patents applied
for from 1854 to 1866. Ac.to Bu. 4to. Melbourne 1870. Abstracts of
English and Colonial Patent Specifications relating to the Preserva-
tion of Food. 8vo. Melbourne 1870. The Author.

Birt (Wm. R.) The Mare Serenitatis, its Craterology and principal fea-
tures. 4to. London 1869. Reports on the Outline Lunar Map. 8vo.
London 1867-68. On the Secular Variations of Lunar Tints and

Spots and Shadows on Plato. 8vo. London 1869. The Author.
Evans (F. J.), F.R.S. Elementary Manual for the Deviations of the
Compass in Iron Ships. 8vo. London 1870. The Author.

Halliwell (J.0.), F.R.S. An Historical Account of the New Place, Strat-
ford-on-Avon, the last residence of Shakespeare. fol. London 1864.

The Author.

Wilson (Erasmus), F.R.S. Descriptive Catalogue of the Dermatological

Specimens contained in the Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons

of England. 4to. London 1870. The Author.

December 15, 1870.

Transaction ee
Baltimore :—Peabody Institute. Third Annual Report of the Provost
to the Trustees. 8vo. Baltimore 1870. The Institute.

Boston Society of Natural History. Proceedings. Vol. XI11., Sheet
18-26; Vol. XIII. Sheet 1-14. 8vo. Boston 1869-70. Report
on the Invertebrata of Massachusetts, by A. A. Gould, edited by W.
G. Binney. 8vo. Boston 1870. Address delivered on the Centennial
Anniversary of the birth of Alexander von Humboldt, by L.
Agassiz. 8vo. Boston 1869. The Society.

1870.] Presents. 275

Transactions (continued),
Chicago :—Academy of Sciences. Transactions. Vol.I. Part 2. 8vo.
Chicago 1869. ' The Academy.
London :—Royal Astronomical Society. Memoirs. Vol. XXXYVII.
Parts 1&2; Vol. XXXVIIT. 4to. London 1869-71. Monthly
Notices. Vol. XXIX. No.5; Vol. XXX. No.9. A General
- Index to the first twenty-nine volumes. 8vo. London 1870.

The Society.

Munich :—Konigliche Bayerische Akademie der Wissenschaften. Ab-
handlungen. Math.-phys. Classe, Band X. Abth.3; Philos.-philol.
Classe, Band XII. Abth.1. 4to. Miinchen 1869-70. Sitzungs-
berichte, 1870; I. Heft2-4. 8vo. Miinchen 1870. Denkschrift
auf C.F. H. von Meyer, von C. A. Zittel. 4to. Miinchen 1870.

Die Entfaltung der Idee des Menschen durch die Weltgeschichte,

von W. Preger. 4to. Miinchen 1870. The Academy.
New York :—American Museum of Natural History. First Annual
Report. 8vo. New York 1870. The Museum.

Philadelphia :—Academy of Natural Sciences. Proceedings. 1869, Nos.
3, 4. 8vo. Philadelphia 1869. American Journal of Conchology.

Vol. V. Part 3 & 4. 8vo. Philadelphia 1869. The Academy,
American Philosophical Society. Proceedings. Vol. XI. No. 82. 8vo.
Philadelphia 1869. The Society.

Franklin Institute. Journal. Third Series. Vol. LIX. No.5 &6;
Vol. LX. No. 1-4. 8vo0. Philadelphia 1870.
Saint Paul :—Minnesota Historical Society. Annual Report, 1868-69.
Charter, Constitution, and By-Laws. 8vo. London 1868-70.
The Society.

Observations.

Adelaide :—Government Observatory. Meteorological Observations
made during the month of January 1870, under the direction of
Charles Todd. fol. Adelaide 1870. .

The Government of South Australia.

Bonn :—Sternwarte. Astronomische Beobachtungen, von Dr. F. W. A.
Argelander. Band VII. Abth 2. 4to. Bonn 1869.

The University of Bonn.

Melbourne :—Observatory. Sixth Report of the Board of Visitors. fol.

Melbourne 1870. The Board.
Paris :—Observatoire Impérial. Annales, publiées par U. J. Le Verrier.
Observations. Tome XI. 4to. Paris 1869. The Observatory.

Prague :—K. K. Sternwarte. Magnetische und Meteorologische Beo-
bachtungen..im Jahre 1869. Jahrgang 30. 4to. Prag 1870.
The Observatory.

276 Presents. (Dee. 22,

Observations (continued).
Washington :—United States’ Naval Observatory. Astronomical and
Meteorological Observations made....during the year 1867. to.
Washington 1870. The Observatory.

De la Rive (A.), For. Mem. R.S. Recherches sur la Polarisation rotatoire

magnétique des Liquides. 8vo. Genéve 1870. The Author.
Orsoni(F.) Le Anidridi e gli ossidrili della Teoria Atomica. 8vo. Scvacca
1870. The Author.

Romano (Antonio) Esposizione di quattro nuove Scoperte. Il Moto per-
petuo o continuato per quattro leggi e per due sistemi diversi... 8vo.

Como 1870. The Author.
Swan (W.) Obituary Notice of Sir David Brewster. 8vo. Edinburgh
1870. The Author.
Wahltuch (Marco) Psicografia. 8vo. Napoli 1870. The Author.

December 22, 1870.
Transactions.

Berlin :—K6nigl. Akademie der Wissenschaften. Abhandlungen aus
dem Jahre 1869. 2 vols. 4to. Berlin 1870. Monatsbericht, Marz—

Juli 1870. 8vo. Berlin. The Aeademy.
Buenos Aires :—Museo Publico. Anales, por German Burmeister. En-
trega 7. 4to. Buenos Aires 1870. The Director.

Jena :—Medicinisch-naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft. Jenaische Zeit-
schrift fiir Medicin und Naturwissenschaft. Band V. Heft 3, 4.

8vo. Leipzig 1870. The Society.
Leeds :—Philosophical and Literary Society. The Annual Report for
1869-70. 8vo. Leeds 1870. The Society.
London :—Royal Colonial Institute. Proceedings. Vol. I. 1869. S8vo.
London 1870. The Institute.
Milan :—Societa Italiana di Scienze Naturali. Atti. Vol. XII. fase. 3, 4.
8vo. Milano 1870. The Society.
Reports.

Washington :—Department of Agriculture. Annual Report, 1867-68.

2 vols. 8vo. Washington 1868-69. Monthly Report, 1868-69.

2 vols. 8vo. Washington 1868-69. The Department.

United States’ Patent Office. Annual Report of the Commissioner of
Patents for the year 1867. 4 vols. 8vo. Washington 1868.

The Office.

‘

1870.} Presents. 277

Dawson (Robert) Catalogue of the Mollusca of the Counties of Aberdeen,
Banff and Moray, and the neighbouring Seas. 8vo. Aberdeen 1870.

The Author. |
Falconer (Wm.), F.R.S. Dissertation on St. Paul’s Voyage from Caesarea

to Puteoli. Second Edition, with additional Notes. 8vo. London

1870. The Author.
Lewis (IT. R.) A Report on the Microscopie Objects found in Cholera
Evacuations, &c. 8vo. Calcutta 1870. The Author.
Luvini (Giovanni) Alcune Sperienze e Considerazioni intorno all’ adesione
tra Solidi e Liquidi. 8vo. Torino 1870. The Author.
Playfair (Lyon), F.R.S. Address on Education. 8vo. London 1870,
The Author.
Stainton (H. T.), F.R.S. The Natural History of Tineina. Vol. XI. &
XII. 8vo. London 1870. The Author. |

Tennant (Col. J. F.), F.R.S. An Account of the Metrical System of
Weights and Measures, with an Attempt to explain its advantages,

and the reasons for selecting it for India. 8vo. Calcutta 1870.
The Author.

January 12, 1871.
Transactions.

Amsterdam :—Koninklijke Akademie van Wetenschappen. Verhande-
lingen. Afdeeling Letterkunde. Deel 5. 4to. Amsterdam 1870.
Verslagen en Mededeelingen. Afdeeling Natuurkunde. Tweede
Reeks. Deel 4. 8vo0. Amsterdam 1870. Afdeeling Letterkunde.
Deel 12. 8v0. Amsterdam 1869. Jaarboek voor 1869. 8vo. Pro-
cessen-Verbaal van de gewone Vergaderingen. Afdeeling Natuur-
kunde, 1869-70. 8vo. Urania, Carmen Petri Esseiva. 8vo. Am-
stelodami 1870. The Academy.

Upsala :—Kongl. Vetenskaps Societet. Nova Acta. Series tertia. Vol.
VII. fase. 1, 2. 4to. Upsala 1869-70. Upsala Universitets
Arsskrift, 1868, 1869, 1870. 3 vols. 8vo. Bulletin Météorologique
Mensuel de l’Observatoire de l'Université dUpsal. Vol. II. No.
1-6. 4to. Upsal 1870. The Society.

Vienna :—K. K. Geologische Reichsanstalt. Abhandlungen. IV. 9, 10.
(Die Fossilen Mollusken.) 4to. Wien 1870. Jahrbuch. Jahrgang
1870. Nr.1, 2. roy. 8vo. Wien. Verhandlungen, Nr. 1-9. roy.
Svo. Ween 1870. The Institution.

Observations, &c.

Cadiz :—Observatorio de Marina de la Ciudad de S. Fernando. Alma-
naque Nautico para el Alo 1872. 8vo. Cdédiz 1870.

The Observatory.

278 Presents. [Jan. 19,

Observations (continued).

Dorpat :—Meteorologische Beobachtungen angestellt. in Dorpat im Jahre
1869, redigirt und bearbeitet von Dr. Arthur von Oettingen.
Jahrgang 3. 8vo. Dorpat 1870. _ The University.

London :—The Nautical Almanac and Astronomical Ephemeris for the
year 1874. 8vo. London 1870. The Lords of the Admiralty.

Si aeecle
American Journal of Science and Arts. Vol. L. No. 148-150. S8vo.
New Haven 1870. The Editors.

Airy (G. B.), F.R.S. A Treatise on Magnetism, designed for the use of
Students in the University. 8vo. London 1870. The Author.
Angstrom (A. J.), For. Mem. R. 58. _ Recherches sur le Spectre Solaire.
4to. Upsal 1868. The Author.
Dircks (H.) Nature-Study, as ne to the purposes of Poetry and
Eloquence. 8vo. Edinburgh 1870. The Author.
Fritsch (W. v.) Ziffernbeiwerk zu den graphischen Curven-Tableaux
iiber die Ergebnisse des dsterreichisch-ungarischen Bergwerks-Be-
triebes von den Jahren 1855 bis inclusive 1866. 8vo. Ween 1869.
Supplementheft. 8vo. Wren 1870. Graphische Curven-Tableaux.
fol. Wren 1870.
Gulliver (G.), F.R.S. Notes of some of his Researches in Anatomy, Phy-
slology, Pathology, and Botany. 8vo. London. The Author.
Miller (W. A.), F.R.S. Introduction to the Study of Inorganic Che-
mistry, edited by C. Tomlinson, F.R.S. 12mo. London 1871.
The Editor.
Regnault (V.), For. Mem. R. 8. Relation des Expériences pour deéter-
miner les lois et les données physiques nécessaires au Calcul des’
Machines a feu. Tome III. 4to. Paris 1870. The Author.

January 19, 1871.

Transactions.

Innsbruck :—Ferdinandeum fiir Tirol und Vorarlberg. Zeitschrift.
Dritte Folge. Heft 15. 8vo. Innsbruck 1870. The Institution.
London :—Committee of Civil Engineers. Preliminary Experiments on

the Mechanical and other properties of Steel. fol. London 1868.
The Committee.
Institution of Civil Engineers. Catalogue of the Library. Supplement
to the second edition. 8vo. London 1870. The Institution.

1871.] Presents. 279

Transactions (continued).
Paris :—Société de Géographie. Bulletin. Avril-Juin 1870. 8vo. Paris

1870. The Society.
Société Géologique de France. Bulletin. 2°série. Tome XXVI. No.7;
Tome XXVII. No. 1-3. 8yvo. Paris 1869-70. The Society.
Rome :—Accademia Pontificia de’ Nuovi Lincei. Atti. Anno 23, Sess.
1-7. 4to. Roma 1870. The Academy.

St. Petersburg :—Académie Impériale des Sciences. Mémoires. Tome
XV. No. 5-8, Bulletin. Tome XV. No. 1,2. 4to. St. Pétersbourg
1870. The Academy.

Birt (W. R.) Outline Lunar Map. Zone IY. area a7.—Hipparchus, its
characteristic features and Craterology. 4to. London 1870.

The Author.
Brodhurst (B. E.) The Deformities of the Human Body: a System of
Orthopedic Surgery. 8vo. London 1871. The Author.

Delpino (F.) Pensieri sulla Biologia Vegetale, sulla Tassonomia, sul
valore tassonomico dei Caratteri Biologici e proposta di un genere
nuovo della famiglia delle Labiate. 8vo. Pisa 1867.

C. Darwin, F.R.S.

Hall (James) Paleontology. Vol. IV. Part 1 (Geological Survey of New
York). 4to. Albany 1867. The Author.

Marignac (C.) Recherches sur les Chaleurs Spécifiques, les densités et les
dilatations de quelques Dissolutions. 8vo. Grenéve 1870. The Author.

Neumayer (G.) Results of the Magnetic Survey of the Colony of Victoria
executed during the years 1858-64. 4to. Mannhem 1869.

The Author.

Rodwell (C. F.) <A Dictionary of Science (The Haydn series). 8vo.
London 1871. The Editor.

Smyth (C. Piazzi), F.R.S. On an Equal-Surface Projection for the Maps of
the World and its Anthropological Applications. 8vo. Edinburgh 1870.

The Author.
Wilkomm (M.) et J. Lange. Prodromus Flore Hispanice. 2 vols. 8vo.
Stutigartie 1870. Charles Darwin, F.R.S.

January 26, 1871.
Transactions. .

Calcutta :—Asiatic Society of Bengal. Journal, 1870. Part 1. No. 1,2;
Part 2. No. 1, 2: 8vo. Calcutta. Proceedings, 1870. No. 4-8.
8vo. Calcutta 1870. The Society.

Falmouth :—Royal Cornwall Polytechnic Society. Thirty-first and
Thirty-third Annual Report. 8vo. Falmouth 1863-65.

The Society.

280 Presents. [Jan 26,

Transactions (continued).
- London :—Anthropological Society. Journal of Anthropology, No. 1-3.
8vo. London 1870-71. The Society.
British Museum. A Selection from the Miscellaneous Inscriptions of
Assyria, prepared for publication by Sir H. C. Rawlinson, K.C.B.
fol. London 1870. Catalogue of Syriac Manuscripts, by W.
Wright. Part 1. 4to. Zondon 1870. Catalogue of the Greek and
Etruscan Vases. Vol. II. 8vo. London 1870. Catalogue of the
Specimens of Dermaptera Saltatoria, by F. Walker. Part 4. 8vo.
London 1870. Catalogue of Monkeys, Lemurs, and Fruit-eating

Bats, by Dr. J. E. Gray. 8vo. London 1870. The Trustees.
Institution of Naval Architects. Transactions. Vol. XI. 4to. London
1870. The Institution.
Royal Geographical Society. Proceedings. Vol. XIV. No. 2-5. 8vo.
London 1870. _ The Society.
Moscow :—Société Impériale des Naturalistes. Bulletin. 1869, No. 4;
1870, No. 1. 8vo. Moscow 1870. The Society.

Truro :—Miners’ Association of Cornwall and Devonshire. The Annual
Meeting held at Falmouth, Sept. 30, 1868. 8vo. Truro 1868.
The Association.

Reports.
London :—Salmon Fisheries (England and Wales), Ninth Annual Re-
port of the Inspectors. fol. London 1870. The Inspectors.
Royal Commission on Water-Supply. Appendix to the Minutes of
Evidence. fol. Zondon 1869. The Commission.

Washington :—United States Coast Survey. Report of the Superin-
tendent, showing the progress of the Survey during the year 1866.
4to. Washington 1866. Prof. Peirce, For. Mem. R.8.

Ashe (E.D.) The Proceedings of the Canadian Eclipse Party, 1869. 4to.

Quebec 1870. The Author.
Croll (James) On the Cause of the Motion of Glaciers. 8vo. London
1870. On Ocean Currents. 8vo. London 1870. The Author,
Jourdeuil (—) Résumé d’une Théorie Philosophique. 8vo. Marseille
1870. The Author.
Lyon (M.A. E.) A Life Sketch of Charles Collier, M.D., F.R.S., by his
daughter. 12mo. London 1870. Mrs. Lyon.

Parkinson (John) Theatrum Botanicum; the Theater of Plantes. fol.
London 1640. Dr, Hooker, C.B., F.R.S.

1871.] Mr. W. H.L. Russell on Linear Differential Equations. 281 ~

Feburary 2, 1871.
General Sir EDWARD SABINE, K.C.B., President, in the Chair.

~ The following communications were read :—

I. “On Linear Differential Equations—No. IV.” By W. H. f.
RussExu, F.R.S. Received November 17, 1870.
I will now consider some interesting results in definite integrals obtained |

from the solution of linear ison equations.
Let us first consider the linear differential equation

(a, +00) 54 L + (a+b,0)5 FY + (a, +60) U Z + (a+ by )y =0,

where 6,=1.
Tet

y=e/"Lidiz,

where the limits are to be determined. Substituting in the differential
equation, and following the usual method, we find

| fa a,(iz)3 +a,(iz)?+a4(iz)+a9
Fy ECE) aS 7) LET sg ca ee
one 2 ENer 0
Now let
a,(tz)’ +a, (22) +4, (tz) +a) DR ae ene, 2)
b,(iz)’ + 6, (¢z)* + 6 (iz) +8, iz—a iz—B iz—y

_then we shall have

el2(mt2), diz
ace PH Ge— Biz yr
where the limits, determined by the neu HEN are evidently - —o and
ba have, from the above equation,
a,=0,m,
a,=—B,{\+ p+ eee ora
a,=0,{M(B-+y) +Hla+7)+9(a+B)-+m(ap-+ay-+By)}
ag=— 6,5 By +pay+raB-+maBy},
6,=—b(at+B+y),
6, =b,(ap + ay + By),
b,=—b,aby. :
VOL. XIX.

282 Mr. W. H. L. Russell on [Feb. 2,

Hence the differential equation becomes
a’ i
(m+2) 5% —{r+ptot (at p+y)(m+2)} 4

| d.
+{NB+y) +H(a+y) +1(a+B)+(aB-+ By+ay)(m+2)} 2
— {\By + pay +48 + aBy(m+ 2)}y=0.
The solution of this equation will be as follows :-—

y= Pe**+ QeS*+ Rev,
where
P=A+ Ba+C2°+...-+ Ha,
Q=A'+ B'a+C'2z’?+... Hz,
R=A"+ B"2#+C"e?+... Hz.
where A, B,...A’, B’,... A”, B"... are constants to be determined ;
2 ee (M+2) fiz

aa A ee Ot! Ba 2
| Gaye ByiGayyn Pet et Be

Now let @ be essentially negative, 8 and y essentially positive. Then,
since the integral cannot always go on increasing with (x), we have Q=0,

k—O-
se (a cie(mtad , iz
Ne (iz—a)*\(ie— By Ge yy
=Pe*=(A+Br4+Ca?+...4Her)e:
the constants A, B, C,..., where one of them is known, may be deter-
mined by substitution in the differential equation
d*y &
(m+a) 5% —fAtptyt (B+ y—2a)(m+2)} 78
—{d(2a—B—y) + wey) +r(@—Pf)
—(¢?—a—ay+Py)(m+2)} Y _\(a*—ag—ay + Byy=0.

But they are better determined in the following way. We may evidently,
without any loss of generality, put m=0. In this case we shall have

ez] , iz : -
ie (Giz—ay*(iz—py (zy) =(A+Br+Ca?+...+Ha*)e*.

If we put e=0 in this integral, we have

Ret. ee ee
o a. (iz—a)**(iz— Bye Miz—y)rt ©

1871.] Linear Differential Equations. 283

Differentiating and putting z=0,

2 iz. diz
Too A B:
( 1 Ge Gee yet yy tt aD;

ae cS d.iz :
OS) Gamay By ayy

and so we may proceed. The integral is thus completely determined.
A similar process will give us the more general integral

co etzq . iz
E (iz—a)A*1(iz—B)etizg— yt... (iz—Z)otV

where « is essentially negative, and (3, y .... essentially positive *.
The same process will hold good when p, v.... are fractional ; for it is

manifest that the integral

oa) et” , diz == Pe%? + Qeh? + Rev? ;
aay BEY ;
ie.2)

where, however,

Q= A, + Biyey
— eee Te = Ni val

+... $A, 24-24 A gr-1+ Aw,
with a similar expression for R.

Now, as 2 increases without limit, the series

A, Ay+1 +...

av zy—Atl

ecnverges; for since z is arbitrary, the ratio of two consecutive terms, ae

may be made as small as we please, however great vy becomes. Hence, as ¢

e se A =>.
increases without limit, the series Se x +.--+-approaches zero. Therefore,

as we suppose f positive, QeS* will increase without limit; and therefore

as Q is supposed multiplied by an arbitrary constant, we must have Q=0.

Hence the value of the integral where p, v,... are supposed fractional will

also be Pe**, a being negative, and the constants in P determined as before.
Next, consider the integral

\? e**(z—a)—!dz
a

(= pe =E=ye"

where x is supposed negative, « and 6 esseutially positive, 6 less than «,

* tis proper here to remind the reader that the integral

(" Pin In Bm—le-a8

sok (atic) Tn)

does not hold good when a is negative.

zZ2

284 My. W. H. L. Russell on Linear Differential Equations. [Feb. 2,

y essentially negative. Then the aoa will satisfy the differential
ene

we + fk pr (a Brey) Y

Sale
—{r(B+y)—n(a+7)—»(@+B)—(a8 + By tayo} Fe
— {By + pay + va +oPyesy=0.
We here suppose X fractional, » aud y positive and entire. The solution
of the differential equation will be
atpBty 2S ETT
Y= = PeSt + Qev?+ C{Peb RE € yt he ae ae Qev” Ke 12) 2 “der :

where P and Q are rational and entire functions of the orders p and » re-
spectively, and X,, X, functions of 2, which it will be needless to write
down. The integral will consequently be equal to this expression when the
arbitrary constants are properly determined. The integral cannot go on

increasing as #, supposed negative, increases. Hence Q=0 and C=0, and
the integral becomes

7 e*#(z—a)\—ldz
i} Ga pyrieny pnt TAT BEL Oe. + Hare

where A, B, &c. are constants to be determined.
We find, as before,

=|" (z—a)—ldz
CH Brees yet
Pa ee (e—a)*—Idz
f—

i (z—By(e— yt} *

&c. = &e.

And thus the integral is completely abies
I will now consider the differential equation

It is easily seen that this equation is satisfied by the integral

= ve) ee +au dy
a

—O
The solution of the differential equation is
y=C, cos ax + C, sin an+ C, {cos aafe” sin ax dx— sin ax/e cos aa dais
and these must be equivalent.
If we put —w for u in this equation, we easily see that .
D o—nu?+au Jy rae DP o—nur—axu fy :
aie

hence the integral is unchanged if —# is put for x, and therefore C,=C,=0.

1874.] Measurements of Specific Inductive Capacity of Dielectrics. 285

; Hence — : : : we ‘ ‘ : cae
: ett. eee du
Ap Rl Wa ae
a eine

oi putting 2=0,

| dn Vn
Theat this equation, and choosing the arbitrary constant so that c

re)
= de = (ee e7 dy = — ve.
—M

may vanish when 2 is infinite,
aan

c= NM ren amen
Vn

Hence se shall have

A (OP cars nm hu hs ee
‘te oe =2 Neen COS aavetn dt ea p2,
Hn | Nn

which last integral is exceedingly well known. It is manifest that we can

we Ee ~2U2+2Uu day :
reduce the integral ( 5, to this by the method of partial
ce ofl efrite= |
fractions.
In concluding this paper, I desire to express the obligations I am under

to Spitzer’s § Studién.’

IT. “Measurements of Specific Inductive Capacity of Dielectrics,
in the Physical Laboratory. of the University of Glasgow.” By
Joun C, Gipson, M.A., and THomas Barctay, M.A. Com-
municated by Sir Wirtras THomson. Kcceived November

23, 1870.
(Abstract. )

This paper describes the instruments and processes employed in a series
of experiments on the specific inductive capacity of paraffine, and the
effect upon it of variations of temperature. The instruments described are
the platymeter and the sliding condenser. 'The former cf these was, in a
rudimentary form, shown to the Mathematical and Physical Section of the
British Association at its Glasgow Meeting in 1855, by W. Thomson. It
consists of two equal and similar condensers employed for the comparison of
electrostatic capacities. The sliding condenser is a condenser the capacity
of which may be varied by known quantities by altering the effective area
of the opposed surfaces. By means of these two ieramiente: along with
the quadrant electrometer, the capacity of a condenser may be determined
by equalizing the sliding condenser to it. The method of working, and
the electrical actions upon which it depends, are described in detail. In

Be 6/0 : The Rev. Canon Moseley on the ‘[Feb. 2,

order to determine the capacity of the sliding condenser at the lower extre-
mity of its range, a spherical condenser, so constructed that its capacity
could be accurately determined in absolute measure, was employed. An
apparent discrepancy in the results obtained, arising from an inequality in
the condensers forming the platymeter, is then considered, and the method
of deducing the true result investigated. A series of experiments is then
described which gave 1:975 as the specific inductive capacity of paraffine,
that of air being taken as unity, but failed to show whether this alters with
variations of temperature. An improved form of condenser, composed of
concentric brass cylinders with paraffine for the dielectric, and the results
obtained from it, are then described. The measurements made at different
temperatures show no variation of specific inductive capacity. In order to
allow to the paraffine freedom of expansion with temperature, another
form of condenser was employed, and the same results obtained. A series
of experiments was then made on the expansion of paraffine with tempera-
ture, in order to estimate the effect of this upon the capacity of paraffine
condensers. As a meanof the results, it was found that the linear expan-
sion of paraffine at 9° C. is ‘000237 per degree. Some further measure-
ments of the cylindrical condenser were made with the same result as
before. Thus all the measurements of this condenser made at temperatures
ranging from —12°°15 to 24°35 C. show no variation of specific inductive
capacity of paraffine with temperature. This was found to be 1°977, that
of air being taken as unity.

In a note added to the paper a description is given of an improved form
of sliding condenser.

III. “On the Uniform Flow of a Liquid.” By Henry Mosetety,
M.A., D.C.L., Canon of Bristol, F.R.S., and Corresponding
Member of the Institute of France. Received December 1,

1870.
(Abstract.)

The resistance of every molecule of a liquid at rest which a solid (by
moving through it) disturbs, contributes its share to the resistance which
the solid experiences ; so that the inertia of each molecule so disturbed and
its shear must be taken into account in the aggregate, which represents the
resistance the liquid offers to the motion of the solid. The motions com-
municated to the molecules of a liquid by a solid passing through it, and
the resistances opposed to them, however, are so various, and so difficult to
be represented mathematically, that in the present state of our knowledge
of hydrodynamics the problem of the resistance of a liquid at rest to a
solid in motion is perhaps to be considered insoluble. As it regards the
opposite problem of the resistance of a solid at rest to a liquid in motion
(as in the case of a liquid conveyed through a pipe), there are in like
manner to be taken into account the disturbances created by that re-

1871. ] Uniform Flow of a Liquia.

sistance in what would otherwise have been the motion of each individual
molecule of the liquid so disturbed.

This problem, however, is by no means so difficult asthe other. There
is, indeed, a case in which it admits of solution. It is that of a liquid
flowing from a reservoir, in which its surface is kept always at the same
level, through a circular pipe which is perfectly straight, and of the same
diameter throughout, and of a uniform smoothness or roughness of internal
surface, and always full of the liquid. The liquid would obviously in such
a pipe arrange itself in infinitely thin cylindrical films coaxial with the pipe,
all the molecules in the same film moving with the same velocity, but the
molecules of different films with velocities varying from the axis of the pipe
to its internal surface. The direction of the motions of the molecules of
such a liquid being known, and all in the same film moving with the same
velocity, which velocity is a function of the radius of the film, and the law
of the resistance of each film to the slipping over it of the contiguous film
being assumed to be known, as also the head of water, it is possible to
express mathematically

(1st) the work done per unit of time by the force which gives motion to
the liquid, and

(2nd) the work per unit of time of the several resistances to which the
liquid in moving through the pipe is subjected, and

(8rd) the work accumulated per unit of time in the liquid which escapes—
and thus to constitute an equation in which the dependent variables are
the radius of any given film, and the velocity of that film. This equation
being differentiated and the variables separated, and the resulting differen-
tial equation being integrated, there is obtained the formula

mee
Dev Ti 2
where v is the velocity of the film whose radius is 7, and », that of the
central filament, and / the length of the pipe—the unit of length being one
metre, and of time one second.

The method by which the author has arrived at this Bi mula is substan-
tially the same as that which he before used in a paper read before the
Society on the ‘ Mechanical Impossibility of the Descent of Glaciers by
their weight only,” and which he believes to be a method new to me-
chanical science. It was indeed to verify it in its application to liquids
that he undertook the investigations which he now submits to the Society,
which, however, he has pursued beyond their original object.

The recent experiments of MM. Darcy and Bazin* have supplied him
with the means of this verification. These experiments, made with ad-
mirable skill and precision, on pipes upwards of 100 metres in length, and
varying in diameter from 0™:0122 to 0™-5, under heads of water varying

* Recherches Expérimentales relatives au mouvement de ]’Hau dans les Tuyaux,
par H. Darcy: Paris, 1857, Recherches Hydrauliques, par MM. Darcy et Bazin;
Paris, 1865,

288 The Rev. Canon Moseley on Uniform Flow. [ Feb. 2,

in height from 0™:027 to 30™°714, include (together with numerous experi-
ments on the quantity of water which flows per second from such pipes
under different conditions) experiments on the velocities of the films of
water at different distances from the axes of the pipes, made by means of
an improved form and adaptation of the well-known tube of Pitot. These
last-mentioned experiments afford the means of verifying the above-men-
tioned formule. With a view to this verification, the author has compared
the formula with sixty of the experiments of M. Darcy, and stated the re-
sults in the first two Tables of his papev.

The discharge per 1” from a pipe of a given radius may be esleniaige
from the above formula in terms of the velocity of the central filament.
This calculation the author has made, and compared it with the results of
eleven of M. Darcy’s experiments.

Where in the formula which thus represents the discharge from a pipe
of given radius, in terms of the velocity of the central filament, the radius
is made infinite, an expression is obtained for the volume of liquid of a
cylindrical form, but of infinite dimensions (laterally), which would be put
in motion by a single filament of liquid which traversed its axis ; and, con-
versely, it gives the volume of such a liquid in motion which would be held
back by a filament of liquid kept at rest along its axis. Thus it explains
the well-known retarding effect of filaments of grass and roots in retarding
the velocities of streams.

Itis the relation of the velocity of any film to that of the central fila-
ment which the author establishes in the above formula. To the complete
solution of the problem itis necessary that he should further determine the
actual velocity v, of the central filament. This is the object of the second
part of his paper. This velocity being known, the actual discharge per
1" is known. The following is the formula finally ar rrived at :—

cat __ 25 OR
Q=C. Ee = ~1]R h? Uf,
7

where
Q= discharge per 1" in cubic metres.
R=radius of pipe in metres.
~ =length of ditto.
h =head of water. .
C =aconstant dependent on the state of the internal surface of the
pipe. | |
The values’ of this constant C, as dedueed from the experiments of M.
Darcy are given,
ist; for new cast-iron pipes ;
2nd, for the same covered with deposit ;
3rd, for the above cleaned ;
4th, for iron pipes coated jntempally with bitumen ;
5th, for new leaden pipes ; : "
6th, for glass pipes.

1871.] Lffect.of Exercise upon the Bodily Temperature. 989

The author compares this formula with sixty-two of M. Darcy’s experi-
ments, and records the results of this comparison in the last three Tables
of his. paper.

The paper concludes with an investigation of the rise in the eecuperatne
of a liquid flowing through a pipe caused by the resistances which its
coaxial films oppose to hea motions on one another (or; as it is termed,
their frictions on one another) and on the internal surface of the pipe.
The pipe is in this investigation supposed to be of a perfectly non-con-
ducting substance.

February 9, 1871.
General Sir EDWARD SABINHE, K.C.B., President, in the Chair.

The following communications were read :—

I, “On the Effect of Exercise upon the Bodily Temperature.” By T.
Cuirrorp AtiButt, M.A., M.D. Cantab., F.L.S8., Member of the
Alpine Club, &. Communicated by Mr. Busx, Received

November 12, 1870,
(Abstract.)

The object of the author in carrying out the experiments recorded in the
present paper was to inquire whether the regulating-power of the organism
held good under great variations of muscular exertion. For this purpose
he made frequent daily examinations of his own temperatures during a
short walking tour in Switzerland, and found that the effect of continuous
muscular exertion upon himself was to sharpen the curve of daily varia-
tion—the culmination being one or two tenths higher than usual, and the
evening fall coming on more rapidly and somewhat earlier. Charts of the
daily temperatures were handed in with the paper. The author made re~
ference also to some observations of M. Lortet, which differed from his
own. These observations, which did not come into Dr. Clifford Allbutt’s
hands until his own experiments were partially completed, were adduced
by M. Lortet to prove that the human body was very defective in regu-
lating-power under the demands of the combustion needed to supply the
force expended in muscular exertion. Dr. Clifford Allbutt’s results were
-very decidedly opposed to those of M. Lortet; for only on two occasions
did he note the depressions of temperature which M. Lortet regards as
constant. It would seem, however, that the body is more or less liable
to such depressions when engaged in muscular exertion; but the cause of
them is very. obscure. Of the two low temperatures noted by the author,
one occurred during a very easy ascent of lower slopes, and the second was
observed during a descent. The author thinks that they may be due to
some accidental deficiency in combustion, and inquires whether the capa-
city of the chest in different individuals may account for the varying in-

290 Prof. J. Phillips’s Observations of the [Feb..9,

fluence of muscular effort upon them, and perhaps for the earlier or later
sense of fatigue. The sphygmographic tracings added by M. Lortet to his
temperature-charts seemed to show a great inadequacy of circulation.

II. “Observations of the Eclipse at Oxford, December 22, 1870.”
By Joun Puitiirs, M.A., D.C.L., F.R.S., Professor of Geology
in the University of Oxford. Received December 28, 1870.

At my observatory, situated about one third of a mile eastward from the
great establishment founded in the name of Dr. Radcliffe, the beginning of
the eclipse was obscured by a passing cloud: the end was recorded at
13° 38' 38" = 1" 35' 0"-9 Oxford mean time.

The progress of the obscuration was observed at unclouded intervals in
the first half of the period, continuously during a clear sky in the latter
half. Finding it impracticable to observe and measure with ordinary
micrometers in the early part of the phenomenon, I arranged to throw the
image on a screen, and make my measures on it.

The driving-clock was affected by the extreme cold, so as to make it
difficult to keep the sun’s image to one place, and it was convenient for
other reasons sometimes to shift the image vertically ; the method which I
employed, however, was independent of these displacements, and allowed
of as many measurements of the cusps as might be desired.

It consisted simply in marking at any moment with pencil the situation
of the cusps on the screen, and appending to each dot the time by the
sidereal clock. Joining, after the eclipse, these dots by a straight line, and
then transferring a parallel line of equal length to meet internally a circle
representing the limb of the sun, of the same diameter as the solar image,
the chord of the cusps at the given time was obtained, from which, by an
easy method, the place of the moon’s centre at the moment was derived.
The apparent diameters of the sun and moon were obtained by measure of
arcs on the screen.

The diagrams exhibit the whole process. In diagram fig. 1, four of
the lines are drawn from the dots on the screen, AA, B B, CC, DD.

In fig. 2, equal and parallel lines are transferred to the solar circle, whose
centre is S, so as to touch it internally at A’ A’, B’ B’, C’'C’, D' D’. For each
of these lines the centre of the moon’s place is marked (A”, B”, C", D") ;
thus the line of the motion of the moon’s centre is given, and the phase of
greatest obscuration determined.

The line of motion of the moon’s centre is obtained by ruling through
the mid points between A” and B”, B” and C", C” and D”. The point
on this line reached by the moon’s centre at the moment of greatest ob-
scuration is found by bisection in M. Drawing through M and § the bi-
secting line of greatest obscuration, the length of the sagitta ms is deter-
mined.

1871.] Eclipse at Oxford, December 22, 1870.

It is found by these observations that,
The sun’s diameter being taken at ............ 530
Hhat.of the, MmOOWNs)/ a awl. cretemiges 2.8 sive esiepcinia 540

Fig. 1. AA, BB, CC, DD, are lines joining the dots marking the cusps at four suc-
cessive epochs during the eclipse.
2. A’ A’, B'B’', C' C', D' D’, are four lines equal and parallel to A A, BB, CC,
D D in fig. 1, and made to touch internally the solar circle, whose centre is S;
ms the sagitta at the moment of greatest obscuration. The moon’s path
passes below A”, above B”, and nearly coincides with O" and D", which are
the places of the moon’s centre for the cusps A’, B’, O', D’.

These numbers, according to the proportions given in the Nautical
Almanac for the Radcliffe Observatory, would have been :—

iometer of the:sun oii visiia kh. es ool een 530°0
Diameter ofthe moon” ea. yee hs Osk hos bss 538°8
Mensth of sagittal egies Gide MLE A Ooe ke 99-1

The agreement is quite close enough to justify the belief that, in skilful
hands, the method described may be in some cases very useful, it being by
no means limited to eclipses. It is so simple that one can hardly suppose
it not to have been already employed; but I have met with no notice of
such being the case.

During the progress of the eclipse three thermometers were observed:
One north of the house, screened from the sun and sky, sank from 26°
at 11° 40™ to 24°4 at 12 25™. One south of the house, indirectly in-
fluenced by solar radiation on neighbouring objects, rose from 26°75 at
11 to 27°°8 at noon, then sank to 26° at 12" 40”, and rose to 27°°3 at 1° 35™,
A third, on grass open to the sky, sank from 27°'8 at 11" 40™ to 23°°5 at
1" 25", and remained at this point till 1" 35". Though on a limited scale,
the influence both of solar and sky radiation is traceable in these observa-
tions.

292 ” Mr. Ee J. Reed Gn ‘the Distribution © [Feb. 9;

III. “On the Problem of the In- and Circameer ibed Triangle.” By
ae CaYLey, FR:S. Received December 30, 1870.

CE py) Oe. a Wate Rae) ee OR ee wee

( Abstract. }-

~The problem of the in and circumscribed triangle is a ies case of
that of the in- and circumscribed polygon: the last-mentioned problem may
be thus stated—to find a polygon such that the angles are situate in and
the sides touch a given curve or curves. And we may in the first instance
inquire as to the number of such polygons. In the case where the curves
containing the angles and touched by the sides respectively are all of them
distinet curves, the number of polygons is obtained very easily and has a
simple expression; it is equal to twice the product of the orders of the eurves
containing the several angles respectively into the product of the classes of
the curves touched by the several sides respectively ; or, say, it is equal to
twice the product of the orders of the angle-curves into the product of the
classes of the side-curves. But when several of the curves become one and
the same curve, and in particular when the angles are all of them situate
in and the sides all touch one and the same curve, it is a much more diffi-
cult problem to find the number of polygons. The solution of this problem
when the polygon is a triangle, and for all the different relations of identity
between the different curves, is the object of the present memoir, which is
accordingly entitled “‘On the Problem of the In- and Circumseribed Tri-
angle;’? the methods and principles, however, are applicable to the case
of a polygon of any number of sides, the method chiefly made use of being
that furnished by the theory of correspondence, .

IV. “On the Unequal Distribution of Weight and Support in
Ships, and its Effects in Still Water, in Waves, and in Exceptional
Positions on Shore.” By E. J. Rexp, C.B., Vice-President of
the Institution of Naval Architects. ‘Communica by Prof.
G. G. Stoxzs, Sec. R.S. Received December 31, 1870.

(Abstract.)

The object of this paper is to bring within the grasp of calculation what
the author considers a much neglected division of shipbuilding science and
art, by investigating the actual longitudinal bending- and shearing-strains to
which the structure is exposed in ships of various forms under the varying
conditions to which all ships are more or less liable. The weakness exhi-
bited by many ships has long pointed to the necessity of further investiga-
‘tion in this direction ; and two modern events (the use of iron and steel in
shipbuilding, and the introduction of armoured ships) have added much to
the urgency of the inquiry.

After glancing briefly at the state of the question as presented in the
writings of Bouguer, Bernoulli, Euler, Don Juan D’ Ulloa, Romme, Dupin,

(871.]. - - of Weight and Support in Ships. = = 298
‘and Dr. Young, the author proceeds to show that the introduction of steam
‘as a propelling agent, and of largely increased lengths and proportions for
ships, has brought about a comparative distribution of weight and buoy-
ancy very different from that which those writers contemplated. He has
taken the cases of three or four typical modern ships, and has had the re-
lative distributions of the weight and buoyancy very carefully and fully
‘calculated and graphically recorded. Owing to the great labour involved,
‘only the most meagre and unsatisfactory attempts to measure and exhibit
the actual strains of ships had previously been made; and the author’s
results are wholly unlike any that have before been worked out and published.
The first case is that of the royal yacht ‘Victoria and Albert,’ which re-
presents the conditions of long fine-lined paddle-steamers, with great
weights of engines, boilers, and coals concentrated in the middle, combined
with very light extremities. The second case gs that of the ‘Minctaur,’
‘which represents long fine-lined ships with great weights distributed along
‘their length. The iron-clad ‘ Bellerophon’ is the third case, representing
shorter ships with fuller lines and very concentrated midship weights; and
the last case is that of the ‘Invincible’ class, in which the weights of
armour &c. are still more concentrated. All these ships are divided into
‘very numerous short lengths; and the weight of hull, weight of equipment,
and buoyancy or displacement of each short length are separately calculated,
curves of weight and buoyancy being constructed from these items used as
ordinates. A third curve, of which the ordinates are the differences be-
‘tween the curves of total weight and of displacement, known as the curve
‘of loads, is constructed. By summing the ordinates, or calculating the
areas of this curve, from point to point, a curve of shearing or racking
forces is formed; and by employing the products of the areas of the curve
of loads (taken step by step) into the distances of their centres of gravity
from one end as ordinates of a new curve, a curve of bending-moments is
constructed.
_ These operations are performed for all the ships previously named, first
when they are floating in still water, next when they are respectively float-
ing on the crests of waves of their own lengths, and thirdly when they are
floating in the hollow of two adjacent waves of those lengths. The maxi-

mum breaking-strains of all the ships when supported on shore, first at the

extremities and next at the middle, are also calculated, and compared with
the still-water and sea strains.

In considering still-water strains, the author shows that remarkable con-
trasts of strain occur between ships light and laden, and that the theories
of former writers on the subject require to be greatly modified. In some
cases the breaking-strain is increased as the ship is lightened. In dis-
cussing the shearing-strains, he points out that the sections of maximum
shearing-strain in a ship coincide with the balanced or “water-borne sec-
tions’’ (at which the weight and buoyancy are equal), and that in most
ships the number of these sections is equal. The position of absolute

294 On the Distribution of Weight and Support in Ships. [Feb. 9,

maximum shearing-force occupies very different positions in different types
of ship. Sections of zero shearing-force coincide with ‘sections of water-
borne division,” on either side of which the weight balances the buoyancy ;
and their number is usually odd. Heafterwards shows that maximum and
minimum bending-moments are experienced by sections of water-borne
division, and that between two sections of maximum “ hogging ’’-moment
there must fall either a section of minimum hogging-moment or a section
of maximum “‘sagging’’-moment, and that it is an error to suppose (as
all former writers on the subject have done) that the absolute maximum
bending-moment falls amidships. In the ‘ Victoria and Albert’ the last-
named moment is in the forebody ; in the ‘ Bellerophon’ and ‘ Audacious’
it is in the afterbody. The effect of the horizontal fluid pressure in the
longitudinal bending-moments is also discovered, and shown to be important.

The dynamical aspect of the question—showing the strains brought upon
ships at sea—is admitted to be both the more difficult and the more im-
portant. In discussing the strains, the author calculates them approxi-
mately under the following assumptions :—(1) That for the moment the
effect of the ship’s vertical motion may be neglected. (2) That for the
moment the ship may be regarded as occupying a position of hydrostatical
equilibrium. (3) That the methods of calculating bending- and shearing-
strains previously used for still water may be employed here also, in order
to approximate to the momentary strains. The following particulars of the
‘ Minotaur’ and ‘ Bellerophon’ floating on the crests and in the hollows of
waves of their own length respectively and of proportionate heights, illus-
trate the results to which the calculations before named have led for those

ships.
On Wave-crest..

‘ Minotaur.’ ‘ Bellerophon.’

Excess of weight forward 1,275 tons. 445 tons.

” ” Be oe ahs oe 1,365 ” 999 55

oe buoyancy amidships. Z O40 v6 1,000) =
Maximum shearing-strain . 1,365 559

- bpending-moment 40,300 foot- tons.|43,600 foot-tons.

In Wave-hollow.

Excess of buoyancy forward .. | 685 tons. | 640 tons.

oa re aft ‘Ves OLE 695.7. 600 ,,

a weight amidships ..| 1,380 ,, 1 2400
Maximum shearing-strain .... 695 610°;

if bending-moment ..| 74,800 fonts tons. lee ,800 foot-tons.

The strains of ships supported on shore, first at the extremities and then |
at the middle, are next investigated. The following Table gives the ap-

1871.] Dy. A. Rattray on the Effects of Change of Climate. 295

proximate quantitative values of the shearing-forces and bending-moments
obtained for the three ships, ‘ Minotaur,’ ‘ Bellerophon,’ and ‘ Victoria and
Albert’ :—

‘ Minotaur.’ ‘BelleropLon’ |‘ Victoriaand Albert.’
| ek, es ee ee ees,
| Shearing-|} Bending- Shearing. Bending- | Shearing-| Bending-
force. | moment. | force. | moment. | force. | moment.
Displace- | Displace. | Displace- | Displace. Displace- | Bere:
ment. |X length.| ment. |x length.| ment. | X length.
Hapstallwater <6. 6... 3 ay as ds | oe | od | oh
On a wave-crest .......... 1 ay ae 2 as -
In a wave-hollow ........ te i | ok os i ame
| Supported at the extremities.| 3 + 4 x - a
Supported at the middle....| 3 | xan 4 ae 2 ae

| |

February 16, 1871.
General Sir EDWARD SABINE, K.C.B., President, in the Chair.

The following communications were read :—

I. “On some of the more important Physiological Changes induced
in the Human Economy by change of Climate, as from Tempe-
rate to Tropical, and the reverse” (concluded)*. By ALEXANDER
Rarrray, M.D. (Edinb.), Surgeon R.N., H.M.S. ‘ Bristol.’
Communicated by Mr. Busx. Received January 6, 1871.

IV. The influence of Tropical Climates on the Kidneys and Skin.

None of the organs of the body are more visibly affected by great changes
of climate than these, and their secretions, the urine and perspiration. As
with the lungst and other internal viscera, the congestion of the kidneys
lessens, while that of the skin increases, when the blood is attracted to the
surface by heat. The reverse happens when it is driven inward by cold.
This involves their special and vicarious, waste-product and water-excreting
functions alike. In the tropics the skin doubtless excretes much of the
water thrown off by the kidneys and lungs in colder regions, as well as the
nitrogen and carbon of the former, and carbonic acid of the latter. The
elimination of surplus water, one of the most important uses of all of the
four great depurating organs, is largely effected by these two. Their in-
timate relation in this office in cold latitudes is already known. We shall
here attempt to show what it is in the tropics.

* Continued from Proceedings of the Royal Society, June 16, 1870, vol. xviii. p. 529.
t Ibid. p. 523.

296 - Dr. A. Rattray on the Effectsof - . - [Feb. 16,

The following experiments were made on myself (zt. 39), on a voyage
from England to Bahia (lat. 11° S.), between June and September 1869.
During 24 days, from Plymouth to the thermal Equator, drink (tea or
coffee) being limited to 39 oz. daily, the urine gradually decreased from
39 to 30 oz., which merely proved that in semitropical, as in temperate
climates, free fluid is chiefly thrown off by the kidneys, and that this
diminishes as the heat increases.

The following Table gives the results of the two subsequent days,
while passing through the equatorial doldrums or greatest heat, the drink
being suddenly ieee to 88 oz. daily : —

Taste I.—To show the Urine excreted at the Equator.

9 A.M. : 9 P.M.
Aye- Night urine. Day urine. - Totals.
Locality. Ree anata |e eee |
a Quan- Quan Quan-
is tity. [SP- 8" ‘tity. [BP 8") tity. [SP- St

SS SSeS

oft the African Coast,

Equatorial doldrums 80 July 14; 16 15 204 14 364
4) dat. ALO GN: oe sauect os

81 | July 15 164 | 13 21 8 oly

_ Thus nearly 37 oz. were excreted by the kidneys, leaving 51 oz. to be
accounted for. Now the bile is scarcely if at all increased in the tropics,
- so that the liver gives little aid. Dalton* gives #5 of the drink as the
_ average thrown off in this form and by the bowels in temperate latitudes.
. Taking this for the tropics also, allowing a little increase for bile, we have
4:4 0z. And reducing the water exhaled by the lungs in the temperate
zone (which, according to Dalton, is ¢ of the drink or 22 oz.) by the same
ratio as the respired air, viz. 11 per cent. or 2°42 oz., we have 19°58 oz. as
that for the tropics. The sum of these two is 23°98 oz. Then the

51 oz. not thrown off by the kidneys
— 23°98 oz. excreted by the lungs and bowels

gives 27°02 oz. for the skin to exhale.

So that the 88 oz. free fluid were got rid of thus :—
Urine 37 oz., skin 27°02 oz., lungs 19°58 oz., feeces 4°4 oz,
Had the water in the solid ingesta been reckoned, a difficult matter on
shipboard, the experiment would have been more satisfactory. But this
gives a fair approximation, inasmuch as any excess from this source would

- only have. gone to. increase the perspiration.

The relative excretion of free fluid-by the skin, kidneys, lungs, and bowels,
thus, differs in temperate and tropical latitudes, as they doubtless do in
_ arctic regions (Table II.).

* Hooper, ‘ Physicians’ Vade Mecum.’

1871.] Change of Climate on the Human Economy. 297

Tasxe II.—To show the relative excretion of free fluid in Temperate
and Tropical latitudes.

Organ. Temperate zone*. Tropics.

oz. per cent. oz. per cent.
Kidneys ...... (about) §—=45:25=59:54 |(about) $=3(° =42-04

Punes......... (somewhat (somewhat
| more than) }=20:-50=26:97 | more than) 3=19°58= 22-25

BVO sos aie 0s (rather less
than) ss= 650= 8:55 5 =27:02=30°7
Bowels ...... (about) so= 375= 493 ee Gees SS Gr

While the urine thus decreases from 593 to 42 per cent., the perspiration
rises from 83 to 30 per cent., there being a slighter fall of 43 per cent. from
the lungs, and a trifling rise from the bowels. The kidneys are thus the
chief eliminators of surplus water in the tropics as in temperate regions ;
but in the former it is the skin, as in the latter it is the lungs that rank
next. If suddenly stressed, however, by excessive imbibition, and the
safety-valve action of the kidneys or skin be brought into play, these pro-
portions doubtless differ. Will they hold good for permanent residents in
the tropics, foreign or native ?

The increased perspiration in the tropics or in artificial heat, and dimi-
nished urinary and pulmonic water-excretion by 22 per cent., is equal to a
proportionate increase in the cutaneous circulation and corresponding with-
drawal of blood from the kidneys to the extent of 174 per cent., and lungs
of 43 per cent. Moreover this diminished exhalation of watery vapour
from the lungs, by vicarious action of the skin, still further decreases the
amount of blood circulating through them, already shown to be reduced by
12:24 per cent., or 16°62 fl. oz. by a diminished excretion of carbonf. The
total decrease in the lung circulation is thus :—

16°62 fl. oz.
+ 6:42 ,, (4:72 per cent.)

== 23:04 fl. oz. as the total permanent withdrawal of blood

from the lungs by an average temp. of 80-83° F.

These facts appear highly interesting in the etiology of these and other

important internal and external organs, as well as hygienically and thera-
peutically suggestive.

The following results of the entire voyage from Bahia to England on a

* Hooper, ‘ Physicians’ Vade Mecum.’ In Dalton’s experiment the amount of free
fluid drunk was 76 oz., and in the aboye 88 oz. daily, The proportionate results,
however, are the same in both.

tT Proc. R, 8. 1870, vol. xviii, p. 515,

VOL. XIX. Qa

298 Dr. A. Rattray on the Effects of [Feb. 16,

daily allowance of 88 oz. free fluid (Table III.), will show that this par7-
passu increase and decrease in the perspiration and urine are by no means
uniform on going to or quitting the tropics, but oscillate considerably in all
latitudes, both in quantity and contained solids, even in adjacent days.

Tasie IiI.—To show the quantity and contained solids of the Urine in a
voyage across the tropics of 34 days.

| Urine. |

ales Morni Eveni Totals
Date. | 728° | Locality. area le: Con-
ae Q Quan Quan | yey
fe Sp. er. tity. Sp. gr. tity. Sp. gr.) solids.
1869 2 grains.
Aug. 8.| 764 | Bahia
sgt) OL TF | abe TS) Ria a4 5 38 8 82 | 6:39 | 503-97
» 10.) 772 | », 135 ,,| 38 5 42 6 80 | 5°52 | 409-61
Eo etka cee |. ty Leela, Wp oO 6 46 5 82 | 544 | 419-85
ah 2G'F go? bial 9 10 46 5 65 | 646 | 399-78
we ot 28 as ays 15 ee 4 35 7 79 | 5:32 | 404-49
yg | Oe, 4) aD 4 32 8 74 | 572 | 378-89
pe koe Mile Tay ere oe, OO. 5 42 4 78 | £49.) 31989
» 16.) 7385 | » 088,, | 42 7 31 4 73 | 572 | 3873-77
retails a0 » ABI! BF 4 29 7 66 | 5°31 | 368-65
es Oe MOF | a Ok ,, | 2 42 5 28 a 70 | 58 | 3858-41
FeO.) 2k » 40 ne 20 9 39 6 59 | 701 | 423-79
» 20.) 813 | » TI17,,| 20 9 29 8 49 | 840 | 494-61
3 21.) 80 i) VBBD 5, Se 4 39 4 71 | 4 290°53
eek Ol » 10°52 ,,; 144} 10 38 4 52 | 5°71 | 266-25
Pe eo OL Paes de Aa Ra PG 7 30 5 62 | 5°87 | 317-45
Poe Coe | 4, sot 53) AL 4 38 | 4 79 | 40 | 323-26
yee) Ser | iy GAD 4, | 2Ok fh 21 9 431 | 7:96 | 361:56
ay 20.) Se, bi as ASAD | 49 4 37 4 56 | 40 | 229-14
eS We fe: ue: lar 4 23 4) 50 | 63 | 301°52
fy OE Se Th. ere «,, f Be 8 35 ok | 59 | 5:33 | 30209
Per 0k 4 2615 |, > 26s 7 321 | 4 59 | 534 | 302-09
ye 2 U5 Bers Se ASR ns) 6 62 3 87 | 386 | 355-99
oL.| 79 7 a OO pt ae 6 53 4 72 | 4:52 | 294-62
Sept. 1.] 79 Le OR, els toe 4 53 4 7. | 40) | Sto-t7
i a} 0 22 S0d8.5,) 12 11 37 4 49 | 5°75 | 250:89
POH Oe Ni OG a tl 8 44 4 62 | 5:16 | 317-45
ua 745. , Bont .,| As 7 53 4: 66 | 459 | 270-06
» 9| 733 | 4, 3458 ,,
Sg me AES » 90°20 ,,{ 20 8 51 4 71 | 512 | 362-47
Ge) ae yaet2o, 7 1b 6 34 4 49 | 461 | 200-50
seh eel he » oooes| AZ 5 30 5 50 | 5:0 — | 255-26
de Ob. », 4422 25 5 48 5 73 | 50 | 371-68
Paar’ aa 39) PAOD 4) 14 8 56 5 70 | 56 | 857-36
7 do. | G0 Fe 2200 ro pmaay ier 8 27 6 62 | 545 | 31652

Thus on three consecutive days, taken at random, we find 49, 71, and
52 fl. oz., with 494, 290, and 266 grains of solids. The decrease in the
latter, as well as in the fluid, is due partly to the reduced ingesta, and partly
to the vicarious action of other organs, especially the skin and liver—and

1871.] Change of Climate on the Human Economy. 299

doubtless involves not only the urea and chloride of sodium*, but all of its”
ordinary ingredients. Both would be far more regular if the system could.

be kept day by day in strictly similar conditions as to exercise, clothing,
draughts, food, and especially drink—a difficult matter at sea, though pos-
sible on shore. So that by limiting the drink and increasing it only as
thirst prompted, the quantity of urine would keep at a uniform and perhaps
healthier standard. ‘The individually different quantities necessary to ac-
complish this may be easily ascertained. Thus, allowing 25 oz. free fluid
to be what my system requires daily in the average temperature of London
(50° F.), the addition of 1 fl. oz. for every degree above, or its deduction
for every degree below that, would keep the urine pretty equable, even
though its specific gravity and solids might alter (Table IV.).

Taste [V.—To indicate the daily quantity of drink necessary to keep the
Urine nearly alike in Temperate and Tropical latitudes.

Temperature of air (F.) ...... 80°. |; 40° . | 50°.) 60°. b: 70°. 4 802. 1 908

Free fluid required ............ 5 oz. | 15 oz. | 25 oz. | 35 oz. | 45 oz. | 55 oz. | 65 oz.

This fact was proved by an experiment (of which Table V. is a synopsis)
made in the Pacific in 1860-61, during a passage from Valparaiso (lat. 33°S.)
to Vancouver (lat. 48° N.), when the drink was not kept uniform through-
out as in Table III., but increased or decreased, as here indicated, with the
desire.

TaBLe V.—To contrast the Urine at the Equator and North and South
Temperate Zones.

Specific
pravity |Quantity
of {in | case.

7 cases.
1s, ere OZ.
Aversge cf 7 days furthest south (lat. 33°), temp. 68° F....) 10183 | 36
f F near equator (lat. 5°), ,, -78° ¥....; 10132 45:3
i i furthest north (lat. 53°), ,, 58° F....| 10177 443

Here both the quantity and specific gravity increased somewhat ; so that
the urine is perhaps not so often or much diminished in the tropics as usually
believed. It is so when the drink is stinted, and when, though ample, it is
not increased and decreased with the temperature (Table III.); but when
this is done it remains pretty uniform (Table V.), asit often does even when
taken inexcess. It isnot so much the nephritic as the cutaneous secretion
which alters with variations in the amount of drink in the tropics, and in
temperate climates the reverse. The functionally excited skin acts as a

* Dr. Forbes Watson and Becker, as quoted in Parkes’s ‘ Practical Hygiene.’
DA

300 Dr. A. Rattray on the Effects of [Feb. 16,

safety-valve for the kidneys in warm, as the latter do for the former in
colder ones. While the perspiration depends much on the temperature,
the urine is most influenced by the drink. Although heat, or its absence
(cold), is thus the chief agent in causing these fluctuations, the humidity,
velocity, &c. of the air are not altogether negative. The first acts by sti-
mulating or checking the sudatory glands, and all three by favouring or
Opposing evaporation. Frequent change of climate tends to develope the
ordinary and safety-valve range of action in both organs. In these facts
lie several important hygienic and therapeutic indications for the tropics,
with a view to prevent or lessen distressing hyperzemia of the skin and
excessive perspiration, both the result of undue imbibition, and the latter
highly dangerous when suddenly checked, and a frequent cause of disease.
By them the reason of the efficacy of tropical, and especially subtropical
climates in the prevention when imminent, and cure or relief when actually
present, of many diseases of internal organs, not of the abdomen alone, but
of thoracic ones, is explained. The sanatory heematic and secretive de-
rivative action of natural (tropical) and artificial heat has been already
pointed out with regard to the lungs*. Might not the practical phy-
siclan more frequently act on this hint as to the means and extent by
which both the circulation and the function of diseased or over-taxed in-
ternal organs may be relieved by thus transferring their blood-current and
secretion to sounder ones? Is not this great and general law of a deriva-
tion of blood from internal to external organs under heat, and the reverse
under cold, the soundest and most philosophical basis on which to erect a
new, safe, satisfactory, and permanent system of therapeutics and hy-
gienics ?

V. The Influence of Tropical Climates on the Weight and Strength.

Besides the already discussed functional, vascular, and other changes in
the lungs, skin, kidneys, and other organs of vegetable life, which follow
a transition from temperate to tropical climates, various phenomena affecting
those of animal life are also common—e. g. languor of body and brain, and
generally a loss of weight. More tardy and less evident, but equally worth
study, these are not due, like the former, to the general diversion‘in the
blood-current from internal to external parts, but to changes in the blood
itself and the tissues which it nourishes, to be hereafter investigated.

Occasionally an individual fattens on going to the tropics, and, instead of
losing, gains health and strength. Again, acorpulent person may decrease
considerably in weight, while his health, so far from impairing, actually
improves. But such cases are exceptional, and, doubtless, consist merely
in vitally unimportant fluctuations in the adipose tissue ; and as a rule the
issue includes a loss in both respects, which, if not disease, is closely allied
to it. An opposite result usually follows a contrary change of climate.

* Proc, R, 8, 1870, vol. xviii. p. 520.

1871.] Change of Climate on the Human Economy. 301

The following experiments to illustrate this were made in H.M.S. < Sala-
mander,’ during a voyage of five months to, anda subsequent stay of three
years on the east coast of Australia, while making triannual trips between
Sydney (lat. 34°) and Cape York, Torres Strait (lat. 103°S.), a distance of
1700 miles in a nearly north and south direction. The crew numbered
209, their ages being :—

between 15 and 25 (period of growth) ...... 129 (61°72 per cent.).
e Bol 38 (oo (AGULIE ARE). Pee ok 638 BOM een)
edt ,,-- 20> (lst period of decline)... 41) 16)4.(7°06 64,8).
5S (hd) 0 eg eeee ws PA GHeameiee ys

Thus 192 (91°86 per cent.) were under thirty-five, which may be con-
sidered the prime of life among seamen; while the whole were healthy.
They were weighed as far as possible in the same clothes, and between
6 and 7 p.m., about two hours after a light “supper” of tea and biscuit,
in order to reduce error from variations in the state of the bowels, stomach,
bladder, &c., to a minimum. Their faulty diet, however, unmodified for
temperature, and containing salt meat and other hurtful articles, was an
unavoidable disadvantage. Fortunately this enables us to observe the effect
of an agency far more under control for modification or removal than climate.

Tape I.—To show the effect of Tropical Weather alone on the weight.

Ist weighing, July 2, 1866, on entering tropics,

ci Panties 18, 1866, on quitting tropics, j \ 108 days, all spent in the tropics.
Average temperature at Sydney 60° F., at Cape York 82° F

Food consumed per man daily.
Salt meat issued on ...... 36 days Be ©

lb. oz. drs

PGT Bec yaice: days) Average of first week ... 2 5 123
Fresh meat issued on...... Tae 55 Somes
7 Tastiq?; sn) oe

Tota] | Number Number Range| Ave- Number Range| Ave-

15 to 25 35. | 3= 857 | 13=3714 | 1-8 3 19=54:28 | 1-14 | 5-16
2D 4, 3D 39 ahah 8=20d1 | 2-10 | 3:37) 28=71°8 || 1-12.) 47
EOP ert — 00 0d ea eC

30 ,, 49 ial tains dees 2=22°22 | 1-2

45 ,, 55 2 So Oren ee aa Poe ola ea re OO aaa eeeaee 5
Totals 85 T= 8:24 | 23=27-06 | 1-10 | 3 5d=6471 | 1-17 | 5
and per- are a

centages. 30=80'3 per cent.

Table I. shows the effect of 33 months’ exposure to an average tempera-
ture of 82° F. towards Torres Strait. Of 85 weighed, 644 per cent. had
lost flesh to an average of 5lbs. Though greatest among the adults

(>ts7 Ab

(71 per cent.), and especially the higher ages (774 per cent.), it was large
even among the juniors, of whom 54 per cent, instead of growing, lost con-

302 Dr. A. Rattray on the Effects of [Feb. 16,

siderably. Lime-juice was given; but the 36 days of salt meat doubtless
added to these results; and to make the experiment thoroughly satisfactory,
fresh meat should alone be issued—almost an impossibility in the present
transition state of naval dieting. Still the event is sufficiently decisive to
prove the prejudicial influence of tropical climates on the physique, at all
ages. Of 15 officers and men subsequently tested after 17 days more
prolonged and direct solar exposure, but with a larger allowance of fresh
(preserved) meat, 11 had lost from 1 to 9 lbs. (average 3,3-), 1 being un-
changed, while 3 had gained. Of the latter, one was a black (and there-
fore in his native climate), who increased 1 ib., the other two being healthy
boys who gained 1 and 2 1b. respectively. This shows that the wasting

effect of tropical weather in the adult white is not preventible even by a
tudicious regimen. ;

Tasiz I1.—To show the effect of Tropical Climate and Salt-meat Diet
on the weight.

Ist weighing, October 9, 1865, at Cape York, = 2 Sn Pa
Qnd ,, November 6, 1865, at Cape York, +28 days, all spent in the tropies.

Average temperature at Sydney 60° F., at Cape York 84° F.

25 4
20 ,, 00 33 2=6°06 | 2= 606 | 1-4 2% |29—87-87 | 1-10| 6
30 ,, 40 tipo tad as re 1=143 6
AR

Totals 76 5=658 | 9=11:84 | 1-10} 388)/62=81-58 | 1-i2 | 418

and per- ae oe a

centages. 14=18-42 per cent.

Table II., the results of another northward cruise, shows how much this
loss of weight is increased when the diet is one of salt meat*. The season
being the same (S8.E. monsoon), though the exposure was shorter by 80
days, no fewer than 81 per cent. lost to an average of 4lbs.—this, among
the boys and youths, being larger than before, even though their food was
increased ; which proves that a diet like this, not only highly salted but
too nitrogenous for warm climates, adds materially to the injurious influence
of tropical weather at all ages. After amore prolonged stay at Cape York
(one year), eleven marines, fed on a mixed, fresh and salt-meat diet, had
lost weight to the average extent of 11% lbs.

* z.e, The ordinary sea dietary, in which 1 lb. of salt meat, beef and pork alter-
nately, forms the chief part of the dinner,

4
>]
|
1
:

\
a}
{
?

;

1871.] Change of Climate on the Human Economy. 303

Tass IlI.—To show the conjoint effect of Tropical Climate, Salt Meat,
and hard Subsolar work on the weight.

Ist weighing, June 2, 1864, on entering tropics, 1042 dacs 62 in the tropics,
2nd 5 September 14, 1864, on quitting tropics, Y8) 49 in temp. zone.

Average temperature at Cape York 80° F.
Food consumed per man daily.

Salt meat issued on ...... 51 days
(with 90 lime-juice days) juga ACHE CE HE
Fresh meat issued on...... 53; ee: Berd Beh
dab.” 1 ke Ae Sr OF
Total Number | Number Betiae ll seeea Number Range| Ave-
ihe and and = and ¢
ge. | number fi : of | rage oi | rage
weiched, | Percentage | per centage Lae a percentage l es
ene: unchanged.|who gained.) + | 8" | “who lost. | C88 | “O85
per cent.| per cent.| Ib. lb. per cent.| Ib. lb.
15 to 25| 63 2=3°18 =4:76 | 2-2 | 2 |58=92:06 | 1-24 | 6:34
29°95, 00{ 35 1=2°86 | 38=8867 | 48 | 5:33/31=88:°57 | 1-17 | 7-74
35 ,, 45 Biot > tspeagune ol eae eS ae ee ee 5=100 5-16 | 9:2
PD (ilcsyase | | senses ots | Sesslesiagt S/O Nimans eeaneee nto atitoh was VI cdalee's in tomer
Totals | 103 o=2'91 | 6=582 | 2-8 | 3:66|94=91:26 | 1-24 | 6:96
and per- “sees SS SS
centages. 9=8°74 per cent. |

Table I1I., the record of another trip to Torres Strait, also during the
S.E. monsoon, shows that the body is still further affected when a third
injurious influence, viz. hard subsolar work, is added to these. ‘Thus, of
103 weighed, 1 per cent. lost flesh to an average of 7 lb. nearly; the
number of boys and young men being large, because most employed,
although the average individual loss was greatest among the seniors—thus
6 lb., 7 lb., and 9 lb. under 25, 35, and 45 respectively. This did not
arise from a reduced diet; for the daily average consumption at the end
of the period, when thus losing, had increased by 3% oz. per man.

A contrast of Tables IV. and V. further shows that season materially
influences this reduction in weight. Table IV. gives the results of 46 days
during the cool dry S.E. monsoon (aver. temp. 82° F.), which lasts for
9 months; and Table V. of 54 days during the sultry rainy N.W. mon-
soon (aver. temp. 87° F.), an exaggerated form of tropical weather related.
to the other as are the winter and summer in temperate latitudes. While
the number who lost flesh during the dry season was 44 per cent., it was
76 per cent. during the wet monsoon. The small per centage of gain even
among the strong and vigorous juniors in the wet season, viz. 10 and 143
per cent., is worthy of contrast with that of the dry season, viz. 593 and
432 per cent., as it shows that even the healthiest age cannot long with-
stand the emaciating influence of the worst season of the tropical year. The
high average percentage of loss (7 lb.) and low percentage of gain, 24 lb.,
during the wet, contrasted with that of the dry monsoon (31b. and
4-">lb.), which equally affects all ages, further illustrates this. ‘The m-

304: Dr. A. Rattray on the Effects of [Feb. 16,

creased ingesta towards the end of both experiments could not prevent
these results; nor is the difference between the two seasons ascribable to
a material dissimilarity in the quantity of the food.

TasLe IV.—To show the effect of Season in the Tropics on weight.
Cool and Dry. §8.H. Monsoon.
Average tenperature at Cape York 82° F.

Ist weighing, April 11, 1865, on entering tropics, waa 46 in the tropics,
2nd June 23, 1865, on quitting tropics, Y® | 27 in temperate zone.

15 to 25 37 2=541 |22=—59:°5 | 1-12 | 436 |13=35:14] 1-9 | 261
25 ,, 35 32 1=313 | 14=43°75 | 2-14 | 5:36 |17=53-12 | 1-12 | 3-94
3D ,, 45 9 iheeate iI 3= 3:33 | 3-7 | 5 5= 555 | 1-9 | 38
49 ,, VO 1 1=100

eveccesvee {| seeeee | eesnee [| cosesesee | eeeeee | seeeeoe

Totals 79 5=6°32 |39=49°37 | 1-14 | +77 | 35=44:30 | 1-12 | 3-15
and per- = ~- —
centages. 44—55-69 per cent.

TasLe V.—To show the effect of Season in the Tropics on weight.

Wet and Sultry. N.W. Monsoon.
Average temperature at Cape York 87° F.

Ist weighing, November 25, 1864, on entering tropics, "6 days { 54 in the tropics,
Aid ee February 9, 1865, on quitting tropics, (9 CAY® |) 22 in temp. zone.

Salt meat issued on ...... 70 days ped ons ae deat iy
(with 60 lime-juice days) pieeemene eon ae
Fresh meat issued on...... Hee

Be! unchanged. |who gained.| 8° | 87 | who lost. ;

per cent.} per cent.} Ib. lb. per cent.| Ib. lb.
Isto 49 Oe 18=16-38 ||. 5 = 102 1-5 | 2:2 |36=73-47 | 1-16} 6
25 ,, 30} 34 2= 588 | 5=1471 | 1-8 | 34 |27=79-41 | 1-16) 8
39 ,, 45 9 sect gs Mi lla i i A a br ey 8=88'88 | 4-20 | 9
45 ,, 5d 1 1=100

eecedceeve§ =} ssadwe fF epnusece | - oe es eineisic.> Hip C46 @uiay 7h) eB woes

Totals |) 93° 919-91 |10=10°46 | 428 tts See
and per- 2 8) Se es 2
centages. 2=23°'65 per cent.

4) 1-20) 715

ey)

Fei] Change of Climate on the Human Economy. 505

TaBLe VI.—To show the influence of Temperate Climates &c. on the

weight.
Ist weighing, September 14, 1864, near Sydney, 72 days, all spent in the
aude", November 25, 1864, after leaving Sydney, temp. zone.

Average temperature at Sydney 65° F.
Food consumed per man daily.

Table VI., in strong contrast to the above, shows how much and rapidly
the system rebounds under an opposite change of climate, and when re-
moved from excessive warmth into a healthy temperate climate, with a
fresh meat and vegetable diet, light work, frequent leave, &c. Thus after
a 54 days’ stay at Sydney in spring, notwithstanding the debilitating effect
of 35 salt meat days before and after the experiment, no fewer than 90 per
cent. had either gained flesh or lost nothing, the average gain being large
(6lbs.). In the 93 per cent. who lost, this was probably due, as it occurred
among the juniors, to those excesses so common after long confinement on
onal

Thus, during the three years over which these triannual trips from Syd-

ney to Cape York extended, the weight of the crew was continually oscil-
lating, increasing at the former, and again decreasing on returning to the
tropics. Frequent, sudden, and great changes of temperature and climate
like this, are doubtless fertile causes in undermining the constitution and
inducing premature old age. But for the re-invigorating influence of the
periodic return to cool weather, many more would have succumbed to

broken health. As it is, Table VII. shows that after 15 years 44 per cent.
_ of those who originally went out in the ship had lost flesh, while other evi-
dence showed that the health and strength of all had declined, there being
moreover no proof of the occurrence in any of that doubtful event, accli-
matization. The appetite and consumption of food had also diminished
from the same cause.

306 Dy, A. Rattray on the Effects of [Feb. 16,

Tasie VII.—To show the effect of a 14 year’s stay in a Tropico-temperate
region on the weight (including 4 trips between Sydney and Cape York).
184 in the tropics,

Ist weighing, August 10, 1864, near Cape York, x
2nd a 269 in temp. zone.

5 November 6, 1865, near Cape York,
Food consumed per man daily.

Salt meat issued on 229 days

AoA Ib. oz. drs.
with 154 lime-juice days
x eee ee = : ys), 4 Average of first week... 2 8 7|
22 last; ee eas
Total ea ee Range} Ave- ee Range| Ave-
Age. | number oe a of rage oe of | rage
eee percentage | percentage ata | aaa: percentage leas: eee
eS unchanged. |who gained.| § 8 who lost. : ats
per cent.| per cent.| lb. lb. per cent.} Ib. lb.
15 to 25 29 l= 345 |18=62-07 | 2-15 | G17 | 10=3448 | 2-14) 6
25 ,, 39 27 4=14:81 | 8=29-63 | 1-16 | 5:120/15=55:5d | 1-15 | 56
35 ,, 40 Dial Speeds 3=60 5-10 | 8 A=49 1-3 2
4D 43 DO raagued 01) Sawmeds ecb] o Gaadectes | A. bebe: ewantin Ti anime eee ne
Totals 61 5= 819 |29=47-54 | 1-16 | 6:08 | 27=44:26 | 1-15 | 5-52
and per- = S See
centages. 34=55'74 per cent.

During the next eighteen months the crew had more fresh meat in the
northward trips, the beneficial influence of which manifested itself by re-
ducing the percentage of those who lost flesh to 283 (Table VIII.), as well
as the percentage of loss. The appetite, however, remained much im-
paired.

Tazxe VIIL.—To show the effect of a 3 years’ stay in a Tropico-temperate
region on the weight (including 8 trips between Sydney and Cape York).

Ist weighing, August 10, 1864, near Cape York, 532 in the tropics,

11141 days {

2nd .° 4, September 25, 1867, near Cape York, } 609 in temp. zone.
Salt meat issued on ...... 575 days STONES ae tb aoa a
(with 540 lime-juice days) Pn ae ee 9.8 41
Fresh meat issued on ... 566 ita cir Sd re 827 |
mn last ,, WIV AGF
VE a
Total ee , Pole Range| Ave- pee Range| Ave-
Age. | number of | rage oe of | rage
= weighed. percentage percentage ati Bath, percentage l l
| u nchanged, who gained.) 8¥™ | & who lost. |)
per cent.| percent.| Ib. lb. per cent.| Ib. lb.
15 to 25) 25 ere 19-67. 3-40 | 14°68 | 5=20 3-12 | 5-2
20.4,°9 15 1= 6°66 | 8=53:33 | 1-18 | 7:125| 6=40 1-15 | 6:16
30 ,, 40 2 BSSOO ray Vad wg ly Saas) ras ae 1=50 0-1 | 1
A OA b ieenaee, | | terperdee y | jcoaswansss) |p geaNepipll sedace, |. .2sasceeegl
Totals 42 | 8= 714 (27=6429 | 1-40 |12°5 | 12=28-57 | 1-15 | 542
and per- re 5 a
| centages. 30=71°43 per cent.

A similar slowly progressive impairment of the physique also occurs
during long sea voyages, in which ships pass repeatedly and suddenly from
cold or temperate to tropical latitudes, and the reverse.

1871.] Change of Climate on the Human Economy. 307

Tasie 1X.—To show the effect of a long voyage of 55 days (including
Tropical Weather and Salt Meat) on the weight.

Average temperature, England 50° F., Equator 88° F., South Atlantic 72° F.
Ist weighing, January 9, 1864, England, Be dave 34 in the tropics,
Qnd ,, March 4, 1864, South Atlantic, Y°'| 21 in temp. zone.

Food consumed per man daily.

Be f : Ib. ES

1 Average of first week... 1 12 133

Leva eae shie | ce See

Salt meat issued on ......
(with 11 lime-juice days)
Fresh meat issued on...... O45

Total Number Number

Range| Ave- | Number
ne ibe and and oor ae and ¢ ue
Gs 1 eeareene percentage | percentage at mae ‘centage | ,° ase
eighed. Bee ain. | gain. | P&vCPNtS° | joss. | loss.
eae) unchanged. who gained. 6 g who lost.
per Gent.) per cent:|.. Ib. lb. per cent.| lb. lb.
15 to 25 80 c=) 20=31-25 | I-11 | 3:84 |51=63°75 | 1-23 | 6°72
25 ,, 30 45 3=666 | 138=28°83 | 1-13 | 377 | 29=64-44 | 1-20 | 7-41
Bo ,, 40 Hea food |ihinaptng Da 3=23:07 | 47 | 5 10=76°91 | 1-19 | 63
EME TR ON | rd Sedat Mh arated | aadisslgn|iaeeedes’( is vdadaaaat, (sso eny a olhpemmeee
Totals 138 ras 07 | 41= sles Spy | 1-13 | 39 |90=65:22 | 1-23 | 6°93
and per- =
centages. 48=3478 8 per cent, |

Thus Table IX. shows that after a 55 days’ passage from the cool
climate of England across the equator to the south temperate zone, 65
per cent. of the crew had lost flesh to an average of 7 1b. nearly—the
juniors suffering, though not so much as the seniors. An increased sick-
list at the close corresponds to this. These results were not due to a
decrease in the ingesta, as the daily consumption during the last averaged
6 oz. more than during the first week. The cause was therefore partly
climatic and partly dietetic, salt meat being issued most of the time.
TABLE X.—To show the effect of a long voyage in the Temperate Zone,

but on Salt Meat, on the weight.

Average temperature, Cape of Good Hope 65° F’., Sydney 62° F.
1st weighing, April 19, 1864, Cape of Good Hope, | 49 days, all spent in the temp.

2nd June 2, 1864, near Sydney, zone.
Salt meat issued on ...... 48 days RODIN g rae Se
ith 39 lime-juice days) tae
ete ime | y Average of first week 2 De
Fresh meat issued-on...... I day task Seekekae 5 Le
bh) yu $9 eon hed e 3
Total Number | Number Number

Range| Ave- Range| Ave-

ee ee ec cee or rape Bees Ct ee
aoe unchanged.|who gained. BALD BALES. liriin Haste | Loess
percent.) percent.) Ib. lb. per cent.| lb. Ib.
15 to 25) 77 8= 1039" 60=7792} t= 4-78 | 9=11-61 | 1-4 )-24
25, 00, 4 4= 9-75 |22=53'66 | 1-19 | 5°54 | 15=36°60 | 1-9 | 3°66
BD ,, 40 14 3=21-43 | 9=64380 | 2-8 | 5 2=14:30 | 1-2°>| bo
Eagan, a mene Waconia eee gene ie (lt. cgesqaees [ seepenl ty eaeames
Totals 132 15=11°36 1= 69°69 | 1-19 | 5 26=19:69 | 1-9 | 2:58
and per- Ms aa
centages. 106=80'30 per cent.

308 Dr. A. Rattray on the Effects of [ Feb. is;

Very different was the effect of the 44 days’ continuation of the voyage to
Sydney along the 40th parallel of south latitude, after a health-infusing stay
of fifteen days at Simons Bay (Table X.). Although the usual sea dietary
was continued, the exit from the tropics was an evident relief to the system,
which, but for the diet, would have retained its vigour throughout. As it
was, only 26, =19°69 per cent., lost flesh slightly. All the boys, whohad the
strong vital resilience of youth in their favour, gained in weight, and also
the younger men, while the seniors lost. An increase in the ingesta of
7 drams daily towards the end of the period is too trivial to have influenced
these results. This shows how long the system will ward off the scorbutic
diathesis when opposed by no other serious adverse agency, provided lime-
juice is given as a prophylactic. The increased sick-list and intensity of
the ailments, however, towards the end of the period, show that the immu-
nity was passing off. The difference in the percentage of those who lost
flesh in this and the former part of the voyage (Table IX.), is evidently
the effect of climate, and indirectly confirms Tables I. and I.

To the bracing effect of the S. temperate zone we must chiefly ascribe
the recovery of the crew. Wasted while crossing the equator, only 29 per
cent. were below their original weight in England on arrival at Sydney.
This loss, though evident among the juniors, was chiefly among the adults
and older men (Table XI.). The superior health and efficiency of a crew
in cool climates is an evident indication in planning long voyages. And
we have only to recollect the position and direction of the chief winds and
ocean-currents usually followed, to see how much these favour the mainte-
nance of health as well as rapidity of progress.

TasLe XI.—To show the effect of a voyage of 144 days on the weight.
Average temperature in England 50° F., Equator 88° F., Sydney 62° F.
Ist weighing, January 9, 1864, in aes 144 days 27 in the tropics,

2nd % June 2, 1864, near Sydney, 117 in temp. zone.
Salt meat issued on ...... 110 days ODE ELASTINGE! yes scr bee
pope 0 mene days) Average of first week .... 1 12 13%
Fresh meat issued on ... 34 ,, 8 sass pia
- last. 5, se0n ee
Total hae eee ce Range| Ave- eee Range| Ave-
Age. | number an t of rage E i t rage
‘shed, | Percentage | percentage Paiieaatn. percentage | 10.5 | loss
ee unchanged. |who gained. who lost. ;
per cent.| per cent.| Ib. lb. per cent.| Ib. lb.
15 to 25 76 5=6°58 |52=—68°42 | 1-18 | 5-73 | 19=25 1-25 | 5-47
25 ,, oo 42 38=714 | 25=59°52 | 1-15 | 5°76 | 14=33°33 | 1-15 | 5°85
35 ,, 45 12 1=8'33 6=50 3-7 | 5 5=41°66 | 1-14 | 7-2
Bip Ve PARP cabelas ce 2]. Seaannes (el ldapaniell: 42 cteehe celles aie ae el er
Totals 130 9=6°92 |83=63°85 | 1-18 | 569 | 38=29-23 | 1-25 | 584
and per- SS ~ =

centages. 92=70°77 per cent.

1871.] Change of Climate on the Human Economy. 309

The passage to Cape York, however, again increased the general sym-
ptoms of an impaired physique (Table XII.), thus proving the existence of
a constant ebb and flow in the state of health during long voyages.

TaBLe XII.—To show the effect of a voyage of 230 days on the weight.

Average temperature, England 50° F., Equator 88° F., Sydney 62° F.,
Cape York 80° F.

Ist weighing, January 9, 1864, England, 95 _ f 90 in the tropies,
2nd_~=sg,_~S ss August 10, 1864, Cape York, i eel US {180 in temp. zone.

Food consumed per man daily.

Salt meat issued on ...... 156 days ae
oe cee pies 4 Average of first week... 1 12 133
ee 2 5 dust) 3, me ee Orewa
+ = |
Total - oo - satay Range| Ave- ae Range| Ave-
Age. ae 4 percentage | percentage = wee percentage a et
weignec’-|unchanged.|who gained.| 89> | 87+ | who lost. | “O88: | *O5S-
per cent.| percent.| Ib. lb. | per cent.} Ib. lb.
15 to 25| 61 T=11-48 |18=29°51 | 1-19 | 7-11 |386=59-01 | 1-32 | 6-1
29 ,, 30 3D 1=2-86 8=22°86 | 1-16 | £87 |26=7428 | 1-22 | 654
39 ,, 49 eee ake nnn: 2=14-29 | 1-2 | 15 5=71-45 | 6-23 | 138
eR MENOa A ore al eee ci htc Naz. sip) eG ee ee
Totals | 1035 =(77 |28=27-18 | 1-19 | 5:36 |67=65-05 | 1-82 | 6-83
and per- _ ae eee ee
centages. 36 =35 per cent.

Thus, though 55 days in all were spent at Madeira, Simons Bay, Sydney,
and Brisbane, on a health-giving fresh meat and vegetable diet (see Table
VI), and lime-juice freely given, the monotony and confinement of 175 days
at sea, with 156 salt-meat days, a double exposure to the tropics, and fre-
quent changes of temperature, had increased the number who had lost
weight since leaving England to 65 per cent.—a decided index of failing
health and near approach to disease, and perhaps the scorbutic climax.

Similar fluctuations in weight, subsequently observed in the larger crew
of H.M.S. ‘ Bristol’ during a voyage of 88 days from England to Bahia
(lat. 11° S.) and back, are equally interesting and instructive (Table XIII).

Thus the warm weather and salt-meat diet of the first 57 days caused
85 per cent. to lose weight, which rose to 88 per cent. as the time lengthened
to 88 days. The return to the north temperate zone, however, speedily
reduced this to 47 per cent. As the diet was the same, the latter event
must have been purely climatic—an opinion confirmed by the subsequent
effect of 28 days’ harbour-life in England, when the number who lost went
down to 10°7 per cent., no fewer than 89 per cent. regaining flesh and
more than making up for the previous loss.

310 Dr. A. Rattray on the Effects of [Feb. 16,

TapiEe XIil.—To show the effect of climate and diet on the weight of an
adult crew, June 18 to September 14, 1869.

Average temperature, England 60° F., Equator 77° F., Bahia 76° F'.; England (return)

60° FB.
Number
Total ae Range} Ave- — Range} Ave-
Remarks. sass abo einer | es mg ge percentage ae toe
not lose.
. per cent.| Ib. Ib. per cent.| Ib. Ib.
Effect of first 57 days ...... 425 | 64=15:06 | 1-15 | 2:58 | 361=84-04 | 1-28 | 5-75
each 45 in the tropics
OF ware’ | 88 on salt meat.
Effect of first 88 days ...... 296 36=12:18 | 4-13 | 3:5 | 260=87-84 | 1-30 | 5-47
Pshiok 66 in the tropics
or wate | 61 on salt meat.
Effect of last 31 days ...... 310 | 164=52:93 | 4-9 | 2-64 | 146=47-1 | 3-10 | 2-81

21 in the tropics
10 on salt meat.

Subsequent effect of 28 days} 391 |349=89-26 | 1-19 | 4°70 | 42=10-74 | 1-9 | 2°66
in harbour (England) on
fresh meat and vegetables.

of which

Table XIV. shows that, while the same prevailed among the ship’s boys
(age 17 to 20) and naval cadets (age 14 to 17), youth and lighter work
&c., have an evident effect in lessening the percentage of loss under such
adverse agencies, and increasing the gain under opposite conditions.

Taste XIV.—To contrast the variations in weight, during long voyages,
of the men, boys, and naval cadets, June 18 to September 14, 1869.
Average temperature, England 60° F., Equator 77° F., England (return) 60° F.

Number and
England to Bahia (lat. 11° 8.), aoe percentage who Number and
: number ee: ai percentage
8 days. er gained or did
weighed. aiid who lost.
per cent. er cent.
Effect of first 57 days ............ Men 425 34 15:06 561=84:94
Late nl 45 in the tropics, Boys 64 28= 43-74 36=56:25
38 on salt meat. Cadets 60 23= 38:33 37=58'33
Kffect of first 88 days ............ Men 296 a6 127716 260=87°84
: 66 in the tropics, Boys 40 16= 35 24—60
of which Bt 03 : iS SAL? phan agin
ae on salt meat. Cadets 58 20= 34-47 38=65'51
Effect of last 31 days ............ Men 310 | 164= 52°93 146=47'1
of which { 2! in the tropics, Boys 41 380= 73°17 11=26°82
10 on salt meat. Cadets 59 34= 57°62 25= 42°37

Subsequent effect of 28 daysin} Men 3891 | 349= 89:26 42=10°74
harbour (England) on fresh} Boys 34 30= 90:58 4—11-76
meat and vegetables. Cadets 28 28= 100

871.} Change of Climate on the Human Economy. 311

Thus 85 per cent. of the men lost flesh during the first 57 days, but only
56 per cent. of the boys, and 58 per cent. of the cadets. Again, during
the first S88 days the percentages were—men 88, boys 60, cadets 65.
Further, while 53 per cent. of the men began to recover weight on reenter-
ing cool weather, 73 per cent. of the boys and 58 per cent. of the cadets
did the same. Lastly, in England, while 89 per cent. of the men gained,
among the boys we find 904 per cent., and among the cadets 100 per cent,
The advanced age, greater strength, and rougher eatly life of the boys
enabled them to bear the voyage better, and recover sooner under genial
agencies than the younger delicately-reared cadets. On the other hand,
a generous diet and better regulated life caused the latter to increase more
in England. Under favourable conditions, as to climate, diet, &c., the
weight of men, and particularly boys, should not fluctuate thus. Nor can
such changes be salutary. As arule adults, with fully developed frames,
should remain pretty stationary in weight. Boys, however, should increase
not only in weight, but in height and breadth of chest. For the former
to emaciate, or the latter to grow taller and broader, while the weight
remains the same or lessens, is a sure sign of present or impending mis-
chief. The average of 13 1b. per week by which these cadets increased at
home, may be considered the healthy rate of growth for boys of their age.
And we may give Table XV. to show the effect of subsequent longer leave
in England on the physique of a larger number of cadets.

TapLe XV.—To show the effect of a healthy diet and climate on the
physique of naval cadets, age from 14 to 17 (September and October
1870; time 44 days; temperature 64° F.).

Number | Number Number
Total and and Range| Ave- and Range| Ave-

Weight.| 52 1= 1:925)48=92°31 | 1-20 | 5°93 | 8=5°77 1-2 | 1°66
Hae TO ees

in.
Height..| 54 20 =387-04 | 34=63 Feo POO erty tree RES,

eorgee

Chest ... Oye DN ASME sea ualeaer ey Saw Cha een eee alg EC eee

Thus, of 52 cadets, 93 per cent. either did not lose or gained flesh to the
average of 1 lb. per week, while 63 per cent. increased in height, and no
doubt in capacity of chest ; but the time was too short to obtain satisfac-
tory results as to this. Obviously, therefore, if cadets are long subjected
to influences which retard their growth, even if disease does not ensue,
their future strength, both of body and brain, is apt to be impaired ; while
ship’s boys and young seamen are not likely to become physical athletes,
nor adults to retain their vigour as fighting men. These conclusions neces-
sarily apply to all similarly situated.

312 Dr. A. Rattray on the Effects of [Feb. 16,

If we can isolate the effects of tropical weather so as to contrast them
with those of other health-impairing agencies, it will be both interesting
and practically useful. ‘Table XVI. shows when we find the greatest gain
or greatest loss of weight. Life under the healthiest conditions, in which
the highest gain (903 per cent.) and lowest loss (94 per cent.) occurs, is
first given as a standard for comparison and index of what should be aimed
at in all latitudes and circumstances.

_ Taste XVI.—To compare the effect of climate and other agencies on
| the weight.

Gain or

unchanged Loss
Reference. | Pernicious influences. |
Per | Ave- | Per | Ave-
cent. | rage. | cent. | rage.
glihesa Ib. Ib.
Mable Vai. WNome scccstecen acetone teecnee erences 90-36 | 6°3 9-64 | 2°62
5s eg? | Omes(Galtaniedt) wc. tsonk.wanoteasyoaers S105, > 19-69 | 2°58
aed ek One (tropical climate) .............4- 35°30 | 3 64:71 | 5
», LX. | Two (tropical climate, dry season, | 34°78 | 3°9 | 65:22 | 6:39

and salt meat).

» V. | Iwo (tropical climate, wet season, | 23-66 | 2:8 | 76°34 | 7-15
and salt meat).

III. | Three (tropical climate, salt meat,| 8°73 | 5°66 | 91:26 | 6:96
and hard work).

We here notice a progressive decrease in the number who gain or do not
lose in weight, and necessarily a corresponding increase’ in the percentage
of those who lose, according to the variety and intensity of the adverse
agencies. Thus fewest emaciate when the influences are altogether genial,
viz. 9°64 per cent. An injurious diet raises this to 19°69 percent. Under
tropical climate it rises to 64°71. Under the latter and salt meat combined,
it again rises to 65°22 per cent., and in the rainy season to 76°34 per cent.
When, besides this, hard work is undergone, it mounts to 91°26 per cent.
The average gain and loss columns show a similar though less regular in-
crease and decrease. ‘Tropical climate is thus by far the most injurious
influence; and its effects are materially aggravated by other adverse agencies.
[And the Tables show that these facts apply to the junior as well as the
senior ages, though occasionally more apparent in the latter—Feb. 27. ]

We must know the nature of these universal and marked changes in the
weight, and the tissues involved, before we can decide whether they are
physiological or pathological, and, if the latter, satisfactorily direct our
hygienic or therapeutic efforts to prevent or remedy them. We cannot
ascertain by anatomical or histological investigation ; but we may fairly
suppose that every or nearly every tissue is more or less implicated—those

1871.] Change of Climate on the Human Economy. 313.

which carry on the functions of animal life being most affected, especially
such as form the great bulk of the body. It would be difficult to say
whether the watery part of the blood and body generally is reduced by ex-
cessive perspiration. The osseous system and thoracic and abdominal viscera
are probably little changed. The fibrous and gelatinous are perhaps more
altered ; but it wouid be difficult to separate this from the change in the
fatty muscular and nervous tissues, the three doubtless most of all affected.
In warm latitudes less fat is required than in cold ones to keep out cold and
generate internal heat or muscular force. Hence nature uses it up in its
vital processes, and thus first gets rid of what does not itself play a vital

part in the human economy, or materially influence health by its removal,.

and would only prove an encumbrance. The prevalent languor of body
and mind no doubt arise partly from diminished energy im the nervous and
muscular tissues; but are they not also, and perhaps principally, due to a
decrease in their bulk, similar to that in other tissues? Strength is the
manifestation of muscle acted on by nervous influence; and, from several
experiments made on the officers and crew of H.M.S. ‘Bristol,’ strength
decreases and increases with the foregoing changes in weight—a fact which
goes far to prove that though loss of strength may be partly of nervous
origin, the muscular tissue is also largely involved in its production, and

is probably both physiologically weakened and physically altered in.
Pp ¥ pay gically pay ¥

texture*. : :

The cause of this reduction in weight in the tropics is threefold :—first,
a diminished necessity for surplus fat, which becomes absorbed ; second,
that peculiar and not easily explained physiological effect of heat, which
causes the tissues to decay faster than in cold latitudes ; third, diminished
lung-work and blood-oxygenation, and thereby animperfect renewal of
tissue. On the other hand, the languor and weakness are due, first, to loss
and relaxation of the muscular substance; second, to a similar loss of
nervous tone and matter; third, to suboxidation of the blood}, which
impairs the activity not only of the muscles, but of the nerve-centres which
originate, and nerve-cords which transmit motor and sensory impressions ;
[and, fourthly, in their early stage, to a reduced supply of their vital stimu-
lant the blood, diverted from the internally situated nerve centres, nerves,
and muscles, to the cutaneous surface.—Feb. 27.] The early and primary
results of tropical warmth on the tissues are probably chiefly physical and
quantitative ; but when prolonged, especially if conjoined with an erroneous
diet, their composition is affected, and they are also chemical and qualitative.

- What are the true bearings and diagnostic value of this closely-allied loss

of weight and strength? Are they solely physiological? or when do they

become pathological? Do they always, or at what stage do they indicate

* These data were scarcely ample enough for tabulation. The ship’s motion, imper-
fect testing apparatus, and difficulty of finding one equally suited for all men, in whom
the best-developed sets of muscles often differ, make this a troublesome inquiry.

+ Proceedings of the Royal Society for_1870, No. 122, p. 520.

VOL. XIX. 2B

314 Dr. A. Rattray on the Effects of [Feb. 16,

a loss of vitality or health? If decreased weight originates merely in an
absorption of fatty tissue, and no strength is lost, the result is at least not
unhealthy. But when other tissues are involved (and it would be difficult
to decide when they are, as this doubtless varies even in the same individual),
it is then, if not disease, closely allied to it—and certainly an indication of
an impaired and debilitated physique, prone to succumb to other morbific
agencies, and ultimately to induce premature decay and old age. Physio-
logical in their earlier stage, they soon become of doubtful nature, and
finally decidedly pathological. And that there is a special and not merely
a general relation between these phenomena and the health appears, first,
from the results being so marked, uniform, and generally prevalent ; second,
from concurrent indications of debility, shown by a progressive increase in
the amount and severity of sickness; and, third, by a marked decrease in
the loss of weight and strength in the tropics, when some of the agencies
which indirectly augment its influence are removed, as will be proved by
the following Table, which shows the effect of an improved diet.
During a similar voyage from England to the South Atlantic, in two of
Her Majesty’s ships, both crews were subjected to a corresponding amount
of tropical weather ; but the number of salt-meat days in H.M.S. ‘ Bristol’
was twelve fewer than in H.M.S. ‘Salamander’ *, the result being that in
the former the number of those who lost flesh and strength was reduced by
22 per cent. 3

Tas_E XVII.—To contrast the results of two similar voyages on the weight. : |

ey Perea per cent.) per cent.| Ib. Ib. per cent.| lb. Ib.

34 in the tropics |] . : bates : as ;
3D days | 38 Pe eas \ 379 =| 42=11-08 |172=45°38| 1-12 | 2°73 |165=43:53/ 1-13 | 2-45

H.M.S. ‘ Salamander.’

a 34 in the tropics : if . _@r. :
ja days diy tui roe \ 116 | 7= 6-03 | 383=28-45| 1-13 | 418 | 76=65-52| 1-23 | 7-2

[This was equally apparent among the cadets (Table XVIII.). Thus, of
58, the number who lost weight became reduced from 653 to 40 per cent.
by a removal from the tropics, combined with a limited use of salt meat.
The improvement in their growth, as shown by their height and measure-
ment of chest, was equally obvious.

* From a lately introduced issue of preserved meat every third day in the naval
dietary.

1871.] Change of Climate on the Human Economy. 315

Taste XVIII.—To contrast the results of two voyages on the weight of
Cadets.

Number and per-
centage who gain-
ed or did not lose.|.

Number
weighed.

Number and per-
centage who lost.

a es i i |

per cent. per cent.

A voyage to Bahia of 88 days :—

in tropics, 66 days... Ns
on salt meat, 51 ,, ... } 58 20 = 34:47

38=65°51
A voyage to the Mediterranean
of 100 days :—

in tropics, 0 days i 7 Tr 34= 59-64

on salt meat, 5 ,, 23=40°35

The general loss of flesh (in other words, absorption of internal tissue)
which results from the salt-meat dietary of long voyages, and which is here
seen to be so greatly intensified in and by tropical climate, is really the
essence and primary stage of scurvy, and corresponds in principle and
nature with the visible, external, and superficial breaking down and loss of
substance in the phlegmous abscesses, ulcers, &c., still too prevalent in the
service, and in its more serious and advanced forms of the dysentery, and
putrid ulcer, once so common and fatal; while the intensity, obstinacy,
and sometimes the origin of many other local and general diseases frequent
among seamen, e. g. rheumatism, syphilis, struma, various fevers, con-
tinued, contagious and periodic, &c., have doubtless an equally close
alliance.—Feb. 27. |

These experiments were carried out in super-oceanic climates. It would
be interesting to know how the weight and strength are affected in conti-
nental ones, where the range of temperature and humidity &c. are greater,
‘as, for example, when troops are moved from the cool hilly regions of India
to its sultry lowlands.

These facts suggest important hygienic and therapeutic indications ; for
example :—

First. That the tropics, especially during the rainy season, should be
avoided by natives of colder latitudes.

Second. That the young, the debilitated, and the diseased should espe-
cially shun warm regions.

Third. That none but full-grown healthy adults should go there.

Fourth. That with all, even the latter, a speedy exit should be made
therefrom, when great loss of flesh and strength give warning of approach-
Ing disease.

Fifth. That such injurious agencies as may increase the weakening or
disease-inducing influences of tropical climates, of themselves irremediable,
should be avoided, e. g. faulty diet, over fatigue, impure air, &c.

Sixth. That, to preserve health, a tropical climate should be frequently
changed for the more temperate ones of higher altitudes or latitudes.

2B2

316 Dr. A. Rattray on Change of Climate. [Feb. 16,

VI. Conclusion.

The ultimate object of these varied functional and organic changes
induced in the human frame by change of climate, is to accommodate it to
altered meteorological and other conditions, and assimilate it to those of
native races. It is the ease or difficulty with which different varieties of
mankind, ages, sexes, and idiosyncrasies become accustomed to this that
indicates their capability for what we term acclimatization. [Would not a
more intimate acquaintance than we yet possess with the differences
in the minute anatomy and functions of the various tissues and organs
of these different races and families, and also their correlation and capability
or not of assimilation under change of climate, go far to decide the long-
vexed questions as to the unity or plurality of species and of creative centres ?
—Feb. 27.] In these important changes, moreover, especially that in the
current of the blood from the interior to the surfaceof the body on proceeding
to the tropics, there is an evident analogy with certain great operations which
take place under similar circumstances in the inorganic world. The air and
ocean likewise heat as they proceed towards the equator, and finally overflow
to form those beneficent winds and sea-currents which play so important a
part in the economy of the globe, and influence its hygiene, therapeutics, and
etiology, not less than its commerce. And although in these it acts on what
may be termed the centre of their circulation, whereas in the human frame it
operates on its periphery, the agent in all three is the same, viz. the sun’s
heat, as is the primary effect, viz. a change in the direction of original
currents, as well as the final results, viz. purification and modification of
temperature. The general physical and general hygienic and curative
schemes of nature are thus evidently connected. Without these pheno-
mena the heat of tropical lands and seas, and cold of other regions, would be
intolerable, and that of the skin and body too high or too low for the main-
tenance of their vitality ; while both the air, ocean, and blood would rapidly
become impure and unfit to sustain life.

Deriving its first and chief impulse from the heart, the blood merely
undergoes redistribution—the current in cold and temperate climates being
directed towards internal, and in the tropics towards external organs, espe-
cially the skin. In either case it flows from cooler towards more highly
heated regions. Is not this vital process, therefore, in this respect also, at
least partly akin to the allied phenomena in the air and ocean, and physical
as well as physiological? The blood generally being probably somewhat
warmer in the tropics than elsewhere, does not the heating of the surface
and contents of the turgid cutaneous capillaries act as a vis @ fronte in in-
ducing it to flow towards and accumulate here, as the warm interior does
in cold regions ?

1871.] Dr. W. Huggins on a Registering Spectroscope. 317

IL “Ona Registering Spectroscope.” By Wiit1am Hveerns,
LL.D., D.C.L., F.R.S. Received January 14, 1870.

The short duration of the totality of the solar eclipse of December last,
led me to seek some method by which the positions of lines observed in the
spectrum of the corona might be instantly registered without removing the
eye from the instrument, so as to avoid the loss of time and fatigue to the
eye of reading a micrometer-head, or the distraction of the attention and
other inconveniences of an illuminated scale.

After consultation with the optician Mr. Grubb, it seemed that this
object could be satisfactorily accomplished by fixing in the eyepiece of the
spectroscope a pointer which could be moved along the spectrum by a
quick-motion screw, together with some arrangement by which the
position of this pointer, when brought into coincidence with a line, could
be instantly registered. 3

I was furnished by Mr. Grubb with an instrument fulfilling these con-
ditions, and also with a similar instrument with some modifications by
Mr. Ladd, in time for the observation of the eclipse.

Unfortunately at my station at Oran, heavy clouds at the time of totality
prevented their use on the corona; but they were found so convenient for
the rapid registration of spectra, that it appears probable that similar in-
struments may be of service for other spectrum-observations.

In these instruments the small telescope of the spectroscope is fixed,
and at its focus is a pointer which can be brought rapidly upon any part
of the spectrum by a screw-head outside the telescope. The spectrum and
pointer are viewed by a positive eyepiece which slides in front of the tele-
scope, so that the part of the spectrum under observation can always be
brought to the middle of the field of view. The arm carrying the pointer
is connected by a lever with a second arm, to the end of which are attached
two needles, so that these move over about two inches when the pointer is
made to traverse the spectrum from the red to the violet. Under the ex-
tremity of the arm fitted with the needles is a frame containing a card,
firmly held in it by two pins which pierce the card. This frame containing
the card can be moved forward so as to bring in succession five different
portions of the card under the points of the needles; on each of these
portions of the card a spectrum can be registered.

The mode of using the instrument is obvious. By means of the screw-
head at the side of the telescope, the pointer can be brought into coin-
cidence with a line; a finger of the other hand is then pressed upon one of
the needles at the end of the arm which traverses the card, and the position
of the line is instantly recorded by a minute prick on the card. A bright
line is distinguished from a dark line by pressing the finger on both needles,
by which a second prick is made, immediately below the other. In all
cases the position of the line is registered by the same needle, the second
needle being used to denote that the line recorded is a bright. one.

318 Mr. A. H. Garrod on the relation of the Cardiograph [Feb. 23,

It was found that from ten to twelve Fraunhofer lines could be regis-
tered in about 15 seconds, and that, when the same lines were recorded five
times in succession on the same card, no sensible difference of position
could be detected between the pricks registering the same line in ee
several spectra.

It is obvious that, by registering the spectra of difecue substances on
the card, a ready method is obtained of comparing the relative positions
of the lines of their spectra.

Each spectroscope was furnished with a compound prism, which was made
by Mr. Grubb, and gave a dispersion equal to about two prisms of as
glass with a refracting angle of 60°.

Postscript.—I have just learned that in a spectroscope contrived by
Professor Winlock for observing the eclipse of December 22, 1870, the
positions of the observing-telescope are registered by marks made upon a
plate of silvered copper.—February 3, 1870. |

February 23, 1871.

WILLIAM SPOTTISWOODE, M.A., Treasurer and Vice-President,
‘in-the Grin

The following communications were read :-—

I. “On the Mutual Relations of the Apex Cardiograph and the Radial
Sphygmograph Trace.” By A. H. Garrop, of St. John’s
College, Cambridge. Communicated by Dr.Garrop. Received
January 18, 1871.

A desire to acquire an accurate knowledge of the relation borne by the
commencing contraction of the heart to the origin of the primary rise in
the pulse at the wrist, led the author to construct an instrument which
has enabled him to determine, with considerable accuracy, the mutual
relation of these two points, and to demonstrate one or two unexpected
results, not altogether without interest.

The cardio-sphygmograph above mentioned consists of a piece of board,
10 inches long by 53 inches broad, and about half an inch thick, along one
side of which a sphygmograph can be laid, as shown in fig. 1. On the
opposite side a spring (a) like that employed in the sphygmograph is
attached to a moveable support (0), so that its tension can be modified.
To the free end of the spring a small pad (c) is fixed, which is in com-
munication with the cardiograph apparatus by means of a silk thread (d).
This latter instrument consists of a light lever (e), a little over 2 inches
long, connected to the board first mentioned by a frame (f) which is just
free from the sphygmograph when the latter is in position. The lever,
which is one of the third system, is connected on either side, close to its

1871.] and Radial Sphygmograph Trace. 319

fixed end, to two silk threads, one of which (d) is attached to the pad and
spring above mentioned, and the other to a small spring (g) which moves.
it when it is less acted on by the stronger spring. The apparatus is so
arranged that the lever works perfectly when it is so placed as to be above
the registering part of the sphygmograph, when the latter is in position.
The tip of the lever carries a steel pen (4).

Fig. 1.

To use the instrument, the See is first fixed on the left arm
as usual, the recording paper being adjusted to its place. The arm is then
moved until the attached instrument rests on the board first mentioned ;
and it is maintained in position by certain pegs and holes in the board,
which respectively come into contact with the main parts, and receive the
projections of the instrument.

The arm and attached apparatus are then moved until the pad of the
cardiograph spring is brought into contact with the spot, between the fifth
and sixth ribs, at which the heart’s pulsation is most marked—the position
of the pad in relation to the board having been previously so fixed as to
enable this to be done with facility, the whole being maintained in the
horizontal position. The contact of the pad with the chest-wall causes the
lever to recede ; and it is allowed to do so until its pen arrives above the
recording-paper, the whole apparatus being steadied by the right hand.
When the levers of the two instruments are both found to be moving
freely, the watchwork of the sphygmograph is set in action by means of a
string, connected at the other end with the stop-block of the train of
wheels ; and when the recording-paper has run its length, a combined
trace is found, as in figure 2.

The sontinercenient of he os aes is oe defined with precision;

320 Mr, A. H. Garrod on the relation of the Cardiograph (Feb. 23,

and as they are both recorded on the same paper, synchronous movements
must be at equal distances from the starting-points, and therefore they can
be projected on one another. The results obtained by these pas
form the subject of this communication.

All the observations were made on the same anbjeet cetat. 04, in good
health. They were all made in the sitting posture, as the apparatus could
then be held more firmly, or rested on the arm of a chair.

To facilitate description, the following terms and symbols will be em-
ployed with regard to pulse-traces.

1. The rapidity of the pulse is symbolically represented by x.

2. The first cardiac interval is that which occurs between the commence-
ment of the systolic rise and the point of closure of the aortic valve, in
cardiograph traces. The number of times that this interval is contained
in its component beat is represented by y; and the law as to its length,
published elsewhere *, will be assumed; it may be stated thus :

ay=20% x.

3. The first arterial interval is that which occurs between the com-
mencement of the primary rise and the termination of the major fall in
arterial sphygmograph traces. The number of times that this interval is
contained in its component beat is represented by y'; and the law as to its
length at the radial artery, which is alone considered in this communica-
tion, published in the Proceedings of the Royal povicty (No. 120, 187 9),
will be assumed ; it may be thus stated :

ay! =47 X/ x.
4. The first cardio-arterial interval is that which occurs between the
commencement of the systolic rise in the cardiograph trace and the origin
of the main rise in the sphygmograph trace. The number of times that
this interval is contained in its component beat is represented by z.

5. The conjugate cardio-arterial interval is that portion of the first
cardiac interval which is synchronous with a portion of the first arterial
interval. It is therefore the interval between the commencing sphyg-
mograph rise and the point of closure of the aortic valve as represented in
the cardiograph trace.

6. The second cardio-arterial interval is that which occurs between the
point of closure of the aortic valve and ity indication at the artery under
consideration.

In commencing to work with the cardio-sphygmograph, measurements
were made to find the duration of the first cardio-arterial interval, as it:
required but a few experiments to prove that the heart commences to
contract before the pulse is indicated at the wrist.

- By means of compasses, or by superposing one trace on the other, the
commencing cardiograph rise was projected on the sphygmograph trace ;
and the interval between this event and the origin of the radial rise was

* Journal of Anatomy and Physiology. Cambridge, vol. v. Noy. 1870.

1871.] and Radial Sphygmograph Trace. 321

then measured into its component beat in each pulsation of the trace, from
which the average of the observation was obtained. The results are given
in Table I. Column II. ; and in Column III. some of these are expressed
in parts of a minute, whereby a better idea can be obtained as to their
significance.

Tasie I.
| I, TI. II. IV.
1 ills

x. z. xe 39 Va
58 NO, "003316 -0033649
64 5:083

70 4:74

71 Ay,

74 4°50625 "00299 "00298
79 Ar 127,

80 4:4437

Sloe te hs

85 4°355

86 Ae? "002768 "002802
97 4°17
102 3°885 °002524 "002538
132 3°41 °002222 "002229
154 oe

170 2°95 °00197 "001957

From these results it is seen that the first cardio-arterial interval is
longer in slow than in quick pulses, and that it does not increase as quickly
as the pulse diminishes in rapidity; but that the statement that it varies
inversely as the square root of the rapidity is correct, or very nearly so, is
rendered evident by comparing Columns III. and IV., in the latter of
which the duration of the first cardio-arterial interval is calculated from
the formula #z=39W ax. The chief source of error in these observations
is the slight uncertainty in the rate of movement of the watchwork of
the instrument, on which the calculation of the rapidity of the pulse
depended. |
_ On comparing this equation, namely vz=39V 2, with the one above
referred to as to the relations of the first cardiac interval, namely
xy=20N z, it is evident that the length of the first cardio-arterial interval
ig ‘5128, or just over half that of the first cardiac interval, whatever the
rate of the pulse.

This being the case, a more precise method is acquired of verifying the
results arrived at; for by finding the number of times that the first
cardio-arterial interval is contained in the first cardiac interval, a constant
quantity ought to be the result, which is independent of the. rapidity of

322 Mr. A. H. Garrod on the relation of the Cardiograph [Feb. 23,

the pulse. Table II. contains these measurements ; and it may be seen
that, though there is a small range of variation, the numbers are all very
near to the theoretical requirement, which is 1:95; and their average
is 1°983.

TaBLe II.
Number of times | Number of times
that the first car-!! that the first car-|

Rapidity of,dio-arterial inter-| Rapidity of|dio-arterial inter-

pulse. jval is contained) pulse. jval is contained,

in the first car- in the first car-'
diac interval. || diac interval.
58 1-95 S615 1-95 |
64 2: e188 21 :
69 1:9 IP ge 2-1 |
70 Peto hes 19959
71 1-975 85°5 1°95 |
heey 2°058 86 2: |
EA 1:975 88°5 2°05 |
| 76 1:98 91 215 |
78 1:9 uo 1°85 :
79 1-925 ba Red 1°95 i
79°5 1°9 HO: O15
80 1:95 | 154 1975 oy

{
} |

It is generally known that in the sphygmograph traces of most slow
pulses there is a notch in the first arterial interval, immediately preceding
the major fall; and one of the most marked results of the use of the
cardio-sphygmograph is the determination of the fact that the point of
closure of the aortic valve at the heart is always exactly synchronous with
the lowest part of this notch, or the point of abrupt change of direction
in the major fall of the sphygmograph trace. This leads to the almost
necessary conclusion that the subsequent slight rise or change in direction
of the trace is the result of the simultaneous movement of the whole
column of blood produced by the suddenness of the shock of closure of the
aortic valve, the secondary rise in the same trace being the more slowly
transmitted pressure wave resulting from the same cause.

The slower the pulse the more distinct is this notch; and by comparing
different rapidities, a gradual diminution in its conspicuousness is apparent,
it rising higher and higher above the point of termination of the major fall
as the pulse is quicker and quicker. When the heart’s rate is about 75 in
a minute, the notch is halfway down the major descent, and is partially
blended with it ; when over 100 a minute, as the aortic valve closes when
the ascent is at its maximum, the notch is so blended with the pressure
wave as not to indicate itself separately.

In slow pulses, the systolic main rise being quite over when the aortic

1871.] and Radial Sphygmograph Trace. 323

valve closes, the shock wave indicates itself by an abrupt but not con-
siderable rise, breaking the very gradual major descent.

This explanation being correct, another means is obtained of checking
the results arrived at by the combined instrument; and Table III.
Column II. contains a few measurements of the number of times that the
conjugate arterial interval is contained in the first arterial interval, as found
by measuring the ratio of the interval between the commencing arterial
rise and the bottom of the notch in the major fall to the whole first arterial
interval. Column III. gives the theoretical results necessitated by the
equations given above.

Tasre III.

Number of times the con-

jugate cardio-arterial in-

terval is contained in the
first arterial interval,

Rapidity
of as found
pulse. from as calculated
measurement] (approxi-
of radial mately).
trace.

37 1595 1:6

A5 1635 1°625

58 1:69

a9 1°7083 1°72

60 1°74 1°734

68 Mey 1:78

It may be mentioned that the reason why so few of these instances are
given, is that there is considerable difficulty in measuring these small
intervals into one another with precision ; but by practice a very fair esti-
mate can be made of their value, and in all cases they seem to agree with
theoretical requirement. The close accordance of the results obtained by
this method in very slow pulses, and the calculated results arrived at from
facts relating only to quicker ones, tends strongly to establish the correct-
ness of the law given with regard to them.

In Table IV. the lengths, in parts of a minute, of the different intervals
referred to in this communication, are given as calculated from the
equations on which they have been shown to depend. With regard to the
second cardio-arterial interval, a reference to Column VII. will show that
it varies very slightly within the range of the heart’s action, not being
4 longer in a pulse of 36 than in a pulse of 169 in a minute.

324 Mr. G. Gore on the Thermo-electric [Feb. 23,

TaBLe IV.
I. II. TIL. IV. ee es, 52 VIL.

re Length of| Length of | Length of

Rca Length of sepeen pe Poor first cardio- conjugate second car-

“te of | Dulse-beat, Gnterval, in | interval, in [22tetial in-| cardio-arte- dio-arterial

#15 in parts of a, e ris Of terval, in | rialinterval, interval, in

See auntie: | 2. : oF eos A parts of a in parts of a parts of a

TAMA. POU = eae. minute. | 2 minute.

36 | 027 0083033 | -006428 ‘0042735 | -0040298 08 | -o0239801

49 | 020408 | -00714286 | :005813 003663 | 00847986 | -00233342

oe | 00227425

81 | -0123457 | -005 00491356 | -0028474 | -0027081 | 00220546
100 | ‘Ol

0046234 | -0025641 | :0024359 | 00218745
004299 002331 | -00221445 | -0020847
0040486 | 0021565 | 0020301 | -0020185
0038485 | 0019704 | 0018756 | -0019729

121 | -0082645 | -0045
144 | -00694 -00416

64 | -015625 | -00625 005319 003205

|
169 | 005917 | 003846 |

In conclusion, the following are’the results that have been arrived at by
the use of the above cardio- sphygmograph : —

1. The first cardio-arterial interval varies inversely as the square root of
the pulse-rate.

2. The conjugate cardio-arterial interval varies inversely as the square
root of the pulse-rate.

3. The second cardio-arterial interval varies very little with different
pulse-rates, but is slightly longer in slower pulses.

4. The depth of the notch in the first arterial interval of the sphygmo-
graph trace occurs at the moment of closure of the aortic valve.

5. There is no definite indication in the sphygmograph trace of the
moment at which the arterial systole commences. ,

II. “On the Thermo-electric Action of Metals and Liquids.”
By Grorcr Gors, F.R.S. Received January 13, 1871.

It is well known that the degree of rapidity with which a metal immersed
in an acid, alkaline, or saline liquid is corroded varies considerably with
the temperature, and that the speed of corrosion usually increases with the
heat; also a few experiments have been published (Gmelin’s ‘ Handbook
of Chemistry,’ vol. i. p. 375) showing that changes of electrical state
occur in metals under such circumstances; but a further examination of
the relations of the temperature and chemical change to the electrical state
has not, that I am aware, yet been made. .

In an investigation on the development of electric currents by unequally
heated metals in liquids (Phil. Mag. 1857, vol. xii. p. 1), I found that hot

1871.] Action of Metals and Liquids. — 825

platinum was electro-negative to cold platinum in liquids of acid reaction,
and positive to it in alkaline ones, provided in all cases chemical action was
completely or sufficiently excluded. In the present experiments I have
endeavoured to ascertain what electrical changes are produced in cases
where chemical action more freely occurs, and I have therefore employed
not platinum plates, but plates composed of a metal (copper) which is more
easily corroded.

To effect the object I had in view, I used the apparatus shown in sec-
tion in fig. 1, and in perspective, with its wooden support, in fig. 2.

A and B, fig. 1, are two open thin glass dishes, 63 inches diameter,
and 14 inch deep, with open necks. The dishes are joined together, water-
tight, by a bent glass tube, C, about 1 inch in diameter; and the whole
arrangement is securely fixed upon a wooden frame or stand, so that it
may be at once placed in an exactly horizontal position, or inverted to pour
out its contents. D and E are two dishes of sheet copper of moderate
thickness, made from contiguous portions of a sheet of metal to ensure
electrical homogeneity in the experiments. Wires of similar metals are
attached to the dishes for the purpose of connexion with a galvanometer.
A galvanometer, containing about 180 turns of moderately fine copper
wire, is sufficiently sensitive for the experiments. The outside of the metal
dishes must be made perfectly clean and bright immediately before each
experiment.

In using the apparatus it is first set exactly horizontal, and a known and
measured volume of the clear liquid to be examined, at the temperature of
the atmosphere and sufficient to fill it to the line F F, is poured in; the
metal dishes are then steadily placed in the glass vessels and connected with.
the galvanometer, taking care that no air-bubbles remain beneath them.

326 Mr. G. Gore on the Thermo-electric [ Feb. 23,

As soon as the galvanometer-needles have settled at zero, one of the dishes
is quickly filled with boiling water, and the directions and amounts of the
temporary and permanent deflections noted.

The following are Tables of results obtained with various liquids, the
solutions being diluted in each case to a specified measure by addition of
distilled water. Those of the experiments in which 20 ounces of liquid
was used, were nearly all of them made with an apparatus in which the
connecting-tube C was of somewhat less diameter; and the deflections
obtained by that apparatus were less in extent than those obtained with
the “‘ new apparatus,” because in the latter the conduction-resistance was
somewhat less. The values of the deflections given in the Tables are in
all cases those of the temporary ones ; and the liquid used for diluting the
solutions was in all cases water.

Pure Nitric Acid.

Ounces of strong acid Value of
No. diluted to 20 ozs. with water. Deflection. peo
elie ay Sek (0045) The hot plate was nega-
2. 3 ‘0012 | tive and much acted upon,
3. z ‘0039 | especially with the stronger
4, 5 ‘0497 | mixtures. With the stronger
5. 1 ‘1177 ( mixtures a little gas was
6. 2 ‘0356 | evolved at 60° Fahr., and a
if 3 ‘0578 | large amount directly the
8 4 ‘4954 ) heat was applied.
Pure Hydrochloric Acid.
Ounces of strong acid Value of
No. diluted to 20 ozs. Deflection.
| ee a ; 0064) The hot plate was posi-
2. * 0330 rae The amount of stain
3. z -1112 | upon the hot plate was very
4. 7 2854 (small, and was in the form
5. 1 ‘5731 | of a dark line at the edge of
6. 2 2°0446 } the liquid.
Chlorie Acid.
Ounces of strong acid Value of
No. diluted to 20 ozs. Deflection.
Dy pais wie high eter 0002 The hot plate was nega-
2. 4 A ere 2016 | tive, and was but little acted
3. 4 ‘0040 | upon. With the strongest
4, 3 ‘0287 ( mixture, the liquid in con-
5. ul "1234 | et with the hot plate soon
6. 2 ‘2005 ) became green.
Hydrobromic Acid.
Value of
pe ne Deflection.

No. diluted to 10 ozs. <a
IDs. pce she ee a Hot plate negative. Both

lates much stained, the cold
one the most so.

Oink Se amap ey 0647

~ ¥871.] Action of Metals and Liquids. 327

Crystallized Boracic Acid.

The hot plate was positive. A series of six solutions was employed,
containing from 50 grains to nearly 400 grains in 20 ounces by measure
of water, the strongest being a saturated solution. The currents obtained
were extremely feeble, and the plates were not tarnished.

Aqueous Hydrofluosilicice Acid.

Value of deflection :1488. The hot plate was negative, and became a
little tarnished.

Pure Sulphuric Acid.

Ounces of strong acid Value of
No. diluted to 20 ozs. Deflection.
‘lk _ 0077 )
2. 4 ‘0161
1 °
- ee ; The hot plate was nega-
5 i 1044 rtive, and the plates were but
6. 2 10397 little tarnished.
Gs 4 0037
8. 8 0319
Pure Phosphoric Acid, solid.
Grains of the glacial acid Value of
No. diluted to 20 ozs. Deflection.
1 100 nee 00005 |
Pe ecasy ti 200 ery ‘00005 [ The hot plate was posi-
Fe argos) 2 1) AOO Ray ‘00040 tive, and the plates were not
4 800 oe ‘00060 | visibly tarnished.
5 1600 eee ‘00370
Chloride of Copper (Basic; solution filtered).
Grains of the salt Value of
No. diluted to 12 ozs. Deflection.
dee, LOO dean 0025 Hot copper positive.
eo ai gn OW ere 0198 :
3. 1000 0025 ine Reg atiNe,

Much action on both plates, especially the hot one, and basic chloride
of copper formed.

Chlorate of Copper.

In a moderately strong solution of this salt, which had been digested
with an excess of carbonate of copper and filtered, the hot plate was nega-
tive ; value of deflection °2997. Both plates were acted upon, but the hot
one the most. The liquid had a feebly acid reaction.

Sulphate of Copper.

Grains diluted Value of
No. to 20 ozs. Deflection.
249°5 arate ‘0016 Hot copper negative.

Sag

499-0 st 0081 Liquid acid.

328 Mr. G. Gore on the Thermo-electric [ Feb. 23,

Chloride of Cobalt.

Ounces diluted Value of
No. to 12 ozs. Deflection.
Hot copper positive. L1-
1. 3 oz. saturated solution "1247 \quid acid. No stains, ex-
2. 3 OZS. 5 a _ 1/2726 )cept slightly at edge of hot
liquid.
Protosulphate of Iron.
Grains diluted Value of

No. to 12 ozs. Deflection.

ip 200 angie ‘(0198 Hot copper negative.
2. 800 kM: ‘0794 No stains on either plate.
Chloride of Manganese.
. ; Value of
Grains diluted Deteciion. ie :
No. to 12 ozs. ae
1 100 0436 ) . Hot copper positive. No
. «see eens ) stains.
9 1000 10995 3 Liquid neutral, or. very
a3 | faintly acid.
Chromic Acid.
Value of
Ounces of strong solution Deflection.

No. diluted to 12 ozs. Hot copper positive. Both
Me Sone |! ar : ‘0987 }\plates much acted upon, ap-
2 2 188034 ) parently the cold one the

most.
Chloride of Chromium.
Value of
Ounces of strong solution Deflection. .

No. diluted to 10 ozs. Hot copper positive. The
1 aoe 4 Je 0293 )plates appeared unaffected.
2. i! °1819 )The solution was weakly

acid to test-paper.
Nitrate of Lead.
Value of
No. Grains. Deflection.
1. .... 100 diluted to 12 ozs. ogg, Het plate’ nepere ea
) stains. — :
2. .... Saturated solution (undiluted) :0259 ficid exten
Sulphate of Zinc.
Grains diluted Value of

No. to 20 ozs. Deflection.

a 287 i ‘0080 Hot copper negative. | Liquid
2. 574 eae ‘0048 99 positive. { neutral.

1871.] Action of Metals and Liquids. 329

Sulphate of Magnesium.

Value of
No. Grains. Deflection.
ie 50 diluted to 20 ozs. 0001 )
2. RODE 455 iy 0002
3. ZOO! -!* 5 . “0006
4, 246s, e 0100
5. SOO rs sy Fs 0036 | Hot copper positive, and
6. a - 0208 ( liquid neutral.
(e S00,- ,, i 0130
8. 1000. = ,, 9 0228
9. 2000 0607
10. Saturated solution (undiluted) ‘0463 }

Chloride of Calcium.

1400 grains diluted to 20 ounces. Value of deflection -2935. Hot
copper positive. Liquid neutral. Hardly any stain, most on hot plate.

Nitrate of Strontium.

Grains diluted Value of
No. to 12 ozs. Deflection.
ie 100 one ‘0368 Hot pee positive. No
2. 1000 Leas ‘2321( stain. Liquid neutral.
Chloride of Strontium.
Grains diluted Value of
No. to 20 ozs. Deflection.
I. 400 he: ‘2088 Hot copper positive. Li-
2. 800 sae °3277( quid neutral. Hardly any
3. 1600 See ‘6671( chemical action, most on
4. 3200 shat 6654) hot plate.
Nitrate of Barium.
Value of
No. Grains. Deflection.
I. .... 100 diluted to 20 ozs. ‘(0916 Hot copper positive. No
2. .... Saturated solution (undiluted) -1170{ stain. Liquid neutral.
Chloride of Barium.
Value of
No. Grains. Deflection.
I 50 diluted to 20 ozs. 0016 }
2. HOO 5; @ ‘0049
2 ‘ ~
hi eu 4 ee Hot copper positive. Li-
4. aee 9 ? = uid neutral. A little cop-
Z ee 7 ole oe was dissolved by the ae
6. 488 ,, 95 "0259 ae
fe S00") 5; 5 0234 |“
8. 1600 “0802
9. Saturated solution (undiluted). -3142 }

VOL. XIX. 2

330 Mr. G. Gore on the Thermo-electric (Feb. 23,
Nitrate of Sodium.

Grains diluted Value of
No. to 20 ozs. Deflection.
i. 85 a 0025 Hot copper negative. A ae
2. 255 oe 0328 pa ee
ey =10 4 “1015 a positive. ( neutral.
Chloride of Sodium.
Value of
No. Grains. Deflection.
A. 12'5 diluted to 20 ozs. ‘0001 } Pe
2. 25 is Sy ‘0012
3. 50 “: 5: ‘0081
4, 7 ~ a ‘0153
5. 100 3 . 0293
6. 150 5 Ee ‘0512
jig 200 5 bs 0819 Hot copper positive. Tar-
8. 250 x x ‘1016 | nish at edge of hot liquid,
9. 300 + > 1160 ( especially with the strongest
10. 400 $5 . "1906 | solutions.
ie 500 ss 2 "2241
12. 600 3 S ‘2708
13. 800 = 3 3473 |
14. 1000 os x “4884
15. 2000 5 4237
16. Saute solution (undiluted) -3479 }
fodide of Sodium.
Grains diluted Value of
No. to 12 ozs. Defiection.
Me ete AOD ibe ‘0100 Hot copper negative. 4 Liquid alkaline.
2 ke LOO Cy ‘0819 x positive. {| No stains.
Carbonate of Sodium.
Grains diluted Value of
No. to 20 ozs. Deflection.
1B 286 aad 0468 Hot copper positive.
2. 572 Aiite 1673 Liquid alkaline.

Biborate of Sodium.

Six ounces of a saturated solution diluted to 12 ounces. Hot copper
was positive ; value of deflection :0452.

Sulphate of Sodium.

Grains diluted Value of
No to 20 ozs. Deflection.
jag AB: RO ap 5 ‘0001 Hot copper negative.
7 eeu lk. | pager § eI Liquid
3 200 ACen ‘0016 *) positive. ( neutral.
4 1000 ae: ‘0170 |

1871.]

wee

NID OUP oo OES

OHONIAH MP toes

Action of Metals and Liquids. 331

Phosphate of Sodium.

Grains diluted Value of
to 20 ozs. Deflection.
— 858 sae: 0382 Hot copper positive.
716 haan 0648 Liquid alkaline.

Nitrate of Potassium.

Value of
Grains. Deflection.
50 diluted to 20 ozs. ‘0025 )
LOG, is ‘0107
OOS ae bs 0259 Hot plate positive. No
A400; ‘ ‘0647 ~stains at all on the plates.
S00)... ‘3 1328 | Solution quite neutral.
1600 ‘2997

Saturated solution (undiluted) 2852 }

Chloride of Potassium.

Value of

Grains. Deflection.
25 diluted to 20 ozs. 0010 }
50, ” ‘0064 |
100°-",,; > 0145 Hot plate positive, and
200: .,, s 0442 | became tarnished at the
a00'” ,, * ‘0667 | edge of the liquid, especi-
400 ,, 45 0882 ey with the stronger solu-
000.’ .,, ss "1239 (tions. Traces of copper
GOO. ¥ 1896 | were found to have dis-
800. , 95 1874 | solved. The solutions were

£000. .,, + ‘2443 | neutral to test-paper.

2000 ‘6371

Saturated solution (undiluted) -8489 J

Chlorate of Potassium.

: 3 Value of
eae _ Deflection. ca
122-5 viwhs 0054 |, Elou plate pee and
245-0 eae 0453 eons tarnished. Solution
neutral.
Bromide of Potassium.
Grains diluted Value of
to 20 ozs. Deflection.
100 ey 0497 Hot plate negative. ) No stains.
500 nee -1080 “i Liquid
1000 gees 3150 ” BOSHIVE. neutral.
Iodide of Potassium.
Grains diluted Value of
to 12 ozs. Deflection.
100 Oe "0259 ot No stain.
550) ipa 0459 Hot plate negative. { Liquid
1003 lade ‘0159 4 positive. | neutral.

ZC?

332 Mr. G. Gore on the Thermo-electric [Feb. 23,

lIodate of Potassium.

Value of
Deflection.
No. Grains.

a‘ 100 diluted to 12 ozs. 0064 | Hob plete ie
9 Saturated solution (undiluted) -0100 ) Plates muclustemme Diya
j Eee ore ee mation of iodide of copper.
Acid Carbonate of Potassium.

Value of
No. Grains. Deflection.
ils 50 diluted to 20 ozs. 0049 >
2. 100 5. 5 0170
3. 200 2a. - "0497 Hot plate positive. The
A, 400 _ ,, 0818 | liquid on evaporation was
5. 6.0 Ue ee aan "1329 -green with dissolved ee
6. S00"... * 1978 | Liquid alkaline. Hot pla
die 1900 — 2, ss ‘2441 | alone much tarnished.
8. 2000 4210
9, Saturated solution (undiluted) -5451
Carbonate of Potassium.
Value of
No, Grains. Deflection.
i 50 diluted to 20 ozs. ‘0122 )
2. LOU aeay ‘0382
3. 200s. by 1770
4, 400 __,, ie 3719
5. B00" - ‘7521 ~Hot plate positive.
6. LEOOT b 22400
7. 2400 ——*», 3°7708
8. 3200 4367
9. Saturated solution (undiluted) -4031 }

Acid Sulphate of Potassium.

Saturated solution (undiluted). Value of deflection 1047. Hot plate
negative. ;
Bichromate of Potassium.

Grains diluted Value of
No. to 20 ozs. Deflection.
ss args aa ’ ‘leiat Hot metal positive.

Chrome Alum.

Grains diluted Value of
No. to 20 ozs. Deflection.
1 249°8 ae 0019 Hot metal negative. Li-
2 4996 ale 0064 | quid of acid reaction.

Aqueous Ammonia.

Copper in a mixture of 4 ounces of water and 400 grains of aqueous
ammonia at 180° Fahr. was electro-positive to copper in the same mixture
at 66° Fahr.

iso a ie Action of Metals and Liquids. 333

Nitrate of Ammonium.

Grains diluted Value of
No. to 20 ozs. Deflection.
: a ae Done Hot plate negative. Acid
3. 480 bo 0590 { Teaction.
Chloride of Ammonium.
Value of
No. Grains. Deflection.
Le 25 diluted to 20 ozs. 0020 }
e Ae a 2 bege Hot copper positive. So-
rm 200 7 z 0647 | lutions extremely faintly
5 Oe 2 1533 | acid. Both plates tarnished
6. 800 ” 555] ¢ by the stronger solution;
7 1000 a 7 674 4 but the hot one the most
: ” ” 25 so, and a little copper was
= — ” ie dissolved
=) 211,11 4s ‘7479 g ;
10. Saturated solution (undiluted) °1210

Aqueous Hydrocyanic Acid.
Scheele’s strength. The hot plate was feebly positive. Value of de-

flection :0006.
Cyanide of Potassium.

Value of
Grains diluted Deflection.

No. to 12 ozs. Hot copper positive. Much
is 100 sete ‘2854 Jeas evolved from the hot
2. 1000 stan 18164 ) plate only in the strongest

solution.
Ferrocyanide of Potassium.
Value of
Grains diluted Deflection.

No. to 20 ozs. Hot plate positive. Li-
Bers Ses "DOO Hoi fe 0136 } quid feebly alkaline. Both
rahe 22s¢i OOD Saga ‘0045 ) plates became pink like new

copper.
Oxalie Acid.
Value of

No. Grains. Deflection.

1, 25 diluted to 20 ozs. 54,0008 }

9 .

3 ce 2 2? ee | The hot plate was nega-

: 4 a tive, and the plates were

4. 200. ,, % OOLGI GN ee aca Gi all

5. 400 A as ‘0064 no arnishe at all.

6. Saturated solution (undiluted) -0070 |

Glacial Acetic Acid.
The hot plate was negative. Seven solutions, containing from 74 ounce
to 4 ounces by measure of the acid in 20 ounces by measure, gave only
extremely feeble currents. The plates remained bright.

334 Mr. G. Gore on the Thermo-electric [Feb. 23,

Acetate of Sodium.

Grains diluted Value of
No. to 20 ozs. Deflection.
1. 50 Lae ‘0016
a, 100 Mead 0070
4 ne as ae Hot plate positive. So-
5. 300 cay 139 lution alkaline to _ test-
6. 1600 ae 2902 | P&per:
6 2000 pee oh 2850
8. 2727 ase 2997 J
Acetate of Zine.
Grains diluted Value of
No. to 20 ozs. Deflection.
a; 50 th ‘0001
2. 100 Lae ‘0006
3h 200 b hee fe 70016
gh, 400 ae g 0025
5. 500 es 0020 -Hot plate positive.
6. 800 ee he 240020
te 1000 Batts ‘0012
8. 1600 Big 0004
9, 2000 hn ‘0001 J

Crystallized Tartaric Acid.

The hot plate was negative. Hight different solutions, varying in
strength from 50 to 3200 grains in 20 ounces by measure of the solution,
were tried ; but very feeble currents were obtained, and the plates were
not tarnished.

Crystallized Citrie Acid.

The hot plate was negative. With a series of seven solutions, varying
in strength from 50 to 3200 grains in 20 ounces of liquid, more feeble
results, even, than those with tartaric acid were obtained, and the plates
were not tarnished. Probably, with this substance and with others where
the resulting currents were very feeble, more distinct effects would be ob-
tained by employing a galvanometer of much greater electrical resistance.

Several experiments similar to those already described were made with
the apparatus shown in fig. 3. The apparatus consists of a glass beaker
containing the liquid, and two platinum electrodes—A being a disk of pla-
tinum rivetted to a platinum wire enclosed by a glass tube, B, and Ca
platinum crucible (for receiving the boiling water) with a platinum wire
rivetted to it.

Experiment 1.—With a solution of 100 grains of citric acid in 2 ounces
of distilled water, the hot platinum cup was negative, the value of the tem-
porary deflection being ‘0007.

Experiment 2,—With 100 grains of tartaric acid in 2 ounces of water,
the hot cup was negative, value of deflection ‘0001.

1871. ] Action of Metals and Liquids. 335

Experiment 3.—With 100 grains of racemic acid in 2 ounces of water
the hot cup was negative, value of deflection :000035.

The negative condition excited in the hot platinum cup in the solutions
of citric and tartaric acid agrees with the results obtained with copper
in those liquids.

st 2) Fig. 4.

_ I have already shown (Phil. Mag. 1857, vol. xii. p. 1) that the currents
obtained with platinum electrodes are not due to the influence of atmo-
spheric air upon the liquid and metal at their line of mutual contact ; for, in
the experiments there recorded, atmospheric air was entirely excluded, and
the liquids were previously well boiled.

To test the influence of size of the cold electrode, I took a platinum dish,
A (see fig. 4), 5 inches wide and 14 inch deep, in a glass vessel of the
annexed form, B, closed at its lower end by a cork, and containing in its
neck two platinum electrodes, one consisting of a wire, C, and the other of
a sheet 2 inches long and 2 inches wide in the form of a cylinder, D.

With a cold mixture composed of 33 ounces of water and } of an ounce
by measure of strong sulphuric acid, and the sheet of platinum as the
lower electrode, on pouring boiling water into the dish a deflection of the
value of ‘0064 was obtained, the cold electrode being positive; but with
the wire as the lower electrode no perceptible deflection occurred. These
results were obtained repeatedly. The electric currents are therefore
largely dependent upon the size of the cold electrode.

General Results.

The chief fact brought out conspicuously by these experiments with
copper dishes is, that in many cases an increase of chemical action pro-
duced by heat, instead of making the hot metal electro-positive, makes it
considerably negative.

The results show that hot copper was positive to cold copper in the fol-
lowing liquids :—hydrochloric, hydrocyanic, boracic, and tribasic or ortho-
phosphoric acids; chloride of copper (weak solution); chloride of cobalt ;
chloride of manganese ; chromic acid; chloride of chromium ; sulphate of
zine (weak solution); sulphate of magnesia; chloride of calcium; nitrate
and chloride of strontium ; chloride of barium ; nitrate of sodium (strong
solution) ; chloride, iodide, carbonate, and biborate of sodium ; sulphate

336 Mr. G. Gore on the Thermo-electric [Feb. 23,

of sodium (strong solution) ; tribasic phosphate of sodium; nitrate, chlo-
ride, and chlorate of potassium; bromide of potassium (strong solution) ;
iodide of potassium (strong solution); carbonate, acid carbonate, and bi-
chromate of potassium ; aqueous ammonia; chloride of ammonium; cya-
nide and ferrocyanide of potassium ; acetate of zinc; and acetate of sodium.
And negative in the following ones :—nitric, chloric, hydrobromic, hydro-
fluosilicic, and sulphuric acids ; ferrous sulphate ; chloride of copper (strong
solution) ; sulphate of copper; sulphate of zinc (strong solution) ; nitrate
and iodide of sodium (weak solutions); bromide and iodide of potassium
(weak solutions) ; 1odate of potassium ; chrome alum; nitrate of ammo-
nium; oxalic, acetic, tartaric, and citric acids. The number of liquids in
which hot copper was positive was ay -six, and of those in which it was
negative was twenty.

In several instances where the hot metal was negative with a weak solu-
tion, it became positive with a strong one—for instance, with sulphate of
zine, nitrate, iodide, and sulphate of sodium, bromide and iodide of potas-
sium ; but with chloride of copper the reverse occurred. These results
may be connected with the fact that in weak neutral solutions the chemical
action is generally the most feeble, and therefore interferes the least with
the direct influence of the heat in producing electric currents.

The influence of free hydrochloric, hydrocyanic, boracic, orthophosphoric,
and chromic acids was to make the hot copper positive; whilst that of
nitric, chloric, hydrobromic, hydrofluosilicic, sulphuric, and some of the
organic acids was to make it negative.

In consequence, probably, of the small amount of interference by che-
mical action in solutions of oxalic, acetic, tartaric, and citric acids, the
direct influence of the heat made the copper negative—similar to its influ-
ence on platinum in all acid liquids which do not attack that metal.

The nature of the acid in a salt appears to exert much more influence
than that of the base on the direction of the current; for instance, in
nearly all chlorides, including those of a considerable variety of bases, hot
copper was positive, probably because copper is more readily attacked by
acids than by bases.

In all decidedly alkaline liquids the hot copper was positive; this is
similar to the behaviour of platinum in such solutions, and is probably due
to the same cause, viz. the direct influence of the heat, as well as to che-
mical action.

The results also show that the quantity of the current obtained with any
given liquid generally increases with the number of molecules of the sub-
stance contained in the solution; in some cases, however, as with sulphuric
acid, carbonate of potassium, chloride of ammonium, and acetate of zinc,
there was a limit to this increase; and beyond that limit the quantity of
the current decreased up to the point of saturation of the liquid.

In the great majority of cases the value of the deflection increased much
more rapidly than the strength of the solution, particularly with solutions

1871.] Action of Metals and Liquids. 337

of sulphate of magnesia, and also of hydrochloric acid and of chloride of
sodium, probably because two causes operated, viz. increased strength of
solution and diminished conduction-resistance ; in a very few cases, how-
ever, the opposite result took place, as with solutions of chloride and
nitrate of strontium.

Inversions of the direction of the deflection by difference of strength of
the liquid occurred with solutions of chloride of copper, sulphate of zinc,
nitrate, iodide, and sulphate of sodium, bromide and iodide of potassium.

Irregularities of the amount of deflection were very apt to take place
with liquids which gave strong deflections, or which acted much upon the
copper plates (for instance, nitric acid), especially if bubbles of air remained
under the plates, or the dishes were wetted on their side above the liquid
by the solution.

In certain acid liquids, viz. nitric, chloric, hydrobromic, hydrofluosilicic,
and sulphuric acids, the hot copper was strongly negative (notwithstanding
the chemical action upon it was distinct, and ‘in some cases even strong) ;
this is similar to the electrical behaviour of platinum in such liquids, and
may be attributed either to the more direct influence of the heat alone
(such as occurs with platinum plates), or to a different influence of the
chemical action produced by the heat. Both these causes probably ope-
rate in such cases.

It is probable that in all cases where the hot copper was positive in
liquids of strongly acid reaction, the positive condition was due to chemical
action alone.

With some liquids, especially with solutions of hydrocyanic, boracic,
acetic, tartaric, and citric acids, the deflections were very feeble, and the
chemical action on the plates not perceptible; whilst with others, such as
nitric and chloric acids, solutions of the chlorides of strontium, sodium,
potassium, and ammonium, and of carbonate, acid carbonate, and cyanide
of potassium, the deflections were considerable, and the chemical action
distinct, and in some cases strong. In none of the liquids (except hydro-
bromic and chromic acids) did the hot plate appear to be Jess stained or
corroded than the cold one; probably in all cases it was the most corroded,
although in some cases the corrosion was not perceptible.

The amount of deflection was not always proportionate to the amount of
chemical action; for instance, with solutions of chloride of copper and
iodate of potassium there was considerable corrosion, but only feeble cur-
rents, probably because the plates became covered with a badly conducting
film, whilst with hydrochloric acid, chloride of cobalt, chloride of manga-
nese, and nitrate of potassium the reverse occurred.

I consider the currents in all these experiments of difference of tempera-
ture to be due either, lst, to the direct influence of heat, the effect of which
is to make the hot copper negative in acid liquids and positive in alkaline
ones (see Phil. Mag. 1857, vol. xiii. p. 1); 2nd, to chemical action, which
sometimes overpowers the direct influence of heat and reverses the effect ;

338 Mr. G. Gore on the Thermo-electric [Feb. 23,

or, 3rd, to both these influences combined. The more ultimate cause,
however, of the phenomena in these cases must be sought for in the mo-
lecular movements produced by heat in the metals and liquids.

The currents obtained with copper plates were no doubt influenced in
their amounts (if not also in their direction) by the oxidizing action of the
air upon the liquid and metal at their line of mutual contact ; for we know
that metals in contact with liquids oxidize much more quickly if oxygen
has access to their wet surfaces. And the currents were also influenced by
the action of unequal temperature upon this air-contact line; for we know
that wet metals oxidize still more rapidly if heat is applied.

Influence of line of contact of liquid and metal with the air.

That the length of line of contact of the liquid and copper with the
air is capable of producing electric currents was shown by the following
experiments :—

Two strips of sheet copper of the annexed form, fig. 5, ? inch wide, and

Fig. 5.

12 inches long in the longest limb, were cut from contiguous parts of a
sheet of copper, and, after being perfectly cleaned, were coiled into the
shape represented by the annexed sketch, fig.6. They were then placed
in a flat-bottomed porcelain dish and connected with the galvanometer,
one of the spirals being supported at about 7 inch higher than the other
by means of a triangle of glass rod. The liquid to be examined was then
poured into the dish until it just (and completely) covered the lower spi-
ral, and the direction and amount of the permanent deflection noted. The
positions of the spirals were then reversed and the electrical effects again
noted.

Experiment 1.—With a liquid composed of 100 grains of cyanide of
potassium dissolved in 12 ounces of water, whichever of the spirals was
only partly submerged and therefore had the longest air-line, was strongly
electro-negative to the wholly submerged one.

Experiment 2.—With a mixture of one measure of strong nitric acid and
ten measures of water, deflections of somewhat less amount, but in pre-
cisely similar directions to those of experiment |, took place.

Experiment 3.—With dilute hydrobromic acid the directions of the
deflections were also similar, but still less in amount.

Experiment 4.—With a half-saturated solution of borax very feeble de-

1871.] Action of Metals and Liquids. 339

flections, agreeing in direction with those of the other experiments, were
obtained.

These results show the necessity (which I have already mentioned) of
excluding air-bubbles from beneath the copper dishes, and of not wetting
the sides of the dishes by the liquid above the level of their immersion.

To ascertain the influence of difference of temperature of the air-contact
line I soldered two strips of perfectly similar sheet copper, each 12 inches
long and 4 inch wide, in the form of circular hoops 4 inches in diameter upon
the bottoms of two tin cups, and ground the edges of the strips perfectly
level, and soldered copper wires to them for connecting with the galvano-
meter. Two glass triangles were now put into the apparatus, fig. 1, one
in each dish, to support the cups, and a mixture of one measure of nitric
acid and 12 measures of distilled water poured in until it just touched the
edges all round of the perfectly horizontal copper rims resting on the tri-
angles. After the needles of the galvanometer had settled at zero, about
ten ounces of boiling water was poured into one of the cups; a temporary
deflection of the value -0560, and a permanent one of value ‘0759, were
produced, the hot metal being negative. The direction of the current in
this experiment agrees with that obtained with the same mixture and the
copper dishes ; and the result indicates that a large proportion of the quan-
tity of the current obtained with copper dishes in dilute nitric acid was due
to the action of the air-contact line.

The influence of the air-line is largely chemical. ‘A piece of copper
wire wholly submerged in the acid [dilute sulphuric] so as to entirely
exclude any portion of it coming into contact with the air, has remained
for many months without imparting the slightest tinge to the liquid.”
*‘ But on suffering the liquid to evaporate so as to bring the upper end of
the metal near to its surface, the instant the slightest portion becomes ex-
posed chemical action immediately begins.”

‘Two equal portions of wire were similarly placed in acid, only that one
was fully exposed to the atmosphere in an open tube, while the other was
placed in a phial, the acid occupying half its height, and was kept closely
corked for several weeks—after which the fully exposed metal had lost in
weight two-fifths more than the one which had been excluded from contact
with fresh portions of air, showing that contact with the atmosphere in
bulk is necessary to the fullest action’’*.

Experiments with Inquids of unequal strength.

To throw some light upon the questions,—Ist, Is the quantity of the
current simply a result of the difference of number of molecules of liquid
which touch the hot plate compared with those which touch the cold
plate? and, 2nd, What amount of difference of strength of a liquid is equal
to the amount of difference of temperature employed ?—I brought the two

* “Qn the Theory of the Voltaic Pile,” Bridgman, Phil. Mag. Nov. 1869.

340 Mr. G. Gore on the Thermo-electric [Feb. 23,

copper dishes into contact with liquids of unequal strength instead of un-
equal temperature.

The tube C (fig. 1) was filled with the stronger mixture and closed at its
end in the dish A by an india-rubber bung, and the dish B filled to the line F
with the same mixture; the dish A was then filled with the weaker mix-
ture up to the same level and the bung slowly withdrawn. The two cop-
per dishes, previously connected with the galvanometer, were next simul-
taneously immersed in the mixtures and the effect noted. The following
are the results obtained by this method :—

Nitric Acid.

Experiment 1.—In A, 1 volume of acid diluted to 80 volumes. In B,
1 volume diluted to 40. Copper in A was positive temporarily, valne
-0270; and permanently, value :0198.

Experiment 2.—In A, 1 volume of acid diluted to 40 volumes. — In B,
1 volume of acid diluted to 20 volumes. The copper plate in A was first
positive temporarily, value of deflection 0064; and then that in B per-
manently, value -2850.

Experiment 3.—In A, 1 volume of acid diluted to 40 volumes. In B,
1 volume diluted to 10 volumes. Copper plate in B was positive tempo-
rarily, value ‘4863 ; and permanently, value -0819.

Hydrochloric Acid.

Experiment 1.—In A, 1 volume of acid diluted to 40 volumes. In B,
1 volume diluted to 20 volumes. The copper in B was positive temporarily,
value ‘9608 ; and permanently, value °1087.

Experiment 2.—In A, 1 volume of acid diluted to 40 volumes. In B,
1 volume diluted to 26°66 volumes. The copper in B was positive tempo-
rarily, value °3479 ; and permanently, value -0702.

Chlorie Acid.

In A, 1 volume of acid diluted to 80 volumes. In B, 1 volume diluted
to 40 volumes. The copper in B was positive temporarily, value -0036 ;
and permanently, value -0009.

Sulphuric Acid.

In A, 1 volume of acid diluted to 80 volumes. In B, 1 volume diluted
to 40 volumes. The copper in B was positive temporarily, value 0467 ;
and permanently, value °0330.

On examining these results, it will be perceived, Ist, that only in one
half the number of the experiments did increased strength of liquid pro-
duce electrical currents similar in direction to those produced by increased
temperature; and therefore the heat does not act simply by causing a
greater number of molecules of each individual substance to touch the hot
plate; and, 2nd, that only in one of the experiments was the copper in the
weaker liquid both temporarily and permanently positive to that in the

1871.] Action of Metals and Liquids. 341

stronger ; whilst in five of the experiments the copper in the stronger
liquid was temporarily and permanently positive to that in the weaker.
Increase of strength of the liquid therefore made the copper posiéive in five
cases out of six.

In the fourth experiment with hydrochloric acid with difference of tem-
perature, and in the second one with difference of strength, the mixture in
each case consisting of 1 volume of acid diluted to 40 volumes with water,
an increase of temperature from 16° to about 98°C. produced a deflection
of the value *2854, whilst an increase of strength to 1 volume in 26°66
gave a deflection in the same direction of the value 3479. An increase
of temperature of about 82°C. was not quite equal in electrical effect to
an increase of 50 per cent. in the number of molecules of the acid which
touched the plates.

In the third experiment with chloric acid with difference of temperature,
and in the single one made with difference of strength, the mixture in each
instance consisting of 1 volume of the acid diluted to 80 volumes with water,
an increase of temperature of about 82° C. produced an electrical effect of
0040; whilst an increase of 100 per cent. in the number of molecules of
the acid which touched the plates produced an opposite electrical effect of
"0036. |

In the third experiment with sulphuric acid with difference of tempera-
ture, and in the single one made with difference of strength, each being with
a mixture of 1 measure of acid in 80 of water, an increase of temperature
of about 82°C. caused an electrical effect of 0418, and an increase of 100
per cent. in the number of molecules of acid which touched the plates
caused an opposite electrical effect of -0467.

A liquid thermo-electric battery.

Acting upon the general results thus obtained in this subject, [ con-
structed a liquid thermo-electric battery consisting of twelve glass tubes,

Fig. 8.

taining a platinum wire hermetically sealed in that end), and bent to the

342 Mine) Gore\on eke Wheanp leer [Feb. 23,

form shown in fig. 7, each tube being filled with a conducting liquid, and
its outer end closed by a cork, in which was fixed a second platinum wire
to dip into the liquid.

Fig. 8 represents the apparatus; A A is a wooden stand supporting a tin
box, B. The box is water-tight, and has in its lower surface a long semi-
circular cavity (shown by dotted lines) to receive the upper ends of the
twelve tubes. To the back of the box is fixed a short cylinder of tin, C,
closed at its outer end. When the apparatus is in action, the box is filled
with hot water, and the water kept boiling by means of a lamp placed be-
neath the tube C. The twelve tubes were kept in position by divisions of
wood fixed to the back of the stand, as shown in the figure.

The tubes 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, and 11 were filled with a previously boiled and
cooled mixture of 7 of an ounce of sulphuric acid, and 19 ounces of di-
stilled water ; and the others, viz. 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, and 12, with a similarly
prepared solution of 110 grains of hydrate of potassium dissolved in 19
ounces of distilled water.

The platinum wires were connected, in the order shown in the sketch, by
means of small binding-screws not represented in the figure.

On connecting the terminals with a galvanometer containing about 180
turns of moderately coarse copper wire, and applying heat to the upper
electrodes and ends of tubes by means of the boiling water, no deflection of
the needles took place ; but on substituting a Thomson’s reflecting galvano-
meter, which offered a resistance of 3040°7 B.A. units (=77872°327 miles
of copper wire ;), of an inch thick), a deflection of 40 degrees was readily ob-
tained, the hot platinum wire in the dilute acid being negative, and that in
the alkali positive, as shown by the direction of the arrows in the sketch.

From these results it is evident the quantity of the electric current pro-
duced was exceedingly small, and its intensity considerable. By employing
electrodes of larger surface, such as spirals of platinum wire and more con-
centrated liquids, the quantity of the current would be very largely in-
creased. (See Phil. Mag. 1857, vol. xiii. p. 1.)

1871.] Action of Metals and Liquids. 343

one kind of liquid, either acid or alkaline, is employed. The electrodes in
this arrangement must be disposed in the order represented by the figure.

Influence of Friction.

To ascertain if the friction of one of the electrodes against the liquid
had similar effects to those produced by the direct application of heat, I
employed the apparatus shown in fig. 10. The sketch does not require
explanation.

Experiment 1.—By immersing two stout copper wires vertically in an
acidulated solution of cupric sulphate and rotating one of them at a speed
of about 5000 revolutions per minute, the rotating wire became electro-
positive.

Experiment 2.—With a saturated solution of borax, the rotating wire
was positive. :

Experiment 3.—With a solution of cyanide of potassium, the rotating
wire was negative.

Experiment 4.—With stout platinum wires in an acidulated solution of
cupric sulphate, the rotating wire became negative.

Experiment 5.—With platinum wires in a solution composed of 200
grains of carbonate of potassium in 40 ounces of distilled water, the rota-
ting wire was faintly positive, and similarly in a very dilute solution.

Experiment 6.—With two platinum disks one above the other in a
strong solution of carbonate of potassium, revolving the upper disk at a
speed of about 5000 revolutions per minute made it electro-positive.

Experiment 7.—With an acidulated solution of cupric sulphate, the
revolving disk became feebly negative.

On comparing these results with those obtained by unequal temperature,
we find that the directions of the currents in the two classes of cases were
reverse with copper in solutions of acidulated cupric sulphate and cyanide
of potassium, and similar in a solution of borax; and with platinum in
solutions of acidulated cupric sulphate or carbonate of potassium the in-

344: Mr. G. Gore on the Thermo-electric [Feb. 23,

fluence of friction and of increased temperature upon the direction of the
currents were the same. The molecular movements, therefore, produced
by friction are not in all cases similar to those produced by heat.

Influence of Magne-optic rotating-power of the Liquids.

Being desirous of determining whether the thermo-electric properties of
liquids were dependent on the molecular structure by virtue of which liquids
under the influence of magnetism polarize light circularly, I made the fol-
lowing apparatus and experiment : —

A and B (fig. 11) are two straight glass tubes, about } inch in diameter
and 10 inches long, with two similar (but bent) So
tubes, C and D, attached to their free ends by Sanaa
india-rubber tubing. The sloping ends of the ay
straight tubes are ground flat, and are joined
together securely at their edges by melted shel- ff
lac, with a thin and projecting sheet of platinum
between them to separate the liquids. E and
F are two strong electro-helices wound upon
stout tubes of soft iron which enclose the glass tubes. The apparatus
is secured upon a board in an inclined position with the sloping ends.
of the tubes uppermost; and the two helices are held together at their
upper ends by an india-rubber band, G. I filled one of the tubes with a
clear and strong solution of perchloride of iron (of negative magne-optic
rotatory power, see Verdet, Phil. Mag., June 1858), and the other with a
similar solution of chloride of nickel (of positive magne-optie rotatory
power), and connected the liquids in the bent tubes with a galvanometer
16 feet distant by means of the platinum wires H and I. I now excited
the helices in various ways by means of 12 strong Grove’s cells; no cur-
rent was induced in the liquid. I next heated the junction of the tubes
gradually ; the solution of iron became thermo-electro-positive, and a steady
but feeble deflection of the needles took place; and during the continuance
of this current I again excited the helices in various ways as before; again
no electrical effects were produced. The results of this experiment strongly
support the conclusion that the thermo-electric properties of liquids are
not dependent upon the magne-optic polarizing power of the liquids, nor
upon the properties of their mass.

On examining the thermo-electric properties of the solution of ferric
chloride with platinum plates in the apparatus described in the ‘ Philoso-
phical Magazine,’ 1857, vol. xiii. p. 1, the hot platinum was strongly
negative, value of temporary deflection *8475. With the nickel solution,
similarly examined, the hot plate was also negative, value of deflection
‘0409. These results agree with that obtained with the two tubes in the
last experiment, the more positive condition of the iron solution than
that of the nickel one determining the direction of the current in that

experiment.

1871.) _ Presenis. | 345

General Conclusion.—The electric currents produced by the direct in-
fluence of unequal temperature or friction of platinum or copper electrodes,
in conducting liquids which do not act chemically upon those metals, have
their origin in temporary changes of cohesion of the layers of metal and
liquid which are in immediate and mutual contact, and may be considered
a very delicate test of the kind and amount of temporary molecular
movements produced by those causes.

Presents received February 2, 1871.

Transactions.
Devonshire Association for the Advancement of Science, Literature, and
Art. Report and Transactions. Vol. LV. Part 1. 8vo. Plymouth
1870. The Association.
Turin :—R. Accademia delle Nolen. Atti. Appendice al Vol. IV.
Vol. V. disp. 1-7. 8vo. Torino.1869-70. Notizia Storica dei lavori
fatti dalla Classe di Scienze Fisiche e Matematiche negli anni 1864
e 1865. 8vo. Torino 1869. The Academy.

Observations and Reports.
Calcutta:—Report of the Meteorological Reporter to the Government
’ of Bengal. Meteorological Abstract for the year 1869, by H. F.:
Blanford. fol. Calcutta 1870. The Government of India. Another

copy. The Meteorological Office.
London :—Army Medical Department. Report for the year 1868. Vol.
X. 8vo. London 1870. The Department.

San Fernando:—Observatorio de Marina. Anales. Seccion 24, Obser-
vaciones Meteorologicas, ano 1870. fol. San Fernando 1870.

) The Observatory.

Turin :—Regio Observatorio. Bollettino Meteorologico ed Astronomico.

Anno 4. 1869. 4to. Zorino. The Observatory.

Journals.

Bibliothéque Universelle. Archives des Sciences Physiques et Natu-
relles. No. 120, 153-156. 8vo. Genéve 1867-70. 7
| | The Editor.

Entomologist’s (The) Annual for 1871. 12mo. London.

, H. F. Stainton, F.R.S

Symons’s Monthly Meteorological Magazine. No. 54-60. 8yo. Londen
1870-71. The Editor.
Zeitschrift fiir die gesammten Naturwissenschaften, redigirt von C. G.
‘Giebel und M. Siewert. Neue Folge. 1870. Band I. 8vo. Berlin.
The Editors.

VO SIM: 2D

346 Presents. [Feb. 9,

Bashforth (Francis) Reports on Experiments made with the Bashforth
Chronograph to determine the resistance of the Air to the Motion of
Projectiles, 1865-70. 8vo. London 1870. The Author.

Colding (M. A.) Extrait d’un Mémoire sur les lois des Courants dans les
Conduites ordinaires et dans la Mer. 4to. Copenhague. The Author.

Colnet d’Huart (de) Mémoire sur la théorie Mathématique de la Chaleur
et de la Lumiére. 4to. Luxembourg 1870. The Author.

Martins (Ch.) et G. Chancel Des Phénoménes Physiques qui accom-
pagnent la rupture par la Congélation de Eau des projectiles creux ~

de divers calibres. 4to. Montpellier 1870. | The Authors.
Mensbrugghe (G. vander) Sur un principe de Statique Moléculaire avancé
par M. Ludtge. 8vo. Bruselles 1870. The Author.

Phillips (L. B.) Horological Rating Tables for ascertaining the daily rate
of Watches and Chronometers. 8vo. London 1871. The Author.
Playfair (Lyon), F.R.S. The Inosculation of the Arts and Sciences. 8vo.
Birmingham 1870. The Author.
Savory (W. 8.), F.R.S. The Relation of the Vegetable and Animal to the
Inorganic Kingdom, a Lecture. 8vo. London 1861. On the Absorp-
tion of Dead Bone. 8vo. London 1864. An Experimental Inquiry
into the effect upon the Mother of poisoning the Foetus. 8vo. London.
On the relative Temperature of Arterial and Venous Blood. 8vo.
London. On the Shape of Transverse Wounds of the Blood-vessels in
relation to their Physiology. 8vo. London. The Author.

February 9, 1871.

Transactions.
Munich :—Konigl. bayer. Akademie der Wissenschaften. Sitzungsbe-
richte, 1870. II. Heft 1,2. 8vo. Miinchen 1870.

3 The Academy.
Utrecht :—Provincial Utrechtsch Genootschap van Kunsten en Weten-
schappen. Natuurkundige Verhandelingen. Nieuwe Reeks. Deel 2.
Stuk 1,2. 4to. Utrecht 1870. Verslag van het Verhandelde in de
algemeene Vergadering. 8vo. Utrecht 1870. Nederlandsch Me-
teorologisch Jaarboek voor 1869. Jaargang 21. Deel 1. 4to.
Utrecht 1869. The Society.
Venice :—Reale Istituto Veneto di Scienze, Lettere ed Arti. Vol. XIV.
Par.3; Vol. XV. Par. 1. 4to. Venezia 1870. Atti. Tomo XIV.

Disp. 6-10; Tomo XY. Disp. 1-9. 8vo. Venezia 1868-70.
The Institute.
Ateneo Veneto. Atti. Serie2. Vol. V. Puntata 4. 8vo. Veneza
1869. The Ateneo.

1871.] Presents. 347

Ballard (K.) On a localized Outbreak of Typhoid Fever in Islington,
during the months of July and August 1870, traced to the use of
impure Milk. 8vo. London 1871. The Author.

Clausius (R.) Ueber einen auf die Wirme anwendbaren mechanischen
Satz. 8vo, 1870. Ueber die Zuriickfiihrung des zweiten Hauptsatzes der
mechanischen Warmetheorie auf allgemeine mechanische Principien.

Svo. 1870. The Author, by Dr. Tyndall, F.R.S.
Wilson (Erasmus), F.R.S. Lectures on Dermatology; a Synopsis of
Diseases of the Skin. 8vo. London 1871. The Author.

Two Photographs of the Skeleton of the Hooded Dodo (Didus ineptus).
4 The Trustees of the British Museum.
Engraved Portrait of Joseph Hodgson, F.R.8., from a Painting by John
Partridge, 1849. Prof. Partridge, F.R.S.
Plaster Bust of Sir Francis Ronalds, F.R.S., by E. Davis.
S. Carter, Esq.
February 16, 1871.

Transactions.

Cambridge, Mass.:—American Association for the Advancement of
Science. Proceedings, Eighteenth Meeting, held at Salem, Mass.,
August 1869. 8vo. Cambridge 1870. The Association.

Harvard College. Annual Reports of the President and Treasurer,
1868-69. 8vo. Cambridge 1869. Report of the Board of Overseers.
8vo. Cambridge 1869. Catalogus Universitatis Harvardiane, 1869.
Catalogue of the Officers and Students, 1869-70. 12mo. Cam-
bridge 1869. Addresses at the Inauguration of C. W. Eliot as Pre-
sident. 8vo. Cambridge 1869. Catalogue of the Collection of En-
gravings bequeathed by Francis C. Gray, by L. Thies. 4to. Cam-
bridge 1869. The College.

London :—British Pharmaceutical Conference. Year Book of Pharmacy,
with the Proceedings at the Seventh Annual Meeting held at
Liverpool, Sept. 1870. 8vo. London 1870. The Conference.

Geological Society. Quarterly Journal. No. 103-105. 8vo. London
1870-71. The Society.
Society of Antiquaries. Proceedings. Second series. Vol. IV. No. 9.
8vo. London 1870. The Society.

Observations, &c.
Dresden :—Resultate aus den meteorologischen Beobachtungen ange-
stellt an den fiinfundzwanzig Konigl. Sichsischen Stationen im
Jahre 1868, von C. Bruhns. Jahrgang 5. 4to. Dresden 1870.

The Author.
London :—Meteorological Office, Quarterly Weather Report. Part 3.
Ato. London 1871. The Office.

New York :—Annual Report of the Adjutant-General. 8vo. Albany
1870. The State of New York.

348 Presents. [Feb. 23,

Blyth (E.) Mr. W. Theobald and Dr. Falconer. 8vo. London 1870.
The Author.
Boettcher (A.) Ueber Entwickelung und Bau des Gehorlabyrinths nach
Untersuchungen an Siugethieren. Theil 1. 4to. Dresden 1869.
The Author.
Lea (Isaac) A Synopsis of the Family Unionide. Fourth edition. 4to.

Philadelphia 1870. The Author.
Phillips (J. A.) On the Chemical Composition and Microscopic Constitu-
tion of certain Cornish Rocks. 8vo. London 1871. The Author.

Preudhomme de Borre (A.) Considérations sur la Classification et la
distribution géographique de la famille des Cicindélétes. 8vo. Bruwelles
1870. The Author.

February 23, 1871.
Transactions.
Birmingham :—Institution of Mechanical Engineers. Proceedings, 1868,
Leeds Meeting, Part 1; 1870, April 28; Aug. 2, 3 (2 parts),
Noy. 10. 8vo. Birmingham 1868-70. The Institution.
Edinburgh :—Royal Society. Transactions. Vol. XXVI. Part 1. 4to.
Edinburgh 1870. Proceedings, Session 1869-70. 8vo. Hdinburgh

1870. The Society.
London :—Entomological Society. Transactions for the year 1870.
Part 2-5. 8vo. London 1870. The Society.

Kast India Association. Journal. Vol. IV. No. 4. 8vo. London 1870.
Debates in both Houses of Parliament relating to India during the

Session of 1870. 8vo. London 1870. The Association.
University of London. Calendar for the year 1871. 8vo. London
1S 7Ay The University.

Newcastle-upon-Tyne. Iron and Steel Institute. Transactions. Vol. I.
No. 5-7. Journal. No. 1. 8vo. Newcastle 1869-71.

Darwin (C.), F.R.S. The Descent of Man, and Selection in relation to

Sex. 2 vols. 8vo. London 1871. The Author.
Dunkin (E. H. W.) Some Account of the Megalithic Remains in South
Dorset. 8vo. London 1871. The Author.

Griffin (L. H.) The Rajas of the Punjab, being the History of the principal
States in the Punjab and their political relations with the British
Government. 8vo. Lahore 1870. The Punjab Government.

Guy (Dr.), F.R.S. On the Claims of Science to Public Recognition and
Support, with special reference to the so-called “ Social Sciences.”
8vo. London 1870. The Author.

Recueil de Documents sur les Exactions, Vols et Cruautés des Armées

Prussiennes en France. 8vo. Bordeaux 1871.
Messrs. J. M. Johnson and Co,

1871.] On the Effect of Diet &c. on Elimination of Nitrogen. 349

March 2, 1871.
General Sir EDWARD SABINE, K.C.B., President, in the Chair.

In accordance with the Statutes, the names of the Candidates for elec-
tion into the Society were read as follows :—

Andrew Leith Adams, Surgeon- Charles Horne.
Major. Rev. A. Hume, LL.D.
Robert Dudley Baxter. Edmund Charles Johnson.
William Henry Besant, M.A. M. Kelburne King, M.D.
Henry Bowman Brady. John Leckenby.
William Budd, M.D. Alexander Moncrieff, Capt., M.A.

George William Callender, F.R.C.S. | Thomas George Moutgomierie, Major
Edwin Kilwick Calver, Capt. R.N. R.E.

William Carruthers. Richard Norris, M.D.

Frederick Le Gros Clark. Edward Latham Ormerod, M.D.
John Cleland, M.D. Oliver Pemberton.

Herbert Davies, M.D. John Arthur Phillips.

Walter Dickson, M.D. Richard Quain, M.D.

Henry Dircks. Edward James Reed, C.B.

August Dupré, Ph.D. George West Royston- Pigott, M.D.
Robert Etheridge. Carl Schorlemmer.

Alexander Fleming, M.D. John Shortt, M.D.

Peter Le Neve Foster, M.A. Peter Squire.

Wilson Fox, M.D. Edward Thomas.

Arthur Gamgee, M.D. Edward Burnet Tylor.

Thomas Minchin Goodeve, M.A. Cromwell Fleetwood Varley.
Frederick Guthrie, B.A. Arthur Viscount Walden, P.Z.S.
John Herschel, Capt. R.E. A. T. Houghton Waters, M.D.
Edmund Thomas Higgins, F.R.C.S. | Charles William Wilson, Capt. R.E.
Rev. Thomas Hincks, B.A. John Wood, F.R.C.S.

Trevenan James Holland, Major,C.B. | Edward Perceval Wright, M.D.

I. “ Further Experiments on the effect of Diet and Exercise on the
Elimination of Nitrogen.” By E. A. Parxzs, M.D., F.R.S.
Received January 28, 1871.

In the Proceedings of the Royal Society (No. 89, 1867, and No. 94,
1867) some experiments were published on the elimination of nitrogen,
durmg exercise and rest, on a nitrogenous and a non-nitrogenous diet.
The result of both series was so far to confirm the experiments which show
that the changes in the nitrogen of the urine and feces are small in extent

and afford no measure of the work; but there did appear to be a slight
effect produced in two ways :—
VOL. XIX. 25

350 Dr. Parkes—Further Experiments on the [Mar. 2,

1. There was an increased, though slight, outflow of nitrogen after work.

2. There was apparently a slight lessening of the outflow during work,
not dependent on diminution in the amount of urinary water. In the state
of rest also, when the diet was equal, there was no lessening, but a slight
excess, in the excretion of nitrogen as compared with a period both of
forced and ordinary exercise.

Professor Karl Voit, of Munich, who has a worldwide reputation for his
numerous and important contributions to this subject, and who denies that
exercise produces any change in the nitrogen, has taken exception to some
of these experiments, on the ground more particularly that the daily ingress
of nitrogen could not have been kept sufficiently stable. I believe the ex-
periments, showing as they do in two men a remarkable agreement in the
amount of nitrogen eliminated, and the fact that the two great articles of
diet by which nitrogen enters (meat and bread) were selected and weighed
with great care* and from the analyses appeared to be of constant compo-
sition, prove that the alterations in the daily inflow of nitrogen must have
been very small and less than those of the outflow.

Undoubtedly, however, to insure an absolute uniformity in the entrance

of nitrogen in men, is a very difficult matter as long as only ordinary diet
is given. The employment of prepared or concentrated food, on the other
hand, cannot be considered as good as common diet for such experiments ;
for the body is unaccustomed to the particular form in which the food is
given.
It was determined to repeat the experiments in two or three ways. First,
not only to use ordinary diet with the usual attention to keep it as uniform
as possible from day to day, but to select hours for rest and exercise when
the influence of diet is least perceptible, viz. twelve or fourteen hours after
food ; then in a second series to use prepared food in which the amount
of nitrogen is absolutely constant; and thirdly to use a diet without
nitrogen.

Unfortunately the experiments on preserved food failed on account of
the health breaking down in a few days and before any exercise could be
taken. On the ordinary diet also an unexpected difficulty arose, but still
the results are worthy of record. The experiments on the non-nitrogenous
diet are confirmatory of the former results, as far as the increased elimi-
nation after exercise is concerned.

As the details of the experiments would occupy too much space, I have
given only mean numbers when these were sufficient to fairly show the
results, and have omitted all details of the chloride of sodium, free acidity
of the urine, and other matters.

The subject of the experiments was T. C., a perfectly healthy soldier

* The meat was beefsteak, and was selected free from visible fat, and was always
cooked in the same way, 7. ¢. fried: The bread was the hospital bread, made daily with
the same flour, water, and salt, baked at the same heat and for the same time, and
having the same amount of crust and crumb.

1871.] Effect of Diet &c. on Elimination of Nitrogen. 351

who had never had a day’s illness in his life. He was 25 years of age,
weighed usually 145 lbs., and is of very temperate habits. He had been
an iron-worker before enlistment, and is an extremely powerful man; the
girth of the chest was 372 inches.

First SERIES or EXPERIMENTS.
Ordinary regulated diet.

During 20 days the man received daily beefsteak weighing 14 ounces
when raw, | ounce of fat for cooking, 16 ounces of bread, 1 ounce of butter,
6 ounces of milk, 16 ounces of potatoes, 1$ ounce of sugar, 36 fluid ounces
of infusions of tea and coffee, and 16 ounces of water. The amount of nitro-
gen was determined at 300 grains; it might be a little more or less, but
still from day to day its amount was the same as far as it could possibly be
kept so. This diet was selected in this, as in the former experiments,
because it is the usual ration of the Army Hospital Corps to which this
man belonged, and therefore there was no fear of a change in the food itself
producing any effect.

He took his meals always at the same time; viz. breakfast at 10 a.m.,
dinner at 3 p.m. (when he took the whole of his meat), and tea at 7 to 6.
After tea he took 6 ounces of water at 10 p.m., but no solid food.

The urine was collected from 10 a.m. to 6 a.m. on the following morn-
ing; then from 6 a.m. to 8 a.m. and from 8 a.m. to 10 a.m. As all food
was taken between 10 a.m. and 6 P.M., it was expected that the urine from
6 a.m. to 10 a.m. (viz. from the 13th to the 16th hours after food) would
be of tolerably constant composition ; at any rate there would be less chance
of error from the effect of food. In this way, and by keeping as far as
possible an equal daily diet, it was hoped to lessen or remove the chances
of fallacy from varying ingress of nitrogen. An unexpected circumstance
partly disconcerted this hope.

It was anticipated that the amount of urine passing in the two hours
from 8 to 10 a.m. would be less than in the two hours from 6 to 8, as
being further removed from the time when fluid was taken. But the result
was otherwise ; there was always more urine passed from 8 to 10 a.m. than
in the previous two hours. When this was first noted, it was supposed that
an error in collecting the urine had been made; but day after day the
result was the same. It seemed to be owing to the influence of sleep and
wakefulness. From 6 to 8 the man slept, but from 8 to 10 he was not
only awake, but his mind was active, and he talked to two men who worked
in the room where he slept; and though his body was kept as quiet as
during the previous two hours, the mental condition seemed to cause an
Increased passage of urine; at least there seemed nothing else to account
for the fact that on every day during ten days while he was still in bed,
there was more urine passed from 8 to 10 than from 6 to 8 4.M., although
no water had been taken except at 10 the night before. ‘The result was

252

352 Dr. Parkes—Further Experiments on the —_ [Mar. 2,

that the urea did not fall as was expected, though its percentage was les-
sened.

Liebig’s mercuric nitrate solution (the chloride of sodium being got rid
of and the usual correction for dilution being made) and Voit’s plan for
the determination of nitrogen by soda-lime were both used, so as to afford
a control of the observations.

The daily weight of the body, the temperature of the axilla and reetum,
the pulse, the weight of the stools, &c. were also determined. Almost all
the experiments were repeated, and several were performed three and four
times *.

During the first ten days he remained in bed from 10 p.m. to 10 a.m.,
taking during the day his ordinary exercise. During the second 10 days
he went to bed at 10 p.m. as before, got up at 6 a.m., worked for two hours,
and then went to bed again at 8 a.m. until 10 a.m. The work consisted
in dragging a cart weighing 710 lb. 4 miles in two hours. Supposing the
coefficient of traction to be the same as in walking, the amount of work cal-
eulated by Haughton’s formula would be equal to about 100 tons lifted
one foot. His weight at the commencement of the experiment was 146 lb.
2 oz.; it fell regularly during 10 days to 144 lb. 10 oz., viz. 1 lb. 8 oz.
During the second 10 days it fell to 142 lb. 12 02., a loss of 1 lb. 14 oz.

The following are the mean results in the first and second sections of 10
days.

Mean amount of urine, in cub. centims.

6 A.M. 3 A.M. Io A.M.
to to to Total.

8 A.M. TO A.M. 6 A.M.
1st section of 10 days ......... 71°65 100°4 1077°45 1249°5
2nd section of 10 days......... 75°6 35°8 1068°8 1229°4

There was a slight decrease in the urinary water in the two hours of rest
following the two hours’ exercise.

Mean amount in grammes of mercuric nitrate precipitate taken as urea.

6 to 8. 8 to Io. 10 to 6. Total.

1st section of io tee 3°056

usual exerciset ...... Ae 35°189 gece
2nd section of ro days,

2 hours additional 3°142 2°974 36°017 42°133

exercise from 6 to 8

* Count Wollowicz commenced these experiments with me, but was obliged to dis-
continue them on account of the illness which eventually proved fatal. Serjeant Tur-
ner, of the Army Hospital Corps, very carefully took most of the observations on the -
temperature and the pulse.

+ One day’s urea from 6 to 10 a.m. is omitted as the urine was lost.

1871.] Effect of Diet &c. on Elimination of Nitrogen. 353 >

The results show no diminution in the urea during the two hours of
exercise; the slight increase may perhaps be disregarded. In the two
hours of rest, there is equally inconsiderable increase after exercise; the
excess in the 4 hours of the second section of 10 days was 1°58 gramme.
In the next 20 hours there was an increase of ‘828 gramme, equal to 3864
gramme, or 6 grains of nitrogen. The differences are so small as probably
to fall within the limit of error, and it is impossible to affirm that exercise
to the amount of 100-foot tons in two hours made any alteration in the

urea.
Mean amount of nitrogen as determined by soda-lime.

6 to 8. 8 to Io. 10 to 6. Total.
Ist section of 10 days*:
rest from 6 to 10 ne a 7 aie 16°902 19°883

exercise from 6 to 8 A.M., 1°399 16°924 19°761

2nd section of so days:
1°438
rest from 8 to 10 A.M. ...

The nitrogen by soda-lime showed very slight variations. There was a
slight decrease in the 2 hours’ exercise and in the 2 hours’ rest after exer-
cise over the corresponding period ; but it is so trifling that I hesitate to
draw any conclusions. The figures show that the slight increase in the
urea was, as supposed, an unavoidable error. Looking to the figures of the
nitrogen by soda-lime as more correct, it seems that 2 hours’ additional
exercise produced no marked change in the outflow when the inflow of
nitrogen was constant. This result, as far as it goes, certainly bears out
Voit’s assertion of the constancy of the nitrogen, but it does not destroy
the conclusions formerly drawn that the nitrogen lessens during exercise
and increases afterwards, because the amount of exercise was in the present
case very much less ; and as the alteration in the nitrogen even in the former
experiments, with much more severe exercise, fell within narrow limits, it
might easily have been anticipated that work of only one-sixth the amount
would be inappreciable. The method of experimenting also does not
appear to me to be so good as that formerly used.

Amount of nitrogen, in grammes, in the stools.

Percentage composition. Amount in 24 hours.

8th day of 1st period..| 217592 | 78°048 | 1°166 | 42°929 | 152°691 | 2°279

7th day of 2nd period.| 25:00 75°00 LA 2OvrtG Forgan in aaa

* The nitrogen in the 2 first days is not included in the mean of the hours 6 to 10,
as the urine was lost on one occasion, and on the other the experiment was uncertain.
The mean of these hours (6 to 10) is therefore for 8 days.

354 = Dr. Parkes—Further Experiments on the [ Mar. 2,

On the 8th day there was a large stool, showing previous accumulation.
Taking the weight of all the stools during the two sections of 10 days, and
using the percentage composition of nitrogen of the one day in each series,
the mean daily excretion of nitrogen was 1°807 gramme in the Ist section,
and 1:766 gramme in the 2nd section of 10 days.

The pulse and the temperature of the axilla were taken every two hours
from 6 a.m. to 10 p.m. ‘The temperature is in Fahr. degrees :—

Mean pulse and temperature.
First section of 10 days.

Hours.
| ours WEE
6. Saeaie MO. nl nae 2: 4. 6. 3. Of day
EP See cre state Sie sates 64°6 |66°3 |67°8 |79°3 |65°5 |75 74°6 |74°2 169°5 | 70°65

Temp. of axilla...... 97°94 |98°04 98°32 |98°62 |98°32 (98°48 |98°49 [98°52 |98'41 | 98°32
Memyp. of mechuma —£. poe. Gone a eases OQi2 Mlteecres 99°27) setae 99°40 | ake 99°26

Second section of 10 days.
(Additional exercise from 6 to 8 o’clock.)

Hours.
ours ne
6, ea ee OE Pe uiepe he ae 4. 6. | 8, IO. ote
Puller. oie cee atied. 62°4 |82°2 |68'4 |76 [68 |74°4 |69 |69°9 |64°6 | 70°42
emp. ,ot-axalla 2.25.3. 98°24 198°24 |98°33 |98°23 |98°41 [98°45 |98°42 [93°44 |98°38 | 98°34
Sampson MECiIMUa || Neesee (O94: al sereee O0:2) scene QO32 24 ances 99°22) heeemer 99°26

The effect on the pulse of the exercise from 6 to 8 in the 2nd period was
interesting. The exercise brought up the pulse 16 beats at 8 o’clock over
the corresponding period ; but the pulse afterwards fell below the beats of
the Ist period, and the result was a perfect balance of the day’s work, so
that the mean pulse of the day was the same in both periods. This shows
how completely the heart, if called on for exertion, compensates itself by
subsequent rest. ‘The exercise made little difference in the temperature
of axilla or rectum ; there was a slight rise at 8 a.m. corresponding with
the pulse after exercise in both axilla and rectum, but the mean of the day
was the same.

SECOND SERIES.
Prepared concentrated food.

It was proposed to give prepared food of uniform composition, so that
the daily ingress of nitrogen would be absolutely constant. I was unable
to obtain the ‘‘ pea-sausage’”’ which the German troops are now using in
the Field, and used instead a concentrated food which had been sent by an
inventor to Sir Galbraith Logan, and by him sent to Netley for report.

1871.] Effect of Diet &c. on Elimination of Nitrogen. 355

It was composed of bread, meat, potatoes, sugar, spices and salt dried to-
gether, &c., and was stated to contain everything necessary for nutrition, so
that the troops on service would need no other food. It contained 13°65
per cent. of water and 2°73035 per cent. of nitrogen. After preliminary
trials to know how much would satisfy hunger, 14 ounces were given daily,
containing 10°838 grammes of nitrogen. The food, however, produced
such derangement in nutrition (indigestion, heartburn, and headache) that
after a few days the experiments were discontinued. In spite of the con-
stant ingress, the elimination of nitrogen varied greatly from day to day,
the extreme range being from 7'641 to 15°024 grammes; and the man felt
so ill that he begged to discontinue the experiment. It was interesting to
note that, in spite of the daily variations in the nitrogen, there passed out
in the 5 days nearly the same quantity as entered, viz. 54°920 grammes of
exit, as against 54°19 grammes of entrance. He lost weight during the
trial. The experiment must be therefore repeated on some future occasion
with other prepared food.

Tuirp SERIES.
Non-nitrogenous food.

In the experiments formerly related in the ‘ Proceedings’ two men were
kept for 2 days at a time without nitrogen. As it seemed to do no harm,
the present experiments were now prolonged over 5 days on two occasions.
The first was after the man had been well fed with nitrogen, the second
after the body had become poor in nitrogen from the restricted supply
given in the concentrated food. The non-nitrogenous food consisted of
arrowroot, butter (deprived of casein), and lump sugar. Infusion of tea
without milk was allowed, but this contained in the day only grain of
nitrogen. Hunger was perfectly satisfied by this food ; the man felt quite
well and could have continued it. The heartburn produced by the concen-
trated food was at once relieved by this starch and fat diet.

First Experiments on Non-nitrogenous Food.
Previous daily entry of nitrogen=19.5 grammes.

On the first day of non-nitrogenous food he took his ordinary exercise ;
on the 2nd took additional exercise, which consisted in digging up potatoes
over 576 square feet, lifting the weight (16 stone) into a barrow, and
wheeling them home for 3 a mile. On the 3rd day he rested, on the 4th
repeated the exercise, on the 5th rested. He did the 4th day’s work even
better than the 2nd, and could have worked on the 5th day.

The amount of work done cannot easily be calculated ; it was a good but
not an excessive day’s work.

The weight on the first day was 142 lb. 7 oz., and on the last 141 Ib.
10 oz. He took daily 60 fluid ounces of water (=1704 cub. centims. ),
and as much arrowroot, oil of butter, and sugar as he liked.

356 Dr. Parkes—Further Experiments on the [Mar. 2,

Urinary water, in cub. centims.

8 A.M. 3 P.M
to to Total
3 P.M 3 AM
ist day, usual work ......... 676°5 4.30 1106°5
2nd) day, CXErClse ....-cess-- 660 270 930
ard day, rest .......00s “onc3a9 780 210 990
Bila Gays CXCLCISS | ean anne AI5 37 502
5th day, rest ......:....-2e00es 705 140 850

Urea, in grammes.

8 A.M. 3 P.M
to to Total

8 P.M 3 AM
ist day, usual work ......... 16°768 8°514. 2.5°282
2nd day, CXELCISC <sc....-5+0° 7°986 4°2.93 12°079
ard ida, Lest ac.eaecenenestee 3°042 3°087 6°123
Ath day, CX€rcise .......stcs 3°652 2.°540 6192
Gtlardaiy, West ec. ssneaacecs 4°290 37066 7°356

Nitrogen.

Nitrogen by soda-lime. | Total in 24 hours.

8 A.M. 8 P.M. Nitrogen | Nitrogen

to to by calculated

8 P.M. 8 A.M. soda-lime. | from urea.
ist day, usual work ......... 3°287 4304: 12°591 11°798
pnd Gay, EXCLelse aavcraaver ss 3°782 2°381 6°163 5°728
Bedi aiy Ost: (so. soatctes-dcces 1°692 1°396 3°088 2°859
Abliday, CXCLCISC Ha cesses ses 1°764. "9196 26384 2°389
GR bIN ORY o RCSD iaisariaisiagsaeheossies 2°052 17338 B:28ie 3°433

The effects of exercise and rest are complicated with the gradually de-
creasing elimination dependent on the supply of nitrogen being cut off,
consequently nothing can be concluded from the lessening of nitrogen on
the 2nd day (exercise). On comparing the 3rd and 4th days (rest and
exercise), the nitrogen by soda-lime shows a decrease on the exercise day ;
but as the ureal nitrogen is almost precisely the same on the two days, it
does not seem possible to affirm a decrease. The most positive result is
the increase of nitrogen (as shown by both methods) on the 5th day (rest
after work). There was a decided excess, amounting to ‘699 grammes or
very nearly 19 per cent. Such an increase occurring on the 5th day after
the supply of nitrogen was cut off, seems inexplicable unless on the suppo-
sition that it was owing to the previous muscular exertion.

I felt, however, that this experiment might be better conducted. The
exercise was commenced too soon, and before the nitrogen had reached its

1871.] Liffect of Diet &c. on Elimination of Nitrogen. 357

lowest point. The kind of exercise, too, viz. digging, which is often attended
with intervals of rest, was not a good choice. Moreover, on the 3rd and 4th
days he took some common salt, which might possibly have interfered, as
it is supposed that chloride of sodium augments the outflow of urea.

The experiment was therefore repeated at the period when the body was
poor in nitrogen from the use of the concentrated food.

Second Experiments on Non-nitrogenous Food (Arrowroot,
Oil of Butter, and Sugar).

Previous daily entry of nitrogen=10°838 grammes.

In this series the man did his ordinary work, which was not severe, and
tolerably uniform, during the first 3 days. Then on the fourth day he
marched 32 miles on level ground, carrying the new valise equipment, the
service-kit, 40 rounds of ball ammunition, rifle, bayonet, and great coat.
In all the weight was 433 lb., his own weight being 1453 lb. The work
done was therefore 712°8 tons lifted a foot, or, in other words, it was an ex-
tremely hard day’s work. He did 26 miles quite easily, but then was
greatly fatigued and got very tender about the feet, and had pains in the
calves of the legs. The next day he was, however, quite well, and declared
that he did not feel in the least weakened from having been 5 days on
starch and butter. The march commenced at 8 a.Mm., and with intervals
of 12 hour for meals, lasted till 7.30, so that actual muscular work both of
arms and legs was going on for 10 hours. The daily ingress of chloride of
sodium was uniform during the 5 days.

Elimination of urinary water, in cub. centims.

3 A.M. 8 P.M.
to to Total.

$ P.M. 8 A.M.
1st day, usual work ......... 950 570 1520
2nd day, usual work......... 920 550 1470
3rd day, usual work......... 800 470 1270
4th day, marching ......... 585 325 gio
Rubi Cay, PESby nt. sae senses 765 495 1260

3 A.M. 3 P.M.
to to Total.

3 P.M 8 A.M.
nei GENE UE RUBEN Oils Saereecer| wepecobcede wall tc ceenedee 13°072
2s Cave USUAL WOR Wri: sal), caseseusse) ln ter suas eos 10°731
ZUG) Cay, USUAN WOK Kisse todecc|itisscdesaaeeill ||. eeicccnse g'271
4th day, marching ......... 4°563 2°762 FPO)

Roa ee Sine ssids spe cinaavenuas |r OS 02 6°4.35 15°997

358 _ Dr. Parkes—Further Experiments ‘on the [ Mar. 2,

Nitrogen by soda-lime.

8 A.M. 8 P.M. Total in | Lota! nitrogen
to to SAG oe calculated
8 P.M 8 A.M 4 i from urea.
MStiGleiyeWIStal WOLK secowscac| Scresasee | nucsctecees 5°936 6100
PMOVOAYFUSUAL WORK. .sceseca|. cveweeses | redececen 5°427 5°008
BROS aNAMISUAL WOM sons. gas| o> seviercee.) jl mseepeemac 4°328 ee 6 25/
4th day, marching ......... 2451 1°361 3°312 3°418
Binnday, TESt conse snes aenagaes 4°997 3°268 $°265 7465

The effect of the previous small entry of nitrogenous food is clearly seen ;
on the Ist day the nitrogen fell almost to the amount of the 2nd day in
the previous experiments. On the 3rd day, on the contrary, it was greater
than on the corresponding day of the former series.

The amount of nitrogen was actually greater on the 5th day than on the
Ist. Except the excessive exercise of the 4th day, no other obvious cause
existed for this elimination on the 5th day. No mistake seems possible ;
for the urinary water on the 5th day was less in quantity than on the Ist,
2nd, and 3rd days, while the nitrogen was 2 grammes more than even on
the 1st day after nitrogenous food was left off. An error in analysis is not
possible, since not only were the analyses repeated, but the process by urea
gave results corresponding to that by soda-lime. No constitutional condi-
tion which could cause excess in elimination was indicated either by the
pulse or body temperature, and the man felt perfectly well. I need hardly
say that no nitrogenous food was taken; for it is quite certain that it was
not.

The increase in the 5th day in the Ist series, though less marked, is still
unequivocal, and there seems therefore no rashness in stating that the con-
clusion of the experiments formerly laid before the Society is affirmed, viz.
that severe exercise causes an increase in the elimination of nitrogen in the
period of rest after the exercise. It is noticeable that in this man the
increased elimination was not in the hours immediately succeeding, but on
the following day, and lasted for some time.

Whether during the period of exercise the nitrogen was lessened is not
so clear, as the fall from 4°323 grammes on the 3rd day to 3°812 on the
Ath or exercise day might be merely the continuing effect of the depriva-
tion of nitrogen. The experiments formerly recorded seem to me better
adapted to determine this point, which, however, certainly requires more
evidence in confirmation before it can be accepted.

That changes go on in the muscles during exercise which lead to an
increase in the outflow of nitrogen afterwards must, I think, be admitted ;
and on this point it seems that the statement of Liebig must be supported
against Voit. f

It may be interesting to give the mean pulse and temperature during
these days of non-nitrogenous feeding for comparison with the normal.

1871.) Effect of Diet &e. on Elimination of Nitrogen. 359

During the day of exercise, however, the observations at 10 a.m. and
2 p.m. on the pulse and all the temperature observations on the marching
day were lost, except at 8 a.m. and 8 p.m.
On a diet without nitrogen.

Mean pulse.

Hours.
Mean
8 A.M. |10 A.M.| 12 NOON.| 2 P.M.| 4 P.M.| 6 P.M.| 8 P.M. oy
ist 5 days ...| 64°4 |/69°6 | 692 | 73°6 | 70O°2 | 75°38 | 72°6 | 70°77

and 5 days...| 68 HOG Wee 752 7 74. 75°60 1972°6),| 72205
Mean temperature of axilla.

Hours.
las SE Be he hs et Se Mean
by day.
6 A.M.| 8 A.M. |10 A.M.| 12 NOON.| 2 P.M.| 4 P.M.| 6 P.M.| 8 P.M. y cay

1st 5 days ...| 98°08 | 98°16 | 98°36 | 98°36 | 98°32 | 98°32 | 98°36 | 98°36 | 98-29.

and 5 Gays...] ss... g8'08 | 9815 | 98°25 | 982 | 9815 | 985 | 98°15 | 98°16

Mean temperature of rectum.

Hours.
gel Mean
8 A.M. |IO A.M.| 12 NOON.| 2 P.M.| 4 P.M.| 6 P.M.| 8 P.M. OF days.
ash.6) days ...|.99:0. | '..290. GOP on Neots [QO ieee <a 99°4 |99°25
Pf P GAYS.$.) °93°7 | acces: FNC ANS ee QOiAA Al sesicee 99°48 | 99°115

The mean pulse on the 5th day of the Ist series of non-nitrogenous food
was 69°3, and 67°9 on the 5th day of the 2nd series. Both these were
rest days, when the heart would naturally beat rather Jess. Non-nitro-
genous diet does not, therefore, materially affect the number of beats of the
pulse; but it decidedly influenced its volume, rendering it smaller, far
softer, and more compressible when felt with the finger, and it gave a feeble
sphygmographic tracing.

The sphygmographic tracings show this clearly. Ten tracings were
taken at 6 a.M.on successive days, when the man was on nitrogenous food,
15 hours after dinner and 12 after the last food. They represent, therefore,
the tracings of inanition. Five tracings were taken on successive days at
6 a.m. on the non-nitrogenous food. The same instrument and an equal
pressure were always used. The height to which the lever was raised
(all conditions of pressure &c. being equal) will therefore show the expan-
sion of the artery. The tracings were carefully measured, and the following
is the result :— .

360 On the Effect of Diet &c. on Elimination of Nitrogen. | Mar. 2,

Height of upright line in
the sphygmographic
tracing at 6 A.M.,

in inches.
Ist day, nitrogenous food, pulse 12 hours after food ....0°1375
2nd as 5 ~ 2 201625
3rd = 99 oO Se
4th 2 9» .. ..0°2000
5th > 3 >» os Om aia
6th - 99 + «> Ouse
“th * iy ..-. 0°1500
8th 5 Se . «xO
9th > 3 + oe OZT2e
10th = vo ne ORES

Mean... oc... 20 Sa

list day, Hon-nitrozenous food - od). ws 2 ad ee 0°0750
2nd oe Ss mas, wah, Sqeirein 3h Ghee see meee: Aaa tape eee 0:0810
ord 9 Fy a Nt aia rrilavsuct omeye te Conca dcue cannes 0°1250
4th ~ bo Edn iainsPaes 2 cea hens SN Ro ihe 0:0761
5th 3 ) <8) ere 'a'6 Slatyra ce a's 5» Saher

Mean. 0.020020. 0.5 2 Oem

With an equal pressure the lever was thrown almost double the height
when the man was on nitrogenous food. This feebleness of expansion shown
by the sphygmograph was quite in accordance with the impression given
to the finger. The softness of the pulse proved it was not owing to in-
creased resistance of the arterial wall. ‘

With regard to the temperature, the means are so close to those of the
days on ordinary diet, that having regard to the fact that the period was
shorter and therefore more liable to error, and that some observations were
omitted on the marching-day, it may be concluded that a non-nitrogenous
diet continued for 5 days neither raised nor lowered the temperature of the
axilla and rectum.

It therefore appears that when the nitrogenous food of a healthy man was
reduced to one half for 5 days, and he was then kept for 5 days more without
nitrogen, he was able on the 4th day after such deprivation to do a very
hard day’s work. The non-nitrogenous diet, consisting of butter oil, starch,
and sugar, kept him perfectly well; all functions seemed natural, the tem-
perature of the body was unaltered, the pulse became very soft, and the
sphygmographic tracings showed very feeble markings ; but it was not ma-
terially altered in frequency. The circulation appeared to be properly
carried on, as far as could be judged of by the man’s own feelings. The
health, as judged of by the man’s feelings and the absence of objective
signs, was perfect. On account, however, of the feebleness of the heart’s

1871.] Captain Belavenetz-—Magnetic Observations, &c. 361

action it was not thought right to continue the experiments, which had, I
believe, sufficiently proved that force necessary for great muscular work
can be obtained by the muscles from fat and starch, though changes in the
nitrogenous constituents of the muscles also go on which have as one effect
an increased though not excessive elimination of nitrogen after the cessation
of the work.

II. “ Magnetic Observations made during a Voyage to the North
of Europe and the Coasts of the Arctic Sea in the Summer of
1870.” By Capt. Ivan Betavenerz, I.R.N., Director of the
Imperial Magnetic Observatory, Cronstadt. In a Letter to
ArcHIBALD SmitH, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S. Communicated
by Mr. Smiru. Received February 4, 1871.

Dear Frienp,—Last summer I made a very interesting magnetic
voyage, being invited by Vice-Admiral Possiet to take part in the Arctic
Expedition with the Grand Duke Alexis, Lieutenant of the Navy.

The first part of the voyage, from St. Petersburgh to Arkangeslsk (1179
miles), by rivers and lakes, I made in a little screw cutter, 273 feet long,
7z feet wide, and 23 feet deep, belonging to the corvette ‘ Variage;” the
second part of the voyage (1716 miles) in the schooner ‘ Sextant.’

I visited the White Sea and the coasts of the Arctic Ocean ; the end of
the voyage was in the clipper ‘ Jemchug’ (2461 miles), from Norway to
Cronstadt.

On the way I made magnetic observations, the result of which I inclose
in this letter. I will ask you to make them known to General Sabine and
to the Royal Society.

The observations were made by a small compass which has the edge
needle, and which is able to turn from one side to the other. Each ob-
servation, the data of which are given, was made in different directions of
the instrument, turning the instrument on 120° in azimuth, by which the
eccentric errors were taken off. In each direction the needle was turned
on both sides for correcting the error of the magnetic direction in the
needle. Four observations were made for each position of the needle. By
this mode of observation the error does not exceed more than +1).

In the declination table are given the day and the hour of each observa-
tion in order to judge of the daily disturbances of magnetism. It would be
very interesting to compare these observations with those made at the same
time by photography at Kew, and thereby to deduce the magnetic disturb-
ance due to the change of magnetic latitude.

The inclination was observed by a Kew Inclinometer belonging to the
Compass Observatory, made in London in 1865, and examined by Mr.
Balfour Stewart. No doubt it is the most useful instrument for this kind
of observation.

The horizontal force was observed by ‘‘ Captain Belavenetz’s Instrument

362 - Captain Belavenetz—Magnetic Observations _[ Mar. 2,

DECLINATION.
PLACE OF OBSERVATION.
Month Hour of Obser ved Mean Month
and Day. Observation. Declina- | Declina- | and Day.
tion. tion.
h m h m [e) 4 (eo) 1
SHLISSELBURG (town). 31 May
Lat. 59° 56! 38” N. 12 June
Long. 31° |’ 59" E. from perce csnsn | seceesccscccsesesccce | seresecsseae | sesessversee
Greenwich. :

LoprsnseE Pou (town). 3 3
Lat. 60° 44' 11'-8 N. 15 June | 5 Oto 5 30 p.m. 1 22°70 Be 2 15 June

Long. 33° 33’ 8 E.

Virrcra (town). a June | 8 80to 9 Oam. | 2 14:5 EB.
Lat. 61° 0' 23'-4 N. 7
Long. 36° 27' 1'"-4 E. {9 June 2 0, 8 30 "5, | 2 134 3
8 =
5p June | 90, 9 304.1 2408 ip ae
3 2 SoaBy
5p June | 930,10 0 ,, | 2118 _ June
7 !
19 June 6130 sy 70 pnw, 2 18
F dune i 10 1 BOE Sa el ooeee
ene ae
Vouoepa (town). a7 June 10 Oto 10 30 a.m.| 3 17-6 B.
Tat. 59° 13' 30'-9 N.
Long. 39° 52’ 59'-7 BE. » » (1030, 11 0 , | 3 220
Sc ial LO} all oO Gri eleogecee
14
Oo aie. 11 30 ” 12 O noon 3 23°4 56 June
mo | 4 0, 4 30 pan. ind oom 3 248H.],, ,,
; 16
3 26: pe
fe ? 4 30 9 5 0 3 69 98 3)
33 7 0, 7 80am.| 3 256
Pe 80, / 28 30. 4) ead
a9) aas3 9 0 ” LOVED ” 3 24°5 E.
Veixy Oostue (town). 19 June 5 Oto 5 45pm.| 6 5585.
Lat, 60° 45' 45'-6 N. aoe 19 June
Long. 46° 17’ 59'"2. KE, 3 duly 1 AD);, So Oam. (7038 1 July
19 June 7 88E
Riprive mii wre lea Pa
21 June K
Se 8 0, 845am.| 717-78.
PIANDA (village). 24. June 24. June
! ' = ee eres 5 : E
Lat. 62° 56’ 11" N. 6 auly 415to 5 Oam.| 4 57-25. | 4 57-28, 6 July

Long. 42° 35' 8'"3 EH.

1871.]

INCLINATION.

hm
3 30 to

7 Oto
S © .,

7 20 ,,

7 30 to
5 20 .,

7 45 ,,

6 20 ,,

Hour of
Observation.

hm
4 30 p.m.

11 Otoll 15 am.
Pea. 1) 50 ,,

oA), 11:35. ,,
11 50 ,, 12 10 noon

7 20 p.m.
S20" ,,

8 0

”

10 45 ,, 11 80 a.m.

7 45 am.

& 400:
8 30

”

5 30to 6 15am

7 15

”

Observed
Inclina-
tion.

9° i

70 36°7

72 59-4

made during an Arctic Voyage.

Mean
Inclina-
tion.

71 33°5

72 58-9

Month. | Day. a ee

Hour of

ation.

Hori- | Verti-
zontal| cal
Force. | Force.

1-6328) 4-6478

4-7985

4:9259| 9-97

1:5826) 47460

1:6839

1:6109} 4-8924

hm
May 31 zs
Wane Pp 5 30 p.m.
3
June ib 8 O pm
June 4 | 12 30 p-m.
19
June 15 9 0 am.
June 20 10 O am.
July 2 1100 am.
June 24

5-0029} 10°85

5:0305] 10°91

5-1508} 11:17

vat ta ee ee

364 Captain Belavenetz—Magnetic Observations _[ Mar. 2,

DECLINATION.
No. PLACE OF OBSERVATION
. Month Hour of Observed Mean Mionils
and Day. Observation. Declina- | Declina- [ng Day.
tion. tion.
Oe ee eee ve hm hm 2 a BS cp
7. | ARHANGELSK (town). 26 June
Lat, 64° 32! 10''8 N. i aiily 1l Otoll 40a.m.| 5 53:5 BR. 26 June
Long. 40° 31' 63 E. oi Ni 7 15 i g 10 s 5 49:8 5 44.7 E. je July
| 28 te 39
io 9 30 ,, 10 15pm. | 5 309 E.
Po ieee ee eon a Se
8. ay (Monastery on an Fe July | 7018 8 One| ol ened
Hiat:-o9°. 1 22" N: teat 12 15 2 265
Long. 35° 44’ 44" B. pray sonia Wea) 2 aes
9 89 2 45 9 3 45 p-m. 2 20-4
ie eae 7) O05, - 4% 80, 1 eel
iy 650 ,, 7 30am. |-2 396
99 59
Sic 3 20 ,, 4 0 pm| 2otoy 5
17 ”
” 99 7 40 ” 8 15 93 2 24:4 9 28-0 B. 7
6 %9 99
ig” 9 30.,, 10 15am: |72' 385 Ke
39
99 39 L 20 33 8 0 p.m. 9 90-9 19
= m5 4702 8 Oam, 2 380
ap ik 11 40 ,, 12 10 noon} 2 24-6
beer 3d 20 ,, 4:70 p.m: | 2134
999 6 0 9 6 45— ” 2 27:2 E.
9. | Car. Kanine Nos. 10 Ae a 1
Lat. 68° 39’ 12" N. 22 July | 4 20to 5 15pm.|8 58 E. Pie a3 July
ee sa > (10:30, 11 ib am. 8 | 2omee Bie

10. Svraroy Nos (Cap.).

Lat. 68° 9' 50" N.

14
Te Fuly 11090042 So nope lee een 96 July
Long. 39° 47' 50" E. OG Y noon -|4 83H.

en EE EE

11, |Brestimennos (island). 13
ae 11 0 to,t2 50 :
Lat. 68° 4' 4” N. DD July 0 noon) 5 25-7 E.
Long. 39° 34' 46" E. ae 5 0, 5 45pm. 5 359
14 13
% 8 0 9 8 45 ” 5 40:8 = July
15 5 41-1 E.

a» 8 30, 8 50am.| 5 59-4

» » 112380 ,, 2) 15 pan) > 458
oe bP) 3 410 9) 4 10 ” 5 47-6 Be

made during an Arctic Voyage.

INCLINATION.

Z : Force
Hour of Hori- | Verti- Total | in

Month. | Day. Observation. zontal | _cal Force. |British

Hour of Observed) Mean Force. | Force. Unit
Observation. Inclina- | Inclina- nits.
tion. tion.
hm hm pee, i ey

73.507 | 2eme | 28 | 8 O am, |1-4283 4-9307 |5-1384 | 11-13
P20) 200 ,, |73 463 July 10

8 30to 9 15am.|73 41-4

24155, 10 0 , |73 448
5 50,, 6 45pm. | 73 486 July £ 10°30) acm.
Fr. AIR -QQr F F
645, 730 , |73 41-4 73 45-1 7 mae 14268 |4:8957 (50993 | 11-06
9 19 ears
w15.,, 10 Oam. | 73 473
nm 0, 1030 ,, |73 47:0
~20to 8 l5am.|7%76 7-2 al

12 20to 1 Op.m.|75 485

15 47-6
m0, 140 ,, |75 466
13
9 30 to 10 15 a.m. |75 50-2 og | 12 15 pam.
75 535} July | 15 1-2653 |5-0343 |5°1908 | 11-26
1015,, 1050 ,, |75 568 me ed pan.

VOL. XIX. | 2F

366 Captain Belaveneta— Magnetic Observations [ Mar. 2,

| DECLINATION.
No. PLACE OF OBSERVATION. ie aac iii 1 - =~
Month ’ Hour of Observed Mean Month
and Day. Observation. Declina- | Declina- ang Day.
tion. tion.
hm hm ona es 4
12. | TerrperskasA Goosa (gulf). {17
aa oll 1 581E
Lat. 69° 10’ 50" N, eas acts =u July
Long. oD” 9' 45" FE. a eae 12 30 = it 155 p-m. 1 52:3 29
1 - (SB 15 4? 8 45 4, 02> 3:9 eee x
oat | 080-5, 26 Ie prea aes
yo) 80 = BAS 8 ieee na
ies Kona (town). 19 :
az Jul 1 303 E
Lat. 68° 52! 48" N. BEY a 20 te, Oem
Long. 33° 0' 17" E. ah wale ROP Ll 50 elec
ay Jul
yl 310), 8 20 pearls! a
bat aD WO, 045 gral age ae

20 July Chae)
Tee 8 30, 910 am./ 1 34-7 20 July
D 11 30 ,, 12 10 p.m.| 1 246 1 Aug
ss as peg) SO gone Were al image gaan
9 9 9) 40 99 6 10 bP) 1 5 1 E
ha Varp'okE (town in Norway). 24 July | ,
Lat. 70° 22! 16" N. aaa: 3 45to 4 15pm.| 0 234W
Dene eee OL ee 2b My || 9 79 4h nam. oes
6 Aug de ;
ap) (ll 30 | 12. Omeon) 0) 20% 25 July
6 A
» » ~=©(12 50,, 120pm.}0275 | 0 253w.|°? 778
9” 3 10 » & 40 ” 0 22:2 et
» ») DADs, BD Ape; lOrao®
» pi | f 10, 140.) 0 40:0
15. | Hammerrzsr (town). 30 July ett Deis, ee 30 July
Lat. 70° 40' 11” N. IT dug. 7 9%.) 30pm. | 6 120
Long. 23° 42' 0" E. Boy 330, 410, |6110W : ae
16. | TRroms'ox (town). 1 Ree mk rae A
Lat. 69° 56! 3" N. Tg Aug. | 9 15to 9 45 am. |10 54-6 W.

Long. 18° 8' 0" E. » | [1d 30 5,012) Omoonitl 10-9

59 an 199 1.0 ” 1 30 p.m. il 8:4 11 -Dyaave
” 90 a, wc: SIU ahs, 1l 36

1
13 Aug.

9 9

2
jzAug. | 915,10 Oam.|l1 00W.

1871.] made during an Arctic Voyage. 367

INCLINATION.

Hone of Hori- | Verti- Total ere

Elo oe Observed| | Mean: Month. | Day. Observation. ae ee Force. British

Observation. Inclina- | Inclina- Units.
tion. tion.

a 2 aa

10 Oto 10 45 am. | 76 23°4

md, 11 30 ,, | 76 25-2 7

1
76 202 | Tuly | 55 | 12 15 p.m. [1-217 5-091 /5-1550| 11-18
415, 5 Opm.|76 177

D0, 530 , |76 19-4

9 30 to 10 10 am. | 75 40:0

1010,, 11 0 ,, |75 400
6 0,, 6 45pm.|75 403 July = 1 30 pm.

75 40-1 | 1-2611 |4-9361 |5-0946 | 11-05
645, 715 ,, |75 383 ‘| July | 20

Aug. 7 «| «12:80 pm.
915 ,, 10 10 am. | 75 39:5

10 10,, 1040 ,, |75 42-4

9 50 to 10 45 am. | 76 43-1

ms (8 Face “2 | 12 15 p.m. {11885 [5 0247 [5-1628 | 11-20
10 Otoll Oam.!76 46:2

| 76 45:1 = SP | 12 15 pam. |1-1720 /4-9780 [5-141 | 11-09
Il 0O,, 12 O noon! 76 44:0 :

10 Otoll Oam.|76 24-4 ;

76 227) Aug. | zs | 12 15 p.m. |1-2098 /4-9925 |5-1369 | 11-14

Seo, 11 30 ,, 176 211

368 Rev. S. J. Perry on Magnetic [Mar. 9,

of Vibration,”’ by which I made all my observations on the submarine boat
and on armour-plated ships. In this instrument the needle is 3-2 inches
long and 0°17 inch in breadth.

The magnet is suspended on a silk thread and vibrates in a wooden box,
on the side of which there are the divisions in degrees to mark the angles
formed by the turning-needle ; for each observation I counted 700 vibra-
tions. I found that for such a voyage this instrument answers the purpose.

The exact drawing of this instrument you will find in my book on the
«* Submarine Boat,” 1867, Plate VI. Drawings 6 and 8 give half the size
of the instrument, and drawing 7 the full size of the needle.

I know that General Sabine and the Royal Society are much interested
now in the Northern Magnetic Observations, so I hastened to send the
results to you, as I know that they cannot be printed soon in Russian.

I remain, your attached friend,
JoHN BELAVENETZ.

Cronstadt, = November, 1870.

March 9, 1871.
General Sir EDWARD SABINH, K.C.B., President, in the Chair.

The following communications were read :-—

I, “Results of Seven Years’ Observations of the Dip and Hori-
zontal Force at Stonyhurst College Observatory, from April
1863 to March 1870.” By the Rev. S. J. Perry. Communi-
cated by the President. Received January 23, 1871.

(Abstract.)

The object of the present paper is to bring further evidence to bear upon
an important question of terrestrial magnetism.

The existence of a sensible semiannual inequality in the earth’s mag-
netic elements, dependent on the position of the sun in the ecliptic, was
deduced by General Sir Edward Sabine from a discussion in 1863 of a
continuous series of the monthly magnetic observations taken at Kew. A
previous reduction of observations made at Hobarton and at Toronto had
first suggested the idea, and a new confirmation of the results has lately
been obtained by Dr. Balfour Stewart from subjecting a second series of
Kew observations to the same tests as before. The observations, which
form the basis of the present discussion, extend over the period from
March 1863 to February 1870, during which time the same instruments
have been in constant use. These are a Jones unifilar and a dip-cirele by
Barrow, both tested at Kew, and a Frodsham chronometer. Sir Edward
Sabine, who made the Stonyhurst Observatory one of his magnetic stations

1871.] Observations at Stonyhurst College Observatory. 369

in the English survey in 1858, greatly encouraged the undertaking of
monthly magnetic observations, and the Rev. A. Weld procured in conse-
quence the instruments still in use. Only occasional observations were
made with these instruments for some years, and it was only in 1863 that
a continuous series of monthly determinations of the magnetic elements
was started by the Rev. W. Sidgreaves. He observed regularly until Sep-
tember 1868, when I returned to my former post at the Observatory, and
I have continued the same work ever since.

A stone pillar was at first erected for the magnetic instruments in the
open garden, and this remained in use from 1858 until the beginning of
1868, when a most convenient hut of glass and wood was built for the in-
struments in a retired corner of the College garden. This alteration was
rendered necessary from the placing of iron rails in the vicinity of the old
pillar; and although it introduces into the results a correction for change
of station, it has the great advantage of securing immunity from dis-
turbance for the future.

Considering the object in view in drawing up this reduced form of the
dip and horizontal-force observations, I have judged it advisable to adhere
strictly to the tabular forms in which the matter has been presented in
previous discussions of a similar nature. Each element is the subject
matter of these tables. In the first are the monthly values of the element,
the deduced mean value, and its secular variation. Next in order comes
the calculation of the semiannual inequality. The residual errors, and
consequent probable weights of the observations and results, compose the
third and last Table.

The yearly mean values of the horizontal force are found to vary pro-
gressively from 3°5926 to 3°6178 in British units, the mean for Oct. Ist,
1866, being 3°6034, with a secular acceleration of 0:0042. Calculating
from the monthly Tables the mean value of the horizontal force for the six
months from April to September, and for the semiannual period from
October to March, we find the former to be 0°0005 in excess over the
latter, showing that this component of the intensity is greater during the
summer than during the winter months. Treating the dip observations in
a precisely similar way, we obtain 69° 45’ 21” as the mean value of this
element for October Ist, 1866, subject to a secular diminution of 1’ 49'"2;
the extreme yearly means being 69° 48’ 47” and 69° 37'52". The result-
ing excess of 10” for the winter months in the computed semiannual
means is so small, that the observations tend mainly to show that the
effect of the sun’s position is not clearly manifested by any decided varia-
tion in the dip. Deducing the intensity from the above elements, we
obtain for the summer months the value 10°4136, whilst that for the
winter months is 10°4128. The intensity of the earth’s magnetic force
would thus appear to increase with the sun’s distance, but the difference is
not large enough to have more than a negative weight in the question
under discussion. This weight, moreover, is lessened by the slight uncer-

370 Production of Olefines from Paraffin. [ Mar. 9,

tainty arising from the probable disturbing causes at the first magnetic
station.

It is hoped that a second series of observations at the new station will
throw greater light on the fact of the sun’s influence on terrestrial mag-
netism, by either confirming the results obtained above, or by adding fresh
weight to the conclusions arrived at by the President of the Royal
Society.

II. “Preliminary Notice on the Production of the Olefines from
Paraffin by Distillation under Pressure.” By T. EH. Toorpz,
Ph.D., Professor of Chemistry in Anderson’s University, Glasgow,
and Joun Youne. Communicated by Professor Roscoz, F.R.S.
Received February 2, 1871.

When paraffin is exposed to a high temperature in a closed vessel, it
is almost completely resolved, with the evolution of but little gas, into
hydrocarbons which remain liquid at the ordinary temperature.

This reaction will undoubtedly afford the most important insight into
the constitution of this body.

Accordingly we have-repeated this conversion on a large scale, and from
about 33 kilograms of paraffin melting at 44°°5C. (prepared from shale) we
have obtained nearly four litres of liquid hydrocarbons. This mixture of
hydrocarbons commences to boil at about 18° C., but the quantity coming
over below 100° C. is comparatively small; by far the greater portion
boils between 200° and 300°. A preliminary separation shows that the
four litres are made up of hydrocarbons boiling

litres

Between: 200° and 300°)... 32 Sa ee ee ee D7,
500° amd42000s gas DAIS 1 ORE 1:0
Below 1O0Cf 2 7A RLRE OSM. Oa eS 0°3
4:0

Up to the present we have principally occupied ourselves with the investi-
gation of the fraction boiling below 100°, and have obtained conclusive
evidence that it is mainly composed of olefines, the proportion of members
of the C, H,,+2 series being but small. By repeated fractionations over
sodium we obtained perfectly colourless liquids boiling about 35° and 65°,
which were attacked by bromine in the cold with the greatest energy. On
adding the bromine slowly and in minute drops, and carefully cooling the
hydrocarbon by a mixture of snow and salt, scarcely a trace of hydro-
bromic acid was produced. The portion boiling at 36° may be either
amylhydride or amylene, or a mixture of both; the avidity with which
the bromine combines with it shows that the latter body must be present in
considerable quantity. As soon as the drops of bromine permanently

1871.] On the History of the Opium Alkaloids. 371

coloured the liquid, it was submitted to distillation. Only a small portion
came over below 40°; the thermometer rose rapidly to 180°, and nearly
the whole of the bromine-compound distilled at 184° to 188°. This sub-
stance is amylene bromide, C, H,, Br, ; Wurtz gives the boiling-point of this
body at about 150°. The portion therefore boiling at 35° is mainly
amylene.

Exactly similar results were obtained from the portion boiling at 65° to
70°. This, from its boiling-point, may be either C, H,, or C, H,,, or a
mixture of both. Bromine disappears instantly on adding it to the care-
fully cooled liquid, and on distillation by far the greater portion is found
to have combined with the halogen. The bromide thus obtained distils
with slight decomposition about 195°. Pelouze and Cahours found that
hexylene bromide, C, H,, Br,, boiled at 192° to 198°.

We are at present engaged in the further investigation of this subject,
and hope shortly to lay our results before the Royal Society.

III. “Contributions to the History of the Opium Alkaloids. Part
I.—On the Action of Hydrobromic Acid on Codeia.” By
C. R. A. Wricut, D.Sc. Communicated by Professor Roscor
F.R.S. Received February 6, 1871.

It has been shown by the late Dr. A. Matthiessen, in conjunction with
the writer *, that when codeia is heated with a large excess of strong hy-
drochloric acid the following reactions successively take place :—

Codeia. Chlorocodide.
C,, H,, NO,+ HCI=H,0+C,, H,, Cl NO,.

Chlorocodide. Apomorphia.
C,, H,, C1NO,=CH, Cl+C,, H,, NO,.

It appeared of interest to examine the action of hydrobromic acid under
similar circumstances, and for this purpose Messrs. Macfarlane, of Edin-
burgh, with their wonted liberality, put a considerable quantity of pure
codeia at the writer’s disposal.

The aqueous hydrobromic acid employed was obtained by the action of
H1,S on Br in presence of water, and subsequent rectification over pulver-
ized K Br; it was free from SO, H, and other sulphur compounds, had a
sp. gr. of about 1:5, and contained about 48 per cent. of H Br.

When codeia is heated with from three to six fimes its weight of this
acid, either on a water-bath or to gentle ebullition over a flame, the liquid,
which at first produces no precipitate with solution of carbonate of soda,

‘gradually darkens in colour, and acquires the property of yielding a dense
white precipitate with this reagent. No appreciable quantity of methyl

* Proc. Roy. Soc. vols. xvii. p. 460, xviii. p. 83.

372 Dr. C. R. A. Wright on the [Mar. 9,

bromide is evolved during the first stages of this change, but subsequently
this body is produced in some little quantity.

The precipitate thrown down by carbonate of soda before this further
change ensues, appears to consist of a variable mixture of at least three
substances, two of which are readily soluble in ether, while the third is but
sparingly soluble in that menstruum ; all are bases, the one insoluble in
ether, and one of those soluble containing bromine: the one apparently first
formed is produced by a reaction precisely analogous to that whereby chloro-
codide is generated, viz.— |

Codeia. Bromocodide,

C,, H,, NO, +H Br=H, O+C,, H,, Br NO,,

and is therefore termed bromocodide ; this base appears to be acted on
further with great ease, giving rise ultimately to the other two, the first
of which has the constitution of codeia less one equivalent of oxygen, or
C H,, NO., and is therefore provisionally named Deoxycodeia; whilst the
second has the composition of four molecules of codeia coalesced together,
one of the 84H atoms in the product being replaced by Br; itis therefore
provisionally termed Bromotetracodeia, the simplest mode of representing
the simultaneous formation of these two bases being as follows :—

Bromocodide. Codeia. Deoxycodeia. Bromotetracodeia.

C,, H,, Br NO,+4C,, H,, NO,=C,, H,, NO,+C,, H,, Br N, O.,.

Owing to the ease with which bromocodide is altered, it is a matter of
some difficulty to obtain it in even an approximately pure condition, as
the complete separation of deoxycodeia appears impracticable when this
base has once been produced. The product of the action of three parts
48 per cent. acid on one part codeia on the water-bath for from one to two
hours is precipitated by excess of sodium carbonate and the precipitate
collected on filters; unaltered codeia is for the most part separated thus,
being contained in the filtrate. Extraction ofthe mass with ether and
agitation of the ethereal solution with HBr furnishes crude bromocodide
hydrobromate, which may be purified by a repetition of the process, frac-
tional precipitation being resorted to to get rid of traces of colouring-
matters: the purified hydrobromate thus obtained was a viscid colourless
liquid which utterly refused to crystallize, and dried up to a gum-like mass
over SO, H,. Dried at 100°, the powdered gum gave these numbers *:—

0°3500 grm. gave 0°6340 CO, and 0°1580 H, O.
0°230 grm, boiled with NO, H and Ag NO, gave 0°1900 Ag Br.

* All combustions given in this paper were made with lead chromate and finished in °
a stream of dry oxygen.

1871.] History of the Opium Alkaloids. 373

Calculated. Found.

er ea 2 Fes aaa
€,, 216 48°76 49-40
ci a ae a 4:74 501
pee ee” S612 85-08
kes 14 3:16

mms St Es Ng9 7°22

@-e Be NO.HBr ...:.. 443 100-00

The slight excess of carbon and deficiency in bromine thus found are
doubtless due to the presence of a little deoxycodeia, the hydrobromate of
which requires 59°34 per cent. carbon and 21:98 per cent. Br. Another
specimen of bromocodide hydrobromate, prepared as above from the pro-
duct of three hours’ digestion at 100° of one part codeia and three parts
48 per cent. HBr, yielded numbers indicating 51°6 per cent. carbon, 5:3
and 33:4 per cent. Br; whilst a repetition of the purification process
scarcely altered the numbers. Owing to the great difficulty in preparing
the pure salt in quantity, no attempt to isolate and analyze the base itself
was made, the more so that the precipitate thrown down by carbo-
nate of soda from the pure hydrobromate appeared to tally in every respect
with the chlorocodide formerly examined ; their qualitative reactions, too,
are identical.

The crude bromocodide hydrobromate obtained after five or six hours’
digestion of codeia with from three to five times its weight of 48 per cent.
HBr deposited, on standing for some days, crystals not readily soluble in cold
water ; recrystallized several times from boiling water, minute snow-white
crystals were ultimately obtained; these slightly darkened on drying
over SO, H,, and more so at 100° and gave the following numbers on ana-
lysis :—

0'3565 grm. gave 0°7760 CO, and 0°1960 H, O.

0°3245 grm. gave 0°7045 CO, and 0°1790 H, O.

02200 grm. burnt with’ soda-lime gave 0°0570 Pt.

01380 grm. boiled with NO, Hand Ag NO, gave 0°0700 AgBr.

These numbers agree with those calculated for deoxycodeia hydrobro-
mate, as the following comparison shows :—

Calculated. Found.
ae <a OS te FRR BO aN [aa aS TE a a ei SS
Ly eee 216 59°34 29 36) -59°Z1
| 5 pitta 2 Aa a ae 22 6°05 6°11 6°13
1 algae ales a ea ed RO 3°84 Nate ee or Gg
“sa hs al eine sa 32 8°79
Pe re Fede res Cees 80 21°98 Tee ee ear oe ea

i es

C,, H,, NO, HBr 364 100-00

374 Dr. C. R.A. Wright on the [ Mar. 9,

The yield of this base from the codeia used being but small (about 4
per cent.), no attempt was made to isolate the base itself; carbonate of
soda throws down from the hydrobromate solution a white precipitate
which is soluble in alcohol, ether, benzol, and chloroform; by exposure
to air it rapidly becomes coloured, and finally acquires a very dark green
tint. Its qualitative reactions are identical with those of apomorphia; the
colour-reactions of the two with Fe, Cl,, NO, H, and SO, H,+ K, Cr, O,
being indistinguishable when examined side by side. Its physiological
effects, however, are different ; three-tenths of a grain of the hydrobromate
administered by the mouth to a dog producing no appreciable effect, whilst
a much less dose of apomorphia produces speedy vomiting.

The third base is conveniently obtained, as hydrobromate, by treating
codeia with three times its weight of 48 per cent. H Br for two hours on
the water-bath, precipitating the product (diluted with water) by excess
of carbonate of soda, collecting on filters, and well draining from the
mother-liquors, and finally extracting with ether until scarcely anything
more is taken up; care must be taken to have as little watery fluid as pos-
sible present, otherwise the insoluble substance forms a sort of lather, on
agitation from which the ether will not separate. The insoluble substance
is then dissolved in the least possible quantity of weak hydrobromic acid
and fractionally precipitated by cautious addition of stronger acid ; the se-
cond precipitate is dissolved up in water, in which it is readily soluble, and
a few drops of carbonate-of-soda solution added. The filtrate from this
yields, with strong H Br, nearly white flakes, which are wholly void of erys-
talline character under the microscope. These remain solid at 100° if
previously completely dried over SO, H,; but if warmed while moist, be-
come a more or less coloured tar. Dried at 100°, the following numbers

were obtained :—

0:3440 grm. gave 0°6810 CO, and 0°1740 H, O.

0°3425 grm. gave 0°6685 CO and 0°1680 H, O.

0:5615 grm. burnt with soda-lime gave 0°1310 Pt.

0:3200 grm. boiled with NO, H and Ag NO, gave 0°1330 Ag Br.
and 0:0315 Ag.

Calculated. Found.
pore oe = “~ ———
Te ee 864, 54-03..' 83°99! 53-23
Hae eo: 87 544 5°61 545
Mor Peees....) 56 Bi) a in Moostee chi) eos an ess
UGr secre. , 1929 ero .01
Bria 1eue pp eek fay: 400-2502) 00... ii ey er

ooo

C,,H,, BrN,0,,,4HBr 1599 100-00

Carbonate of soda throws down from the hydrobromate a nearly white

1871.] Estory of the Opium Alkaloids. 375

precipitate, which rapidly darkens, and finally turns a deep green, nearly
plack. Dried at 100° rapidly, the product gave the following numbers,
which fall below those required for the formula C,, H,, BrN,O,,, but
which agree with those required for a similar formula but containing
more oxygen :—

0°3810 grm. gave 08460 CO, and 0°2080 H, O,
0°4430 grm. boiled with AgNO, and NO; H gave 0°059 AgBr.

Calculated Found.

fm Sl ne ST ST et ae SP ROE RCE oe ON a OO eC.
a. Sas ene 864 60°89 60°56

E,, MPG Gs. Gol leas om 83 5°85 6°07

ibe eee ae a Ne are ee 80 5°64 BLA 5°67
N, Mec cic, ot. ge bisa Ss 56 3°95

Lo. oC ae aaron era 336 23°67

C... H,. BrN, O0,.+ O, 1419 100:00

It hence appears that the free base rapidly absorbs oxygen. In confir-
mation of this, 0°11 grm. of the hydrobromate treated with caustic potash
and injected by a pipette into 15 cubic centims. of air over mercury ab-
sorbed 0°9 cubic centim. in the course of an hour, or 6 per cent. of the
total volume of the air ; the salts, however, when dry, may be kept without
alteration, and only slowly darken by exposure to air when moist.

This welding together of four molecules is not wholly without parallel
in the history of the opium alkaloids; and their derivatives thus opianic
acid heated * furnishes a body containing four times as much carbon as the
original acid; thus

Al C,, Sh O,=H, 0+-¢,, H,, O,,.

The qualitative reactions of bromotetracodeia appear to be identical with
those of bromo- and chlorocodide. The base itself, when freshly precipi-
pitated, is slightly soluble in water, being thrown down again by addition of
strong brine; in ether and benzol it is almost insoluble, and in alcohol but
sparingly soluble.

When crude bromotetracodeia, got by extraction with ether of the mix-
ture of bases thrown down by carbonate of soda, is dissolved in weak hydro-
chloric acid, and precipitated twice or thrice by excess of stronger acid,
nearly white flakes are ultimately obtained, resembling in all their physical
properties the bromohydrobromate of tetracodeia. These flakes, however,
contain no bromine, the absence of this element being ascertained by the ne-
gative results obtained on examining with chlorine-water and ether the
acidified solutions of the lime-salts got by combustion with quicklime, and
of the sodium-salts got by boiling with NO, H and AgNO,, and fusing
with carbonate of soda the silver-salts thus got. Dried over SO, H, and
finally at 100°, this body gave numbers indicating a base of constitution

* Matthiessen and Wright, Proc. Roy. Soc, vol. xvii. p. 341.

376 On the History of the Opium Alkaloids. [Mar. 9,

analogous to that of bromotetracodeia ; it may therefore be termed chlo-
rotetracodeia. »

Specimen A.—0°3880 grm. gave 0°1970 AgCl.

0:°3645 grm. gave 0°8395 CO, and 0°2120 H, O.
0°3940 grm. burnt with soda-lime gave 0°1080 Pt.

Specimen B.—0°4460 grm. gave 10150 CO, and 0°2560 H, O.
0°2350 grm. gave 0°1250 AgCl.

Found
Calculated. SSS
FF Specimen A. Specimen E.
Cia Sen aA eR aie 864 62:77 62°81 Be ay 62:07
1g pha 01.24 | ARO ot te ae 87 6°32 6:46 6°38
BN ipetricinteie ane ee eele eisteretcts 56 4:07 ays 3°90
Ola trace goles conor 192 13°94
GUS ORNS aaaloce eine Ace L753 A290 12°56 oe: miahare 13:16

—EEE

C,» Hg CIN, O01.) 4HCl 1376-5 100-00

Specimen A had been three times precipitated by HCl in large excess,
while specimen B had only been thrown down twice, and probably retained
a trace of bromotetracodeia.

Specimen A converted into platinum-salt gave the following nuunnbers
after drying at 100°.

0:4215 grm. gave 0:0810 Pt = 19-22 per cent.

The formula C,, H,, CIN, O,,, 4 HCl, 2 PtCl, requires 19-18 per cent.

Like bromotetracodeia, the free base appears to absorb oxygen with
avidity. Dried as rapidly as possible at 100°, the precipitate thrown down
by carbonate of soda gave these numbers :-—

0°3880 grm. gave 0°9190 CO, and 0:2230 H, O.
0°3100 ~ 0°0330 AgCl.

Calculated. Found.
c Eee ae che Pd 6 Tel c ieticte 864 64-74, 64°59
Ee ee i or cael face oy our seca bah hoe 6°22 6°38
Metts yecasenir'i Poss teil er =c>ue 56 4°20
| US Means 4 EY DPN Ho} .
Me eta hte Ge ovatarmnt tiie 39°D 2°66 ties 2 2°64

ee ee ——_—_ ———

C,, H,, CIN, 0,,+0,, 1334-5 100-00

In all its physical and chemical properties chlorotetracodeia closely re-
sembles bromotetracodeia: their qualitative reactions are identical; they
have an intense bitter taste and apparently but slight physiological action,
at any rate in small doses.

My thanks are due to Mr. J. L. Bell, in whose laboratory the above ex-
periments were carried out.

1871.] Dr. A. Giinther’s Description of Ceratodus. 377

March 16, 1871.
General Sr EDWARD SABINE, K.C.B., President, in the Chair.

The following communicatious were read :-—

I. “ Description of Ceratodus, a genus of Ganoid Fishes, recently
discovered in rivers of Queensland, Australia.” By ALsert
Gintuer, M.A., Ph.D., M.D., F.R.S. Received February 7,

1871. 7
(Abstract.)

After some introductory remarks the author proceeds to give a descrip-
tion of the external characters which appear to indicate the existence of two
species, viz. Ceratodus forsteri, with fewer and larger, and Ceratodus
miolepis with smaller and more numerous scales. The microscopical
structure of the scales and teeth is treated of in two separate chapters, the
latter being compared with the fossils from the Triassic and Jurassic forma-
tions, and found to be identical. The resemblance to the dentition of
Protopterus, Psammodus, Dipterus and other fossil genera is pointed out.

The skeleton resembles in its general characters, as well as in numerous
points of detail, so much that of Lepidosiren, that from this part alone the
conclusion must be drawn that these genera belong to the same natural
group of fishes. It is notochordal, all its parts having a cartilaginous
basis, more or less incompletely covered by thin osseous lamellee.

The ossifications of the skull are but few in number, and may be desig-
nated thus :—ethmoid; a pair of frontals separated by a single “ sclero-
parietal’; basal, with a tooth-bearing pterygo-palatine on each side, the
latter bones being suturally united in front; vomer cartilaginous, tooth-
bearing. Mazillary and intermawillary elements are not developed, re-
placed by facial cartilages which are confluent with the suborbital ring, all
these parts being cavernous. Tympanic pedicle cartilaginous, with ossified
lamella (os guadratum) and double condyle. Mandible with an articulary
and dentary lamella. Preoperculum a rudimentary moveable cartilage.
A well-developed operculum and styliform suboperculum. Hyoid arch more
complex than in Lepidosiren, consisting of a pair of ceratohyals, a basi-
and glosso-hyal. Branchial apparatus composed of five arches, of which
the last is rudimentary ; not differing from the Teleosteous type, but car-
tilaginous. In a vertical section of the head the parts of the brain-cavity
and of the acoustic cavity (which is entirely enclosed in the skull) are
explained. A pituitary gland is present.

The notochord forms the base for about 68 sets of apophyses, 27 of
which bear ribs. The various modifications in the different parts of the
column are described in detail; and more especially attention is directed
to the first rib, which is very similar to that of Lepidosiren, where, from
its more intimate connexion with the skull, it was interpreted in various

378 Dr. A. Giinther’s Description of Ceratodus. [ Mar. 16,

ways, for instance by Mr. Parker as the “ large first pharyngo-branchial.”
Arrangement and detachment of dermoneurals as in Lepidosiren.

The scapular arch and pelvis are more developed than, but typically
entirely identical with, those of Lepidosiren.

The paddles are supported by a cartilaginous axial skeleton, that is, by
a longitudinal series of joints, with lateral divergent articulated branches,
each joint having two of these branches. The relations of this singular
structure to the corresponding parts in Lepidosiren and Selachians are
explained ; and there is no doubt that the Ganoids of the Devonian epoch,
with acutely lobate fins, had their paddles supported by a similar internal
skeleton.

Eye without falciform process or choroid gland.

Heart.—TYhe arrangements of the interior of the ventricle and single
atrium, and the external appearance of the bulbus arteriosus, are very
similar to the same parts in Lepidosiren ; but the valvular arrangement of
the bulbus is more “ Ganoid,” though considerably modified. We find at
a short distance from the origin of the bulbus, first, a single, cartilaginous,
papillary valve worked by a special muscle, then a transverse series of four
small short valves (sometimes reduced to papille), then a transverse
series of four oblong raised strips (rudimentary valves), finally a transverse
series of four well-developed ‘‘ Ganoid’’ valves. Four arcus aorte enter
the four gills, without sending off branches, and four vene branchiales
are collected into the aorta descendens.

A description of the principal portions of the circulatory system follows.

The gills are completely developed, four in number, lamellated. The
pseudobranchia does not receive its blood from the heart ; thus an “ oper-
cular gill”’ is absent as well as spiracles.

The Jung is single, but its cavity divided into two symmetrical halves,
each with about thirty cellular compartments; pneumatic duct and glottis
as in Lepidosiren; its dorsal artery is a branch of the 4. celaca; and its
vein enters the atrium separately from the sinus venosus.

The most important points of the structure of the remaining soft organs
are the following:—the intestinal tract is perfectly straight and very
wide, with a complete spiral valve, along the axis of which large glands
are imbedded ; the stomach is indicated only by a shallow double pyloric
fold; there are no pyloric appendages, but a glandular mass appears to
represent the spleen. Not only the liver, but also the paired, lobed
kidneys are provided with a portal system. The two ureters enter by a
single opening a small urinal cloaca situated at, and partly confluent with,
the back of the rectum. Testicles without developed vas deferens, which
appears to be represented by a blind duct, traversing the interior of the
testicle, and receiving the semen from the canaliculi seminiferi. Ovaries
transversely laminate, the laminze being the bearers of the stroma in which
very small ova are developed ; the ova fall into the abdominal cavity, and
are expelled by a pair of wide peritoneal slits behind the vent. But there

1871.] Dr. A. Giinther’s Description of Ceratodus. 379

are also a pair of narrow oviducts, with or without a narrow peritoneal
opening, each confluent with the ureter of its side.

In the concluding chapters it is shown :—

1. That Ceratodus and Lepidosiren (Protopterus) are more nearly allied
to each other than to any third living fish, that they are well-marked
modifications of the same (Dipnoous) type, the latter genus diverging
more towards the Amphibians than the former.

2. That the difference in the arrangement of the valves of the bulbus
arteriosus cannot longer be considered of sufficient importance to distin-
guish the Dipnoi as a subclass from the Ganoidei; but that the Dipnor
may be retained as a suborder of Ganovdei.

3. That the suborder Dipnoi may be characterized as Ganoids with the
nostrils within the mouth, with paddles supported by an axial skeleton,
with lungs and gills and notochordal skeleton, and without branchio-
stegals.

‘4. That a comparison of Teleostei, Chondropterygii, and Ganoidei shows
that the two latter divisions, hitherto regarded as subclasses, are much
more nearly allied to each other than to the Teleostei, which were deve-
loped in much more recent epochs; and therefore that they should be
united into one subclass—Paleichthyes—characterized thus: heart with
a contractile bulbus arteriosus ; intestine with a spiral valve; optic nerves
non-decussating.

5. That there is very strong evidence that the suborder Dipnoi was re-
presented in the Devonian and Carboniferous epochs by the genus Dipterus
(2=Ctenodus) ; but that, although Dipterus has internal nostrils and even
a pair of vomerine teeth (beside the molars) like the living Dipnoz, it must
be placed as the type of a separate family of this suborder, on account of
its heterocercy.

6. That the evidence with regard of Phaneropleuron (Huxley) is less
conclusive ; and that Tristichopterus (Egerton), with the complete segmen-
tation of its vertebral column, must be excluded from this suborder.

7. That the suborder Crossopterygii (Huxley) contains two distinct types
of “lobate fin,’ viz. the ‘‘obtusely lobate,’’ with a transverse series of
carpal cartilages, and the ‘‘ acutely lobate’’ with an axial skeleton. Only
the latter type agrees with the structure of the Dipnoous limb. But
Polypterus, Coelacanthus, &c., which are provided with fins of the former
type, are genera sufficiently distinguished also by other characters, to be
placed into a separate suborder.

380 On some of the Subaxial Arches in Man. [ Mar. 16,

II. “On the formation of some of the Subaxial Arches in Man.’
By Grorcre W. Catienver, Assistant Surgeon to, and Lec-
turer on Anatomy at St. Bartholomew’s Hospital. Communi-

cated by J. Pacer, F.R.S. Received February 17, 1871.
(Abstract.)

In the term subaxial arches is included all those which grow out in front
of the notochord. The first forms the nasal passages, the second forms
chiefly the superior maxilla, the third is the mandibular, the fourth the
lingual, the fifth the hyoid, the sixth the laryngeal, whilst the seventh,
which is distinguished as the exoccipital arch, forms the shoulder-girdle
and the thoracic extremity of either side.

The consideration of the connexion of the first four with the cranial
cartilages is for the present deferred; and this communication relates to
those arches which grow into the cervical region, and to that period of
their growth which lies between the fifth and twelfth weeks of fcetal life.

The fourth subaxial arch, the lingual, grows out below the mandibular,
and bears upon its anterior extremity the tissue which developes into the
tongue. Its connexion with this anterior portion ceases to be recognized
at an early period, and about the eleventh week it consists of five portions,
(1) cartilage from the base of the skull, (2) a short piece of membrane,
(3) a second very small rod of cartilage, these forming about one-half of
its length, (4) a long strip of membrane, and (5) a nodule of cartilage
within the lesser or anterior horn of the hyoid bone.

The fifth subaxial arch, the hyoid, grows in common with the sixth as a
layer of membrane from the basioccipital region. The posterior portion
of it forms the middle constrictor muscle; the remainder is cartilaginous,
and grows into the greater or posterior horn and the body of the hyoid
bone.

The sixth subaxial arch, the laryngeal, begins in membrane which forms
the inferior constrictor. Rising up and thickening in the front of the
neck, it encloses the pharynx; and its inner layer developes a septum, which
separates this tube from the larynx. In front, and between this inner
layer and that in which the constrictor is formed, a mass of thick granular
tissue becomes cartilage, and here the chief cartilages of the larynx are
formed. The details of their formation are referred to.

The thyroid body is developed in this arch, and it serves as a girdle to
surround and keep in place the continuation of the air-tube towards the
thorax. Its relation to the branchial arches is also referred to.

After mentioning the reason for calling the seventh arch the exoccipital,
its growth from the basioccipital and exoccipital cartilage regions is de-
scribed, with its ending in two processes which grow out as the clavicle
and the scapula. The relations of the clavicle to the sternum and first rib
are related, as also its change in direction from a nearly vertical to a hori-

1871.] On the Successive Polarization of Light. 881

zontal position. The curling round of the scapula-rod is described, and
the outgrowth from the rod of plates of bone bounded by the acromial,
glenoid, and coracoid borders. The relations of the sterno-mastoid, trape-
zius, and levator anguli scapule muscles are referred to. The growth of the
glenoid cavity outwards from the acromion and coracoid is noticed at about
the eleventh week, at which period the cape. has acquired its chief per-
manent characters.

March 23, 1871.
General Sir EDWARD SABINE, K.C.B., President, in the Chair.

The following communications were read :—

I. “Experiments on the Successive Polarization of Light, with the
description of a new Polarizing Apparatus.” By Sir Cuartes
Wuearstone, F.R.S. Received Feb. 2, 1871.

The term successive polarization was applied by Biot to denote the
effects produced when a ray of polarized light is transmitted through a
plate of rock--crystal cut perpendicularly to the axis, or through limited
depths of certain liquids. In these cases the plane of polarization is found
to be changed on emergence, and differently for each homogeneous ray ; so
that, when white light is employed, on turning the peers round con-
tinuously in one direction different colours successively appear, rising or
falling in the scale according to the nature of the substance.

If, while the analyzer is turned from left to right, the tints ascend
(z..e. follow the order R, O, Y, G, B, P, V), the substance is said to ex-
hibit right-handed successive polarization, but if the tints descend, the
successive polarization is said to be left-handed.

These phenomena were satisfactorily explained by Fresnel in the following
way. The incident polarized ray, instead of resolving itself into two plane-
polarized rays at right angles to each other, as in the ordinary cases of di-
polarization, resolves itself in these instances into two circularly polarized
rays, one right-handed the other left-handed, which are transmitted with
different velocities ; each homogeneous ray, thus resolved into two opposite
circularly polarized pencils, on emergence composes a ray polarized in a
single plane, the deviation of which from the primitive plane of polariza-
tion depends on the difference of phase of the two circularly polarized
rays on emergence.

The rotation of the planes of polarization is from left to right, or from
right to left, according to whether the right-handed or efehanded circular
rays are transmitted vith the greater velocity.

EL:
The term dipolarization, proposed by Dr. Whewell to express the
VOL. XIX. 26

382 Sir C. Wheatstone on the [ Mar. 23,

bifurcation which a ray of polarized light suffers when it is transmitted
through a crystallized plate, is a very appropriate one; but as there are
different kinds of such separation, we may designate plane dipolarization
the resolution into two plane-polarized rays at right angles to each other,
and circular dipolarization the resolution into two circularly polarized
rays, one right-handed, the other left-handed. In like manner the term
elliptic dipolarization may be employed to represent the phenomena
shown by transmitting a polarized ray through a plate of rock-erystal
obliquely to the axis. )

The object of the present communication is to make known another
means of producing successive polarization, both right-handed and left-
handed, which, equally with the well-known modes, may be proved to
arise from the interference of two opposite systems of circularly polarized
rays.

ETB,

The polarizing-apparatus which I have employed for the experiments
I am about to detail is represented by Pl. IV.

A plate of black glass, G, is fixed at an angle of 3° to the horizon. The
film to be examined is to be placed on a diaphragm, D, so that the light
reflected at the polarizing-angle from the glass plate shall pass through it
at right angles, and, after reflection at an angle of 18° from the surface of a
polished silver plate S, shall proceed vertically upwards. WN is a Nicol’s
prism, or any other analyzer, placed in the path of the second reflection.
The diaphragm is furnished with a ring, moveable in its own plane, by
which the crystallized plate to be examined may be placed in any azimuth.
C is a small moveable stand, by means of which the film to be examined
may be placed in any azimuth and at any inclination; for the usual expe-
riments this is removed.

If a lamina of quartz cut parallel to the axis, and sufficiently thin to
show the colours of polarized light, be placed upon the diaphragm so that
its principal section (7. e. the section containing the axis) shall be 45° to
the /eft of the plane of reflection, on turning the analyzer from left to
right, instead of the alternation of two complementary colours at each
quadrant, which appear in the ordinary polarizing apparatus, the phe-
nomena of successive polarization, exactly similar to those exhibited in the
ordinary apparatus by a plate of quartz cut perpendicular to the axis,
will be exhibited ; the colours follow in the order R, O, Y, G, B, P, V,
or, in other words, ascend as in the case of a right-handed plate of
quartz cut perpendicularly to the axis. If the lamina be now either in-
verted, or turned in its own plane 90°, so that the principal section shall
be 45° to the right of the plane of reflection, the succession of the colours
will be reversed, while the analyzer moves in the same direction as before,
presenting the same phenomena as a left-handed plate of quartz cut per-
pendicularly to the axis. Quartz is a positive doubly refracting erystal ;
and in it consequently the ordinary index of refraction is smaller than the

W.H- Wesley lith W. West & C° imp.

1871.) | Successive Polarization of Light. 383

extraordinary index. But if we take a lamina of a negative crystal, in
which the extraordinary index is the least, as a film of Iceland spar split
parallel to one of its natural cleavages, the phenomena are the reverse of
those exhibited by quartz: when the principal section is on the left of the
plane of reflection the colours descend, and when it is on the right of the
same plane the colours ascend, the analyzer being turned from left to
right. |

It has been determined that the ordinary ray, both in positive and
negative crystals, is polarized in the principal section, while the extra-
ordinary ray is polarized in the section perpendicular thereto. It is also
established that the index of refraction is inversely as the velocity of
transmission. It follows from the above experimental results, therefore,
that when the resolved ray whose plane of polarization is to the left of the
plane of reflection is the quickest the successive polarization is right-
handed, and when it is the slowest the successive polarization is left-
handed—in the order R, O, Y, G, B, P, V, and in the second case in the
reversed order.

The rule thus determined is equally applicable to laminz of biaxal
crystals.

As selenite (sulphate of lime) is an easily procurable crystal, and readily
cleavable into thin laminze capable of showing the colours of polarized
light, it is most frequently employed in experiments on chromatic polar-
ization. The laminz into which this substance most readily splits,
contain in their planes the two optic axes; polarized light transmitted
through such laminz is resolved in two rectangular directions, which
respectively bisect the angles formed by the two optic axes: the line which
bisects the smallest angle is called the intermediate section ; and the line
perpendicular thereto which bisects the supplementary angle is called the
supplementary section. These definitions being premised, if a film of sele-
nite is placed on the diaphragm with its intermediate section to the left of
the plane of reflection, the successive polarization is direct or right-handed ;
if, on the contrary, it is placed to the right of that plane, the successive
polarization is left-handed. The ray polarized in the intermediate section
is therefore the most retarded; and as that section is considered to be
equivalent to a single optic axis, the crystal is positive.

In one kind of mica the optic axes are in a plane perpendicular to the
laminz. They are inclined 223° on each side the perpendicular within
the crystal, but, owing to the refraction, are seen respectively at an angle
of 35°°3 therefrom. The principal section is that which contains the two
optic axes. If the film is placed on the diaphragm with its principal
section inclined 45° to the left of the plane of reflection, the successive
polarization is right-handed. The ray, therefore, polarized in the section
which contains the optic axes is the one transmitted with the greatest
velocity.

Films of uniaxal crystals, whether positive or negative, and of biaxal

2G2

384: . Sir C. Wheatstone on the -[ Mar. 23,

crystals, all agree therefore in this respect :—that if the plane of polarization
of the quickest ray is to the left of the plane of reflection, the successive
polarization is right-handed when the analyzer moves from left to right;
and if it is to the right of the plane of reflection, other cireumstances
remaining the same, the successive polarization is left-handed.

It must be taken into consideration that the principal section of the
film is inverted in the reflected image ;_ so that if the plane of polarization of
the quickest ray in the film is to the left of the plane of reflection, it is to
the right of that plane in the reflected image.

IV.

It may not be uninteresting to state a few obvious consequences of this
successive polarization in doubly refracting lamine, right-handed and
left-handed according to the position of the plane of polarization of the
quickest ray. They are very striking as experimental results, and will
serve to impress the facts more vividly on the memory.

1. A film of uniform thickness being placed on the diaphragm with its
principal section 45° on either side the plane of reflection, when the
analyzer is at 0° or 90° the colour of the film remains unchanged, whether
the film be turned in its own plane 90°, or be turned over so that the back
shall become the front surface; but if the analyzer be fixed at 45°, 135°,
225°, or 315°, complementary colours will appear when the film is in-
verted from back to front, or rotated in its own plane either way 90°.

2. Ifa uniform film be cut across and the divided portions be again
placed together, after inverting one of them, a compound film (fig. 4) is
formed, which, when placed on the diaphragm, exhibits simultaneously both
right-handed and left-handed successive polarization. When the analyzer
is at 0° or 90° the colour of the entire film is uniform; as it 1s turned
round the tints of one portion ascend, while those of the other descend ;
and when the analyzer is at 45° or n90°+ 45°, they exhibit complementary
colours.

3. A film increasing in thickness from one edge to the other is well
suited to exhibit at one glance the phenomena due to films of various
thicknesses. It is well known that such a film placed between a polarizer
and an analyzer will show, when the two planes are parallel or perpen=
dicular to each other, and the principal section of the film is mtermediate
to these two planes, a series of parallel coloured bands, the order of the
colours in each band from the thick towards the thm edge being that of
their refrangibilities, or R, O, Y, G, B, P, V. The bands seen when the
planes are perpendicular are intermediate in position to those.seen when
the planes are parallel; on turning round the analyzer these two systems
of bands alternately appear at each quadrant, while 1 in oe intermediate
positions they entirely disappear.

Now let us attend to the appearances of these bands: hen the wedge-
form film is placed on the diaphragm of the instrument, fig. 1. . As the

ya a lade Successive Polarization of Light. 385.

analyzer is moved round, the bands advance toward or recede from the
thin edge of the wedge without any changes occurring in the colours or in-
tensity of the light, the same tint occupying the same place at every half
revolution of the analyzer. If the bands advance toward the thin edge of:
the wedge, the successive polarization of each point is left-handed ; and if
they recede from it the succession of colours is right-handed ; every cir-
cumstance, therefore, that with respect to a uniform film changes right-
handed into left-handed successive polarization, in a wedge of the same
substance transforms receding into advancing bands, and vice versd.
These phenomena are also beautifully shown by concave or convex films of
selenite or rock-crystal, which exhibit concentric rings contracting or
expanding in accordance with the conditions previously explained.

4. Few experiments in physical optics are so beautiful and striking as
the elegant pictures formed by cementing laminz of selenite of different.
thicknesses (varying from 5,);5 to +; of an inch) between two plates of
glass. Invisible under ordinary circumstances, they exhibit, when exa-
mined in the usual polarizing-apparatus, the most brilliant colours, which
are complementary to each other in the two rectangular positions of the
analyzer. Regarded in the instrument, fig. 1, the appearances are still
more beautiful; for, instead of a single transition, each colour in the.
picture is successively replaced by every other colour. In preparing such
pictures it is necessary to pay attention to the direction of the principal
section of each lamina when different pieces of the same thickness are
to be combined together to form a surface having the same uniform tint ;
otherwise in the intermediate transitions the colours will be irregularly
disposed. :

5. A plate of rock-crystal eut perpendicular to the axis loses its suc-
cessive polarization, and behaves exactly as an ordinary crystallized film
through which rectilinear polarized light is transmitted.

6. A thick plate of unannealed glass undergoes a series of ‘regular
transformations, the principal phases of which are shown, fig. 5.

VY.
- The phenomena of successive or rotatory polarization I have experi-
mentally demonstrated admit of a very simple explanation.

The polarized light incident on the crystallized plate is resolved into two
portions of equal intensity, polarized at right angles to each other, one in
the principal section, the other perpendicular thereto. These resolved
portions, when they fall on the silver plate, have their planes of polariza-
tion each at an azimuth of 45°, one to the right, the other to the left of
the plane of reflection. These are again resolved in the plane of reflection
and the plane perpendicular thereto, and are, in consequence of the unequal
retardation, which in silver at an angle of 72° amounts to a quarter of an
undulation, converted into cirenlanly polarized beams, one right-handed,’
the other left-handed.

386 _ Sir C. Wheatstone on the {Mar. 23,

The various homogeneous rays being accelerated differently in their
transmission through the two sections of the crystallized plate, this dif-
ference is preserved after reflection from the silver plate, and the oppositely
circularly polarized beams are reflected with the same difference of phase
as the two plane-polarized rays are when emerging from the crystallized
lamina. The composition of two circular waves, one right-handed, the
other left-handed, gives for resultant a plane wave the azimuth of which
varies with the difference of phase of the two components.

When the plane of polarization does not he equally between the two
rectangular sections of the lamine, these still remaining 45° from the plane
of reflection of the silver plate, the beam is resolved into two unequal
portions, the amplitudes of which are as sin a to cos a. Each therefore
gives rise to a circular undulation of different amplitude. The resultant of
two opposite circular undulations of different amplitudes is an ellipse of
constant form, the axes of which vary in position according to the difference
of phase. The same phenomena of successive polarization are therefore
exhibited, in whatever azimuth the lamina is turned in its own plane; but
the tints become fainter and fainter until ultimately, when the principal or
perpendicular section is parallel to the plane of reflection of the polarizing
plate, all colour disappears.

VI.

By means of the phenomena of successive polarization it is easy to
determine which is the thicker of two films of the same crystalline substance.
Place one of the films on the diaphragm (a) of the instrument (fig. 1a) in
the position to show, say, right-handed polarization, then cross it with the
other film; if the former be the thicker, the successive polarization will be
still right-handed ; if both be equal there will be no polarization ; and if
the crossed film be the thicker, the successive polarization will be left-
handed. In this manner a series of films may be readily arranged in their
proper order in the scale of tints.

VII.

In the experiments I have previously described the planes of re-
flection of the polarizing mirror and of the silver plate were coincident ;
some of the results obtained when the azimuth of the plane of reflection of
the silver plate is changed are interesting.

I will confine my attention here to what takes place when the plane of
reflection of the silver plate is 45° from that of the polarizing reflector.

When the principal sections of the film are parallel and perpendicular
to the plane of reflection of the polarizing mirror, as the whole of the
polarized light passes through one of the sections, no interference can
take place, and no colour will be seen, whatever be the position of the

analyzer.
When the principal sections of the film are parallel and perpendicular

i i in

1871.} Successive Polarization of Light. 387

to the plane of reflection of the silver plate, they are 45° from the plane of
reflection of the polarizing mirror.

The polarized ray is then resolved into two components polarized at right
angles to each other; one component is polarized in the plane of reflec-
tion of the silver plate, the other perpendicular thereto; and one is re-
tarded upon the other by a quarter of an undulation.

When the analyzer is at 0° or 90° no colours are seen, because there is
no interference; but when it is placed at 45° or 135°, interference
takes place, and the same colour is seen as if light circularly polarized
had been passed through the film. The bisected and inverted film (fig. 4)
shows stmultaneously the two complementary colours.

But when the film is placed with one of its principal sections 223° from
the plane of refléction of the polarizing mirror, on turning round the ana-
lyzer the appearances of successive polarization are reproduced exactly as
when the planes of reflection of the silver plate and of the polarizing mirror
coincide. In this case the components of the light oppositely polarized in
the two sections are unequal, being as cos 223° to sin 223°; these com-
ponents respectively fall 223° from the plane of reflection of the silver
plate and from the perpendicular plane, and are each resolved in the same
proportion in these two planes. The weak component of the first, and the
strong component of the second, are resolved into the normal plane, while
the strong component of the first and the weak component of the second
are resolved into the perpendicular plane.

VIII.

As bearing intimately on the subject of this paper, I will here quote
a passage from a memoir presented by Fresnel to the French Academy of
Sciences in 1817, and published, in abstract, in the ‘ Annales de Chimie,’
t. xxvil. 1825 :—

“Tf a thin crystallized plate be placed between two parallelopipeds of
glass crossed at right angles, in each of which the light previously po-
larized undergoes two total reflections at the incidence of 543°, first
before its entrance into the plate (which we suppose perpendicular to the
rays), and subsequently after its emergence, and if, besides, the plate be
turned so that its axis makes an angle of 45° with the two planes of double
reflection, this system will present the optical properties of plates of rock-
crystal perpendicular to the axis, and of liquids which colour polarized
light. When the principal section of the rhomboid with which the emer-
gent lght is analyzed is turned round, the two images will gradually
change colour, instead of experiencing only simple variations in the vivid-
ness of their tints, as occurs in the ordinary case of thin crystallized
plates ; besides, the nature of these colours depends only on the respective
inclination of the primitive plane of polarization and the principal section
of the rhomboid—that is to say, of the two extreme planes of polarization ;
thus, when this angle remains constant, the system of the crystallized

388, On the Successive Polarization of Light. [Mar. 23,

plate. and the two parallelopipeds may be turned round the transmitted
pencil without changing the colour of the images. It is this analogy be-
tween the optical properties of this little apparatus and those of plates of
rock-crystal perpendicular to the axis which enabled M. Fresnel to foresee
the peculiar characters - double refraction that rock- er exerts on
rays parallel to the axis.’

It does not appear that Fresnel, in any of his published 1 memoirs, has
given any further modifications of this experiment, the importance of
which has been almost entirely overlooked in elementary treatises on light.
He does not seem to have remarked that similar phenomena of successive
polarization are exhibited when the light incident on the crystallized plate
is plane-polarized, nor that the order of the succession of the colours
depends on the position of the principal section with respect to the plane
of polarization. These circumstances are indeed necessarily included in
the beautiful theory established by this eminent philosopher; but I am
not aware that they have hitherto been specifically deduced or experi-

mentally shown.
IX.

The apparatus (fig. 1) affords also the means of obtaining large surfaces
of uncoloured or coloured light in eVery state of nolan —rectilinear,
elliptical, or circular.

It is for this purpose much more convenient than a Fresnel’s rhomb,
with which but a very small field.of view can be obtained. It must, how-
ever, be borne in mind that the circular and elliptical undulations are
inverted in the two methods: in the former case they undergo only a
single, in the latter case a double reflection.

For the experiments which follow, the crystallized plate must be placed
on the diaphragm E between the silver plate and the analyzer, instead of,
as in the preceding experiments, between the polarizer and the silver
plate.

By means of a moving ring within the graduated circle D the silver plate
is caused to turn round the reflected ray, so that, while the plane of pola-
rization of the ray remains always in the plane of reflection of the glass
plate, it may assume every azimuthal position with respect to the plane of
reflection of the silver plate. The film to be examined and the analyzer
move consentaneously with the silver plate, while the polarizing mirror
remains fixed.

In the normal position of the instrument the ray polarized by the
mirror is reflected unaltered by the silver plate; but when the ring is
“turned to 45°, 135°, 225°, or 315°, the plane of polarization of the ray
falls 45° on one side of the plane of reflection of the silver plate, and the
ray is resolved into two others, polarized respectively in the plane of reflec-
tion and the perpendicular plane, one of which is retarded on the other by a
quarter of an undulation, and consequently gives rise to a circular ray,
which is right-handed or left-handed according to whether the ring is turned

1871.] Ona Decennial Variation of Temperature at the Cape. 389.

45° and 225° or 135° and 315°. When the ring is turned so as to place:
the plane of polarization in any intermediate position between those pro-
ducing rectilinear and circular light, elliptical light is obtained, on account
of the unequal resolution of the ray into its two rectangular components.
Turning the ring of the graduated diaphragm from left to right when
the crystallized film is between the silver plate and the analyzer, occasions
the same succession of colours for the same angular rotation as rotating
the analyzer from right to left when the instrument is in its normal posi-
tion and the film is between the polarizer and the silver plate.

- Toarrange the apparatus for the ordinary experiments of plane-polarized:
light without the intervention of the silver plate, all that is necessary is to:
remove the silver plate from the frame F, and to substitute for it a plate
of black glass, which must be fixed at the proper polarizing-angle.

To convert it into a Norrenberg’s polarizer, a silvered mirror must be laid:
horizontal at H, and the instrument straightened, as shown at fig. 3, so;
that a line perpendicular to the mirror shall correspond with the line of
sight. The silver plate must be removed from the frame I’, and a plate of
transparent glass substituted for it, which must be so inclined that the
light falling upon it shall be reflected at the polarizing-angle perpendicu-:
larly toward the horizontal mirror. The eye will receive the polarized:
ray reflected from the mirror; and the polarized ray will have passed,’
before it reaches the eye, twice through a crystallized plate placed between
the mirror and the polarizer. The result is the same asif, in the ordinary
apparatus, the polarized ray had passed through a plate of double the
thickness.

Fig. 2 shows the addition to the apparatus when the coloured rings of
crystals are to be examined by light circularly or elliptically polarized :
ais the optical tube containing the lenses (which require no particular
explanation), and 6 the condenser, over which the plate is to be placed. .

II. “On an approximately Decennial Variation of the Temperature
at the Observatory at the Cape of Good Hope between the years
1841 and 1870, viewed in connexion with the Variation of the
Solar Spots.” By HE. J. Stone, F.R.S., Astronomer Royal
at the Cape of Good Hope. In a Letter to the President. Re-
ceived February 21, 1871. :

Royal Observatory, Cape of Good Hope, Jan. 17,1871. _

Dear Si1r,—I enclose a curve of the variation of the annual mean tem-
perature at the Cape deduced from observations extending from 1841 to
1870 inclusive. I have carefully examined the zero-points of all the ther:

390 Mr. E. J. Stone on a Decennial [Mar. 238,

mometers which have been employed in this series of observations. I
have then deduced the rate of change of these thermometers, from a com-
parison of the index-errors thus found and those given originally or ob-
tained in 1852 by Sir Thomas Maclear, when he compared the principal
thermometers at the Observatory with the readings of a standard “ Reg-
nault’’ which had been sent out to the Observatory for that purpose by
you. These indications of change have been carefully checked by all the
comparisons made, at different times and for different purposes, of these
thermometers inter se and with others which still remain at the Observa-
tory. From the agreement of the different results thus checked, I have
no doubt upon my own mind of the systematic character and sensible
amount of the increase of readings of thermometers with age thus indi-
cated. In some cases the change appears to amount to as much as
0°:05 F. per annum. From these results I have deduced the index-errors
of the different thermometers for the different periods, and applied these
corrections throughout. I have also corrected the mean results of the five
observations made daily since 1847 in order to deduce the true daily mean.

The results thus reduced on a general system, and extending over thirty
years, appeared likely to afford information respecting any connexion which
might exist between the mean temperature and the frequency of solar
‘spots. I have therefore constructed the curves of variation of mean annual
temperature, and the inverse curve of solar-spot frequency for comparison.
The latter curve has been founded upon Wolf’s observations.

The observations of temperature from 1841 to 1851 inclusive were made
in the original Meteorological Observatory, which was burnt down in
1852, March 11.

The observations from 1852, April 24, to 1858, August 31, were made in
a wooden shed erected for the purpose on the site of the old Observatory.

The observations from 1858, August 3lst, to the present time have
been made in the crib before the south-west window of the Transit-Circle
Room. — |

These changes are so far unfortunate that there is clearly a change of
mean temperature arising from the different circumstances of exposure.
I have therefore referred each set of observations to the mean temperature
deduced from all the observations made under the same circumstances of
exposure. The deviations of the mean temperature for each year from the
mean of the whole period of similar exposure are then laid down as ordi-
nates on the scale of one division of the ruled paper to 0°05 F. To
smooth down the irregularities, I have joined the points thus laid down, and
bisected the lines thus joming these points whenever the corresponding
mean temperatures were deduced from a full year’s observations. In other
cases the temperatures corresponding to the deficient months have been
supplied from the adjoining years, and the resulting mean temperature
allowed less weight. The inverse curve of the frequency of solar spots
has been formed by simply subtracting 100 from Wolf’s numbers, and

1871.| Variation of Temperature at the Cape. 391

laying down points to the scale of a number 4 to 0°05 F., or one division
of the ruled paper.

The broken curve represents the variations in the mean annual temperature at the
Cape; the continuous line is the inverse curve of solar spots’ frequency.

The agreement between the curves appears to me so close that I cannot
but believe that the same cause which leads to an excess of mean annual
temperature leads equally to a dissipation of solar spots. There is on the
whole a curious appearance of lagging of the inverse curve of solar spots
over that of temperature. At the maximum about 1856, however, this
does not appear to be the case; but when the uncertainties of the data,

392 MM. Wolf and Fritz on Sun-spots. = [Mar. 23,

both of the solar spots near the minimum, and of the mean temperature
also, are taken into account, such discrepancies might. perhaps fairly be
expected, even if there be a physical connexion between the two pheno-
mena as results of some common cause. If there be a sensible inequality
in the mean temperature with a period of about ten years, then the mean
temperature resulting from the observations in the temporary Observatory,
which were made near a maximum, will be too high. The corresponding
ordinates, therefore, will be depressed too much relatively to those corre-
sponding to observations made in the other two observatories. In the
curve 2, I have imperfectly corrected the mean of the results for the tem-
porary observatory on the supposition of such an inequality existing. The
only result of such a correction is to modify the curve at the points of
junction of the observations made in different positions. The general form
is unaltered. It should be mentioned that the point about which the
curves appear to differ most is near or at the change of exposure from the
original observatory to the tempcrary shed, about 1852.

I may mention that I had not the slightest expectation, on first laying
down the curves, of any sensible agreement resulting, but that I now con-
sider the agreement too close to be a matter of chance. I should, however,
rather lean to the opinion that the connexion between the variation of
-mean temperature and the appearance of solar spots is indirect rather than
direct, that each results from some general change of solar-energy.

I have forwarded these curves to you, knowing the great interest you
have ever taken in such inquiries, and on account of your being the chief
promoter of the establishment of a Meteorological Observatory here. The
problems of meteorology appear to be presented here in a simpler form
than in England ; and probably systematic photographic self-registering
observations extended over a few years might lead to important results.

I have the honour to be, Sir,
Yours obediently,

E. J. Stone.
Sir Edward Sabine, K.C.B., P.R.S., §e.

ILI. Résumé of two payers on Sun-spots:—~ On the Form of the
~ Sun-spot Curve,” by Prof. Woxr; and “On the Connexion

* . -of Sun-spots with Planetary Gentoratan™ by M. Fritz. By
B. Lozewy. Communicated by Warren De La Roz, F.RS.,
and B, Stewart, F.R.S. ;

Of these two series of investigations, one is by Professor Wolf, the other
by M. Fritz, communicated to Wolf.

In the first, Prof. Wolf has proposed to himself to find the mean cha-
tacter of the curve of sun-spots, z.e. its real form from one minimum to
another. He investigates the form only for 24 years before, and 23 years

1871.] Mr. F. Galton’s Experiments in Pangenesis. 393

after each minimum, and concludes by a simple proportion of the re
mainder. He finds that the curve ascends more rapidly than it descends—
the ascent taking in the mean 3°7 years, the descent lasting 7-4 years.
We have established these data far more reliably in our last paper; and
our curve gives 3-52 years for the ascent, 7°54 years for the descent (average
of the three periods). Professor Wolf also thinks that although a single
period may differ essentially in its character and form from the mean, ‘still;
on the whole, if the descent is retarded, the ascent in the same period is
also retarded ; if the former is accelerated, the latter is also accelerated.
This is not quite borne out by our curve. He also overlooks the se-
condary maximum, which may lead to great conclusions if more investi+
gated together with other matters.

M. Fritz comes to the following conclusions. :—

1. The connexion between sun-spots and auroral and magnetic distort!
ances indicates an external cause, to be sought in planetary configurations.

. The relative influence of the planets must be exerted in the following
6 :—Jupiter (greatest), Venus, Mercury, Earth, Saturn.

3. This influence cannot entirely depend on the time of rotation ; but
changes in the magnetic axes of these planets may have the most deter-
mining effect. ,

4. Investigating the comparative influences of them singly and together
(as far as possible), at the times of conjunction and quadrature, he finds
the greatest coincidence of maxima of sun-spots with the time when Jupiter
and Saturn are in quadrature ; and the greatest coincidence of minima
when these planets are in conjunction.

5. There is also (a minor) coincidence of maxima when Jupiter and
Venus are in quadrature. ;

There is also an extension of the paper for finding the connexions with
auroras, and a statement that every 27°7 days there seems to be a monthly
maximum, which may probably be explained (according to Fritz) by the
tendency of a particular solar meridian to spot-formations, depending upon
the presence of an intra- Mercurial planet.

March 30, 1871.

: General Sir EDWARD SABINH, K.C.B., President, in the Jie

The following communications were read :—
I. “ Experiments in Pangenesis, by Breeding from Rabbits of a pure
variety, into whose circulation blood taken from other varieties

had previously been largely transfused.” By Francis GaLrony
F.R.S. Received March 23, 1871. :

Darwin’s provisional theory of Pangenesis claims our belief on the ground
that it is the only theory which explains, by a single law, the numerous

$94 Mr. F. Galton’s Experiments in Pangenesis. [Mar. 30,

phenomena allied to simple reproduction, such as reversion, growth, and
repair of injuries. On the other hand, its postulates are hypothetical and
large, so that few naturalists seem willing to grant them. To myself, as
a student of Heredity, it seemed of pressing importance that these postu-
lates should be tested. If their truth could be established, the influence
of Pangenesis on the study of heredity would be immense; if otherwise
the negative conclusion would still be a positive gain.

It is necessary that I should briefly recapitulate the cardinal points of
Mr. Darwin’s theory. They are (1) that each of the myriad cells in every
living body is, to a great extent, an independent organism; (2) that before
it is developed, and in all stages of its development, it throws ‘“‘ gemmules”
into the circulation, which live there and breed, each truly to its kind, by
the process of self-division, and that, consequently, they swarm in the
blood, in large numbers of each variety, and circulate freely with it ;
(3) that the sexual elements consist of organized groups of these gem-
mules; (4) that the development of certain of the gemmules in the offspring
depends on their consecutive union, through their natural affinities, each at-
taching itself to its predecessor in a regular order of growth ; (5) that gem-
mules of innumerable varieties may be transmitted for an enormous number
of generations without being developed into cells, but always ready to be-
come so, as shown by the almost insuperable tendency to feral reversion,
in domesticated animals.

It follows from this, and from the general tenor of Mr. Darwin’s rea-
soning and illustrations, that two animals, to outward appearance of the
same pure variety, one of which has mongrel ancestry and the other has not,
differ solely in the constitution of their blood, so far as concerns those points
on which outward appearance depends. The one has none but gemmules
of the pure variety circulating in his veins, and will breed true to his kind ;
the other, although only the pure variety of skin-gemmules happens to have
been developed in his own skin, has abundance of mongrel gemmules in his
blood, and will be apt to breed mongrels. It also follows from this that
the main stream of heredity must flow in a far smaller volume from the
developed parental cells, of which there is only one of each variety, than
from the free gemmules circulating with the blood, of which there is a large
number of each variety. If a parental developed cell bred faster than a free
gemmule, an influx of new immigrants would gradually supplant the indi-
genous gemmules; under which supposition, a rabbit which, at the age of
six months, produced young which reverted to ancestral peculiarities,
would, when five years old, breed truly to his individual peculiarities ; but
of this there is no evidence whatever. |

Under Mr. Darwin’s theory, the gemmules in each individual must
therefore be looked upon as entozoa of his blood, and, so far as the pro-
blems of heredity are concerned, the body need be looked upon as little
more than a case which encloses them, built up through the development
of some of their number. Its influence upon them can be only such as

1871.] Mr. F. Galton’s Experiments in Pangenesis. 395

would account for the very minute effects of use or disuse of parts, and of
acquired mental habits being transmitted hereditarily.

It occurred to me, when considering these theories, that the truth of
Pangenesis admitted of a direct and certain test. I knew that the opera-
tion of transfusion of blood had been frequently practised with success on
men as well as animals, and that it was not a cruel operation—that not only
had it been used in midwifery practice, but that large quantities of saline
water had been injected into the veins of patients suffering under cholera.
I therefore determined to inject alien blood into the circulation of pure
varieties of animals (of course, under the influence of anesthetics), and to
breed from them, and to note whether their offspring did or did not show
signs of mongrelism. If Pangenesis were true, according to the inter-
pretation which I have put upon it, the results would be startling in their
novelty, and of no small practical use; for it would become possible to
modify varieties of animals, by introducing slight dashes of new blood, in
ways important to breeders. Thus, supposing a small infusion of bull-dog
blood was wanted in a breed of greyhounds, this, or any more complicated
admixture, might be effected (possibly by operating through the umbilical
cord of a newly born animal) in a single generation.

I have now made experiments of transfusion and cross circulation on
a large scale in rabbits, and have arrived at definite results, negativing, in
my opinion, beyond all doubt, the truth of the doctrine of Pangenesis.

The course of my experiments was as follows :—Towards the end of
1869, I wrote to Dr. Sclater, the Secretary of the Zoological Society, ex-
plaining what I proposed to do, and asking if I might be allowed to
keep my rabbits in some unused part of the Gardens, because I had no ac-
commodation for them in my own house, and I was also anxious to obtain
the skilled advice of Mr. Bartlett, the Superintendent of the Gardens, as
to their breed and the value of my results. I further asked to be permitted
to avail myself of the services of their then Prosector, Dr. Murie, to make
the operations, whose skill and long experience in minute dissection is well
known. I have warmly to thank Dr. Sclater for the large assistance he has
rendered to me, in granting all I asked, to the full, and more than to the full ;
and I have especially to express my obligations to the laborious and kind aid
given to me by Dr. Murie, at real inconvenience to himself, for he had little
leisure to spare. The whole of the operations of transfusion into the jugular
vein were performed by him, with the help of Mr. Oscar Fraser, then Assist-
ant Prosector, and now appointed Osteologist to the Museum at Calcutta, I
doing no more than preparing the blood derived from the supply-animal,
performing the actual injection, and taking notes. The final series of opera-
tions, consisting of cross-circulation between the carotid arteries of two
varieties of rabbits, took place after Dr. Murie had ceased to be Prosector.
They were performed by Mr. Oscar Fraser in a most skilful manner, though
he and I were still further indebted, on more than one occasion, to Dr.
Murie’s advice and assistance. My part in this series was limited to in-

396 Mr. F. Galton’s Experiments in Pangenesis. [Mar. 80,

‘serting and tying the canulz, to making the cross-connexions, to recording
the quality of the pulse through the exposed arteries, and making the other
Necessary notes.

The breed of rabbits which I endeavoured to mongrelize was the “‘ Silver-
grey.” I did so by infusing blood into their circulation, which I had pre-
viously drawn from other sorts of rabbits, such as I could, from time to
time, most readily procure. I need hardly describe Silver-grey rabbits
with minuteness. They are peculiar in appearance, owing to the intimate
mixture of black and grey hairs with which they are covered. They are
never blotched, except in the one peculiar way I shall shortly describe ; and
they have never lop ears. ‘They are born quite black, and their hair begins
to turn grey when a few weeks old. The variations to which the breed is
liable, and which might at first be thought due to mongrelism, are white
tips to the nose and feet, and also a thin white streak down the forehead.
But these variations lead to no uncertainty, especially as the white streak
lessens or disappears, and the white tips become less marked, as the animal
grows up. Another variation is much more peculiar: it is the tendency
of some breeds to throw ‘‘ Himalayas,” or white rabbits with black tips.
From first to last I have not been troubled with white Himalayas; but in
one of the two breeds which I have used, and which I keep carefully sepa-
rated from each other, there is a tendency to throw “ sandy”? Himalayas.
One of these was born a few days after I received the animals, before any
operation had been made upon them,.and put me on my guard. A similar
one has been born since an operation. Bearing these few well-marked ex-
ceptions in mind, the Silver-grey rabbit is excellently adapted for breeding-
experiments. If it is crossed with other rabbits, the offspring betray mon-
grelism in the highest degree, because any blotch of white or of colour,
which is not ‘‘ Himalayan,” is almost certainly due to mongrelism; and so
also is any decided change in the shape of the ears.

I shall speak in this memoir of litters connected with twenty silver-
grey rabbits, of which twelve are does and eight are bucks; and eighteen of
them have been submitted to one or two of three sorts of operations.
These consisted of :—

(1) Moderate transfusion of partially defibrinized blood. The silver-
grey was bled as much as he could easily bear ; that was to about an ounce,
a quantity which bears the same proportion to theweight of his body (say
76 oz.) that 2 lbs. bears to the weight of the body of a man (say 154 lbs.) ;
and the same amount of partially defibrinized blood, taken from a killed
animal of another variety, was thrown in in its place. The blood was ob-
tained from a yellow, common grey, or black and white rabbit, killed
by dividing the throat, and received in a warmed basin, where it was stirred
with a split stick to remove part of the fibrine. Then it was filtered
through linen into a measuring-glass, and thence drawn up with a syringe,
graduated into drachms; and the quantity injected was noted.

-. (2) The second set of operations consisted in a large transfusion of wholly

1871.] Mr. F. Galton’s Ewperiments in Pangenesis. 397

defibrinized blood, which I procured by whipping it up thoroughly with a
whisk of rice-straw ; and, in order to procure sufficient blood, I had on one
occasion to kill three rabbits. I alternately bled the silver-grey and in-
jected, until in some cases a total of more than 3 ounces had been taken
out and the same quantity, wholly defibrinized, had been thrownin. This
proportion corresponds to more than 6 lbs. of blood in the case of a man.

(3) The third operation consisted in establishing a system of cross-cir-
culation between the carotid artery of a silver-grey and that of a common
rabbit. It was effected on the same principle as that described by
Addison and Morgan (Essay on Operation of Poisonous Agents upon the
Living Body. Longman & Co., 1829), but with more delicate apparatus
and for a much longer period. The rabbits were placed breast to breast,
in each other’s arms, so that their throats could be brought close together.
A carotid of each was then exposed; the circulation in each vessel was
temporarily stopped, above and below, by spring holders; the vessels were
divided, and short canule, whose bores were larger than the bore of the
artery in its normal state, were pressed into the mechanically distended
mouths of the arteries; the canule were connected cross-wise ; the four
spring holders were released, and the carotid of either animal poured its
blood direct into the other. The operation was complicated, owing to the
- number of instruments employed; but I suspended them from strings run-
ning over notched bars, with buttons as counterpoises, and so avoided en-
tanglement. These operations were exceedingly successful; the pulse
bounded through the canule with full force ; and though, in most cases,
it began to fall off after ten minutes or so, and I was obliged to replace the
holders, disconnect the canulee, extract the clot from inside them with a
miniature corkscrew, reconnect the canulee, and reestablish the cross-flow
two, three, or more times in the course of a single operation, yet on two
occasions the flow was uninterrupted from beginning to end. The buck
rabbit, which I indicate by the letter O, was 373 minutes in the most free
cross-circulation imaginable with his ‘‘ blood-mate,” a large yellow rabbit.
There is no mistaking the quality of the circulation m a bared artery ; for,
when the flow is perfectly free, the pulse throbs and bounds between the
finger and thumb with a rush, of which the pulse at the human wrist, felt
in the ordinary way, gives an imperfect conception.

These, then, are the three sorts of operations which I have performed on
the rabbits; it is convenient that I should distinguish them by letters.
I will therefore call the operation of simply bleeding once, and then
injecting, by the letter u; that of repeated bleedings and repeated injec-
tions by the letter w; and that of cross-circulation by the letter z.

In none of these operations did I use any chemical means to determine
the degree to which the blood was changed; for I did not venture to com-
promise my chances of success by so severe a measure; but I adopted the
following method of calculation instead :—

VOL, XIX. 2u

398 Mr. F. Galton’s Experiments in Pangenesis. [Mar. 80,

I calculate the change of blood effected by transfusion, or by cross-cir-
culation, upon moderate suppositions as to the three following matters :—

(1) The quantity of blood in a rabbit of known weight.

(2) The time which elapses before each unit of incoming blood is well
mixed up with that already in the animal’s body.

(3) The time occupied by the flow, through either carotid, of a volume of
blood equal to the whole contents of the circulation.

As regards 1, the quantity of blood im an animal’s body does not ad-
mit, by any known method, of being accurately determined. Iam content
to take the modern rough estimate, that it amounts to one-tenth of its total
weight. If any should consider this too little, and prefer the largest
estimate, viz. that in Valentin’s ‘ Repertorium,’ vol. 11. (1838), p. 281, where
it is given for a rabbit as one part in every 6-2 of the entire weight, he will
find the part of my argument which is based on transfusion to be weakened,
but not overthrown, while that which relies on cross-circulation is not
sensibly affected.

As regards 2, the actual conditions are exceedingly complex; but we
may evade their difficulty by adopting a limiting value. It is clear that
when only a brief interval elapses before each unit of newly infused blood
is mixed with that already in circulation, the quality of the blood which, at
the moment. of infusion into one of the cut ends of the artery or vein, is
flowing out of the other, will be more alienized than if the interval were
longer. It follows that the blood of the two animals will intermix more
slowly when the interval is brief than when it is long. Now I propose to
adopt an extreme supposition, and to consider them to mix instantaneously.
The results I shall thereby obtain will necessarily be less favourable to
change than the reality, and will protect me from the charge of exaggera-
ting the completeness of intermixture.

As regards 3, I estimate the flow of blood through either carotid to be
such that the volume which passes through it in ten minutes equals the
whole volume of blood in the body. Thisisa liberal estimate ; but I could
afford to make it twice or even thrice as liberal, without prejudice to my
conclusions.

Upon the foregoing data the following Table has been constructed. The
formule are:—Let the blood in the Silver-grey be called a, and let its
volume be V, and let the quantity u of alien blood be thrown in at each
injection, then the quantity of blood a ea in the Silver-grey’s circu-
lation, after n injections,

u\n

If the successive injections be numerous and small, so as to be equivalent

to a continuous flow, then, after w of alien blood has passed in, the for-
Ww

mula becomes V.e V.

1871.] Mr. F. Galton’s Experiments in Pangenesis. 399

A comparison of the numerical results from these two formule shows
that no sensible difference is made if (within practicable limits) few and large,
or many and small, injections are made, the total quantity injected being
the same.

Tn cross-circulation the general formula is this :—If V! be the volume
of blood in the other rabbit, after w of alien blood has passed through
either canula, the quantity of blood a remaining in the Silver-grey exceeds *

HY oe 2w
TW fvsvie (vty) |. This becomes 31 L+e V } when V=V';

also, when V’ is infinite, it gives the formula already mentioned for injec-
tion by a continuous flow of purely alien blood.

Tasue I.

(Contents of circulation of Silver-grey Rabbit= 100.)

Maximum percentage of original blood remaining Pood nee
3

aiter :
Z ; nutes, during

which the

continuous

Quantity

of Cross-circulation.

Continu-

blood { Successive injections | ous flow ‘ g
infused. fof purely ation blood, |of purely} Rabbits ee pee
each= Sad ae roe than the has lasted.
Ca Soe: * |Silver-grey.
25 80 23.
50 68 5
75 60 Tk
100 55 10
125 52 123
150 51 15
175 50 174
300 48 30
400 48 40
infinite infinite 10) 48 infinite.

I now give a list (Table II.) of the rabbits to which, or to whose blood.
mates, I shall have to refer. Every necessary particular will be found in
the Table :—the weight of the rabbits; the estimated weight of blood in
their veins; the operations performed on them, whether uw, w, or x; the
particulars of those several operations ; the estimated percentage of alien
blood that was substituted for their natural blood ; and lastly, the colour,
size, and breed of their blood-mates.

* T am indebted to Mr. George Darwin for this formula.

Or ree

400 Mr. F. Galton’s Experiments in Pangenesis. [Mar, 30,

TABLE II.

Hsti- |Nature! Drachms in-

mated | of | fused, and pe- Bolee ws) SG aiaan &e. of

: Weight
Silvery eroy f ; ; of alienized
Does. rabbit, |Weight off opera- riod of cross- | 4) 05 a blood-mate.

blood. | tion*.! circulation.

Ibs. oz. |drachms.

A RG 79 a 9 11 a grey
and white.
: U 10 12 Yellow, large.
10 min. -
B 513 8 x fect, 15 or 20 50, or Common prey.
more y
very good. ;
C 238 78 u 9:5 12 Albino, large.
D bo 75 u 5 Himalaya.
u Common grey.
S = ve x { u = good, \ 50, about|Common grey.
F 4 13 61 x 10 mes and white,
arge.
‘i 25:5, in 6 in- \ 35 Grey and black,
G 411 60 jections. speckled.
x Jl neces } 75 Common gre
: total. Brey:
15 min. per-
H ai ; fect, 15 very 50 Common grey.
good.
16 min. per-
It x fect, not much| | nearly 50 were
more.
Yellow, brown
JT xz {35 min. perfect. mouth (? Hima-
laya).
too unsuccess-|
a Angora, fawn
s v ful to be worth | ? any. { nd Sete
| counting. J
| dt INones| Ger cere None. | |." 7 eee
| Bucks. 9 14 | f{ Yellow, brown
| K ee 62 mouth.
w Lees nee 32 Yellow and white.
| De total.
| L 4 13 61 U 11 Common grey.
u 14 Black and white.
M 4 0 51 24:5, Laitieel| 45 3 black and white
a tions, total. in succession.
Angora, grey and
N AG 58 ry 7 a { white, red eyes.
16:5, in4injec-
O (son of i tions, total. | a lors
C (w) by x |374 min. perfect. 50 Yellow.
an)) 25 to 30 min. ~
t | per foot. \ 0) Common grey.
ee 15 min. per-
Qt Li bai 2 eds fects 15 very 50 Yellow and white.
OB im min. n. pretty Common grey
{ good. } a { and white.

* Note (to 4th column).—w means simple transfusion, by one copious bleeding, and
then injecting ; w means compound transfusion by successive bleedings and sucesssive
injections; #2 means cross-circulation.

+ These rabbits belong to a breed liable to throw “Sandy” Himalayas.

1871.] Mr. F. Galton’s Haperiments in Pangenesis 40}

TABLE III.

Litters subsequent to first transfusion. Both parents Silver-greys. Ave-
-Yage proportion of alienized blood in either parent=}; therefore in
young 4 also.

Out of By Number and character of litters.
A K 4 true Silver-greys.
A M 5 ditto, but 1 had a white foot to above knee.
B K 5 true Silver-greys.
C K 6 ditto.
D K 4 ditto.
E L 6 ditto.

30 all true Silver-greys, except possibly one |
instance. |

Litters subsequent to second transfusion of buck. Both parents Silver-
greys. Average proportion of alienized blood in young about 3.

Out of | By Number and character of litters.

ae M | 6 true Silver-sreys.

Litters subsequent to cross-circulation of buck only, the does being 0 or w.
Both parents Silver-greys. Average proportion of blood in young
between 7 and i.

Out of | By Number and character of litters. |
S O 5 true Silver-greys.
C O 5 ditto.
E O 3 ditto.

| 13 alli Silver-greys.

Litters subsequent to cross-circulation of both parents (Silver-greys).
Average proportion of alienized blood in young fully 3.

37 36 Silver-greys, 1 Himalaya.

* These rabbits belong to a breed liable to throw ‘“‘ Sandy ” Himalayas.

402 Mr. F. Galton’s Experiments in Pangenesis. [Mar. 30,

Litters subsequent to cross-circulation of beth parents (common rabbits).
Average proportion of alienized blood in young a little less than 3.

Out of By
blood-mate| blood-mate Number and character of litters.

to to
AD) R 8 none Silver-grey, all like father or mother.
E Q* 5 ditto. :
G O 9 ditto.
I* Q* 8 ditto.
J* Q* 8 ditto.

38 none Silver-greys.

In another list (Table III.) I give particulars of all the litters I have
obtained from these rabbits, classified according to the operations which
the parents had previously undergone.

I will now summarize the results. In the first instance I obtained five
does (A, B, C, D, and E) and three bucks (K, L, and M) which had un-
dergone the operation which I call u, and which had in consequence about
4 of their blood alienized. I bred from these +, partly to see if I had
produced any effect by the little I had done, and chiefly to obtain a stock
of young rabbits which would be born with 3% of alien gemmules in
their veins, and which, when operated upon themselves, would produce
descendants having nearly 7 alienized blood (the exact proportion is
1—(1—4%)*?=4#). I obtained thirty young ones in six litters; and they
were all true silver-greys, except, possibly, in one instance (out of the doe
A (uw) by the buck M (z)), where one, of a litter of five, had a white fore leg,
the white extending to above the knee-joimt. This white leg gave me great
hopes that Pangenesis would turn out to be true, though it might easily be
accounted for by other causes; for my stock were sickly (both those on
which I had not operated and those on which I had suffering severely
from a skin disease), and it was natural under those circumstances of ill
health that more white than usual should appear in the young.

Having, then, had experience in transfusion, and feeling myself capable
of managing a more complicated operation without confusion, I began the
series which I call w. I left my old lot of does untouched, but obtained
one new doe (G(w)), which had undergone the last operation, and three
bucks (K (u, w), M (u,w), N (uw, w)) which had undergone both operations,
uandw. On endeavouring to breed from them, the result was unexpected,
they appeared to have become sterile. The bucks were as eager as pos-
sible for the does ; but the latter proving indifferent, I was unable to testify
to their union having taken place; so I left them in pairs, in the same
hutch, for periods of three days at a time. Attempts were made in this

* These rabbits belong to a breed liable to throw “ Sandy” Himalayas.
+ I always allowed the bucks to run for awhile with waste does before commencing
the breeding-experiments, that all old reproductive material might be got rid of.

1871.] Mr. F. Galton’s Experiments in Pangenesis. 403

way, to breed from them in seven instances; and five of them were utter
failures. One case was quite successful ; and that, fortunately, was of the
same pair (A (w) and M (wu, w)) which, under the uw operation, had bred
the white-footed young one. ‘This time, the offspring (six in number)
were pure silver-greys. The last case was unfortunate. The doe (E(u))
had been once sterile to its partner (N (u, w)), and she had been put again
in the same hutch with him for a short period, but was thought not to
have taken him. She was shortly afterwards submitted to the operation zx.
From this she had nearly recovered when she brought forth an aborted
litter and died. I was absent from town at the time; but Mr. Fraser, who
examined them, wrote to say he fully believed that some were pied; if so,
it must have been under the influence of the cross-circulation. But I have
little faith in the appearance of the skin of naked, immature rabbits ; for I
have noticed that difference of transparency, and the colour of underlying
tissues, give fallacious indications.

My results thus far came to this, viz. that by injecting defibrinized blood
I had produced no other effect than temporary sterility. If the sterility
were due to this cause alone, my results admitted of being interpreted in a
sense favourable to Pangenesis, because I had deprived the rabbits of a
large part of that very component of the blood on which the restoration of
tissues depends, and therefore of that part in which, according to Pan-
genesis, the reproductive elements might be expected to reside. I had
injected alien corpuscles but not alien gemmules. The possible success of
the white foot, in my first litters, was not contradicted by the absence of
any thing of the sort in my second set, because the additional blood I had
thrown in was completely defibrinized. It was essential to the solution of
the problem, that blood in its natural state should be injected; and I
thought the most convenient way of doing so was by establishing cross-
circulation between the carotids. If the results were affirmative to the
truth of Pangenesis, then my first experiments would not be thrown away ;
for (supposing them to be confirmed by larger experience) they would
prove that the reproductive elements lay in the fibrine. But if cross-
circulation gave a negative reply, it would be clear that the white foot was
an accident of no importance to the theory of Pangenesis, and that the
sterility need not be ascribed to the loss of hereditary gemmules, but to
abnormal health, due to defibrinization and perhaps to other causes also.

My operations of cross-circulation (which I call 2) put me in possession
of three excellent silver-grey bucks, four excellent silver-grey does, and
one doe whose operation was not successful enough for me to care to count
it. One of my « does (B) had already undergone the operation uw, and I
had another of my old lot (C (u)), which I left untouched. There were
also three common rabbits, bucks, which were blood-mates to silver-greys,
and four common rabbits, does, also blood-mates of silver-greys. From
this large stock I have bred eighty-eight rabbits in thirteen litters, and
in no single case has there been any evidence of alteration of breed. There

404: Mr. F. Galton’s Experiments in Pangenesis. [Mar. 30,

has been one instance of a sandy Himalaya; but the owner of this breed
assures me they are liable to throw them, and, as a matter of fact, as I
have already stated, one of the does he sent me, did litter and throw one
a few days after she reached me. The conclusion from this large series
of experiments is not to be avoided, that the doctrine of Pangenesis, pure
and simple, as I have interpreted it, is incorrect.

Let us consider what were the alternatives before us. It seems @ prior:
that, if the reproductive elements do not depend on the body and blood
together, they must reside either in the solid structure of the gland,
whence they are set free by an ordinary process of growth, the blood
merely affording nutriment to that growth, or else that they reside in the
blood itself. My experiments show that they are not independent resi-
dents in the blood, in the way that Pangenesis asserts; but they prove
nothing against the possibility of their being temporary inhabitants of it,
given off by existing cells, either in a fully developed state or else in one
so rudimentary that we could only ascertain their existence by inference.
In this latter case, the transfused gemmules would have perished, just lke
the blood-corpuscles, long before the period had elapsed when the animals
had recovered from the operations.

I trust that those who may verify my results will turn their attention
to the latter possibility, and will try to get the male rabbits to couple im-
mediately, and on successive days, after they have been operated on. This
might be accomplished if there were does at hand ready to take them ;
because it often happens that when the rabbits are released from the
operating-table, they are little, if at all, dashed in their spirits; they play,
sniff about, are ready to fight, and, I have no doubt, to couple. Whether
after their wounds had begun to inflame, they would still take to the does,
I cannot say ; but they sometimes remain so brisk, that it is probable that
in those cases they would do so. If this experiment succeeded, it would
partly confirm the very doubtful case of the pied young of the doe which
died after an operation of cross-circulation (which, however, further im-
plies that though the ovum was detached, it was still possible for the
mother gemmules to influence it), and it would prove that the reproduc-
tive elements were drawn from the blood, but that they had only a tran-
sient existence in it, and were continually renewed by fresh arrivals
derived from the framework of the body. It would be exceedingly instruc-
tive, supposing the experiment to give affirmative results, to notice the
gradually waning powers of producing mongrel offspring.

APPENDIX I.

It is important that I should give details of the operations of cross-
circulation. I may mention that, having to deal with many rabbits, I
distinguished them permanently by tattoomg bold Roman numerals in the
inside of their ears.

1871.] Mr. F. Galton’s Experiments in Pangenesis. 405

I. Experiments of cross-circulation on one buck and two does, pure silver-
greys, of a breed obtained from Mr. E. Royds, of Greenhill, Rochdale, the
same breed as that on which all my u and w experiments had been made.
~ Oct. 19, 1870.—Silver-grey buck, O, out of doe A (u) by M (wu), and
therefore own brother to the white-footed young oe small rabbit, just
six months old. His blood-mate was a

Yellow buck, lop-eared, white throat, probably one-
fifth heavier than the silver-grey. I avoided unnecessary weighing, because
it frightens the animals, and tends to interfere with the final success. At
12" 30™ I made cross-circulation ; flow was perfect; 12> 35™, continued
perfect ; 12° 40™, perfect, but yellow to silver-grey perhaps the stronger ;
12" 44™, ditto; 12" 50™, perfect both ways; 12" 55™, ditto; 1°, ditto;
1" 5™, ditto; 12 74™, ditto. I then stopped and tied up. I tested the
flow with a small and delicate but very simple pulse-meter on all these
occasions, not liking to interfere overmuch with my fingers. I, however,
used them at the commencement, at 12" 50™, and at 12 5™.

Oct. 20, 1870.—Silver-grey doe, B (u), a fine large animal; her blood-
mate was a- Common large grey lop-eared doe, about one-tenth
heavier than the silver-grey.

1", cross-circulation established, apparently perfect ; I mean the throb-
bing of the canula and artery were obvious ; 1" 6™, felt and found the flow
quite good; 1" 12™, common to silver-grey quite good, vice versd poor ;
1" 15™, ditto; I disconnected and cleaned and removed clots and recon-
nected. This I repeated several times; there was still much trouble in
maintaining a proper flow from silver to common grey, but common to
silver was always good. The operation continued till 1" 40™; then I dis-
connected ; and as the silver-grey had received too much, I let her bleed
to 4 drachms.

Oct. 27, 1870.—Silver-grey doe, H, moderate size; her blood-mate
was a Common large grey doe, certainly more than a tenth
heavier than the silver-grey. ‘There was some trouble with her, as the
carotid was abnormal, and three offshoots from it had to be tied before the
canula could be inserted.

12” 48™, cross-circulation established, perfect pulse, but silver to common
the fullest ; 12" 53”, perfect; 1°, silver to common perfect, vice versd
rather poor; 1" 2™, ditto; 1°7™, common to silver stopped; I disconnected
and cleaned and reconnected, and by 1° 12™ had reestablished perfect cross-
circulation; at 1" 30™ I had stopped silver to common and made common
to silver better; got five minutes good flow, then repeated cleanings and
got three minutes more. My estimate at the close of the operation was
that the silver-grey gave blood freely for thirty- five minutes, and received
it freely for about the same time.

II. Experiments of cross-circulation on two bucks and two does of a silver-
grey breed, reputed pure, and looking well-bred animals, but liable to

406 Mr. F. Galton’s Experiments in Pangenesis. [Mar. 80,

show russet marks. They were procured of Mr. Vipan, of March, Cam-
bridgeshire, and are of the same breed as those on which Mr. Bartlett
made his well-known experiments about the production of Himalayas
(Proc. Zool. Soc. 1861). They are liable to throw “Sandy Himalayas,”
as I found myself, as Mr. Bartlett also found, and as Mr. Vipan informs
me is the case. I distinguish this breed by asterisks (*).

Oct.6, 1870.—NSilver-grey buck, P*, moderate size; his blood-mate was a

Common grey buck, with some russet on his back and
white on his belly ; he was the larger of the two animals.

12" 50”, cross-circulation established, perfect ; 12° 55™, ditto, but silver
to common, I think, a trifle the stronger; 12" 59”, ditto; 12 5™, common
to silver very faint. I stopped them and cleaned out twice and succes-
sively ; 1215”, good, but common to silver was the least good; 1" 25™, dis-
connected. My estimate was that there had been an equivalent to fully
twenty-five minutes, and perhaps thirty minutes, of capital flow both ways.

Oct. 7, 1870.—Silver-grey buck, Q*, moderate size; his blood-mate
was a Yellow buck, white belly, large.

11" 40", cross-circulation established; 11" 45”, quite good; 11” 50",
good but not perfect; 11° 55™ good; 12” both stopped. Then I made
several disconnexions and cleanings, and obtained short periods of success ;
at 12" 35™ I finally stopped. My estimate was thirty minutes’ good run-
ning: the silver-grey received more than his share; there was a slip in
the operation, and five drachms of blood were lost between the rabbits; so
I did not care to let the silver-grey bleed more.

Oct. 6, 1870.—Silver-grey doe, 1*, moderate size; her blood-mate was a

Common grey doe, large.

3> 40", cross-circulation was established ; 3" 44”, excellent; 3° 50™, ex-
cellent; 3° 55”, excellent ; shortly after, something was twisted or other-
wise went wrong, and both stopped. I had a good deal of trouble and
but little further success. 'Ten drachms of blood was lost between the
rabbits (partly by leakage of the canulez).

Oct. 7, 1871.—Silver-grey doe, J*, moderate size; her blood-mate was a

Yellow doe, dark about mouth, and also of moderate
size. I afterwards became convinced she was simply a sandy Himalaya.

At 2° 5™ established cross-circulation ; 2" 13”, quite good; 2” 20", ex-
cellent ; 25 25™, excellent ; 2" 30™, ditto; 2°35”, ditto; 2" 40", ditto, then
disconnected. An accident occurred at the end, by which the silver-grey
lost four drachms of blood.

APPENDIX II.

Description of the method of performing the operations.

It is essential to a fair chance of success that the operator should have
a large and thriving stock of full-grown rabbits. They cannot be pro-
cured at will in the market ; and young ones are so timid and tender that

1871.] Mr. F. Galton’s Haperiments in Pangenesis. 407

they are not fit to be operated on. The next essential point is an operating-
table, with ample and proper apparatus for holding the rabbits easily but
rigidly. It is most improper to subject a helpless animal to an operation
without taking every precaution for its success, so as to minimize the ne-
cessity for operating. ‘The chief hindrances to success are, entanglement
of instruments, or the breaking loose of blood-vessels, both owing to an un-
expected start ; also an animal will struggle violently, and become terrified
if he is loosely held, hoping to get away, whilst if he is firmly secured he
lies as though magnetized, without signs of fear or discomfort, and with
his pulse and breathing perfectly normal. I regret extremely that, although
I took pains to inquire, I did not at first hear of Czermak’s recently devised
apparatus for holding the head. I began by the old plan of putting the
animals in a bag and holding them, which was very unsatisfactory. Then
I devised a plan of my own, which was good, but inferior to Czermak’s,
and I therefore abstain from describing it. The latter, with recent modi-
fications, can now be obtained at Mr. Hawkesley’s, 4 Blenheim Street,
Bond Street, London, to whom, I should say, I have been greatly indebted
for the care and thought he gave to successive and very numerous modi-
fications of my instruments (far more numerous than I care to describe).
A drawing of Czermak’s apparatus will be found in the ‘Berichte der
K. Sachs. Geselischaft der Wissenschaften zu Leipzig,’ 1867, p. 212.

For injections, I used a five-drachm ebonite syringe, whose stem was
boldly graduated to drachms. The canula (to be inserted into the vein) was
screwed into a light stopcock. ‘This was
filled with water, which, so long as the cock )
was closed, did not run out for want of a Sa oo y
vent-hole. When it was thrust in the vein ec eS
and the vein was tied round it,I held the [—_—\_— ie :
syringe full of blood near the open end of the Garrett
stopcock, drove out all air by allowing a few
drops of blood to fall into its mouth, then
pushed its nozzle firmly in, opened the cock
and began to inject, steadily and slowly, at
the rate of about one drachm in twenty
seconds. When the syringe was emptied,
I turned the stopcock, withdrew it, rapidly
filled it, emptied it and again filled it with warm water, and returning te
the canula with the same precautions as before, I threw in about 7 drachm,
to wash the blood out of the canula and adjacent vein. I do not think
I lost more than three (or perhaps four) rabbits by injecting air, although
the removals and replacements of the syringe were very numerous, often
ten times in a single operation of the w kind.

My apparatus consisted of a zinc warm-water bath, represented on the left
of the diagram (p. 408) ; the vessels drawn to the right of it fitted into holes’
in its lid, as indicated by the letters. A is the basin to catch the supply blood ;

408 Mr. F. Galton’s Experiments in Pangenesis. [Mar. 80,

it was whipped up by the whisk F; then poured into C, which consists of a
short funnel with muslin below, resting in the top of a glass measure ;
when the blood had strained through, the funnel and muslin were set on
the top of D, to get them out of the way and, at the same time, to keep
them warm for future use; B is the thermometer; E is a spill-case full of
water to contain the syringe. In addition to these, I required a large slop-
pail, a jug of hot, and another of cold water.

ony
\\ >

ity a tet eas
(Ox he |

The sketch shows my latest outfit of basins and warm water for inject-
ing. It was not perfected until I had nearly finished the experiments.
Scrupulous cleanliness is requisite, and great orderliness; for the hazard
lies, not in the performance of one difficult operation, but in making a
mistake in some one of a great many easy operations. The course of an
operation was as follows:—(1) secure the animal, (2) remove fur from
neck, (3) anzesthetics, (4) expose jugular, (5) cut a slit in it and let
the animal bleed as much as he can easily bear, about six drachms,
(6) stop the flow with gentle pressure by spring forceps; the animal
was then left fora minute while (7) Dr. Murie and Mr. Fraser divided the
throat of the supply-rabbit, I catching the blood in a warmed basin and
whipping it up, to defibrinize it, as it fell. I continued doing this while Dr.
Murie was (8) inserting the canula; and when he was nearly ready he
called to me, and I (9) filtered the blood, noting its amount, as a guide tu
what I had to dispose of, (10) drew up a syringe full, (11) injected a con-
venient number of drachms or half drachms, indicated by the graduations
on the syringe-handle, (12) returned the overplus to the glass of supply-
blood, (13) cleansed syringe and injected water, (14) let the rabbit bleed
three or four drachms,—and then recommenced the series. I have not re-
inserted in this description before (11) and (13) what I previously described
about turning the stopcock &c.; nor have I spoken of the continual jotting
down of notes in my case-book.

1871.] Mr. F. Galton’s Experiments in Pangenesis. 409

At the end of all, the vein was tied. It was, no doubt, the surest plan
to avoid future hemorrhage, especially as the blood was defibrinized ;
but the rabbits were apt to suffer from phlebitis, and I lost some thereby.

Owing to the extreme rapidity and stiffness of the coagulation of
rabbit’s blood, it is quite easy to estimate the quantity that may have
been spilt on the operating-table. It has simply to be sponged into a
measuring-glass,

Cross-circulation would be a very easy operation in animals whose
carotids were even a trifle larger than those of silver-grey rabbits; but it
is difficult with these, because the smallest canula which can be used with
propriety can only just be forced into the largest of them. It is no use
operating with small canulee ; m every case, a layer of fibrine is sure to
line the tube; if the bore is small this layer chokes it, while a layer of
equal thickness in a larger tube leaves a free central passage. I found
canule ;'; inch in diameter of bore were worthless; those I used were
zz inch. If I were to operate again, I should not use silver-grey rabbits,
on aecount of their smallness, but ‘‘ Belgian hare”’ rabbits. When the
canulz are brought home together, the wire hooks, shown in the sketch,
secure them; but I also slipped an India-rubber band over the tips of their
handles. The cut ends of the artery were held open and stretched out by
a pair of delicate curved forceps (a suggestion due to Dr. Murie), and the

canula was pressed in (the shape of its mouth was the result of many
trials and modifications), and a ligature was put on. In the diagram, A
represents one pair of canulze, both opened and closed. B shows their
position at the time of crossed circulation. It will be observed that each
artery requires four pieces of apparatus, viz. two spring forceps to stop the
blood, and two canule. Thus, when the throats were brought close toge-
ther, to connect the arteries cross-wise, there were no less than eight

410 Dr. J. Stenhouse on Nitro-substitution [ Mar. 30,

separate pieces at work in a deep hollow, close together, and attached to
delicate arteries, none of which could be permitted to twist or interfere
with each other. I append a reduced sketch of
one of the two frameworks over which, as pre-
viously described, I suspended these instruments,
with attached counterpoises, and so avoided all con-
fusion. Both pair of canule and two pair of
forceps are here represented; they might be so
arranged; but it is better to divide the instruments,
equally, between the two frames.

For removing clogs from the canule, I tried a
great many plans, none with as much success as I
could wish. I have, however, been able to extract
clots from the artery itself, a good quarter of an
inch beyond the canulee, with a wire whose end had
been cut with a file into a delicate solid corkscrew.
I washed out the canule, before reconnecting, with a thin stream of water
sent through the quill of a small bird, which I had fastened, by help of a
short India-rubber tube, to my syringe.

The wounds require careful dressing, just like those of a man. The
rabbits bear the operations wonderfully well, and appear to suffer little or
no pain when the influence of the anzesthetics happens to have left them
temporarily sensible. They are often quite frisky when released, and
sometimes look as though nothing whatever unusual had happened to
them, all through the time of their recovery.

II. “Contributions to the History of Orcn.—No. I. Nitro-substi-
tution Compounds of the Orems”*. By Joun Stenunoust,
LL.D., F.R.S., &c. Received March 1, 1871.

The action of nitric acid upon orcin has been studied by several chemists,
but with comparatively negative results. Schunck + in this manner ob-
tained a red resinous substance, which by further treatment with the acid
was oxidized to oxalic acid; andin 1864 De Luynes { found that orcin dis-
solved in cooled fuming nitric acid without evolution of nitrous fumes,
and that the addition of water precipitated a red colouring-matter ; the
long-continued action of the vapour of fuming nitric acid on powdered
orcin likewise produced a red dye apparently identical with the above.
These, however, were resinous uncrystallizable substances.

Although under ordinary circumstances only resinous products are ob-
tained by treating orcin with nitric acid, yet, when colourless orcin in fine

* A Preliminary Notice with this title was published in the ‘Chemical News,’

August 26, 1870.
+ Ann, Chem. Pharm. vol. liv. p. 270. { Ibid. vol. cxxx. p. 34.

1871.] Compounds of the Orcins. 411

powder is gradually added to strong nitric acid cooled by a freezing-mix-
ture, it dissolves with a pale brown coloration, but without the slightest
evolution of nitrous fumes. If this solution be now slowly dropped into
concentrated sulphuric acid cooled to —10°C., the mixture becomes yellow
and pasty, from the formation of nitro-orcin, which is but slightly soluble
in sulphuric acid. When this is poured into a considerable quantity of
cold water, the nitro-body separates as a bright yellow crystalline powder,
quite free from any admixture of resin.

After numerous experiments the following was found to be the most
advantageous process for the preparation of nitro-orcin. 6 grms. of
colourless orcin were dissolved in 6 cub. centims. of boiling water, and when
the solution had cooled to about 50° C., it was added in small portions at a
time, and with constant stirring, to 40 cub. centims. of nitric acid, sp. gr.
1°45, which was maintained at a temperature of about — 10°C. by immer-
sion in a good freezing-mixture. The solution, which was of a very pale
brown colour, was now added, in a similar manner, to 120 cub. centims. of
concentrated sulphuric acid, also maintained at —10° C. The pasty mass,
after being allowed to stand for fifteen or twenty minutes in the freezing-
mixture, was poured into a beaker containing 300 cub. centims. water and
400 grms. ice; the crude nitro-compound was then precipitated as a yellow
or orange-coloured granular powder. The orcin employed in the prepara-
tion of this nitro-compound was colourless, having been purified by dis-
tillation 2m vacuo. The yield of crude nitro-orcin amounted to 150 per
cent. of the weight of the orcin.

The crude nitro-orcin was collected, washed with a little cold water,
and purified by one or two crystallizations from boiling water (40 parts).
It was thus obtained in large yellow needles, which are readily soluble in
hot water and but slightly in the cold; the addition of a strong acid preci-
pitates almost the whole of the nitro-orcin from its cold aqueous solution.
It is soluble in alcohol, very soluble in hot benzol, and crystallizes out in
great part on cooling ; it is less soluble in ether, and but moderately so in
bisulphide of carbon. It dyes the skin yellow, like picric acid, but is
tasteless. It volatilizes slightly at 100° C., melts at 162° C., and decom-
poses with slight explosion immediately afterwards. When heated with
concentrated sulphuric acid it dissolves, forming a deep yellow solution,
which deposits crystals on cooling, and is immediately precipitated by
water. It dissolves in hot strong nitric acid with evolution of nitrous”
fumes and formation of oxalic acid. Like picric acid, when treated with
calcium hypochlorite it yields chloropicrin at the ordinary temperature.
Its aqueous solutions are coloured dark brown by ferric chloride, and com-
pletely precipitated by lead subacetate.

The analysis of the substance dried at 100° C. was made, with the fol-
lowing results :—

I. -335 grm. substance gave 400 grm. carbonic anhydride and :062
germ. water.

412 Dr. J. Stenhouse on Nitro-substitution [| Mar. 30,

II. -306 grm. substance gave ‘366 grm. carbonic anhydride and -060
grm. water.
III. -525 grm. substance gave ‘629 grm. carbonic anhydride and -096
grm. water.
Theory. ae Li ink Mean.
C,= 84= 32°43 32°58 32°63 32°68 32°63
no" o=" 198 2°06 2°18 2°03 2°09
Ne 42— 16:22 oe - i “i!
O,=128= 49-42

259 100°00

These results correspond to the formula C, H, (NO,), O,, that of
trinitro-orcin. It is a powerful acid, much resembling picric acid, but
distinguished from the latter by the greater solubility of its salts. I pro-
pose, therefore, to call this new substance ¢rinztro-orcinic acid.

Potassium trinitro-orcinate.—This was readily prepared from trinitro-
orcinic acid by dissolving it in a warm and rather concentrated solution of
potassium carbonate. On cooling it solidified to a crystalline mass of fine
needles of a deep orange colour, which after the removal of the mother-
liquors by the vacuum filter, or by pressure, was purified by crystallization
from hot water, in which it was very soluble. The salt dried at 100° was
submitted to analysis.

I. 300 grm. substance gave 155 grm. potassium sulphate.

Theory. a.
ae
s— 3 re be
Ko 78 22338 23°19
go 42 ves
O,=128
Sys

The result obtained agrees with formula

C, H, (NOD, \ 0,.

Sodium trinitro-orcinate.—This was obtained by adding trinitro-orcinie
acid to a strong solution of sodium hydrate or carbonate until nearly
neutralized, and purifying by recrystallization. It forms orange-coloured
microscopic needles, strongly resembling the potassium salt.

Ammonium trinitro-orcinate was prepared by adding trinitro-orcinic acid
to moderately strong ammonia, in quantity insufficient to neutralize it, boil-
ing for a short time, and then setting aside to crystallize. It forms deep-
yellow silky needles, which are very soluble in water, but much less so in
alcohol.

1871.] Compounds of the Orcins. 413

Barium trinitro-orcinate.—Trinitro-orcinic acid was dissolved in 400 or
500 parts of boiling water and an excess of barium carbonate added, the pale
yellow solution filtered from the excess of carbonate and set aside. On
cooling, the solution formed a semisolid crystalline pap, consisting of fine
bright yellow needles of the barium salt. The air-dried salt lost 10°7 per
cent. at 100°, and became of an orange-red colour, but regained its original
colour on exposure to moist air. A barium determination was made of
the salt dried at 100°.

I. -235 grm. substance gave ‘139 grm. barium sulphate.

II. *328 grm. substance gave *194 grm. barium sulphate.

Theory. IL. Pe Mean.
C, = 84
H, = 3
Ba’ =137 = 34°77 34°78 34°79 34°78
ING — 42
O,. =128

394

The orange-coloured anhydrous salt has the composition

Sos Ne ); ah | O,, and the yellow needles cau: (NO.); } O,+3H,0.

Calcium trinitro-orcinate, prepared by neutralizing the acid with calcic
carbonate, is very soluble in hot water, and crystallizes out on cooling in in-
terlaced yellow needles, which are rather soluble in cold water. It is but
slightly soluble in hot alcohol; and the solution forms a gelatinous mass
on cooling.

Magnesium trinitro-orcinate is very soluble in cold water, but less so in
spirit. It crystallizes in minute orange needles.

Lead trinitro-orcinate.—This salt was prepared by dissolving the pure
trinitro-orcinic acid in 1000 parts of water strongly acidulated with acetic
acid, and adding a solution of lead acetate likewise strongly acidulated,
when the lead trinitro-orcinate came out as a bright yellow crystalline pre-
cipitate, consisting of tufts of microscopic needles, which are very tough
and difficult to reduce to powder. It is almost insoluble in cold water,
slightly soluble in hot. It is solubie in hot acetic acid, from which it
crystallizes unaltered. It is insoluble in alcohol. If alcoholic solutions of
trinitro-orcinic acid and lead acetate be mixed, the lead-salt is obtained as a
yellow amorphous precipitate.

Dried at 100° it gave the following estlta: _

I. -319 grm. substance gave -207 grm. plumbic sulphate.

II. *536 srm. substance gave ‘348 grm. plumbic sulphate.

III, -339 grm. substance gave ‘221 grm. plumbic sulphate.

VOL. XIX. 21

A414 Dr. J. Stenhouse on Nitro-substitution [ Mar. 30,

Theory. I. II. HI. Mean.
Cc, = 84
H, = 3 Pi e e KY g,
Pb = 207 = 44-62 44°34 44°36 44°54 44.4]
Nav.) 42 ee
O, = 128
464

Its composition is therefore represented by the formula
C, H, (NO,), O
De eee

Copper trinitro-orcinate, formed by dissolving cupric carbonate in a
strong aqueous solution of trinitro-orcinic acid, was with difficulty obtained
in the crystalline state in the form of small reddish-brown needles, which
are very soluble in water and alcohol, but are precipitated from their
solution in the latter menstruum by ether.

Zine trinitro-orcinate, formed from zinc oxide in a similar manner to the
copper salt, is likewise very soluble in water and alcohol, and crystallizes in
tufts of yellow needles.

Silver trinitro-orcinate.—Trinitro-orcinic acid was dissolved in fifty times
its weight of boiling water, an excess of silver oxide added, and, after boiling ©
a few minutes, filtered from the undissolved silver oxide. On cooling, the
whole solidified to an orange-red gelatinous mass of the silver compound,
which exhibited no signs of crystallization. It is moderately soluble in
hot water ; and its solution gelatinizes on cooling. When boiled for any
length of time its solution slowly decomposes. Dried at 100° it gave the
following results :—

I, °458 grm. substance gave *277 grm. argentic chloride.

II. -398 grm. substance gave '241 grm. argentic chloride.

Theory. I. II. Mean.
Gi = 34
HL yeiatina yap 4 ig A
Ae Gee 706 45°41 43°57 45°49
Nea AD
OF 525
473

This corresponds to the formula
C, i, elie O
Ag,

2°

Lthylie trinitro-orcinate.—Dry and finely powdered silver trinitro-orci-
nate was digested with ten times its weight of ethylic iodide until the silver
salt was completely decomposed, as shown by the pale yellow colour of the
silver iodide formed, the excess of ethylic iodide distilled off, and the ethy}

1871.] Compounds of the Orcins. 415

trinitro-orcinate extracted from the residue by boiling alcohol, from which
it crystallized in bright yellow prismatic needles. One or two recrystalliza-
tions rendered it quite pure. It melts at 61°°5 C., and is very soluble in hot
alcohol, from which, if the solution be concentrated, it is deposited as an
oil that solidifies on cooling.

The substance dried iz vacuo was submitted to analysis.

I. -189 grm. substance gave *290 grm. carbonic anhydride and ‘078 grm.
water.

Theory. 7:
Ce — 122 SI 41°85
Bo FS ATS 4°58
ee — ae —— oo
0. ——- oe 40-00
315 100-00

It may therefore be represented by the formula

C, H, (NO,),

(C, H,),

Methyl trinitro-orcinate was prepared in a manner precisely similar to

that above described, substituting methylic for ethylic iodide. Like the

ethyl compound, it forms bright yellow crystals, which, however, have a
somewhat higher melting-point, viz. 69°°5 C.

; O,.

Trinitro-resoreinic Acid.

As it seemed important to ascertain if the homologues of orcin yielded
compounds similar to trinitro-orcin, I submitted resorcin to the action of
nitric and sulphuric acids in a manner precisely similar to that above de-
scribed for the preparation of trinitro-orcin.

The resorcin employed was prepared from Galbanum by the excellent
method given by its discoverers, Hlasiwitz and Barth*, substituting,
however, sodium hydrate for potassium hydrate. After purification it was
treated with nitric and sulphuric acids, employing the proportions and
methods detailed in the preparation of trinitro-orcin. As might have been
expected, the yield of crude substance was larger, being 180 per cent. of the
resorcin employed. It was collected, washed with cold water, and puri-
fied by one or two recrystallizations from boiling water (30 parts). It is
of a paler colour than the corresponding orcin compound, and crystallizes
in leafy plates. It melts at a higher temperature, viz. 175°°5 C., and is more
soluble than trinitro-orcin; 156 parts of water dissolve one of trinitro-
resorcin at 14° C., but the presence of even a small proportion of one
of the stronger acids renders it almost insoluble. Dried at 100° it gave
the following results :—

* Ann. Chem. Pharm. vol. exxx. p. 354.

416 Dr. J. Stenhouse on Nitro-substitution [Mar. 30,

I. :384 grm. substance gave *412 grm. carbonic anhydride and *043 grm.
water.

II. -418 grm. substance gave ‘451 grm. carbonic anhydride and
‘051 grm. water. ;

Theory. I. II. Mean.

C, = 72 = 29-39 29°27 29°43 29°35

H,= 3 = 1:23 1-30 1°36 1:33
N,= 42 = 17°14
O, = 128 = 52:24
245 ~=100°00

This corresponds to the formula C, H, (NO,), O,, that of trinitro-
resorcin.

Barium trinitro-resorcinate was prepared by dissolving trinitro-resorcin
in 100 parts boiling water and adding an excess of baric carbonate. The
filtered solution, on cooling, deposited the barium compound in minute
rhomboidal plates of a pale yellow colour. It is much more soluble than
the corresponding trinitro-orcin compound. The crystals contain three
equivalents of water of crystallization, which they do not lose at 100° C. ;
but when gently heated on platinum foil they assume an orange-red colour
from the loss of water of crystallization, and at a higher temperature ex-
plode with extreme violence, perforating the foil. Both trinitro-orcinic and
resorcinic acids and their salts explode with far greater violence than picric
acid and its compounds.

A barium determination of the nitro-resorcinate, dried at 100°, yielded
the following results :—

I. :409 grm. substance gave ‘220 grm. baric sulphate.

II. 444 grm. substance gave ‘239 grm. baric sulphate.

Theory. i II. Mean.
Tp aaah
Eee hy a be is i
Ba" — 137:2'= 31°59 31°63 31°66 31°64
N, = 42 i
O, = 176
434°2

The formula is therefore

C, H(NO,), |
oHAKNO), } 0,+3H,0.

Lead trinitro-resorcinate.—The addition of a solution of acetate of lead -
to an aqueous solution of trinitro-resorcinic acid gave a yellow gelatinous
precipitate of lead trinitro-resorcinate. It was found best, however, to pre-

1871.] Compounds of the Orcins. 417

pare it by boiling a solution of one part of trinitro-resorcinic acid in 200 of
water, with a slight excess of lead carbonate, when the lead compound was
deposited on cooling in the form of deep yellow needles. It is but slightly
soluble in water, very soluble in acetic acid, and precipitated therefrom by
the addition of alcohol. Subacetate of lead completely precipitates solu-
tions of trinitro-resorcinic acid. |

Silver trinitro-resorcinate.—This was prepared in a manner similar to the
trinitro-orcinate. A solution of one part of the pure acid in 75 of water was
boiled for a short time with a slight excess of oxide of silver and filtered.
On cooling, the silver-salt was deposited in long fine needles of a yellowish-
brown colour. They crystallize readily from boiling water, in which they
are much more soluble than the corresponding trinitro-orcinate. Dried at
100° it gave the following results :—

I. -456 grm. substance gave *284 grm. chloride of silver.

II: -416 grm. substance gave ‘260 grm. chloride of silver.

Theory. T. II. Mean.

oo
I Il

. NI
—

216 = 47:07 46°87 47°04 46°96

Onz>
SQ
hill
bo
2 pr

The analyses correspond to the formula

C, H (NO,), } O..

Trinitro-beta-orcinic Acid.

Beta-orcin, C, H,, O,, when treated with nitric and sulphuric acids as
above described, gives a yellow substance, which appears to be the cor-
responding nitro-compound of beta-orcin ; but from the small amount of
material at my disposal, I am at present unable to accurately determine its
properties.

From some experiments I have made, the action of reducing agents,
nitrous acid, &c. upon these nitro-compounds promises very interesting
results. I am at present investigating this subject. My thanks are due
to Mr. Charles E. Groves for the efficient assistance he has rendered in
conducting the above investigation.

The Society adjourned over the Easter Recess to Thursday, April 20th.

418 Presents. [ Mar. 2,

Presents received, March 2, 1871.

Transactions.
London :—Royal Asiatic Society. Journal. New series. Vol. V. Part 1.
8vo. London 1870. The Society.

National Association for the Promotion of Social Science. Transac-
tions. Newcastle Meeting, 1870. Edited by Edwin Pears. 8vo.
London 1871. The Association.

Vienna :—Kaiserlich-Konigliche geologische Reichsantalt. Jahrbuch.
Jahrgang 1870. No. 3. 8vo. Wien 1870. Verhandlungen.
No. 10-12. 8vo. Wien 1870. The Institution.

Reports, &ce.

Albany :—State of New York. Fifty-second Annual Report of the
Trustees of the New York State Library. 8vo. Albany 1870.
Eighty-first and Eighty-second Annual Report of the Regents of
the University. 8vo. Albany 1868-69. Twenty-second Annual
Report on the Condition of the State Cabinet of Natural History.
Svo. Albany 1869. Speeches and Reports in the Assembly of New
York at Annual Session of 1838, by D. D. Barnard. 8vo. Albany
1838. Report of John Jay on the National Cemetery at Antietam.
8vo. Albany 1868. Annual Report of the General Agent for the
Relief of Sick and Wounded Soldiers of the State of New York.
8vo. Albany 1865. Compound and Comminuted Gun-shot Frac-
tures of the Thigh, by J. Swinburne. 8vo. Albany 1864.

The State of New York.

London :—Royal College of Physicians. List of the Fellows, Members,
Extra Licentiates, and Licentiates. 8vo. London 187].

The College.

New York :—Cooper Union for the Advancement of Science aud Art.
Fifth, Seventh, and Tenth Annual Report of the Trustees. 8vo.

New York 1864-69. The Trustees.
Association for Improving the Condition of the Poor. Twenty-fifth
Annual Report. 8vo. New York 1868. The Association.

Washington :—Surgeon-General’s Office. Report on certain points con-
nected with the Histology of Minute Blood-vessels, by J. J. Wood-
ward. 4to. Washington 1870. Report on the Oxy-Calcium Light
as applied to Photo-Micrography. 4to. Washington 1870. Twenty-
four Photographs of Microscopic Objects.

The Surgeon-General.

Wellington :—Registrar-General’s Office. Statistics of New Zealand for
1869. fol. Wellington 1870. The Government of New Zealand.

1871.] Presents. 419

Goodeve (T. M.) The Elements of Mechanism. 12mo. London 1871.
The Author.
Grove (W.'R.), F.R.S. Die Verwandtschaft der Naturkrafte. Deutsche
autorisirte Ausgabe, herausgegeben durch EH. von Schaper. 8vo.
Braunschweig 1871. The Author.
Roscoe (H. E.), F.R.S. Spectrum Analysis. Six Lectures delivered in
1868 before the Society of Apothecaries of London. 8vo. London
1870. Die Spectralanalyse. Autorisirte deutsche Ausgabe, bearbeitet
von C. Schorlemmer. 8vo. Braunschweig 1870. The Author.

March 9, 1871.

Transactions.
Berlin :—Akademie der Wissenschaften. Monatsbericht, August—De-
cember 1870. 8vo. Berlin. The Academy.
Edinburgh :—Royal Scottish Society of Arts. Transactions. Vol. VIII.
Part 2. 8vo. Edinburgh 1870. The Society.
Glasgow :—Philosophical Society. Proceedings, 1868-70. Vol. VII.
No. 1, 2. 8vo. Glasgow 1869-70. The Society.
London :—Royal United Service Institution. Journal. Vol. XIV. No.
58-61. 8yo. London 1870. The Institution.

Observations.
Leyden :—Annalen der Sternwarte, herausgegeben von F. Kaiser. Band
Il. 4to. Haag 1870. Prof. Kaiser.

Adams (J. W.) American Interoceanic Ship Canals. 8vo. New York

1870. The Author.

Anderson (B.) Narrative of a Journey to Musardu. 8vo. New York

1870. The Author.
Benson (Wm.) Manual of the Science of Colour. 12mo. London 1871.

The Author.

Du Bois Reymond (Emil) Speech on the German War, Aug. 30, 1870.

8vo. London 1870. The Author.

Hitchcock (C. H.) First Annual Pee upon the Geology and Minera-

logy of the State of New Hampshire. 8vo. Manchester (U. 8.) 1869.

The Author.

Lea (Isaac) Index to Vol. XII., and Supplementary Index to Vol. I. to’
XI. of Observations on the Genus Unio. 4to. Philadelphia 1869.

The Author.

Lewis (Tayler) State Rights: a Photograph from the Ruins of Ancient

Greece. 8vo. Albany 1865. The Author.

4.20 Presents. [ Mar. 16,
Packard (A. 8.) Record of American Entomology for the year 1868.

8yvo. Salem 1869. (2 copies.) The Author.
Shettle (R. C.) The Nature of the Vital Force shown from the growth of
the Body. 8vo. London 1871. The Author.
Todd (C.) Meteorological Observations in South Australia, 1869. fol.
Adelaide. The Author.
Trembley (J.B.) Annual Meteorological Synopsis for 1866. 8vo. Toledo
Ohio. The Author.

Engraved Portrait of Alexander MacLeay, F.R.S., from a painting of Sir
Thomas Lawrence by C. Fox. J. J. Bennett, F.R.S.

March 16, 1871.

Transactions.

Caracas :—Sociedad de Ciencias Fisicas y Naturales. Vargasia, Boletin,
No: 7. Svo. Cardeas 18/0. ~ The Society.
London :—Mathematical Society. Proceedings. No. 25-31. 8vo. London
1870. The Society.
Quekett Microscopical Club. Journal. No. 11-13. Fifth Report. 8vo.
London 1870-71. The Club.
Royal United Service Institution. Journal. Vol. XIII. Appendix.
8vo. London 1870. The Institution.
Society of Antiquaries. Archeeologia. Vol. XLIII. Part 1. 4to. Lon-
don 1871. The Society.

Mauritius :—Meteorological Society. Transactions. Vol. I1., IV. 8vo.
Mauritius 1855-59. Proceedings, 1861. 8vo. Mauritius.

The Society.

Montreal :—M°Gill College and University. Annual Calendar. Session

of 1870-71. 8vo. Montreal 1870. The College.
Newcastle-upon-Tyne. Chemical Society. Proceedings (pp. 88-172).
8vo. Newcastle 1869-70. The Society.

Kops (Jan) en F. W. van Eeden. Flora Batava, 211-215 Aflevering. 4to.
Leden.
The Minister of the Interior of the Kingdom of the Netherlands.
Lankester (Dr.), F.R.S. Seventh Annual Report of the Coroner for the
Central District of Middlesex. 8vo. London 1871. The Author.
Laughton (J. K.) Physical Geography in its relation to the prevailing
Winds and Currents. 8vo. London 1870.

1871. | Presents. 421

Todd (Charles) Report on the determination of the Boundary Line of the
Colonies of South Australia and New South Wales. fol. Adelaide

1869. The Author.
Wright (E.P.) Spicilegia Biologica: or Papers on Zoological and Bo-
tanical Subjects. Part 1. 8vo. London 1870. The Author.

March 23, 1871.

Transactions.
Alnwick :—Berwickshire Naturalists’ Club. Proceedings. Vol. VI.
No. 2. 8vo. Alnwick 1870. The Club.

Calcutta :—Asiatic Society of Bengal. Journal, 1870. Part 1. No.3;
Part 2. No. 3, 4. 8vo. Calcutta. Proceedings. No. 9,10. 8vo.
Calcutta 1870. The Society.

London :—Geological Survey of the United Kingdom. Catalogue of
Maps, Sections, Memoirs, &c. 8vo. London 1870. Mineral Statistics
for the year 1869, by R. Hunt. 8vo. London 1870. Geology of
the Country between Liverpool and Southport, by C. De Rance.
Svo. London 1870. The Survey.

Odontological Society of Great Britain. Transactions. New Series.
Vol. II. No. 8; Vol. III. No. 1-4. 8vo. Zondon 1870-71.

3 The Society.

Royal School of Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering.

Annual. No. 1. 8vo. London 1871. The School.

Luxembourg :—Institut Royal Grand-Ducal. Section des Sciences Na-
turelles et Mathématiques. Publications. Tome XI. 8vo. Luxem-

bourg. 1870. The Institution.
Mauritius :—Royal Society of Arts and Sciences. Transactions. New
Series. Vol. IV. 8vo. Mauritius 1870. The Society.

Salem, Mass.:—Peabody Academy of Science. The American Natu-
ralist. Vol. I., IL.,1V. (No. 3-12.) 8vo. Salem 1868-71. Re-
cord of American Entomology for the years 1868, 1869. 8vo.
Salem 1869-71. The Academy.

Croll (J.) On the Transport of the Wastdale Crag Blocks. 8vo. London
1871. On the Mean Thickness of the Sedimentary Rocks of the
Globe. 8vo. London 1871. The Author.

Foetterle (F.) Das Vorkommen, die Production und Circulation des mine-
ralischen Brennstoffes in der Osterreichisch-Ungarischen Monarchie
im Jahre 1868. 8vo. Wien 1870. And Map. The Author.

VOL. KIX. 2K

422 Presents. [ Mar. 30,

Gamgee (A.) Contributions to the Chemistry and Physiology of Foetal
Nutrition. 8vo. London 1864. Onan Alleged Fallacy in Marsh’s
process for the detection of Arsenic. 8vo. Adinb. 1864. On the Cha-
racters of the Expectoration in Cases of Fetid Bronchitis and Gan-
grene of the Lung. 8vo. Edinb. 1865. Note of Experiments confir-
matory of those of Kihne on the non-existence of Free Ammonia in
Blood. 8yvo. Edinb. 1865. Researches on the Blood. 8yvo. London
1868. On Force and Matterin relation to Organization. 8vo. Hdind.
1869. Researches on the Blood. 4to. London 1868. The Author.

Gamgee (A.) and D. Maclagan. On the Alkaloids contained in the Wood
of the Bebeeru or Greenheart Tree. 4to. Hdinb. 1869. The Authors.

Gamgee (A.) and J. Dewar. On Cystine (C,H, NO,S). 8vo. Hdinbd. 1870.

The Authors.

March 30, 1870.

Transactions.
Berlin :—Physikalische Gesellschaft. Die Fortschritte der Physik im
Jahre 1867. Jahrgang 23, &vo. Berlin 1870. The Society.
Kiel :—Universitat.. Schriften 1858. Band V.; 1869. Band XVI. 4to.
Kiel 1859-70. The University.
Leipzig :—Astronomische Gesellschaft. Publication X. Tafeln der Am-
phitrite, von E. Becker. 4to. Leepzig 1870. The Society.

Paris :—Faculté des Sciences. Theses. No. 317-327. Svo and 4to.
Paris 1870. The Faculté des Sciences.

Observations and Reports.
Berlin:—Berliner Astronomisches Jahrbuch fur 1873, herausgegeben

von W. Foerster. 8vo. Berlin 1871. The Observatory.
Punjab :—Report on the Meteorology of the Punjab for the year 1869,
by A. Neil. fol. Lahore 1870. The Author.

Hill (C. J.) Sur une forme générale de développement et sur les In-
tégrales définies. 4to. Lund. The Author.
Ratjen (H.) Geschichte der Universitat zu Kiel. 8vo. Kiel 1870. Ge-
schichte der Kieler Universitatsbibliothek. 4to. Avel 1862-3.
The Author.
Ratjen (E.) De Hydrotherapia Typhi Abdominalis. 4to. Kile 1864.
The Author.
Wackerbath (A. F. D.) On the Great Pyramid of Gizeh. 4to. Southampton
1871. The Author.

1871.] Mr. J. R. Hind on Transits of Venus. 423

April 20, 1871.
Dr. WILLIAM HUGGINS, Vice-President, in the Chair.

The following communications were read :—

I. “Note on the circumstances of the Transits of Venus over the
Sun’s Disk in the years 2004 and 2012.” By J. R. H1np,
F.R.S. Received March 1, 1871.

While preparations are being made by astronomers of various nations for
the observation of the approaching transit of Venus over the sun’s disk in
December 1874, it may be of interest to know under what conditions the
pair of transits in the twenty-first century will take place. This conside-
ration has induced me to make a careful calculation of the circumstances
of the transits in 2004 and 2012, from M. Leverrier’s Tables of the Sun
and Planet, which at present are extremely accurate, and which, there can
be little doubt, will closely represent the phenomena to be witnessed in
those years. The calculations have been made entirely by myself, but
with every precaution to avoid error, and I have confidence in the results.

The following are the resulting elements of the transit in 2004 :—

Greenwich mean time of conjunction in right ascension 2004, June
A 20 a1” 28°°8.

Right ascension of Sun and Venus .... 7 6 50 28°6
Declination of Sun .... +22 53 20°4
a Venus .. +22 42 52°3
Horary motionin R.A. .... Sun.... 2 35:07
A yeaa. Venlugn'! . —1 37°40
Horary motion in declination. Sun.... +0 13-00
6 fe Venus .. —0 43°83
Semidiameter of Sun.... 15 45°74
oe Venus .. 28°75
Horizontal parallax ........ Sui orga 8°78
Siege SRT Res ak? Venus .. 80°85
Log. distance of Venus from the Earth. . 946069

Equation of time .. 1” 1586 (additive to mean time).

Hence, for the centre of the earth,—

d hm s

First external contact ... June 7 17 3 43 at 115-0 from N. towards E.
, internal _,, » 17 22 85 at 118-0 io For the
Second internal ,, pS 23 5 40 at 2146 5 ee
Sin, Cxterhal \.: i 23 24 32 at 217°5 9 ne

And / being the geocentric latitude, p the radius of the earth at any place,
VOL. XIX. | 21

424, Mr. J, R. Hind on Transiis of Venus. [Apr. 20,

and A the longitude from Greenwich +E., — W.., the reductions for paral-
lax will be obtained from |
ad. 7am is at,
Ist ext. cont....June7 17 3 43+(2:2198]o.sin 7—[2-5932]. p . cos?.cos(A+176 32).
Ist int. cont. = 17 22 85+ [2°2571 ]o . sin 7— [2°5765] . 9 . cos7 . cos(A +182 38).
2nd int. cont. “A 23 5 40—[2°5090]o .sin/+[2°4353] . p.cos7.cos(A+ 47 17).
2nd ext. cont. » 28 24 32—[2°4928]o.sinJ+[2-46381]..cosZ.cos(A+ 54 35).

For the Royal Observatory, Greenwich, I find :-—
: d-h m-s
First external contact, June 7 17 9 56
»» Internal 5 ~ 17 28 of Mean times at
Secondinternal _,, Be DEN hot Greenwich.
ss | €xternal.. .,, ee Tat 22 wlio

Therefore the entire transit will be visible at Greenwich.

Similarly the elements of the transit of 2012 are found to be :—
Greenwich mean time of conjunction in right ascension 2012, June
54 13% 4™ 44°°3,

Right ascension of Sun and Venus .... 74 31 11-9
Declination of Sun .... +22 40 24:1
me Venus.... +22 50 3°0

Horary motion tn B.A... Sin. 2.2. 2 34°67
. ite Venus.... —1 37°70
Horary motionin declination. Sun .... +0 15°23
ae bes Venus.... —0 45:37
Semidiameter of Sun .... 15 46°01

= Veaise -. 28°77

Horizontal parallax........ SUG tas eae 8°76
ae hag es ee OS Venus,... 30°86
Log. distance of Venus from the Earth.. 9°46042

Equation of time .. 1” 19*& (additive to mean time).

Hence, for the centre of the earth,—

doh” aa os
First external contact ... June 5 10 22 11-at 40°3 from N. towards E.
», internal _,, F 10 39 56 at 37°8 ] For the
Second internal ,, o 16 42 6 at 293°1 q a
5.) external’, 4 17 0 Oat 290°5 +

And, with the same notation as before, I find for the reductions for

parallax,—
an mn 8

Ist ext. cont. ... June 5 10 22 11+[2°4536] p . sin /—[2°4582] ,o.cos/.cos (A+41 28).
Ist int. cont. 4 10 39 56+ [2°4838] po . sin /— [2:4558] .p.cosZ. cos (A+43 52).
2nd int. cont. 16 42 6—[2°1301]p.sin/+ [2°5968] .p.cosZ7.cos(A—10 57).

2nd ext. cont. a 17 0 O—[2°1158] p.sin/+ [25825] .p.cosd.cos(A— 6 28).

1871. | Dr. Divers on Salts of Nitrous Oxide. 425

At Greenwich the egress only will be visible.

he i) aS
Last internal contact, June 5, at 16 44 et Mean times at
» external Ae Me LE Nie 5 Greenwich.

The sun will rise at 15" 46”.

II. “On the Existence and Formation of Salts of Nitrous Oxide.”
By Epwarp Divers, M.D. Communicated by Professor W.
Opiine, M.B., F.R.S. Received March 2, 1871.

1. Metallic sodium thrown on a solution of an alkali nitrate was found
by Schénbein* to reduce it to nitrite. He contented himself, however, with
merely detecting the nitrite by the iodide and starch test. By using the
sodium in the form of amalgam the complete reduction of the nitrate to nitrite
can be readily effected, and silver nitrite freely precipitated from the solu-
tion by first neutralizing it with an acid and then adding silver nitrate.

2. But so soon as nitrite is thus formed by the sodium, it itself begins to
suffer reduction, as well as the remaining nitrate, by the action of more
sodium. This reduction of the nitrite is rendered evident by the efferves-
cence which attends it, the gas given off consisting of pure nitrous oxide,
If excess of sodium amalgam be gradually added to the nitrate solution,
and its action moderated by keeping the vessel containing the mixture in a
stream of cold water, the effervescence only becomes very lively when the
sodium added has nearly reached the proportion of two atoms to one of
the nitrate used. When four atoms of sodium have been oxidized by the
solution, the further addition of it is without effect ; no more effervescence
takes place, and the sodium remains unchanged in the mercury.

3. The very alkaline liquid which is left by the reaction contains a new
salt, though in relatively small quantity—the salt of nitrous oxide. The
action of sodium on sodium nitrate may therefore be thus formulated :—

Ist stage: Na} O+Na=Ne |} O+Na,0.

NO _N
Qnd stage: NC OLNa=N, } O4Na,0.

As regards the escape of nitrous oxide during the reduction, this is ex-
plained by the reaction on each other of two molecules of the new salt,
under the influence of the heat produced by the oxidation of the sodium,
thus :—

N N N Na
Nat O+Na} O=N} O-+N: Cay

* Hrdmann’s Journ. fiir prakt. Chemie, vol. lxxxiv. (1861) p. 202.

ft When ammonium nitrate is employed instead of sodium or potassium nitrate, the
action of the sodium is the same; and it is here interesting to point out that ammo-
nium nitrate is an exception to the conclusion at which Gay-Lussac and Thénard arrived
(Journ. de Physique, vol. lxix. 1809, p. 463), after they had tried the carbonate, chlo-

2u2

426 Dr. Divers on Salts of Nitrous Oxide. [Apr. 20,

4, After neutralizing the alkaline liquid by acetic acid, it gives a yellow,
pulverulent precipitate with silver nitrate. This precipitate, when thoroughly
washed from its saline mother liquor, is almost as insoluble in water as silver
chloride ; for hydrochloric acid gives no immediate opalescence with water
filtered through it. It is quite stable below 100° C., or a little lower than
this, and it may be washed with hot water without change. It is also un-
affected by light, or by exposure to a pure atmosphere, even when in contact
with paper. It is but very sparingly soluble in acetic acid ; so that this acid
may be added in excess to the original alkaline liquid without removing its
property of being precipitated by silver salts. It is soluble in ammonia
and ammonium carbonate, from solution in either of which it can be again
thrown down by acetic acid, or by cautious neutralization of the ammonia ~
by dilute nitric or sulphuric acid, or by the volatilization of the ammonia.
It is soluble in either dilute nitric or sulphuric acid, and without immediate
decomposition ; and it can be reprecipitated from its solution in either of
these acids by the cautious addition of ammonia or ammonium carbonate, or
by the free addition of sodium carbonate or sedium hydrate, in either of
which it is insoluble. It is immediately oxidized by concentrated nitric
acid, copious red fumes being produced. Moderately diluted nitric, sul-
phuric, or hydrochloric acid decomposes it, with the evolution of nitrogen,
and the production of apparently both nitrous and nitric acids in the solu-
tion. It is also decomposed by soluble chlorides and by hydrosulphurie
acid. When precipitated from the original liquid, it sometimes becomes
dark-coloured ; but this change is due to the formation of a black matter
derived from the sodium or naphtha and the silver acetate. After washing
it, dissolving it in very dilute nitric acid, and filtering the solution, it may
be reobtained by the cautious addition of ammonia, or by the addition of
ammonia to alkaline reaction and then a little acetic acid, in a condition in
which it is no longer liable to discoloration. It is decomposed by a mode-
rate heat into nitric oxide, metallic silver, and a little silver nitrate—in this
respect resembling silver nitrite. My experiments on silver nitrite, about
being published, show that nitric oxide may serve as a carrier of atmospheric
oxygen to silver nitrite ; and it is therefore most probable that in this case
also some of the nitric oxide liberated serves to carry a little oxygen to the
still undecomposed new silver-salt. During its decomposition by heat it
does not fuse or exhibit any other change except that from a bright yellow
to a silver-white colour. After a red heat nothing remains but pure silver.

5. The following determinations of the amount of silver in the salt have
been made :—

I. -3317 grm., dried at a gentle heat, was suspended in water and digested

ride, phosphate, and sulphate, that any ammonium salt would give ammonium amal-
gam with sodium amalgam. Ammonium nitrate yields no ammonium amalgam with
sodium amalgam; more than this, the presence of a nitrate prevents the formation of
this body by other salts of ammonium.

1871. | Dr. Divers on Salts of Nitrous Oxide. 4.27

with hydrochloric acid. The silver chloride weighed °3386 grm.=°2549
grm. silver.

II. :5703 grm. of some of the salt which had been dissolved in ammo-
nia, filtered, and precipitated by acetic acid, was dissolved in dilute nitric
acid and treated with hydrochloric acid. It yielded °5858 grm. silver
chloride=°4410 grm. silver.

III. -9462 grm. of some of the salt which had been dissolved in nitric
acid, filtered, and reprecipitated by ammonia, was dissolved in very dilute
nitric acid and precipitated by hydrochloric acid. It gave :9722 grm.
chloride=°7318 grm. silver.

IV. °6111 grm. of the same preparation as the last was heated at first
moderately and then to redness. It left 4737 grm. silver.

V. °3685 grm. kept for sixty hours at a temperature varying from 100°
to 175°, left a residue weighing *2921 grm., of which *2775 grm. was metallic
silver and the rest silver nitrate=:0093 grm. silver.

VI. °5937 grm. heated moderately till red fumes ceased to appear yielded
"4274 orm. silver and ‘0557 grm. silver nitrate='0354 grm. silver.

The percentage numbers for the silver found and that required by the
formula NOAg are:

Cale. £ II. OE IV. Vi VI.
MoO 2108 7G 3301 FP S4 TEAS [EES A F908

so that there can be no doubt as to the composition of the salt, although
the silver comes out about one per cent. too low. But in several of the
samples traces of brownish or black matters were detected on solution ; and
in the last preparation analyzed, the presence of a little moisture was de-
tected, an attempt to expel which in some of the unused salt by a stronger
heat caused partial decomposition.

6. If the product of ,the ultimate action of seu, on the nitrate be
treated with acetic acid, as directed, until it is neutral to test-paper, it gives
no precipitate with any metallic solution except that of silver, so far at
least as trial has yet been made. But the precipitation of the silver-salt
leaves the solution of an acid reaction to litmus; and even if the solution
before precipitation be rendered a little alkaline to litmus, it will, after
precipitation, generally react slightly acid. The reason of this is clearly
that the sodium salt has a markedly alkaline reaction ; and this is further
shown to be the case by adding some of the washed silver-salt to a solu-
tion of potassium or sodium chloride, which it at once renders alkaline in
reaction to litmus. To obtain a solution of the salt free from acid or
caustic alkali, the original alkaline liquid is to be treated with acetic acid
in successive quantities until it just ceases to yield a brown precipitate with
silver nitrate. Such a solution will yield the yellow silver-salt with silver
nitrate as before, and also precipitates with the salts of most of the com-
mon metals. Instead of acetic acid dilute nitric acid may be used in this
method for thus neutralizing the caustic soda, with the same result as to

428 Dr. Divers on Salts of Nitrous Oxide. [Apr. 20,

the alkalinity of the solution to test-paper, and its capability of being pre-
cipitated by many metallic salts. |

7. The following reactions having as yet been only observed with a
solution thus obtained, it is possible that some 1 them may not be due
simply to the new acid :—

Barium chloride gives no precipitate.

Lead acetate gives a cream-white flocculent precipitate, which generally,
on standing, changes to a very dense, full yellow precipitate. This pre-
cipitate is unchanged by boiling in water or in its mother liquor, is soluble
in acetic and other acids, slowly, if at all, affected by ammonia or sodium
carbonate, and instantly decomposed by caustic soda.

Mercurie chloride gives a cream-white flocculent precipitate.

Mercurous nitrate gives a blackish-grey precipitate, not improbably a
mixture of mercury and the mercuric salt.

Cupric sulphate, a yellowish olive-green flocculent precipitate, soluble
in acids and ammonia, insoluble in caustic soda, and unaffected by boiling
in water or its mother liquor. The colour of this precipitate closely re-
sembles the colour of a copper-salt mixed with a nitrite.

Zine chloride gives a white precipitate.

Manganese chloride gives a whitish precipitate.

Nickel chloride gives a greenish, almost white precipitate.

Cobalt nitrate gives no precipitate (?).

Alum gives a white precipitate.

Ferric chloride gives a slight reddish-brown precipitate.

Ferrous sulphate gives a whitish precipitate, instantly darkening to
dirty blackish green and eventually reddish brown. On addition of ferric
chloride effervescence slowly commences; and with ferrous sulphate the
same thing happens, but still more slowly. It is very probable that the
iron and aluminium precipitates are simply hydrates; and if so, the action
of this salt mm these cases closely resembles that of a carbonate.

Silver nitrate behaves as already described.

Sodium chloride gives an alkaline solution with the silver-salt, which is
changed to chloride.

Ammonium chloride gives the same result as sodium chloride, but the
solution at once evolves ammonia. The existence, therefore, of the am-
monium salt of the new acid is problematical.

Potassium permanganate gives the beautiful changes of colour from its
own violet, through purple, blue, and chrome-green, to manganate green,
and then a brown precipitate. The exhibition of this series of colours is
more certain in the presence of a little caustic alkali. In this reaction the
new salt resembles a nitrite, but it is much more sensitive than this.

Potassium iodide gives no reaction; it does with nitrite.

Todine solution is decolorized immediately ; so that if a nitrite, not in
excess, is added to a solution of the new salt, the addition of starch and
potassium iodide produces no coloration.

1871.] Dr. Divers on Salts of Nitrous Oxide. 429

The solution acidified with acetic or hydrochloric acid still gives no re-
action with potassium iodide, decolorizes iodine solutions, and prevents
the action of a nitrite on an iodide.

The acidified solution gives no coloration with ferrous sulphate. In con-
tact with strong sulphuric acid, the mixture gives the coloration like a
nitrate. As is well known, a nitrite, even without addition of acid, gives
an immediate colour with ferrous sulphate.

The acidified solution immediately decolorizes potassium permanganate.

The acidified solution does not reduce potassium dichromate.

The solution which has been neutralized with nitric acid instead of acetic
acid will not do for the iron and iodine tests, as this behaves, so far as it
has been tried, as though it contained a nitrite.

The acidified acetic-acid solution, when heated, evolves nitrous oxide.
Here again, therefore, the new salt is analogous to a carbonate,—

2NOH=N,0+0H,,.

8. When silver nitrite is heated until a greenish-yellow, semifused mass
remains, and this is washed out with water, the residue consists of metallic
silver and a little bright yellow matter, unaffected by light, soluble in am-
monia, and decomposed by boiling in water, as will be found described in
my paper on the action of heat on silver nitrite already referred to. From
the properties of this yellow substance, and from the manner in which it
is formed, it is probable that it is the silver-salt of the new acid; but in
consequence of the small quantity of it obtainable, and of the admixture of
this with metallic silver, a fuller examination of it has not been attempted.
If it be this salt, its formation is analogous to that of silver nitrite by
heating silver nitrate.

9. There is also reason for believing that Hess * came across this salt
by first treating a solution of barium nitrate which had been deoxidized by
heat with a solution of silver sulphate and evaporating the mixture, and
then decomposing the crystals thus obtained by the action of water.

10. In his ‘Researches on Nitrous Oxide’+, Sir Humphry Davy de-
scribed some experiments by which he obtained what appeared to him to
be a combination of nitrous oxide with potash. THe prepared it by ex-
posing a mixture of solid potassium hydrate and potassium sulphite to the
prolonged action of nitric oxide, dissolving the resulting product in water,
crystallizing out the potassium sulphate formed, and then evaporating to
dryness. The mass thus obtained evolved when heated pure nitrous oxide,
amounting to about a fourth of its weight.

Since then, however, Pelouze { has obtained, by a modification of Davy’s
method, the alkali nitrosulphates; and it seems to be now universally

* Pogg. Ann. vol. xii, (1828) p. 257.

tT Researches, Chemical and Philosophical, chiefly concerning Nitrous Oxide (1800).

Res. ii. Div. i. sect. 6, pp. 254-277.
{ “Sur quelques combinaisons d’un nouvel Acide formé d’ Azote, de Soufre et d’Oxy-

géne,” Ann, de Chim. et de Phys. vol. lx. (1835) p. 151.

430 Dr. Divers on Salts of Nitrous Oxide. — [Apr. 20,

believed that Davy must have in reality obtained a nitrosulphate and not a
simple salt of nitrous oxide. I have not yet had time to repeat Davy’s
experiments myself, but I wish to point out one well-marked and essential
difference between the body obtained by Davy and Pelouze’s nitrosulphate,
which is that, whereas the former body evolved pure nitrous oxide when
heated, the latter gives off nitric oxide; and also that, according to
Davy’s experiments, Pelouze’s modification of the former’s process would
be fatal to its success in forming the salts of nitrous oxide.

11. There is some difficulty in selecting an appropriate name for the
new acid. That of hyponitrous acid naturally suggests itself, as being
framed according to the usual method of naming a rising series of oxygen
acids, and as associating the new acid with the similarly constituted acid
of chlorine; but I feel that in naming the nitrous-oxide acid regard
ought to be had to the possible existence of salts of nitric oxide, in which
several chemists have believed, indeed, and on better evidence, I think, after
a perusal of some of their papers, than is generally supposed. Now, if the
nitric-oxide acid should be discovered, and if the term ‘“‘hyponitric”’ is to
be retained for the acid intermediate to the nitrous and nitric acids, the
term “‘hyponitrous”’ would belong by analogy to the nitric-oxide acid
rather than to the new acid.

This difficulty, however, will vanish if the term hyponitric be allowed -
to fall out of use and that of nitroso-nitric, already adopted by several .
chemists, be generally substituted for it as the name of the nitrogen-per-
oxide acid; for then, the term ‘“‘hyponitrous”’ being given to the new
acid, there remains the compound term ‘‘hyponitroso-nitrous’’ for the
nitric-oxide acid, should this acid ever be obtained.

There will thus be the following series of names :—

Hy PORItTOUS ACIC. 2.2. Sees HNO
Hyponitroso-nitrous acid ........ Ho Ne
INTEROUS ACI «oo... cot stwe Bees ee ae HNO,
INitroso-mitric;acidy...° 2.08 ater at H, N, O,
INGriGiACid Sens ts cr eee ee HNO, -

If, however, the terms “‘ hyponitrous”’ and “hyponitric”’ are to be re-
tained for the second and fourth members of the above series, the term
‘‘hydro-nitrosylic’? may serve for the new acid, according to its consti--
tution :—

Hydrogen. Nitrosyl.
H NO

I am at present engaged in the further study of this interesting acid
and its salts, and hope, before very long, to have the honour to make
known the obtained results to the Society.

ApDENDvM, April 26, 1871.

When the above paper was presented to the Royal Society I was not

1871.] On a New Group of Colloid Bodies. 431

aware that the action of sodium amalgam upon alkali nitrites had been
recently investigated by M. Fremy* and M. Maumenéf, neither of whom,
however, have anticipated me in the discovery of the new class of salts here
described. The latter chemist finds that in one set of circumstances this
action gives rise to a body allied in composition and properties to oxyam-
monia, and in another only to ammonia. M. Fremy finds that it produces
oxyammonia, nitrogen which escapes, and nitrous oxide which remains in
solution.

So far as I have since been able to experiment, I have found that, by pro-
ceeding in different ways, a very small and variable amount of oxyammonia,
or a substance resembling it, is often obtained along with the sodium
hyponitrite, which is always formed in material quantity ; and, further, that,
under the circumstances which favour the formation of oxyammonia, there
are also obtained, together with nitrous oxide, the products of the decom-
position of oxyammonia by alkalies—nitrogen and ammonia (Lossen). The
presence of oxyammonia in the product of the action of sodium on sodium
nitrate affords a more satisfactory explanation than that I have given of the
darkening of the silver-salt after precipitation which I have sometimes
observed to occur.

M. Fremy states that alkali nitrites do not decompose potassium per-
manganate; and I now find that my assumption to the contrary is an error,
based on an observation of considerable interest, which is that some good
commercial nitrite im my possession slowly reduces the permanganate. I
have since ascertained that other samples of sodium nitrite have no action
on the permanganate, and that the one which does react with it behaves
also with copper- and lead-salts in such a way as to render very probable the
presence in it of a minute quantity of my new salt. This formation of
hyponitrite, by heating sodium nitrate, if it does really take place, is in
accordance with Hess’s observations of the action of heat on barium nitrate,
and with mine on silver nitrite.—K. D.

III. “Research on a New Group of Colloid Bodies containing
Mercury, and certain Members of the series of Fatty Ketones.”
By J. Emerson Reynoxips, Member of the Royal College of
Physicians, Edinburgh, Keeper of the Mineral Department,
and Analyst to the Royal Dublin Society. Communicated by
Rosert H. Scorr, F.R.S. Received January 19, 1871.

Introduction.—About ten years ago, when engaged in the examination
of some of the constituents of the rectified wood-naphtha of commerce, I
observed that moist and freshly precipitated mercuric oxide was dissolved by
the naphtha in the presence of potassium hydrate, and that the resulting
alkaline solution possessed highly characteristic properties. It was ascer-

* Comptes Rendus (1870), vol. Ixx. pp. 66 & 1208. + Ibid. p. 149.

432 Dr. J. E. Reynolds on a New Group of [Apr. 20,

tained that the solution of mercuric oxide under the conditions mentioned
depended wholly on the presence of aceéone in the crude wood-spirit ;
since pure acetone, when treated in the same way with diluted alkali and
mercuric oxide, afforded the same result, while the remaining constituents
of wood-naphtha failed to produce the reaction.

Though obliged at the time to rest content with recording * the obser-
vations above referred to, I have since been able to resume the inquiry.
As the result, I now venture to lay before the Society the following account
of some members of a series of ketone compounds containing mercury, and
presenting all the characters of strongly marked codloid bodies, though
chemically intermediate between the two groups of colloids previously
made known by the researches of the late Professor Graham.

Acetone, bemg the most important member of the fatty ketone group,
is the body whose compound with mercury I have studied with chief atten-
tion, and I may therefore describe in detail the results obtained with it.

1. Colloid body obtained by uniting Acetone with Mercurie Oxide.—
When solution of mercuric chloride is slowly added to a mixture of acetone
with dilute aqueous solution of potassium hydrate, the mercuric oxide first
precipitated is dissolved, with the production of a clear colourless liquid.
The addition of the mercurial solution can be continued until a white pre-
cipitate makes its appearance, the alkali being still in excess}. If the
solution be filtered at this point, an apparently opalescent, yellowish-
coloured liquid is obtained{. If one portion of this alkaline solution be
boiled for a few minutes, a thick gelatinous mass suddenly separates, and
further ebullition is rendered difficult, if not impossible. Another portion
of the liquid, when treated with an acid im slight excess, gelatinizes; and if
the original solution be moderately strong, the vessel in which the experi-
ment is made may be inverted without risk of spilling its contents.
Finally, if some of the mercuric solution be exposed over sulphuric acid
an vacuo, it leaves on partial evaporation a gelatinous mass, on the surface
of which latter crystals of potassium chloride soon make their appearance.
When the desiccation is complete, a yellowish resinoid body is obtained,
together with a large quantity of very beautiful acicular crystals of the
chloride and a certain amount of potassic carbonate.

The solution of mercuric oxide in potassium hydrate in presence of
acetone takes place as easily in alcoholic as in aqueous liquids.

Preliminary experiments similar to the foregoing were sufficient to in-

* Journal of the Royal Dublin Society, vol. iv. p. 114.

+ The same result can be obtained when mercuric oxide is precipitated from any of
its salts, rapidly washed, and then digested with excess of acetone and potassium
hydrate. The best mode of operating, however, is that stated in the text.

{ The different solutions exhibit a slight opalescence, not completely removable by
ordinary filtration. This opalescence appears to be due to the very gradual separation,
at ordinary temperatures, of traces of the same anhydrous substance which is very

_rapidly thrown down at a boiling heat. In composition the latter body is identical
with the anhydride obtained by other methods and described further on.

1871.] Mercurial Colloids and certain Fatty Ketones. 433

dicate that the chief compound produced in the reaction above referred to
might be regarded as a colloid body. I therefore took advantage of the
late Professor Graham’s beautiful dialytic method * for effecting its puri-
fication from crystalloids, and have met with complete success.

a. Preparation of Colloid Liquid.—As the preparation of a strong
solution of the pure acetone mercuric compound suitable for dialysis is
attended with some difficulty, I may now describe in detail the mode of
operating proved by experience to afford the most satisfactory results.

Forty grammes of pure mercuric chloride are to be dissolved in about
500 cub. centims. of hot water and the solution then allowed to cool, even
though crystals of the salt separate. Twenty-nine grammes of potassium
hydrate are next dissolved in about 300 cub. centims. of water: 15-20 cub.
centims. of acetone should now be placed in a capacious glass balloon, and
diluted with 250 cub. centims. of water. The reaction is then to be
managed as follows :—About 150 cub. centims. of the alkaline solution
should be added to the aqueous acetone, and then 250 cub. centims. of
the mercuric chloride gradually poured in. Re-solution of the mercuric
oxide first thrown down proceeds slowly at the outset, if the mixture be
not warmed. After a time the oxide quickly redissolves, if the contents
of the balloon are briskly agitated. When the first half of the mercuric
solution has been added, the remaining 150 cub. centims. of potassium
hydrate are to be cautiously poured in and the residual mercuric chloride
then mixed, with the precautions already stated.

The solution prepared in the manner described is usually turbid, but
can be easily filtered clear from the small amount of mechanically sus-
pended matter. The filtrate should next be placed on a large hoop
dialyzer, covered as usual with carefully prepared parchment-paper, and
the vessel floated on a considerable volume of distilled water. After two
days’ action the diffusate will be found to contain a large quantity of potas-
sium chloride, some potassium hydrate, and but a very small amount of
mercury. The process of diffusion is to be continued, the diffusate being
replaced by pure water twice each day, until the liquid on which the
dialyzer floats no longer affords a cloud when treated with a solution of
silver nitrate. The process may then be considered terminated, and the
pure colloidal liquid obtained. The contents of the dialyzer can be now
removed, and should be free from ali odour of acetone. A few drops, when
evaporated to dryness on platinum-foil and the residue ignited, should
volatilize completely.

The mode of operating just described affords the strongest colloidal
liquid that can be conveniently prepared directly in a pure state; but
where degree of concentration is of no importance, I find that it is better
to dilute the alkaline mercurial solution with its own volume of pure water
just before dialyzing.

The properties of the colloidal liquid will be described most conveniently

* « Viquid Diffusion applied to Analysis,” Philosophical Transactions, 1861.

43.4: Dr. J. E. Reynolds on a New Group of [Apr. 20,

after the results of the analyses of the anhydrous mercuric compound se-
parable from it in the pure condition shall have been stated.

b.-Analyses of the Anhydrous Compound.—I took a considerable volume
of the very carefully prepared colloid liquid and divided it in two parts.
One portion was very cautiously evaporated to dryness, and the resinoid
residue very finely powdered and carefully dried. The second portion was
precipitated by the addition of dilute acetic acid, and the gelatinous pre-
cipitate washed rapidly and completely with the aid of Bunsen’s filter-
pump, and the residue dried. The desiccation in each case was effected at
first in vacuo over sulphuric acid, and finally on the water-bath. The
compound easily bears a temperature of 100° C. -

On analyzing both products, I found that they were practically identical
in composition. The residue of the evaporation of the colloid liquid con-
tained, as might be anticipated, a slightly greater proportion of mercury
than the precipitate by dilute acid. The circumstances under which the
precipitate was produced, however, were such as to give most confidence in
the purity of the product; I have therefore employed this latter or
similar preparations in many of the determinations, the results of which
will be presently stated.

The compound was found to contain carbon, hydrogen, mercury, and
oxygen, and to be free from chlorine. As the presence of the volatile
metal introduced some difficulty in the determinations, it is necessary to
describe the plan of analysis adopted.

The mercury was in some cases obtained in the metallic state by dis-
tillation with quicklime; but I much prefer to digest a weighed quantity
of the compound in a sealed tube with dilute hydrochloric acid, and, after
complete solution has taken place, to break the tube, precipitate the metal
from the contents by sulphuretted hydrogen, and weigh the mercury in
the usual way as sulphide. The results are very satisfactory.

The presence of a large proportion of mercury in the compound
rendered the accurate determination of carbon and hydrogen somewhat
difficult. At the outset of this investigation I arranged a very troublesome
process of analysis, similar to that employed by Messrs. Frankland and
Duppa in their analysis of mercuric ethide and its analogues. In all later
combustions I have adopted the very simple and satisfactory plan of
placing in the anterior part of the combustion-tube a layer of fifteen cen-
timetres of any metal capable of easily amalgamating with mercury.
Gold- and silver-foil answer the purpose well : no doubt tin-foil might be
used in the same way. It is scarcely necessary to add that the tempera-
ture of the anterior part of the combustion-tube containing the gold or
silver was in each instance very carefully regulated.

The following results were obtained :—

I. :997 grm. of substance gave *9037 grm. of Hg 8.
II. °8618 grm. of substance gave ‘3077 grm. of CO, and ‘1158 grm. of
H;-O:

1871.] Mercurial Colloids and certain Fatty Ketones. 435

III. :4940 grm. of another preparation gave ‘4485 grm. of Hg S.
IV. -6640 grm. afforded :2344 grm. of CO, and 0870 grm. of H, O.
V. 1:2148 grm. of residue of evaporation of colloid liquid gave 9°562
grm. of Hg.
VI. °8156 grm. of another preparation gave °6425 grm. of Hg.
Experiment.

Calculated. Aa aA a
—osN Ik 1 is LEE: IV. V. VI.

WaCHON; 5.5.05 72 9:43 Se OGY | ee 9°62

Hydrogen ...... hao lei 7, ee Tea Ore a PApe Se es a

Mercury..:...... GU0S (S:a05 STS1O Fos IS 26 ca FO fous e

OXVPEN ~....00. 80 10:47 oe sis oe be oe Sos
764 100-00

The composition of the body is therefore well represented by the

formula
((CH,), CO), Hg, O,.

c. Properties of the Colloid Body, Hydrated and Anhydrous.—Ana-
logy would lead us to conclude that the colloidal liquid obtained by
dialysis is a hydrate of the body represented by the above formula; but
since evaporation tm vacuo is sufficient to remove the water completely,
the hydrate can possess but little stability. Properly speaking, this hydrate
is no doubt a true liquid, and as such is miscible with other liquids.

The reaction of this hydrate is neutral to test-papers.

When the aceto-mercuric hydrate contains five per cent. of the anhy-
drous compound, it will, if quite pure, remain liquid for twelve or fourteen
days, toward the end of this time becoming gradually less fluid, until the
whole ‘sets’? to a firm jelly. The same result may be brought about
in a few seconds by the addition to the perfectly neutral liquid of very
minute quantities of any of the following substances :—Hydrochloric,
acetic, nitric, sulphuric (incompletely), chromic, oxalic, tartaric, or citric
acids; by potassium, sodium, ammonium, barium, and calcium hydrates ;
by calcium chloride, mercuric chloride, sodium acetate, and other neutral
salts. Contact with certain insoluble powders, such as calcium carbo-
nate, and even alumina, induces pectization*.

Elevation of temperature quickly determines the gelatination of the
liquid. If containing five per cent. of the ketone compound, a very firm
jelly is produced on heating to 50° C. In one experiment, a quantity of
the liquid was taken and some bright, carefully cleaned copper-gauze
introduced. The liquid did not pectize, nor did any trace of mercury
deposit on the copper, after standing fora day. The temperature of the
whole was then raised to 50° C.; a transparent jelly was at once
produced, of such strength that the vessel in which it was contained could

* In accordance with the nomenclature of Prof. Graham, we must call the liquid

colloid hydrate the “hydrosol” of the new compound, the gelatinous hydrate the
“hydrogel,” and the change from the former to the latter “‘ pectization.”

436 Dr. J. E. Reynolds on a New Group of [ Apr. 20,

be inverted without any risk of loss. This jelly, closing the bright
copper-gauze, has remained in my possession for eight months without
giving the slightest indications of a disposition to change.

Small zoological specimens, when inclosed in the same way in a jelly of
the mercuric ketone compound, were found to keep well when carefully
cleansed before they were sealed up in the gelatinous envelope.

By evaporation, a liquid containing eight per cent. of the ketone com-
pound was obtained, but it pectized in a few jhours. A two per cent.
hydrate retained its liquidity for several months. Once a jelly formed in
any of these liquids, I have not succeeded completely in reconverting it
to the liquid state by very cautious treatment with potassium hydrate, even
when aided by diffusion.

The alcosol of the mercuric ketone compound was obtained by the
method adopted by Prof. Graham in preparing the corresponding silicic
alcoholate, —that is to say, by adding to a one per cent. hydrate an equal
volume of alcohol, and exposing the mixture over quickliime until most
of the water was removed: the alcosol remained. This liquid could be
boiled without pectizing; but if the ebullition continued for some time, a
jelly was suddenly obtained. This insoluble jelly corresponded to that
produced on heating the hydrate, or adding to it any of the bodies capa-
ble of pectizing it; in the former case alcohol, and in the latter water,
being associated or united with the mercuric ketone compound.

It has now been shown that the new body is capable of affording a
hydrosol and hydrogel, an alcosol and alcogel; it must therefore be
regarded as a very strongly marked member of Prof. Graham’s group of
these colloids, though chemically differmg widely from previously de-
scribed compounds of this class.

When the colloid hydrate was treated with sulphuretted hydrogen,
mercuric sulphide was produced. The liquid filtered from the sulphide
yielded acetone on distillation. Digestion with dilute hydrochioric acid
likewise effected the decomposition of the colloid body, mercuric chloride
being produced and acetone liberated. Nitric and sulphuric acids, when
dilute, did not decompose the compound with the same facility as hydro-
chloric acid. ‘Treatment of the hydrosol with copper, zinc, or iron aé or-
dinary temperatures, failed to effect the substitution of either metal for the
mercury in the compound. Prolonged contact with each of the two last-
mentioned metals caused pectization, the metal subsequently becoming
encrusted with a white substance. Heat produced the same result more
rapidly.

When the anhydrous compound was cautiously heated, a quantity of
acetone distilled over, and, as the temperature rose, empyreumatiec pro-
ducts and mercury were evolved. When the heat was suddenly applied,
much metallic mercury distilled over, and a minute quantity of a liquid,
having the odour of mercuric methide, was produced, together with car-
bonic anhydride and other gaseous bodies not particularly examined. If

1871.) Mercurial Colloids and certain Fatty Ketones. 4.37

mercuric methide be formed during the rapid decomposition of the mer-
curie compound, the first step m the reaction by which it is produced
may be explained by the following equation :—

[200(CH,),, 3Hg0]=2 GH | Hg )+Hg+200,+0.

The mercuric methide produced in the first instance, probably at another
stage suffers nearly complete decomposition in presence of the oxygen
liberated at the outset of the reaction.

d. Chemical nature of the Diaceto-mercuric Hydrate.—In the pre-
ceding section the properties of the colloid liquid and other bodies ob-
tained by dialysis from the potass solution have been described; but the
potassium hydrate used in the first instance may be replaced by solution
of sodium, barium, or even calcium hydrate, and yet the same ultimate
result arrived at. When sodium hydrate is employed, no material dif-
ference is observed at any stage of the operations, but when barium
hydrate is substituted, re-solution of mercuric oxide m presence of acetone
is quickly effected with the aid of heat ; but this alkaline solution slowly
decomposes, yieldimg a white precipitate of the mercuric ketone com-
pound, mixed with a little barium carbonate. This decomposition takes
place in closed vessels, and most rapidly when the solution has been
boiled in course of preparation, and when no excess of barium hydrate
has been employed beyond the amount absolutely required to secure the
retention of the mercuric compound im solution.

Keeping in view the peculiar mode of generation of the mercuric

ketone compound, its solubility in alkaline liquids at the time of its forma-
tion, and insolubility without decomposition in acid solutions, its power of
uniting with water to form both liquid and gelatinous hydrates, and the
extremely close analogy of these in properties and relations to the ‘ co-
silicic acids”? of Prof. Graham, we are compelled to attribute to the new
hydrates very feeble acid functions.
_ The alkaline solutions above referred to may therefore be regarded as
containing metallic salts of a peculiar acid, derived from the compound
((CH,),CO),Hg.0,, already described. That these salts are, however,
even more easily decomposed than alkaline silicates is shown :—

Ist. By the easy decomposition of the potassium salt by the process
of liquid diffusion. The osmotic force alone is sufficient for this purpose,
the high diffusive energy of potassium hydrate enabling it to rapidly pass
through the dialytic septum, leaving behind the colloid acid in the liquid
state. The analogous decomposition occurs somewhat less readily in the
case of potassium silicate.

2nd. By the facility with which the new acid may be displaced from
the aqueous solutions of its potassium, sodium, or barium salts by so
feeble an agent as carbonic acid. Solutions of alkaline silicates are well
known to decompose in the same manner, but less rapidly.

438 _ Dr. J. HE. Reynolds on a New Group of [Apr. 20,

8rd. By the fact that heat alone is able to effect the decomposition of
the potassium salt, a solution of the latter giving a yellowish-white precipi-
tate of the anhydrous mercuric ketone compound on violent ebullition,
the alkali remaining dissolved*. Re-solution does not take place on cool-
ing, or on digestion with an excess of the metallic hydrate at the ordinary
temperature.

It is, however, worthy of note here that the gelatinous precipitate produced
by acetic acid in a solution of the potassium salt is soluble in excess of
potassium hydrate immediately after.its formation ; but it soon loses this
property and alters somewhat in appearance, becoming more dense.

With a view to obtain, if possible, some evidence of the basicity of the
acid, a quantity of mercuric chloride was dissolved in water, the theore-
tical proportion of pure acetone added, and excess of potassium hydrate.
Complete re-solution of the mercuric oxide was obtained’as usual. To
the alkaline liquid dilute hydrochloric acid was added, until a moderate
quantity of the white mercuric-acetone compound had been precipitated.
The whole was then filtered as clear as possible. The filtrate now contained,
in addition to potassium chloride resulting from the reaction, a certain
amount of the mercuric-acetone compound, held in solution by a minimum
of alkali. In order to determine the ratio between the anhydride or
acid and potassium present in combination, 100 cub. centims. of this
solution were now taken, treated with excess of hydrochloric acid, and
the mercury precipitated as sulphide by means of sulphuretted hydrogen.
The pure mercuric sulphide obtained in this manner weighed 1°056
gramme: this amount represents 1:1591 gramme of the anhydrous
mercuric-acetone compound, as calculated from the formula already found
for that body.

Another 100 cub. centims. of the same solution were taken, and dilute
sulphuric acid of known strength very.cautiously added, until a drop of
the liquid faintly reddened blue litmus-paper: 5°4 cub. centims. of acid
were required; this amount of acid represented ‘2106 gramme of potas-
sium.

100 cub. centims. of the solution, completely free from eacess of alkali,
therefore contained of

erm
(CO(CH,),),Hg,0,..... ves sisoe ee 11591
Aloe one ba pee 2106

These numbers, when divided in the usual way by the respective atomic
weights, gave the proportion of 1: 3°6.

The foregoing experiment is but one of many performed with a similar
result, the main ratio found for different solutions being 1:3°7. When
the conditions under which the determinations were made are considered,
the ratio 1:4 may be admitted as the true result.

* Tn this, as in many other respects, a strong solution closely resembles in deport-
ment a liquid containing white of egg.

1871.] Mercurial Colloids and certain Fatty Ketones. 439

A solution of the barium salt was now prepared with great care, the
presence of excess of barium hydrate being guarded against by very cau-
tious manipulation in the first instance, and subsequent treatment with

acetone and mercuric chloride, until the liquid ceased to dissolve more
mercuric oxide. The acid treatment resorted to in the case of the potassium
salt was found to be unsuitable in the present instance: 100 cub. centims.
of the clear filtered liquid were taken, immediately after preparation of the
solution, and treated with excess of hydrochloric acid until complete de-
composition was effected ; the mercury was then precipitated as sulphide :
*5062 gramme was obfained; this amount represents °5555 gramme of
the anhydrous mercuric-acetone compound.

100 cub. centims. were treated with a standard acid: 3°3 cub. centims.
were required before an acid reaction was developed; this corresponds
to ‘2244 gramme of barium. 3

We therefore find in 100 cub. centims. of the solution of

BROCE VEO ict ctasliy wacdete MS ‘5555
Bal! Toe

When these numbers are treated as before, we find that the ratio of
anhydrous ketone compound to barium is 1:1°84. As in the case of the
potassium salt, the chances of error are altogether in the direction of
under-estimating the barium and over-estimating the remaining consti-
tuent of the salt; the ratio 1:2 may therefore fairly be taken as the
practical result of these determinations.

Potassium being monovalent and barium divalent, it would appear that
the solutions above mentioned contained respectively the normal potas-
sium and barium salts of an extremely feeble but yet distinctly marked
tetrabasic acid. When any one of these liquids was evaporated to dryness 7
vacuo over sulphuric acid, a resinoid mass was in each case obtained,
from which metallic chloride was removable by water; but since partial
decomposition appeared to. take place during the process of evaporation
in each case, the now insoluble resinoid body, containing potassium, so-
dium, or barium, could not be regarded asa pure salt ; nor have I suc-
ceeded in obtaining any other solid compound of this acid in a condition
suitable for oaage

When to a liquid containing the potassium salt of the acid a solution
of potassium hydrate, eee with zinc hydrate, was added, a semi-
transparent gelatinous precipitate was obtained. On washing with water
this substance quickly became basic. Other attempts with various metals
did not afford better results, precipitates of variable composition being
obtained in each case. It would appear, then, that only the most powerful
soluble metallic hydrates are capable of forcing the new acid to remain
in combination, and that even these alkaline salts are so feebly held
together, that decomposition attends the attempt to obtain them in the
solid state.

VOL XIX. 2M

440 Dr. J. E. Reynolds on a New Group of [Apr. 20,

If we admit the existence of these salts in the solutions examined, they
might be named di-aceto-mercurates, or probably di-keto- mercinates, the.
latter name being used as a general term.

e. Detection of Acetone in the “« Methylated Spirit’? of Consol —
Since acetone is, according to my experience, invariably present in the wood-
spirit of commerce, the reaction with mercuric oxide in presence of potas-
sium hydrate, already described, becomes virtually a test for the presence
‘of pyroxilic spirit in any mixture. The ordinary “ methylated spirit” of
commerce is such a mixture, and the acetone present in it can be detected
with great facility in the following way :—Take 200 cub. centims. of the.
spirit and rapidly distil off 50 cub. centims.; dilute the distillate with an
equal volume of water, and slightly warm with addition of a few cub. centims.
of solution of potassium hydrate. On cautious addition of mercuric chloride,
the oxide first thrown down is speedily redissolved : excess of the mercuric
salt must be carefully avoided. The alkaline liquid should be filtered clear,
much of the alcohol allowed to evaporate slowly, and the residue then di-
vided in two portions. ‘ One'part is to be’violently boiled for a few minutes ;
a yellowish-white gelatinous precipitate will suddenly make its appearance,
if the acetone compound be present. In the second portion, dilute acetic
acid, when added in slight excess, should produce a bulky, white, gela-
tinous precipitate containing, when washed and completely dried, between
78 and 79 per cent. of mercury.

Finally, by means of the above test the admixture of ‘‘ methylated
spirit”? with alcoholic solutions may be detected with facility. In all
such cases, however, a specimen of a pure alcoholic solution should be
tested at the same time as the suspected sample, distillation of considerable
quantities of the liquids being resorted to in every instance.

2. Bodies containing Mercury and higher members of the Fatty Ketone
sertes.—Experience has proved that several ketones of the fatty series are
capable of uniting with mercuric oxide in the presence of alkali to form
compounds analogous to that obtained with acetone. The higher ketones.
being insoluble in water though soluble in alcohol, it was found to be ex-
tremely difficult to prepare the colloidal hydrates or hydrosols of the mer-
curie compound.

In the case of butyrone, however, I have succeeded oes in ob-
taining a hydrosol.

The general reactions of the several solutions leave no doubt that the
compound contained in each belongs to the group of colloid bodies and not
to that of crystalloids.

The following results have been obtained :—

(a) With Propione.—The rectified product of the careful destructive
distillation of barium propionate was dissolved in alcohol and mercuric
chloride added ; excess of strong aqueous solution of potassium hydrate
was then poured in; on gently warming the mixture the mercuric oxide
dissolved in great part. The liquid, filtered as clear as possible, was found

1871.] | Mercurial Colloids and certain Fatty Ketones. AAT

to be rich in mercury, and when treated with excess of dilute acetic acid,
gave a white gelatinous precipitate precisely analogous to that obtained
under similar circumstances from the potassium di-aceto-mercurate.

The precipitate was found on analysis to contain 72:26 per cent. of mer-
eury; the formula requires 73°17 per cent. On treatment with hydro-
chloric acid, the precipitate afforded mercuric chloride and an oily liquid,
insoluble in water, possessing the odour of and characters attributed to
propione.

(b) With Butyrone.—The rectified product of the destructive distilla-
tion of calcium butyrate, when dissolved in alcohol and treated with mer-
euric chloride and potassium hydrate, gave, on warming, a liquid similar
to that obtained with propione. Like the latter, it afforded a white pre-
cipitate on treatment with excess of dilute acetic acid. The precipitate,
when carefully washed and dried, contained 69°1 and 69°27 per cent. of
mercury, the formula ((C,H,),CO)Hg,0, requiring 68°49 per cent. The
freshly prepared precipitate, when digested with excess of hydrochloric acid,
afforded mercuric chloride and a small quantity of a liquid insoluble in
water and recognizable as butyrone.

The alkaline alcoholic solution of the butyrone mercuric compound was
diluted with its own volume of water, then filtered and carefully warmed
in order to slowly evaporate the alcohol as much as possible. Whena
considerable portion of the latter had been removed in this way, the clear
residual liquid was placed on a dialyzer, and the attempt made to diffuse
away the crystalloids from the liquid. After treatment for five days, most
of the chloride had diffused away, and a liquid was obtained which pec-
tized on heating to near the boiling-point and on the addition of a small
quantity of a mineral acid. The precipitate first formed by hydrochloric
acid was easily redissolved on heating with excess of the reagent, and the
odour of the ketone developed. The attempt to convert the alcosol of the
mercuric compound into the ee had EL oe been attended with,
SUCCESS.

(c) With Valerone, abiaanted by paceine the product of i distillation
of calcium valerate previously mixed with one-sixth of its weight of quick-
lime. When this was dissolved in alcohol and the solution was rendered
alkaline by potassium hydrate and mercuric chloride dropped in, the mer-
curic oxide first precipitated was speedily redissolved ; but from the solution
no precipitate was thrown down on addition of an acid previously mixed,
with alcohol. I have not obtained any compound from this alkaline liquid
possessing distinctive properties. It is not improbable that the valerone
mercuric compound, if formed, is more easily decomposed by acids than
the corresponding bodies obtained with other ketones; hence the difficulty
of isolating it.

3. Deportment of certain Aldehydes in presence of Mercurie Oxide and
Alkaline Metalic Hydrate.—The close similarity in che mical relations be-

2M 2

AAL2 On a New Group of Mercurial Colloids &c. (Apr. 20,

tween the members of the groups of ketones and of aldehydes suggested
the attempt to combine the latter bodies with mercuric oxide. Though the
experiments in this direction cannot properly be detailed in this communi-
cation, I may be permitted to state that when the aldehyde of the ethyl
series was warmed with freshly precipitated mercuric oxide in presence of
potassium hydrate, solution of the oxide did not take place, but the latter
gradually united with the aldehyde to form a white non-crystalline com-
pound. I have not obtained any colloid liquid in the course of my experi-
ments with this body.

Certain other aldehydes of the same series were found to unite with
mercuric oxide, yielding soluble compounds easily decomposed by weak
acids.

The investigation of the bodies produced in these reactions has been
attended with peculiar difficulty, owing, on the one hand, to the facility
with which several aldehydes are converted into resinoid products of va-
riable composition by contact with caustic alkali; and, on the other, to
the circumstance that an aldehyde can react either as the oxide of a di-
valent group (C,Hoe,'O), or as the hydride of a monovalent acid radical
(C,Hen-10, H, or, for terms of the series above methylic aldehyde, we
may write the formula CO(C,,H2,_1) H). It may be added, that the well-
known tendency of the aldehyde to yieid polymeric compounds has in no
degree lessened the uncertainty attending the examination of the products
of the action of mercuric oxide and alkali upon the members of the group.

Leaving the statements contained in the last section out of consideration
for obvious reasons, I may now be allowed to summarize the results of the
investigation detailed in the foregoing pages. It has been shown :—

Ist. That certain fatty ketones can be made to unite directly with mer-
curic oxide.

2nd. That the resulting compounds afford a new group of colloid hy-
drates, analogous in properties to the silicic, alouminic, and other hydrates
already made known by the researches of Professor Graham.

3rd. That the new hydrates may best be regarded as extremely feeble
conjugate acids, the chief member of the group (that derivable from
acetone) being probably tetrabasic and capable of affording very unstable
salts.

Ath. That the generating reaction for the idlaston mercurates may, when
carefully controlled, be employed as a test for the presence of a ketone
(especially for acetone) in certain organic mixtures.

1871.] Dr. C. W. Siemens on Electrical Resistance, 443

April 27, 1871,
Gencral Sir EDWARD SABINHE, K.C.B., President, in the Chair.

Tue Baxertan Lecture was delivered by Cuartes WILLIAM
Siemens, F.R.S., D.C.L., “ On the Increase of Electrical Re-
sistance in Conductors with rise of Temperature, and its appli-
cation to the Measure of Ordinary and Furnace Temperatures ;
also on a simple Method of measuring Electrical Resistances,”
The following is an Abstract.

The first part of this Paper treats of the question of the ratio of increase
of resistance in metallic conductors with increase of temperature.

The investigations of Arndtson, Dr. Werner Siemens, and Dr. Matthies-
sen are limited to the range of temperatures between the freezing- and
boiling-points of water, and do not comprise platinum, which is the most
valuable metal for constructing pyrometric instruments.

Several series of observations are given on different metals, including
platinum, copper, and iron, ranging from the freezing-point to 350° Cent. ;
another set of experiments being also given, extending the observations to
1000° Cent. These results are planned on a diagram, showing a ratio of
increase which does not agree either with the former assumption of a uni-
form progression, or with Dr. Matthiessen’s formula, except between the
narrow limits of his actual observations, but which conforms itself to a
parabolic ratio, modified by two other coefficients, representing linear ex-
pansion and an ultimate minimum resistance.

In assuming a dynamical law, according to which the electrical resistance
of a conductor increases according to the velocity with which the atoms are
moved by heat, a parabolic ratio of increase %f resistance with increase of
temperature follows ; and in adding to this the coefficients just mentioned,
the resistance 7 for any temperature is expressed by the general formula ~

r=aT?#+6T+y,
which is found to agree very closely both with the experimental data at
low temperatures supplied by Dr. Matthiessen, and with the author’s ex-
perimental results, ranging up to 1000° Cent. He admits, however, that
further researches will be necessary to prove the limits of the applicability
of the law of increase expressed by this formula to conductors generally,
especially when nearing their fusing-point.

In the second part of this Paper it is shown that, in taking advantage of
the circumstance that the electrical resistance of a metallic conductor in-
creases with an increase of temperature, an instrument may be devised for
measuring with great accuracy the temperature at distant or inaccessible
places, including the interior of furnaces, where metallurgical or other
smelting-operations are carried on.

444, Dr. C. W. Siemens on Electrical Resistance. [Apr. 27,

In measuring temperatures not exceeding 100° Cent., the instrument is

so arranged that two similar coils are connected by a light cable containing
three insulated wires. One of these coils, ‘‘ the thermometer-coil,” being
carefully protected against moisture, may be lowered into the sea, or buried
in the ground, or fixed at any elevated or inaccessible place whose tempe-
rature has to be recorded from time to time; while the other, or ‘‘ com-
parison-coil,’’ is plunged into a test-bath, whose temperature is raised or
lowered by the addition of hot or cold water, or of refrigerated solutions,
until an electrical balance is established between the resistances of the two
coils, as indicated by a galvanoscope, or by a differential voltameter, de-
scribed in the third part of the paper, which balance implies an identity of
temperature at the two coils. The temperature of the test-solution is
thereupon measured by means of a delicate mercury thermometer, which
at the same time tells the temperature at the distant place.
_ By another arrangement the comparison-coil is dispensed with, and the
resistance of the thermometer-coil, which is a known quantity at zero tem-
parature, is measured by a differential voltameter, which forms the subject
of the third part of the paper; and the temperature corresponding to the
indications of the instrument is found in a table, prepared for this pur-
pose, in order to save all calculation.

In measuring furnace temperatures the platinum-wire constituting the
pyrometer is wound upon a small cylinder of porcelain contained in a
closed tube of iron or platinum, which is exposed to the heat to be mea-
sured. If the heat does not exceed a full red heat, or, say, 1000° Cent.,
the protected wire may be left permanently in the stove or furnace whose
temperature has to be recorded from time to time ; but in measuring tem-
peratures exceeding 1000° Cent., the tube is only exposed during a mea-
sured interval of, say, three minutes, to the heat, which time suffices for the
thin protecting casing and the wire immediately exposed to its heated sides
to acquire within a determinable limit the temperature to be measured, but
is not sufficient to soften the porcelain cylinder upon which the wire is
wound. In this way temperatures exceeding the welding-point of iron,
and approaching the melting-point of platinum, can be measured by the
game instrument by which slight variations at ordinary. temperatures are
told. A thermometric scale is thus obtained embracing without a break
the entire range.

The leading wires between the thermometric coil and the measuring in-
strument (which may be, under certain circumstances, several miles in length)
would exercise a considerable disturbing influence if this were. not elimi-
nated by means of the third leading wire before mentioned, which is
common to both branches of the measuring instrument.

Another source of error in the electrical pyrometer would arise through
the porcelain cylinder upon which the wire is wound becoming conductive
at very elevated temperatures ; but it is shown that the error arising through
this source is not of serious import.

1871.] M. Berthelot on Chemical Combination. 445

The third part of the paper is descriptive of an instrument for measuring
electrical resistance without the aid of a magnetic needle or of resistance
scales. It consists of two voltameter tubes fixed upon graduated scales,
which are so connected that the current of a battery is divided between
them, with one branch including a known and permanent resistance, and the
other the unknown resistance to be measured. ‘The resistance and pola-
rization being equal, and the battery being common to both circuits, these
unstable elements are eliminated by balancing them from the circulation ;
and an expression is found for the unknown resistance X in terms of the
known resistances C and y of the voltameter, including the connecting-
wires, and of the volumes V and V’ of gases evolved in an arbitrary space
of time within the tubes, viz. :—

X=—,(C+y)- Visa ova wiakiepeeaeeh)

Changes of atmospheric pressure affect both sides equally, and do not
therefore influence the results ; but a reading at the atmospheric pressure
is obtained at both sides by lowering the little supply-reservoir with dilute
acid to the level indicated in the corresponding tube. The upper ends of
the voltameter tubes are closed by small weighted levers provided with
cushions of India-rubber ; but after each observation these levers are raised,
and the supply-reservoirs moved so as to cause the escape of the gases until
the liquid within the tubes is again brought up to the zero-line of the scale,
when the instrument is ready for another observation. A series of mea-
surements are given of resistances varying from | to 10,000 units, showing
that the results agree within one-half per cent. with the independent
measurements obtained of the same resistances by the Wheatstone method.

The advantages claimed for the proposed instrument are, that it is not
influenced by magnetic disturbances or the ship’s motion if used at sea,
that it can be used by persons not familiar with electrical testing, and that
it is of very simple construction.

The following communications were read :—

I. “On the Change of Pressure and Voluine produced by Giunta]
Combination.” By M..Brrtnetor. Communicated by Dr.
Wiiramson. Received April 25, 1871.

1. A singular question has arisen in the study of the gaseous com-
binations, viz. can the pressure be diminished in consequence of a reac-
tion, at the moment it is accomplished, at constant volume, without loss
of heat, so that the phenomenon of explosion comes from the excess of
atmospheric pressure upon the inner pressure of the system, instead of
coming from the inverse excess of the inner pressure? The discussion of
this question, however special it appears at first sight, leads to general
notions concerning chemical combination.

446 M. Berthelot on the Change of Pressure and Volume [Apr. 27,

2. The pressure depends upon the temperature evolved, and upon the
state of condensation of the products. Let us determine this quantity.
_ Let ¢ be the temperature produced by the real reaction, this being
effected at a constant volume, admitting that the whole of the disengaged
heat was employed in warming the products.

Let V be the sum of the volumes of the gaseous bodies in the initial
system at 0° and 0™ 760.

At the Lenaperauune ¢, the final ayetens contains in general certain gaseous
bodies.

Let V’ be the volume of these Lae supposed to be brought, without
changing their state, to 0° and 0™*7

The relation = K CxPresses the condensation produced by the reaction.

When certain bodies, contained in the initial system at 0°, or in the final
system at ¢°, are in the solid or the liquid state, you can generally neglect
their volume in comparison with that of the gas, when the pressures are not
too considerable. Let us calculate the pressure during the reaction which
takes place at a constant volume and at the temperature ¢, the initial
temperature and pressure being 0° and H.

In admitting Marriotte’s and Gay-Lussac’s laws, the pressure will
become

Hx 2(1+ad);
it will be greater than the initial pressure if 1 + a¢>K, less if 1+aé<K,
or equalif 1+a¢=K. Let us observe that ¢= = Q being the quantity of

heat produced in the reaction, and e being the mean specific heat of the
products between 0° and 2°.

Let us develope this solution.

3. The pressure augments when the condensation is null, for instance
chlorine and hydrogen, K=1; and especially when there is dilatation
(combustion of acetylene by oxygen), ¢ being always positive ina direct and
rapid reaction between gaseous bodies.

4. On the contrary, the pressure diminishes if K is very great—that is,
in the case of a system containing gaseous bodies transformed entirely into
products which are in the solid or liquid state at the temperature deve-
loped by the reaction. This case is more rare than one would think at
first sight, because very few compounds subsist wholly at the high tempe-
rature that would be developed by the integral union of their gaseous com-
ponents. Generally a portion of these remain free at the moment of the
reaction; but in the present state of our knowledge it is impossible to
estimate the pressure corresponding to effects so complex.

It is necessary to consider that the present case must not be confounded
with the case in which the products formed in the gaseous state and at the
temperature of the reaction are liquefied or solidified under the influence

1871.] produced by Chemical Combination. 447

of a subsequent cooling ; for instance, the formation of water from its ele-
ments, or of chlorhydrate of ammonia from hydrochloric acid and am-
monia, produce equally a diminution in the final pressure.

5. In theory the most interesting case is that in which the initial and
final systems are wholly constituted of gaseous bodies, whose volume (cal-
culated at 0° and 0™:760) is more condensed in the final than in the initial
system. But this condensation is always comprised within very narrow
limits, such as K =4 (formation of arsenious acid by the elements),
K=3, 2, 14, &c.; so the fundamental condition

+a <K, or Q<273 (K—l)¢,

that determines a diminution of pressure, should be realized only in very
exceptional cases and when the heat evolved by an integral reaction is very
little.

One can ascertain it in making the calculation by means of the specific
heats at constant volume (deduced with ordinary coefficient from the
specific heats at constant pressure which M. Regnault has determined for
many bodies). One can also make the calculation in a more general
manner, in admitting with Clausius that the specific heats at constant
volume have an identical value for the atomic weights of elements, that
this value is equal to 2, 4, the number found for H=1, and that it does
not change from the fact of combination. W being the quantity of heat
produced in a reaction between gaseous bodies calculated for atomic
weights, and » the number of atoms in the reaction, the pressure will
diminish only if

W < 655 (K—1).

It is easy to see that this condition is not fulfilled in the combinations
best known. Calculating, either by means of this formula or by means of
the preceding, I have not succeeded in discovering any example of diminu-
tion of pressure among the numerous reactions I have examined in this
present research.

Besides, it is sufficient to make the calculation for the reaction supposed
integral, the conclusion being generally the same for the reaction supposed
incomplete, that is to say in the case of dissociation, as it would be easy to
prove.

6. Without further extending this discussion, I believe that a new
general proposition relative to chemical combination can be deduced from
it. It is known that every direct reaction which can be accomplished in
a very short time between gaseous bodies with formation of gaseous com-
pounds, produces a disengagement of heat: this is true for all reactions
evolved by chemical forces alone, acting without help of any work done
by exterior forces*. The new proposition is the following :—

The heat produced in a reaction of this sort, supposing it to be applied

* This proposition is contained in a more general one, which I have given in
* Annales de Chimie et Physique,’ 4™¢ série, t, xviii.

448 - The Astronomer Royal on the | (Apr. 27,

‘exclusively and without any loss to warm the products, is such that an
augmentation of pressure always takes place at a constant volume, or,
what is the same thing, an augmentation of volume at a constant pressure.

This proposition results not from any ¢@ priori deduction, but is verified
by the whole of facts known to this day.

7. One may ask if the change of volume, in which the gases keep the
whole heat produced by their mutual actions, is regulated by a simple law,
‘analogous to those that have been observed when the gaseous combinations
are brought to the same temperature; nevertheless it does not appear to
be so.

Let us compare ‘the formation ie the different hydracids by means of
their gaseous elements, which gives no change of volume when the gas is
reduced at 0° and 0"°760. .

The formation of chlorhydrie g gas, HCl, ebdues 23,900 calories; the
formation of bromhydric gas, H Br, produces 13,400 calories; the for-
mation of iodhydric gas, HI, produces 800 calories. The specific heat of
these gases being nearly the same under the same volume, it is clear that
-the quautities of heat aforesaid cannot produce an augmentation of volumes
identical or proportional with simple numbers.

‘II. ** Remarks on the Determination of a Ship’s Place at Sea.” In
a Letter to Prof. Stroxes. By G. B. Arry, UL.D., &e., Astro-

nomer Royal.
Reval Obseréatont Greenwich, 8.E.,

1871, April 5.

My prar Sir,—In the last published Number of Proceedings of the
Royal Society*, there are remarks by Sir William Thomson on ‘the pro-
_posed method for determining the locus of a ship’s place at sea, by making
-one observation of the sun’s (or other body’s) altitude, and founding, on
this, computations of longitude with two assumptions of latitude ; and there
are suggestions, with a specimen of tables, for solving the spherical tri-
angles which occur in all similar nautical observations, on the principle of
drawing a perpendicular arc of great circle from one angle of a spherical
triangle upon the opposite side.

In regard to this principle and the tables which may be used with it pel
may call attention to the employment of a similar method by Major-
General Shortrede, in his ‘ Latitude and Declination Tables,’ pp. 148 and
180. Inp. 150, line 11 from the bottom, it will be seen that the “‘column”’
gives the trial-value of the perpendicular arc by which the two right-angled
triangles are computed. This is not the same (among the various elements
which may be chosen) as Sir William Thomson’s; but it is so closely re-
lated that in some instances the tabular numbers are identically the same

_as Sir W. Thomson’s, though in a different order. General Shortrede’s

* Vol, xix. p. 259,

1871.] Determination of a Ship’s Place at Sea. 449

object was “ Great Circle Sailing,” in which the trigonometrical problem

is the same as in the nautical observation. I think, however, that Sir
W. Thomson deserves thanks for calling attention to the application of
this method to time-determinations.

In regard to the problem of the ‘locus,’ allow me to point out the
geometrical circumstances of the case. If, upon a celestial globe, an are of
small circle be swept with the sun’s (or other body’s) place for centre, and
the observed zenith-distance for radius, the ship’s zenith will be somewhere
in that curve; and if, with the pole for centre, arcs of parallels be swept
with the two assumed colatitudes for radii, the intersection of these two curves
with the first drawn curve will give the ship’s zenith on the two assumptions ;
and if within the celestial globe there be placed a small terrestrial globe,
and if these zenith-points be radially projected upon the terrestrial globe,
the terrestrial places of the ship on the two assumptions will be marked.
But the practical application of this requires that the position of the ter-
restrial globe, or of the earth, be known in respect of rotation,—that is, it
requires that the Greenwich sidereal time, or solar time, be known; in
other words, it requires a perfect chronometer. Now the experience of
Captain Moriarty, cited by Sir W. Thomson, does not apply here. Cap-
tain Moriarty received time-signals from the Royal Observatory through
the cable every day, and he had therefore a perfect chronometer. But
other ships have no such perfect chronometer ; and though the direction of
a locus, as determined above, may be sufficiently certain, yet its place upon
the earth will be uncertain, by a quantity depending on the uncertainty of
the chronometer. Thus three chronometers may give the following posi-
tions for the iocus-curve :— |

Chron. No. 1. Chron. No. 2. Chron. No. 3.

And the question now presents itself, which uncertainty is the greater,
—the uncertainty of latitude, which it is the real object of this problem to
remedy? or the uncertainty of the chronometric longitude, which must be
used in attempting to find the remedy? I do not doubt the instant reply
of any practical navigator, that the chronometric longitude is far more un-
certain than the latitude; and if it be so, the whole method falls to the
ground.

I fear that a publication like that which has been given to this method
may do very great injury among navigators who are not accustomed to in-
vestigate the geometrical bearings of such operations, and may lead them
into serious danger. :

T am, my dear Sir, yours very truly,

G. B. Airy.
Professor Stokes, Secretary of the Royal Society.

450 Prof. P. M. Duncan on Guynia annnlata. [May 4,

[From a general recollection of a conversation I had with Sir W. Thom-
son before the presentation of his paper, I do not imagine his object to
have been exactly what the Astronomer Royal here describes, but partly the
saving of trouble in numerical calculation, partly the exhibition, for each
separate observation of altitude at a noted chronometer time, of precisely
what that observation gives, neither more nor less, which introduces at the
same time certain facilities for the determination of a ship’s place by a
combination of two observations. Of course the place so determined is
liable to an error east or west corresponding to the unknown error of the
chronometer; and doubtless, under ordinary circumstances, this forms the
principal error to which the determination of a ship’s place is liable. This
remains precisely as it did before; and it is hard to suppose that the mere
substitution of a graphical for a purely numerical process could lead a
navigator to forget that he is dependent upon his chronometer, though
perhaps the general tone of Sir W. Thomson’s paper might render an
explicit warning desirable, such as that which Mr, Airy supplies.—G. G.
STOKES. |

May 4, 1871.
Sir PHILIP GREY-EGERTON, Bart., Vice-President, in the Chair.

In conformity with the Statutes, the names of the Candidates recom-
mended for election into the Society were read from the Chair, as
follows :—

William Henry Besant, M.A. Richard Quain, M.D.

William Budd, M.D. | Carl Schorlemmer, Esq.

George William Callender, F.R.C.S. | Edward Thomas, Esq.

William Carruthers, Esq. Edward Burnet Tylor, Esq.
Robert Etheridge, F.1R.8.E. Cromwell Fleetwood Varley, C.I.
Frederick Guthrie, B.A. Arthur Viscount Walden, P.Z.S.
John Herschel, Capt. R.E. John Wood, F.R.C.S.

Alexander Moncrieff, Capt. M.A.

The following communications were read :—

I. “On the Structure and Affinities of Guynia annulata, Dunc.,
with Remarks upon the Persistence of Palzeozoic Types of Ma-
dreporaria.” By P. Marrin Duncan, M.B. Lond., F.R.S.,
Professor of Geology in King’s College, London. Received —
March 16, ¥871.

(Abstract.)

The dredging-expedition which searched the sea-floor in the track of the
Gulf-stream of 1868, yielded, amongst other interesting Madreporaria, a
form which has been described by Count Pourtales under the name of

1871.] Dr. A. Schrauf on Molybdates and Vanadates of Lead. 451

Haplophyllia paradoxa, and which was decided by him to belong to the
section Rugosa.

The last expedition of the ‘ Porcupine,’ under the supervision of Dr.
Carpenter, F.R.S., and Mr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys, F.R.S., obtained, off the
Adventure Bank in the Mediterranean, many specimens of a coral which
has very remarkable structures and affinities. The species is described
under the name of Guynia annulata, Dunc. The necessity of including it
amongst the Rugosa and in the same family, the Cyathoxvonide, as Haplo-
phyllia paradoxa is shown.

Having this proof of the persistence of the rugose type from the
Palzeozoic seas to the present, the affinities of some so-called anomalous
genera of Midtertiary and Secondary deposits are critically examined.
The Australian tertiary genus Conosmilia, three of whose species have
strong structural resemblance with the Rugosa, is determined to be allied
to the Stauride, and especially to the Permian genus Polycelia. The
Secondary and Tertiary genera with hexameral, octomeral, or tetrameral and
decameral septal arrangements are noticed, and the rugose characteristics
of many lower Liassic and Rhetic species are examined.

The impossibility of maintaining the distinctness of the Paleeozoic and
Neozoic coral-faunas is asserted; and it is attempted to be proved that
whilst some rugose types have persisted, hexameral types have originated
from others, and have occasionally reverted to the original tetrameral
or octomeral types, and that the species of corals with the confused
and irregular septal members so characteristic of the lowest Neozoic strata
descended from those Rugosa which have an indefinite arrangement of the
septa.

The relation between the Australian Tertiary and recent faunas, and those
of the later Palzeozoic and early Neozoic in Europe, is noticed, and also the
long-continued biological alliances between the coral-faunas of the two
sides of the Atlantic Ocean.

II. “On the Molybdates and Vanadates of Lead, and on a new
Mineral from Leadhills.” By Professor Dr. ALBerr Scuravr,
of Vienna. Communicated by Professor W. H. Mituzr, For. Sec.
R.S. (Translated from the Author’s Manuscript by Count A.
Fr, MarscHatt.) Received March 9, 1871.

In 1825*, Professor Wohler published the analysis of a rare variety of
pyromorphite from Leadhills, which he describes as an aggregation of very
diminutive, orange-red hexagonal crystals, fixed on cerussite. The nor-
mal constituents of pyromorphite are mixed in them with small quantities
of iron and arsenic. Professor Wéhler having ascertained the existence of
vanadate of lead only five years later (1830), and the presence of partly

* Poggendorfi’s Ann. vol. iv. p. 169.

452 Dr. A. Schrauf on Molybdates and Vanadates of Lead. [May 4,

chromium, partly vanadium in Russian specimens of pyromorphite having
been stated, it may be supposed that the red pyromorphite from Leadhills
owes its characteristic coloration to one of the two elements named before.

An examination of a great number of cabinet specimens from Leadhills
gave no satisfactory result. I could not find any red pyromorphite, as de-
scribed by Professor Wohler, on the specimens at my disposal, and must
consequently leave unproved the above-stated supposition concerning the
colouring-substance of red pyromorphite. A cabinet specimen, dating
from the years 1820-1825, gave me, however, the proof that the specimens
of cerussite found at Leadhills during this period were not completely
free from an admixture of molybdenum and vanadium. I succeeded in
finding out a specimen of crystallized ‘‘ vanadine-molybdate of lead ” from
Leadhills so strikingly different in crystallographical and chemical cha-
racters from its nearest allies, wulfenite and descloizite, that I am authorized
to consider it as the type of a new species, for which I propose the name
of ‘eosite,”’ alluding to its saturated aurora-red colour.

§ 1. Paragenetic relations of Eosite.

' The cabinet specimen on which I have found the crystals of eosite has
been in possession of the Imperial Museum since 1828 ; it must therefore,
as remarked above, date from the years between 1820 and 1825. Its matrix,
abundantly beset with crystals of cerussite, is cellular, ochreous galena.
The crystals of cerussite, about 3-8 millimetres in size, bear the aspect of
plates, and are greenish yellow; some of them completely fill up a deep
cavity in the ochreous matrix, others are scattered on the surface of the
specimen. ‘This cerussite, as also some parts of the matrix, is in several
points covered with small moss-like aggregations of delicate and minute
acicular yellow crystals. If such a fascicular aggregation is detached, and
the concentrically grouped acicular crystals taken away, their nucleus is
found to be a very small red crystal fixed on cerussite. When examined
with a powerful magnifying-lens, the specimen shows about twenty such
minute red crystals more or less scattered over the surface of the cerussite,
wrapped up, some of them entirely, others only by half, in the above-
described fine yellow acicular crystals. As was subsequently proved by
precise determination, the minute red octahedra are eosite, and the yellow
acicular crystals are pyromorphite.

These last crystals, being only 3-1 millimetre in length and about +,
millimetre in thickness, could only be determined by the aid of the micro-

scope.
They are yellow, pellucid or transparent, very brilliant, with hght-yellow

streaks. The microscope shows prismatic planes without any distins
guishable terminal planes. As previously for my investigations on labra-
dorite, I used for the measurement of the angles of the prismatic planes
a vertical circle adapted above the horizontal table of the microscype,
whose axis bears the object to be measured beneath the microscope’s focus ;

1871.] Dr. A. Schrauf on Molybdates and Vanadates of Lead. 453

the crystal fixed to the axis being duly adjusted and centred; the pro-
ceedings go on as usual. ‘Two acicular crystals, duly adjusted, gave as

results:
0°,
60°,
120?;
180°,

from which the planes, including them, must be admitted to be those of a
regular hexagonal prism.

Their colour, and even their streak, being light yellow, they may: be
either mimesite or pyromorphite on vanadate of lead. A drop of hydro-
chloric acid poured on such a erystal makes its tint vanish gradually
without bringing to view a dark-brown nucleus (as is the case with vana-
date of lead), and finally produces a pseudomorph of white chloride of
lead. By heating on charcoal, a brown globule with facetted surfaces is
produced ; traces of lead are obtained ; the smell of arsenic is very insignifi-
cant. “Fusing with bisulphate of potash in a platinum spoon gives merely
a portion of white saline substance. All these tests were indicative of
pyromorphite without any admixture of vanadium ; the quantities submitted
to operation being, however, very minute, a definitive judgment is not to be
pronounced.

§ 2. Chemical Characters of Eosite.

The crystals of this mineral are all below 4 millim. in size, and difficult
to be freed from the acicular pyromorphite covering them. They are
easily detached from the cerussite, on whose surface they are fixed. Their
hardness lies between 3 and 4 (Mohs’s scale). When compressed, they
are crushed into small, irregular granules, showing slight traces of cleavage.

The colour of the eosite is a saturated aurora-red, even deeper than that
of chromate of lead, and approaching the tint of realgar; the red tint of
the wulfenite from Ruskberg (Banat) is less intense, that of the Phenix-
ville specimens has more of yellow in it; the tints of dechenite and des-
cloizite vary between brownish carnation and greenish brown.

The powder resulting from the friction on a hard surface is brownish
orange in eosite, somewhat darker than that from red chromate of lead.

Like the powder from chromate of lead, or from red wulfenite, that from
eosite loses its colour and becomes white by contact with hydrochloric
acid. This solution, diluted and spread over a glass plate, shows under
the microscope the formation of chloride of lead in white acicular crystals.
A minute splinter of eosite, when put on a glass plate and a drop of cold
hydrochloric acid poured on it, undergoes, within a quarter of an hour, a
partial solution along its margins, pseudomorphizing into white chloride
of lead, the interior still remaining partly unaltered. The solution in
hydzochlorie acid is slightly tinted with yellow; chromate of lead and
vanadinite are more easily dissolved, and the tints of their solutions are more

454 Dr. A. Schrauf on Molybdates and Vanadates of Lead. [May 4,

intense. Wulfenite, even when used in fragments ten times larger, loses
its colour and becomes white in far shorter time.

If a splinter of eosite is dissolved in a drop of slightly heated hydrochloric
acid, the solution spread on a glass plate, some alcohol added to it, and
the whole again heated to dryness*, a bluish deposit, somewhat verging
into greenish grey, is obtained. With respect to the quantity of eosite
experimented upon, and to the extent of the deposit, its tint may be consi-
dered asof medium intensity; it is bordered on its margin by adelicate green,
somewhat acicular precipitate. Fragments of yellow wulfenite, vanadinite,
or red chromate of lead, of equal size and treated in the same way, give
different deposits on the glass plate,—wulfenite a deep blue one (on ac-
count of the formation of molybdate of molybdenum), vanadinite a yellowish
or bluish-green one, and crocoite a feeble yellowish-green onef. The
crystals of eosite being of scarce occurrence and of diminutive size, only
few experiments could be made concerning the action of the blowpipe on
them.

Eosite, when heated in a glass tube, assumes a darker tint without
decrepitating, and, when cooled, takes again its original colour. A splinter
of this mineral, mixed with three times its volume of bisulphate of potash
and fused on platinum-foil, gives under a glowing heat a transparent,
nearly colourless saline mass with a very slight light-yellow tint. During
its cooling, this mass becomes for a moment reddish brown, and, after
complete cooling, assumes a light orange-brown tint.

Comparative experiments made with chromate, vanadate, and molybdate
of lead, as also with binary mixtures of the powders of these three sub-
stances, proved the colour of the eosite salt to approach very nearly the
tint of the saline mass obtained by fusing a mixture of two to three
parts of molybdate of lead and one part of vanadate of lead with bisul-
phate of potash.

The substance obtained by fusing eosite with bisulphate of potash,
brought into contact with water in a platinum spoon, gives a solution
which, some tin-foil being added to it and the whole being brought to
ebullition{, assumes a faint greenish-blue tint. A second experiment gave
the same result, and proved the solution to give, when further evapo-
rated, a yellowish-brown residuum—possibly caused by the presence of

* Tt must be remarked that all these experiments have been made under the micro-
scope, or, at least, under a powerful magnifying-lens, so that it was impossible to sepa-
rate the chloride of lead from the solution containing molybdenum.

+ As M. Czudnowicz has stated (Poggendorff’s Ann. vol. cxx. p. 17), the action of
alcohol on the hydrochloric solution of vanadium gives rise to precipitates tinted between
blue or brown, according to the degree of oxidation. I also obtained at first, by mixing
with alcohol a solution of vanadate of lead, precipitates changing from yellowish green
into brown, according to the degree of heat. The exact and constant temperature for
the evaporation of alcohol was, however, soon ascertained by a series of experiments.

t The splinters of eosite submitted to chemical action being scarcely 3 millim. in
size, the chloride of lead could not be isolated.

1871.} Dr. A. Schrauf on Molybdates and Vanadates of Lead. 455

vanadium. Wulfenite, treated in the same way, gave a deep blue tint,
vanadinite a light yellowish-green, and chromate of lead a light yellowish
grey of the saline solution heated in contact with tin-foil. :

It would be desirable to ascertain experimentally the presence of other
metals besides lead, were not the scarcity of the material an obstacle to
any further experiments besides those of absolute necessity.

Considering the whole of the experiments above described, the way
in which eosite is acted upon by heating in a glass tube, by hydrochloric
acid, alcohol, and bisulphate of potash, proves this mineral to be essen-
tially a vanado-molybdate of lead; possibly with an excess of molybdenum,
as it may be supposed from the colorations caused by chemical action, the
presence of an undoubtedly minute quantity of chromium being concealed
by the chemical action of the prevalent constituents *.

The investigations here detailed having ascertained the presence of lead,
molybdenum, and vanadic acid in eosite, it is still to be proved that the
chemical actions of vanadate and molybdate of lead are essentially different
from those manifested by eosite, and that consequently this mineral is to
be identified neither with the red varieties of wulfenite actually known, nor
with the crystals of dechenite, vanadinite, or descloizite.

§ 3. Chemical Properties of the Chromo-Wulfenites.

The late Professor H. Rose (Poggendorff’s Ann. vol. xlvi. p. 639) is
known to have investigated the red varieties of wulfenite from Rézbanya
(Banat) and Siberia, and to have ascertained the presence of chromium in
them. I have before me cabinet specimens from Rézbanya, Ruskberg
(Banat), and Phenixville, which I shall comprehend here under the general
denomination of ‘‘chromo-wulfenites.’? The specimens from Rézbdnya
being rather yellowish than pure red, I must confine my investigations to
éhiose from Ruskberg and Phenixville.

The matrix of the Ruskberg pyromorphite is cellular quartz+ and
galena. A good number of rather bright, deep-red octahedral crystals of
wulfenite, 1-2 millims. in size, are fixed at the surface of the pyromorphite.

The crystals of Phenixville are notably larger (2-4 millims.), and con-
creted into a crust on the surface of the matrix (quartz and pyromorphite).
Although apparently of even surface, these crystals show merely a peculiar
wax-like brightness.

The red of eosite is deeper than that of crocoite ; itis somewhat more
intense than that of the Ruskberg chromo-wulfenite, and less mixed with
yellow than in the Phenixville specimens. The streak is browner in

* The existence of vanadium, as accidentally entering into the composition of the
genuine wulfenites, was ascertained by Prof. Wohler on the occasion of his experiments
concerning the production of molybdic acid by the treatment of wulfenites (see Liebig
and Kopp, Ann. d. Chem. und Pharm. vol. cii. p. 383).

t Ruskberg lies in Austrian Banat, next to the threefold frontier between Banat,
Transylvania, and Wallachia.

VOL. XIX. 2N

456 Dr, A. Schrauf on Molybdates and Vanadates of Lead. [May 4; —

eosite than in chromate of lead. Thestreaks of the Ruskberg crystals and
of those from Berezowsk are quite identical ; the powder of the Phenixville
crystals is light orange, verging into sulphur-yellow.

The Foaeieas and Phenixville chromo-wulfenites, treated ayilks hada
chloric acid in the way above described, both leave a deep-blue precipitate
with a yellowish-green margin. Fused with bisulphate of potash in a
platinum spoon, they both give a saline compound, becoming very faintly
yellowish green after cooling. In the beginning of fusion a brownish-
purple tint appeared, especially on the Phenixville crystals. This cireum-
stance, not remarked in eosite or vanadate of lead, confirms the fact ascer-
tained by Prof. Rose, of chrominm being a prevailing component of the red
wulfenites of the Banat, with which, according to my observations, I rank
also the yellowesh-red wulfenites from Phenixville. According to Mr.
Smith, these last contain vanadium; however, the specimen before me,
when fused with bisulphate of potash, would certainly have manifested the
presence of this metal had it been a prevailing constituent, as chromium
really is. At all events, the red wulfenites may possibiy contain a certain
proportion of vanadium, as may be expected with regard to nearly all wulfe-
nites in consequence of Prof. Wchler’s statements.

§ 4, Chemical properties of the Vanadates of Lead ( Dechenite, Descloizite,
and Vanadinite).

Eosite, as containing vanadic acid, stands next to the just-mentioned
vanadates of lead. Dechenite was first found in 1851 by M. Krantz,
near Schlettenbach ; and M. Bergemann, neglecting a notable proportion
of zinc * contained in this mineral, has stated for it the chemical formula
VO,PbO. Vanadinite, first found at Kappel (Carinthia), received its spe-
cific name by the late Prof. Zippe, and is, according to M. Tschermak,
PbOVO,. Descloizite was stated by Mr. Damour (1854) to correspond
to the formula 2PbO,VO,. I iave, as early as- 1861+, expressed the
opinion that these three species, concordant in a great number of properties,
may be considered as being specifically identical. M. Czudnowicz (J. ¢.), in
his paper on vanadinite, has offered several arguments against the vana-
dium supposed to enter into the composition of these minerals, so near re-
lated to each other that they must be submitted altogether to comparative
investigation. The Peruvian descloizite is of so rare occurrence, that I

* See Czudnowicz in Poggend. Ann. vol. crx.

t+ See Schrauf, in Poggend. Ann. vol. cxvi. I must here remark expressly, in order
to avoid misunderstandings, that in the course of this paper I have purposely quoted
the formulz of preceding authors with the (older) symbols used by them to express
vanadic acid. I do not intend to discuss the results of former analyses, because Pro-
fessor Roscoe, in the course of his ingenious researches concerning vanadium, has ex-
pressly (see Proceedings of Royal Society, vol. xvi. p. 226) said, ‘‘It is the author's inten-
tion to investigate the composition of the vanadates at a future time.’’

1871.] Dr. A. Schrauf on Molybdates and Vanadates of Lead. 457

could not detach any particle of the small group of crystals at my disposal
for the purpose of chemical investigation, being thus obliged to confine
it to two varieties of vanadinite from Kappel, and to a specimen of de-
chenite. On two specimens of vanadinite from Kappel, vanadinite appears
in the form of crystals intimately connected into a crust, the single crystals
not exceeding the size of 4-2 millim. On one specimen (variety A), the
greater number of the larger crystals is of a dark yreenish-brown colour
(fluorescence-colour?), and without translucidity; the smaller ones are
reddish brown and translucid; the streak is brownish orange. This
variety agrees, in all its external characters, with the specimen of Peruvian
descloizite now before me; the crystals of it are reddish to greenish brown,
translucid, and their streak is brownish orange*.

The crystals of the second specimen (variety B) form a thin crust over
limestone; they are 3-1 millim. in size, rather translucid, of lighter
carnation tint, and less bright than those of variety A. The crystals of
variety A show a vivid metallic brightness, while the light carnation ones
of variety B scarcely offer a faint vitreous brightness, very easily altered
by contact with moist air; even the moisture contained in the breath
is sufficient to produce a superficial decomposition of the crystals of
variety B. Their brightness is immediately tarnished, and in a few
minutes very diminutive greyish-white globules cover, like Mucedinee,
the surface of the crystal. Some time after, these globules assume a
slight yellowish colour, but spread no further over the specimen if it is
kept in dry air. The supposition of this alteration being caused by
the presence of arsenic is contradicted by the results of subsequent
investigation; proving arsenic, if it exists at all, to exist in such dimi-
nutive proportion that visible marks of its presence could not be obtained
by heating the mineral on charcoal or in a glass tubet+. Notwithstand-
ing’ the differences detailed above the actions of hydrochloric acid, of
alcohol, and of bisulphate of potash give evidence of the notable difference
between eosite, descloizite, and vanadinite, and of the ncarly absolute identity
of the two varieties of vanadinite from Kappel.

Small splinters of both these varieties, moistened with hydrochloric acid
on a glass plate, become yellowish grey on their margins, the internal
portion assuming a dark reddish-brown tint. Under the protracted
action of the acid this nucleus becomes darker and lessens in size, till at
last it disappears, leaving a portion of uniformly greyish-white substance.
The nucleus of the carnation variety B shows a somewhat lighter tint
at first; this difference, however, vanishes more and more under the
lengthened action of acid; alcohol added to the cold solution of both
varieties causes the separation of a yellowish-green gelatinous substance,

* See Schrauf “On the identity of vanadinite and descloizite” in Poggend. Ann,
vol. exvi. (1861).
t Several experiments intended for ascertaining directly the chemical character of
these efflorescences remained without any satisfactory result,
2N2

458 Dr. A.Schrauf on Molybdates and Vanadates of Lead. [May 45

which, being heated to evaporation, leaves on the glass plate a precipitate
of fine green colour.

These alterations are common to both varieties, as also those produced
by fusion with bisulphate of potash. The saline substance thus obtained
is yellow during fusion; it becomes-reddish during cooling, and deep
reddish orange after complete refrigeration. This last coloration may ex-
ceed two or three times in intensity the coloration obtained by treating
eosite with bisulphate of potash.

These experiments, merely tried with some few minute Scope
although any thing but decisive, are sufficient for ascertaining the difference
wéeyeen eosite and the vanadates of lead.

As the dark variety (A) resembles Peruvian eosite, the light variety (B)
‘bears some resemblance to the dechenite from Schlettenbach.

This dechenite is likewise of carnation colour, somewhat fainter on the
surface than on the recent fracture. The cabinet specimen before me
shows isolated crusts, transversely concreted, with globular external sur-
face, offering a blackberry-like aspect. A fracture shows these crusts to
be concentric agglomerations of minute crystals (1 millim. in size), exter-
nally exhibiting only one or two of their planes. Isolated margins may
be found by careful inquiry, but I could not succeed in obtaining any
measurable angle. ‘The crystalline crust includes a number of spheroidal
cavities (similar to those of pisolite), around which the aggregations of
crystallized dechenite are concentrically disposed. Greenish pyromorphite
appears on the inferior surface of the specimen in question.

Like the variety B of vanadinite, this specimen is very easily af-
fected by moisture.’ Even when a sheet of paper is held before the
mouth, the moisture of the breath is sufficient to produce globular
yellowish-grey efflorescences. The streak is orange, verging into reddish
brown.

The action of hydrochloric acid and bisulphate of potash is nearly the
same with that exercised on vanadinite, as already detailed.

A splinter moistened with hydrochloric acid shows a yellow margin and
a darker nucleus, in which the vanadium is concentrated. The colour
of this nucleus, instead of being very intensely brownish red, is of a rather
darker brown than the unaltered mineral. The action of the acid, mani-
fested by the progressive darkening and lessening of the nucleus, is, how-
ever, less prompt and less evident than when vanadinite is acted upon, and
resembles rather the alterations undergone by eosite. The difference lies,
however, in the yellowish coloration of the solution around the crystal
lying on the glass plate. Alcohol gives rise to the secretion of a gelatinous
yellowish-green liquid, which, evaporated by heat, assumes a fine green or
bluish-green tint, nearly identical to the tint assumed by vanadinite under
the same circumstances.

Dechenite, melted with bisulphate of potash, gives a deep brownidh=
yellow substance, reddening by cooling, and finally becoming of a deep

1871.] Dr..A. Schrauf on Molybdates and Vanadates of Lead. 459

orange. ‘This salt, heated in a platinum spoon with tin-foil, gives a faintly
greyish-green solution.

The analogy between the vanadate of lead from Schlettenbach (deche-
nite) and the vanadate from Windisch- Kappel (vanadinite) goes still beyond
their chemical characters. I submitted both these minerals to the action
of the blowpipe, in order to find out, independently of my comparative
studies concerning eosite, the cause of the prompt decomposition of the
cabinet specimens from both these localities.

A splinter of dechenite from Schlettenbach, heated in a glass tube,
emits, previously to its melting, a greenish-white vapour, not condensing
into water drops nor into any aie deposit upon the cooler portions A
the tube. The presence of arsenic is manifested neither by its charac-
teristic smell nor by any specular sublimate. The mineral takes a darker
tint when heated, and assumes again its original tint by cooling. It melts
in the glass tube, without previous decrepitation, into a brownish-yellow
substance. Heated on charcoal, dechenite melts easily, and with ebullition,
into a hollow dark steel-brown globule, giving at the same time a slight
orange aureola and a whitish slag, includmg -metallic granules. Fusing
with soda gives rise to a yellowish slag, including granules of metallic lead,
and to graphitic vanadium imbedded in the charcoal. The slag imbibed
with cobalt-solution and heated to redness, assumes a dirty greenish tint
and is surrounded by a greenish-yellow aureola, thus betraying the presence
of a rather notable quantity of zinc, not mentioned in M. Bergemann’s
account of his analysis of dechenite.

Among the vanadinites from Kappel, only the carnation variety B seems
to contain a notable proportion of zinc. Its tint darkens transitorily during
heating, it emits a faint vapour (of water) when heated in a glass tube,
without manifesting the presence of arsenic, and melts on charcoal into a
dark greyish-brown, steel-bright globule, proving hollow when the flame
of the blowpipe touches it. A notable aureola of oxidated lead appears,
together with a small quantity of a dark slag, including globules of lead
and graphitic vanadium, and assuming a green tint in contact with nitrate
of cobalt. . :

The darker variety A exhibits the same phenomena when heated in the
glass tube or by the blowpipe-flame, only the remaining slag is dark
coloured, and only in one case among repeated experiments could I perceive
on it some faint traces of green coloration. Possibly this variety may
contain but a small proportion of zinc, as M. Damour has found only 23
per cent. of this metal in the Peruvian descloizite.

The results of the before-detailed investigations, leaving out of account
at present the subsequent crystallographical facts, may. be resumed as
follows :—Of both. the varieties of vanadinite from Kappel, the darker one
(A) contains but a small proportion of zinc, and may be assimilated. to
the Peruvian descloizite; the lighter one (B) is far richer in this metal,

460° Dr. A. Schrauf on Molybdates and Vanadates of Leal. [May 4,

and may be identified with the dechenite from Schlettenbach. osite
differs from both these minerals as to its chemical characters.

§ 5. Crystallographical form of Hosite.

Nearly all the eosite crystals attached to the surface of the cabinet spe-
cimen are octahedra, three-fourths of which are completely developed, only
one of them showing one angle truncated by the basal plane c (001).
The planes, instead of being completely even, are somewhat bent and
scaly ; however minute the planes p(111) and ce (001) are, the intense
metallic brightness of the crystals admits a precise determination of the
angles.

The angles ascertained by measurement are :

Crystal I. {p(111)}, Crystal II. {p(111)'. Crystal 111. {e(O01); pl),
p: p= 53° 30’ p:'p= 77° 30' ct p= "tere
p:'p=102° 50’ 'p: p =102° 10’ e:'p = 62° 30’

'n: p=103° pi p= 17 30’ OP L= 62° 50’

pi: p= (7 50 ‘pp = 103" 2a!
p: Pies BEET
pip =n
p: ne 102°

The means of these results are :-—

¢:p=(001)(1 1 1)=65° 50’
eA lel tan ot.
and consequently
CPE CEO) =S8eso%
CULO 27a
Cay G0) ole
(100) (0) 45°) oe
The preceding data lead to the parametrical proportion
a:6:c=1°003:1:1°375,
not very far different from a pyramidal axial proportion. The last-quoted
prismatic angle differs also only by 5’ from the pyramidal principal prism.
Notwithstanding the prisms with an angle of 90° 10’ being proper to
several prismatic minerals, the slight difference obtained in the present
case may be ascribed to an error of observation, owing to the exiguity and

the curved surface of the planes, and eosite may be safely ranked among
the pyramidal system, with the axial proportion

phenol lilea(oS,qnep=O20.a0l,,

This parametrical proportion of eosite, together with its. chemical cha-
racters, proves its near relation to wulfenite and descloizite, Eosite unites

1871.] Dr. A. Schrauf on Molybdates and Vanadates of Lead. 461

the erystallographical system and the lateral angles of wulfenite with the
pyramidal angle of descloizite*,

Eosite having 62° 50’, descloizite 63° 35’, and wulfenite 65° 47!
e Silene, 5 SES Sip 33 49° 50’.
: eh Ln een 1 44° 9’, 9 49° 50’.
The proportion of the principal axis of eosite to the same axis of wulfenite is
1°375 __ 7:0085
1574 80000"

The pyramid of eosite could therefore be considered as a representative of
the pyramid 778 of wulfenite, and the crystals of eosite to be merely a new
form of the crystallographical form of the last-named mineral. Setting
aside the chemical differences, a number of crystallographical characters
may be alleged against the identity of these two minerals. All the crystals
of eosite carefully examined by me show only one dominant pyramid,
without any secondary pyramidal plane. The difference between the
angles of the pyramids of eosite and wulfenite amounts to only 3°. It would
have been too slight for admitting, with any degree of probability, that the
secondary pyramid (778), having grown out into a principal plane, has com-
pletely superseded the original principal pyramid, had not an alteration in
the chemical constitution of the substance been attended by an altered
arrangement of the atoms entering into the composition of the crystalline
molecule,

§ 6. Crystallographical forms of Descloizite and Vanadinite.

The similarity of the pyramidal angles of eosite and Peruvian descloizite
(the second one, as stated by M. Des Cloizeaux) led me at first to suppose
the existence of similar forms among the crystals of the carnation variety
B of vanadite or of dechenite.

The crystalline agglomerations of dechenite are so confused that it was

* T alluded, a number of years ago, to the necessity of beginning any crystallogenetic
theory with distributing the molecules of the elements constituting a combination ac-
cording to the three directions of space, which thus is differentiated in the required
way. In the case here in question the subsequently acceding substance (vanadium)
seems to have assumed its direction according to the principal axis, the molecules of
wulfenite having kept meanwhile their original direction along the secondary axis; and
this supposition could, indeed, account for the successive transition of form from wulf-
enite into descloizite. However, such investigations could lead to any real, not merely
apparent, success only under condition of not being confined to the parameter of the
crystals, but also founded on the molecular values of the constituting elements.

These ideas of mine, and the calculations of crystalline forms from the molecular
values of the elements founded on them, have been thoroughly discussed in several
of my publications.

See Schrauf, Physikalische Studien (Vienna, 1867), c. xvi. p. 240; Lehrbuch der
Mineralogie, vol. ii, Krystall-Physik (Vienna, 1868), ¢c, xi. p, 160; _Pogs. Ann, 1867,
vol, cxxx. p. 3d,

462 Dr. A. Schrauf on Molybdates and Vanadates of Lead. [May 4,

impossible to detach any complete crystal out of them. Here and there
isolated lateral angles, some of them offering an angle of about 90°, are
distinguishable.

As to the form of crystals, the variety B of vanadinite from Kappel bears
some resemblance with these aggregations of dechenite. Some few solid
angles of the variety B could be detached and their angles measured. The
results thus obtained are :— iq

Crystal I. Crystal II. Crystal ITT.
p:p—90° p:p=52 p:'p =643°
p: p=9le
‘pn: gp 1872:

These angles are perfectly concordant with those obtained by my former
measurements (see Poggendorff’s Ann. vol. cxvi.), as well as with those at
present taken on the crystals of the dark variety A from Kappel. These

last gave:
For crystal IIT.

For crystal I. For crystal IT. (with the planes p and m).
p: pe Oa- p:'p = 64° 50’ p: p= 91° 30'
p: p= 92° 'p:'p'= 90° ‘p:'p = 902h0!
ae — 126" ‘pip G30 p: p= 53° 30’
gp: == 90° p: p= Bao
p :'p =116° 10 m:n’ =116° 30'
‘p :'p= 53° ptm = 32 a0
p p=127°

All these numbers are in perfect concordance with those ascertained by
M. Des Cloizeaux on the Peruvian descloizite ; these are :—

mT AVG: Za,

mbi=147° 45'

bbs
b+ (m) 64=115° 15’
b3 (e2) d= 88° 18!.

These results prove thus the absolute identity of the forms of Peruvian
descloizite with those of both varieties of vanadinite from Kappel, probably
also with those of dechenite, all of them discrepant from the characteristic
forms of eosite. These investigations throw likewise some light on the
indices of the planes observed on descloizite.

M. Des Cloizeaux has observed the three planes m 63 and e3, whose indices
are, (110), (111), and (203). M. Des Cloizeaux expressly states that ©
he could not find out from these data any isomorphism between this form
and that of any other lead salt. J can, however, in no way explain how so
eminent a mineralogist came to omit comparing the parameter of anglesite
with that of descloizite, ashe did with the parameter of cerussite.

1871-] Dr. A. Schrauf on Molybdates and Vanadates of Lead. 463

Such a comparison proves immediately the isomorphism of both these
minerals, the angles of anglesite being:

wn Lac Gl
GZy== 50 51! 3 ae aa
by= 45° 3!
cy= 63° 19!,
and those of descloizite :
m m' =116° 25!

ly Age
63 62 __ 5 a0 gs)
D
ve
— 63° 35!

M. Des Cloizeaux’s symbols must consequently be admitted as equiva-
lent* to
m' =n (0 2 1)

bz =y (221)
es=e (301).

These notations and symbols I intend to adopt in future. This disposi-
tion equalizes the terminal angles of eosite with those of descloizite,—[c y]
of descloizite being nearly equivalent to [cp] of eosite.

This isomorphism of anglesite (PbOSO,) with descloizite (2PbO,VO,
according to M. Damour) is only to be accounted for by granting to M.
Damour’s analysis less importance than its author’s name allows to claim,
and by admitting descloizite, vanadinite, and dechenite to be merely mono-
vanadates. Thus another argument for separating these three minerals be-
comes untenable ; the only distinctive character still remaining is the greater
or lesser proportion of zinc contaimed in them.

§7. Crystallographical form of the Chromo-Wulfenites.

Prof. H. Rose, in his above- quoted investigation of the chromo-wulfenites,
has given the measures of angles of the variety from Beresowsk, differing
but slightly from the pyramidal angles generally admitted. I intend in
the present paper to ascertain the angles of the chromo-wulfenites from
Ruskberg and Phenixville, in order to state the changes arising from the ac-
cession of chromium to the constituting elements. The nature of the planes
is, however, such that the measurements offer differences of nearly 3°, the
averages from even a greater number of observations becoming thus rather
objectionable.

* Concerning the indices and forms of anglesite, see my ‘ Atlas der Crystalformen
des Mineralreiches,’ under the article “ Anglesite.” The isomorphism of descloizite
and anglesite appears in the similarity of forms, as well as in the equality of angles,
the vanadinite from Kappel resembling the anglesite from Siegen, as the Peruvian
descloizite is similar to the anglesite from Wolfach. See Schrauf’s ‘ Atlas der Crystal-
formen,’ No. 2 (Vienna, 1870), tab. xi. fig. 1, and tab. xii. fig. 32.

464 Dr. A. Schrauf on Molybdates and Vanadates of Lead. [May 4,

The crystals of chromo-wulfenite from Ruskberg are 1-2 millimetres in
size. Most of them are quadrilateral pyramids, formed by the planese(1 0 1);
in some of them the pyramid is truncated by the terminal nee c ” 01).
The planes are convex. My measurements gave :—

For crystal I. For crystal II.
Pe—a7 a0 ee =65° 10!
ee'=73° 30!

I did not succeed in finding in the crystals from Phenixville the form
alleged by Prof. Dana (Mineralogy, 1868). Those before me exhibit
the pyramid x, common to all wulfenites, assuming a tabular shape by the
development of the truncating terminal plane ¢(001). Their surface is
opaque, rough, and curved, thus manifesting, as it were, the resistance op-
posed to regular development of the fundamental form, by the accession
of heterogeneous substances. One of these crystals offered, besides the
planes c (001) and 2(1 11), two other planes, m (11 0) and f(3 20), the
last of them in hemihedral development. I found on this last crystal :—

By measurement. By calculation.
nn=48° 30’ n m=48° 25’
nm m= 24° 20' n m= 24° 122’
n f=26° 50’ n f=26° 35',

As the results of measurements show, this crystallographical revision of
chromo-wulfenites afforded no data for ascertaining the action of chromium
on the molybdate of lead; they, however, confirmed the fact that the cha-
racteristic forms of eosite are wanting in the red varieties of wulfenite.

§ 8. Discussion of Results.

As a perusal of the last paragraph, treating of the morphological proper-
ties, will prove, these properties run parallel to the chemical characters of
the minerals here in question. The results obtained may be concisely
enounced thus :—

The crystalline form of eosite differs from those of descloizite and
wulfenite, having the terminal lateral angles of descloizite united with the
crystallographical system of wulfenite.

Fosite is a vanado-molybdate of lead.

The red varieties of wulfenite have an admixture of chromium, but are not
crystallographically different from the other varieties.

Descloizite is isomorphous with anglesite ; thus the results of the analysis
of descloizite seem to be questionable.

The dark variety of vanadinite (A) from Kappel is identical with Peruvian
Jescloizite ; the light variety (B) from the same locality is nearly identical
in chemical characters with the dechenite of Schlettenbach and, as to the
form of its crystals, with descloizite,

1871. ] Dr. Mareet on the Constitution of Blood. 465

These appear to me to be the results of the present investigations: they
are still incomplete as to the crystalline forms of dechenite; I would,
however, congratulate myself if the hints given in their exposition could
provoke further search for distinctly crystallized groups of dechenite.

ConrTENTS.

§ 1. Paragenetic relations of eosite.

§ 2. Chemical characters of eosite.

§ 3. Chemical properties of the chromo-wulfenites.

§ 4. Chemical properties of the vanadates of lead (dechenite, descloizite, and
vanadite).

§ 5. Crystallographical form of eosite.

§ 6. Crystallographical forms of descloizite and vanacinite.

§ 7. Crystallographical form of the chromo-wulfenites.

§ 8. Discussion of results.

May 11, 1871.
General Sr EDWARD SABINE, K.C.B., President, in the Chair.

The following communications were read :—

I. “An Experimental Inquiry into the Constitution of Blood and
the Nutrition of Muscular Tissue”? By Witiiam Maxcer,
M.D., F.R.S., Senior Assistant Physician to the Hospital for
Consumption and Diseases of the Chest, Brompton. Received
April 1, 1871.

(Abstract.)

The results obtained from the inquiry which forms the subject of the
paper are as follows :—

First. That blood is strictly a colloid fluid.

Second. That although blood be strictly a colloid, it contains invariably
a small proportion of diffusible constituents amounting to nearly 7°3 grms.
in 1000 of blood, and 9°25 grms. in an equal volume of serum, these
proportions diffusing out of blood in twenty-four hours.

Third. That the proportion of chlorine contained in blood has a remark-
able degree of fixity, a fact which had been foreseen by Liebig, and may be
considered as amounting to 3 parts (the correct mean being 3:06) in 1000,
the proportion of chlorine in a bulk of serum equal to that occupied by
1000 grms. of blood being 3°45, and therefore higher than in blood,
and moreover that one of the objects of the chlorides, and other diffusible
constituents of blood, appears to be to preserve the fluid state of the blood.
The substances which yield an alkaline reaction to blood are mostly crys-
talloid; their being retained in the blood while circulating through the
body must be of the highest importance in connexion with the phenomena
of oxidation constantly in progress during life.

466 Dr. Marcet on the Constitution of Blood [May 11,

Fourth. That blood contains phosphoric anhydride and iron in a perfect
colloid state, or quite undiffusible when submitted to dialysis, the relative
proportions appearing to vary from 78°61 per cent. of peroxide of iron
and 21:39 of phosphoric anhydride, to 76°2 and 23°8 respectively, the
proportion of phosphoric anhydride having a tendency to be rather higher.

Fifth. That blood contains more phosphide anhydride and potash,
bulk for bulk, than serum. This fact has long been known ; but I have
shown that the excess of phosphoric anhydride and potash in the blood-
corpuscles is greater than can be accounted for by the estimation of the
proportions of colloid phosphoric anhydride and potash in blood and
serum ; consequently there exists in blood-corpuscles a power checking the
diffusion of the diffusible substances they contain, and apparently con-
nected with a force peculiar to the corpuscles, as this force ceases to act as
soon as the corpuscular form disappears from admixture with water. ‘This
property inherent to blood-corpuscles may cause an accumulation of
potash in blood equal to no less than rather more than four times the
amount of this substance present in an equal bulk of the serum of the same
blood.

‘ Sixth. That a mixture of colloid phosphoric anhydride and potash can
be prepared artificially by the dialysis of a solution of chloride of potassium
and phosphate of sodium, and that the colloid mass thus obtained appears
to retain the characters of the neutral tribasic phosphate from which it ori-
‘ginates ; it exhibits an alkaline reaction, yields a yellow precipitate with
nitrate of silver, and after complete precipitation the reaction is acid.

Seventh. That by dialyzing certain proportions of phosphate of sodium
and chloride of potassium during a certain time, proportions of phosphoric
anhydride, potash, chlorine, and soda are obtained in the colloid fluid very
similar to the proportions these same substances bear to each other in
serum after twenty-four hours dialysis.

Eighth. That muscular tissue is formed of three different classes of
-substances,—the first including those substances which constitute the
tissue proper, or the portion of flesh insoluble in the preparation of the
aqueous extract, and consisting of an albuminous principle and phosphoric
anhydride with varying proportions of potash and magnesia; the second
class including the same substances as are found in the tissue proper, and
in the same proportions relatively to the albumen present in that class, but
existing in solution and in the colloid state; the third class including the
same substances as are found in the two others, and moreover a small
quantity of chlorine and soda, which, although relatively minute, is never
absent. The constituents of this class are crystalloid, and consequently
diffusible, the phosphoric anhydride and potash being present precisely in
the proportion required to form a neutral tribasic phosphate, or a pyro-
-phosphate, as the formula 2KO PO, can equally be 2KO HO PO,. The
formation of this substance (2 KO PO, ;) is extremely interesting, and shows
beyond a doubt that, in addition to the material blood yields to muscu-

VS7 Lal and the Nutrition of Muscular Tissue. 467

lar tissue for the formation of its insoluble portion, or framework, it supplies
flesh with a large proportion of potash, the only object of which is the
ultimate removal of the phosphoric anhydride it contains.

Class No. I. of the constituents of muscular tissue is to be considered as
the tissue in the complete stage of assimilation.

Class No. II. constitutes the material from the blood on its way to form
the Class No. I.

Class No. III. constitutes the material from Class No. I. in the effete
state, and on its way out of flesh.

Ninth. That flesh contains in store a supply of nourishment equal to
about one-third more than its requirement for immediate use, this being
apparently a provision of nature to allow of muscular exercise during pro-
longed fasting.

Tenth. That the numbers representing the excess of phosphorie an-
hydride and potash in blood over the proportion of these substances in an
equal volume of serum in the regular normal nutrition of herbivorous
animals appear to bear to each other nearly the same relation as that which
exists between the phosphoric anhydride and potash on their way out of
muscular tissue, from which result I conclude that the blood-corpuscles
have apparently the power of taking up and preparing the material which
they themselves supply to muscular tissue for its nutrition.

Eleventh. That vegetables used as food- for man and animals, such as
flour, potato, and rice, contain respectively about the same proportions of
colloid phosphoric anhydride and colloid potash compared to the total
quantities of these substances present; this fact is very remarkable, con-
sidering that the proportions of phosphoric anhydride and potash vary to a
great extent in these different articles of vegetable food. I also found in
some of my analyses of blood that the proportions of colloid phosphoric
anhydride and colloid potash to the total quantity of these substances
was the same as the corresponding proportion existing between these sub-
stances in flour, potato, and rice; and I conclude that vegetable food has
the power of transforming phosphoric anhydride and potash from the
crystalloid or diffusible into the colloid or undiffusible state, and in certain
tolerably definite proportions ; and it is only after having been thus pre-
pared that these substances appear to be fit to become normal constituents
of blood, and contribute to the nutrition of flesh.

A final remark, and one which is worth consideration, is the fact esta-
blished by the whole of the present investigation, that there is a constant
change, as rotation in nature, from crystalloids to colloids and from colloids
to crystalloids. The substances destined to nourish plants being inanimate
must be diffusible, otherwise they could not be distributed throughout
the mineral kingdom and brought within the reach of plants. Vegetables
transform into colloids the mineral substances destined for the food of
animals, and it might be said that the locomotion of animals in some re-

‘spects acts the same part as the diffusion of mineral substances ; for animals”

468 Mr. F, Crace-Calvert on Protoplasmic Life. [May 11,

move about in search of their colloid food, and crystalloid: minerals are
displaced by physical diffusion in search of the plants they are:to nourish.

The excretory products of animals are crystalloid and diffusible, as far
as these soluble constituents are concerned, the solid portions. rapidly de-
composing in contact with air and moisture into crystalloid: compounds.
Dead vegetable and animal tissue all return into crystalloids by decomposi-
tion, to be distributed afresh, either by gaseous or liquid diffusion, seins
out the whole of the mineral world.

Hence Graham’s great discovery of the laws of liquid she gaseons
diffusion lifts up the curtain which veils the mysteries of animal life, and

throws a flood of light on very many physiological phenomena which had ~~

until now remained in darkness*.

II. * On Protoplasmic Life.” By V'. Cracz-Catverz, F.R.S.
Received May 8, 1871.

A year since, the publication of Dr. Tyndall’s interesting paper on the
abundance of germ-life in the atmosphere, and the difficulty of destroying
this life, as well as other papers published by eminent men of science,
suggested the inquiry if the germs existing or produced in a liquid in a
state of fermentation or of putrefaction could be conveyed to a liquid suscep-
tible of entering into these states ; and although at the present time the
results of this inquiry are not sufficiently complete for publication, still I
have observed some facts arising out of the subject of protoplasmic life
which I wish now to lay before the Royal Society. _

Although prepared, by the perusal of the papers of many workers in
this field, to experience difficulties in prosecuting the study, I must confess
I did not calculate on encountering so many as I met, and especially those
arising from the rapid development of germ-life, and of which I have
hitherto seen no notice in any papers which have come under my observa-
tion. ‘Thus, if the white of a new-laid egg be mixed with water (free from
life), and exposed to the atmosphere for only fifteen minutes, in the
months of August or September, it will show life in abundance. From
this cause I was misled in many of my earlier experiments, not having been
sufficiently careful to avoid even momentary exposure of the fluids to the
atmosphere. ‘To the want of the knowledge ofthis fact may be traced the
erroneous conclusions arrived at by several gentlemen who had devoted
their attention to the subject of spontaneous generation.

I believe that I have overcome the difficulty of the fluids under exami-
nation becoming polluted by impregnation by the protoplasmic life existing
in the atmosphere, by adopting the following simple method of working.

As a pure fluid free from life, and having no chemical reaction, was
essential to carrying out the investigation, I directed my attention to the

* T have had the valuable assistance of Messrs, M. T. Salter, F. A. Manning, and H.
Bassett in the analytical part of my inquiry.

1871.) Mr. F. Crace-Calvert on Protoplasmic Life. 4C9

preparation of pure distilled water. Having always found life in distilled
water prepared by the ordinary methods, by keeping it a few days, after
many trials I employed the following apparatus, which gave very satisfac-
tory results, as it enabled me to obtain water which remained free from life
for several months.

It consists of two flasks, A and B(A rather larger than B), fitted with
perforated caoutchouc stoppers*. These flasks are connected by the tube
D. Into the stopper of A is fitted a tube C, to which is joined a piece of

caoutchouc tubing, which may be closed by the clip E. Through the
stopper of B is a siphon, F, the long limb of which is cut and joined with
caoutchoue tubing, which can be closed by the clip G. Through this
stopper is a third tube, H, connected by caoutchouc with the tube I; this
can be closed by the chp K. The tube I is about 3 feet long, and goes
into the vessel L, which is partly filled with water.

The water to be distilled is mixed with solution of potash and perman-
ganate of potash, and placed in the flask At. Before distillation is com-
menced, a rapid current of pure hydrogen, or some other gas, must be
passed through the apparatus by the tube C to displace the air and carry
off all the germs the air may have contained. The clip G is first left open,
then this closed and the clip K opened, which allows the gas to pass
through the water in the vessel L.

* The stoppers and caoutchouc tubing used for the various joints must be new, and
must be well boiled in water before use.
_ + The reasons why I employed permanganate of potash (in large excess) were that,
under the influence of heat, its oxidizing powers were much increased, and that it gave
off no gas that could interfere with the purity of the water, this salt in solution not eyen
yielding oxygen under any circumstances.

470 Mr. F, Crace-Calvert. on Protoplasmic Life. [May 11;

The gas should be passed through for about fifteen minutes. The clip
E is then closed, and the distillation carried on. When the operation is
complete, the gas must be again passed through the apparatus, and the
connexion with the tube I broken by closing the clip K. The water is
drawn off through the siphon F. The long tube acts as a safety-tube, and
is made so long that the absorption is noticed in ample time to close the
clip before any air can enter through that tube.

The water has to be redistilled three or four times before it is ohtencd
free from germs, and must be kept in the apparatus in whic it is distilled
until wanted, to prevent any contact with air.

Some water which had been distilled on the 20th of November, 1870,
being still free from life on the 7th of December, was introduced by the
siphon H into twelve small tubes, and left exposed to the atmosphere for
fifteen hours, when the tubes were closed. Every eight days some of the
tubes were opened, and their contents examined. On the fifteenth, there-
fore, the first examination was made, when no life was observed; on the
twenty-third two or three other tubes were examined, and again no life was
detected; whilst in the series opened on the 2nd of January, 1871 (that
is to say, twenty-four days from the time the tubes were closed), two or
three black vibrios were found in each field.

Being impressed with the idea that this slow and limited development
of protoplasmic life might be attributed to the small amount of life existing
in the atmosphere at this-period of the year*, a second series of experiments
was commenced on the 4th of January. The distilled water in the flask
being still free from life, a certain quantity of it was put into twelve small
tubes, which were placed near putrid meat at a temperature of 21° to 26°C.
for two hours, and then sealed. On the 10th of the same month the con-
tents of some of the tubes were examined, when two or three small black
vibrios were observed under each field. This result shows that the fluid
having been placed near a source of protoplasmic life, germs had introduced
themselves in two hours in sufficient quantity for life to become visible in
six days instead of twenty-four. Other tubes of this series were opened on
the 17th of January, when a slight increase of life was noticed; but no
further development appeared to ‘take place after this date, as some exa-
mined on the 10th of March did not contain more life than those of the
17th of January. :

This very limited amount of life suggested the idea that it might be due
to the employment of perfectly pure water, and that the vibrios did not
increase from want of the elements necessary for sustaining their life. I
therefore commenced a third series of experiments. Before proceeding to
describe this series, I would call attention to the fact that the water in the

* During the intense cold of December and January last I found it took an exposure
to the atmosphere of two days at a temperature of 12° C. before life appeared in solu-
tion of white of egg in the pure distilled water, whilst as the weather got warmer the
time required became less.

1871.] Mr. F. Crace-Calvert on Protoplasmic Life. 471

flask had remained perfectly free from life up to this time, a period of close
on sixteen weeks.

On the 9th of February 100 fluid grains of albumen from a new-laid egg
were introduced, as quickly as possible and with the greatest care, into
10 ounces of pure distilled water contained in the flask in which it had
been condensed, and an atmosphere of hydrogen kept over it. On the ~
16th some of the fluid was taken out by means of the siphon H, and
examined, and no life being present, twelve tubes were filled with the fluid,
exposed to the air for eight hours, and closed. On the 21st the contents of
some of the tubes were examined, when a few vibrios and microzyma were
distinctly seen in each field. On the 27th other tubes were examined, and
showed a marked increase in the amount of life. In this series life ap-
peared in five days, and an increase in ten, instead. of requiring twenty-four
days, as was the case when pure water only was employed.

Albumen therefore facilitated the development of life. Of course the
contents of the flask were examined at the same time, but in no instance
was life detected. I believe that these three series of experiments tend to
prove the fallacy of the theory of spontaneous generation ; for if it were
possible, why should not life have appeared in the pure distilled water, or in
the albuminous solution, which were kept successively in the flask B, as well
as in the fluids which were contained in the tubes, and had been exposed to
the atmosphere or near animal matter in a state of decay, and had thus
become impregnated with the germs of protoplasmic life? What gives
still further interest to these experiments is, that, having operated during
the severe weather of last winter, when little or no life existed in the
atmosphere, I was able to impregnate the fluids with germs without intro-
ducing developed life.

The quantity of life produced in the above-recited experiments being com-
paratively small, I was led to infer that this might be due to the influence of
the atmosphere of hydrogen employed to displace the air in the apparatus
used for obtaining the water. I therefore, on the 2nd of March, prepared
a solution of albumen similar to that before employed, but expelled the air
out of the apparatus by pure oxygen; and as the contents of the flask
B were free from life on the 8th of March, a series of small tubes were
filled and exposed for twenty-six hours to the atmosphere near putrid
matter, and then sealed. Several of these tubes were opened on the 11th,
and immediately examined, when only a few cells were observed in each
field. A second lot was opened on the 14th, and they showed con-
siderable increase of life, there being two or three vibrios under each field.
A third quantity was opened on the 25th, when no increase had taken
place. This latter result tends to show that although oxygen appears to
favour the development of germs, still it does not appear to favour their
reproduction.

As the weather had become much warmer, and a marked increase of life
in the atmosphere had taken place, some of the same albumen solution as

VOL. XIX. 20

472 Mr. F. Crace-Calvert on the Actionof Heat [May 1],

had been employed in the above experiments was left exposed in similar
tubes to its influence, when a large quantity of life was rapidly developed
and continued to increase. This result appears to show that the increase
of life is not due to reproduction merely, but to the introduction of fresh
germs; for, excepting this fresh supply, there appears to be no reason why
life should increase more rapidly in the open than in the closed tubes.

In concluding this paper I have great pleasure in recognizing the able
and persevering attention with which my assistant, Mr. William Thompson,
has carried out these experiments.

III. “ Action of Heat on Protoplasmic Life.” By F. Cracz-
Catvert, F.R.S. Received May 9, 1871.

Those investigators of germ-life who favour the theory of spontaneous
generation have assumed that a temperature of 212° Fahr., or the boiling-
point of the fluid which they experimented upon, was sufficient to destroy
all protoplasmic life, and that the life they subsequently observed in these
fluids was developed from non-living matter.

I therefore made several series of experiments, in the hope that they
might throw some light on the subject.

The first series was made with a sugar solution, the second with an in-
fusion of hay, the third with solution of gelatine, and the fourth with
water that had been in contact with putrid meat. The hay and putrid-
meat solutions were taken because they had often been used by other in-
vestigators ; sugar was employed, being a well-defined organic compound
free from nitrogen, which can easily be obtained in a state of purity ; and
gelatine was used as a nitrogenized body which can be obtained pure and
is not coagulated by heat.

To carry out the experiments I prepared a series of small tubes made of
very thick and well-annealed glass, each tube about four centimetres in
length, and having a bore of five millimetres. The fluid to be operated
upon was introduced into them, and left exposed to the atmosphere for
sufficient length of time for germ-life to be largely developed. Each tube
was then hermetically sealed and wrapped in wire gauze, to prevent any
accident to the operator in case of the bursting of any of the tubes. They
were then placed in an oil-bath, and gradually heated to the required tem-
perature, at which they were maintained for half an hour.

Sugar Solution.—A solution of sugar was prepared by dissolving 1 part
of sugar in 10 parts of water. This solution was made with common
water, and exposed all night to the atmosphere, so that life might impreg-
nate it. The fluid was prepared on the Ist of November, 1870, introduced
into tubes on the 2nd, and allowed to remain five days. On the 7th of
November twelve tubes were kept without being heated, twelve were
heated to 200° Fahr., twelve to 300°, and twelve to 400° Fahr.

1871.]

on Protoplasmic Life.

473

The contents of the tubes were microscopically examined on the Ist of
December, twenty-four days after heating.

Sugar solution

Heated for half

Heated for half | Heated for half

under each field
of the micro-
scope, principal-
ly small black
vibrios, 2 or
3 _microzymes
swimming slow-
ly about, 3 or 4
ordinary swim-
ming vibrios, and
a few Bacteria.

disappeared, no

animaleules were |

swimming ; still
this temperature
had not com-
pletely destroy-
ed: Infe. 4 or 5
small black vi-
brios were ob-
served moving
energetically to

but the life was
not entirely de-
stroyed, as 1 or
2 ordinary vi-
brios and 1 or 2
small black vi-
brios were ob-
served in motion
under the field
of the wmicro-
scope.

decomposed ; no
trace of life was
observed.

and fro; 2 or 3
ordinary vibrios
were also ob-
served moving
energetically in
the same posi-
tion of the field,
that is, without
swimming about.

Remarks.—The black vibrios here referred to are far more opaque than
the other varieties of vibrios, and are the most important of all, as I have
found them to resist not only very high temperatures, but all chemical
solutions. I shall, in my paper on putrefaction and the action of anti-
septics, describe the various vibrios and give drawings of them.

Hay Infusion—An infusion of hay was made by macerating it in
common water for one hour, then filtering the liquor, and leaving it ex-
posed to the atmosphere all night, when it was sealed in the small tubes,
twelve of which were used for each experiment. The infusion was made on
the 4th of November, sealed in tubes on the 5th, and heated on the 7th.

The results were examined on the Ist of December, 1870, twenty-four
days after being heated.

474 Mr. F. Crace-Calvert on the Action of Heat [May 11,

sls Sephocr Heated for half | Heated for half | Heated for half | Heated eeteele
He infsian an hour at an hour at an hour at an hour at
Ney neaCe 212° Fahy. 300° Fahr. 400° Fahr. 500° Fahr.

Fungus matter
was observed
growing on the
surface of the
fluids in two of
the tubes.Onsub-
jecting the con-
tents of some of
the tubes to ex-
amination, from
20 to 25 animal-
cules were obser-
ved under each
field of the mi-
croscope. This
kind of life re-
sembled small
dots moving en-
ergetically to
and fro; 1 or 2
ordinary vibrios
were also pre-
sent.

No fungus mat-

ter was noticed
on the surface in
any of the tubes.
A few small black
vibrios present
in the original so-
lution were also
present in this.

No fungus mat-

ter present, but
someof thesmall
black —__vibrios
were still pre-
sent, although in
less numbers.

No fungus mat-
ter observed. The
fluid was filled
with irregular
masses of coa-
gulated matter,
and life had dis-
appeared.

No life present.

Gelatine Solution.—A solution of gelatine, prepared of such strength
that it remained liquid on cooling, was exposed for twenty-four hours to the

atmosphere.

It was then introduced into the small tubes, and the tubes

sealed. The solution was made on the 4th of November, the tubes sealed
on the 5th, and subjected to the different temperatures on the 7th.
The fluids were examined on the Ist of December, 1870, twenty-four days

Gelatine solu-
- tion not heated.

There were 7or8
animaleules un-
der each field, 5
or 6 of which
were quite differ-
ent to any thing
observed in the
other fluids. They
had long thin bo-
dies, swimming
with a peristaltic

motion. 1 or 2
ordinary swim-
ming vibrios

were also pre-
sent; but the
small black vi-
brios were ab-
sent,

after being heated.

Gelatine solu-
tion heated for
half an hour
at 100° Fahr.

have only slight-

Heated for half | Heated for half | Heated for half

an hour at
212° Fahr.

diminution in

ly decreased, and | the quantity of

none of the ani-
malcules
swimming. The
peculiar animal-
cule mentioned
in the first co-
lumn appeared
to retain still its
peristaltic mo-
tion, but not suf-
ficient power to
move across the
field, a few ordi-
nary vibrios be-
ing also observed
moving to and
fro.

life present was

were | noticeable.

an hour at
300° Fahr.

Life seemed to|A very decided | No life present.

an hour at

400° Fahr.

No life present.

1871.]

on Protoplasmic Life.

A475

Putrid-Meat Fluid.— Water was placed in an open vessel, and a piece
of meat suspended in it until it became putrid and contaminated with
myriads of animalcules.

This fluid was placed in the usual tubes, which
were sealed on the 7th of November, and heated on the same day.

The contents of the tubes were subjected to examination on the Ist of
December, or twenty-four days after having been heated.

small black ones
frequently men-
tioned.

asusual. How-
ever, one spe-
cies of very
long vibrios ap-
peared to be
considerably af-

animaleules of
the power of lo-
comotion, stall
they retained
a sufficient a-
mount of vital
force to place

was destroyed,
but some vi-
brios still re-
mained, the

‘ small black ones

being the most
numerous.

fected, as they
weremuch more
languid in their
movements.

it beyond a
doubt that life
was not de-
stroyed.

{

The results recorded in the above Tables show that protoplasmic life is
but slightly affected by a temperature of 212° F., and that, even at a tem-
perature of 300° F., it is not entirely destroyed, excepting in the case of
gelatine. In all the other fluids a temperature of 400° F. is necessary to
completely destroy the life. These experiments, therefore, clearly show
that the life found by previous experimenters in fluids which have been
submitted to heat was not due to heterogenesis, but to life which had re-
mained in the fluids, as I have seen no experiment reported where the
temperature to which the fluids were exposed exceeded 300° F.*

IT am the more justified in making this statement, as I have repeatedly ex-
amined the contents of tubes which had been submitted to a temperature
of 400° F., both immediately after cooling and at all periods up to thirty
days, and was unable in any instance to detect the slightest trace of life.

This important result corroborates those recorded in my previous paper,
and proves that the spontaneous-generation theory is not yet by any means
established.

* It is with pleasure that I find these experiments to confirm the suggestion of Dr.
Beale, in his work entitled ‘‘ Disease-Germs, their supposed Origin,” page 50 (which I
read a few weeks ago), that “living forms might live though exposed, under certain
conditions, to a temperature of 350° F.”

476 Action of Heat on Protoplasmic Life. [May 11,

It occurred to me that it might be interesting to examine the influence
on pure albumen of the putrid-meat fluids that had been heated, and note
whether they still possessed the property of propagating life. A solution
‘was prepared by mixing the albumen of a new-laid egg with pure distilled
water free from life (prepared as described in my previous paper). Equal
volumes of this solution were placed in six small test-tubes, which had been
cleansed with hot vitriol and well washed with pure water. To one tube
two drops were added of the putrid-meat solution that had been heated to
100° F., to a second two drops of that heated to 212° F., to a third two
drops of that heated to 300° F., to a fourth an equal bulk of fluid heated to
400° F., and to a fifth the same quantity heated to 500° F. In the sixth the
albuminous solution, without any thing added, was kept for comparison.

The tubes were sealed, and kept from the Ist of February to the 9th.

RESULTS OF EXAMINATION.

Albumen so-
lution, with

a )0cen putrid-meat

solution.

to 100° F.

Abundance
of life.

In each drop
2 or 3 small
black vibrios,
moving to and
fro.

Albumen so-
lution, with
putrid-meat

liquor, heated/liquor, heated

to 212° F.

Abundance
of life.

Albumen so-
lution, with

putrid-meat

liquor, heated
to 800° F.

Much less life
than in the
two fluids pre-
viously exa-
mined.

Albumen so-
lution, with

putrid-meat

liquor, heated
to 400° F.

In each drop
2 or 3 small
black vibrios,
moving to and
fro.

Albumen so-
lution, with

putrid-meat

liquor, heated
to 500° F.

In each drop
2 or 3 small
black vibrios,
moving to and
fro.

These results clearly show that, at the temperatures of 100°, 212°, and
300° F., life and its germs had not been destroyed, whilst at 400° F. they
had ; for the results of the examination were in this case exactly identical
with those of the albumen solution itself; and the life found was doubtless
introduced in the preparation of the solution, and was not due to any life
having remained in the fluids that had been heated.

Although perfectly aware of the interesting researches of Professor Mel-
sens, proving that the most intense cold does not destroy the active power
of vaccine lymph, still I thought it desirable to ascertain the effect of a
temperature of 15° F. on well-developed germ-life, similar to that which
had been subjected to the action of heat.

Some putrid-meat liquor, therefore, containing a large quantity of micro-
zyma and vibrios, was subjected for twenty hours to the influence of a tem-
perature ranging between the freezing-point of water and 17° below that
point, when the ice was melted and the liquor examined. The animalcules
retained their vitality, but appeared very languid, and their power of loco-
motion was greatly decreased.

Two hours after melting the ice the liquor was again examined, when
the animalcules appeared to be as energetic as before.

The Society adjourned over Ascension Day, to Thursday, May 25th.

1871.] Presents. 477

Presents received April 20, 1871.
Transactions.

Batavia :—Koninklijke Natuurkundige Vereeniging in Nederlandsch
Indié. Natuurkundig Tijdschrift. Deel 29. Afl. 5,6; Deel 30.

Afi. 1,2; Deel 31. Afl. 4-6. 8vo. Batavia 1867-70. The Society.
London :—Meteorological Office. Weather Reports, July 1 to Dec. 31,
1870. fol. London. Quarterly Weather Report. Part 4. 4to.
London 1871. Barometer Manual, by R. H. Scott. 8vo. London
1871. The Office.
Royal Medical and Chirurgical Society. Medico-Chirurgical Trans-
actions. Vol. XX., XXV. 8vo. London 1837-42. The Society.
Vienna :—K. K. Geologische Reichsanstalt. Jahrbuch. Jahrgang 1870.
XX. Band. Nr. 4. 8vo. Ween. Verhandlungen, Nr. 13-18. 8ve.

Wren 1870. The Institution.
K. K. Zoologisch-botanische Gesellschaft. Verhandlungen. Jahrgang

1870. Band XX. 8yvo. Ween 1870. The Society.

Besant (W. H.) Note on the Equilibrium of Flexible Surfaces. 8vo.
London 1858. On Meunier’s Theorem, and on the Curvature of Curves
in Space. 8vo. London 1863. Note on Tension. On a Metacentre in
a liquid of variable density. 8vo. London 1866. Ona Class of Me-
chanical Problems. 8vo. London 1866. Note on the Nine-point
Circle. 8vo. London 1866. Geometrical Notes. 8vo. London 1866.
A Treatise on Hydromechanics. 8vo. Cambridge 1867. Elementary
Hydrostatics. 12mo. Cambridge 1867. Conic Sections treated Geo-
metrically. 12mo. Caméridge 1869. Notes on Roulettes and Glis-
settes. S8vo. Cambridge 1870. Note on the Envelope of the Pedal
Line of a Triangle. 8vo. Zondon 1869. Mathematical Notes. 8vo.
London 1870. The Deduction of Euler’s Equations from the La-

grange Equations. 8vo. London 1871. The Author.
Plateau (Félix) Recherches Physico-Chimiques sur les Articulés aqua-
tiques. Partie 1. 4to. Bruaelles 1870. The Author.

Poneelet (J. V.), For. Mem. R.S. Introduction 4 la Mécanique Industrielle
Physique ou Expérimentale ; troisiéme édition, publiée par X. Kretz.
Svo. Paris 1870. The Editor.
Roscoe (William) Monandrian Plants of the Order Scitamines, chiefly
drawn from living Specimens in the Botanic Garden at Liverpool.
fol. Lnverpool 1828. James Yates, F.R.S.

Three Photographs of the Moon taken at New York, Jan. 8th, March 4th
and 6th, 1865, by Lewis M. Rutherfurd. Photograph of the Solar
Spectrum by the same. L. M. Rutherfurd, Esq.

478 Presents. : [Apr. 27,

April 27, 1871.
Transactions. |
Copenhagen :—Kongelige Danske Videnskabernes Selskabs. Skrifter.
5 Rekke. 9 Bind, 2,3. 4to. Ajobenhavn 1870. Oversigt, 1870.

No. 2. 8vo. Ajobenhavn 1870. The Society.
Kongelige Medicinske Selskab. Forhandlinger i Aaret 1869-70.
Svo. Ajobenhavn 1870. The Society.

London :—British Museum. A List of the Books of Reference in the
Reading Room. Second Edition. 8vo. Zondon 1871. Supplement
to the Catalogue of Seals and Whales, by J. E. Gray. 8vo. London
ikeGts | The Trustees.

Guy’s Hospital Reports. 7 vols. 8vo. London 1836-42. Second
Series. 8 vols. 8vo. Zondon 1843-53. Third Series. Vol. I1.-V.,
VIL.-XVI. 8vo. London 1856-71. The Officers of the Hospital.

Royal United Service Institution. Journal. Vol. XIV. Appendix.
Svo. London 1871. The Institution.

Victoria Institute, or Philosophical Society of Great Britain. Journal
of the Transactions. Vol. V. No. 17. 8vo. London 1870.

The Institute.

Newcastle-upon-Tyne :—North of England Institute of Mining and
Mechanical Engineers. Transactions. Vol. XIX. 8vo. Newcastle
1870. The Institute.

Stockholm :—Bureau de la Recherche Géologique de la Suede. Sveriges
Geologiska Undersdkning. 36-41. 8vo. Maps. Elfte Hiaftet. fol.
Stockholm 1870. The Bureau.

B. (G.) Sviluppo della Linea Circolare col quale si resolve il problema
della Quadratura del Cerchio. 8vo. Napoli 1871. The Author.
Baxter (R. D.) National Income: the United Kingdom. 8vo. London
1868. The Taxation of the United Kingdom. 8vo. London 1869.
National Debts. 8vo. London 1871. The Author.
De Renzy (A. C.C.) Report on the Sanitary Administration of the Panjab
for 1869. fol. Lahore 1870. The Indian Government.
Squire (Peter). Companion to the last edition of the British Pharma-
copeia. Highth Edition. 8yo. London 1871. The Author.

May 4, 1871.
Transactions.
Geneva :—Socicté de Physique et d’Histoire Naturelle. Tome XX.
Partie 2. 4to. Geneve 1870. The Society.
Hermannstadt :—Siebenbirgischer Verein fiir Naturwissenschaften.
Verhandlungen und Mittheilungen. XXI. Jahrgang. 8vo. Her-
mannstadt 1871. The Society.

1871.] Presents. 479

Transactions (continued).
London :—Society of Antiquaries. Archxologia. Vol. XL. Part 2. Ato.

London 1871. The Society.

Milan :—Societa Italiana di Scienze Naturali. Atti. Vol. XIII. Fase.
1-3. 8yo. Milano 1870-71. The Society.
Middlesbrough :—Iron and Steel Institute. Journal. No. 2. 8vo.
London 1871. The Institute.

Rome :—Accademia Pontificia de’ Nuovi Lincei. Atti. Anno 22, Sess.
1-7; Anno 24, Sess. 1. 4to. Roma 1869-71. The Academy.

Reports.

* London :—Tenth Annual Report of the Inspectors of Salmon Fisheries
(England and Wales). fol. London 1871. The Inspectors.

Washington :—War Department, Surgeon-General’s Office. Report on
Barracks and Hospitals. 4to. Washington 1870.
The Surgeon- General, U. g.

Atchison (T.) Letters to ‘The Times’ on Small-Pox Encampments. 8vo.
London 1871. The Author.
Barrett (T. S.) Examination of Gillespie: being an Analytical Criticism
of the Argument @ priori for the existence of a great First Cause.

8vo. London 1871. The Author.
Brown (Lieut. A. B.) Total Eclipse of the Sun, Dec. 22, 1870. 8vo.
London 1871. The Author.
Buchan (A.) The pouberdttine of the British Islands. 8vo. Edinburgh
1870. The Author.

Clark (Latimer) and R. cape Electrical Tables and Formule, for the
use of Telegraph Inspectors and Operators. 8vo. London 1871.
| The Authors.
Dayies (A. M.) The Meteoric Theory of Saturn’s Rings considered with
reference to the Solar Motion in Space. 8vo. London 1871.

The Author.

O’Donnell (Elias) Resolucion de la Cuadratura del Circulo. 8vo. Buenos
Aires 1870. The Author.
Wiullerstorf-Urbair (B. von) Zur wissenschaftlichen Verwerthung des
Aneroides. 4to. Wien 1870. — The Author.

May 11, 1871.
Transactions. |

Boston :—-American Academy of Arts and Sciences. Proceedings.
Vol. VIII. Sheets 1-17. 8vo. Boston 1868-69. The Academy.

Calcutta :—Asiatic Society of Bengal. Journal. 1867, Part II. No. 2, 3;
1870, Part I. No. 4. 8vo. Calcutta 1867-70. Proceedings. 1867,
No. 2-7. Index &c.; 1870, No. 11; 1871, No.1. 8vo. Calcutta
1867-70. The Society.

VOL, XIX. 2P

480 Presents. [May 11,

Transactions (continued). .
Heidelberg :—Naturhistorisch-medizinischer Verein. Verhandlungen.
Band V. 3. 8vo. Heidelberg 1870. The Society.
London :—Royal Society. Philosophical Transactions, 1860, Parts 1, 2;
1861, Parts 1-3; 1862, Parts1,2; 1863, Partl. 4to. London.

R. W. Mylne, F.RB.S.

Newcastle-upon-Tyne. North of England Institute of Mining En-
gineers. Transactions. Vol. XII., XIII., XVII., XVIII. . 8vo.
Newcastle 1863-69. - The Institute.
New York :—Lyceum of Natural History. Annals. Vol. [X. Sheets
10-20. 8yvo. New York 1869-70. The Lyceum.

Journals.

American Practitioner, 2 Monthly Journal of Medicine and Surgery.
Edited by D. W. Yandell and T. Parvin. Vol. I.-III.. No. 13-16.
8vo. Louisville Ky. 1870-71. The Editors, by Dr. Joseph Jones.

Buffalo Medical and Surgical Journal. Edited by J. F. Miner. Vol. X.
No. 7. 8vo. Buffalo 1871. The Editor, by Dr. Joseph Jones.

Medical Gazette. Vol. VI. No. 19-20. 4to. New York 1871.

The Editor, by Dr. Joseph Jones.

Nederlandsch Archief voor Genees- en Natuurkunde uitgegeven door

F. C. Donders en W. Koster. Deel 5. Afl. 2-4, 8vo. Utrecht 1870.

The Editor.

Nederlandsch Kruidkundig Archief, onder Redactie van W. F. R. Suringar
en M. J. Cop. Deel 5. Stuk 4. 8vo. Leewwarden 1870.

The Editors.

Zoologische (Der) Garten. Zeitschrift fiir Beobachtung, Pflege und Zucht
der Thiere, herausgegeben von F. C. Noll, Jahrgang XI. No. 1-12.
8vo. Frankfurt a. M. 1870. | The Editor.

Hull (Z.), F.R.S. On the Geological Age of the Ballycastle Coal Field.
8vo. Dublin 1871. The Author.
Loomis (E.) Comparison of the Mean Daily Range of the Magnetic De-
clination, with -the number of Auroras observed each year, and the
extent of the black spots on the surface of the Sun. 8vo. New Haven
1870. The Author.
Zollner (F.) Ueber die Temperatur und physische Beschaffenheit der
Sonne. 8vo. Lepzig 1870. Ueber die Periodicitét und heliogra-
phische Verbreitung der Sonnenflecken. 8vo. Leipzig 1870. Ueber
das Rotations-Gesetz der Sonne und der grossen Planeten. 8vo.
Leipzig 1871. The Author.

Geological Map of London and its Environs. By R. W. Mylne, F.R.S.
1871. Framed and Glazed. R. W. Mylne, F.R.S.

1871:] Mr. D.T. Ansted on the Earth’s interior Temperature, 481

May 25, 1871.
General Sir EDWARD SABINE, K.C.B., President, in the Chair.

Pursuant to notice given at the last Meeting, Capt. Douglas Galton
proposed and Prof. Huxley seconded the Right Hon. Robert Lowe, M.P.,
for election and immediate ballot.

The ballot having been taken, Mr. Lowe was declared duly elected.

The following communications were read :—

I. “On the Temperature of the Interior of the Harth, as indicated
by Observations made during the Construction of the Great
Tunnel through the Alps.” By D. T. Ansrep, M.A., F.R.S.,
For. Sec. G.S. Received April 6, 1871.

It had been arranged from the commencement of the Alpine tunnel
(often, though incorrectly, called the Mont-Cenis tunnel) that observations
should be taken at intervals of about one kilometre (3281 feet) from both ~
the French and Italian ends, with a view to determine as nearly as possible
the law of increment; and before the completion of the work it had become
evident that the ordinary estimate of increased temperature due to the depth
below the surface of the earth would by no means apply to this particular
ease. The actual length of the tunnel being 40,140 feet, and the culmi-
nating point of the mountain being 5280 feet vertically above a point
21,156 feet from the Italian end, there was evidently scope for a number of
valuable observations. The result also might be expected to show the influ-
ence of marked irregularities in the contour of the mountains, and also of
changes in the nature of the rock. The experiments and observations
were entrusted to the resident engineers at each end of the tunnel, Signor
Borelli undertaking them from the Italian side. It does not appear that
any special construction of thermometer was supplied, or that the subject
greatly interested the resident engineers. Careful observations were made
and duly recorded by Signor Borelli, but the attempt failed in the hands of
his colleague at the other end. Thus one great source of value was lost,
and the observations at equal distances from both ends cannot be compared.

The rocks through which the tunnel has been driven consist to a very
large extent of a peculiar calcareous schist, partly talcose, and containing
many bands and strings of quartz. The whole of the Italian end is through
rock of this kind, and it.was reached at about 11,000 feet from the entrance
from the French side. The rocks on the French side were at first very
different, including nearly 7000 feet of a peculiar sandstone with indica-
tions of anthracite, about 1000 feet of very hard quartzite, and 3000 feet of
gypsum, limestone, and calcareous schist, a large proportion being gypsum.
It would have been in the highest degree desirable to have been able to
compare observations of temperature made at similar depths in different

VOU. XIX. 2a

482 Mr. D.T. Ansted on the Larth’s interior Temperature, [May 25,

kinds of rock. All the rocks may be regarded as metamorphic; they are,
however, stratified, dipping at an angle of 50°, or thereabouts, to the north-
west, and corresponding in age to the secondary rocks of England, from the
Oxford clay to the Rhetic inclusive. There was very little water met with
in tunnelling.

The observations made by Signor Borelli have been recently made public
in a memoir by Signor F. Giordano, that appeared in the Bulletin of the
‘R. Comitato Geologico d’Italia’ (No. 1, 2, Jan. and Feb. 1871) ; and in
this communication the general subject is discussed. ‘The following ac-
count, though not a translation of M. Giordano’s memoir, derives most of
its facts from the statements there made. The geological notes and some
of the conclusions, however, result from the author’s personal observations,
assisted by the account published last year by Professor Sismonda, and a
memoir that appeared also last year in the ‘ Comptes Rendus,’ written by
M. Elie de Beaumont. ie

The temperature observations include the temperature of the air, of the
water issuing in springs (always small) met with in the progress of the
works, and of the rock. ‘To obtain the latter, borings were made either in
the walls of the tunnel or in the headings in advance of the tunnel, and
generally to a distance of 7 to 10 feet. The excavation of the complete
tunnel from the Italian end was suspended when 6 kilometres had been —
completed (about 20,000 feet, or less than halfway); but as the excava-
tion from this end had been much more rapid than from the other, the work
was continued by a small heading to a further distance of about 3000 feet,
when the opening was made to the work on the French side. Thus several
of the observations were made by borings into the wall of the heading, and
at a long distance from the completed tunnel and from good ventilation.

No observations whatever are recorded from the French side of the
tunnel, either during the work or at the time of meeting. We are in-
formed, however, that a rush of air took place at the moment of the last
blast, driving the smoke rapidly towards the Italian end. It should be
mentioned that the northern, or French end, is only 1160™ (3806 feet)
above the sea, whereas the Italian end is 1292™°50 (4241 feet), showing a
difference of level of 435 feet. Thus the tunnel would seem to act as a
chimney, and it is not unlikely that a natural ventilating-current may be
established.

On the morning of the 26th of December, 1870, the day when the com-
munication was made, the external temperature in the Bardonneche valley
was considerably below the freezing-point, but within the mouth of the
tunnel several degrees above. On this day, besides the temperature of the
rock, that of the small springs near the end and that of the air were re-
corded ; but the number of men employed, the frequent blasts, and the
active works going on must have had a marked influence on the latter,
especially as for 3300 feet the excavation of the tunnel had been stopped
and only a heading pushed on in advance. During the continuance of the

1871.] as indicated by the Alpine-Tunnel Observations. 483

work, the smoke and foul air were drawn out of the tunnel by a ventilator
near the roof.

The following tabular statement, adapted from that published by Signor
Giordano, will show the nature of the observations for temperature made
in the course of the works from the Italian side :—

————

No. of | Distance in Jemiperslone, D .
: epth in
observa-| feet from 8. Bock oc Observations. foot
tions. entrance. Air. Se een
water.
one age
i 1312 50°9 51:8 |Small spring.
2. 1640 50°9 576 |Boring trom heading 24 feet
from wall of tunnel ......... 1500
3 3281 59'5 62°6 |Boring of 16 feet from heading \
28s fromawall es. i useaerese:
4. 3675 3 62:6, \Smallrsprine. tn. . iweeses sees
5. 6562 64:0 67:0 |Boring of 10’ from heading,
Die froma sco. ces. 0 + 1700
6. 8202 4) 68:0); 7 Smaall springer yesh iste scans ns |
‘Le 9266 = “ ID TRO secs <otiisn acer oh sls tee
8. 9843 68°5 730 |Boring of that like No.5 ...... |
2. 13124 73°4 ase NDT Pah Ris aeees dies ocaue erases )
10. 16404 fon Sil tL IGTO. re ea hoe eae tet ai es gas 3000
Ty, 19686 80:2 84:0 |Boring of 10’ in a recess 13’
from wall near the point

where the excavation of the

tunnel was suspended till

the communication was

opened with the French side.| 4500
12, 21156 86:2 85:1 |Boring of 7’ under the culmi-

nating point of the moun-

tain with 5280 feet of rock

overhead. Small heading 7'

Trommewallll actus usr ces veces 5280

13. 21858 . 82:4 |Small spring.
14, 22967 77:0 80°6 |Boring of 7’ into wall of small

Iver CNG Nee te, col reaps 4750
15. 22993 “: 77-9 |Small spring. Initial tempera-

ture probably rather higher.

It thus appears that the observed difference of temperature of the rock
between the distance of 1640 feet from the entrance and the distance of
21,156 feet is 27°°5 F. The difference of depth beneath the surface in

that distance is about 4600 feet. It is thought possible that the real
difference may be somewhat less, as the increased temperature of the air in
the heading, owing to the number of men employed and the frequent
blasting, may have influenced the result in some measure ; and it is perhaps
safer to estimate the total increment at something less than 263° F.

In the absence of observations that can be absolutely depended on, we
may perhaps assume the true maximum temperature of the rock to be 84°.
The part of the tunnel having this permanent temperature is 1295™ or
4250 feet above the sea, and the corresponding point of the surface is
9530 feet above the sea, showing a difference of 5280 feet. A careful esti-

2a2

484 Mr.D.T. Ansted on the Earth’s interior Temperature, [May 25,

mate of the distribution of the mountain mass seems to show that this is
somewhat in excess of the true difference, and that if the slope were per-
fectly even the difference would be reduced to about 5080 feet.

It is necessary now to estimate as nearly as possible the mean annual
temperature of the air at the surface, and the depth and temperature of the
stratum of invariable temperature within the earth. None of these has as yet
been determined by experiment ; but it is found generally that the stratum
of invariable temperature is nearly 2° I’. warmer than the mean temperature
of the air at the surface, and that the mean temperature of the air decreases
in ascending to the higher parts of the atmosphere at the rate of 1° F. in
317 feet. As, however, the mean temperature of the air at the mouth of
the tunnel is not known by observation, we must take Turin as the nearest
point of departure, this city being 820 feet above the sea, and its mean
annual temperature 54°5F. The difference of level between Turi and
the mountain-summit being 8710 feet, this, divided by 317, gives 27°°5 as
the amount to be deducted from 54°°5. Thus the calculated mean annual
temperature would be 27°5 F. ; adding to this 2°, we have the calculated
temperature of the stratum of invariable temperature 29°5 F.

As some check on this estimate, it may be worth while to refer to a some-
what analogous case determined by observation by Dolfuss-Ausset, in
1865-66, on the mountain of St. Theodule and in the valleys of Aosta and
the Vallais. In this case the mean temperature of the air was found to be
— 5°10 C. (22°8 F.) at the height of 3333" (10,936 feet). The excess
of elevation of this summit above the crest of the Alps aver the tunnel
being 1406 feet, the latter should be (at the rate of 1° F. per 317 feet)
4°-5 F. warmer, or have a temperature of 27°°3 F., a result nearly in accord-
ance with the other calculation.

Estimated in this way, the difference of temperature between the mean
temperature of the air on the assumed surface above the central point of the
tunnel would be (84°—27°-5=) 56°°5 F., and the rate of increment (the

difference of level being 5080 feet) 1° in ($5 565 =) 90 feet nearly; or if

we assume the stratum of invariable temperature to be 80 feet below the
. 7 DOOO :
surface, the rate will be 1° in (Gao) 91 feet, showing, no doubt, a very

considerable difference when compared with most other observations made
in Europe and elsewhere at various levels, but not altogether unparalleled in
special cases. It is, of course, possible that the difference may be due to
the topographical conditions and geological structure of the earth’s crust
under the crest of a great mountain-chain of comparatively recent elevation.

But there is an important fact to be observed not alluded to by Signor
Giordano, but bearing very strongly on the general question of the rate of
increment. The slope of the Alps in this part of the range above the
tunnel is nearly regular on the French side, but very sudden at first
towards Italy, after which there is a wide step or terrace, for a distance of

1871]. as indicated by the Alpine-Tunnel Observations. A85

about two miles. It results that the depth from the summit of the ridge to
the tunnel being 5280 feet, the depth from the surface to the tunnel at the
Torrent of Merdovine, where the step or terrace commences, and which is
8240 feet in horizontal distance from the summit, is only 1700 feet, show-
ing a diminution of 3580 feet of elevation in 8240 feet of distance, or,
allowing for a sudden rise near the summit, a slope of 1 in 23, or an angle
of 21°. On the other hand, the depth from the surface to the tunnel be-
tween the Torrent of Merdovine and a point about 3000 feet from the
entrance (a horizontal distance of 10,0C0 feet) shows hardly any appre-
ciable difference, varying only a few hundred feet from one point in the
profile to another. Beyond this point there is another rapid descent to the
valley of Bardonneche, where the mouth of the tunnel is situated.

Temperature observations were taken (1) at a point under the summit
of the crest, (2) at a point under the Torrent of Merdovine, and (3) under
the last point mentioned, 3000 feet from the entrance. These show re-
spectively 85°1 F., 74°°5 F., and 62°°6 F. In each case the observations
were made from borings, and they may all be regarded as good and fairly
to be compared with each other. Making the corrections already ex-
plained, the result would be, first, that borings of 1700 feet made in dif-
ferent parts of the terrace below the steep mountain face for a breadth of
about two miles might show a rate varying from 1° of increase of tempera-
ture in 43 feet of depth to 1° in 63 feet; whilst on the steep slope the rate
at the lowest part of the slope being 1° in 63 feet, the rate at the summit is
1° in 91 feet, the horizontal distance between the two places of observation
being 8240 feet, or about a mile and a half. In all these cases there is no
difference in the nature of the rock.

There are two intermediate observations, numbered (10) and (11) in the
Table, which correspond to depths below the surface of 3000 and 4500
feet respectively. Estimated as before, the rate of increment is in the
former case 1° in 65 feet, in the latter 1° in 84 feet.

One observation (No. 14) was made 1800 feet beyond the centre of the
tunnel towards the north, at a depth which may be fairly estimated at
4750 feet. The temperature observed was 80°°6 F., which, reduced as
before, shows a rate equivalent to 1° in 93:4 feet.

These results tabulated will appear as follows :—

Distance Depth from Temp. Rute ohinerement
from S. entrance. surface. 5
Observation No. 3 .. 3281 1700 62°6 F. 1° F. in 43 feet.
D4 OOO? ~ 67°0 eA Y lating
8 .. 9843 ds 700 35, Oo oe
9 ..13124 HS Hise dS ia. OL
10 ..16405 3000 81°5 Se LOO aS
LE 2219686 4500 84-0 i Oo
122) 2bhoo 5280 8a'l So ee ais
From N. end.
14 ..18345 4750 80°6 33 Soa

486 Mr. Legros Clark on the Mechanism of Respiration. [May 25,

The absence of observations from the French side appears more and more
unfortunate as we advance in the investigation, and renders the general
result byno means so satisfactory as it would otherwise be. It would appear,
indeed, that distance from the surface alone is not by any means the only
cause of increased temperature in the case of a lofty mountain mass; but
how far this is due to imperfect observation, the want of properly sheltered
instruments, and local causes connected with the progress of the works, it
is not easy to say. There may also, no doubt, be some difference arising
from the imperfect modes of estimating the mean annual temperature and
the temperature and depth of the stratum of permanent temperature. But
although all these are subject to a certain amount of correction, there is
enough general accordance of the observations to show that the conclusions
indicated must be accepted. Considering that we are in the heart of the
great mountain axis of Europe, the conditions are simpie and favourable.
There is little or no permanent snow or ice on either side, and no glaciers :
one slope (that to the south) is at first rapid, and then in steps; the
other slope is very regular. The tunnel is of great leigth, and most
parts of it of enormous depths below the surface, compared with any other
depths that have been reached ; and it has been mentioned already that the
geological conditions are unusually simple, especially in the southern end
of the tunnel, to which all the observations are confined. No case has ever
before occurred in which there was so much opportunity of making syste-
matic and trustworthy observations on the subject of the internal tempera-
ture of the earth; but as it is not unlikely that the successful comple-
tion of the tunnel under the Mont Frejus may be followed: by other similar
undertakings in other parts of the Alps, the experience here gained may at
any rate be turned to account to secure better and more systematic work
elsewhere. 7 }

Norre.—Since the above memoir was written, the author has been in
correspondence with Prof. Sismonda of Turin, and has obtained permission
to repeat the observations recorded, to make corresponding observations in
the bore-holes at the French end of the tunnel, and to obtain observations
of the temperature at the surface. These observations will be made with
instruments provided by the British Association Committee for investigating
the rate of increase of underground temperature, and will be conducted by
the author, who hopes to visit the tunnel during the present summer.

II. “Some Remarks on the Mechanism of Respiration.” By F.
Le Gros Crark, F.R.C.S., Professor of Anatomy and Surgery
at the Royal College of Surgeons. Communicated by Prof. P.
M. Dunean, F.R.S. Received April 18, 1871.

(Abstract.)

The author commences his paper by narrating some experiments on
recently slaughtered animals, in the course of which the remarkable tension

1871.] Researches on the Hydrocarbons of the Series C,Ho,42. 487

of the diaphragm was noticed ; and the varying condition of that muscle,
and of the lungs and pleura, with their mutual relations, are com-
mented on. )

The importance of this passive tension of the diaphragm is indicated,
and exemplified both physiologically and pathologically. It is essential
in retaining the supplemental air within the lungs, in restoring the equill-
brium of repose, in economizing active muscular power, and in maintaining
the pericardial space, &c.

The action of the diaphragm in relation to the walls of the chest and to
other muscles is next discussed ; and the influence of the diaphragm in
drawing in the chest-walls, under certain circumstances, is pointed out, and
illustrated by cass of injury to the spinal cord.

The action of .he intercostal muscles, as necessary adjuncts to the dia-
phragm and as muscles of inspiration, is insisted on and illustrated by
diagrams ; and a summary of their action is given.

The agency of the serratus magnus is then discussed ; and reasons are
advanced, supported by observation and experiment, to show that it is only
under special conditions and to a limited extent that it can be regarded as
taking any part in the act of inspiration.

The mobility of the different costal regions and of the sternum is
exemplified by observation and experiment.

Lastly, the question of abdominal and thoracic breathing, severally in
the male and female, is considered; and reasons are adduced for concluding
that the received opinions on this subject are erroneous.

III. “ Researches on the Hydrocarbons of the Series C,,H,,,..”7—VII.
By C. ScuortemMeER. Communicated by Prof. Stoxas, Sec.R.S.
Received April 27, 1871.

In a former communication *, I have shown that the paraffins, the con-
stitution of which is known, may be arranged in four groups. The first
group, which I called normal paraffins, contain the carbon atoms linked
together in a single chain. Of these I have obtained some new ones, which
I shall descrise more fully m a further communication. The normal
parafiins which I have so far studied are given, together with their boiling-
points, in ces Lal esis Table :—

From the acids of the So-called al-
From petroleum. series C,H»,—20,. cohol radicals.
C, H,, 37°— 39° ——
Dipropyl. . From mannite.
C, 13 69°— 70° 69°°5 69°—70° Fc oes
C,H, gg°— 99° 100°-5 hey alae
From methyl-
Dibutyl. hexyl carbinol.
C, H.. 123°=124° 12e-=1 247 A ey ale 124°

* Proc, Roy. Soc. vol. xvi. p. 367.

488 Dr. W. Huggins on the Spectra [May 25,

That these paraffins have really the constitution which I have ascribed

to them follows partly from their mode of formation; thus dipropyl was
obtained from the normal propyl iodide, and dibutyl from normal butyl
iodide. The constitution of the others was determined by converting them
‘into alcohols and studying the oxidation products of the latter; thus the
hexyl hydride from petroleum, as well as that obtained from mannite, was
transformed inte secondary hexyl alcohol, which on oxidation yielded acetic
acid and normal butyric acid.

In the communication above referred to, I placed the hydrocarbon
C, H,, from methyl-hexyl carbinol amongst another group; but I have
found now that this body is identical with dibutyl and also with the hydro-
carbon which Zinke obtained from primary octyl alcohol. This chemist
prepared also dioctyl, C,, H,,, which consequently is a normal paraffin ;
and it appears probable that dihexyl, which Brazier and Gossleth obtained
by the electrolysis of cenanthylic acid, belongs to this group too.

We are now acquainted with the following normal paraffins :—

Boiling-points.

Found (mean). Galena Difference.
CD gee
px ldly — ——
C, H,
C, H,, i i
C,H. oor Siok ay
C, Hi, 70 jie 33°
(Gag lalyn 998 100° 29°
Cre. 124° 125° 25"
Co pbc: ea 2012 4x 19°
Cone 278° 278° 4x 19°

From this it appears that the boiling-point is not raised 31° for each
addition of CH,, as I formerly assumed, but that, as the calculated numbers
show, the difference between the boiling-points of the lower members de-
creases regularly by 4° until it becomes the well-known difference of 19°.

IV. “ Note on the Spectrum of Uranus and the Spectrum of Comet

I., 1871.” By Wiurtam Hucerns, LL.D., D.C.L., V.P.R.S.
Received May 10, 1871.

In the paper ‘‘On the Spectra of some of the Fixed Stars’”’*, presented
conjointly by Dr. Miller and myself to the Royal Society in 1864, we gave
the results of our observations of the spectra of the planets Venus, Mars,
Jupiter, and Saturn; but we found the light from Uranus and Neptune too
faint to be satisfactorily examined with the spectroscope.

* Phil. Trans. 1864, p. 413; and for Mars, Monthly Notices R, Astr. Soc. vol .xxvii.
p- 178.

1871.] of Uranus and Comet We VST 489

By means of the equatorial refractor of 15 inches aperture, by Messrs.
Grubb and Son, recently placed in my hands by the Royal Society, I have
succeeded in making the observations described in this paper of the re-
markable spectrum which is afforded by the light of the planet Uranus.

It should be stated that the spectrum of Uranus was observed by Father
Secchi in1869*. THe says: “le jaune y fait complétement défaut. Dans
le vert et dans le bleu il y a deux raies trés-larges et trés-noires.” He re-
presents the band in the blue as more refrangible than F, and the onein the
green as near E.

6.U«< D a
Oa So Oe SLE) OG: oF cae BES oO of CF CL GCF OG
if It ! ! elt I | i af ti if u u ! in witli mili mbit ul ui wii Wri putt loin i ua fmm bod | i | i

The spectrum of Uranus, as it appears in my instrument, is represented
in the accompanying diagram. The narrow spectrum placed above that of
Uranus gives the relative positions of the principal solar lines and of the
two strongest absorption-bands produced by our atmosphere, namely, the
group of lines a little more refrangible than D, and the group which occurs
about midway from C to D. The scale placed above gives wave-lengths
in millionths of a millimetre.

The spectrum of Uranus is continuous, without any part being wanting,
as far as the feebleness of its light permits it to be traced, which is from
about C to about G.

On account of the small amount of light received from this planet, I
was not able to use a slit sufficiently narrow to bring out the Fraunhofer
lines. The positions of the bands produced by planetary absorption,
which are broad and strong in comparison with the solar lines, were deter-
mined by the micrometer and by direct comparison with the spectra of
terrestrial substances.

The spectroscope was farnisherl with one prism of dense flint-glass,
having a refracting-angle of 60°, an observing telescope magnifying 54 dia-
meters, and a collimator of 5 inches focal length. A cylindrical eae was
used to increase the breadth of the spectrum.

The remarkable absorption taking place at Uranus shows itself in six
strong lines, which are drawn in the diagram. The least refrangible of
these lines occurs in a faint part of the spectrum, and could not be mea-

* Comptes Rendus, vol. Ixvyiii. p. 761, and ‘Le Soleil,’ Paris, 1870, p. 354.

4.90 On the Spectra of Uranus and Comet I. , 1871. [May 25,

sured. Its position was estimated only, and on this account it is repre-
sented in the diagram by a dotted line. The positions of the other lines
were obtained by micrometrical measures on different nights. ‘The strongest
of the lines is that which has a wave-length of about 544 millionths of a
millimetre. The band at 572 of the scale is nearly as broad but not so
dark; the one a little less refrangible than D is narrower than the
others.

The measures taken of the most refrangible band showed that it was
at or very near the position of F in the solar spectrum. The light from,
a tube containing rarefied hydypgen, rendered luminous by the induction-
spark, was then compared arco with that of Uranus. The band in the
planet’s spectrum appeared to be coincident with the bright line of
hydrogen.

Three of the bands were shown by the micrometer not to differ greatly
in position from some of the bright lines of the spectrum of air. A direct
comparison was made, when the principal bright lines were found to have
the positions, relatively to the lines of planetary absorption, which are
shown in the diagram. ‘The band which has a wave-length of about 572
millionths of a millimetre is less refrangible than the double line of nitrogen
which occurs near it. The two planetary bands at 595 and 618 of the
scale appeared very nearly coincident with bright lines of air. The faint-
ness of the planet’s spectrum did not admit of certainty on this point; I
suspected that the planetary lines are in a small degree less refrangible.
There is no strong line in the spectrum of Uranus in the position of the
strongest of the lines of air, namely, the double line of nitrogen.

As carbonic-acid gas might be considered, without much improbability,
to be a constituent of the atmosphere of Uranus, I took measures with the
same spectroscope of the principal groups of bright lines which present
themselves when the induction-spark is passed through this gas. The re- ©
suit was to show that the bands of Uranus cannot be ascribed to the ab-
sorption of this gas. ;

There is no absorption-band at the position of the line of sodium. It
will be seen by a reference to the diagram that there are no lines in the
spectrum of Uranus at the positions of the principal groups produced by
the absorption of the earth’s atmosphere.

Spectrum of Comet I., 1871.

On April 7 a faint comet was discovered by Dr. Winnecke. I observed
the comet on April 13 and May 2. On both days the comet was exceed-
ingly faint, and on May 2 it was rendered more difficult to observe by the
light of the moon and a faint haze in the atmosphere. It presented the
appearance of a small faint coma, with an extension in the direction from
the sun.

When observed in the spectroscope, I could detect the light of the coma
to consist almost entirely of three bright bands.

1871.] On a new Atmospheric-Pressure Instrument. — 491

A fair measure was obtained of the centre of the middle band, which was
the brightest ; it gives for this band a wave-length of about 510 millionths
of a millimetre. I was not able to do more than estimate roughly the
position of the less refrangible band. ‘The result gives 545 millionths.
The third band was situated at about the same distance from the middle
band on the more refrangible side.

_ It would appear that this comet is similar in constitution to the comets
which I examined in 1868*.

V. “ Ona New Instrument for recording Minute Variations of At-
mospheric Pressure.’ By WitpMan Wuirenovuss, F.M.S. &e.
&e. Communicated by R. H. Scorr, F.R.S., Director of the
Meteorological Office. Received May 8, 1871.

(Abstract.)

_ The occurrence of a heavy ‘‘ ground-swell’’ on the sea-coast in per-
fectly calm weather suggested to the writer some years ago the possibility
of atmospheric waves or pulsations accompanying a gale being propa-
gated to a considerable distance (irrespective of any horizontal movement
of air), and giving evidence of the disturbance existing elsewhere.

_ It was seen that, even if such were the case, it would be difficult to
obtain proof of it, as any ordinary observations would fail to detect it, and
that it could only be attained by the adoption of a system of continuous
record specially adapted to the purpose. The writer therefore determined
to design and construct an instrument with this object ; and after many
trials with varied apparatus, it was decided to adopt the hydraulic prin-
ciple, as affording at once the means of accumulating force sufficient to
actuate the instrument, and of measuring the force itself by the alteration
produced in the height of the column of water.

The use of an air-chamber was suggested by the sympiesometer ; it has,
however, been enlarged to meet the altered conditions of this instrument,
and is buried underground to secure freedom from all diurnal changes of
temperature.

The action of the instrument essentially depends upon the flow and
reflow of water between two hydraulic chambers (connected by a tube or
siphon), one of which is open and exposed to atmospheric pressure, the
other closed at top, and removed from such pressure, being in pneumatic
connexion with the buried air-chamber.

Any difference in the levels of the water in these two chambers is a
measure of the variation of pressure producing it, and the water in its flow
is made to move the tracing-point or pen across the paper.

In order that the objects of the research should be attained, the action
must be continuous, unfailing, of great delicacy—able to show changes of

* Phil. Trans. 1868, p. 555; and Proc. Roy. Soc. vol. xvi. p. 386.

492 Mr. W. Whitehouse on a New Instrument for [May 25,

soa of an inch of mercury and of brief duration, and yet moving with
sufficient force to reduce to insignificance the inevitable friction of the pen
and working parts.

The chief difficulties met were :-—

Ist. To retain perfect sensibility to minute variations of pressure with-
out being constantly thrown out of range by the greater changes.

2nd. To record on a very open scale, and yet not to exceed the usual con-
venient limits of paper and space.

It was found necessary to abandon the idea of recording absolute
barometric measurements on such a scale, and to deal with minute differ-
ences only (hence the name “ Differential microbarograph ”’), making the
instrument self-adjusting, so as to act differentially only, allowing brief
wave-like motions or pulsations of pressure to record themselves as such,
while a steady rise or fall of pressure should record itself by a line or trace,
whose mean distance above or below the base-line will indicate pretty
accurately the rate per hour of such rise or fall.

This power of self-adjustment has been obtained by use of a capillary
tube communicating with the air-chamber and with the atmosphere,
whereby the equilibrium disturbed by changes of pressure is being con-
stantly restored, and the pen brought back to the zero.

It is as if the ordinary barographic curve of pressure were made to serve
as the base-line, and these minute variations were made to record them-
selves above or below it, as though they were ripples or waves upon its
surface. :

The two hydraulic chambers connected by a siphon being im a state of
equilibrium, and the closed one being in pneumatic connexion with the
buried air-chamber, it is obvious that any change in the atmospheric
pressure exerted upon the water in the open one would disturb the equili-
brium and alter the levels, by causing water to pass from one to the
other.

The end of.the siphon, however, opens into a small cylinder closed at the
bottom, and suspended in the water in the open chamber ; this responds
to the movement, and measures the flow of the water taking place between
the chambers, the degree of its immersion depending upon the quantity of
water it contains, and altering by its displacement the level of the water in
which it floats.

Inverted in the water, and attached by a couple of silk lines passing
over pulleys to this cylinder, partly as a counterpoise, but also to cooperate
with it in producing the movements of the instrument, is another cylinder
of equal area, capacity, and weight, closed at top, where it is subjected
to the pressure of the atmosphere, open at bottom, where its interior is
removed from such pressure by being suspended over the mouth of a tube
in pneumatic connexion with the buried air-chamber.

These two cylinders, carefully balanced and suspended half immersed in
the water in the open vessel, are equally but oppositely acted upon by any

unel7
29-94
Hampstead

“| wn ene eeeea”*

| re

TRLA
‘Y
t
’
i
é
4
4

Proc Roy. Soc., Vol_XIX Plate V

TE:
1870

June 16,17

sy
s
SS [eee
S) wemen
cs ) =
Ss : | me
SE : :
x = pee
aS | Ne
oy oes tae
<a 5 : aS. |

aoe

pcre eeewooeor”

(ae

Se
Mere wrwwmeonn en we |
~
~
% ==

re
Se

x
$
3 Ten
=

scale 2& lo 7

natural
LE bo 4

Hampstead y

Greenwich

NL Greeruvith

clare & Macdonald
37, Walbrook, Mansion Hoas«

Froc Roy. Soc. Vol_ XIX, Pate Vi

Whitehouse

LDL Ma EG"
“R7IUOT OA Seite
‘YsNoulpiagy Saz2uUt sg
‘WIPUIJOA
YLMOM) OY JV IFO)
YP 202 UblLO JS] I7OZF
ZY MW"| 44-29

“PUMY 277 26072
LUAOQSLIPPUIVY,T, |

= i

tye hop: ~~

OSI2 7A 2EL GS 5 G27
‘2IUL7098290 O 7M
IQUNYL, Yf2D | UL TO) meen
YY 2744

WUL“*,Y *E

ULtzog \PI7te

“UL gs

asnory Mor T = s
PRenOpseR oan

“2A UL

-wA70 &

eas of OL

1871.] recording Minute Variations of Atmospheric Pressure. 493

change of pressure, the one rising while the other descends, and so com-
bining to produce the desired movement.

A light but rigid V-shaped bar is laid inverted on the sharp edge of a
disk placed on the axis of the pulleys supporting the cylinders, the other end
of the bar running upon a light disk as a friction-roller.

This bar carries a glass capillary siphon pen of very simple form lightly
poised, and having a reservoir of fluid ink sufficient for a month’s use ; this
traverses the paper on the drum in the usual manner.

The relative areas of the cylinders and the hydraulic chambers respec-
tively determine the scale upon which the curves shall be projected ; the
ratio of 10 to 1 which has been adopted giving half an inch rise or fall for
one-tenth of an inch difference in the water-level in the two chambers.

The instrument therefore multiplies by 5, and the difference in the
specific gravity of mercury and water again multiplies by 13°59, say
13°6 X5=68 ; this is the scale upon which the curves would be projected
were it not for the power of self-adjustment given to the instrument, in order
to keep it within range.

By use of an instrument such as described, the writer has at intervals
during the last four years accumulated barograms for subsequent examina-
tion and discussion, amounting to over 450 days.

The autographs of different days are as diverse as possible, and sometimes
most characteristic ; tracings of a few types are appended.

It is only within the last few weeks that the writer has been able to com-
mence the comparison of his barograms with independent data gathered
from a wide area of official observations.

By the courtesy of the Meteorological Committee of the Royal Society,
and the kindness of Mr. Scott, the Director of the Meteorological Office,
he has been furnished with all the reports and data at their disposal, which
he trusts will enable him thoroughly to discuss the matter.

Meantime the interesting nature of some of the results, the coinci-
dence in point of date between some of the most striking of the micro-
barograms, and the existence of storm and gale within a certain radius are
not a little remarkable, and are indeed sufficient to induce the writer to lay
the matter before the Royal Society in its early stage, rather than await a
fuller development under his own hands, in order to insure for it a wider
basis than his own individual observations alone could command.

Personally the writer entertains little doubt that these barograms show
the existence, under some circumstances, of the atmospheric storm-waves
of which he has been in search, the most marked feature in such case being
the rhythmical character and strikingly wave-like form which the minute
movements assume.

It is believed that much information may result from such additional
means of research, and the writer offers the instrument in aid of meteoro-
logical science.

The Society adjourned over the Whitsuntide Recess to Thursday, June15,

49 4 On the Fossil Mammals of Australia. [June 15,

June 8, 1871.
The Annual Meeting for the election of Fellows was held this day.

Sir PHILIP GREY-EGERTON, Bart., Vice-President, followed by
Mr. W. SPOTTISWOODKH, Treasurer and Vice-President, in
the Chair.

The Statutes relating to the election of Fellows having been read, Dr.
Allman and Mr. W. H. L. Russell were, with the consent of the Society,
nominated Scrutators to assist the Secretaries in examining the lists.

The votes of the Fellows present having been collected, the following
Candidates were declared to be duly elected into the Society :—

William Henry Besant, M.A. Richard Quain, M.D.

William Budd, M.D. Carl Schorlemmer, Esq.

George William Callender, F.R.C.S. | Edward Thomas, Esq.

William Carruthers, Esq. Edward Burnet Tylor, Esq.
Robert Etheridge, F.R.S.E. Cromwell Fleetwood Varley, C.E.
Frederick Guthrie, B.A. Arthur Viscount Walden, P.Z.S.
John Herschel, Capt. R.E. John Wood, F.R.C.S.

- Alexander Moncrieff, Capt. M.A.

Thanks were voted to the Scrutators.

dune JO er
General Sir EDWARD SABINE, K.C.B., President, in the Chair.

Mr. W. H. Besant, Mr. G. W. Callender, Mr. W. Carruthers, Mr. R.
Etheridge, Prof. F. Guthrie, Right Hon. R. Lowe, Capt. A. Moncrieff,
Dr. R. Quain, Mr. E. Thomas, Viscount Walden, and Mr. J. Wood,
were admitted into the Society.

The following communications were read :—

I. “On the Fossil Mammals of Australia—Part V. Genus Nofo-
therium, Ow.” By Prof. R. Owen, F.R.S. Received May 8,
1871.

(Abstract. )

The genus of large extinct Marsupial herbivore which forms the subject
of the present paper was founded on specimens transmitted (in 1842) to
the anthor by the Surveyor-General of Australia, Sir Thomas Mitchell,
C.B. They consisted of mutilated fossil mandibles and teeth. Subse-
quent specimens confirmed the distinction of Nototherium from Diprotodon,
and more especially exemplified a singular and extreme modification of the
cranium of the former genus. A detailed description is given of this part

1871.] Dr. J. Casey on Cychdes and Sphero-Quartics. 495°

from specimens of portions of the skull in the British Museum, and from a
east and photographs of the entire cranium in the Australian Museum at
Sydney, New South Wales. The descriptions of the mandible, and of the
dentition in both upper and lower jaws, are taken from actual specimens in
the British Museum, in the Museum of Natural History at Worcester,
and in the Museum at Adelaide, S. Australia, all of which have been con-
fided to the author for this purpose. The results of comparisons of these
fossils of Nototherium with the answerable parts in Diprotodon, Macropus,
Phascolarctos, and Phascolomys are detailed.

Characters of three species, Nofotherium Mitchelli, N. inerme, and N.
Victoria, are defined chiefly from modifications of the mandible and man-
dibular molars. A table of the localities where fossils of Mototherium
have been found, with the dates of discovery and names of the finders
or donors, is appended. The paper is illustrated by subjects for nine quarto
Plates.

II. * On Cyclides and Sphero-Quartics.” By Joun Casry, LL.D.,
M.R.J.A. Communicated by Prof. Caviey, F.R.S. Received

May 11, 1871.
(Abstract.)

The curves and surfaces considered in this paper are, I believe, some of
the most fertile in properties in the whole range of geometry. For the pur-
pose of giving a full and comprehensive discussion, I have divided the paper
into several chapters. The following is an outline of the method of inves-
tigation pursued, together with a statement of some of the results arrived
at. |

If we take the most general equation of the second degree in (a, (, y, 6),
where these variables denote spheres instead of planes,

(abcecdlmnp q r(a@, ie oe) 0),
we get the most general form in which the equation of a quartic cyclide
can be written. Setting out with this equation, I have proved that a
quartic cyclide is the envelope of a variable sphere, whose centre moves on a
given quadric, and which cuts orthogonally the Jacobian of the spheres of
reference (a, 8, y, 0).

The Jacobian of (a, (3, y, 6) can be written in a form identical with that
of the imaginary circle at infinity in the system of quadriplanar coordi-
nates. The square of the Jacobian can be expressed by an equation of the
second degree in a, 3, y, 0. This equation assumes a very simple form when .
a, (3, y, 6 are mutually orthogonal. By means of it I have shown that
every quartic cyclide can be written in the canonical form,

aa’ +b3°+cy’+dd°+ ec =0,
where a, (3, y, 6, e are five spheres mutually orthogonal. These are spheres
of inversion of the cyclide, and by incorporating constants their equations
are connected by an identical relation, a’°+(2’+y’?+0+e=0

496 Dr. J. Casey on Cyclides and Sphero-Quartics. [Sune 15,

From these equations I have shown that in general a quartic can be
generated in five different ways as the envelope of a variable sphere which
cuts a given sphere orthogonally, and whose centre moves on a given
quadric, which, on account of one of its most important properties, I have
named the focal quadric of the cyclide. Every cyclide has, in general, five
focal quadrics; these focal quadrics are confocal; their focal conics are
double, or ‘‘ nodo-foci”’ of the cyclide.

I have shown that the locus of the single or ordinary foci of cyclides
are sphero-quartics (curves of intersection of a sphere and aquadric). In
general a cyclide has five focal sphero-quartics. If we call confocal two
cyclides having in common one focal sphero-quartic, through any point can
be described three cyclides confocal with a given cyclide. These confocals
are mutually orthogonal. Other methods of generating cyclides are also
given ; thus three circles in space being given, whose planes are diametral
planes of a given sphere, and which are orthogonal to the sphere, a cyclide
will be generated by a variable circle in space which rests on these three
circles. This method is analogous to that for describing ruled quadrics by
the motion of a line. The equation of a cyclide may be interpreted in
three different ways :—1,so as to denote a cyclide; 2, a sphero-quartic ;
3, a tangent cone to the cyclide. Hence it follows that sphero-quartics,
both in their modes of generation and in many of their properties, bear a
striking analogy to cyclides. Thus the canonical form of the equation of
a sphero-quartic is aa’+06°+cy*+do°=0, where a, G, y, 6 are circles on
a given sphere U ; the poles of the planes of a, (3, y, 6 with respect to U
are the vertices of the four cones which can be described through the
sphero-quartic. The equations of «, 3, y, 6 are, by incorporating con-
stants, connected by an identical relation, a°+/3°+y°+0°=0. By means
of this relation, which holds also for bicircular quartics, I have got the
equations of the four focal sphero-conics of the sphero-quartic. ‘These
sphero-conics are constructed geometrically as the intersections with U of
perpendiculars from its centre on the tangent-planes to the four cones
which can be drawn through the sphero-quartic. The focal sphero-conics
are confocal, their foci being the double or nodo-foci of the sphero-quartic.

Sphero-quartics may be inverted into bicirculars ; they may also be pro-
jected into bicirculars, and that in two ways. First, on either plane of
circular section of the quadric, whose intersection with the sphere is the
sphero-quartic by lines parallel to the greatest or least axis of the quadric ;
second, by elliptic projection—that is, by lines of curvature of confocal
quadrics passing through each point of the sphero-quartic. The de-
velopable formed by tangent planes to the’sphere U, at every point of the
sphero-quartic, possesses many geometrical properties. Thus the cone
whose vertex is at the centre of U, and which stands on its cuspidal edge,
may be generated by the focal lines of a variable cone osculating one cone
of the second degree, and having double contact with another. The
cuspidal edge and the nodal lines of the developable may be projected

1871.] Dr. J. Casey on Cyclides and Sphero-Quartics. 497

into the evolute and the focal conics of a bicircular quartic. The deve-
lopable possesses numerous anharmonic properties; thus all its gene-
rators are divided homographically by the nodal lines and the sphere U.

In the chapters on the inversion and classification of cyclides, I have
proved that the presence or absence of nodes depends on the relative posi-
tions of the focal quadric and sphere of inversion; thus if they touch
there will be a conic node, the cyclide being in this case the inverse of a
quadric, which is an hyperboloid or ellipsoid according as the node has a
real or imaginary cone of contact. If they osculate, the cyclide will be the
inverse of a paraboloid; the node will be biplanar if the paraboloid be an —
elliptic or hyperbolic one, and it will be uniplanar if the paraboloid be
cylindrical. If the focal quadric and sphere of inversion have double con-
tact, the cyclide will be the inverse of a cone of the second degree, and will
have two nodes, which must be conic nodes. When a cyclide has nodes,
the number of focal quadrics suffers diminution. I have given in the same
chapters the equations and the singularities of the tangent cones, and
shown that in general every cyclide has as many double tangent cones as
it has focal quadrics ; in fact the double tangent cones are the reciprocals
of the asymptotic cones of the focal quadrics. It is also proved that the
lines of intersection of a cyclide, with its spheres of inversion, are lines of
curvature on the cyclide, and that the imaginary circle at infinity is a
flecnodal curve on its surface of centres.

In the chapter on the classification of sphero-quartics I have given
Chasles’s characteristics for the osculating circles of a sphero-quartic. By
inversion we get the characteristics for the osculating circles of bicircular
quartics. Thus V=24 for these circles. In the same chapter Professor
Cayley’s equations, giving the singularities of the cuspidal edges of deve-
lopables, are transformed so as to give the singularities of the evolute of a
plane curve, any three of the singularities of the curve being given.

The last two chapters contain an account of the substitutions by which,
from properties of quadrics, may be inferred curresponding properties of
eyclides. These chapters are in reality an exposition of a new method of
geometrical transformation ; in fact, since the general equation in a, /, y, 6
which I employ is the same in form as the general equation of a quadric,
only that in my method the variables denote spheres in place of planes, it
will be readily seen that the theories of invariants, reciprocation, &c. in
the geometry of surfaces of the second degree have their analogues in the
theory of cyclides, and, in fact, the modes of proof employed in one apply
also in the other. This method of transformation is very fertile; I have
illustrated it by numerous theorems. Thus the locus of the centre of a
variable sphere cutting in two sphero-guartics having double contact, two
eyclides having a common sphere of inversion is the developable cireum-
scribed about the focal quadrics of these cyclides, which correspond to the
common sphere of inversion,

VOL, XIX. QR

498 Messrs. Gladstone and Tribe on a — [June 15,

III. “On a Law in Chemical Dynamics.” By Jonn Hatt Guap-
sTonE, Ph.D., F.R.S., and Atrrep Trisz, F.C.S. Received

May 25, 1871.
(Abstract. )

It is well known that one metal has the power of decomposing the salts
of certain other metals, and that the chemical change will proceed until
the more powerful metal has entirely taken the place of the other. The
_ authors have investigated what takes place during the process.

The experiments were generally performed as follows :—72 cubic centi-
metres of an aqueous solution of the salt of known strength, and at 12°
Centigrade, were placed in a tall glass; a perfectly clean plate of metal of
3230 square millimetres was weighed and placed vertically in this solution
without reaching either to the top or bottom ; the action was allowed to
proceed quietly for ten minutes, when the plate was removed, and the de-
posited metal was washed off. The loss of weight gave the amount of
metal dissolved, and represented the chemical action.

The most complete series of results was with copper and nitrate of
silver.

Se eae Copper dissolved.
SS Theo- | Differ-
-Propor- eee retical.| ence.
Fonte ae Actual weights. Average.
of salt.
number.
nf 03541 0:0045, 0:0050 0-00475 |0:00455 | +0:0002
Z 0:7083 0:0155, 00140 0:01375 |0-01365 | +-0:0001
3 1:0623 0:0240, 0:0250 0:0245 |0:0259 |—0:0014
4 1:4166 0:0420 00420 |0:0409 |+0-0011
By 1°7705 00600 0:0600 |0°0583 |+-0:0017 |.
6. 2:1246 0:0785 0:0785 |0.:0780 |—0:0005
Te \° JATB8 0:0975 0:0975 |0:0994 |—0-0019
8 28332 0:1230, 0:1230 01230 |0°1228 |+40-0002
9 3°1873 0:1510, 0:1480 0°1495 |0:1481 |+0-0014
10. 3 D4L5 0:1680, 0:1670 01675 |0-1749 |—0:0074
dele 3°8956 0'1955 071955 |0°2035 |—0:0080:
12, 424907 0°2170, 0:2285, 0-2310, 0:2200 | 0°2241 |0:23236 |—0:0095
14. 4°9580 0:2740 0:2740 |0:-2982 |—0-0242
16. 56664 0:3270 0:3270
20. 70830 0°4540, 0°4100 | 0°4320
24. | 84994 0:5400 0°5400
30. 10°624 06850 0:6850
Sle Al 3o8 0°7100 0:7100
40. 14-166 08440, 0:9090 0:8765
48. 16:999 1:0690 | 1:0690
i GU: 21:°246 1:359 1:359
| 70. 24°788 1:580 j 1:580

In the earlier terms of this series, twice the percentage of silver-salt gives
three times the chemical action. The close agreement of the observed
numbers with those calculated on this supposition as far as the 9th term

es 2)

ADDENDUM.

In page 498, line 2 from bottom, after “‘ action.” insert :—‘‘ The mathe-
OBE
matical expression of this law is c=C p'°8?, ¢ being the chemical action, C
the constant, and p the proportionate quantity of salt.”

1871.] Law in Chemical Dynamics. 499

is shown in the 5th and 6th columns. The law then breaks down, and
after about 7 per cent. the increased action is almost in direct ratio with the
increased strength.

The position of the plate in the solution was found to make no difference
to this 2-3 law.

Similar series of experiments were made with zinc and chloride of copper,
zinc and sulphate of copper, zinc and nitrate of lead, iron and sulphate of —
copper, and other combinations ; and in every instance where the solution
was weak and the action simple, the law of three times the chemical change
for twice the strength was found to hold good.

It was proved that the breaking down of the law at about 3°5 per cent.
of salt in solution was irrespective of the quantity of the liquid, or of the
time for which the plate was exposed. With 72 cub. centims. of a 1°41
per cent. solution of nitrate of silver the rate of action remained sensibly
the same for as long as twenty-five minutes, notwithstanding the constant
deposition of silver. This apparently paradoxical result is due to fresh
relays of the original solution being brought up to the plate by the cur-
rents produced, and that period of time elapsing before any of the products
of decomposition are brought back again in their circuit.

~ When it was perceived that within easily ascertainable limits the che-
mical action is the same for similar consecutive periods of time, experiments
were made in far weaker solutions. It was only necessary to lengthen the
time of exposure. It was thus found that the law of three times the che-
mical action for twice the strength of solution holds good through at least
eleven terms of the powers of 2; in fact, from a solution that could dissolve
one gramme of copper during the hour, to a solution that dissolved only
0:000001 gramme, a million times less.

The manner in which the silver is deposited on a copper piste was exa-
mined, and the currents produced were studied. At first a light blue cur-
reut is perceived flowing upwards from the surface of the plate, presently a
deep blue current pours downwards, and these two currents in opposite di-
rections continue to form simultaneously. A similar phenomenon was
observed in every case where a metallic salt attacked a plate of anotner
metal. The downward current was found to be a solution of almost pure
nitrate of copper, containing about three times as much NO, as the original
silver solution, while the upward current was a diluted solution of the
mixed nitrates. Moreover the heavy current took its rise in the entangled
mass of crystals right against the plate, while the light current flowed from
the tops of the crystalline branches. It was evident that when the fresh
silver was deposited on these branches, and the fresh copper taken up from
the plate, there was not merely a transference of the nitric element from
one combination to another, but an actual molecular movement of it
towards the copper plate, producing an accumulation of nitrate of copper
there, and a corresponding loss of salt in the liquid that is drawn within the
influence of the branching crystals. Hence the opposite currents.

2R 2

500 Prof. Williamson on Lepidodendra and Sigillarie. [June 15,

The amount of action in a circuit of two metals and a saline solution
must have as one of its regulating conditions the conducting-power of that
solution. It appeared by experiment that a strong solution of nitrate of
silver offers less resistance than a weak one; and it was also found, on
adding nitrate of potassium to the nitrate of silver, that its power of
attacking the copper plate was increased, that the augmentation of the
foreign salt increased the action still further, and that the 2-3 law holds
good between two solutions in which both the silver and potassium salt are
doubled, though it does not hold good if the quantity of foreign salt be kept
constant. Similar results were obtained with mixed nitrates of silver and
copper.

While these later experiments offer an explanation of the fact that a
solution of double the strength produces more than double the chemical
action, they do not explain why it should produce exactly three times the
effect, or why the ratio should be the same in all substitutions of this
nature hitherto tried. The simplicity and wide range of the 2-3 law seem
to indicate that it is a very primary one in chemical dynamics,

LV. “ On the Organization of the Fossil Plants of the Coal-measures.—
Part Il. Lepidodendra and Sigillarie.” By W.C. Witt1aMson,
F.R.S., Professor of Natural History in Owens College, Man-
chester. Received June 13, 1871.

(Abstract.)

The Lepidodendron selaginoides described by Mr. Binney, and still more
recently by Mr. Carruthers, is taken as the standard of comparison for
numerous other forms. It consists of a central medullary axis composed
of a combination of transversely barred vessels with similarly barred cells; .
the vessels are arranged without any special linear order. This tissue is
closely surrounded by a second and narrower ring, also of barred vessels, but
of smaller size, and arranged in vertical laminee which radiate from within
outwards. These lamine are separated by short vertical piles of cells,
believed to be medullary rays. In the transverse section the intersected
mouths of the vessels form radiating lines, and the whole structure is re-
garded as an early type of an exogenous cylinder; it is from this cylinder
alone that the vascular bundles going to the leaves are given off. This
woody zone is surrounded by a very thick cortical layer, which is parenchy-
matous at its inner part, the cells being without definite order; but exter-
nally they become prosenchymatous, and are arranged in radiating lines,
which latter tendency is observed to manifest itself whenever the bark-cells
assume the prosenchymatous type. Outside the bark is an epidermal layer,
separated from the rest of the bark by a thin bast-layer of prosenchyma,
the cells of which are developed into a tubular and almost vascular form ;
hut the vessels are never barred, being essentially of the fibrous type.

1871.] Prof. Williamson on Lepidedendva and Sigillariz. 501

Externally to this bast-layer is a more superficial epiderm of parenchyma,
supporting the bases of leaves, which consist of similar parenchymatous
tissue. ‘Tangential sections of these outer cortical tissues show that the
so-called ‘ decorticated ’’ specimens of Lepidodendra and of other allied
plants are merely examples that have lost their epidermal layer or had it
converted into coal, this layer, strengthened by the bast-tissue of its inner
surface, having remained as a hollow cylinder when all the more internal
structures had been destroyed or removed.

From this type the author proceeds upwards through a series of examples
in which the vessels of the medulla become separated from its central cel-
lular portions and retreat towards its periphery, forming an outer cylinder
of medullary vessels, which are arranged without order and enclose a defined
cellular axis; at the same time the encircling ligneous zone of radiating
vessels becomes yet more developed, both in the number of its vessels and
in the diameter of the cylinder relatively to that of the entire stem. As
these changes are produced, the medullary rays separating the lamine of
the woody wedges become more definite, some of them assuming a more
composite structure, and the entire organization gradually assuming a more
exogenous type; at the same time the cortical portions retain all the
essential features of the Lepidodendroid plants. Commencing with the
Lepidodendron selaginoides just described, we pass on to L. Harcourtit, in
which there is a distinct cellular axis to the medulla, surrounded by a ring
of medullary vessels, externally to which is the second or radiating cylinder
of vessels, from which alone, as M. Brongniart has very correctly shown,
the bundles of vessels supplying the leaves are derived. Then we reach
the more highly organized of the forms which Mr. Binney has described
under the common name of Srgillaria vascularis, in which the woody
cylinder is more extensively developed. ‘This conducts us to a series of
varieties from which the cells of the medulla have disappeared, but in
which there is a very distinct inner cylinder of large barred vessels not
arranged in radiating order, and an outer and much more ample cylinder
of smaller ones arranged on the exogenous type. In these examples the
line of demarcation between the vessels of the medulla and those of the
ligneous zone is sometimes straight and at others boldly crenulated. In
the latter examples the outside of the vascular medullary cylinder, detached
from its surroundings, exhibits the fluted appearance of a Calamite, for
which it might be mistaken, but it lacks the transverse nodal constrictions
of that genus. It is to some of these more highly organized Lepidodendra
just referred to that Corda has applied the name of Diplorylon, and Witham
that of Anabathra, both of which correspond in the closest manner
with the Sigillaria elegans of M. Brongniart. We are thus brought, by
the evidence of internal organization, to the conclusion that the plants
which Brongniart has divided into two distinct groups, the one of which
he has placed amongst the vascular Cryptogams, and the other amongst
the Gymnospermous Exogens, constitute one great natural family.

502 Prof. Williamson on Lepidodendra and Sigillarie. [June 15,

Of this family numerous other modifications are described. Thus Ulo-
dendron and Halonia, very closely allied, if not identical genera, have a
structure closely corresponding with. that of Lepidodendron Harcourtit,
since they possess a very distinct cellular medullary axis enclosed within
the ring of medullary vessels, and, besides, exhibit the enclosing ligneous
zone at its minimum stage of development. The remarkable scars of Ulo-
dendron and the tubercles of Halonia appear to have had their most pro-
minent surfaces composed of the true bark-layer deprived of its epidermal
bast and parenchymatous layers, which surround these structures but do
not wholly enclose them. These characteristic structures are believed to
have supported special organs, into which the epidermal layer of the stem
has been prolonged, and which the author believes to have been reprodue-
tive cones. SF avularia corresponds very closely, so far as its cortical layer
is concerned, with those already described; and as Brongniart’s Sigillaria
elegans is an unquestionable Favularia, the entire series of this subgenus
is brought into the closest relationship with the plants described. But
the author has further met with some important examples, showing that
the stem supported verticils of organs that were neither leaves nor branches,
but which are believed to have been cones, thus bringing to light an addi-
tional indication of affinity between Favularia, Halonia, and Ulodendron.

Well-marked examples have also been obtained from the Lancashire
Lower Coal-measures, the source whence all the specimens described have
been obtained, of the outer cortical layers of true Sigillarie. These spe-
cimens demonstrate that the bark of these plants is of the true Lepido-
dendron type. No example of an unquestionable Sigillaria in which the
central woody axis is preserved has yet been seen by the author.

Stigmaria is shown to have been much misunderstood, so far as the
details of its structure are concerned, especially of late years. In his
memoir of Szgillaria elegans, published in 1839, M. Brongniart gave a
description of it, which, though limited to a small portion of its structure,
was, as far as it went, a remarkably correct one. The plant now well known
to be aroot of Szgillaria, possessed a cellular pith without any trace of a
distinct outer zone of medullary vessels, such as is universal amongst the
Lepidodendra. The pith is immediately surrounded by a thick and well-
developed ligneous cylinder, which contains two distinct sets of primary
and secondary medullary rays. The primary ones are of large size, and
are arranged in regular quincunctial order; they are composed of thick
masses of mural cellular tissue. A tangential section of each ray exhibits
a lenticular outline, the long axis of which corresponds with that of the
stem. ‘These rays pass directly outwards from pith to bark, and separate
the larger woody wedges which constitute so distinct a feature in all trans-
verse sections of this zone, and each of which consists of aggregated
laminze of barred vessels disposed in very regular radiating series. The
smaller rays consist of vertical piles of cells, arranged in single rows, and
often consisting of but one, two, or three cells in each vertical series;

Ter) Prof. Williamson on Lepidodendra and Sigillarize. 503.

these latter are very numerous and intervene between all the numerous
radiating lamine of vessels that constitute the larger wedges of woody
tissue. The vessels going to the rootlets are not given off from the pith,
as Goeppert supposed, but from the sides of the woody wedges bounding
the wpper part of the several large lenticular medullary rays, those of
the lower portion of the ray taking no part in the constitution of the
vascular bundles. The vessels of the region in question descend vertically
and parallel to each other until they come in contact with the medullary
ray, when they are suddenly deflected, in large numbers, in an outward
direction, and nearly at right angles to their previous course, to reach the
rootlets. But only a small number reach their destination, the great.
majority of the deflected vessels terminating in the woody zone. A very
thick bark surrounds the woody zone. Immediately in contact with the
latter it consists of a thin layer of delicate vertically elongated cellular
tissue, in which the mural tissues of the outer extremities of the medullary
rays become merged. Externally to this structure is a thick parenchyma,
which-quickly assumes a more or less prosenchymatous form and becomes
arranged in thin radiating lamine as it extends outwards. The epidermal
layer consists of cellular parenchyma with vertically elongated cells at its
inner surface, which feebly represents the bast-layer of the other forms
of Lepidodendroid plants. The rootlets consist of an outer layer of
pareuchyma, derived from the epidermal parenchyma. Within this is a.
cylindrical space, the tissue of which has always disappeared. In the
centre is a bundle of vessels surrounded by a cylinder of very delicate
cellular tissue, prolonged either from one of the medullary rays or from the
delicate innermost layer of the bark, because it always accompanies the
vessels in their progress outwards through the middle and outer barks.
The facts of which the preceding is a summary lead to the conclusion
that all the forms of plants described are but modifications of the Lepidoden-
droid type. ‘The leaf-scars of the specimens so common in the coal-shales.
represent tangential sections of the petioles of leaves when such sections are.
made close to the epidermal layer. The thin film of coal of which these
leaf-scars consist, in specimens found both in sandstone and in shalé, does
not represent the entire bark as generally thought, and as is implied in the
term ‘‘decorticated’’ usually applied to them, but is derived from the
epidermal layer. In such specimens all the more central axial structures
(viz. the medulla, the wood, and the thick layer of true bark) have disap-
peared through decay, having been either destroyed or in some instances’
detached and fioated out; the bast-layer of the epiderm has arrested the
destruction of the entire cylinder, and formed the mould into which
inorganic materials have been introduced. On the other hand, the woody
cylinder is the part most frequently preserved in Stigmaria; doubtless’
because, being subterranean, it was protected against the ates
action which destroyed so much of the stem. |
It is evident that all these Lepidodendroid and Sigillarian plants must

504 Dr. C. R, A. Wright on the Action of _ [June 15,

be included in one common family, and that the separation of the latter.
from the former as a group of Gymnosperms, as suggested by M. Brong-
niart, must be abandoned. The remarkable development of exogenous
woody structures in most members of the entire family indicates the
necessity of ceasing to apply either to them or to their livmg representa-
tives the term Acrogenous. Hence the author proposes a division of
the vascular Cryptogams into an exogenous group, containing Lycopo-
diacee, Hquisetacee, and the fossil Calamitacee, and an endogenous
group, containing the ferns; the former uniting the Cryptogams with the
Exogens through the Cycadee and other Gymnosperms, and the latter.
linking them with the Endogens through the Palmacee.

V, “Contributions to the History of the Opium Alkaloids.—Part
II. On the Action of Hydrobromic Acid on Codeia and its de-
rivatives.”. By C.R. A. Wricur, D.Sc., Lecturer on Chemistry
in St. Mary’s Hospital Medical School. Communicated by Dr.
H. KE. Rosco. Received June 7, 1871.

It has been shown in Part I. of this research * that the action of hy-

drobromic acid on codeia gives rise, without evolution of methyl bromide,
- firstly to bromocodide, and secondly to two other new bases termed re-
spectively deoxycodeia and bromotetracodeia, the latter of which, under.
the influence of hydrochloric acid, exchanges bromine for chlorine, yielding
a corresponding chlorinated base, chlorotetracodeia ; when, however, the
action of hydrobromic acid is prolonged, methyl bromide is evolved in
some little quantity. By digesting codeia with three or four times its
weight of 48 per cent. acid for five or six hours on the water-bath, vapours
were evolved which condensed by the application of a freezing-mixture to a
colourless mobile liquid, the boiling-point of which was found to be 10°°5
to 11°°5, and the vapour of which burnt with a yellow-edged flame, and
exploded violently with oxygen, forming carbonic and hydrobromic acids.
It becomes, therefore, of interest to examine in detail the action of hydro-
bromic acid on each of the three bodies produced from codeia under its
influence.

§ 1. Action of Hydrobromic Acid on Bromotetracodeia.

_ When bromotetracodeia hydrobromate is heated in a sealed tube to 100°.
with four or five times its weight of 48 per cent. hydrobromic acid for from
six to ten hours, methyl bromide is found as a thin layer on the top of the
tarry contents of the tube after cooling; by dissolving this tarry substance
in water and fractionally precipitating the liquid by strong hydrobromic acid.
several times successively, nearly white amorphous flakes are ultimately
obtained, resembling in all their physical and chemical properties the bro-
motetracodeia hydrobromate originally employed. After desiccation, first

* Proc. Roy. Soe. vol. xix. p. 371,

1871.] | Hydrobromic Acid on Codeia and its derwwatives. 505

over SO, H, and finally at 100°, there were obtained the following numbers,
which correspond with those required for a base bearing the same relation
to morphia that bromotetracodeia does to codeia ; it is therefore provision-
ally named bromotetramorphia.

~ 0°3110 grm. gave 0°5980 CO, and 01470 H, O*,
~~ 0°2785 grm. gave 0°1650 AgBr.

Calculated. Found.
Cos BPM eae ice chia eS shacathi ey WSs 816 52°88 52°44
H., Be eee ar ero tetaine eine lee oe 79 ae 2 GUS)
Eee se a hdr eee oe 400 25°93 BA Dane

Me Sool ck... 56 3°63
see pape. jlo44

C,, H,, Br N, 0,,,4HBr.... 1543 100-00

Hence the action of hydrobromic acid on bromotetracodeia is

Bromotetracodeia. Bromotetramorphia.

C,,, H,, Br N, O,,+4HBr=4CH, Br+C,, H,, BrN,O,,

Carbonate of soda throws down from the solution of the hydrobromate
a nearly white precipitate, which rapidly oxidizes and appears identical in
all its physical properties and chemical reactions with bromotetracodeia.
_ When crude bromotetramorphia hydrobromate is precipitated by carbo-
nate of soda and the precipitate (after filtration and washing) redissolved
in hydrochloric acid and fractionally precipitated twice or thrice by strong
hydrochloric acid, white flakes free from bromine are ultimately obtained ;
these are the hydrochlorate of the corresponding chlorinated base, which is
therefore termed chlorotetramorphia. After drying at 100° the following
numbers were obtained :—

0°4005 grm. gave 0°9030 CO, and 0:2230 H, O.
0°4670 grm. gave 0°2280 AgCl and 0:0180 Ag.

Calculated. Found.
es a — i
PAS tae IR dlera stots wes ttuate 816 61°79 61°49
Jol) AS ere Ors feng Sed oe 79 2°98 6°19
Oe ra ciel ial asl aioe oleh Wage 7 fia or ie 13°35
INR eet er) sia oes Byntvie: oe 36 4°24
NS MA iets Lg SLO Di ind LARBS

C,,H,, CIN, O,,, 4HCl 1320-5" 100-00
Converted into platinum-salt and dried at 100°,—
()°4235 grm. gave 0:0840 Pt=19°83 per cent.

The formula C,, H,, C1 N,0O,,, 4HCl, 2PtCl, requires 19°72 per cent.

12?

* All combustions given in this paper were made by lead chromate and oxygen ;
except where otherwise stated, chlorine and bromine were determined by boiling with
silver nitrate and nitric acid.

506 | Dr. C. R.A. Wright on the Action of [June 15,

When codeia is heated on the water-bath with three parts of 48 per.
‘cent. hydrobromie acid for five hours, and the portion of the precipitate
thrown down by carbonate of soda and insoluble in ether is dissolved in
hydrochloric acid and fractionally precipitated several times by excess of.
stronger acid, flakes are obtained which, on drying at 100°, yield numbers
intermediate between those required for chlorotetracodeia and chlorotetra-
morphia. :

0:3365 grm. gave 0°7670 CO, and 0°1950 H, O.

0°7520 grm. burnt with quicklime gave 0°4100 Ag Cl. —

Calculated. Found.
Ce eee eae «ape as 5 eae 62°30 62°17
jae oe che Gabe ses Bee! h wpeutes ee 83 6°15 6°44
Cle ee Soe ce ov Serene 1/775 iG ORR 13°48
N, SNe Rats SDE Ao “sions sape a” 3 ee gr 5) 6 4°15
O : ; OZ 14:24

LP Sees

C., H,, CIN, O,,, 4HCl 1348°5 100°00
_ Converted into platinum-salt and dried at 100° :—

. 0°4830 grm. gave 0°0935 Pt=19°36 per cent. 2
The formula C,, H,,C1N,0O,,, 4HCl, 2PtCl, requires 19°40 per cent,

Whether this is only a mixture of chlorotetracodeia and chlorotetra-
morphia hydrochlorates, or is one compound, is open to doubt ; assuming
that it is not a mixture, the name chloro-dicodeia-dimorphia might be ap-
plied to the base. It appears @ priorz probable that the following double
serles of bases should be obtainable by successive methyl eliminations :—

Bromotetracodeia C,,H,, Br N,O,, | Chlorotetracodeia C,,H,, C1N, O,,
Ci, H,, Br N 0; i 4 3
C_,H,, Br N, O,, | Chloro-dicodeia-di- C_, H., CIN, O,,
CZ iy Br N, 0. morphia Ci Hit; Cl Ne 0,
Bromotetramorphia C,, H,, Br N, O,,| Chlorotetramorphia C,, H., CIN, O,,
Out of these ten bases four have been prepared, and a substance corre-
sponding in composition with a fifth (chloro-dicodeia-dimorphia) has also
been obtained ; but, from the great similarity in properties between all the
five substances and their high formule, it is clear that no certainty as to
the purity of the missing intermediate bodies could exist, and therefore it
was not thought advisable to attempt their formation.

§ 2. Action of Hydrobromic Acid on Bromocodide.

When bromocodide hydrobromate (prepared by two hours’ digestion of
codeia with three times its weight of 48 per cent. H Br, precipitation by
sodium carbonate, and extraction with ether, &c.) is heated with four to
six parts of the same acid to 100° for five or six hours either in a sealed
tube or in an open flask, methyl bromide is copiously evolved ; the tarry

1871.]| | _Aydrobromie Acid on Codeia and its derivatives. 507

product, dissolved in warm water and precipitated by sodium carbonate,
is for the most part insoluble in ether, the insoluble portion having all the
properties of bromotetramorphia; the etherial extract shaken with H Cl
or H Br yields a viscid liquid, which, on standing, becomes filled with
erystals consisting apparently of a mixture of the hydrochlorates or hy-
drobromates of deoxycodeia and a lower homologue, the latter predomi-
nating when the digestion is performed in an open flask. Attempts to
prevent the formation of the lower homologue by continuing the digestion
with H Br for only two or three hours did not succeed, as the large quan~
tity of unaltered bromocodide in the ether extract obtained prevents the
separation of the crystalline hydrochlorate or hydrobromate of deoxycodeia,
and hitherto no method of separating the deoxycodeia salt from its lower
homologue has been arrived at.

The following numbers were obtained by the analysis of these crystals
after recrystallization from hot water to free them from adhering bromo-
eodide salt :— :

Specimen A, prepared in sealed tubes, digested six hours at 100°:
0°3185 grm. gave 0°7850 CO, and 0:1970 H, O.
0:2200 grm. gave 0°1025 Ag Cl.
Specimen B, prepared in an open flask, digested six hours at 100°:
0°2825 grm. gave 0°6920 CO, and 0°1660 H,O.

_ 0°2260 grm. gave 0°1085 Ag Cl.

Calculated. Found.
_———— peers oe SSS, oH ~
Deoxycodeia. Deoxymorphia. A. 1B
OnE Se Mee an Girth Orie COO wus ie ory es Gp 204 66°77 | 67°22 66°80
De osu e iv ie g 22 B28 Ole ates aps 20 6°55| 6°87 6°54
LS de Oe. Seen 14 BONN PS ors aay ee 14 4°59
IE, 55 32 OO Osi rei ct. 32 10°47
ily ae eh en aa Scores lee Olt vc Ay wierd goo? L162) Lica) Biles
C,H, NO,,HCl 319-5 100-00 C,,H,,NO,,HC1305-5 100-00)

The hydrobromate prepared from the same batch as specimen B above
gave the following numbers after drying at 100° :—

0°3260 grm. gave 0°7010 CO, and 01720 H, O.
0°2730 grm. gave 0°1465 Ag Br.

Calculated. Found.

igh Deoxycodeia. Deoxymorphia.
Cee ere Oro Ook PO a) Oe. 204 58°29 | 58°64
SEAR ee ORY 22 GeO AB eeap nye 20 5+71 |. 5°86
Migitcyeein vind B84. (ING i aug aomven bay 14 4°00
Or Miia a, edi Bs 70 Ok st a ys 29.06 Gales
ABV ste ian ea, olUs Nera OTS By aw ont eae 80. - 2286 | 22°33

C,,H,,NO,,HBr 364 100:00 | C,,H,,NO,,HBr 350 100-00

508 Dr. C. R.A. Wright on the Action of — < [June 15

From the above numbers, and more especially from the percentages of
H, Cl, and Br found, it appears that while specimen A may have con-
tained some little quantity of deoxycodeia, specimen B must have consisted
almost wholly of the lower homologue ; to this body the name deoxymor-
phia may appropriately be given (provisionally), to indicate that its com-
position bears the same relation to that of morphia as deoxycodeia to
codeia. |

The numbers required for apomorphia salts are very close to those actually
obtained above, viz. for hydrochlorate C=67:22, H=5:93, Cl=11°70;
and for hydrobromate C=58°62, H=5:17, Br=22:99; but the entire
absence of emetic properties in all these specimens, as observed by Dr.
Michael Foster, conclusively proves that this base could not have been
present.

Further research is required before it can be decided with certainty
which of the three oxygen atoms in codeia is removed in the formation
of deoxycodeia ; the production of deoxymorphia with simultaneous evo-
lution of methyl bromide, however, indicates that the oxygen that links
the methyl group to the rest of the codeia residue is still present in deoxy-
codeia and deoxymorphia, while the production of both from bromocodide

renders the following formule probable :—

Codeia. Bromocodide. Deoxycodeia. -
‘ 1¢ J OH Br H
ee { OOH: ea | O.0H? “osha ! 0. CH,
Deoxymorphia.
19f H |
C,, H,, NO | OH?

so that deoxycodeia probably bears to codeia the same relation as free hy-

drogen, H,, to water, H .OH, or as acetic acid, mae ee to glycollic,

; j Aen, Oy) eb
HBr, or to bromacetic acid, CO. Om

Experiments are in progress to gain further insight into the structure of
the group C,, H,,NO. By the action of hydriodic acid on codeia methyl
is eliminated as iodide, and the elements of free hydrogen and those of H I
are added on to this group; from which, as well as from the easy poly-
merization to form tetracodeia bases, it appears probable that some at least
of the 17 carbon atoms are connected together somewhat after the
fashion of ethylene or acrylic acid, which unite readily with HI, H Br,
H,, &e. Again, the oxidizing action of Ag NO, on chlorotetramorphia is
accompanied by the production of CO,, which renders it not improbable
that the third oxygen atom exists either as the group [CH(OH)]” or
assOO!.

On carefully examining, side by side, the qualitative reactions of the

1871.] Hydrobromic Acid on Codeia and its derivatives. 509

hydrochlorate B and those of a specimen of pure deoxycodeia-salt from
codeia (without evolution of methyl bromide), not the slightest difference
was discernible between the two; in their physiological actions, too, as ob-
served by Dr. Michael Foster, the two bodies seem perfectly alike, both
being utterly dissimilar from apomorphia, from which in all other respects
(qualitative reactions, percentage composition, &c.) they differ either not
at all or extremely little.

The portion insoluble in ether of the batch from which hydrochlorate
B was obtained was treated with HCl] and fractionally precipitated by
strong acid several times successively; this mode of treatment was adopted
rather than that with Br, as a much larger yield is obtained thus, the
hydrochlorates of chlorotetracodeia and chlorotetramorphia being much
less soluble in dilute HCl than the corresponding brominated bodies are in
dilute HBr. Finally, nearly white flakes were obtained presenting all the
characters of chlorotetramorphia hydrochlorate, and yielding the following
numbers after drying at 100° :—

02480 grm. gave 05610 CO, and 0°1410 H, O.
01390 grm. gave 0°0755 Ag(Cl.

Calculated. Found.
. FRE EO ae ia.
Cs Sara eee ae eee 816 61°79 61°70
EB, “ie oe Ee ee ee 79 2°98 6°32
Cl, MS cee 5 acs Boe ant & i/o) loca! Siar 13°45
1 hn ee 56 4°24
ap 6 oo eae eee 192 1455

C,, H,, CIN, O,,, 4HCl ....1320°5 100-00

12?

Hence the portion insoluble in ether must have been bromotetramorphia.
The simultaneous formation of bromotetramorphia and deoxymorphia
from bromocodide is explainable in two ways: either

Bromocodide. Bromotetracodeia. Deoxycodeia.
a ) 5C,, H,, Br NO, + 4H, O=C,, H,, BrN,O,,+C,,H,, NO,+4HBr
Bromotetracodeia. Bromotetramorphia.
a ) C,,H,,BrN, 0,,+4Br=C,, H., Br N, 0,,+4CH, Br
Deoxycodeia. Deoxymorphia.

or
Bromocodide. Bromomorphide.

One) Co beNO. - avr —C_ i. Br NO, ..--CH, Br

Bromomorphide. Bromotetramorphia. Deoxymorphia.

(V.) 5C,,H,, BrNO,+4H, O=C,, H,, Br N, O,,+C,, H,, NO,+4HBr.

Of these two views, the first involves only known substances and reac-
tions similar to those already known in the codeia series of derivativ eS,

510 Action of Hydrobromie Acid on Codeia &c. [June 15,

and is, moreover, probable from the circumstance that the numbers ob-
tained in some instances indicate the presence of deoxycodeia as well as
deoxymorphia ; whilst the second view involves the not improbable exist-
ence of bromomorphide, C,, H,, Br NO,; on the other hand, it will be
shown in the next section that equation (III.) represents a reaction which
does not readily take place with deoxycodeia, when not in the nascent con-
dition at any rate.

Whichever view be adopted, the ultimate formation of bromotetramorphia
requires the action of water on a brominated body, substituting hydroxyl
for bromine by a reaction perfectly parallel to that whereby codeia is
regenerated from chlorocodide by the action of water *, viz.

C,, H,, C1NO,+H, O=HCI+C,, H,, NO,.

§ 3. Action of Hydrobromic Acid on Deoxycodeia.

In the hope that this action would give rise to methyl bromide and
deoxymorphia, deoxycodeia hydrobromate was heated to 100° for two
hours with about five parts of 48 per cent. HBr; no change whatever
took place, no methyl bromide being found on opening the tube in which
the digestion was carried on after complete cooling. After an hour’s
additional exposure to a temperature of 120°-130°, the contents of the tube
were found to have become black and tarry, while a small quantity of
methyl bromide floated on the top. Precipitated by sodium carbonate, a
very dirty substance was obtained, which was almost insoluble in ether;
the etherial extract, shaken with HBr, gave a small quantity of a tarry
hydrobromate, of which 0°13380 grm. gave 0:0790 AgBr or Br= 25°20 per
cent, deoxymorphia hydrobromate requiring only 22: “86 per cent.

Nothing fit for analysis could be obtained from the portion insoluble i in
ether, end the minute yield of pure deoxycodeia from codeia precluded a
repetition of the experiment.

§ 4. On the Physiological Action of the foregoing Codeia derivatives.
By Micuaet Foster, M.A., M.D.

The hydrochlorate of chlorotetracodeia and the hydrobromate of bromo-
tetramorphia, in doses of a decigramme by subcutaneous injection or by the
mouth, produced in adult cats in a very few minutes a condition of great
excitement, almost amounting to delirium, accompanied by a copious flow
of saliva and great dilatation of the pupils. Micturation and defzcation
occurred in some instances, and vomiting was observed on two occasions
with the morphia-salt, but was very slight. The excitement was very
peculiar, being apparently due partly to increased sensitiveness to noises,
and partly to an impulse to rush about.

The same doses of the morphia-salt given to a young kitten produced the
same flow of saliva, dilatation of pupils, and excitement (without vomiting) ;

* Matthiessen and Wright, Proc. Roy. Soc. vol. xviii. p. 88.

1871.] _ On Intensity of Daylight in Eclipse of 1870. 511

but the stage of excitement, which in adult cats passed gradually off in a
few hours, was followed by a condition marked by a want of coordination
of muscular movements, and presenting the most grotesque resemblance
to certain stages of alcoholic intoxication. This stage was followed in turn
by sleepiness and stupor, in which the kitten was left at night; in the
morning it was found dead.

Two observations have shown that these salts paralyze (in dogs and cats)
the inhibitory fibres of the pneumogastric; they also seem to lower the
internal tension, but want of material has prevented me from ascertaining
how this is brought about.

On rabbits neither salt, even in doses of a decigramme, seems to have
any effect, except perhaps a slight excitement. There is no dilatation of
the pupils, no flow of saliva, and, if one observation can be trusted, no
paralysis of the inhibitory fibres of the pneumogastric.

No marked difference was observable between the two salts, except
that the morphia-salts seemed rather more potent than the correspond-
ing codeia bodies.

The salts of deoxycodeia and deoxymorphia given by mouth or by
subcutaneous injection in doses of a decigramme, produced in adult cats,
almost immediately after exhibition, a series of convulsions much more
epileptic in character than tetanic. In one case there was a distinct
rotatory movement.

In a few minutes these convulsions passed away, leaving the animal
exhausted and frightened. Then followed a stage of excitement with
dilated pupils and flow of saliva, very similar to the effects of the tetra-
codeia and tetramorphia salts, but less marked.

Doses of half a decigramme given to adult cats produced the stage of
excitement only, without the convulsions.

Inno case, with any specimen of product, has vomiting been witnessed ;
like the tetracodeia and tetramorphia products, the deoxycodeia and de-
oxymorphia salts appear to paralyze the inhibitory fibres of the pneumo-
gastric. ‘Trials with rabbits gave only negative results.

No marked differences could be observed between the hydrochlorates
and hydrobromates of deoxycodeia or deoxymorphia.

VI. “ On the Measurement of the Chemical Intensity of Total Day-
light made at Catania during the Total Eclipse of Dec. 22, 1870.”

By Henry E. Roscon, F.R.S., and T. E. Tooree, F.R.S.E.
Received June 15, 1871.

(Abstract.)
_ The following communication contains the results of a series of measure-
ments of photochemical action made at Catania in Sicily, on Dec. 22nd,
1870, during the total solar eclipse of that date, with the primary object
of determining experimentally the relation existing between this action

512 Messrs. Roscoe and Thorpe on the Chemical [June 15,

and the changes of area in the exposed portion of the sun’s disk. The
attempt to establish this relation has already been made by one of us from
the results of observations carried out by Captain John Herschel, R.E.,
F.R.S., at Jamkandi, in India, during the total eclipse of Aug. 18, 1868.
Unfortunately the state of the weather at Jamkandi at the time of the
eclipse was very unfavourable, and the results were therefore not of so
definite a character as could be desired, and it appeared important to
verify them by further observation. The method of measurement adopted
is that described by one of us in the Bakerian Lecture for 1865 ; the ob-
servations were made in the Garden of the Benedictine Monastery of San
Nicola, at Catania, the position of which, according to the determination
of Mr. Schott of the United States’ Coast Survey, is lat. 37° 30’ 12” N.,
long. 1° 0' 18" E. In order to obtain data for determining the variation
in chemical intensity caused by the alteration in the sun’s altitude during
the eclipse, observations were made on the three previous days, during
which the sky was perfectly cloudless.

In the following Table the observations — at about the same hours
are grouped together :—

Tape I.
Chemical Intensity.

Mean Alti- No. of Ob-

tude. - servations. Diffused. Direct. | Total.
1 30 28 1 0-009 0-000 0-009
9 28 10 7. 0:044 0:008 0:052
13 9 "G7 7p 0:050 0°014 ~ 0°064
19 57 49 12 0:072 0:028 0:100
ZAVAG AN, 7 0:095 0:049 0:144
2352-24410 14 0°108 0:047 0-155

The above numbers confirm the conclusion a arrived at, viz. that
the relation between total chemical intensity and sun’s altitude is repre-
sented by a straight line, or by the equation

CI,=CI,+ const. x a,

where OJ, signifies the chemical intensity at any altitude a in circular mea-
sure, CI, the chenncal intensity at 0°, and const. a a number derived from
the aberrations.

The observations on the day of the eclipse be 22nd) were commenced
about nine o’clock A.M., and up to the time of first contact were made re-
gularly at intervals of about an hour. The sky up to this point was
cloudless, and the measurements almost absolutely coincided with the
mean numbers of the preceding day’s observations. As the eclipse pro-
gressed, and the temperature of the air fell, clouds were rapidly formed,

1871.] Intensity of Daylight in Eclipse of 1870. 513

and from 1” 40’ up to the time of totality it was impossible to make any
observations, as the sun was never unclouded for more than a few seconds
at atime. As the illuminated portion of the solar disk gradually increased
after totality, the clouds rapidly disappeared, the amount falling from
9 (overcast =10) to 3 in about fifteen minutes. The observations were
then regularly continued to within a few minutes of last contact.

Although the disk and by far the largest portion of the heavens were
completely obscured by clouds during totality, rendering any determina-
tion of the photochemical action perfectly valueless for our special object,
it was yet thought worth while to attempt to estimate the chemical inten-
sity of the feebly diffused light at this time, which certainly is capable of
producing photographic action.

Immediately after the supposed commencement of totality the slit was
opened, and the sensitive paper exposed for ninety-five seconds. Not the
slightest action, however, could be detected on the paper, and we therefore
believe that we are correct in estimating the intensity of the chemically
active light present at certainly not more than 0-003 of the unit which we
adopt, and probably much less.

The Table containing the experimental numbers and the graphic repre-
sentation of them are given in the memoir. By a graphical method the
relative areas of the sun uneclipsed at the times of observation were
obtained; and these are seen in column 3 of Table II., the area of the
unobscured sun being taken as unity.

Column 2 gives the results of the photochemical observations made
during the eclipse obtained from the graphical mean, and corrected for
variation in the sun’s altitude, the total chemical action immediately before
first contact being taken as unity. Column 1 gives the apparent solar
times of observation.

TAprE. ll.

i Pe OE
h v]
2 44 0°915 0-961
pL bys! 0°876 0:S80
ae 0-686 0°637
24 O:39D 0°53
pire 0-000 0-000
249 0°165 O° 127
225 0°307 0°338
2 oA 0:464 0°495
2 44 0-601 0°602
ee G°7295 0°736
Set 0°876 0861

From these observations we conclude that the diminution in the total
chemical intensity of the sun’s light during an eclipse as directly pr opor-
tional to the magnitude of the obscuration.

NOU, MIX 28

514 Mr. J. W. L. Glaisher on the [June 15,

The question of the variation of (1) the direct and (2) the diffused
radiation is next discussed. On comparing the curve representing the
chemical intensity of diffused light with the curve-of solar obscuration, it
is found that the rate of diminution in chemical action exerted by the dif-
fused light is up to a certain point greater than corresponds to the portion
of eclipsed sun, whilst from. this point up to totality the rate of diminution
becomes less than corresponds to the progress of the eclipse. The same
rapid diminution in the chemical action of the diffused daylight during the
early periods of the eclipse was also observed at Jamkandi; it is doubtless
due to the dark body of the moon cutting off the light from the brightly
illuminated portion of sky lying round the solar disk.

The results of the observations at Catania are then compared with those ~
made at Moita, near Lisbon, and communicated to the Society in 1870.
This comparison shows a striking coincidence between the two sets of ob-
servations. In each case it is seen that the relation between solar altitude
and total chemical intensity is represented by a straight line, although the
Catania observations slightly exceed, by a constant difference, those made
at Moita in conformity with the slight difference in latitude, and with the
fact that the former determinations were made at a greater elevation above
the sea-level.

The Catania observations further confirm the fact which we formerly
announced, that for altitudes below 50° the amount of chemical action
effected in the plane of the horizon by diffused daylight is greater than that
exerted by direct radiation, and also that at altitudes below 10° direct sun-
light is almost completely robbed of its chemically active rays.

VIf. “On the Calculation of Euler’s Constant.” By J. W. I.
GuaisHeERr, B.A., F.R.A.S. Communicated by James GLAISHER,
F.R.S. Received June 6, 1871. |

The main object of the present communication is to correct some inac-
curacies both of reasoning and calculation contained in two papers by Mr.
Shanks, viz. “On the Extension of the Value of the Base of Napier’s
Logarithms ; of the Napierian Logarithms of 2, 3, 5, and 10; and of the
Modulus of Briggs on the common System of Logarithms; all to 205
places of Decimals,” in the Proc. Roy. Soc. vol. vi. p. 397; and “On
the Calculation of the Numerical Value of Euler’s Constant,’ in the Proce.
Roy. Soe. vol. xv. p. 429 (1867).

For the calculation of the constant Mr. Shanks has used (as, indeed,
has every calculator who has computed the value of the constant during
the present century) the ene series '

aa B, B

B e
== | ee mer —_—— ] eels oes — 3 — a or
EEOC +e Se FC: aio Gna 1

y being the constant, and B,, B,, B, .. . Bernoulli’s numbers.

IAA Calculation of Euler’s Constant. 515

Mr. Shanks obtains the value of y from this formula by making v=10,
20, 50, 100, 200, 500, and 1000, and remarks, as a curious coincidence,
that the number of decimal places obtained from « being made equal to
10, 20, 50, and 100 is nearly proportional to 3/10, 3/20, 3/50, and 3/100.
On p. 432 he gives a Table of the number of decimal places obtainable
from the formula when w has the values 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500,
and 1000, and from it draws the inference that ‘‘ we may fairly infer that
when 7 is increased in a geometrical ratio, the corresponding number of
decimals obtained in the value of E increases only in something like an
arithmetical one, and that probably from 50,000 to 100,000 terms in the
Harmonic Progression would require to be summed in order to obtain 100
places of decimals in the value of E, Euler’s constant.” -

Algebraically, of course, y is independent of « in the formula (i), but
arithmetically, since the series ultimately becomes divergent, the value of y
is so far dependent on x that for a given value of w the series will only
afford a certain number of decimal places, ‘The number of decimal places
directly obtainable is equal to the number of ciphers which precede the first
significant figure in the value of the numerically least term of the series.

]
The mth term (considering only the terms after 5 im (i), so that the
nth term is the term involving B,,)

peo B,,
ona’
which, since
22(119'53is. 1 2n)/; 1
ieee aE ata) ee oan
ne (2x a ( Sig at gut )
is very nearly equal to
ae ler? . (2n—1 i
og se

so that the ratio of the nth to the (n—1)th term
een Oe os (- 3 )
ie

Ana” Qn
very nearly.
Let m be the greatest integer contained in wr so that wr=m+f, f

being a proper fraction, then the ratio of the mth to the (m—1)th term

(m+ ai 2m
Sees
2m *

which is always less than unity.
The ratio of the (m-+1)th to the mth term is found ima s: imilar manner

to be
alart)

516 Mr. J. W. L. Glaisher on the [June 15,

ae : 1
which is greater or less than unity according as f is less or greater than <

The ratio of the (m+ 2)th to the (m+1)th term
2(9
o-] --—(_—f)},
ie 4 /)
which is always greater than unity.
Thus the mth or (m+1)th term is the least according as f is less or
]
greater than 7

When 1 is large the value of the mth term is very nearly

Poa eae
m- (24a)

which, by use of the theorem

I
Te ° eo. ore 2 rath
2 . 0= vf (Qari) xe ¢ re

becomes

1 y Y a(2myrne oe" |
YF 5a TRA SEN OT i +
fm (27a)?” 24m

=2 [2 (=)"( ton). a

The number which forms the negative characteristic of the common
logarithm of this quantity (the mantissa being made positive), reduced by
unity, denotes the number of ciphers which precede the first significant
figure in its value; so that if the mantissa be not made positive, the cha-
racteristic indicates the number of decimals directly obtainable from the
series.

The logarithm of (ii) with its sign changed, after some expansions and
reductions, becomes

2
une +5 log, — log,, 2— r(gh+2 +f pics : ),

2er 240

jt being the modulus 43429448.... Neglecting the last three terms,
which can only very rarely lead to an error of a unit, we obtain as a result
that the number of decimal places which the formula (i) will afford directly
for a given value of & is equal to the greatest integer contained in

2ure +5 log, @— log,,2. oo

The corresponding value of the least term is, of course, easily obtained
from (iii), or it follows at once from (ii) ; for the least term

a 9 Je e-em m 2m
m m+f

1871.} | Calculation of Euler’s Constant. 517

when 2 is large,

= ve Le eo 2m—2F
mM

agreeing with (iii).
The following Table, to replace that in vol. xv. p. 432, was calculated in

the way indicated above.
Number of decimals

sae Least term. directly obtainable
from the formula.
1 a uge sis ue Lac ahuck oi Se 2
2 Sy eS TS ES ae oo 3
5 Si cthe lat GU Rehr sip iri a 13
10 es hoe: 32nd St Srehe wal ur
20 BES Seve 63rd FES a4
Bas oH 5 as 157th Shas © 13Ge
MR loca 8 314th Be es 273
200 x See ae 629th = Maen 546
RMS cn Soot. Rp eUSGe eo tire oy ce 2 1365
Uo) al a ee eae SAP ne Heb oaks soe 2729

The number of decimal places practically obtainable is limited by the
difficulty of calculating the Bernoulli’s numbers, of which only thirty-one
have been hitherto obtained. By means of these, however, 156 decimals
could be obtained of y when v=100; and by deducing a few of the subse-
quent terms, each from its predecessor (knowing their ratio), 20 places
more could be obtained without difficulty.

It is clear therefore that Mr. Shanks’s values of y obtained from v= 500
and v=1000 ought to agree beyond the 59th decimal, if correctly calcu-
lated. The author at first supposed that the want of agreement was due
to an insufficient number of the terms involving the Bernoulli’s numbers
having been included, and he therefore undertook the calculation of this
portion of the expression for e=500 and 2a=1000 to 100 decimal places ;
the results, however, still showed a difference in the 59th place.

In order to determine where the error existed, the same portion of the
constant was calculated also to 100 places, both from v=100 and #=200;
all the calculations were performed wholly in duplicate, and so much care
was taken that the author felt a strong conviction of their accuracy. {t
should be noticed that the agreement of all the four results would not
necessarily prove the accuracy of that value of y; for any error made in

would merely proe .

the calculation of the harmonic series ee et Aaa =

] 1 14k
its: ee + yg? and gee ee

A i
duce the same error in l+5 Be + 300

T7000 4 0” supposing the calculation of the reciprocals beyond 0 to
have been accurately performed.

It was therefore evident that the only means of ensuring freedom from
error in the harmonic series was to recalculate it. The lowest value of x
which would suffice for a verification was.100; the author therefore calcu-
lated the value of the series 1+5 Sis +i to 100 places of decimals,
and the result was found to agree to that extent with that given by Mr.
Shanks in the paper previously referred to; the value of I+; sae +o
was also found to be correct.

It may be meutioned that the calculation was abbreviated by a simple
artifice, suggested by Oettinger (Crelle’s Journal, t. lx. p. 376), which will
be easily understood from an example. Suppose the sums of the recipro-
cals of the odd and even numbers up to 50 are known, and it is required

to find the sum of the reciprocals up to 100.

Let
ee 1
ef eae eh go ee
oS rahe 46
ee eee! ine
Pot ate 8 50°
then .
a+ | ae | 1 1
Be ated 2 eee
oo a de eee
so that
Pet 1 ]
1+e+S eo
Tats + 99° T00
_atp ere) nee.
ge ee ae

and the calculation of the reciprocals of the even numbers between 50 and
100 is rendered unnecessary.

The values of log 2 and log 5, which were required to form log 100,
log 200, log 500, and log 1000 were taken from Mr. Shanks’s ‘ Rectifi-
cation of the Circle’ (they are also given in the Proc. Roy. Soe. vol. vi.
p. 397), and the summations cf the harmonic series from Mr. Shanks’s
The results were as

paper in vol. xv. p. 431 of the Proc. Roy. Soc.

follows :—
From z = 100 :—
y= D721 56649 01532
90082 40243 10421
35988 05770 42799
22362 15134 84454.

PS71.)) Calculation of Huler’s Constant. 519

From v = 200 :—
y = ‘07721 56649 01532 86060 65120
90082 40243 10421 59339 93995
35988 05770 91390 77706 70283
52607 02838 27101 38332 64367 ... (B).

From v7 = 500 :—
y= "07721 56649 01532 86060 65120
90082 40243 10421 99355 93995
39988 05771 o3864 75089 059738
20064 75314 10504 07812 29873 ... (C).-

From x = 1000 :—

yee On feb 56649 01552 86060 65120
99082 40245 10421 593395 93995
35988 05772 02455 61942 00398
50309 65017 53150 61852 038044... (D).

The terms involving B,,, B,,, B,,, and B,, were the highest used in the
calculation of (A), (B), (C), and (D) respectively. _

It will be seen that (A), (B), (C), and (D) differ in two respects: (i) the
50th figure in (A) is 2, while in (B), (C), and (D) it is 5, and (ii) all four
values are totally different after the 59th figure.

The first discrepancy (i) poimted to an error in the summation of the

harmonic series. As the author had verified Mr. Shanks’s value of
1 ys |

1+ pie + 00° it was practically certain that (A) was the correct value.

To place this beyond all doubt, however, the author calculated y from «

= 50 to 57 places of decimals, and the result entirely confirmed (A). It

follows, therefore, that Mr. Shanks has made an error of 3 in the 50th

] ] ]
= 1 = en a )_ —____. 3 1 1 e es
place in the eet 1007 101 8 if 200 so that we have the fol

HT
200’
hve should be... 53024... instead of . . . 53097 =. >:

1 1 ;
In 1 a ae -+i59 the tenth group should be. ... 39677 .. . instead
Otis for S9680 «6,

: 1
lowing errata (vol. xv. p. 431) :—In Leg, aeeiih the tenth group of

1 1 A ! :
Inl+3...+ 1000 the tenth group should be. . . 70880. . . instead

OF. fUCSS: « i.

With regard to the second error (il), which causes the disagreement of
all the figures after the 59th, it is clear that no error in the Bernoulli's
numbers could produce such a discrepancy, as the terms involving the
latter vary their position in each calculation, so that an error in any one
of them could not affect the same decimal in (A), (B), (C), and (D).

520 Myr. J. W. 1. Glaisher on the [June 15,

By subtraction we find :
(B)—(A)=... (60 ciphers). 48590 86852
94425 30244 89703 42646
- 04039 (CAVe Sie ee eee
(D)—(C)=... (60 ciphers) .. . 48590 86852
94425 30244 89703 42646
64039 73171 * 2 Le 2

which ouly differ by a unit in the 100th decimal place.

Leaving out of consideration the terms involving Bernoulli’s numbers,
the difference between the series when 2=200 and when 2=100 is

1 i 1 1
Lon ‘+5 99—log 200 — Dae ang — log 100
| CR Gy eee
01 102° 7 "S00 7
Similarly, the difference between the series when # = 1000 and when
n= SUG 1S
Ata ee bbe
501 ' 502 °° * 1000
Now as it is extremely improbable that two errors, exactly equal in
amount, should have been made in the calculations of

— log 2.

Liogletine soul Au eladnall ope
1017102 > * 7-200 9M 501 * 502. a3 ee

we have very strong evidence that the value of jog 2 is inaccurate, and
that () is the correction to be applied to it.
By subtracting (C) from (A), we obtain
(C)—(A)=... (9ciphers)...1 11064 84985
30114 97702 62179 26049 23519
SBO7B gg ln ee

&
The difference of the corresponding series (omitting as before the terms
involving the Bernoulli’s numbers)
NO ae
1d Ponies S00 mee ee
- Having only this one* difference-result involving log 5, it is impossible
to decide from (A), (B), (C), and (D) whether the harmonic series or log
5 or both are in error ; but the following reasoning places it beyond all doubt
that (F) is a correction to log 5, and that the sum of the harmonic series is
correct.
1 1

501 + 202

1 ; :
+ 500 of the harmonic series, as well as log 5, would be common to both.—June 16,

* By subtracting (B) from (D) we might get another, but the portion

1871.] Calculation of Euler’s Constant. 521

Mr. Shanks computed log 2 and log 5 from formule. of the form

Log 2=2 (7 P+5 Q+3 R),
Log 5=2 (16 P+12 Q+7 R),

P, Q, and R being infinite series (Proc. Roy. Soc. vol. vi. p. 397; ‘ Rectifica-
tion of the Circle,’ p. 88).

If, therefore, any error was made in the calculation of P say, it would
produce errors in log 2 and log 5 proportional to 7 and 16. On trial it
was found that sixteen times (E) was equal to seven times (F*’), the difference
being only such as an error of a unit in the 100th decimal of (E) or (I") would
produce. This afforded a moral proof that Mr. Shanks had made an
error equal to one-fourteenth of (E) in the calculation of P, or

BP Soe ee
31'°3.3P'5.3P T°":

which has rendered his values of log 2 and log 5 incorrect, and that (with
the exception of the error previously noticed) the harmonic series was
summed correctly.

Since log 3 was calculated from the formula

Log 3=2 (11 P+8 Q+5 R),

its value is also incorrect, as also is that of log 10 (log 2+ log 5) and the
modulus (the reciprocal of log 10).

The values of all these quantities are given to 205 decimal places in
vol. vi. Proceedings of the Royal Society, p. 397; but all the figures after
the 59th decimal place are incorrect in each case.

The correct values to 100 places are :—

Log 2=:69314 71805 59945 30941 72321
21458 17656 80755 00134 36025
52541 20680 00949 33956 21969
69471 56058 63326 89641 86875...
Log 3=1:09861 22886 68109 69159 52452

36922 5257 AG474 90557 82274.
94517 54694 39363 74942 93218
60896 68736 15754 81373 20888 . .
Log 5=1:60948 79124 34100 37460 07593
35226 18763 95256 01354 26851
7219 12647 89147 ALTED 87707
65776 46301 38878 09517 VOLO Sra. «
Log 10=2:30258 50929 94045 68401 79914
54684 36420 76011 01488 62877
29760 33927 90096 79726 09677

30248 023

Or
ide)

97205 0&959 82982 .

It is to be observed that the above value of log 3 is not quite as well
determined as the others; the calculations in regard to Euler’s constant

522 Mr. J. W. L. Glaisher on the [June 15,

form a real verification of log 2, log 5, and log 10; they also verify P,
Q, and R; but an error in log 3 in the transcription of P, Q, and R, or
their multiplication by 11, 8, and 5, or in the final addition and multipli-
cation by 2, would not be detected.
In the above logarithms the last figure may be in error to the extent of
one or two units.
The value of Euler’s constant to 100 decimal places is—
y= 57721 56649 01532 86060 65120
90082 40245 10421 59335 93992
30988 05767 23488 A8677 26777
66467 09369 47063 29174 67497...

The last figure here also may be in error to the extent of one or two

units.

It will be observed that Mr. Shanks’s value* of y for 2=500 differs
from (C) in the 65th decimal place, and that his value for z=1000 differs
from (D) in the 78rd place. This is caused by an inaccurate value of B,,

. 8553103
haying been made use of. The correct value of B,, is —— ; but Euler,
: 60 53103
who first calculated it, made it —S—( Acta Petropolitana’ for 1781,

p- 46), and this incorrect value is given in the ‘Penny Cyclopeedia’
(Article «« Numbers of Bernoulli’’) and probably in other places.

The values of the first thirty-one Bernoulli’s numbers are given in a
paper by Ohm (Crelle’s Journal, t. xx. p. 11), and B,, is given correctly
there. The agreement of the values of Euler’s constant contained in this
paper (when the logarithms of 2 and 5 are corrected) afford a complete
verification of the Bernoulli's numbers as far as B,,, and partial verifica-
tions of the rest.

The difficulty and inconvenience of making calculations to so many de-
cimal places is sufficient to warrant the publication of the values of the
positive and negative parts of the portion of the series involving the Ber-
noulli’s numbers, in case any one shonld desire to repeat any part of the
calculation. We have

5, Bee

1 1 1
= SS =| er ee _ 2— ——-! —— an 6e0g

ht ce te 8 © or ape oo eee ;
and if m denote the sum of the terms of the same sign as the harmonic
series, and 2 the sum of the terms of the same sign as the logarithms,

viz. if

mn 9 7 get 10217
Pe Bb, — é
Bro. \ Ag! Speed a mae

* Proc. Roy. Soc. vol. xv. p. 482.

reach} Calculation of Euler’s Constant. 523

then, when 7=100 :—
m='00000 — 83333 33907. 80158 alle
44885 67821 ala2l 67823 08773
00082 30639 33/61 49846 36254
14224 82920 15089 52013 00966
O89 2 as

n=00500 00000 83333 33375 00000
21092 80052 53967 776386 659871
91105 s(« 84750 ~=—s« 27388. —s‘iéi«k912—Sé«‘<‘éw A
39311 34887 * 61884 ..97280 . 71640
Ieee.

When r=200::—

m=‘00000 20833 38333 39583 78016
61283 59538 59711 91078 12258
99800 92187 99399 17052 51095
93490 89894 78957 35141 06774
O14.

n= ‘00250 00000 05208 33339 49609
37505 14960 84887 28877 09510
05685 64006 82170 i770 13023
01074 39246 38458 79084 75675
042...

When «=800:—
m= ‘00000 03333 30033 33358 73015
87309 34487 73462 49678 ZLTAg
87864 83345 3789 61875 16264
50799 20761 29352 44796 75809
ESO 64

n= ‘00100 00000 C0153 30399 do044
06000 60008 65960 92825 14227
06303 41365 50645 63522 06215
12108 84946 96404 61971 02278

When 2 == 1000 :—

m='00900 00833 33333 33333 73015
87301 59487 73448 77428 21067
8213 382165 00876 92580 99464.

82 37182 41954. 63931 48991

n= 00050 00000 00008 30999 59939
31000 00000 00210 92796 09325
95526 00040 82093 23718 92820
00915 30532 37715 49061 83360

The calculation was performed to 105 places, and the last two figures
have been rejected.

524 Sir W. Thomson’s Amended Rule for working [June 15,

POSTSCRIPT.

Received June 14, 1871.

After the completion of the above paper, the author found that Mr.
Shanks had, in second, third, and fourth supplementary papers on the
Constant*, extended his calculations so as to determine y from e=2000,
5000, and 10,000.

The values so obtained all differ in the sixtieth decimal; in fact the
higher « is taken, the further from the truth are the results, as the errors
in the logarithms are multiplied by larger factors.

The calculation for c= 2000 affords a verification of the error of log 2 ;
for on subtracting the value of y (v=1000) from y (v=2000), we obtain
(after correcting B,,) a result agreeing with E to 80 decimal places
(which is as far as Mr. Shanks has calculated the latter value of y), with
the exception of a difference of a unit in the 73rd figure—an error pro-
bably in the summation of the harmonic series from 1000 to 2000.

The values for z=5000 and x=10,000 are (besides the errors pre-
viously noticed) inaccurate from the 62nd figure.

VIII. “ Records of the Magnetic Observations at the Kew Observatory.
No. [V.—Analysis of the principal Disturbances shown by the
Horizontal and Vertical Force Magnetometers of the Kew Ob-
servatory from 1859 to 1864.” By General Sir Epwarp Sa-
BINE, K.C.B., President. Received June 15, 1871.

(Abstract.)

This paper exhibits an analysis of the principal disturbances recorded
by the horizontal and vertical force self-recording magnetometers of the
Kew Observatory in the years 1859 to 1864, showing the progressive
diminution in the number and value of the disturbances from a maximum
in 1859 to a minimum in 1863, being the first moiety of the “ decennial
period ;” and showing also the distribution of the disturbances, increasing or
diminishing the respective forces, in the several years, months, and hours.

IX. “ Amended Rule for working out Sumner’s Method of finding
a Ship’s Place.” By Prof..Sir Witt1am Tuomson, F.R.S.
Received June 15, 1871.

In my previous communication on this subject (antec, p. 259) I
described a plan according to which, in the first place, two auxiliary
lines were to be drawn on the chart, from two sets of numbers taken
out of a proposed Table, and then Sumner’s line (the line on which the
observation shows the ship to be) was to be interpolated, dividing the
space between them in the proportion of the differences of the sun’s decli-

* Proc. Roy. Soc. vol. xvi. pp. 154, 299, vol. xviii. p. 49.

1871.] out Sumner’s Method of finding a Ship’s Place. 525

nation from two of the tabular numbers. I find a better plan in practice
to be as follows :—

(1) Take two solutions out of the Table as directed in my previous paper.

(2) Taking the two hour-angles and the two altitudes from these
two solutions, interpolate to the nearest minute the hour-angle and the
altitude corresponding to the correct declination, according to the simple
proportion of its differences from the declinations of the two solutions ;
and estimate, by inspection, the proper azimuth to the nearest half degree,
from the azimuths shown in the two solutions.

(3) -Using the interpolated hour-angle, azimuth, and altitude found by
clause (2), find on the chart, in the assumed parallel of latitude, the point
whose longitude is the differenee between the interpolated hour-angle and
the Greenwich hour-angle at the time of the observation; through this
point draw, by aid of a protractor, a line inclined to the north and south at
an angle equal to the azimuth, and on the proper side according to whether
the observation was made before or after noon; on this azimuthal line*
measure off towards the sun a length (miles for minutes) equal to the
correct altitude of observation above the interpolated altitude of clause (2) ;
and through the point thus reached draw a perpendicular to the azimu-
thal line. This perpendicular is Sumner’s line.

The Table (of which a specimen page was shown in my former commu-
nication) has now been completed by Mr. Roberts, and has been in my
hands long enough to allow me to test its use in actual practice. I find
the assistance of compasses for measuring off the assumed colatitude
preferable to the slip of card with numbers which I first suggested ; and I
find the process to be altogether very easy and unfatiguing (in respect to
fatigue a great contrast to the ordinary method). I find that all the cases
(as azimuth and hour-angle both acute, azimuth acute and hour-angie
obtuse, or azimuth and hour-angle both obtuse, or, again, declination greater
than latitude, but of same name, and declination of opposite name to lati-
tude) work out without ambiguity or perplexity. Still the mere fact of
there being different cases may possibly deter practical navigators from leay-
ing the ordinary method, which, though considerably longer and much more
laborious, has the excellent quality of presenting no variety of cases. I
intend, however, to push forward the preparation of a short paper of prac-
tical directions, illustrated by examples of all ordinary and critical cases,
and to publish it with the Table; so that practical men may have an
Opportunity of judging from actual experience whether the plan of working
Sumner’s method which I have proposed will be useful to them or not.

I thought it unnecessary in my former communication to remark that
every determination of longitude at sea (except from soundings or sights

* Tt is unnecessary to mark this azimuthal on the chart. By holding one side of a
“ set square” (or other proper drawing instrument for making right angles) along the
azimuthal line, the Sumner line perpendicular to it is readily drawn, and this ‘‘Sumner
line,” or line of equal altitude, is the only mark which need be actually made on the
paper.

526 Mr. Russell on Linear Differential Equations. [June 15,

f land interpreted in connexion with observations for latitude) involves
the unknown error of the chronometer, and makes the ship 1’ West or
East of the-true place for every four seconds of time that the chronometer’s
indication is in advance of or behind correct Greenwich time. Although
I believe that every man who uses a chronometer at sea knows this per-
fectly well, I shall not omit to state it in the practical directions which I
propose to publish, as the Astronomer Royal, Professor Stokes (‘ Proceed-
ings,’ April 27, 1871), and Mr. Gordon (writing in the ‘ Mercantile and
Shipping Gazette’) are of opinion that an explicit warning of the kind
might be desirable in connexion with any publication tending to bring
Sumner’s method into more general use than it has been hitherto.

X. “On Linear Differential Equations.”—No. V. By W. H.
L, Russert, F.R.S. Received June 15, 1871.

Let us now endeavour to ascertain under what circumstance a linear
differential equation admits a solution of the form P log, Q, where P and Q
are rational functions of (2).

d”y qd? y
If (ata, e+ ae ) ae t (Bot Be + is 7 7 wrareats ce peel)

-we have, substituting y= P log, Q,

d”P dp ‘
| (aa-baye-+ See ) ae t (Bot Bye + rae +) ged a ai \ log. Q+R=0,
where R is a rational function of (2). Hence
d"P y di? 1p
(a,taaet ....) Fan + (Pot hat - . --)a,e1 ih sae
or P must be a rational function satisfying the given equation. Having
ascertained its value, we have a differential equation of the form
d” log. Q d’— log. Q
Li tL pe Ey lee ee

Divide this equation by L,, and differentiate, and we have an equation of

the form

ad’ log Qi d” d" log. Q On dlog.Q

/ ae: M, 2 { pom i .

0 dgt ax nr 2 M, dx 0 >

from which we find Q in all possible cases, since ~— is a rational
xv

function of (#).
It is impossible that a linear differential equation can in general have a
solution of the form y=/f(log.) ; for in that case we should have

pee Bir 8) gg wl PCE) + (y+ Be+ Bi es ——
pos s'==0,
Let z=log.w, and the equation becomes of the form
(a,4-e,e7+a,e% +... JO 4 6,4 b,0°4 bert... —

1871.] Mr. Russell on Linear Differential Equations. 527
and putting for z successively z+ 277, e+477,... ., the equation becomes

(a, +a,e*+a,e"7+....) tyle+ Oni) og +b, +b,e7+.

dz alt
d’ "f(z +4) fe oe
WR i oe :
(q,+ae%+a,e"+... )AEEAO + be + b+ plait
Cae it -4art) =)
deta
&e. == We.

where these equations can be indefinitely continued.
Let us now see what are the conditions that a linear differential equation

can admit of a solution y=P+/ Q, where P and Q are rational functions
of (x). Itis evident that P and Q must satisfy the differential equation

separately, so that we may confine ourselves to the case of y=4/Q.
We observe that the factors of Q must also be factors of the coefiicient
of the highest differential; 7. e. if

ajtae+ae+ ....=(e—a)"(a—b)....4/Q=(a@—a)e(w—b)”.
Let v=a+<z in the differential labs and expand y in nate

powers of (2). We have then an equation to determine p, andy.... may
be found in the same way. Let

2 a : Ete ee
(w+ 2) (a? — Tae (a? + 2 +20 —2) 7 — ary =0.

Let c=e+ 2, and the equation becomes
2(2? 4243) 7% 4 (2 — 42? +626) —(2— 2)y=0.

Let y=Az2"+Be""'+ ...., which gives 3n(n—1)—6n=0,whence n=O,
or 3.
Let #=2--1:
o(e+2)(2+3)S4+ (+ 52° 9243) (e+ 1)y=0.

Here, putting y as before, we have 62(n—1)+3n=0, whence x=0, or i.
Lastly, let e=z—1:

e(e+ ie ee ee re eer es (e—1)y=0.
dz” dz
Here 2n(n—1)+3n=0, or n=0 or —}. Hence the possible forms are

1 Nae tis
Vax—l, V x l

and

w+P Vaal

eo
es

the last of which succeeds.

3 net 3 poe 7
(e42) (+2) el we a bp June 30.

* And aiso (#+2)° Nao—1, Wee Uae
x i

528 Captain Spratt on the Undercurrent [June 15,
I have chosen a particular case, but it is manifest that the equation —

(at put yt Good+ (at Bat yet 4 lay ay

(a"+B'aty"2? +L'0)y=0
could be treated in the same manner. There will be eight possible forms
of solution of the class we have here considered, but in practice the number
of trials will be much reduced if we do not consider the incommensurable
roots of (7).

XI. “On the Undercurrent Theory of the Ocean, as propounded by
recent explorers.” By Captain Spratt, C.B., R.N., F.R.S.
Received June 15, 1871. |

The universal undercurrent theory so fascinatingly advocated by Maury
and others, and more recently by the late Dr. Forchhammer, has now been
so remarkably supported and maintained in the enlarged views pronounced
by Dr. Carpenter in his recent papers and lectures before the Royal and
other societies, and is of so interesting and important a nature in connexion
with the study of the laws regulating the natural history and geological
results of the past, as well as of the phenomena in progress in the ocean
and seas in communication with it, that the assumed facts and data upon
which they are based deserve, and indeed require, in the interest of sound
science and philosophy, to be carefully considered and analyzed before they
can be accepted as a grand law such as is implied in the views or theory.

Dr. Carpenter has put forward certain axioms as “ propositions’’ or
fundamental principles, as necessary results from the influence of rivers
and rain, temperature, evaporation, and density upon the surface and deeps
of all seas that are in communication. I feel it necessary to give the more
important of these, as being the basis of his theory*.

“No. III. That wherever there is a want of equilibrium arising from
difference of density between two columns of water in communication with
each other, there will be a tendency towards the restoration of equilibrium
by a flow from the lowest stratum of the denser column towards that of
the lighter, in virtue of the excess of pressure to which the former is
subjected.

*“No. IV. That so long as the like difference of density is maintained,
so long will this flow continue ; and thus any agency which permanently
disturbs the equilibrium in the same sense, either by increasing the density
of one column, or by diminishing that of the other, will keep up a
permanent flow from the lower stratum of the denser towards that of the
less dense. This constant tendency to restoration of equilibrium will
keep the actual difference of density within definite limits.

“No. V. That if there be at the same time a difference of level and an

* See anted, p. 211.

1871.] Theory of the Ocean. 529

excess of density on the side of the shorter column, there will be a
tendency to the restoration of the level by a surface-flow from the higher
to the lower, and a tendency to the restoration of the equilibrium by an
under-flow in the opposite direction from the heavier to the lighter
column.”

Dr. Carpenter then refers to the observations and opinions* of the late
Dr. Forchhammer of Copenhagen, for the conditions and facts that are
said or assumed to exist between the Baltic and German Ocean in regard to
the interchange of a surface and undercurrent between them so as to
restore the lost density of the former caused by a supposed continued
outward surface-current, and thus maintain the equilibrium or normal
conditions between them.

As I shall be obliged to refer to these opinions as assumed facts here-
after, I must here dwell more particularly upon what has been assumed in
regard to the Black Sea and Aigean, regarding which Dr. Carpenter states
as follows :—‘ The condition of the Euxine is precisely parallel to that of
the Baltic; and a surface-current is well known to be constantly flowing
outwards through the Bosphorus and Dardanelles, carrying with it (as in
the case of the Baltic) a large quantity of salt. Now, as the enormous
volume of fresh water discharged into the Euxine by the Danube, the
Dneiper, and the Don would in time wash the whole of the salt out of its
basin, it is obvious that its density can only be maintained at its constant
amount (about two-fifths that of ordinary sea-water) by a continual
inflow of denser water from the Atgean, the existence of which inflow,
therefore, may be predicted on the double ground of @ priori and a posteriort
necessity.”’

The first consideration then is, whether these predictions, as necessary
premises to his enlarged theory, are true both for the Baltic and Black
seas, since upon them the soundness of the theory mainly depends.

I am therefore induced, as I have been frequently requested to do, to
give my experience and knowledge of the conditions of the surface and
deeps of the Mediterranean and Black Sea, and next analyze the observa-
tions of Dr. Forchhammer to see whether his opinions and conclusions are
true in regard to the Baltic, viz. that the density of the Baltic is main-
tained by an undercurrent from the denser waters of the Kattegat and
German Ocean. For it is through my knowledge and experience of the
conditions existing at the Black Sea Straits and Augean Sea, from repeated
experiments in them on temperature and densities, &c., that, with all due
deference to the judgment of Dr. Carpenter, I am obliged to regard those
advanced by him as fallacious, and to maintain that, in adopting them, he
is advocating a theory upon erroneous premises. It is therefore necessary
for me to briefly show here the nature and extent of these investigations,
either published or unpublished, in support of my reasons for so differing
from Dr. Carpenter.

* Philosophical Transactions, 1865,
VOL, XIX. 2%

530 Captain Spratt on the Undercurrent [June 15,

In August 1848 I read a paper at the Swansea Meeting of the British
Association*, ‘On the Influence of Temperature upon the Distribution
of the Fauna in the Aigean Sea,” as an explanation of the zones
of animal life in that sea, which had been discovered by Edward Forbes
a few years previously, when we were employed together in the ‘ Beacon.’
I then showed that the temperature in depths below about 100 fathoms,
although sometimes in midsummer trenching down to between 200 and
300 fathoms, was always uniform, the minimum of 553° Fahr. (as
the thermometers then gave) being reached at that depth; and this
fact I had discovered in 1845 to exist in both divisions of the Medi-
terranean, although in the latter the minimum was not so low as in the
Aigean by about 3° or 33°. As the thermometers in use at that time
were defective in construction for such observations by (as now found) a
constant error in excess of about 33° or 4°, the temperatures, with this de-
duction made from them, agree with the recent observations of Dr. Car-
penter. Also, in a paper published in the ‘ Nautical Magazine’ for January
1862, ‘On the proper Depths for Deep-sea Cables,” as the result of my
experience gained after conducting the laying of the Varna and Crimean
Cables across the Black Sea, and others in the Levant, and also between
Malta and Alexandria, when the temperatures were constantly taken, I
stated the following interesting facts.

Kixtract from the ‘ Nautical Magazine,’ January 1862.

“The Mediterranean temperatures are known to be not very low at
great depths, but reach their minimum as a permanency in from 100 to
300 fathoms; and this minimum temperature seems to correspond with
the average annual temperature of the locality itself. And as the Medi-
terranean is divided into a series of basins, with comparatively intermediate
shallows, it is its surface waters, about the depth of 200 or 300 fathoms
(being that of the barriers which separate them), that unite by their
superficial and encircling currents. Thus, as the depth across the Strait
of Gibraltar is under 200 fathoms, the very cold waters in the deeps of the

* British Association Report, 1848 (Swansea Meeting), Sections, p. 81. Also, see
Edinburgh Philosophical Journal, 1848, in which are the following remarks :—

“Tt is temperature, and local conditions partially arising from it, that limits the
elevation and existence of animal life. So does-the same law appear applicable to
marine animals, which breathe the medium they inhabit.

“ Asa law resulting from this influence, characteristic, tropical, and subtropical species
will have a limited distribution in geographical space, whilst the boreal and subboreal
characters will be found in every geographic position, where corresponding regions of
depth are found with animal life existing, the limit of which I believe to be much lower
than 300 fathoms, having examples from 390 fathoms. But I must notice that the
/égean deep dredges indicate generally a zero of animal life at 300 fathoms, as Professor
Forbes was induced to assume. I believe, however, that in the deserts of yellow clay
an occasional oasis of animal life may be found in much greater depths, dependent
upon some favourable local condition or accident.”

mae l.| Theory of the Ocean. 531

Atlantic, or of the Black Sea, do not intermingle, and exert their individual
temperature in the depths of the central basins. The temperature of the
deeper waters of the Mediterranean, Archipelago, Sea of Marmora, and
Black Sea are consequently each dependent on local influences, namely
from the solar or atmospheric temperature above them. Therefore the
minimum temperature of their deeper parts corresponds nearly with the
mean annual temperature over them.

*‘In the Grecian Archipelago I long since showed it to be constant at
about 55° in depths from 100 fathoms downwards. In that sea the
temperature of the intermediate depths between 100 fathoms and the
surface in the summer season ranges from 55° to 76°, and, indeed, even up
to 80° and 86° sometimes, in the littoral waters of enclosed gulfs and
shallow bays.

*‘In the eastern and western basins of the Mediterranean it will have
consequently a higher minimum temperature than that; and I find that it
is about 59° in all depths from 300 down to 2000 fathoms. But between
the depths of 30 and of 300 fathoms there is an increasing variation from
that temperature to 73° and to 75° in the summer mouths, but confined
more particularly to the depths between 100 fathoms and the surface.

«But in the winter months of December, January, February, and March,
the upper depth is nearly:at the minimum temperature of the deepest part
below, namely from 59° to 62°, varying with the locality and depths of
water there.

“Thus it is that in these months the surface and deep waters of the
Mediterranean are at a constant temperature of about 10° or 15° above
that of the atmosphere.

*« After the month of March, however, the solar influence begins sensibly
to raise both sea and atmospheric temperatures, so that in July, in the
southern part of the Mediterranean, it is at its maximum of about 75°
from the surface down to the depth of about 30 fathoms.”

Having been thus brief in stating the facts obtained in regard to the
distribution of the temperatures of the deeps, I shall also be as brief as will
be consistent with the due illustration of the more important facts and results
m describing the observations for ascertaining these surface- and under-
currents in one or two of the localities in question, viz. the Dardanelles
and Bosphorus, where Dr. Carpenter has assumed and predicted conditions
as an absolute necessity, and upon which predictions he has mainly founded
his enlarged views and theories.

Now it will easily be realized on consideration, that the testing of
surface-currents for their various rates in different depths, or of under-
currents of small amount where they exist, in proof of this theory, as a
general fact, is an experiment that requires much delicacy and nicety in
the mode of operation and the means by which it is attempted or effected.
I therefore never attempted such experiments by the use of any bulky
object, such as a boat, that offered both great resistance to the surface-

272

532 Captain Spratt on the Undercurrent [June 15,

current, and that was also easily affected by the resistance it offered to the
wind and swell, and consequently the counter drift resulting from them, and
thus necessarily tending to mask the more delicate movements in the deeps
and to vitiate the results.

I felt, too, that a fixed object as a point of reference was always necessary,
such as a buoy or float attached to a sinker actually upon the bottom.

Such observations for testing ocean-currents, then, should only be made
im connexion with a fixed object attached to the bottom, whether in
2000 fathoms or 20 fathoms, as I have before recommended both in the
‘Nautical Magazine’ and in the Appendix to ‘ Researches in Crete,’ when
treating on the question of undercurrents in the Dardanelles and Agean,
&c., from which latter work T shall have to quote a few passages in proof
of the actual conditions existing there. I am therefore induced here to
express my regret that the same means were not adopted in the Straits of
Gibraltar, especially as two or three good opportunities offered when the
dredge had got irrecoverably entangled at the bottom.

T now give the following extracts referring to the observations made in
the Aigean Sea, Dardanelles, Black Sea, &c., to test the rate and depth
of the current generally flowing from the latter into the former, as also the
different densities of these seas and straits; and the results arrived at will
be seen to have a very interesting and important bearing upon the theory
and question at issue.

The densities were tested by an hydrometer, which, having a range
from about 134° as the normal condition of the surface of the Black Sea,
to 29° as the normal of the Aigean and Mediterranean seas, served to show
the varying densities in different depths and localities between them with
‘sufficient accuracy, without need of more elaborate analysis, such as might
be necessary in the Straits of Gibraltar, where the difference is only about
ioe +
Having carried out these observations at different depths in the Sea of
Marmora and the Dardanelles, from below the Dardanelles Castles, a very
interesting fact was ascertained,-_namely, that nearly in proportion as
the descending superficial current from the Black Sea diminished, so did
the saline density of the water increase; and where there appeared to
be no current (that is, below 40 fathoms in the Sea of Marmora, and below
20 fathoms in the Dardanelles) the density remained the same at all
depths, and was that of the Mediterranean density.

Thus, in the Sea of Marmora, the density of the water in 40 fathoms,
and from the bottom at 400 fathoms, was the same, viz. 29° by the
hydrometer, and about corresponded with my observations on the Me-
diterranean density in general down to 2000 fathoms, except in one instance,
Crete and Lybia, when it was 30° at that depth, and at another only 282
at the depth of 1200 fathoms, with 294 above*,

Then in the Dardanelles the current was found to cease at 20 fathoms,

* See Crete, vol. ii. p. 332,

1871.] Theory of the Ocean, 533

and the maximum, or Mediterranean density of 29°, was found to be
constant from that depth downwards, whilst the surface showed the same
density as that of the Sea of Marmora, viz. 20°, the Bosphorus being
about 14°, and Black Sea surface 133°, and about 15° below 100 fathoms.
Therefore in this part of the Dardanelles, between the surface and the
depth of 20 fathoms, there was an increasing density from 20°-29° as the
result of the intermixture in the deeps of the narrows and from the en-
circling eddy or return-current by the south shore in that part, as in-
variably occurs ; and in proportion as the density of the water increased
to that depth, so did the rate of the current decrease, as shown in the
following Table :—

Depths. Density. | Temperature. Current. Remarks.

. é At twenty miles
MENACE! es gs ceeeu os 20 50 Rate of 2i knots. | westward of the
DMALWOMIS. ......-. 22 50 Rate of 14 knot. Dardanelles,in the
LO fathoms........: 25 aS Rate of # knot. /Xgean, the sur-
15 fathoms,....:... 27. 5d Rate of 3 knot. face-density was
20 fathoms......... 28 55 Rate very slight. the same as the

40 fathoms......... 29 54 No current. — Mediterranean.

The plan I adopted for ascertaining whether any such undercurrents
existed, as well as of the rate of the surface-current in descending depths,
was as follows :— :

A suspended sinker, or current-anchor, was made in several forms to
test the most simple and effective form. Sometimes a vertical cross was
used, which was formed of boards, so as to offer a resisting surface every
way when hanging vertically with the weight or lead attached to its base.
More generally a large weighted disk or enlarged log-ship was used, and
when weighted with a weight consistent with size of the disk, and also of
the line aiad float, was slung like a kite, the weight being in the place of the
tail. When thus slung it would of course hang nearly vertical in all
depths, and offer a sufficient resistance to prevent its being moved by the
friction of the surface-current upon the float used to suspend it. It will
be thus seen that the operation of testing slow currents in the deeps is one
of great delicacy, and therefore requires great nicety and care in the mode
and apparatus for doing it, for scientific dependence and aims.

The float that, after many experiments, I found to answer best was
one made of thin copper or block-tin, in the form of an elongated air-
tight cylinder, 4 or 5 feet in length, and pointed at one end to offer least
resistance to the surface-current passing it. The other end was truncated
or flat, where two loops were fixed in which a small rod or staff with a flag
could he placed, to render its position conspicuous, without adding to its
resistance or weight. ‘The suspended kite, or current-anchor, was then
weighted to about one-third of what the float would bear in perfectly still
water, without being wholly immersed.

534 Captain Spratt on the Undercurrent [June 15,

Remarks and Experiments on the superficial and supposed under-
currents of the Mediterranean, §c.*

It can be easily understood that, if a superficial current of 1 knot is
observed to pass a float attached to a line which has a sinker or anchor at
the bottom, and also if the same amount of surface-current of 1 knot
passes a float which is attached to a suspended sinker or current-anchor
suspended halfway or at any depth, the sinker thus held suspended by the
surface-float is evidently as stationary as the one at the bottom, and there-
fore it must be in perfectly still water, whatever the depth may be; con-
sequently the superficial current does not descend to that depth.

Also, if another suspended sinker or current-anchor is lowered down a
few fathoms (say 10 fathoms) from the surface, and the float attached to
it has no current passing it, and consequently drifts away from the
stationary float attached to the bottom and near which it was lowered, it
is quite clear that the suspended sinker and its float are within the same
influence, in fact in the same amount of current.

Again, if the suspended sinker be lowered to 20 fathoms by the side
of the stationary float, and a current of about half a knot be then observed
passing its float, although still drifting away from the stationary float, then,
_as this latter float showed a current of 1 knot passing it, and the float of
the suspended sinker in 20 fathoms only showed a current of half a knot,
it is also clear that the current-anchor or suspended sinker was in a current
of only half the Speed of-the superficial current, viz. of half a knot only.

Also, if the suspended sinker be lowered to 50 fathoms, and the super-
ficial current passing its float be three-fourths of that passing the float at-
tached to the bottom, or running three-quarters of a knot, it is evident that
the current at the depth of 50 fathoms was three-fourths less than the sur-
face-current, or only running at the rate of one-fourth of a knot.

In this manner, then, my experiments were carried out at different
depths, and at different times, in the Archipelago, Sea of Marmora, and
Dardanelles, as being favourable positions for testing the superficial currents,
and also of the existence of undercurrents, if any existed in these straits
and seas, as some have supposed.

Thus, on the morning of December 19th, 1857, I hove to in H.M.S.
‘Medina,’ between Rodosto and Marmora Island, near the eastern entrance
to the Dardanelles, and from a boat sounded with a shot and seine-twine in
350 fathoms ; I then attached to the twine a piece of light wood as a sta-
tionary float. The superficial current was then tested by the common log-
reel, run out from a boat kept stationary abreast of the stationary float,
when a current of 0°9 of a knot was observed to be running towards the
Dardanelles.

Experiments for trying the rate of the current at different depths were
then made in the following manner :—A flat piece of wood like a log-ship

* Trayels and Researches in Crete, yol. ii, p. 333,

1871.] Theory of the Ocean. 535

on a large scale was weighted with a piece of lead of about 4 pounds, and
slung by its corners like a kite, so as to act as a suspended anchor or sinker,
and was lowered to a depth of 5 fathoms; and as no current was observed
passing the float when the sinker was at this depth, it follows that both
float and sinker were in the same amount of current, or im the upper stratum
of the current ; that is, both were drifting along in a current of 0°9 of a
mile per hour.

It was then lowered to 10 fathoms, when a peuple current was ob-
servable passing the buoy or float, which measured about 0°3 of a knot per
hour, or just one-third of the rate of current running past the float attached
to the shot at the bottom in 350 fathoms; therefore the rate of current at
10 fathoms was ascertained to be only 0°6 of a knot per hour.

The suspended sinker was then lowered to 20 fathoms, when there ap-
peared a much greater amount of current passing the float, and the rate was
found by the log-line to be about 0°5 of a mile per hour, thus showing that
the float of the suspended sinker was held in check by the sinker being in
a current about half that of the surface-current, or running at only about
0-4 of a mile per hour at-20 fathoms’ depth.

Again, on lowering the sinker to 30 fathoms there was immediately
observed an increase of the superficial current passing its float, showing,
therefore, a still diminishing current as the suspended sinker descended,
since it was thus kept more stationary.

Then at 40, 50, 100, 200, and 300 fathoms the rate of the current passing
the float of the suspended sinker was about 0°8 of a mile,—that is, nearly
that of the surface-current when in all depths below 40 fathoms, so that an
outward current of 0*1 of a knot per hour would appear to exist there; but
in reality this was the result of using in this instance a too bulky float, by
which the suspended sinker was dragged along at that rate; still water,
therefore, undoubtedly existed below 40 fathoms, as confirmed by the density
experiments and others in those depths.

This result was given to show the confusion and error almost sure to arise
from using bulky apparatus as a float, that offered too much resistance to
the surface-current ; and a double source of confusion and error is the sure
result if the observation is also carried out with any wind and sea.

No undercurrent could therefore have existed here on the eastern ap-
proach to the Dardanelles as many have imagined; for an undercurrent
being an opposite current to the current observed running past the fixed
float, the current then observed running past the float attached to the sus-
pended sinker or current-anchor would have measured a greater rate than
that passing the fixed float. Moreover, also, as the suspended sinker would
have been dragged along by the undercurrent in an opposite direction to
the surface-current, its float would have presented the singular phenomenon
of going to windward of the fixed one; or, in other words, would have run
up against the stream instead of down with the surface-stream. This, on
a slight consideration of the phenomena, will be evident, and the delicacy

536 | Captain Spratt on the Undercurrent [June 15,

of the operation too, especially when testing any very slow ocean-current,
of only 0°1 of a mile per hour or less, which is quite practicable, as I have
frequently done. And itis rendered sure and easy by always having a fixed
float with sinker at the bottom as a point of reference, even where objects
are near and charts are correct, and also by using very fine twine as a log-
line to each float, and allowing it to run out from five to ten times the
usual interval in measuring a ship’s rate. The diagram on p. 537 will
illustrate the matter *.

The diagram referred to will iliustrate the plan, and the result will
be more comprehensible and satisfactory, because sooner completed, if we
suppose the trials to have been made from two or three boats (instead of from
only one boat), each being provided with one or two buoys and suspended
sinkers to suit, and with lines to each arranged for different depths; and ifalso
a fine log-line is attached to each float for measuring the distance it drifts
in a given time, and from it the rate of each float, the boats being always
kept abreast of each other. For although each float, from the different
times each suspended sinker will take to reach its intended depth, will have
drifted away to some small varying distance from the boats and stationary
float, these varying intervals will correspond to the stray line paid out in
measuring a ship’s rate through the water ; and being noted in the usual way
(as the rate-lines will be duly marked at intervals of 10 feet), or by a piece
of cork or rag attached to each, when at the given signal the interval,
by watch or glass, is simultaneously commenced to be noted, the deduc-
tion of this stray portion from the whole length run out in the arranged
interval of five or ten minutes or more, according to the speed of the cur-
rent, will give the surface-rate of each, and the consequent rates of the
currents in which the suspended sinkers are lowered are easily deduced
from them.

Now all these observations showed no undercurrent into the Black Sea,
such as Dr. Carpenter maintains must necessarily exist to restore the saline
density of that sea; if, therefore, I can show how that density is otherwise
maintained, and by a more natural and more universal process and infiu-
ence in connexion with ocean movements in all seas, the theory of universal
undercurrents, as a great circulating medium for recovering the equilibrium,
is deprivéd of its main support,—the main ground upon which it is advo-
cated as a predicted necessity.

To better understand the remarks and facts that will follow upon the
densities and currents of the Black Sea Straits, I must briefly notice the
physical features influencing them.

First, the Black Sea attains a depth of about 1000 fathoms and more
over a large portion of its area. ‘The Sea of Marmora attains between
400 and 500 fathoms, and the Augean about the same; whilst the Darda-
nelles and Bosphorus do not oe 20 and 40 fathoms.

The facts, then, are simply that, although a diluted current of Black Sea

* Crete, vol, ii, Appendix, p. 338.

537

Theory of the Ocean.

1871.]

*‘SBIP-JUIIIN IO
rng popucdsns s}t YIIM yuoTMorepun ue poorer ATJUOpPTAS prey ‘torooatp oytsoddo ory ut seep SUTOC WOT} “FT JwoH oy} ynq
£qUOIINO-OOVF.NS OT[} JO SVL SUIYSTULUITP UI O10M SovIP IO SIOYUIS popusdsns Atety ‘TeAdojUL SoyNUTUL OAY JO pus oY} Fv suoryIsod
9soy} poyovos pey +9 “it ‘a ‘Cd ‘O ‘A S}eop oy pue ‘Y yeoy poxy oy} surtssed oq 07 punoj sum youy FT JO JUoLANd-oovsInS v Jr ‘snTy,
‘SOFNULUL OATF OJ SPOTTING oAYEdsoa ALO] UT YJLApP OF POMOT[V pus “Y “Yvoy poxTT
er} avou poddoap ATsnoourynus Sureq 104ju ‘aoyuIs popuodsns yore 07 syvor oy} Jo suoryisod oaryepoa “FF pus 49 ‘qT ‘A ‘C ‘DO ‘a

CLIO LLL LLL LAL

006
“TOYO TIS | ue
oot
I Ne ee Re ed Cr a a ee RM ea en OFl
*SOSVOO YUOLATOTO PU [) | eee eee meee cee eee eee see SESS SOREN FOR ON OES EEE CS FO GONE PA A GY A RY | I NM STN NY we ome meme | ()CT
qoux Z Jo quot SS Se en ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee | OOL
-tnodtopun. posoddng SS A A A oo A A A A i A Ci a a a Sn A Cras] Noes GeEae Hany EGRESS Gre MCG 08
"808800 JU0LIND |—— —— ee ee ee ee ee ee a a Se a a Sa aan DOGS Shar Saar aan ea ee a eae erga) ao RN GOING Ne 09
youy £ Jo jw.) SS —— = Se ESE ESSE EEE OF
“4Ouxy [ JO JuetIND —_——— a SSS __ SSS SSS SS SSS SSE SESS SS 06
2 = =a a Y ——— ze =|

“joux 27 Jo JuoaIND ==} ‘suo yyey
UL

a ‘goryang yydog,

Vv
‘Longe poxny,

"nas ayy, fo sdaap ay? we
Spuatinotapun pun -aovfuns fo azn. pun ‘uorsatip vouagsrina ay? burjsag fo apou ay7 Surnoys wnsbouy

538 Captain Spratt on the Undercurrent [June 15,

water flows for a great part of the year as a skimming surface movement
around and across the Sea of Marmora and through the Dardanelles, and
at no greater depth than from 20 to 40 fathoms, viz. that of the barrier
ridges between the Black Sea and Augean, there occurs for several days in
the year a strong reverse current into the Black Sea from the Mgean. This
reverse current is frequent during the autumn and winter months, when
_the Black Sea rivers are at their lowest, so that the Black Sea level is then
frequently overbalanced by the pressure of westerly gales in the Mediter-
ranean or Aigean.

Therefore it is this recurring return current into the Black Sea that
maintains, as I found to be the curious or interesting fact, the Aigean or
Mediterranean density in the deeps of the Sea of Marmora in all depths
below about 40 fathoms, and therefore that restores also the lost salinity
of the Black Sea through the flow of diluted water so prevalent as a sur-
face-current from it. .

This return-current occurs sometimes for two or three days at a time,
and occasionally at a rate even greater than the general outflowing current
of 2 and 3 knots. The same occurs at the Kertch Straits.

Therefore, instead of the Black Sea being washed fresh, unless there
was an undercurrent to restore it, as Dr. Carpenter argues, its normal
‘ density is restored by the surface return-current, as also that of the Sea of
Azof.

But I am induced to believe, as I have elsewhere stated*, that the Black
Sea has not become a diluted or brackish sea from a previously salt sea, but,
on the contrary, from a freshwater lake has become a brackish one.

This I infer to be the fact from the latest deposits existing around the
shores of the Black Sea, Sea of Marmora, and Dardanelles being of fresh-
water origin, a large Dreissena and a freshwater Cockle in them being
mistaken previously for a Mussel and Cardiwm until I discovered the
error.

Having thus shown these physical conditions as facts im connexion
with the Black Sea, and that the undereurrent theory is a fallacy where it
was expected and insisted upon as being a predicted necessity, as a con-
stant counterbalance to the surface-outflow, from the great difference in
the densities between the Black Sea and Aigean, viz. 13° and 29°, as shown
by a common hydrometer, I shall now refer to the Baltic Sea and German
Ocean, where even a greater difference in the saline density exists; and
I shall be able to show also that precisely the same conditions of outflow
and inflow exist there, and that it is surface-currents only which restore
the lost salinity, and that no undercurrent is necessary there to prevent the
saltness of the Baltic from being washed out ; that, in fact, no undercurrent
system does exist as a means of restoring the equilibrium and maintain-
ing the normal conditions of that sea. This I shall show from Dr. |
Forchhammer’s observations; but he has evidently mistaken the nght

* Crete, vol. 11. p. 349.

1871.) | Theory of the Ocean. 539

conclusions to be drawn from the facts he gives regarding the densities and
eutrents, and thus led Dr. Carpenter to adopt them as follows :—

« Now if it can be shown that a similar vertical circulation is maintained
in the opposite direction, when the eonditions of the case are altogether
reversed, the explanation above given may, it is submitted, be regarded as
having a valid title to acceptance. Such a converse case is presented by
the Baltic, an inland basin which communicates with the German Ocean by
three channels—the Sound, the Great Belt, and the Little Belt, of which
the Sound is the principal. The amount of fresh water discharged into the
Baltic is largely in excess of the quantity lost from its surface by evapora-
tion ; and thus its Jevel would be continually raised if it were not kept down
by a constant surface-current, which passes outwards through the channels
just mentioned. But the influx of fresh water reduces the density of the
Baltic water; and as the water which the outward current is continually
carrying off contains a large quantity of salt, there would be a progressive
reduction of that density, so that the basin would at last come to be filled
with fresh water if it were not for a deeper inflow. Such an inflow of denser
water might be predicted on Principle VI. as a physical necessity, arising
from the constant want of equilibrium between the lighter column at the
Baltic end of the Sound and the heavier column at its outlet in the German
Ocean ; and that such an undercurrent into the Baltic has an actual existence,
was proved two hundred years ago by an experiment of the same kind as that
by which we have recently proved the existence of an undercurrent out of the
Mediterranean. This experiment is cited by Dr. Smith (loc. ezt) in his dis-
cussion of the Gibraltar current, as supplying an analogical argument for his
hypothesis of the existence of an undercurrent in the Strait of Gibraltar ;
but he does not make any attempt to assign a physical cause for the move-
ment in either case’ *.— Proceedings of Royal Society, vol. xix. p. 213.

_ I need only add, as a remark to this latter part, that a greater density
below was no proof of an undercurrent, as shown by the contrary fact in the
Dardanelles and Sea of Marmora. |

In his paper in the Philosophical Transactions for 1865, ‘‘On the Com-
position of Sea-water in the different parts of the Ocean,” in page 230
Dr. Forchhammer says, “ In the Baltic likewise the water from the deeps
contains more salt than that from the surface. The upper-current goes
generally (not always) out of the Baltic, the reverse of the Mediterranean.
The cause is evident, the excess of atmospheric water in the Baltic from
the rivers surrounding it..... With the assistance of Captain Prosilius, in
1846, who commanded the vessel stationed at Elsinore, the surface-current
was observed on 134 days, from 27th April to 11th September; of which
on 24 days it ran from the north, on 86 from the south, and on 24 days
there was no surface-current at all,’’

* “ Prof, Forchhammer fully confirms Dr. Smith’s statement, and further shows that
the water which thus returns to the Baltic has the density of the Sound water, the
surface-current being formed of the much lighter Baltic water,”

540 Captain Spratt on the Undercurrent [June 15,

‘The mean quantity of salt for the current from the north was 15°994
per 1000; that for the current from the south 11°801; that for the period
when there was no current at all 13°342. Once a week a sample was taken
from the bottom. .... The mean of nineteen observations was 19:002,
which is rather under than above the real mean, and proves that it is water
from the Kattegat which runs at the bottom of the Sound.”

«Experiments once a week, at Copenhagen, from 3rd March to 25th
April, 1852, gave as follows :—for the surface 15°845 per 1000 salt, for
the bottom of the harbour 17°546 ditto, which seemed to prove that the
undercurrent at that season reached Copenhagen.”

In page 222, Dr. Forchhammer also shows the salinity of the German
Ocean, the Kattegat, and Sound, and in the eastern and western parts of the
Baltic as follows :—

“German Ocean, mean of six analyses, 32°823. In the Kattegat and
Sound the quantity of salt is very variable; a northerly wind makes it
richer in salt than with a southerly wind. The mean of six analyses and
141 observations, in which only chlorine was determined, gives 16°230 per
1000, the maximum 23°243, and the minimum 10°869. In the Baltic the
salinity varies very much, and is of course less in the eastern than the western
portions. I found the mean 4:931 per 1000 salt, the maximum 7°481 be-
tween Bornholm and Sweden, the minimumat Kronstadt 0°610 per 1000 salt.”

The relative saline densities are therefore as follows :—

German Ocean’ "ss. Ss le OL OU oemeae
Kattesat and*pound 2.72. 4) Ono eee
AWIes See ce ks ie pad bgt me Swe (woo
Baltic, between Bornholm and Sweden /7°481 maximum.

Dr. Forchhammer’s observations are all upon the densities at different
depths in the Sound, and some few temperatures at the surface and bottom.
There were, unfortunately, none upon the rate of the surface-current in
descending depths, as carried out by me in the Mediterranean and Black
Sea Straits, or without doubt he would have found the same results, that
is, by the fact recorded by him of the density being greater at the bottom
of the Sound than at the surface, he would have ascertained a correspond-
ing diminution in the outward rate of current in descent from the surface.
But he has inferred, from the fact of there being a slight increase of den-
sity at the bottom of Copenhagen harbour, viz. of 17°546 at the bottom
and of only 15°845 at the surface, that there was necessarily an undercurrent
there from the denser water of the Kattegat and German Ocean; for
he says that at Copenhagen the density was ‘‘ For the surface 15°845 per
1000 salt, for bottom of harbour 17°546 per 1000, which seemed to prove
that the undercurrent at that season reached Copenhagen.” Thus quite
overlooking the remarks he has made upon fluctuations in the saline den-
sities produced at times, both in the Baltic and Kattegat, from the influ-
ence of winds, and forgetting, too, “that for twenty-four days out of the

1871.] Theory of the Ocean. 541

134 the surface-current was running from the north at Elsinore,”’ that is,
into the Baltic from the Kattegat and German Ocean, and of course then
doing what I have shown to occur in the Sea of Marmora and Black Sea,
with every recurring and return-current into them, viz. restoring the lost
saline density of the surface and deeps of those seas. Now the proportion
of the inward return surface-current from the denser seas is very much
greater in the Baltic Straits than in the Black Sea Straits, and, moreover,
the depth on the dividing ridges of the Sound and Great Belt leading into
the Baltic does not exceed 9 fathoms, or about 50 feet only ; and thus,
even here (notwithstanding the great supply of fresh water from the Baltic
rivers into the Baltic between April and September, when the observations
were made, and, therefore, the time of greatest supply in the whole year),
the outside influences of wind &c. so outbalanced the surface-level be-
tween the Baltic and German Ocean, as to produce twenty-four days inward
current in that period, and twenty-four days without any current, then
stopping the Baltic outflow in fact. So that Dr. Forchhammer himself
shows that the phenomena of the currents to and from the Baltic are,
at one time, a mass of diluted water outwards over the very shallow
barrier forming the straits, and then a run of the Kattegat denser water
inwards for the restoration of the normal saltness. What need, then,
was there for looking to an undercurrent as the great source of such
a resupply, when it was evidently produced by a greater agency during
the twenty-four days return surface-current inwards, when the German
Ocean must have stood at a higher level than the Baltic? One more remark
is necessary to show another fallacious conclusion of Dr. Forchhammer in
favour of the undercurrent theory. In p. 233 he says, ‘‘I observed on
the 2nd of March, 1850, the temperature of the undercurrent at a depth
of 108 feet to be 36°°8 Fahr., while the temperature of the surface was
34°-9 Fahr.,”’—thus intimating that because he found a higher tempera-
ture and density in 108 feet at Elsinore it positively indicated an under-
current from the German Ocean or Kattegat, the conditions of density and
temperature being those of the outside sea and not of the Baltic. But these
were the natural conditions of things there, because in the depth of 108 feet
at Elsinore he was in a depth more than twice that of the submarine shallow
barrier that separates the Baltic from the Kattegat, and on the Kattegat
side of the ridge. The barrier or ridge is at the southern end of both the
Great Belt and Sound, and is thirty miles to the south of Elsinore, which
is therefore on the German Ocean side of the ridge; and, moreover, the
depth of 108 feet at Elsinore was in the greatest depth of the Kattegat any-
where within fifty or sixty miles northward, and the barrier ridge is only
30 feet deep here. The undercurrent view, then, has no ground of sup-
port from this fact ; but the contrary, for the increase of temperature and
density was found exactly where it was natural to expect it, that is, in the
region of depths below the comparatively shallow barrier of about 50 feet
in depth which separates the Baltic from the Kattegat ; and especially so as

542 Captain Spratt on the Undercurrent —_—— [June 15,

it was in the depth of 108 feet, so considerably below the skimming surface-
current of lighter water flowing from the Baltic. The denser and warmer
water thus found in 108 feet was therefore a continuity of the warmer
and denser waters of the deeps of the Kattegat and German Ocean.
But the Kattegat being shallow, with a wide entrance between it and the
German Ocean, it has no deep trough so much below the separating barrier
for retaining still water as in the Sea of Marmora ; its waters would, there-
fore, fluctuate in density throughout, between the densities of the Baltic
and German Ocean.

As Dr. Carpenter has made the fallacy regarding the Baltic conditions on
the authority of Prof. Forchhammer’s statements and opinions the strongest
reason and basis of his enlarged theory of universal undercurrents, I must
refer to another circumstance, another error of the late Professor im as-
suming the existence of an undercurrent at the Sound flowing into the Baltic
when the surface-current was running out, viz. the fact often observed in the
Sound, that ships of deep draught are frequently carried past the lighter
draught ship when sailing together into the Baltic through the Sound*.

There is, however, another and more probable explanation of the phe-
nomenon, namely, that the deep-draught ships are, by the lowness of
their keels in comparison with that of the light-draught craft, under a
_ lesser influence of the outward surface-current, through the whole strength
of the current not descending to the depth of their greater draught, as
surface-currents always diminish in descent. The mean strength of a
current felt by a vessel drawing twenty feet of water would consequently
be less than the mean strength felt by one drawing only eight or ten feet ;
this will be evident, especially as the surface-current from the Baltic can-
not descend much below the depth of sixty feet, viz. that of the Barrier
ridge across the Sound and Great and Little Belts, moreover there is no
tidal influence there to force or confuse the outflowing surface-current from
the Baltic.

Judging from these explanations and facts there appears to be really
no evidence, from the observations of Prof. Forchhammer, that an under-
current is a real necessity for the restoration of the lost salinity of the
Baltic any more than in the Black Sea; but, on the contrary, that the
evidences and facts are confirmatory of there being no such undereurrent,
and no such necessity for one in either case.

Therefore, finding the undercurrent theory fallacious in both instances,
I have no faith in its application to the Ocean as a grand law of inter-
change between surface and deeps, pole and equator, as the great universal
movement advocated by Dr. Carpenter. I am therefore induced here,
from the apparent importance of some views and facts bearing on the
question, to reiterate the following arguments in support of this opinion,
which were given elsewhere ¢, commencing the discussion with the inter-
esting facts regarding the high normal temperature of the deeps of the

* Phil. Trans. 1865, p. 231. + Crete, vol. ii, Appendix.

1871.] | Theory of the Ocean. 543

Mediterranean as compared with the deeps of the Atlantic Ocean on the
west side of the 150- or 160-fathom barrier that separates the one from the
other at the western embouchure of the Straits of Gibraltar.

The very high temperature of the depths of the Mediterranean below
about 200 fathoms, in all seasons, as compared with that of the Atlantic
and Pacific (where, according to Ross, Belcher, Denham, Pullen, and
others, it seems to remain at about 395° Fahr.* in all latitudes between
the Arctic and Antarctic zones) results apparently from its insulation
from the Atlantic deeps by the 150-fathom bank or submarine ridge across
the entrance of the Gibraltar Straits, and thus appears to have settled
into a mean resulting from a small terrestrial influence from below and
the large solar influence above, since the normal temperature is constantly
at 59° 7 at all depths below 100 to 200 fathoms.

The fluctuations of temperature in the Mediterranean Sea are conse-
quently confined to this upper zone of about 100 fathoms, in which the
temperature varies with the seasons, being in the summer and autumn
from 10° to 20° higher than the normal temperature, whilst in winter it
rises up at the surface to the normal temperature of 59°—4°, viz. 55°;
_ and is then even sometimes 10° lower at the surface and a few fathoms
below it, viz. in January and February, the coldest months.

In the same parallel in the Atlantic the normal temperature of 392°
—4° is not reached in summer in less than 1000, or in 1200 fathoms in
the tropics. This is a peculiar condition of the two seas deserving notice.
Had the normal temperature of the Mediterranean been as low as that of
the Atlantic, the superficial influence would no doubt have extended down-
wards to the same depths as in the Atlantic. Upon the first consideration of
these facts, however, the inference seems to be, that the Atlantic deeps are
under the influence of cooling-down undercurrents from the poles. But
appreciable undercurrent movements as a universal movement (such as the
theory advocates) I have no belief in, except, probably, where two great
streams meet, such as the Arctic current and the Gulf-stream.

It has been well shown, too, in support of this opinion, during the
soundings taken across the Atlantic, that perfectly still water reigns in a
large area of its deeps, by the fact of the sounding-line, on several occa-
sions, having coiled itself upon the smker when some 200 or 300 fathoms
more than the actual depth had been accidentally or intentionally paid out
from the ship, and thus the coils came up in a bunch together round the
deep-sea lead, around which the lime had become coiled as it stood upright in
the soft ooze or clay usual in great depths. This result was, therefore, a most
excellent test for showing that no appreciable movement or current existed
in a very considerable portion of those depths; for it proved that the line
must have descended in the lower depths quite vertically when slack, with

* —3° or 4° as the constant error now to be applied to all the earlier deep-sea
‘temperatures, :

Tt —the 3° or 4° as the constant error,

544 Captain Spratt on the Undercurrent [June 15,

the lead at the bottom, as well as before it reached the bottom, so that no
incline of the line from a perfectly vertical course of descent could have
occurred for several hundred fathoms above the bottom; all must have
been perfectly still water there, for the deviation of the line for a few
inches only out of the perpendicular in the lower depths would have
prevented the line from coiling itself around the upright lead, and so
from this perfect stillness the lead returned to the surface with the
excess of 200 fathoms coiled round it*. Now it is perfectly impos-
sible that the ship could have been kept stationary over the same spot
in the Atlantic, under the most favourable circumstances, even for a
few minutes, much less so during the time a sounding-line takes to de-
scend in about 2000 fathoms; for the combined influence of swell and
of the smallest superficial current during this time would drift her
from it considerably, as must be evident to every one. Hence it will
be perceived that, unless perfectly still water existed in the lower depths,
no coiling together of the excess of line paid out around the lead could
occur; and as it occurred on several occasions, I have been led to in-
terpret the fact, as did Capt. Dayman, as being a most interesting and
satisfactory test, where it occurred, of the perfect stillness of the ocean
deeps there.

It is shown by the few soundings that have been taken in the Atlantic,
that probably a continuous depth of at least 2000 fathoms extends along
it between the Arctic and Antarctic circles.

The consideration of the above points, then, opens up the question of how
this low normal temperature of the Atlantic and Pacific deeps is retained
in continuity, with a higher terrestrial temperature below, as generally
Supposed, and a higher atmospheric temperature above—whether it is
chiefly, if not entirely, due to the horizontal conduction of this low tempera-
ture from the Arctic and Antarctic zones and seas during the long ages
the present poles have been the sources of cold, combined also with the
great density resulting from this low normal state, and consequent ten-
dency of such cold and dense water to remain in the deeps (a view I
am more inclined to accept), or whether entirely due to a continuing
undercurrent movement between the poles and the equator, as others
suppose.

I only touch upon the question here, and thus merely state, in re-
ference to the undercurrent theory, that there seems to be an opposing
difficulty in the first thought upon it,—first, because I conceive that the
horizontal conduction of extreme cold can evidently occur in a continuing
column of equable depth, such as exists in the ocean deeps, and when com-
pletely effected remain so, without requiring an appreciable undercurrent
to maintain it; secondly, because the existence of such a current seems to
require one of two conditions—either a much less density of the substratum
of fluid in continuity before it, so as to cause a horizontal flow, or a pres-

* See Capt. Dayman’s Report of deep-sea soundings across the Atlantic, pp. 7 & 8.

1871.] Theory of the Ocean. 545

sure in that direction, from the greater density of the substratum at the
source of its origin ; but the temperature of the greater depths that are in
continuity seems to be of the same low normal condition below about 1000
or 1200 fathoms, so that there is no such difference to set up an appre-
ciable horizontal movement in those deeps.

Although undercurrents undoubtedly exist in the atmosphere, and thus
may lead to the possibility or belief in such general movements as a law
of the deeps of the sea also, yet the modes in which the solar influence
operates upon the two media are diametrically opposite. In the sea
the rarefying influence of the sun commences from, and therefore re-
mains at or near the surface, whilst in the atmosphere it commences from
below, and therefore disturbs and causes the lower strata to ascend.

The sea is also a comparatively non-elastic fluid, whilst the air is the
most elastic, and thus yields to every local influence, whether of heat or cold.

The isothermal temperature of the ocean deeps (viz. about 393° Fahr.)
has been supposed to be that at which the water attains its greatest den-
sity, probably because it is found at the lowest tried depths of the At-
lantic and Antarctic seas, and because of its being the temperature of
greatest density of fresh water ; and therefore it has been said that a lower
temperature made sea-water lighter, causing it to float upon that at the
above-mentioned temperature.

But this is contradicted by the temperatures found by Sir E. Parry,
and by the recent experiments of M. Edland, M. Despretz, and others,
which seem to show that the greatest density of sea-water is attained between
22° and 25° Fahr. : :

It seems to me therefore (and I was impressed with the opinion before
knowing of this fact and the statements that confirm it) that this iso-
thermal temperature of 393°—4°, found throughout the Antarctic deeps,
is the settled mean temperature produced by the atmospheric influence
upon these areas, as about 59° Fahr. is of the eastern basin of the Mediter-
ranean, and about 553° Fahr. is of the deeps of the Greek Archipelago, and
54° for the Sea of Marmora*—this difference in similar depths occurring in
consequence of the separation of the deeps of the two basins by a submerged
but comparatively shallow ridge between them, as the Mediterranean deeps
are separated from the Atlantic by the shallowest part of the Straits of
Gibraltar, and with an isothermal temperature of 59° for the deeps on one
side, and of 394° on the other, subject to the deduction of 4° or 5° from
each.

These facts suggest the view that there really may not be an exact
correspondence between the lowest temperatures of the Atlantic, Pacific,
and Indian oceans, although, when a temperature in excess of or under
395° has been found, there has generally been supposed, since Sir James
Ross’s establishment of this as the normal temperature of the ocean deeps
to be an error of observation, or a defect in the instrument used.

* —4° for each,
WOE. 1X. 2U

546 Captain Spratt on the Undercurrent [June 15,

The foregoing quotations, and recapitulations of arguments and reasons
from ‘ Researches in Crete,’ which, in my humble judgment and experi-
ence, seemed to be sound, in opposition to the undercurrent theory as a
grand circulation, and general and appreciable as a fact, I again offer in
concluding these remarks, but with all due deference and diffidence, al-
though I am strongly of opinion still, from my practical experience and
Investigations regarding surface- and deep-water currents, that differences
of density and of level are more generally rectified by superficial and
littoral movements, than by undercurrents running up hill or burrowing
in mid-deeps. But if recognizable or measurable as a physical fact any-
where, it is only local and not universal, and is merely an atomic inter-
change of insensible amount in general, in the greater depths of the ocean
or of inland seas.

On the Gibraltar Undercurrent.

There are also strong reasons for inducing me to dissent from Dr. Car-
penter’s conclusions as proofs of the undercurrent he asserts to having
found indisputable proofs of in the Gibraltar Straits; for to my mind, on
carefully considering the observations, as well as the means employed, and
circumstances at the one trial (Station 64) which was accepted as an
' undoubted evidence of such an undercurrent, against the four others that
showed no such result, there does not appear to be just grounds for assert-
ing that it really exists, as a positive result of the trials; for in such a
question of science the fact should be free of any ground of doubt.

In such a Strait as that of Gibraltar, however, where there are tidal in-
fluences combined with the general inset from the Atlantic, an under-
current at certain times is a possibility ; but, with all due deference to Dr.
Carpenter, I cannot agree with him in inferring from the single and, to
my experience, unsatisfactory result obtained at Station 64, “that a strong
presumption may be fairly raised for the constant existence of such a
return-current, though its force and amount are liable to variation,’’ when
the results of his four other trials, viz. two at and near Station 39, and
one at 65 & 66, showed no undercurrent, the former being in the nar-
rowest part of the Strait, and the latter over the shallow ridge that unites
Europe with Africa, the average depth of which does not exceed appa-
rently more than about 130 or 140 fathoms, although there are depths of
160 near to the African side. It extends across, between Cape Trafalgar
and Cape Spartel, the two western capes of the Strait.

The width of the Strait between these two capes is 224 miles, and the
- width in its narrowest part near Tarifa is only 74 miles.

There is therefore a great convergence of the confining coasts and de-
scending slopes to this part, and a uecesgarily convergence - the Atlantic
tidal wave, as well as general inset of the Atlantic current.

In this constricted part of the strait also the greater portion of the
depth (fully 5 miles of the 74 across) is more than twice as great as on

1871.] Theory of the Ocean. 547

the barrier-ridge to the westward that separates the deeps of the Atlantic
from the proper Mediterranean deeps.

Therefore, as there is here a great convergence or concentration of
the Atlantic inset, here there would naturally be a deeper tendency of the
inflowing current, as well as of an uprising of the lower part of it, where
this concentration produced a more rapid commingling of converging
waters, and a sort of boiling-up of parts of the deeper waters would be the
natural result of this convergence and constriction. Colder waters would
therefore come towards the surface, and vice versd.

Now Dr. Carpenter shows this to be the result here, although he does
not recognize what appears to me to be the natural and simple explanation
of the phenomenon as above given. He says in regard to this :—‘‘ It was
nof a little perplexing to find, when we had fairly entered the Strait and
were proceeding along the mid-channel towards Gibraltar, that the surface-
temperature of the sea fell still further to 66°°4, whilst the temperature of
the air rose to 76°°6, thus showing the then unprecedented difference of
10°-2 betwéen the two ;” and on his return to the same part about two
months afterwards, viz. at Station 64, he found the surface-temperature
there 66°.

Now, if this be the true and simple explanation of the low surface-tem-
perature over the position of greatest intermixture or boiling-up of the
currents there, as I suggest and believe, we should expect the same thing
to occur in some parts ver the ridge which extends across the western
entrance to the Straits, where the Atlantic current or inflow is also some-
what concentrated, or first meets it as an obstruction, and thus causes an
' uprise of the cold water from below to the surface. And, curious enough,
the two surface-temperatures taken by Dr. Carpenter at this part, viz. at
Stations 65 and 66, show in proof a much lower temperature, only 63° at
the first of these, and 69° at the other. The temperature of 66° at Station 64
is therefore clearly a commingling of the uprisen cold waters over the
barrier-ridge ; for the mean surface-temperature at 50 miles’ distance, on the
west side of the ridge, was 725 degrees, and from about 50 miles’ distance
from Gibraltar on the east of the Strait it was 733 degrees, that is, the mean
of seven observations taken about the former distance by Mr. Gwyn
Jeffreys, and of seven about the latter by Dr. Carpenter. Deductions
from temperature and density in such positions as the narrows and over
the barrier-ridges are therefore, to my mind, not reliable; I experienced
the same at the narrows of the Dardanelles, near the two Castles, and
so carried out my observations in more normal conditions or tranquil
areas, and in parts free of local disturbing: influences that might tend also
to divert the direction of the lower currents, as well as of those near the
surface, and lead to erroneous conclusions favouring a bias for any theory
or prediction.

As Station 65 was one of Dr, Caipenter’s positions for trying for the under-
current he asserts to exist, and as he has drawn some inferences in favour of

2uU 2

548 Captain Spratt on the Undercurrent [June 15,

the positiveness of such an undercurrent there from the temperature and
small difference in the densities, although the results did not show it by
the current-drag operation, I am under the necessity of referring to it. He
says, paragraph 67, page 182, ‘‘ We commenced our observations on the
morning of October Ist at the point of greatest depth (Station 65). The
temperature of the surface at 6 a.m. was only 63°, which was at least 8°
lower than the average temperature at that hour within the Mediterranean.
The bottom-temperature at 198 fathoms was 54°'5, and the specific gravity
of the bottom-water was 1028°2. The coincidence both in temperature
and specific gravity with the bottom-water at Station 64 was thus very
close. The place of the ship having been determined by angles taken
with the shore, the rate of the surface-movement was tested as on former
occasions, and was found to be 1:277 mile per hour, its direction being
E. 48. The ‘ current-drag’ was then sunk to 150 fathoms, the greatest
depth at which it was thought safe to use it; and the boat from which it
was suspended moved E. ? N. at the rate of 0°840 mile per hour. This
observation indicated a very considerable retardation of the rate of inflow,
but gave no evidence of an outflow. It did not, however, negative the in-
ference deducible from the temperature, and still more from the specific
gravity, of the water beneath, that an outflow takes place in that lowest
- stratum which we could not test by the ‘ current-drag.’ ”

The remark I feel it necessary to make is, that although the “ current-
drag”? showed no undercurrent here in 150 fathoms in a depth of 198
fathoms, but, on the contrary, there appeared to be an E. ? N. current at
that depth of 0°84, or about 2? mile per hour, yet against this result Dr. Car-
penter insists that “it did not, however, negative the inference deducible
from the temperature, and still more from the specific gravity, of the water
beneath, that an outflow takes place in the lowest stratum.” Now, ac-
cording to the depth, the sounding-drag when down in 150 fathoms was
nearly down to the level of the barrier-ridge extending across the Straits
there ; and moreover, from the Station being where the depth was so great
as 198 fathoms, it was on the west side of the barrier and considerably
below it. The temperature in that depth also, being 54°-5, corresponded
closely with a temperature obtained by Mr. Jeffreys at Station 37, a little
more to the westward, in 190 fathoms, which was there 53°°7, whilst on the
Mediterranean side, in 181 fathoms at Station 63, the temperature was
54°'7; so that there was nothing abnormal in these temperatures at about
the same depths, on different sides of the barrier-ridge, viz. that of a degree
only in one, and in the other on the Atlantic side of about 2 of a degree
lower temperature than that of the Mediterranean side, where it was at
its normal temperature of the deeps on that side; for on the Atlantic
side of the barrier the temperature lowers gradually down to its normal
depth of about 393° in the deeper regions, being at Station 35 in 335
fathoms 51°-5 at about 30 or 40 miles to the westward of the one at 65,
where the “current-drag”’ operation for testing the current was taken,

1871. | Theory of the Ocean. 549

but its result ignored by Dr. Carpenter in favour of the supposed abnormal
conditions of temperature and density there. Therefore I fail in being able
to agree with Dr. Carpenter’s predilection for the density and temperature
there, against the ‘‘current-drag”’ indications. If therefore he ignores
the ‘‘ current-drag’’ test here, he must still more ignore the result at
' Station 64 by the same means, by boat and basket, and under still more
unfavourable circumstances for doing it, when he so sanguinely relies upon
it as “‘ aconclusive proof that there was at this time a return-current in the
mid-channel of this narrowest part of the Strait, from the Mediterranean
towards the Atlantic, flowing beneath the constant surface-stream from the
Atlantic into the Mediterranean.”

For, with the boat and basket as a means for testing the surface and
undercurrent, and without a fixed float attached to the bottom as a
stationary point of reference for measuring the rates from, instead of
by angles upon.a chart of small scale, I cannot, from my experience of
such operations (and I do not know any one who has had more expe-
rience or given more consideration to the subject for ascertaining the
proper or best mode of doing it), agree that the result at Station 64 was
a satisfactory or sufficient proof of such an undercurrent outflow as Dr.
Carpenter contends for. For with a ship’s cutter as a float, and with a
force of wind of 4 against the surface-current, and producing so much
sea (for Dr. Carpenter states it was necessary in consequence to use a larger
boat than before, and not leave it to drift without a crew as on former
trials), with these two forces, of wind and short sea together, acting in the
presumed undercurrent direction, the result certainly cannot be accepted as
a “ conclusive proof’? of such an undercurrent in 250 fathoms of 0°400, or
nearly halfa mile per hour. The conclusion to my mind was that the bulky
boat, from being exposed most probably nearly broadside on to an easterly
wind, and therefore following swell, was drifting faster than the inflowing
surface-current from the westward, and thus drew the “current-drag ’’ some
Jittle distance to the westward, agamst the 1?-knot surface-current, the
‘«‘current-drag’”’ being probably in still water in 250 fathoms. Iam sure
that in this view I shall have many scientific men, landsmen as well as
nautical, in full agreement with me, and that for the solution of a question
of physical science, and in support of such large views as advocated by
Dr. Carpenter, the result was not conclusive.

One more remark touching the “ undercurrent flow up-hill”’ theory of
Dr. Carpenter as the result of the 1028°1 specific gravity and of 55°°3 at
the bottom at Station 67, in 188 fathoms. Now both these results are ap-
parently to me not abnormal conditions, as compared with the other results
in about the same depths, as I have shown in commenting upon the opinions
following the density and temperature at Station 65; for I can only con-
clude from Dr. Carpenter’s remarks that the position given of Station 67
in 188 fathoms was evidently on the west side of the barrier-ridge, the
down-hill or Atlantic side of it, as the line of his section on the Chart of the

550 Captain Spratt on the Undercurrent [June 15,

Strait shows, and not on the east or up-Aill side, for an undercurrent
coming from the Mediterranean, even if such existed there as an under-
current. But I must give my reason for not considering this temperature
and density at Station 67 as abnormal; for the position being clearly
several miles on the Atlantic side of the ridge*, we should expect to find
proximate Atlantic conditions on that side. Now, as Dr. Carpenter has no

densities between Lisbon and the Straits, except at Station 67, he has no

true comparison with the Atlantic conditions of either the surface or the
deep water at that part; for the lighter density of the surface-water of
the Straits is apparently due to its being a diluted or lowered condition
of that of the Atlantic in the same parallel from the influence of the two
large Spanish rivers, the Guadiana and Guadalquiver, which fall into the
sea so near the entrance to the Straits: not so, however, the density in the
depths of 188 fathoms; for there we should expect to find the normal
density nearly of the proximate part of the Atlantic, which, if denser than
the Atlantic in general, the same would be found in the deeper waters
drawn from it by the indraft current into the Mediterranean, the river in-
fluence being confined to the surface and being also drawn into the Straits.

Then in regard to the specific gravity of 1028-1 at the bottom, which in-
duced Dr. Carpenter to consider it to be Mediterranean water and not At-
antic, because some slight degree heavier than the mean of the Atlantic found
by him between Lisbon and England, I am induced to believe, from Dr.
Forchhammer’s researches, that such a density is about the normal con-
dition of the Atlantic deeps near the African coast in this parallel; for
he shows that the maximum salinity of the Atlantic lies to the south-west
of the Straits, about the parallel of 24° and up to about 36° north latitude,
and some 300 miles only distant from the African coast, where he says it is
37'908 per 1000, and that this salinity is nowhere exceeded in the Mediter-
ranean, but where its abnormal maximum density between Crete and the
Libyan coast is found, which he shows is only exceeded in the whole ocean
by the density found in the Red Seat. This great salinity off the Morocco
coast he attributes to the absence of rivers upon it; therefore it seems
to me that as we have a source for a salinity as great as that of the mean
salinity of the Mediterranean so near, on the outside of the Straits, we have
no proof that the water of 1028°1 specific gravity, found by Dr. Carpenter
at the depth of 188 fathoms at Station 67, and clearly on the outside of
the barrier-ridge, is not Atlantic water, instead of bemg Mediterranean
water, as he concluded, and concluded from it also that there was an “ up-
hill outflow’ as a necessary result.

This, however, is an excusable oversight or misunderstanding of the
conditions, as, with all due deference, it seems to me to be, in one not familiar
with the indications of a few scattered soundings on a chart of the probable
line of direction of the crest of a submerged ridge.

* See Chart of the Cruise of H.M.S. ‘ Porcupine,’
+ See Phil. Trans. 1865, p. 220.

1871.] Theory of the Ocean. 551

Postscript, June 23rd, 1871.

As the undercurrent theory, in its larger view, as first put forth by Capt.
Maury, will remain a source of error still for the misguidance of the phy-
sical geographer and philosopher, whilst the fallacy or mistaken facts
also remain uncontradicted, upon which it was mainly and originally founded
by the eminent author of the ‘Physical Geography of the Sea,’ it is
therefore now necessary for me to show, after what I have previously
written on the question, that the assertion of an undercurrent of from 1 to
13 knot per hour in the Atlantic as counter to a surface-current of much
smaller amount on the outside of the Gulf-stream, is based upon a mis-
taken estimate of the results of the experiments that were supposed to
indicate such an undercurrent.

Capt. Maury says, in p. 141, ‘ Physical Geography of the Sea,’ when
discussing his undercurrent views in the chapter headed ‘ Undercur-
rents :?—

«Lieut. J. C. Walsh, of the United States schooner ‘ Taney,’ and Lieut.
8. P. Lee, in the United States brig ‘ Dolphin,’ both, while they were car-
rying on a system of observations in connexion with the wind and
current charts, had their attention directed to the subject of submarine
currents. They made some interesting experiments on the subject. A
block of wood was loaded to sinking, and by means of a fishing-line or a
bit of twine let down to the depth of 100 or 500 fathoms; a small float,
just sufficient to keep the block from sinking further, was then tied to the
line, and the whole let go from the boat.

‘‘To use their own expression, it was wonderful, indeed, to see this dar-
vega move off against wind and sea and surface-current at the rate of over
one knot an hour as was generally the case, and on one occasion as much ag
13 knot. The men in the boat could not repress exclamations of surprise ;
for it really appeared as if some monster of the deep had hold of the weight
below, and was walking off with the line. Both officers and men were
amazed at the sight.”’.

In paragraph 273 he says, ‘‘ It may, therefore, without doing violence to
the rules of philosophical investigation, be conjectured that the equilibrium
of all the seas is preserved, to a greater or less extent, by this system of
currents and counter currents at and below the surface. If we except the
tides and the partial currents of the sea, such as those that may be created
by the wind, we may lay it down asa rule that all the currents of the ocean
owe their origin to difference of specific gravity between sea-water at one
place and sea-water at another; for whenever there is such a difference,
whether it be owing to difference of temperature alone or difference of
saltness, &c., it is a difference that disturbs equilibrium, and currents are
the consequence. The heavier water gives towards the lighter, and the
lighter whence the heavier comes ; for two fluids differing in specific gravity,
and standing at the same level, cannot balance each other.”

552 Captain Spratt on the Undercurrent [June 15,

From the above reasonings, it is clear that the eminent author, from the
supposition that a great undercurrent movement in the Atlantic had been
discovered as the result of the observations and experiments of Lieutenants
Walsh and Lee, was induced to propound his fascinating but fallacious
theory regarding the origin of “‘all the currents of the ocean”’ being more
due to temperature and density than to tides and winds.

Now it is true in regard to tides, that is, the currents resulting from tide-
waves are mainly littoral and local. It is not so, however, as the result of
winds, which from my experience are the main sources of ocean-currents,
without ignoring that from the rotation of the earth, which are therefore

chiefly superficial, but capable of reaching a considerable depth where the —

water is deep enough, even to 50 and more fathoms, with no greater sur-
face-movement than from three-tenths to five-tenths, or half a knot per
hour, as I have on several occasions experienced from a perfect stillness
of the sea from the surface down to the greatest depths in perfect calm
weather, but which was set in motion in the same direction as the wind to
that depth a few hours only after a 4- or 5-knot breeze had set in.

To show that Capt. Maury had mainly founded his theory upon the ob-
servations of Lieutenants Walsh and Lee, I must quote from the Report
of the former as being the one most important and complete, as was sup-
’ posed, in proof of the rapid undercurrent believed in by Capt. Maury,
and supposed to have been confirmed by other phenomena connected with
the fallacious idea of the ploughing of icebergs through fields of ice in
Baffin’s Bay, by the force of a mighty undereurrent*, instead of the fact of
the field of ice flowing past them, by reason of the greater strength of the
surface-current over the current in the depths to which the base of the
bergs reached, as no doubt must be the fact in that bay or strait from the
southerly drift of both into the Atlantic.

‘Report of Lieut. Walsh, U.S.N., to Lieut. M. F. Maury, of the Ob-
servatory at Washington. |

‘The next subject to which I would refer is our investigation of the
undercurrents of the ocean. I regret we had so few opportunities for the
interesting experiments, but enough has been done to seem to warrant
the conclusion that these undercurrents are generally stronger setting in
various different directions than those of the surface. I am well aware
there is no mode of testing their exact velocity, but that practised by
myself, which I will describe, was certainly all-sufficient to show their
real velocity. There may be none so rapid as that mighty ocean-river
the Gulf-stream. Unfortunately the weather prevented our making
these investigations in that interesting region; but in the various parts
of the Atlantic in which we succeeded in these experiments, on only
two occasions did we find the undercurrent of less velocity than that run-
ning in a different direction above it.

* See Physical Geography of the Sea, pp. 162 & 163.

1871.] Theory of the Ocean. 553

«“The following is the mode practised: the surface-current was first
tried by the usual mode (a heavy iron kettle being lowered from a boat to
the depth of 80 fathoms), then for the trial of the undercurrent a large
chip-log, of the usual quadrantal form, the arc of it measuring full 4 feet,
and heavily loaded with lead to make it sink and keep upright, was lowered
by a light but strong cod-line to the depth of 126 fathoms (the length of
the line); a barrega was attached as a float, a log-line fastened to this
barrega, and the rate of motion to this float, as measured by this log-line
and the glass, and the direction as shown by a compass, were assumed as
the velocity and set of the undercurrent. No allowance was made for the
drag of the barrega, which was always in a different direction from the
surface-current. It was wonderful, indeed, to see this barrega move off
against wind and sea and surface-current at the rate of over one knot an
hour, as was generally the case, and on one occasion as much as 13 knot.
The men in the boat could not repress exclamations of surprise, for it
really appeared as if some monster of the deep had hold of the weight
below, and was walking off with it.”

It is therefore quite evident that Capt. Maury adopted Lieut. Walsh’s
identical words and views as the sound solution of the experiments, viz.
that a great oceanic undercurrent circulation existed as a counterpoise to
the disturbed densities arising from temperature and salinity.

Lieut. Walsh next cites from the log several instances of the experi-
ments, viz. at six positions in the Atlantic, between 24° 43’ North and

0° 2’ West, and 33° 58’ North and 72° West, in which the weighted chip-
log was lowered to 126 fathoms in each position, to test the undercurrent
at that depth, as erroneously supposed. But in fact it was merely giving
a more correct indication of the surface-current than that resulting from the
iron kettle in 80 fathoms, witha large boat as its float, under the erroneous
impression that the iron kettle would be in still water at that depth, and
that 1t would retain the boat stationary as if anchored to the bottom;
this, too, against wind and sea. Itis, however, evident that the kettle-and-
boat experiment could only show a vitiated result, a Capansies surface-
current to that actually existing. 5

The kettle-and-boat experiment were only used once, however, at the
last position, in connexion with the large chip-log lowered down to 126
fathoms, which Lieut. Walsh Beetle, by saying, “which it would have
been better to have always done.” _

Now it must be quite evident from what I have before shown, from my
experiments for testing surface and undercurrents, or from the diagram
referred to, p. 537, how the rate of descending surface-currents, and of any
undercurrent, can be correctly ascertained, if existing as an appreciable
fact, although Lieut. Walsh did not then know “of any means of doing
so correctly ;’’ that, therefore, the float to the large 4-feet diameter chip-
log, lowered down to 126 fathoms, would naturally appear to run to
windward of the heavy boat attached to the iron kettle of less dimension g

554 Captain Spratt on the Undercurrent [June 15,
than the former, and therefore of less resistance to the drag of the boat by
the wind, sea, and surface-current, even if both kettle and chip-log had
reached the region of perfectly still water.

But if, as may have been probable, the kettle was still in a portion of
the surface-current, and the chip-log in about 50 fathoms lower down was
in the still regions, or even a more diminished rate of the surface-current,
the float of the latter would more rapidly separate from the boat in
the opposite direction to the surface-current, and thus appear to be
marvellously dragged by an undercurrent against wind and sea and surface-
current—that is, against or opposite to the boat’s natural drift. Now, as
Lieut. Walsh notices that the weather was too rough for attempting deep
soundings, except on the 14th of May, we must infer that there was
sufficient wind and sea to cause considerable drift to the boat; but he does
not notice the direction of the wind. :

Therefore, as there was no fixed object as a point of comparison suffi-
ciently exact in the last experiment, when the kettle was used, much less in
the others, when only the chip-log was used, and with a compass bearing
from a drifting boat for ascertaining the presumed direction of the under-
current, even the true direction of the surface-current cannot be depended
upon by reversing the direction he has given for the undercurrent (this is,
by assuming that the surface-current ran E.N.E. 13 knot when he gives
the undereurrent as setting W.S.W. 1} knot), since there were so many
sources of error vitiating the results. A fixed object for reference can
always be obtained in any depth by a 20-lb. lead and sufficient twine, and
a light float attached when it has reached the bottom, as I have long since
shown and recommended as a necessity in all such delicate experiments
in mid-ocean or elsewhere. The following are the results at the six posi-
tions given by Lieut. Walsh :—

; : Oat Temperature,| Fathoms,
Date. Lat. | Long. |Depth.| Rate. | Direction. SrA, 0.
Aare are etmel @ tcnok, -
May llth ...| 24 43 | 65 2 126 1 W.S.W. 77:3 73°95
May 12th ...| 24 55 | 64 43 | 126 13 S.E. 7d 69
May 13th ...| 26 42 | 64 41] 126 4 W.S.W 175 745
May 14th ...| 26 46 | 63 53 | 126 + | N. by E 77
May 18th ...} 30 06 | 67 56 | 126 = N.E. 70 65
May 29th ...| 338 58 | 72 00 |. 126 1 W.N.W 71 67

It is therefore only the rate as given above for the undercurrents that can
be relied upon as the rates of a surface-current that really existed in those
positions, and which from the high mean temperature for the whole six, of
74°'6, and of 77°'3 at three of the positions, as the surface-temperature for
the month of May, and of 73°5 and 74:5 in a depth of 100 fathoms at two
of them, would seem to show it to have been a continuation of a portion of
the trade-wind or equatorial current, its easterly portion running outside of
the West-India Islands, but somewhat checked, and even perhaps at times

1871.] Theory of the Ocean. ‘555

diverted by the local winds; forthe power of winds to divert even the ‘‘mighty
Gulfstream” of 34 knots is shown in the ‘ Notes on the Gulf-stream,’ by
A. D. Bache, Superintendent of the United States Coast Survey, who
shows it to be driven sometimes out of its usual course fully thirty miles
by N.W. and westerly gales.
In concluding these remarks upon the errors regarding the under-
current theory, I feel that it is due to our distinguished transatlantic
hydrographers and geographers, that as theirs were the pioneer efforts in
such investigations on a large scale, it was natural that they should have
been defective, from the little attention given to such researches previously.
But it is necessary that these errors should now be well understood, and
‘shown to have arisen from a fallacious estimate of the experiments, that
the philosophical naturalist and physicist be no longer misguided by them,
and thus attribute so grand and large an influence to undercurrent, as
erroneously shown by the experiments of Lient. Walsh and Lee, and as
the assumed necessary result of the small difference of density between one
part of the ocean and another ; for surface-current circulation and return
-can and, indeed, must tend largely to restore it, aided by the rain and river
supply of fresh water met with in its circulation and return. This is even
shown to be so under the equator, from the large African rivers and also
from the Amazon and others joining the equatorial current, from the
elaborate investigations (the twenty years’ researches) of the late Dr.
-Forchhammer, as surnmarized in his most interesting and valuable dis-
cussion of these analyses in hig paper in the Philosophical Transac-
‘tions for 1865, wherein the analyses and temperatures of the sea-
water are given from all parts of the globe, and a most remarkable and
able deduction of the surface-currents from them. But the learned Doctor,
misguided, no doubt, by the supposed existence of the great undercurrent
movement in the Atlantic as propounded by Capt. Maury, and also by the
‘misunderstanding of the facts and the incompleteness of the observations
for correctly ascertaining the conditions existing between the Baltic and
German Ocean, and so, as a philosophical physicist, thus misled, was in-
duced to ascribe a greater influence to undercurrent circulation than to
superficial, as a means of restoring the equilibrium from reduced or increased
densities. I have before admitted that where two currents meet, such as the
Polar and Gulf-stream, both strong in force and of great difference in density
or temperature, and in directions nearly at right angles such as these two,
an undercurrent or intermediate current of appreciable amount may exist.
That denser water will intermix with lighter water in its deeper portion,
when they meet and when depths are equal and difference of the densities
great, as between pure fresh and sea-water, 1 am aware from my experi-
ence at the mouths of large rivers.
This is a fact experienced every year at the Damietta and Rosetta mouths
of the Nile for five or six weeks, during the lowest condition of the Nile,
when there is only a surface-outflow there; and it extends five or six miles

556 Dr. R. Norris on the passage of [June 15,

within their embouchures, as I first ascertained when carrying out my
current tests in that river; brackish water was consequently found in the
lower depths, percolation of sea-water through the sandy substrata no
doubt then partly accounting for its brackish condition. But eddy
surface-currents along the sides of the river, under the influence of the
prevailing N.W. winds blowing directly into the mouths, no doubt also
assist the intermixture as far as it goes—just as the return-current down
the European coast is diluted and intermixed in its general and superficial
density from the rains and rivers of the north, and thus tends to restore
the lost freshness of the equatorial or trade-wind and Gulf-stream cur-
rents, as the tropical rivers and rains tend to restore the loss in the low
latitudes: thus condensation from evaporation and redilution by surface-
currents are throughout mainly maintaining the equilibrium. Dr. Forch-
hammer shows. that this lighter density or dilution of the encircling super-
ficial waters from the equator commences from the American rivers from
the parallel a little north of the Bermudas, and that it exists all along the
European coast and again on the African coast from the African rivers ;
and he has shown that the effect of the La Plata is found 900 miles from
its mouth. The fact I have given of the condition at the Nile’s mouths
at certain seasons is an extreme case, quite in accordance with the great
undercurrent theorists’ views, and I mention it as a fact of interest to them.
But nevertheless I believe, from my own experience, and from the facts to
be gathered from Dr. Forchhammer’s elaborate researches into the tempe-
ratures and saline densities, that as it is not an appreciable and measurable
movement as an undercurrent at the Nile or Dardanelles, and only chemi-
cally testable by the tongue or hydrometer, so are there no great mechanical
and appreciable movements as undercurrents in the ocean as a necessary
result of the very slight difference in the densities of one part of the ocean
and another. Nevertheless a complete investigation into the phenomena
of ocean-currents is a most desirable operation, and can be so easily accom-
plished on the plan I have found so practicable and easy, and recommended
several years ago for adoption by all scientific captains when crossing the
great oceans, especially when calins detain them and favour the experiment,
without fear of the results being confused or mistaken ; for then only should
it be carried out where there are great depths and where strong surface-
currents exist.

XII. “ On the Physical Principles concerned in the passage of Blood-
corpuscles through the Walls of the Vessels.’ By Ricnarp
Norris, M.D., Professor of Physiology, Queen’s College, Bir-
mingham. Communicated by Dr. Suarrry, Sec. RS. Re-
ceived June 12, 1871.

In the year 1846 my much-lamented teacher, Dr. Augustus Waller,
published in the Philosophical Magazine two able papers relating to the

1871.] Blood-corpuscles through the Walls of the Vessels. 557

perforation of the capillaries by the morphological elements of the blood,
viz. the red and white corpuscles.

These observations attracted little attention till the year 1867, when the
facts made known by Dr. Waller were rediscovered by Professor Cohnheim,
of Berlin.

Since the publication of Cohnheim’s researches very considerable interest
has been taken in the subject, and the experiments have been repeated and
the facts corroborated by eminent physiologists and pathologists in all
parts of the world.

On a careful consideration of the hypotheses which have been propounded
by Waller, Cohnheim, Stricker, Bastian, and Caton, to account for the
curious phenomena in question, it will be found that all these hypotheses fall
short in one important particular, inasmuch as they afford no explanation
whatever of by far the most singular part of the process, viz. the fact that
the apertures through which the corpuscles pass again close up and
become invisible. The question, indeed, is not so much how the cor-
puscles get out, as how they get out without leaving any permanent trace
of the apertures through which they have so recently passed, and which
were so palpable during the period of transit.

Before proceeding to elaborate my own views, it may be well to restate
succinctly the various pomts upon which observers are agreed.

Ist. Both white and red corpuscles pass out of the vessels through
apertures which can neither be seen before their ingress into or egress
from the vessel wall, but only during the period of transit.

2nd. An essential and primary step in the process is, that the corpus-
cles shall adhere or, more properly, cohere to the wall of the vessel.

3rd. These cohering corpuscles shall subsequently be subjected to pres-
sure from within.

With these conditions fully before our minds, we will proceed to inquire
if in physics we can find the analogue of these seemingly mysterious phe-
nomena.

In the first place, this phenomenon of the passage of bodies through
films or membranes is by no means confined to the capillary walls, the
same thing has been observed in nucleated blood-corpuscles, such, for ex-
ample, as those of the frog. In these cases no rupture or aperture of exit
has been discovered.

It is obvious that the escape of the nucleus from its capsule without
rupture, and the passage of the entire blood-corpuscle through the capil-
lary wall without rupture, are phenomena of the same class; and the ex-
planation which will suffice to clear up the one, will also apply with equal
force to the other.

- As a matter of fact, it will be admitted that we can form no @ priori
conception of one form-retaining body passing through another without
either rupturing it or distending certain holes or pores which it may al-
ready possess. ‘This, however, is just one of those cases in which con-

558 Dr. R. Norris on the passage of [June 15,

ceivability is no test whatever of possibility. To comprehend these phe-
nomena it is necessary to bear in mind the ultimate constitution of the
animal membranes, which form alike the capsules of the corpuscles and the
parietes of the capillaries*. All the membranes which enter into the
animal body may, from a physical point of view, be divided into two orders,
—the very fine structureless homogeneous films which must be regarded
as simple cohesion-membranes, in contradistinction to the second order of
coarser membranes, to which certain mechanical arrangements are super-
added, which have the effect of increasing the strength, such, for example,
as structure, the result of interlacing fibres; in films of collodion, gelatine,
albumen, india-rubber, and soap we have examples of the first class of mem-
brane. It is with this class that we are now concerned, and these are sus-
ceptible of two states, the fixed or rigid condition, and the contractile or
elastic state, dependent upon the presence of the principle of “ flow,”
which principle may be operative in every shade and degree, from perfect
liquidity to absolute rigidity. |

It will be sufficient to state here that the more colloid and plastic those
membranes are, or, in other words, the more they approximate in their con-
stitution to liquids, so do they proportionately cease to obey exclusively the
laws of rigid bodies, and begin to exhibit intermediate properties or quali—
ties, some of which belong to solids and others to liquids.

We may take the soap-film as the best illustration we can find on a
large scale of the class of homogeneous cohesion-films, possessing in the
greatest perfection this principle of “flow,” and as exhibiting to the fullest
extent phenomena which I have generalized under the term progressive
cohesive attractions.

By the study of the soap-film we may acquire a knowledge of many

* The parietes of the capillaries are held by modern histologists to consist of pro-
toplasm, a substance which is universally considered to be of a viscid semiliquid nature,
and in which it is easy to demonstrate the presence of the property of flowing within ~
certain limits.

{+ The term progressive cohesion is here used in contrast with that operation of cohe-
sion which simply maintains contact between the particles of two like or unlike sub-
stances or bodies, and which, when it occwrs between the particles of unlike bodies, is
called adhesion. ‘The attraction of cohesion evidently operates for some distance beyond
the atom or particle, so that actual contact is not essential to its display. "When two
small globes of mercury, or of any other liquid, are made to touch at one point, they
merge, as is well known, with great rapidity into each other, and the materials which
compose them become arranged around a common centre, that is to say, one larger
sphere results. The mode of union of these two spheres is clearly a progressive one, the
particles nearest to those in actual contact being the next to come into contact, and so
on, until the globes become intimately united. In the presence of gravitation there
can be no mass-attraction between the two globules.

Again, when a solid is partially immersed in a liquid having a cohesive affinity for
it, e.g. a sheet of glass, the liquid, as is well known, rises considerably above the water-
level. This shows that with unlike bodies the action extends beyond contact, and is
progressive in its operation from one line or row of particles to the next above. This
term therefore includes all effects of cohesion which arise from and display its opera-

1871.] Blood-corpuscles through ihe Walls of the Vessels. 559

of the laws which are operative in connexion with delicate colloidal films
in general.

The steps, for example, in the production of an ordinary soap-sphere
are very remarkable, as exemplifying the power which these films possess,
under the influence of progressive cohesion, to perfect any absence of con-
tinuity which may exist in their structure.

The first essential in the process of forming a soap-sphere is the pro-
duction upon the mouth of the pipe-bowl of a film stretching evenly across
from every point of the circumference.

The production of this film is a far more complex operation than is
generally supposed.

If for the pipe-bowl we substitute a ring having a diameter of from 12
to 18 inches, we are enabled to watch, as the process proceeds, the manner
in which the film is formed.

Having submerged the ring in a solution of soap, we observe, as we
gradually raise it out, that its circumference brings up from the liquid a
band-like film of a cylindrical or tubular form which is attached to the
ring above and the liquid below; raising up the ring still higher, we find
that this annular film contracts in diameter at every part except at its at-
tachment to the circumference of the ring, which is of course fixed. This
quality of the film to contract between opposing points of extension
causes it to take on the shape of an inverted cone with curved sides, the
convexities of which are directed inwards. The tendency to assume the
inverted-cone shape is further assisted by the fact that the film, in con-
tracting, travels inwards upon the surface of the solution towards a central
point, so that from the ring downwards to the surface of the solution the
diameter of the tubular film is continually decreasing. The shortest
diameter is not, however, immediately upon the surface of the liquid, but
at a little distance from it; and consequently, as the contraction proceeds,
it will be at this spot that the union of the sides of the film and the separa-
tion will take place. This arises from the fact that this is the weakest
point of tension between the ring and the liquid, and therefore the one in
which circumferential contraction can take place with the greatest ease and
effect. ‘Thus we see that the tubular film which we have raised really be-
comes constricted into two portions,—an upper portion, which immediately
contracts into a plane surface upon the ring, and a smaller and lower
portion, which, in consequence of including air, becomes a hemisphere and
remains attached to the surface of the solution. If, having formed such a
film upon a ring or pipe-bowl, we proceed to blow down upon it, we
distend it into a sphere; but it is obvious that until the sphere is detached

tion beyond the line or boundary of actual contact. All capillary phenomena may
be regarded as due to this progressive action of cohesion operating at one and the
same time in diverse directions.

560 Dr. R. Norris on the passage of [June 15,

there exists a free opening into it at its upper part, which becomes
suddenly sealed up by cohesion of the sides of the film at the moment
preceding detachment ; and this detachment is seen to be a repetition of
what takes place in the formation of the primary film.

The next point to which I would draw attention is the power possessed
by these films to repair breaches of continuity that may be made in them
subsequently to their formation. If any rigid body be wetted, it is quite
possible to thrust it through one of these films, move it about, and again
withdraw it without interfering with the integrity of the structure, as may
be proved by passing a aeeeet bulbous rod of glass through the film. It
is not, however, essential that the body should be either smooth or regular,
for the same thing may be done with the naked fist and arm.

I have fovea elsewhere that the blood-corpuseles undergo a
mode of aggregation in obedience to progressive mutual attraction in pre-
cisely the same fashion as soap-spheres,—that is to say, if they touch at any
one point they gradually, by the operation of double cohesion (capillary at-
traction), convert each other into polyhedral-shaped bodies*. If we wet
any smooth rigid surface and allow one point in the circumference of a
bubble to impinge against it, we find that it becomes so drawn down to the
plate in every direction, from this point as a centre, as to take on a hemi-
spherical form. But if for the rigid surface we substitute a delicate flowing
film, such as the soap-film, and allow the bubble to come in contact with
it at one point, taking care that there is a free supply of liquid upon its
exterior at this point, we observe that the result is different. In this case
the soap-sphere takes on the form of two watch-glasses in apposition at
their edges, one of the curves being present on each side of the film. The
soap-sphere has, in fact, penetrated the film, and arranged itself so that
half is on one side and half on the other.

Now this is precisely analogous to what takes place with the capillary
when the corpuscle has entered into cohesion with its wall; “a ee
rance is seen on the outer surface.”

If we can subject this soap-sphere to pressure on one side only, we shall
cause it to protrude through the film still further; this we can do by
forming one sphere within another. This inner sphere protrudes more
than in the case of the simple film. That there is pressure within a bubbie
may be known by the fact that, if left with an aperture in it, it will gradu-
ally force out the contained air and become again a simple film by its
strong cohesive tendency.

Further, it will be seen that we can with the greatest ease separate these
cohering spheres, bringing them bodily through the film without injury to
one or the other ; and this may be taken as a parallel case to the passage of
the nucleus through the capsule of the corpuscle, and of the Ba
itself through the capillary wall.

I have previously shown that the corpuscles are raneate to the same

* Proceedings of Royal Society, vol. xvii. p. 429.

1871.} Blood-corpuscles through the Walls of the Vessels. 561

laws as the soap-spheres, and we have only to infer that they bear the
same relation to the capillary walls as these spheres and films bear to each
other. The margin of speculation is therefore small.

In the case of the corpuscles this relation is of course only seen under
abnormal conditions, simply because it is a physical law which in the
normal working of the animal economy required to be antagonized.

It must also be observed that it is only under certain conditions that the
soap-spheres attract each other, or are attracted by rigid surfaces or plastic
films. This occurs only when free liquid is cohering to their surfaces.
If before bringing them into contact we allow the soap-film and sphere to
become moderately dry, they will not attract each other, but the former
will support the latter as a perfect sphere instead of drawing it down by
progressive cohesion and arranging it halfway through itself.

Just so with the corpuscles; they do not unite either with each other or
with the capillary wall, unless their normal osmotic relations are disturbed,
the exosmotic current setting in excessively when their external surfaces
become coated with content-matter, and they become instantly attractive
of each other, of the capillary wall or glass slide, as the case may be.

In the paper before referred to, “‘ On the Laws concerned in the Aggre-
gation of the Blood-corpuscles,”’ I have given numerous examples of the
operation of progressive cohesive attraction; but in this place I wish to call
attention to the demonstration there given of its relation to plane sur-
faces.

Taking this experiment as a starting-point, we will extend the consi-
deration to surfaces of a different character. In the first place, we find
that this law continues to operate with great facility in connexion with
surfaces curved in one direction only, whether the surface used be convex
or concave; in both eases the film of paper or collodion applies itself evenly
to the surface in the gradual progressive manner before explained.

If, however, for surfaces curved in one direction only, we substitute such
as are curved in all directions (for example, the outer or convex, or the inner
or concave surfaces of a hollow sphere), we find ourselves confronted with
a new set of difficulties, out of which we may evolve the statement that,
for any film to apply itself evenly and regularly to either the convex or
concave surface of a sphere under the influence of progressive attraction,
it is necessary that the film should be, in several particulars of its consti-
tution, very different from the class of films by means of which we have
been able to illustrate the three preceding experiments.

If, by way of illustration, we apply a film of wetted collodion or fine
cambric paper to the sphere, so that one point of the convexity of the
latter may come in contact with the centre of the film, the attraction will
only succeed in pulling it down to the surface of the sphere at certain
points ; the intermediate puckered parts are not in contact, and can by no
possibility become applied. From this we see that for the film to be laid
down evenly, it would be necessary that it should contract in certain parts,

VOL. XIX. 2x

562 _ -Dr. R. Norris on the passage of °) [June ds,

that, in fact, the puckered or surplus material should be taken up. We
may say, then, that any film which can adapt itself to the surface of a
spherical body must possess the twofold quality of facile contraction and
expansion, these qualities being controlled in their operation by progres-
sive cohesive attraction. Such a film must be a simple colloidal cohesion-
membrane in possession of the property of “ flow.”

Further, if we apply to a sphere a film known to possess facile proper-
ties of expansion and contraction under the influence of slight forces, such
as progressive cohesive attraction, the first thing seen to occur is cohesion
of the film to the sphere at the point of contact ; and from this point as a
centre of operation the film proceeds to apply itself gradually in all direc-
tions, so that the sphere becomes coated or covered evenly by it: this
process goes on till such time as the attraction becomes balanced or fully
antagonized by the elasticity of the film, that is to say, the attraction is only
powerful enough to stretch the film to a certain extent; so that if the rigid
object be fixed, as is the case with the glass bulb when held immoyably,
we get a flattened form of the film. A sufficient degree of attachment of
the film to the bulb has taken place to stretch the former backwards out
of its normal plane. If, now, we push the bulb further forwards, the film
still continues to apply itself to its surface, and having reached the equato-
rial line of the sphere, descends on the opposite hemisphere till the bulb
is completely coated. But it will be said the bulb does not then really
produce an infraction of the film, but merely attracts it down to its surface,
and in so doing stretches it, so that it is in reality a new conformation of
the film and not a breach of its continuity. That this is true to a certain
extent there is no doubt, but it is not all the truth; for we may wipe the
bulb dry after it has passed through the film without interfering with the
continuity of the latter. All that appears to be necessary for these effects
to display themselves is, that there should be mutual cohesion between the
film and the body passing through it; for if we press against one of these
delicate films with a substance which has no cohesion for it, e. g. a current
of air or a dry soap-sphere, it simply distends the film, neither bursting it
nor giving rise to an aperture init; while in the case of a body to which the
film can cohere, it would appear to be easier for the latter to allow the
passage of the cohering body than to suffer distension by it, and this be-
cause it has under these conditions as great an attraction for the particles
of the body as for its own particles. When the cohering body has become
perfectly applied to the film, the latter, by the cohesiveness of its own
particles, contracts to the greatest degree possible consistent with still main-
taining its attachment to the cohering body; and this in spherical-shaped
bodies leads to a condition of things in which half the body is within and
half without the film or wall*; therefore the rest of the process must be

* An excellent illustration of this principle is afforded when a light india-rubber ball

or balloon. is suspended from a fixed point, its surface having previously been wetted
with a solution of soap. When a soap-film formed upon the ring, as in the previous

1871.|] Blood-corpuscles through the Walls of the Vessels. 563

accomplished by pressure from within. It is easy to see that the manner
or degree to which the corpuscle or body coheres to the film will deter=
mine very materially the method of its transmission.

All, then, that is essential fora rigid or plastic body to pass through a
colloid film is :—I1st, an intimate power of cohtsion, either mediately or im-
mediately, between the film and the body; 2nd, a certain amount of pres-
sure from within; 3rd, power in the substance of the film to cohere to
the surface of the body (or to some intermediate matter which already
coheres to the surface) during its passage; 4th, cohesive plasticity of the
particles of the material of which the film itself is composed, so that the
breach in it may again become reunited as it descends upon the opposite
suirface of the body which is being extruded.

It is quite remarkable to how great an extent these conditions appear to
be complied with in the passage of the white corpuscle through the capil-
lary wall, as affirmed by independent observers.

In the factitious examples by which I have sought to illustrate these
effects, the film moves over the body, or the body through the film, by
virtue of the intermediate agency of the solution which has cohesive at-
traction for both; and the film does not rupture, because, while the
body is travelling through, it can continue to cohere till such time as it
is brought again into contact with its own particles at the opposite pole of
the extruded body.

Theoretically, as it leaves the sphere or protruding body, the aperture
should gradually narrow to absolute union at a focal point, or, according to
the laying-down view, having resealed itself from the bulb; practically,
however, I find that the film rarely leaves the bulb or sphere without form-
ing on it a small hemispherical bubble, which is large in the ratio of the
rapidity with which the detachment is effected.

If detached with very great care, the bubble is exceedingly small; but
I could not succeed with a spherical bulb in getting rid of it altogether ;
with a more conical bulb, however, this was readily effected. In the
case of the sphere, the film is in reality drawn out into a little neck,
as in the other examples in which continuity is effected; and this neck
is pulled into two, and both parts cohering at the point of severance, we
get on the one side the perfected film, and on the other a small enclosure
of air which takes on the hemispherical form. This is owing to the
annular contraction of the tubular part. If the body were small or
less spherical, or the film a trifie more rigid, this would not occur. I find,
in fact, by experiment that smaller bodies, more conical in their termina-
tion, do not. do this, but draw out a kind of streak of solution as they
leave the film—a fact I have often observed with the white corpuscles. In

experiments, is brought into contact with one point of its convexity, the ball is at once

drawn into the film as far as its equator, and is compelled to retain this position in

opposition to the force of gravity. This is the exact converse of the case of the fixed

bulb, in which the attraction is satisfied at the expense of the expansibility of the film,
2x2

564 : Presents. [ May 25,

this case the film is brought to a focus upon the body, and not at a slight
distance from it; so that either or both these modes might obtain with the
corpuscle. In some cases the streak of solution is absent. The method
of sealing, which leaves behind a portion of the film, is probably a necessity
of every case of repair of continuity, with the exception of that of trans-
mission of a foreign body through a film.

In the case of the blood-corpuscle it would not appear that the capillary
wall became applied over the surface of the corpuscle to any great extent,
but that, having effected cohesion, it becomes easier for the capillary wall
to give way and glide over the corpuscle than to be distended by it; and
this is effected much slower than in the case of the factitious examples
which I have placed before you. For capillarity to come into play, the
presence on the exterior of the corpuscle of another and cohesively dissi-
milar liquid to the liquor sanguinis is required ; and this we obtain by the
outward passage, under the influence of osmosis, of the content-matter
(heemoglobin) of the corpuscle; a magnified view of the relations present
may be thus represented :—

Capillary wall.

= rs ee

/_—————

====——~,, §Tensional surface of
content-matter,

Plasma. a '
Corpuscle wall.

We may conclude in the appropriate words of Herbert Spencer :—
“© We have in these colloids, of which organisms are mainly composed, just
the required compromise between fluidity and solidity ; they cannot be re-
duced to the unduly mobile conditions of liquid and gas, and yet they do
not assume the unduly fixed condition usually characterizing solids; the
absence of power to unite together in polar arrangement leaves their atoms
with acertain freedom of relative movement, which makes them sensitive to
small forces, and produces plasticity in the aggregates composed of them.’ —
Principles of Biology, p. 23.

The Society adjourned over the Long Vacation to Thursday, November
16th.

Presents received May 25, 1871.

Transactions.
Bremen :—Naturwissenschaftliche Vereine. Abhandlungen. Band II.
Heft 3. 8vo. Bremen 1871. The Society.

Frankfurt a. M.:—Senckenbergischen Naturforschenden Gesellschaft.
Abhandlungen. BandVII. Heft3,4. 4to. Hrankfurt1870. Bericht
1869-70. 8vo. Frankfurt 1870. The Society.

Jena:—Medicinisch-naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft. JenaischeZeit-

1871.] Presents. 565

Transactions (continued).
schrift fiir Medicin und Naturwissenschaft. Band VI. Heft 1, 2.

8vo. Leipzig 1870-71. The Society.
Klausenburg :—Az Erdélyi Muzeum-Evkonyv. Kotet 5. Fiizet 2, 3.
4to. Kolozsudrtt 1870-71. The Museum.

London :—Christian Evidence Society. Lectures by the Archbishop of
York, Dr. Payne Smith, Rev. W. Jackson, Rev. George Rawlinson,
Bishop of Carlisle, and Dr. Stoughton. 12mo. London 1871.
The Karl of Harrowby, F.R.S.
Geological Society. Quarterly Journal. Vol. XX VII. Part 2 (No.106).
8vo. London 1871. The Society.
Geological Survey of Great Britain. Memoirs. Mineral Statistics for
the year 1860, by R. Hunt, F.R.S. 8vo. London 1871.

The Survey.

Pathological Society. Transactions. Vol. IV. 8vo. London 1853.
The Society.
Royal Agricultural Society. Journal. Second Series. Vol. VII. Part 1
(No. 13). 8vo. London 1871. The Society.
Royal Medical and Chirurgical Society. Proceedings. Vol. VI. No. 7
(Part 32). 8vo. London 1871. Additions to the Library, No. 13.
8vo. London 1870. The Society.

Naples:—Societé Reale. Rendiconto delle tornate e dei lavori dell’
Accademia di Scienze Morali e Politiche. Anno 9. 8yo. Napoli
1870. The Society.

Neweastle-upon-Tyne :—North of England Institute of Mining Engi-
neers. Transactions. Vol. XIV. 8vo. Newcastle 1865.

The Institute.

Sydney :—Royal Society of New South Wales. Transactions for the
year 1867, 1868. Vol. I. 8vo. Sydney 1868, 1869. The Society.

Reports, &c.
Berlin :—Protocolle der Verhandlungen der zweiten Conferenz der
Commission fiir die Vorberathung der Beobachtung des Venus-

durchgangs von 1874. fol. Berlin 1871. The Commission.
Birmingham :—The Ninth Annual Report of the Free Libraries’ Com-
mittee, 1870. 8vo. Birmingham. The Borough.

Bombay :—Proceedings at the laying of the Foundation Stone of the
Buildings for the University, Dec. 29, 1868. Convocation, Jan.

11,1870. 12mo. Bombay. Rey. Dr. Wilson, F.R.S.
Cincinnati. Annual Reportof the Director of the Observatory. 8vo.
Cincinnati 1870. Tae Observatory.

Liverpool :—Report of the Astronomer to the Marine Committee,
Mersey Docks and Harbour Board for the year 1870. 8vo. Liver-
pool 187]. The Liverpool Observatory.

566 | Presents. [May 25,

Reports, &c. (continued).
London :—Army Medical Department Report for the year 1869. Vol. XI.

Svo. London 1871. The Department.
Report of the Committee on the treatment and utilization of Sewage.
8vo. London 1871. The Committee.

Statistical Tables of the Patients under Treatment in the Wards of
St. Bartholomew’s Hospital during 1869. 8yvo. London 1870.

The Registrars.

Melbourne :—Statistics of the Colony of Victoria for the year 1869.

Part 1-7. fol. Melbourne 1870. Agricultural Statistics for the year

ending 31st March, 1870. fol. Melbourne 1870.

The Registrar General of Victoria.

Salford :—Report of the Museum, Library, and Park Committee 1870.

8vo. Salford. The Borough.

San Fernando :—Anales del Observatorio de Marina. Seccion 1%. Ob-

servaciones Astrondmicas. Eclipse de Sol de 22 de Diciembre de

1870. 4to. San Fernando 1871. The Observatory.
Turin :—Bollettino Meteorologico ed Astronomico del Regio Observa-
torio. Anno 5. 4to. Torino 1871. The Observatory.

Blom (H. 0.) Solution du probléme de diviser l’angle en trois parties
égales par des lignes droites et circulaires. 8yvo. Christiania 1871.
The Author.
Bolas (F.) and C. E. Groves. On Tetrabromide of Carbon. 8vo. London
1870. The Author.
Du Moncel (C* Th.) Recherches sur les meilleures Conditions de Con-
struction des Electro-Aimants. 8vo. Paris 1871. The Author.
Gaskin (Rey. T.), F.R.S. Theory and Practice of Solitaire. 12mo. Chel-
tenham. The Author.
Gulliver (G.), F.R.S. On the size of the Red Corpuscles of the Blood of
Moschus, Tragulus, Orycteropus, Ailurus, and some other Mammalia, ©
8vo. London 1870. The Author.
Haidinger (W. von), For. Mem. R.S. Erinnerung’an den Schwimm-
Unterricht. 8vo. Wien 1870. Das Hisen bei den homerischen Kampf-
spielen. 8vo. Wien 1870. Der Ainsa-Tucson-Meteoreisenring in
Washington und die Rotation der Meteoriten in ihrem Zuge. 8vo.
Wien 1870. Der 8 November 1845. Jubel-Erinnerungstage. Rick-
blick auf die Jahre 1845 bis 1870. 8vo. Wten1870. The Author.
Markham (Clements R.) Memoir on the Indian Surveys. roy. 8yo.

London 1871. The Author.
Mueller (F. yon), For. Mem. R.S. On the Application of Phytology to the
industrial purposes of Life. 8vo. Melbourne 1870. The Author.

Smee (A. H.) Gresham Life Assurance Society. The Causes of Death
tabulated. 4to. London 1871. ' The Author,

1871. | Presents. 567

Catalogue of Books added to the Library of Congress from Dec. 1, 1868, to

Dec. 1, 1869. roy. 8vo. Washington 1870.
- The Smithsonian Institution.

Catalogue of Maps of the British Possessions in India and other parts of

Asia. roy. 8vo. London 1870. The India Office.
Statement of a recently claimed discovery in Natural Science incentive to
Mining enterprise. S8vo. Melbourne 1870. The Author.

June 15, 1871.

"Transactions.
Berlin :—Konigl. Preuss. Akademie der Wissenschaften. Monatsbericht,

January to April. 8vo. Berlin 1871. Verzeichniss der Abhand-

lungen von 1710-1850. 8vo. Berlin 1871. The Academy.
. Birmingham :—Institution of Mechanical Engineers. Proceedings, 26
January, 1871. 8yo. Birmingham. The Institution.

Brussels :—Académie Royale de Belgique. Bulletin. 2° série. 39 année,
No. 6-12; 40 année, No. 1-4. 8vo. Bruwelles 1870-71.

The Academy.

Académie Royale de Médecine. Bulletin. 3° série. Tome LY. No. 5,

8-11; Tome V. No. 1-3. 8vo. Bruxelles 1870-71. Mémoires

Couronnés. Collection in 8vo. Tome I. Fasc. 2. Bruselles 1870.

The Academy

Dorpater Naturforscher Gesellschaft. Archiv fiir die Naturkunde Liv-,

Ehst- und Kurlands. Erste Serie, Band V. Lief. 1; Band VI.
Lief. 1; zweite Serie, Band VII. Lief. 2. 8vo. Dorpat 1870.

The Society:

Emden :—Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Kleine Schriften XIV. (Das

Gesetz der Winde). 4to. Emden 1869. The Society.
Florence :—R. Comitato Geologico d'Italia. Bollettmo. No. 7e 8. 8vyo.
Firenze 1870. The Committee.
Heidelberg :—Naturhistorisch-medizinischer Verein. Verhandlungen.
Band V. 4. 8vo. Heidelberg 1870. - ‘The Society.

Hobart Town :—Royal Society of Tasmania. Monthly Notices of Papers

and Proceedings for 1868 and 1869. 8vo. Hobart Town 1868-69.

The Society!

Kazan :—Imperial University. Uchenuiya Zapiski (Scientific Notes).

1864, Part 1,2; 1865, Part6; 1866, Part 1-6; 1867, Part 1-6 ;
1868, Part 1,2; 1869, Part 1-4. 8vo. Kazan 1864-69.

The University.

Leipzig :—Astronomische Gesellschaft. Vierteljahrsschrift. Jahrgang 5,

Heft 3; Jahrg. 6. Heft1. 8vo. Leipzig 1870-71. The Society,

London :—British Horological Institute. Horological Journal. No. 143-—

154. 8vo. London 1870-71, The Institute.

568 Presents. [June 15,

‘Transactions (contenued),
Christian Evidence Society. Lectures by the Bishop of Ely, C. Row,
Stanley Leathes, F. C. Cook, and Dr. Rigg. 12mo. London 1871.
The Earl of Harrowby, F.RS.
East-India Association. Journal. Vol. V. No. 1. 8vo. London 1871.
The Association.
Linnean Society. Journal. Zoology. Vol. XI. No. 50,51. Botany.
Vol. XI. No. 56. Proceedings, Session 1870-71. pp. i-xxviii.
Syo. London 1871. The Society.
London Institution. Journal. No. 1-6. 8vo. London 1871.
The Institution. —
London Mathematical Society. Proceedings. No. 32, 33,34. 8vo.

London 1870-71. The Society.
Meteorological Society. Proceedings. Vol. VY. No. 50-54. 8vo. Lon-
don 1870-71. The Society.
Odontological Society. Transactions. New Series. Vol. III. No. 5.
8vo. London 1871. The Society.
Photographic Society. Photographic Journal. No, 217-225. 8vo.
London 1870-71. The Society.

Quekett Microscopical Club. Journal. No. 14, 8vo. London 1871.
The Club.

Royal Astronomical Society. Monthly Notices. Vol. XXX. No. 8;
Vol. XXXT. No. 1, 2, 4, 5, 6. 8vo. London 1870-71.
The Society.
Royal Geographical Society. Proceedings. Vol. XV. No.1. 8vyo.
London 1871. The Society.
Royal Institute of British Architects. Sessional Papers. 1869-70,
No. 10-18; 1870-71, No. 1-9. 4to. London 1870-71.
The Institute.
Royal Institution. Proceedings. Vol. VI. Part 3. 8vo. London 1871.
The Institution.
Zoological Society. Transactions. Vol. VII. Part 3-5. 4to. London
1870-71. Proceedings of the Scientific Meetings for 1870. 8vo.
London. The Society.
Montreal:—Natural-History Society. The Canadian Naturalist and
Quarterly Journal of Science. Vol. V. No. 1-3. 8vo. Montreal

1870-71. The Scciety.
Moscow :—Société Impériale des Naturalistes. Bulletin. Année 1870,
No. 2. 8vo. Moscow 1870. The Society.
Paris :—Ecole des Mines. Annales des Mines. 6° Série. Tome XVII.
Liv. 1-3 de 1870. 8vo. Paris 1870. The School.

Penzance :—Royal Geological Society of Cornwall. Transactions. Vol.
VIII. 2 Parts (Henwood on Metalliferous Deposits and Subterra-
nean Temperature). 8vo. Penzance 1871. The Society.

Pesth:—Hungarian Academy. Evkényy. Vol. XI. Part 10,12; Vol.

1871.] Presents, 969

Transactions (continued).
XII. Part 1,2, 4. 4to. Pesten 1869-70. Magyarorszdgi Régés-
zeti Emlékek. Vol. I. Part 1, 2. 4to. Pesten 1869. Archeologiai
Kozlemények. Vol. VIII. Part I. 4to. Pest 1870. Magyar Nyelv
Szétdéra. Vol. V. Part 2-4. roy. 8vo. Pest 1868-70. Budapesti
Szemle. Part 40-50. roy. 8vo. Pest 1868-69. Magyar Forténelmi
Tar. Vol. XIV. 8vo. Pesten 1870. Monumenta Hungariz Histo-
rica. Okmdnytdrak. Vol. XII. 8vo. Pest 1869. T6zdk-Magyarkori
Torténelmi Emlékek. Vol. ITI. IV. V. 8vo. Pest 1868-70.
Magyarorszag Helyrajzi Torténete. Vol. I. Part 1,2. 8vo. Pest
1870. Mathematikai és Természettudomanyi Kozlemények. Vol.
VY. Svo. Pest 1867. Statistikai Kozemények. Vol. V. Part 2;
Vol. VI. Part 1, 2. 8vo. Pesten 1869. Nyelvtudomanyi Kozle-
mények. Vol. VII. Part 1-3; Vol. VIII. Part 1-3. 8vo, Pesten
1868-70. Ertekezések (Nyelytudomdnyi. No. 3-10, 1870, No. 1.
Svo. Pest 1868-70. Természettudominyi. No. 14-19, 1870,
No. 1-2. 8vo. Pest 1869-70. Torténettudomanyi. No. 8-12. 8vo,
Pest 1869-70. Torvénytudomdnyi. No. 7-12. 8vo. Pest 1869-70.
Philosophiai. No. 9-11. 8vo. Pest 1869. Mathematikai. No. 4, 5.
Svo. Pest 1869). Ertesito. 1868, No. 19, 20; 1869, No. 1-20;
1870, No. 1-12. 8vo. Pest. Alapszabdlyai, 1869. 8vo. Pest. Al-

manach, 1869, 1870. 8vo. Pesten. The Academy.
Philadelphia :—Franklin Institute. Journal. Vol. XCI. No. 1-4. 8vo.
Philadelphia 1871. The Institute.
Rome :—Accademia Pontificia de’ Nuovi Lincei. Atti. Anno 24. Sess. 2,
Ato. Roma 1871. The Society.

Rotterdam :—Bataafsch Genootschap der Proefondervindelijke Wijshbe-
geerte. Nieuwe Verhandelingen. Tweede Recks. Deel 2, Stuk 1.
Ato. Rotterdam 1870. The Society.

St. Petersburg :—Compass Observatory at Cronstadt. Morskoi Sbornik
(Marine Collections). 1870, No. 6-12; 1871, No. 1,2. 8vo. St.

Petersburg. The Observatory.
Sydney :—Royal Society of New South Wales, Transactions for the
year 1869. 8vo. Sydney 1870. The Society.
Toronto :—Canadian Institute. Canadian Journal. Vol. XII. No. 6.
8vo. Toronto 1870. The Institute.
Vienna :— Anthropologische Gesellschaft. Mittheilungen. Band I. No.
4-6. 8vo. Wien 1870-71. The Society.
Kaiserliche Akademie der Wissenschaften. Anzeiger. Jahrg. 1870,
No. 13-29; 1871, No. 1-13. 8vo. Wien. The Academy.

Osterreichische Gesellschaft fiir Meteorologie. Zeitschrift. Band Y.
No. 15,16. 8vo. Wien 1870. The Society.

570 Presents. [June 15,
Reports, &c.

Albany :—Drawings of Maps, Bridges, Profiles, &c., accompanying the
Report of the Board of Railroad Commissioners for 1856. S8yo. -
Albany 1857. The Commissioners.

Boston, U. 8. :—Bulletin of the Public Library. No. 16. 8vo. Boston
1871. The Library.

Brussels :—Observatoire Royal. Annales Météorologiques. 1870, Sheet
4, 6-12; 1871, Sheet 1. 4to. Bruvelles. The Observatory.

- Dublin :—Weekly Return of Births and Deaths. Vol. VII. No. 23-44,
46-52; Vol. VIII. No. 1-14, 16-22. Quarterly Return, No. 23,
25-28. 8vo. Dublin 1869-71.

The Registrar General for Ireland.

London :—Meteorological Office. Quarterly Weather Report. Part 2.

1869. 4to. London. The Office.

Rome :—Osservatorio del Collegio Romano. Bullettino Meteorologico.

Vol. IX. No. 12; Vol. X. No. 1-4, 6-11. 4to. Roma 1870-71.

The Observatory.

Roorkee :—Great Trigonometrical Survey of India. General Report of

the Operations during 1869-70, by Col. J. T. Walker. fol. Roorkee

1870. The Survey.

Ziirich :—Schweizerische Meteorologische Beobachtungen von Dr. Ru-
dolf Wolf. June—Dec. 1869 ; Jan._Feb. 1870. 4to. Zurich.

The Schweizerische naturforschende Gesellschaft.

Journals.

American Journal of Science and Arts. Third Series. Vol. I. No. 1-4.
Svo. New Haven 1871. The Editor.
Athenxum. June to December 1870; January to May 1871. Ato.
London. The Editor.

Australian Medical Journal. No. 113-117. 8vo. Melbourne 1870-71.
The Editor.
Builder. June to December 1870; January to June 1871. fol. London.
: The Editor.
Chemical News. Junc to December 1870; Jan. to June 1871. 4to.
London. The Editor.
Educational Times. July to December 1870; Jan. to June 1871. Ato.
London. The Editor.
Nature. June to December 1870 ; Jan. to June 1871. roy. 8vo. London.
The Editor.
New York Medical Journal, edited by HE. 8. Dunster. Vol. XIII. No. 1-4.
Svo. New York 1871. The Editor.
Notes and Queries. June to December 1870; Jan. to June 1871. 4to.
London. The Editor.

Philosophical Magazine. July to December 1870; Jan. to June 1871.
| W. Francis, Esq.

1871.] Presents. : 571

Journals (continued).
Quarterly Journal of Science, No. 27-30. 8vo. London 1870- 71.

: The Editor. -
Scientific Review. July to Dec. 1870; Jan. to June 1871. fol. London.

| The Editor.
Spiritualist. No. 11-15, 17-22. fol. London 1870-71. The Editor.

Symons’s Monthly Meteorological Magazine. No. 61, 62, 63, 65. 8vo.

London 1871. The Editor.
‘Zeitschrift fiir Chemie. June to Dec. 1870; Jan. to May 1871. 8vo.
Lewzg. The Editors.

Abbadie (A. d’) Sur la division décimale de Angle et du temps. 4to.

. Paris 1870. The Author.
Bastian (Dr.), F.R.S.. The Modes of Origin of Lowest Organisms. 12mo.
London 1871. - The Author.
Benson (L. 8.) A Dissertation on the Principles and Science of Geo-
metry. 8vo. New York 1871. The Author.
Brandt (J. F.) Ergiinzungen und Berichtigungen zur Naturgeschichte
der Familie der Alciden. Ueber das Haarkleid des ausgestorbenen
nordischen (bischelhaarigen) Nashorns (fhinoceros tichorhinus).
Neue Untersuchungen iiber die in den Altaischen Hohlen aufgefun-
denen Saugethierreste. 8vo. St. Pétersbourg 1869-70. The Author,
Clausius (R.) Ueber die Anwendung einer von mir Aufgestellten mecha-
nischen Gleichung auf die Bewegung eines materiellen Punctes um’

ein festes Anziehungscentrum und zweler materieller Puncte um
einander. 12mo. Gottingen 1871. The Author.
Dumas-Vence (—) Notice sur les Ports de la Manche et de la Mer du
Nord. Partie 1. 8vo. With Atlas. 4to. Paris 1869. The Author.
Elvert (C. d’) Zur Geschichte der Pflege der Naturwissenschaften in
Miahren und Schlesien. 8vo. Brinn 1868. The Author.
Frauenfeld (G.v.) Beitrage zur Fauna der Nicobaren 3. Ueber die Fa-
' milie der Psyllen. Ueber den Artnamen von Aphanapteryx. Ueber
einige Pflanzen-Verwiister des Jahres 1869. Zoologische Miscellen.

16. 8vo. Wren 1869. | The Author.
Haast (Dr. J.), F.R.S. Moas and Moa Hunters. 8vo. Christchurch 1871.
The Author.

Lidstone (Thomas) A few Notes and Queries about Newcomin. Ato.
London 1871. B. Woodcroft, F.R.S.

Mayer (A. M.) On fixing and exhibiting Magnetic Spectra. On Mea-
suring Electrical Conductivities. Researches in Electro-Magnetism.
On the Magnetic Declination in connexion with the Aurora of Oct.
14, 1870. On the Electrotonic State. Translation of Zollner on the
Temperature of the Sun. 8vo. New Haven and Philadelphia 1870-71.

The Author.

572 7 Presents.
Morgagni (J. B.) De Sedibus et Causis Morborum. 2 vols. in 1. fol.

Venetits 1761. J. J. Bright, Esq.
Prestel (M. A. F.) Der Boden der Ostfriesischen Halbinsel. 8vo. Emden
1870. The Author.
Rivett-Carnac (H.) Cotton Exports from the Central Provinces and the
Berars. fol. Bombay 1871. The Author.
Sanderson (Dr. J. B.), F.R.S. Onthe Process of Inflammation. 8vo. Lon-
don 1871. The Author.
Settimanni (C.) Nouvelle Théorie des principaux éléments de la Lune et
du Soleil. 4to. Mlorence 1871. The Author.
Spratt (Capt. T. A. B.), F.R.S. Travels and Researches in Crete. 2 vols.
8vo. London 1865. The Author.

Symons’s British Rainfall, 1870. 8vo. London 1871. G.J. Symons, Esq.
Zantedeschi (F.) ‘Intorno all’ Elettro-chimica applicata all’ Industria e
alle belle Arti. 8vo. Padova 1870. Delle burrasche dell’ Atmosfera
solare e della possibile loro connessione colle burrasche dell’ Atmo-
sfera terrestre. 8vo. Venezia 1870. The Author.

~ Portraits, Drawings, Original Letters, Anecdotes, and other Memorials of
Joseph Priestley, LL.D., F.R.S., collected and arranged by the late
James Yates, F.R.S., bound in blue morocco, with medals and Wedg-
wood medallion portrait let into the cover. Mrs. Yates.
Canton Papers belonging to the Royal Society, arranged with Prolego-
mena, consisting of Notes, Portraits, and other illustrative matter,
by James Yates, F.R.S., in two volumes.

INDEX to VOL. XIX.

AcxtonE, detection of, in methylated
spirit, 440.

Actinometrical observations made at Mus-

_ goorie, 8; at Dehra and Mussoorie in
1869, 225.

Airy (G. B.), remarks on the determination
of a ship’s place at sea, 448.

Aldehydes, deportment of certain, in pre-
sence of mercuric oxide and alkaline
metallic hydrate, 441.

Allbutt (T.C.) on the effect of exercise
upon the bodily temperature, 289.

Altitude, on the determination of a ship’s
place from observations of, 259.

Analysis of the principal disturbances
shown by the horizontal and vertical

force magnetometers from 1859 to 1864,

> D4.

Angstrom (A. J.), elected foreign member,
97 ; his researches, 120.

Animal electricity, researches in, 22.

Anniversary Meeting, Nov. 30, 1870, 113.

Annual meeting for election of Fellows,
June 8, 1871, 494.

Ansted (D. T.) on the temperature of the
interior of the earth, as indicated by
observations made during the construc-
tion of the Great Tunnel through the
Alps, 481.

Approach caused by vibration, on, 35, 271.

Arches, on the formation of some of the
subaxial, in man, 380.

Aromatic cyanates, on the, 108.

Atlantic Ocean, continuous depth of 2000
fathoms in the, between the arctic and
antarctic circles, 544.

—,, observations on the currents of the,
552.

Atmospheric pressure, on a new instru-
ment for recording minute variations
of, 491.

Auditors, election of, 94.

Aurora, observation of the spectrum of,
io:

Australia, on the fossil mammals of:
Part IY. Dentition and mandible of

Thylacoleo carnifer,95; Part V. Genus
Nototherium, 494.

Baffin’s Bay, currents in, 552.

Bakerian Lecture, on the increase of elec-
trical resistance in conductors with rise
of temperature, and its application to
the measure of ordinary and furnace
temperature; also on a simple method
of measuring electrical resistances, 443.

Baltic Sea, observations on the currents,
peer density, and salinity of,

36.

Battery, a liquid thermometric, 341.

Beams, on the theory of continuous, 56 ;
remarks on, 68.

Belavenetz (I.), magnetic observations
made during a voyage to the North of
Europe and the coasts of the Arctic
Sea in the summer of 1870, 361.

Bending moments of continuous beams,
investigation of, 61.

Berthelot (M.) on the change of pressure
and volume produced by chemical com-
bination, 445.

Besant (W. H.) admitted, 494.

Black Sea, observations on the currents,
temperature, density, and salinity of,
536.

Blood, experimental inquiry into the con-
stitution of, 465.

-corpuscles, on the physical principles
concerned in the passage of, through
the walls of the vessels, 556.

Bordeaux wine, action of, on the human
body, 73.

British Museum, suggestions to lend du-
plicate natural-history specimens, 123.

Broughton (J.), chemical and physiologi-
cal experiments on living Cinchonz, 20.

Calamites of the coal-measures, on the
organization of, 268.

Callender (G. W.) admitted, 494.

, on the formation of some of the sub-

axial arches in man, 380,

574:

Candidates for election, list of, March 2,
1871, 349.

selected, list of, May 4, 1871, 450.

Carpenter (W. B.) and Jeffreys (J. Gwyn),
report on deep-sea reseaches carried on
during the months of July, August and
September 1870, in H.M. surveying-
ship ‘ Porcupine,’ 146.

Carruthers (W.) admitted, 494.

ee (J.) on cyclides and sphero- quartics,

eres of scientifie papers, notice of
publication of vol. iv., 114.

Cats, physiological action of codeia deri-

vatives on, 510.

Cayley (A.) on the problem of the in- and
circumscribed triangle, 292.

Ceratodus, a genus of gue ane de-

scription of, 377. =

Cetyl-alcohol, formation GR by a feel:
reaction, 22,

Chemical dynamics, on a law in, 498.

Chemical intensity of total daylight, on
the measurement of, at Catania during
the total eclipse of Dec. 22, 1870,
511.

Chromo-wulfenites, chemical properties
of the, 455.

Cinchone, chemical and physiological

experiments on living, 20.

Claret, action of, on the human body, ex-
periments on, 73.

Clark (F. Le Gros), some remarks on the
mechanism of respiration, 486.

Climate, physiological changes induced in
the human economy by change of,
295.

Coal-fields, extension of, beneath the newer
formations, 222.

Coal-measures, present dimensions of, due
to succession of physical changes, 222.

Codeia, action of chloride of zinc on, 71,

, action of hydrobromic acid on, 371 ;
~ Part TI., 504.

——, on the physiological action of, 510.
Colloid bodies, research on a new group
’ of, containing mercury, 431.

Combined streams, on the mathematical
theory of, 90.

Comet L,, 187 1, on the spectrum of, 490.

Copley medal awarded to J. P. Joule,
123.

Council, list of, 97, 128.

Crace-Calvert (F.) on protoplasmic life,
468.

, action of heat on protoplasmic life,
472.

Crust of the earth, on the constitution of
the solid, 223.

Cyanates, on the aromatic, 108.

Cyclides, on, 495.

INDEX.

Daniell’s battery, on a constant form of,
253.

Dardanelles, observations on the canreits,
temperature, and density of the, 532.
Davidson (T.), Royal medal awarded to,

126.

Daylight, on the measurement of the che-

at intensity of, during an eclipse,
1

Dechenite, chemical properties of, 456.

Deep-sea researches (1870), report on, 146.

Dehra, actinometrical observations made
at, 995,

Density of sea-water, influence of rivers

=< Oh).

Des Cloizeaux (A. O.), Rumford medal
pais: to, 126; notice of his researches,
127

Descloizite, chemical properties of; 456.

Diaceto-mercuric hydrate, chemical teiptire
of the, 437.

Dielectrics, measurements of specific in<
ductive capacity of, 285. ~

Diet, effect of, on the elimination of ni-
trogen, 349.

Dip, results of seven years’ observations
of the, 368.

Divers (E.) on the existence and forma-
tion of salts of nitrous oxide, 425. :

Donation Fund, account of sums granted
from, 1870, 145.

Dunean (P. M.) on the structure and
affinities of Guynia annulata, Dune.,
with remarks upon the persistence of
Paleozoic types of Madreporaria, 450,

Dynamics, chemical, on a law in, 498.

Earth, on the temperature of the interior
of the, 481.

Eclipse, Dec. 1870, observations of, at
Oxford, 290.

——, total, on the measurement of the che-
mical intensity of daylight during, 511.

of the sun, Dec. 1870, notice of Go-
vernment aid, 123.

Election of Fellows, 494.

Electrical resistance, on the increase of,
in conductors with rise of temperature,
443; ona sunple method of measuring,
443.

Electricity, a new method of obtaining,
from mechanical force, 243. 2

, experiments on the discharge of,
through rarefied media and the atmo-
sphere, 236.

Electrostatic ‘iditetion and the decom-
position of water, on certain relations
between, 243.

Electrotonus, on, 26.

Kosite, chemical characters of, 453.

Equations, linear differential, on (No. III.),
14.

Etheridge (R.) admitted, 494.

“INDEX.

‘Kuler’s constant, on the calculation of,
514.

Exercise, effect of, on the bodily tempera-
ture, 289.

, effect of, on the elimination of ni-

trogen, 349,

Fellows deceased, list of, 113; elected,
114; number of, 128.

Financial statement, 129.

Flow of a liquid, on the uniform, 286.

‘Fluoride of silver, on, 235.

Forbes (J. D.), obituary notice of, i.

Foster (M.) on the physiological action of
codeia derivatives, 510.

Frog, on the structure and development
of the skull of the common, 246.

Galton (F.), experiments in pangenesis,
by breeding from rabbits of a pure
variety, into whose circulation blood
taken from other. varieties had previ-
ously been largely transfused, 393.

Garrod (A. H.) on the mutual relations
of the apex cardiograph and the radial

--sphygmograph trace, 318.

German Ocean, observations on the cur-
rents, temperature, density, and salinity
of the, 540.

Germinal vesicle, discovery of, x.

Gibraltar, on the undercurrent in the
strait of, 546.

current, on the, 203.

Gibson (J. C.) and Barclay (T.), measure-
ments of specific inductive capacity of
dielectrics, in the physical laboratory of
the University of Glasgow, 285.

Glacier-ice, on the structure and motion

of, vi.

Gladstone (J. H.) and Tribe (A.) on a
law in chemical dynamics, 498.

Glaisher (J. W. L.) on the calculation of
Euler’s constant, 514.

Gore (G.) on fluoride of silver: Part IT.,
235.

on the thermo-electric action of
metals and liquids, 324.

Government Grant, account of appropria-
tion of, 1855-70, 135.

Graves (J. T.), obituary notice of, xxvii.

Giinther (A.), description of Ceratodus, a -

genus of ganoid fishes, recently disco-
vered in rivers of Queensland, Australia,
377.

Guthrie (F.) admitted, 494.

on approach caused by vibration, 35.

Guynia annulata, on the structure and
affinities of, 450.

Heat, action of, on protoplasmic life, 472.
, effect of, on electric and thermal
conductivity, vii.

57D
Heat, on the radiation of, from the moon,
9

Hennessey (J. H.), actinometrical obser-
vations made at Dehra and Mussoorie
in India, October and November 1869,
in a letter to the President, 225.

— on the atmospheric lines of the solar
spectrum, in a letter to the Presi-
dent, 1.

Heppel (J. M.) on the theory of conti-
nuous beams, 56.

Heppel’s theory of continuous beams, re-
marks on, 68

Hind (J. R.), note on the circumstances
of the transits of Venus over the sun’s
disk in the years 2004 and 2012, 428.

Hofmann (A. W.) on the aromatic cya-
nates, 108.

Horizontal force, results of seven years’
observations of, 368.

Huggins (W.), note on the spectrum of
Uranus and the spectrum of Comet L.,,
1871, 488.

on a registering spectroscope, 317.

Hull (E.) on the extension of the coal-
fields beneath the newer formations of
England ; and the succession of phy-
sical changes whereby the coal-measures
have been reduced to their present
dimensions, 222.

Hydrobromic acid, action of, on codeia,
3871; Part II., 504.

Hydrocarbons, researches on: No. VL,
20; No. VIL., 487.

Ice-fields, variations of, on coast of Green-
land, 118.

Internal resistance of a multiple battery,
measurement of, by adjusting the gal-
vanometer to zero, 252.

Tyory’s discussion of Jacobi’s theorem, on,

Jacobi’s theorem respecting the relative
equilibrium of a revolving ellipsoid of
fluid, on, 42.

Joule (J. P.), Copley medal awarded to,
123.

Ketones, research on certain members of
the series of fatty, 431.

Kew Observatory, records of the magnetic
observations at the: No. LY., 524,

Lead, on the molybdates and vanadates of,
451

Leadhills, on a new mineral from, 451.

Lepidodendra, 500.

Le Sueur (A.), observations with the great
Melbourne telescope, in a letter to Prof,
Stokes, 18.

576

Life, on protoplasmic, 468 ; action of heat
on, 472

Light, suppression of chemical action of,
during an eclipse, 518.

Linear differential equations, on: No. III.,
14; No. IV., 281; No. V., 526.

Liquid, on the uniform flow of a, 286.

ee on the thermo-electric action of,

Loewy (B.), résumé of two papers on sun-
spots :—“ On the form of the sun-spot
curve,” by Prof. Wolf; and “On the
connexion of sun-spots with planetary
configuration,” by M. Fritz, 392.

Lowe (Right Hon. R.) elected, 481 ; ‘ad-
mitted, 494.

Luminous cloud in a Geissler’s tube, on
the nature of, 239. iy

Madreporaria, remarks on the persistence
of palzozoic types of, 450.

Magnetic observations made during a
voyage to the coasts of the Arctic Sea,
1870, 361.

Magnetometers, disturbances shown by
the horizontal and vertical force, at
Kew, 524,

Mance (H.), method of measuring the re-
sistance of a conductor or of a battery,
or of a telegraph-line influenced by
unknown earth-currents, from a single
deflection of a galyanometer of unknown
resistance, 248.

, measurement of the internal resist-
ance of a multiple battery by adjusting
the galvanometer to zero, 252.

Marcet (W.), an experimental inquiry into
the constitution of blood, and the nutri-
tion of muscular tissue, 465.

Maskelyne (N. 8.) on the mineral consti-
tuents of meteorites, 266.

Matthiessen (A.) and Burnside (W.), re-
searches into the chemical constitution
of the opium bases: Part IV. On the
action of chloride of zinc on codeia, 71,
94.

Mechanism of respiration, remarks on,
486.

Mediterranean, temperature of the, 531.

water, temperature and composition
of, 193.

Metals, on the thermo-electric action of,
324.

Meteorites, on the mineral constituents of,
266.

Miller (W. A.), notice of decease of, 114 ;
obituary notice of, xix.

Miller (W. H.), Royal medal awarded to,
124; notice of his researches, 125,

Molybdates of lead, on the, 451.

Moncrieff (A.) admitted, 494.

Moon, on the radiation of heat from the, 9.

INDEX.

Moseley (H.) on the uniform flow of a
liquid, 286,

Muscle, behaviour of, under action of in-
verse and direct currents, 24.

Muscular tissue, experimental inquiry into
the nutrition of, 465.

Mussoorie, actinometrical observations
made at, 225; spectrum observations
made at, 2.

Newton (A.) admitted, 246.

Nitrogen, further experiments on the effect
of diet and exercise on the elimination
of, 349.

Nitrous oxide, on the existence and for-
mation of salts of, 425.

Noble (A.) admitted, 94.

Norris (R.) on the physical principles
concerned in the passage of blood-cor-
puscles through the walls of the vessels,
556.

North-German polar expedition, notice
of, 116.

Nototherium, 494.

Obituary notices of deceased Fellows :—
James David Forbes, 1.

Johann Evangelista Purkinje, ix,
Sir James Clarke, xiii. :
William Allen Miller, xix.

John Thomas Graves, xxvil.

Ocean, on the undercurrent theory of, as
propounded by recent explorers, 528.

Oceanic circulation, general, 213.

Olefines, on the production of the, from
paraffin, 370.

Opium alkaloids, contributions to the
history of: Part I., 371; Part IT., 504.

bases, researches into the constitution
of the: Part IV., 71, 94.

Orcin, contributions to the history of:
No. I., 410.

Orcins, nitro-substitution compounds of
the, 410.

Orion, observations on the nebula in, 19.

Osborn (8.) admitted, 94.

Owen (R.) on the fossil mammals of
Australia: Part IY. Dentition and
mandible of Thylacoleo carnifex, with
remarks on the argument for its herbi-
vority, 95; Part V. Genus Nototherium,
494.

Pangenesis, experiments in, 393.

Paraffin, preliminary notice on the pro-
duction of the olefines from, 370.

Parker (W. K.) on the structure and de-
velopment of the skull of the common
frog (ana temporaria), 246.

Parkes (E. A.), further experiments on the
effect of diet and exercise on the elimi-
nation of nitrogen, 349,

INDEX,

Parkes (H. A.) and Wollowicz (Count C.),
experiments on the action of red Bor-
deaux wine (claret) on the human body,
73, 99.

Peirce (B.) admitted, 235.

Pendulum observations in connexion
with the Great Trigonometrical Survey
of India, 97, 115.

Perry (8. J.), results of seven years’ obser-
vations of the dip and horizontal force
at Stonyhurst College Observatory, from
April 1863 to March 1870, 368.

Phillips (J.), observations of the eclipse at
Oxford, December 22, 1870, 290.

Plants, fossil, of the coal-measures (Part
II.), on the organization of, 500.

Plateau (J. A. F.), elected foreign mem-
ber, 97; his researches, 119.

Polarization of light, experiments on the
successive, 381.

of metallic surfaces in aqueous solu-
tions, 243.

Polarizing-apparatus, description of anew,
381.

‘Porcupine’ surveying-ship, notice of,
123 ; deep-sea researches in, 146 ; equip-
ment of, 150; first cruise, 152; second
cruise, 162; general results, 185.

Pratt (Ven. H.) on the constitution of the
solid crust of the earth, 223.

Presents, list of, 29, 131, 273, 345, 418,
A477, 564.

Pressure, on the change of, produced by
chemical combination, 445.

Protoplasmice life, on, 468; action of heat
on, 472.

Pulse, action of food and wine on the, 76.

Purkinje (J. H.), obituary notice of, ix.

Quain (R.) admitted, 494.

Rabbits, experiments of transfusion with,
393

, physiological action of codeia deri-
vatives on, 510.

Radcliffe (C. B.), researches in animal
electricity, 22.

Rankine (W. J. M.), remarks on Mr.
Heppel’s theory of continuous beams,
68.

—-, on the mathematical theory of com-
bined streams, 90, 95.

Rattray (A.) on some of the more impor-
tant physiological changes induced in
the human economy by change of cli-
mate, as from temperate to tropical, and
the reverse, 295.

Reed (H. J.) on the unequal distribution
of weight and support in ships, and its
effects in still water, in waves, and in
exceptional positions on shore, 292.

VOL, XIX.

577

Resistance of a conductor, battery, or
telegraph-line, on a method of measu-
ring the, from a single deflection of a
galvanometer, 248.

Resonance, on the theory of, 106.

Respiration, some remarks on the mecha-
nism of, 486.

Reynolds (J. H.), research on a new group
of colloid bodies containing mercury,
and certain members of the series of
fatty ketones, 431.

Roscoe (H. HE.) and Thorpe (T. E.) on the
measurement of the chemical intensity
of total daylight made at Catania du-
ring the total eclipse of Dec. 22, 1870,
511.

Rosse (Harl of) on the radiation of heat
from the moon: No. IT., 9.

Royal Medal awarded to W. H. Miller,
124; to T. Davidson, 126.

Rumford Medal awarded to A. des Cloi-
zeaux, 126.
Russell (W. H. L.) on linear differential
equations: No. III., 14; No. IV., 281;

No. V., 526.

Sabine (Sir E.), intimation of resigning
the Presidency, 127. /

, records of the magnetic observations
at the Kew Observatory: No. IV. Ana-
lysis of the principal disturbances shown
by the horizontal and vertical force
magnetometers of the Kew Observatory
from 1859 to 1864, 524.

Salt-meat diet, effect of, on the weight of
the human body, 302.

Salts of nitrous oxide, on the existence and
formation of, 425.

Sea, on the surface-temperature of the,
185; temperature at different depths,
188.

of Marmora, observations on the
currents, temperature, and density of
the, 534.

Sea-water, density of, 191.

Schorlemmer (C.), formation of cetyl-
alcohol by a singular reaction, 22.

, researches on the hydrocarbons of

the series C”H. No. VI., 20; No.

2n+2"
VIL., 487.

Schrauf (A.) on the molybdates and vana-
dates of lead, and on a new mineral
from Leadhills, 451.

Ships, on the unequal distribution of
weight and support in, 292.

Ship’s place, determination of, from ob-
servations of altitude, 259; remarks on,
448,

, amended rule for working out
Sumner’s method of finding a, 524.

Siemens (C. W.), Bakerian Lecture, on
the increase of electrical resistance in

578

conductors with rise of temperature, and
its application to the measure of ordi-
nary and furnace temperatures ; also on
a simple method of measuring electrical
resistances, 443.

Sigillarie, 500.

Silver, on fluoride of (Part IT.), 235.

Skull of the frog, structure and develop-
ment of the, 246,

Solar rays, effect of, on cinchona-bark,
20.

spectrum, on the atmospheric lines
of the, 1.

Spectroscope,,on a registering, 317.

Spectrum, Angstrdm’s observations of,
121.

of the aurora, 19.

— of Uranus, note on, 488; of Comet I.,
1871, 490.

Sphero-quartics, on, 495.

Sphygmograph trace, on the mutual rela-
tions of the apex cardiograph and the
radial, 318.

Spratt (T. A. B.) on the undercurrent
theory of the ocean, as propounded by
recent explorers, 528.

Stenhouse (J.), contributions to the his-
tory of orcin: No. I. Nitro-substitution
compounds of the orcins, 410.

Stone (EH. J.) on an approximately decen-
nial variation of the temperature at the
observatory at the Cape of Good Hope
between the years 1841 and 1870, viewed
in connexion with the variation of the
solar spots, 389.

Stonyhurst, results of seven years’ observa-
tions of the dip and horizontal force at,
368.

Strutt (J. W.) on the theory of resonance,
106.

Sun-spot curve, on the form of the, 392.

Sun-spots, on the connexion of, with plane-
tary configuration, 592.

, résumé of two papers on, 892.

——, variation of, viewed in connexion
with a decennial variation of tempera-
ture, 389.

Sutherland (Duke of) elected, 97; admitted,

222.

Telescope, observations with the great
Melbourne, 18.

Temperate climate, effect of, on the
weight, 305.

Temperature, bodily, on the effect of ex-
ercise on the, 289.

, decennial variation of, at the Cape

of Good Hope, viewed in connexion

with the variation of the solar spots,

389.

, on the measurement of, by electrical

resistance, 443.

INDEX.

Temperature, as indicated by observations
made in the great tunnel through the
Alps, 481.

Thermo-electric action of metals and li-
quids, on the, 324.

Thomas (E.) admitted, 494.

Thomson (Sir W.), amended rule for
working out Sumner’s method of finding
a ship’s place, 524.

, modification of Wheatstone’s bridge

to find the resistance of a galvanometer-

coil from a single deflection of its own

needle, 253.

on a constant form of Daniell’s bat-

tery, 253.

on the determination of a ship’s

place from observations of altitude, 259.

— on approach caused by vibration, a
letter to F. Guthrie, 271.

Thorpe (f. E) and Young (J.), prelimi-
nary notice on the production of the
olefines from paraffin by distillation
under pressure, 370.

Thylacoleo carnifex, dentition and mandi-
ble of, 95.

Todhunter (I.) on Jacobi’s theorem re-
specting the relative equilibrium of a
revolving ellipsoid of fluid, and on
Ivory’s discussion of the theorem, 42.

Transits of Venus in the years 2004 and
2012, 423.

Triangle, on the problem of the in- and
circumscribed, 292.

Trinitro-orcinic acid, 412.

Tropical climate, influence of, on the
kidneys and skin, 295; on the weight
and strength, 300.

Tunnel through the Alps, experiments on
temperature made in the, 481.

Uranus, on the spectrum of, 488.

Vanadates of lead, on the, 451.
Vanadinite, chemical properties of, 456.
Tarley (C. F.), polarization of metallic
surfaces in aqueous solutions, a new
method of obtaining electricity from
mechanical force, and certain relations
between electrostatic induction and the
decomposition of water, 243.

, some experiments on the discharge
of electricity through rarefied media and
the atmosphere, 236.

Venus, on the circumstances of the tran-
sits of, over the sun’s disk in the years —
2004 and 2012, 423.

Verdon (G. F.) admitted, 94.

Vibration, on approach caused by, 35, 271.

Vice-presidents appointed, 145,

Volume, on the change of, produced by
chemical combination, 445,

INDEX.

Walden (Viscount) admitted, 494.
Walker (Col. J. T.) admitted, 245.

, communication from the Secretary
of State for India relative to pendulum-
observations now in progress in India
in connexion with the Great Trigonome-
trical Survey under the super intendence
of, 97.

——, report on pendulum-observations in |

India, 98, 115.

Wheatstone (Sir C.), experiments on the
successive polarization of light, with the
description of a new polarizing-appara-
tus, 381.

Wheatstone’s bridge, modification of, to
find the resistance of a galvanometer-
coil a a single deflection of its own
needle, 253.

Whitehouse (W.) on a new instrument

END OF TRE

A Lo) kip Gear BA ea Ds 9 Sh 6

AU AV OIG (O15:

579

for recording minute variations of at-
mospheric pressure, 491.

Williamson (W. C.) on the organization
of the Calamites of the coal-measures,
268.

on the organization of the fossil
plants of the coal-measures: Part IT.
Lepidodendra and Sigillarie, 500.

Wine, effect of, on bodily temperature, 79.

Wood (J.) admitted, 494.

Wrieht (C. R. A.), contributions to the
history of the opium alkaloids: Part TI.
On the action of hydrobromie acid on
codeia, 371; Part II., 504.

Zine, chloride of, on the action of, on co-
deia, 71, 94.

Zodiacal light, observations on tke, made
et Mussoorie, 8.

TEENTH VOLUME,

AND FRANCTS,

RED LION CCURT, FLEET STRELT,

OBITUARY NOTICES OF FELLOWS DECEASED*.

James Davip Forsest was the youngest son of Sir William Forbes of
Pitsligo, who was descended from the ancient family of the Forbes of
Monymusk, on the banks of the Don, and was head of the well-known bank-
ing-house long established in the Parliament Square of Edinburgh. The
mother of James Forbes was the only child and heiress of John Belches,
afterwards Sir John Stewart, a cadet of the old house of Invermay. The
early death of Lady Forbes, while her youngest son was a child scarce two
years old, cast a sobering shade over his early years, and indeed coloured
his whole life and character. His father idolized the child, as the last
legacy of her whom he had lost. He retired from Edinburgh, and lived a
secluded life, surrounded by his young family, in his country place of
Colinton. There were spent James Forbes’s childhood and boyhood. The
teaching he got was of the most private, even desultory kind. Fear for the
boy’s health made his father nervously anxious lest he should overwork
himself. So his education was left entirely to his sisters’ governess, and to
occasional lessons from the neighbouring village schoolmaster, a worthy
man, to whom his distinguished pupil remained ever afterwards sincerely
attached. But though lessons were easy, his mind was active, and by his
twelfth year the natural bias towards physical knowledge was manifesting
itself. Already his head was busy with mechanical contrivances,—a new
velocipedometer, an anemometer, a metal quadrant made by his own
hands for astronomical purposes. At the same time he was devouring
every scientific book he could lay hands on, from the ‘Nautical Almanac’ to
Woodhouse’s ‘ Astronomy.’ But all this devotion to science was kept
strictly secret; he laboured at it in private, and said nothing, for his father
would not have smiled on such pursuits. He would have objected to them
both as too serious a tax on the young brain, and also as likely to turn him
from the dry studies of the bar, for which he was destined. His own wish
was to take orders in the English Church, to which he was strongly
attached ; but from this aim he was, not without reluctance, withdrawn by
his father’s expressed wish that he should study for the Scottish bar. This
accordingly, from his fifteenth to his twenty-first year, was his ostensible
purpose, but his heart was all the while turning secretly aside to the for-

* Note to a passage in the Biography of M. Foucault, Proceedings of the Royal
Society, vol. xvii.

It appears from a notice in the Report of the British Association for the Promotion
of Science for 1843, that Dr. Joule had made an experiment demonstrating the conver-
sion of work into heat, very similar to the experiment by M. Foucault described at the

end of page lxxxiii.
t This notice of Professor Forbes, except what more especially refers to his scientific

work, has been taken, with abridgement, but without other alteration in matter or lan-
guage, from an inaugural address delivered by his distinguished successor, Principal
Shairp, at the opening of the Academical Session of the United College, St. Andrew’s,
in 1869. ;

VOL, XIX. a

bidden paths of science. When he was only sixteen he began to keep a
record, entitled ‘‘ Ideas of Inventions ;’’ because, as he expressed it, so
many more ideas, chiefly mechanical, occurred to him than he could pos-
sibly execute; and, in order to remember these, he ‘‘ resolved to write
them down, taking most special care to distinguish between what were ori-
ginal and the parts which were borrowed.’ About the same time he began
a journal of personal observations in astronomy, which he continued, with
scarce an interruption, for seven years. He then also began to keep a
meteorological journal, in which he recorded all his observations on the
temperature and state of the atmosphere, with speculations as to their
causes. The two last, especially, were continued for years. ‘These were’
his real and earliest educators in science. By these he trained himself to
be the patient and accurate observer which he ultimately became.

Thus entirely home-trained, and, indeed, self-educated, young Forbes
entered Edinburgh University in Session 1825-26, and joined the Classes of
Latin and Chemistry. About the close of his first year at College he entered.
on another phase of his self-education, which was destined to have important
results. He commenced an anonymous correspondence on scientific matters
with the late Sir David Brewster. The lad of seventeen wrote to the then
renowned man of science, offering him for insertion in his well-known ‘ Phi-
losophical Journal’ a paper containing an attempt to account for the appa-
rently infinite number of the stars. The paper was not only inserted, but
the following words were annexed to it: “ We should be glad to hear again
from the author of this article, and, if possible, learn his address.” The first
part of this request was readily complied with. For several years hardly
a Number of the journal appeared without some paper either of original
observation, experiment, or cautious speculation from the young votary of
science. ‘The latter part of the request he was more slow to meet ; all the
communications still bore the original signature, or “‘A’’—a disguise which
the author’s modesty induced him to assume, and which Sir David tried to
pierce for some years in vain. Those who are best versed in these subjects
will, I believe, most appreciate the natural insight, careful toil, and patient
observation embodied in those papers, written at seventeen, with none to
help or consult with, indeed, in the utmost secrecy. Towards the end of
1826 the young student’s College course was interrupted (but his philoso-
phical correspondence was not) by a year spent in Italy with his father and
family. With his passion for science in no degree abated, he entered into
all that Italy contains to feed the imaginative and historic mind, almost as
fully as if he had been exclusively a scholar or man of letters—so early
appeared that fine blending of literary taste with scientific exactness which
in after years lent to his lectures and his writings so great a charm. The
‘ Philosophical Journal’ contained some fruits of his Italian experiences, in
what Sir David styles ‘‘ A’s very excellent set of observations,’ made at
Rome, on the climate of Naples, and on the phenomena of Mount Vesu-
vius. These three papers appearing in successive Numbers of the Journal,

called forth much attention from scientific men. On his return home to
Colinton, in the autumn of 1827, his diary records that he is pleased ‘‘ to see
Brewster’s journal, and read the articles of mine he inserted in October last
on the apparent number of the stars, the heats and colds of last year, and
elements of the lunar eclipse, together with all the other papers which
I have sent, inserted, or favourably noticed.” In the correspondence
with Brewster, the disguise of A was preserved to the close of 1828.
Many and curious were the attempts Sir David made to pierce behind the
mask and see the real face of his unknown contributor. In one of his
letters he says :—‘‘ We who have begun our downward course look anxiously
for some rising stars; but, excepting yourself and Mr. F., I know of no
young men who are likely to extend the boundaries of science.”” Who
was Mr. F.? Was he the same as the unknown A? When at length
the mask was withdrawn, the welcome which the elder philosopher gives
_ to his younger fellow-labourer is highly characteristic. He expresses his
joy ‘‘ that Scotland possesses one young man capable of pursuing science
with the ardour and talent of A, and that he belonged to a family for
which he had so much esteem and affection.’” He then goes on to advise him
to allow no professional duties to turn him from science; he would find in
it a solace and delight amid the bustle and vexations of life.

Though thus early launched into original inquiries, James Forbes was
still only a Student of Arts in Edinburgh University. The excitement of
young and successful authorship seems never for a moment to have turned
his head, or to have made him bate one jot the patient industry by which
only college classes can be turned to account. In the Moral Philosophy
Class, which he attended after returning from the Continent, we find him
preparing with great labour an essay of sixty large quarto pages for Pro-
fessor Wilson. The essay was on the influence and advantages of the
study of astronomy on the mind, and it was accompanied by scientifie
illustrations and notes. This and other essays of the young physicist so
far commended themselves to the Professor of Ethics, that at the close of
the Session he made him Medalist in the Class, and ever afterwards re-
ceived him to intimate friendship.

The month before James Forbes entered the Class of Natural Philosophy
an event happened which deeply impressed him. His father was removed
by death, and this was soon to be followed by the breaking of the old home
at Colinton House. This bereavement formed a turning-point in his life,
and deepened his already religious character. Solemnized, yet braced, he
entered on the Natural Philosophy Class, then taught by the celebrated Sir
John Leslie, in his later years. In the subjects of that Class lay his own
specialty, but he had never received one word of mathematical instruction
from any one, all his mathematics were entirely self-acquired. Yet, not-
withstanding this disadvantage, in the competitions with students who had
passed through a regular Mathematical Course he held the first place, and
closed the Session by easily bearing off the highest honours. While he was

a 2

a Student in the Natural Philosophy Class he had the honour of being pro-
posed by Sir David Brewster as a Member of the Royal Society of Edin-
burgh before he had reached his twentieth birthday.

Though his College course may be said to have been now completed, he
took yet another Session, attending Sir John Leslie’s Class, and the Che-
mistry Class of Dr. Hope each for the second time, and combining with
these two the study of the Law. At the close of his College life, in April
1830, he looks back on it, in his diary, ‘‘ with peculiar satisfaction, as com-
prising the happiest period of his life.” That summer (1830) he passed
his Law trials, and put on his advocate’s gown, but never wore it. To his
great joy, having obtained the full concurrence of his family and friends,
he cast law for ever behind him, and, content with a small competence,
gave himself unreservedly to science. This resolution was not taken
hurriedly. But his mind once made up never faltered. At the beginning
of next winter he says :—‘‘I now enter on the delightful and engrossing
studies, which have now, blessed be God, become my principal and legiti-
mate object, untrammelled by jarring occupations and conscientious scruples.
He then gave himself to closer study of the higher mathematics, and at the
same time began those experiments on heat which were afterwards to
result in one of his best scientific achievements. A hint of his future
destiny was at this time given him. He had jhappened to go to hear
Sir John Leslie’s opening lecture in that Professor’s last Session but one,
1830-31. At the close of the lecture Sir John, who had never before
admitted his promising Student to any special intimacy, sent for him, and,
after asking him about his own studies, told him that when he (Sir John)
proposed going to the East last summer, he had thought of getting him
(James Forbes) to officiate for him, but was afraid the public might think
him too young. He then broke off abruptly. In exactly two years from
this time young Mr. Forbes, who had gone to the Continent on a long scien-
tific tour, was recalled by the news of Sir John Leslie’s death, and that his
friends in Scotland had given in his name as a Candidate for the vacant
Chair. Then ensued a contest, not the least memorable of those many
contests of the same kind by which Edinburgh has made itself conspi-
cuous. Two things made this one especially warm, and even painful. By
one of those strange turns in men’s destiny, Mr. Forbes’s chief opponent
was his friend and patron, Sir David Brewster, now almost a veteran in
the army of science. Political feeling, too, wasadded. It was the era of
the Reform Bill, and party spirit, then running high in Scotland, as else-
where, entered as an element of the contest even more than it usually
does. Mr. Forbes, though only twenty-three, was elected by a very deci-
sive majority ; and, however it may have appeared at the time, the result,
we know, justified the wisdom of the choice. It is pleasing to be assured
that, whatever passing feeling the contest may have awakened, the old
intimacy was soon renewed, and the friendship so honourable to both
these distinguished men continued unimpaired till the close of their lives.

He thus entered on a Professorate of seven-and-twenty years, carried on
with an energy and success rarely equalled, never surpassed. He began
to teach the Natural Philosophy Class in Session 1833-34, when he was
only four-aud-twenty, yet from the very first he rivetted the attention of
one of the largest and most distinguished classes of students that Edinburgh
University ever contained. One great feature of his teaching, as I have
always understood, was that while it stimulated the powers and won the
admiration of his most scientific listeners, he yet made himself attractive
to all students who were intelligent, though less highly gifted.

In these lectures the whole range of Natural Philosophy was gone
through, and the laborions and well-sustained study required for the due
performance of his professorial work had doubtless prepared him for the
task, which he successfully accomplished, of writing the well-known “ Dis-
sertation on the Progress of Mathematical and Physical Science, principally
from 1775 to 1850,” which was published in the last edition of the ‘ Ency-
clopeedia Britannica.’ Meanwhile, however, Professor Forbes was indefa-
tigable in original investigation, for which he had so early shown an apti-
tude; and the separate titles of his contributions to Transactions of
Societies and Scientific Journals, as given in the Royal Society’s ‘ Catalogue
of Scientific Papers,’ amounted in 1863 to one hundred and eighteen.
These embrace various subjects belonging to Physics, Meteorology, Geo-
logy, and Physical Geography. The most important of his earlier experi-
mental investigations was that in which he succeeded in demonstrating the
polarization of heat. Melloni had been pursuing an inquiry in the same
direction, but had failed to obtain the result he was in quest of. Professor
Forbes was more fortunate. The steps of his investigation are thus stated
by himself in the dissertation above referred to.

He says :—‘‘ I have just referred to my own early experiments on the
subject (which were likewise inconclusive), in order to explain that it was
natural, on hearing of the application of the thermo-multiplier to measure
radiant heat, that I should wish to repeat them with the new instrument.
This I did in 1834. I first succeeded in proving the polarization of heat
by tourmaline (which Melloni had announced did not take place), next by
transmission through a bundle of very thin mica plates, inclined to the
transmitted ray, and afterwards by reflexion from the multiplied surfaces of
a pile of thin mica plates placed at the polarizing angle. I next succeeded
in showing that polarized heat is subject to the same modifications which
doubly-refracting crystallized bodies impress upon light, by suffering a beam
of heat (even when quite obscure), after being polarized by transmission,
to pass through a depolarizing plate of mica, the heat traversing a second
mica bundle before it was received on the pile. As the plate of mica used
for depolarization was made to rotate (in its own plane), the amount of heat
shown by the galvanometer was found to fluctuate just as the amount of
light received by the eye under similar circumstances would have done.
This experiment, which, with the others just mentioned, was soon re-
peated and confirmed by other observers, still remains the only one proving

the double refraction of heat unaccompanied by light; and, though some-
what indirect, it will hardly be regarded by competent judges as otherwise
than conclusive. Iceland spar and other doubly-refracting substances
absorb invisible heat too rapidly to be used for affecting directly the sepa-
ration of the rays, which requires a very considerable thickness of the
erystal. I also succeeded in repeating Fresnel’s experiment of producing
circular polarization by two internal reflections. The substance used was,
of course, rock-salt.”’

For these researches the Royal Society awarded to their author the
Rumford Medal, in 1838. Taken in conjunction with the experiments of
Melloni on the absorption, &c. of radiant heat, they afforded the conclusive
proof of the cdentity of thermal and luminous radiations,—a fact of the very
greatest consequence to the further progress of one of the most fascmating
branches of physical science.

In 1842 Professor Forbes communicated to the Royal Society a paper
**On the Transparency of the Atmosphere, and the Law of Extinction of
the Solar Rays in passing through it,’ which was adopted as the Bakerian
Lecture for that year, and for which in 1843 he received a Royal Medal.

Another prominent work of Forbes is that long series of observations on
the Nature and Motion of Glaciers, which he pursued with intense applica-
tion, and, as there is too good reason to believe, to the serious injury of his
health. He had spent several vacations on the Continent, and had wan-
dered over the mountains of Switzerland and Savoy, studying the Geology
and Physical Geography of those regions; but he specially devoted the
summers of 1842-44 and 1846 to the exploration of the glaciers of the
Alps. Into this pursuit he threw an enthusiasm and concentration of
energy which few men are capable of. In 1843 appeared his well-known
work, ‘ Travels in the Alps,’ in which he blends interesting descriptions of
scenery with scientific observations and reasonings ; and the fruits of his
earlier labours on the glaciers are there given. Shortly before this he
commenced the interesting series of sixteen “‘ Letters on Glaciers” published
in the ‘ Edinburgh New Philosophical Journal’ from 1842 to 1851, which
contain the results of his continued study; and he also set forth and
discussed his views on the constitution and motion of glaciers, iu an elabo-
rate Memoir published in the Philosophical Transactions for 1846, en-
titled ‘‘ Illustrations of the Viscous Theory of Glacier Motion.”

Not contented to limit his observations to Switzerland and Savoy, he in
1851 made an excursion to Norway to study the glacier phenomena of
that country, and gave an account of his work in ‘ The Glaciers of Norway
* visited in 1851,’ which was published in 1853.

Professor Forbes looked on the progressive motion of a glacier as com-
parable to that of a plastic mass, moulding and adapting itself to the varia-
tions in the width and depth of its channel and the inclination of its bed, and
moving faster in the middle than at the sides, as would happen with such a
yielding substance. A view substantially similar had been previously pro-
mulgated by Bordier in 1773, the contemporary of De Saussure, and more

‘YVil

recently by M. Rendu, then Canon, afterwards Bishop of Annecy; but to
Forbes belongs certainly the merit of proving its general truth by careful
and prolonged experimental measurements of the rate of progression of
glaciers at different parts. But whilst it is plain that the ice of a moving
glacier behaves in the gross like a plastic substance, there has been a ques-
tion by what intestine changes or motions of its particles its change of figure
is brought about or accompanied ; and later inquirers maintain that the ice
yields by breaking up into minute fragments, which speedily reunite by
partial melting and regelation, thus permitting of change of form in the
mass. The ribboned or veined'structure of glacier ice, which had been but
little attended to by previous writers, was carefully studied by Forbes.
Having seen that the velocity of movement increases from the sides to the
middle of the glacier, he ascribed the production of the ribboned structure

o “ differential motion”’ between adjacent laminar sections of its substance,
a process which has since been termed ‘shearing.’ Others have com-
pared the phenomenon to the lamination of slaty rocks now very generally
regarded as caused by pressure in a direction perpendicular to the planes
of lamination.

But while there may be difference of opinion as to the physical explana-
tion of the observed phenomena, there can be no question of Forbes’s
signal merit in connexion with the scientific history of glaciers ; and it is
pleasing to know that it was generously acknowledged in his lifetime by a
distinguished rival in the same field, who thus speaks of him*:—* The
more his labours are compared with those of other observers, the more
prominently does his comparative intellectual magnitude come forward.
The speaker would not content himself with saying that the book of Prof.
Forbes was the best book which had been written on the subject. The
qualities of mind, and the physical culture invested in that excellent work,
were such as to make it, in the estimation of the physical BEES 0 at
least, outweigh all other books upon the subject taken together.”

While Switrerland was the main region of Forbes’s explorations; he did
not neglect his own land. In the summer of 1845 he traversed the rugged
hills of Skye, and proved that the bare scarps of the Cuchullius had been
ground down by the same kind of glaciers as those which are now wearing
down the gorges of the Alps.

The last important scientific labour he was permitted to undertake was
on the subject of thermal conductivity. He was the first to point out—
and this at a very early period of his career—the fact that the conducting-
powers of the metals for electricity are approximately proportional to their
conducting-powers for heat. Now, heat diminishes materially the electric
conducting-power—does it also affect the thermal conductivity? Forbes
showed that (at least in the case of iron, the only metal his failing health
left him strength to examine) the conductivity for heat diminishes as the
a al increases. Another result of the same investigation, and one

* Report of a Lecture delivered by Professor Tyndall at the Royal Institution,
June 4, 1858,

Viil

of great interest and importance in modern science, is his determination
(the earliest of any real value) of the absolute conductivity of a substance,
i.e. how much heat passes per second per unit of surface through an
iron plate of given thickness, whose faces are maintained at constant given
temperatures. As a proof of the value attached by scientific men to
these ingenious experiments, it is only necessary to mention that the
British Association has given a grant for their repetition with the best
attainable instrumental means, and for their extension to other substances
than that to which Forbes was obliged to confine himself.

But on his more active work an arrest was soon to be laid. In De-
cember 1851 he was prostrated by a severe hemorrhage in the lungs,
occasioned, it was thought, in part by exposure on the Alps, in part by
too close application while prosecuting further experiments on heat. For
two Sessions and a half he was entirely laid aside from work. In the
winter of 1854 he resumed his duties, but daily lecturing was a heavy
burden on his now enfeebled strength. As for exploration or continuous
experimenting, all that was ended.

“Though he could not leave Edinburgh without some natural pangs,
yet,” continues Principal Shairp, “it was no doubt a relief to him when
_he was called to assume the Principalship of this College [St. Salvador
and St. Leonard’s United College, St. Andrew’s | in the beginning of Session
1859-60. The office fitted in better to his state of health, because it
relieved him from the necessity of giving daily lectures, and set him more
free to do his work at the hours and in the way that suited him. He was,
however, far from regarding it as a sinecure, as some speak. Our late
Principal was not the man to regard any post of trust as a sinecure.
He came among us, no doubt, with diminished strength. But illness
had not abated his mental energy. Few men felt more the appeal which
the past history and present aspect of this city makes to the imagination.
But though much captivated with this, he found on his arrival enough of
hard matter-of-fact work ready to his hand, and into it he threw himself
vigorously.”

‘‘Those who were comparatively strangers to our late Principal ob-
served in him a certain antique formality and reserve which they sometimes
mistook for coldness. They little knew how gentle and affectionate a
heart lay under that exterior— what longing for sympathy, what apprecia-
tion of confidence and frankness in others. His thoroughness in all work,
his painstaking in the most ordinary college business, his patience in
getting to the bottom of every minutest detail—as great, indeed, as if it
had been a link in some grave discovery—these are things which only his
colleagues can know.”

‘His last public act, I believe, was to preside at the laying of the
foundation-stone of the new College Hall Building in 1867. A few days
after, he left St. Andrew’s not to return. The sequel in its outward de-
tails (that winter abroad, the return to Clifton, and the close) would be too
painful to dwell on, But while his body was reduced to the last stage of

weakness, his mind remained self-controlled, unclouded, and peaceful to
the end. He departed on the last day of the departing year (1868), up-
held by humble faith in Him to whom long since he had committed him-
self.”

Professor Forbes was a Vice-President of the Royal Society of Edin-
burgh, and a Corresponding Member of the French Institute. His elec-
tion into the Royal Society is dated June 7, 1832.

JoHANN EvANGELISTA PuRKINSE was born in the town of Libochowitz,
near Leitmeritz, in Bohemia, on the 17th of December, 1787. He obtained
the first rudiments of education in the school of Libochowitz. He then went
to Nicholsburg in Moravia, where he passed through the normal school and
Gymnasium with credit, and entered the Order of the Piarists with the in-
tention of becoming a teacher. After anoviciate of one year at Kaltwasser
in Moravia, he was sent to Strdznic in Hungary as teacher in the Gymna-
sium of that place. In 1805 he began to study French and Italian, and
also the language and literature of Bohemia. In the following year, while
officiating as teacher in the normal school at Leutomischlin in Bohemia, he
turned his attention to the writings of the German philosophers, and espe-
cially to those of Fichte. These pursuits opened out to him the prospect of
a higher intellectual culture, which he felt to be within his reach. He
accordingly quitted the school and became a student in the University of
Prague, and supported himself by taking pupils. After some hesitation,
he adopted the career of medicine. For two years he pursued his studies
in the Anatomical Institute under Dr. Ilg, and for two more in the surgical
division of the hospital under Dr. Fritz, by whom he was greatly esteemed.
During this time he derived the means of living from the family of Baron
Hildeprandt, to whose son he had been tutor. In 1818 he graduated as
M.D., the title of his inaugural dissertation being, ‘‘ Contributions to our
Knowledge of Subjective Vision.” In this dissertation he explained how
some properties, and even some structural relations of the eye, can be in-
vestigated by means partly psychological, partly physiological, which
otherwise require for their discovery the most minute microscopical exami-
nation. This essay decided his line of research ; it opened a new world to
his fellow-labourers, and won for himself the approbation of Gothe, who
was engaged in similar pursuits. Shortly afterwards he became assistant
to the Professors of Anatomy and Physiology, Ilg and Rottenberger. In
1820 Purkinje published in the ‘ Medicinische Jahrbiicher des Gsterreich-
ischen Staates,’ a paper on Vertigo, from observations made upon himself,
In 1822 he was appointed to the Professorship of Physiology in the Univer-
sity of Breslaw, on the recommendation of Dr. Rust, of Berlin. At Easter
in 1823 he entered upon his duties at Breslaw. In consequence of preju-
dice against Austrians on the part of the Medical Faculty, and a desire for
the appointment of another person, he was not well received at first, but in
the course of two years he overcame all dislike by the extent of his acquire-
ments, and his urbane and unassuming demeanour. The inaugural disser-

tation required of the newly-appointed Professor had for its title, “* De
examine physiologico organi visus et systematis cutanei.” In this dis-
sertation he described the now well-known method of investigating the
structure of the retina by the appearance seen after waving a flame beside
the eye. He followed out this subject in a work entitled ‘‘ Observations
and Experiments on the Physiology of the Senses, or new Contributions to
the Knowledge of Subjective Vision,” published in 1825. In the course of
the same year the Faculty of Medicine of Breslaw resolved to send their
congratulations to Blumenbach on the fifteenth anniversary of his doctorate,
accompanied by an original memoir on a suitable subject. Purkinje’s offer
to write the memoir was gladly accepted. He took for his subject the
elementary origin of the bird’s egg within the ovary, and its subsequent
progress up to the time of its deposition. This investigation, which occupied
him for three months, resulted in one of the most important physiological
discoveries of his time, that of the germinal vesicle, now generally known as
the “‘ vesicle of Purkinje.”” The congratulatory memoir in which it was first
described and figured was afterwards published independently under the
title of “‘ Symbole ad ovi avium historiam ante incubationem,” 1830. In
1828-30 he entered upon a microscopical examination of the organization
of plants. The elastic fibres of various vessels of plants, and the receptacles
. of pollen and seed capsules, which scatter the pollen and the seed, especially
attracted his attention. The account of these researches was published in
1830: ‘ De cellulis antherum fibrosis nec non de granorum pollinarium
formis, commentatio phytotomica.”

On the recommendation of Mirbel, the Monthyon Prize was awarded to
him by the French Institute for this essay. In the spring of 1833 he un-
dertcok the observation of the developement of the tadpole through its
various stages. He carefully examined the cilia which at first cover the
whole body, then the head, and lastly only the branches of the gills. In
the course of the same year Professor Valentin began his researches on the
organization of the ovum of mammals, and while examining the funnel of
the oviduct of a rabbit, observed a movement of a granule on the mucous
membrane of the oviduct while floating in water, and attributed it to
spermatozoa. But Purkinje traced the motion to cilia on the edge of the
membrane. This discovery of ciliary motion in a warm-blooded animal
led to a joint research, and to the publication of the work ‘ De phe-
nomeno generali et fundamentali motus vibratorii continui in membranis
cum externis tum internis animalium plurimorum et superiorum et in-
feriorum ordinum obvii, commentatio physiologica,’ 1835.

On entering upon his duties at Breslaw he established a physiological
institute in his own house, where students were furnished with the means
of examining microscopically the elementary parts of human bodies and
those of animals, and of drawing and accurately describing them. These
researches supplied the materials of a series of academical dissertations,
many of which disclosed new methods of microscopical investigation, a
field of research then beginning to be generally cultivated after having been

comparatively neglected since the days of Malpighi, Swammerdam, and
Leeuwenhoek. Others again treated of various physiological or anato-
mical subjects. In the first of these essays, by Krauss, in 1824, ‘De
cerebri lzesi ad motum voluntarium relatione, certaque vertiginis directione
ex certis cerebri regionibus lesis pendente,’” by the introduction of his
theory of vertigo, he confirmed and extended the discoveries of Flourens and
Magendie respecting the activity of the cerebrum and cerebellum. In
another, by Wendt, in 1833, he announced the important discovery of the
sudorific glands and their excretory ducts in the human skin. In another
work of this description, ‘De penitiori ossium structura observationes ’
(1834), by Deutsch, also in ‘De penitiori dentium humanorum struc-
tura’ (1835), and in ‘ Meletemata circa mammalium dentium evolutionem ”
(1835), by Raschkow, new discoveries made by Purkinje are announced,
These were followed by ‘ De penitiori cartilaginum structura symbole’
(1836), by Meckauer, ‘De arteriarum et venarum structura’ (1836), by
Rauschel, ‘ De genitalium eyolutione in embryone feminino observata’
(1837), and ‘ De musculari cordis structura’ (1839). In the essay entitled
«De formatione granulosa in nervis, aliisque partibus organismi animalis”’
(1839), Purkinje, in oppsition to the views of Remak and others, main-
tained that the ‘‘formatio granulosa”’ or elongated corpuscles resembling
cell-nuclei, which are found attached to the sympathetic nerves, are not
peculiar to this system, and that they consist of a newer material resembling
protoplasm, out of which the more matured portions derive their growth.
In the essay ‘ De velamentis medulle spinalis,? he made known the dis-
covery of a peculiar nervous plexus distributed on the pia mater of the spinal
cord, which can be easily exhibited by maceration in acetic acid. An ac-
count of these observations and of the existence of nerves in other mem-
branous parts was given in a memoir (in Polish) published in the Year-book
of the Medical Faculty of Cracow, and reproduced in German, with additions,
in Miller’s ‘ Archiv’ for 1845. Two other dissertations appeared, the titles
of which were, ‘ De structura uteri non gravidi’ (1840), and ‘ De numero
atque mensura microscopica fibrarum-elementarium systematis cerebrospi-
nalis symbole’ (1845).

Purkinje having at length succeeded in convincing the Government of
the necessity of establishing an independent institution for teaching physio-
logy, a house was built in 1842 for the purpose of carrying on physio-
logical researches, and a suitable grant made for defraying the stipends of
assistants and other expenses. This example has since been followed in all
the German and Austrian universities.

Purkinje was the author of a paper “On the World of Dreams,” in
‘Hesperus ’ (1821), “On the Physiological Import of Vertigo”? in Rust’s
Magazin (1827), “On Tartini’s Tones,” in the Bulletin of the Natural
History Section of the ‘Schlesisch-patriotischen Gesellschaft’ for 1825, and
‘An Auscultation Experiment,’ in which, by means of an instrument of
his invention, the points of rest and motion of a vibrating plate can be de-

Xu
termined by hearing alone, without the employment of sand, as in Chladni’s
experiment.

In Miiller’s ‘ Archiv fiir Anatomie und Physiologie’ for 1834 he described
a compressorium for microscopic observation invented by himself, which
soon came into general use, and soon afterwards published, conjointly
with Valentin, an account of researches on ciliary movements observed in
the cavities of the brain. In 1838 followed his interesting experiments, in
conjunction with Pappenheim, on artificial digestion. In 1845, as already
stated, the same journal published his observations on the nerves. Purkinje
is also the author of many valuable articles in the ‘ Encyclopidisches
Worterbuch der Medicinischen Wissenschaften,’ and Wagner’s ‘ Hand-
worterbuch der Physiologie ;? of about sixty papers and lectures in the
publications of the ‘ Schlesisch-patriotischen Gesellschaft’ of Breslaw, of
physiological papers (in Polish) in the scientific journals published in
Cracow, of reviews and articles on the Sclavonic languages and literature.
He translated Tasso’s ‘ Gerusalemme Liberata,’ many of Schiller’s poems,
and all his Lyrics into Bohemian.

At the Naturforscherversammlung, held at Prague in 1837, he antici-
pated Schwann in the announcement of the doctrine of the identity of
fundamental structure of plants and animals, but with this distinction
' between the two cases, that he calls the elements of plants and those of
animals, cells and granules respectively.

In 1848 he attended the Meeting of the Sclavonic races in Prague, and
was present at the celebration of the five hundredth anniversary of the
foundation of the University, when the Degree of Doctor of Philosophy
was conferred.on him. A long-cherished wish to be enabled to pass the
remainder of his days in his native country was gratified by his nomination
to the Professorship of Physiology in the University of Prague in the
summer of 1850. His first care was the due equipment of the Physio-
logical Institute, at that time recently established. This he effected in a
satisfactory manner in the course of a year. His next endeavour was to
promote the cultivation of the Natural Sciences among the Bohemian-
speaking population, and with this view he became one of the editors of the
Natural-History Journal ‘Ziva’ from 1853 to 1864, and also contributed
many articles to the Journal of the Bohemian Museum.

One of the most important of his later researches was a careful investiga-
tion of the sound perceived in the interior of the skull. On examining the
inmates of a deaf and dumb asylum, he found, as some previous observers
had discovered, that almost all possess the power of hearing through the
skull.

_ His election as a Foreign Member of the Royal Society took place in 1850.
He was corresponding Member of the French Institute, Member of the
Academies of Vienna, Berlin, and St. Petersburg, and of many other learned
Societies. He retained his vigour of body and mind up to the last days of
his life. His death, after an illness of no long duration, on the 28th of
July, 1869, was mourned by every class of Society in Bohemia.

he lind ded aI LOGS

xii

Sir JAMes CiArk was born at Cullen in Banffshire in December 1788,
and was educated at the parish school of Fordyce, and subsequently at the
University of Aberdeen. In 1806 he entered a writer’s (solicitor’s) office
at Banff; but, not liking the law, he was given the choice of the Church,
with the promise of a ministry, or the profession of medicine. He chose
the latter calling, and proceeded to Edinburgh. In 1809 he passed at the
College of Surgeons, and then entered the medical service of the navy.
He served at Haslar Hospital till July 1810, when he was sent to sea as
Assistant-Surgeon in the schooner ‘ Thistle,’ which was going with des-
patches to New York. The ‘Thistle’ was wrecked, with the loss of
several of her crew, on the coast of New Jersey, and the survivors lost
everything they possessed, and suffered great privations. On returning
to England he was promoted to the rank of surgeon, and joined the
‘Collobrée.’ It is remarkable that this vessel was also wrecked on the
_ American coast. He was then appointed to the ‘ Chesapeake,’ which had
been recently taken by Sir Philip Broke, in his famous action, and served
in her until 1814, when he was transferred to the ‘ Maidstone.’ In this
ship he met with and formed a strong friendship for Lieutenant (after-
wards Sir Edward) Parry, the celebrated Arctic navigator, and made, in
conjunction with him, a series of experiments on the temperature of the
Gulf-stream. During his service in the navy his attention appears to
have been strongly directed to the question of climate, and the few notes
he has left of this period of his life chiefly refer to observations he made
on this subject, and to the hygienic conditions influencing the health of the
men under his charge.

In 1815 the ‘ Maidstone ’ returned to Baelaad to be paid off, and Sir
James Clark was placed on half pay. In 1816 he went to Edinburgh,
where he attended the University Classes, and graduated as M.D. in 1817.

In 1818 he was asked to accompany a gentleman far advanced in con-
sumption to the south of France. He went with his patient to Marseilles,
Hyéres, Nice, and Florence, during the winter and spring, and in the
summer to Lausanne. It was owing to this charge that his attention was
especially drawn to the effect of climate on consumption, and that he com-
menced the collection of meteorological and climatic data, with a view of
studying their influence on that disease.

In 1819 he settled in Rome, where English families were beginning to
congregate, and remained there until 1826, when he removed to London.

During his residence at Rome he spent the summers in visiting the
medical schools and the watering-places of Italy, France, and Germany, and
continued his studies on climate. In 1820 he published a small work,
entitled ‘“‘ Notes on Climate, Diseases, Hospitals, and Medical Schools in
France, Italy, and Switzerland,’ which formed the foundation of a subse-
quent larger work on the ‘ Sanative Influence of Climate.’ In the same
year he was married to Miss Stephen, the daughter of the Rev. Dr. Stephen,
Rector of Nassau, and Chaplain to the Forces at New Providence. In

VOL. XIX. 6

XiV

1826, being partly urged to the step by his friends, and partly influenced
by consideration for his wife’s health, he left Rome ; and after a few months
spent in visiting the chief medical institutions of France and Germany, and
the Pyrenean and German baths, then very little known in England, he
settled in London. In the autumn of 1827 he was attacked with typhoid
fever, and was ill for several months. He never recovered perfectly from
this attack; it left a delicacy of digestion behind it, and permanently
enfeebled him. |

Soon after settling in London, Prince Leopold, afterwards King of the
Belgians, whose attention had been called to him by his investigation of
the German waters, appointed him his physician, and this subsequently (in
1834) led to his appointment as physician to the Duchess of Kent.

In 1829 he published his larger work on the ‘Sanative Influence of
Climate.” This work, which was long considered the standard book on
climate, and went through several editions, has had a very wide influence,
not only on medical practice, but on the collection of meteorological and
other data respecting climatic conditions. He subsequently (1832) pub-
lished articles on air and climate in the ‘ Cyclopzedia of Practical Medicine.’

In the autumn of 1829 Prince Leopold, who was then engaged in the
negotiation which resulted in his refusal of the crown of Greece, offered, if
he accepted the crown, to take Dr. Clark to Athens; but this he declined.

He was elected a Fellow of the Royal Society in 1832, and in 1835 pub-
lished his ‘Treatise on Consumption and Scrofula,’ which, as well as the
work on climate, was translated into Italian, German, and French, and
passed in this country through several editions.

Soon afterwards he wrote an article on tubercular phthisis in the ‘ Cyclo-
peedia of Practical Medicine.’

Two years subsequently, on the accession of Her Majesty, he was ap-
pointed Physician in Ordinary, and subsequently received a similar ap-
pointment to Prince Albert.

From this time the life of Sir James Clark (he was made a baronet in
1838) was spent in the discharge of his responsible duties as medical
adviser to the Court, and in the fatigues of a London practice. It was
therefore impossible for him to continue his scientific observations on
climate, or even to prosecute further his more purely professional inquiries.
But indirectly, in this latter period of his life, he lent a most powerful aid
to science. | :

He was always ready to help, and to use his influence, which yearly
became greater, both with the Court and with the leaders of parties, for
the furtherance of scientific objects, and for the advance of education. It
is difficult to give a complete account of what he did in this direction, as
he has left no records. He was, indeed, singularly indifferent to the recog-
nition of his services, and, provided the end was gained, did not desire that
his share in it should be known. But his chief influence appears to have
been directed to the improvement of medical and of general education,

to fostering special scientific instruction, to the promotion of sanitary mea-
sures, to the improvement of the Lunacy Laws, and of the public medical
Services.

He appears to have always taken a deep interest in medical education.
Early in life he had published in Italian a work addressed to Professor
Tommasini on English medical literature, and some time afterwards he
published some ‘ Observations on the System of Teaching Clinical Medi-
eine in the University of Edinburgh, with suggestions for its improvement.’
He had also corresponded with both French and Italian physicians on this
point ; and in the summer of 1825 he had spent several months in Paris for
the purpose of observing the method of clinical teaching followed by
_Laennec. |

When, therefore, in 1838 the University of London was founded, and
he wasasked to serve on the Senate, he was fully prepared to deal with this
subject of medical education; and it is to a considerable extent to his
labours at that time, and subsequently, when further changes were made in
the curriculum, that the present examining system of the Medical Section
of the University owes its shape. The leading features of the scheme
which, in consultation with experienced medical teachers, he adopted, and
which he advocated in the Senate, were to require evidence of a certain
time having been spent in the study of medicine, but not to demand or to
rely on many certificates of attendance, but to trust to a searching examina-
tion; to split up the examination into two (and subsequently into three)
parts, to be undergone at different stages of education, and to make the
examination as practical and as thorough as possible. Clinical examina-
tions were not, however, at first employed, but he subsequently obtained
the introduction of this important part of medical examination.

He continued to serve on the Senate until 1865, when he resigned, to
the great regret of his colleagues.

In 1854, when the Government determined to open the Indian medical
service to unrestricted competition, he was requested to organize the method
of medical examination, He did so, and gave this examination the form
which, with a slight alteration, it has since retained. In this exammation
he recommended the introduction of practical surgical and medical tests ;
and to this may be traced much of the improvement which has taken
place of late years in all parts of the kingdom in practical medical teaching.

In 1858 he was appointed by the Crown a Member of the General
Council of Medical Education which was constituted under the Medical
Act of that year. He served on this body till December 1860.

In connexion with medical education, he interested himself on the subject
of Medical Reform, and in 1842 and 1843 he wrote two letters to Sir
James Graham on that subject. The second letter, which gives a résumé
of the first, urges the need ‘“‘ for a good and uniform system of medical
education,”’ which he says should be the same throughout the empire for
every medical practitioner. He then sketches the constitution of a body

XV1

to whom ought to be delegated the power of carrying out the principles
of education to be laid down by the Government. He had evidently
formed an idea of a General Medical Council, which may yet some day be
turned to account. |

He did not, however, restrict his labours to medical education. He
took a deep interest in the improvement of the Universities generally, and
assisted Prince Albert in the projects which eventually ended in the altera-
tions in the Universities of Cambridge and Oxford. Ata later date he
was very active in alding the reconstruction of the University of Aberdeen.

His greatest attempt to improve purely scientific education was made
in connexion with the College of Chemistry. He was deeply impressed
with the defective opportunities of studying practical chemistry in this
country as compared with Germany, and with the unfavourable influence
that deficiency would have, not only on our scientific standing, but on our
powers as a manufacturing nation. The influence of Liebig’s doctrines
on agricultural chemistry and on the improvement of the productive
powers of soil were also at that time attracting great attention in England,
and impressed him greatly with the importance of cultivating this subject.
Whether the State should or should not more or less assist the teaching of
pure science, or should leave this to the independent exertion of institutions
or private individuals, is a matter which need not be here discussed. Sir
James Clark’s opinion appears to have been that the Continental system
of State aid had the effect of overweighting England in the race, and that
if we wished to maintain our equality in science, we had no option but to
imitate to a certain extent the Continental plan. The College of Chemistry,
however, in the first instance, was intended to be self-supporting. it was
commenced in 1845 by Dr. Gardner; and Sir James Clark soon became
one of its most active supporters, and through his influence Prince Albert
interested himself greatly in it.

In the summer of that year, when the Queen and Prince were in Ger-
many, Professor von Liebig was requested by Sir James to name some
chemist who could carry on in England the same kind of practical instrue-
tion which had made Giessen so famous. Liebig mentioned three names,
and fortunately circumstances led to the selection of Dr. Hofmann. Through
the influence of Prince Albert, Dr. Hofmann obtained leave from the Uni-
versity of Bonn for two years, and soon afterwards the College of Chemistry
was opened.

How successful it was in a scientific point of view, even from the first,
needs no record; but its expenses were heavy, and perhaps the College
might even have been closed from pecuniary failure about the year 1852
had not the Prince Consort, urged on by Sir James, so exerted his influ-
ence that the Government consented to give a small assistance, and at
length the College of Chemistry eventually became incorporated with the
Royal School of Mines. Since that time the College (which is partly self-
supporting) has done much to diffuse among our manufacturing and agri-

XVI

cultural population a knowledge of Chemistry, and to advance the science
by original research. It is to be regretted, however, that the College of
Chemistry, originally established as an independent institution, self-sup-
porting, or aided, if necessary, by private means, could not maintain itself
on that footing.

As far as possible also Sir James Clark gave a warm support to all plans
for promoting the study of Natural History, and was ready to urge on the
Government at any time any reasonable mode of doing this, or of furthering
independent inquiries.

Passing from pure science, he had a great share in the sanitary move-
ment which has been so marked a feature of our days, although his name
was not brought before the public so prominently as that of others who
had really less influence. From a very early period he had been a very
strong advocate of measures calculated to prevent disease and to improve
the public health. He therefore used his influence with the Government to
Institute the Health of Towns’ Commission, and those other early inquiries
which were the foundation of the present movement. He was at this
time intimately acquainted both with Andrew and George Combe, and
estimated very highly the philosophical characters of the two brothers.
Some years afterwards he edited and partly rewrote one of Andrew
Combe’s Hygienic works on the Management of Infancy.

At a very early date also, long before the Crimean war, he did what he
could to get the sanitary state of the army and navy inquired into and
remedied.

There can be no doubt that his service in the Navy had impressed him
with the urgent importance of this subject, and had also given him a
strong conviction of the waste of life in warlike operations.

Owing probably to their knowledge of his exertions in this direction, the
Government during the Crimean war requested his cooperation in the
organization of Supplementary Civil Hospitals, in support of the Military
Hospitals, which were overflowing and had proved unequal to the work
entailed by a severe campaign. He assisted in the deliberations which
resulted in the establishment of the Smyrna Hospital; and subsequently,
when a second hospital was required, the Government requested him to
undertake the entire organization. He did so, and the result was the
great Hospital of Renkioi on the Dardanelles, which was intended for 3000
sick. This hospital, the design of which was made by Mr. Brunel, has
proved the model of the American Wooden Hospitals established during the
late civil war, and indirectly has given rise to many of the arrangements
in field hospitals in war which were carried out in Italy and Germany in
the campaigns of 1859 and 1866, and are now being repeated on a still
larger scale.

It was therefore not surprising that after the Crimean war he was asked
to serve on the Royal Commission, presided over by Mr. Sidney Herbert,
for inquiring into the health of the army; and he had no small share in

shaping the conclusions arrived at in that well-known and important
inquiry. He subsequently took an equal interest in the Indian Sanitary
Commission ; and it is really chiefly to his exertions and his influence with
the Government (in support of the persistent action of Miss Nightingale,
Sir Ranald Martin, Dr. Sutherland, and others) that we must attribute the
advance which has been made in carrying out that most important reform,
a reform which will influence not only the European soldiers in India, but
the many million inhabitants of that empire.

It is not wished to claim for Sir James Clark more honour than is due.
There were many other labourers in the field, and no one man unassisted
could have done such great works. All that is urged for him is that he
was one of the earliest of those who saw the importance of sanitary science,
and that he was ever ready with time and thought and influence to aid in
the progress of inquiry and reform. In connexion with military medical
arrangements, he served on the Committee which organized the Army
Medical School now stationed at Netley; and he continued to the last
moment to take the warmest interest in everything connected with that
institution.

In addition to the work of inquiry on sanitary legislation among the
civil population and in the public services, he was very much interested in
the legislation for the insane. In 1855 an American lady, Miss Dix, who
was visiting the lunatic asylums of England and Scotland, was refused ad-
mission into some of the private asylums in the latter country. In order
to compass her wishes, she obtained introductions to some influential per-
sons, among others to Sir James Clark, and the inquiries then set on foot
led to the appointment of a Royal Commission to inquire into the Scotch
Lunacy Laws. In this inquiry, and in the appointment of the Lunacy
Commissioners which followed the Report of the Royal Commission, Sir
James Clark took an active share; and in after years, when various
attempts were made to revert to the old state of things, he spared neither
time nor trouble to stem the retrograde current by correspondence and
verbal remonstrance with Members of Parliament and Members of the
Cabinet ; indeed, after his death, the Lord-Advocate quoted in Parliament
a letter from him as a justification of the foundation of the Scotch Lunacy
Board.

Only two years before his death he wrote a life of Dr. Conolly, the object
of which was not only to perpetuate the memory of his friend, but also to
place before the public the true treatment of the insane, and to rebut the
attempts, certainly feeble enough, which have been made to impair the wise
and benevolent mode of treatment which Conolly did so much to popularize.

When it is considered that all these labours (and in the true sense of the
word his exertions were labours) were carried on in addition to the work
entailed by his Court duties and a large private practice, the great activity
of Sir James Clark will be appreciated.

In this sketch only some of the public services rendered by him can be

XIX

referred to; for his mode of using his influence was so unostentatious, and
his desire for a recognition of his services so small, that much of what he
did is searcely known; and the want of specific details in showing how his
influence was brought to bear in so many ways is owing to the modesty of
his nature. Justice, too, has hardly been done in the foregoing lines to his
scientific knowledge and sympathies. In this respect, as in his constant
endeavour to promote the wellbeing of his fellowmen, he was so Jittle self-
obtrusive that few men knew the extent of his acquirements. He paid,
even to within a week of his death, constant attention to scientific progress,
and especially to its practical application. Among his notes written but a
few weeks before his last illness are details of the composition and mode of
action of chloral. It was this union of a scientific spirit with great bene-
volence of character which, aided by a large experience abroad and at
home, made him so excellent a physician.

His position at the Court necessarily occupied much cf his time and
thoughts; he was unceasing in his attention to the health of the Queen and
of her children, and the Royal family owe to him much of that blessing of
health which has happily been their lot. He was on most confidential terms
with the Prince Consort ; and the Prince found in him a congenial adviser
oa all points connected with education and science. The Queen’s trust in
him was early and firmly implanted, and was never impaired, and her
sympathy and, we can truly say, affection for him were manifested to the
last.

Sir James Clark retired from private practiee in 1860, and removed to
Bagshot Park, which Her Majesty had lent him for his life. He died
there on the 29th of June, 1870, in the eighty-second year of his age, re-
taining almost to the last hour of his life a warm interest in all scientific
progress, and a heart-felt sympathy with every step which would promote
the improvement and happiness of his fellowmen.

Wiiiiam Axien Mituer, Vice-President and Treasurer of the Royal
Society, was born at Ipswich, in Suffolk, on the 17th of December, 1817.
He was indebted for his early education to his mother, whose memory he
cherished with the greatest love and respect, and whose quiet, sagacious
nature was reflected in him. Mrs. Miller had a favourite maxim, ‘‘ Take
everything by the smooth handle; and if a thing has not got a smooth
handle, make one!’ Dr. Miller was actuated through life by the spirit
of this axiom ; and we have known him, when giving advice to a friend who
sought it, introduce the remark, “‘ Take it by the smooth handle.”

Miller passed one year in Merchant Taylors’ School, and two years at
Ackworth, in Yorkshire, in a school belonging to the Society of Friends—
the same in which Luke Howard took so great an interest that he purchased
the Ackworth Villa estate, and made it his summer residence during some
years. Luke Howard’s partner, William Allen, F.R.S., the manufacturing
chemist, and author, conjointly with Mr. Pepys, of the well-known researches

VOL. XIX. c

on respiration, was the friend after whom Miller was named. Miller’s natural
simplicity of character probably received its outward expression from this
early contact with influential members of the Society of Friends. It was
at Ackworth that he first distinctly remembered having acquired a taste for
science, and a desire to devote his life to its cultivation ; and this was not
so much from the chemical lectures, or rather the chemical experiments,
- which were shown to some of the boys, as from the fact that Miller was
occasionally invited to look at the stars through a telescope belonging to
one of the masters. These early impressions bore fruit in the chemistry
of the stars, with which his name is now associated. At the age of 15 he
was apprenticed to his uncle, Mr. Bowyer Vaux, one of the honorary
surgeons in the General Hospital at Birmingham, of which, during nearly
twenty years, his father, Mr. William Miller, was secretary. After five
years he entered the medical department of King’s College, London,
where his superior knowledge of chemistry over that of the other students
attracted the attention of Professor Daniell, who more than once expressed
his surprise in the inquiry, “‘ Where did you get your knowledge from ?”
One of those opportunities that occur in the lives of most people, but are
taken advantage of only by superior men, occurred in connexion with the
chemistry lectures. Miller had no taste for surgical practice, and preferred,
if possible, to get some employment in the laboratory of a manufacturing
chemist, rather than become a medical practitioner. Indeed he did per-
form some analyses for the Messrs. Chance, while in treaty with them for
more permanent employment. But the laboratory assistant at King’s
College having been disabled by illness, Daniell engaged the services of
Miller; and when the office of Demonstrator in the laboratory became va-
cant in 1840, he was appointed to the post. It should be mentioned that
in 1839 Miller obtained the Warneford Prize for the encouragement of
theological studies among medical students, and in 1840 he passed a few
months in Liebig’s laboratory at Giessen. In 1841 he became Assistant
Lecturer for Professor Daniell, and also took his degree of M.B. in the
University of London, proceeding to M.D. the following year. He also
assisted Professor Daniell in various scientific inquiries, and conducted the
experiments on the electrolysis of saline compounds, his name being as-
sociated with that of Daniell in the paper that appeared in the Philoso-
phical Transactions for 1844. In the following year he was elected a
Fellow of the Royal Society, and on the death of Professor Daniell suc-
ceeded to the vacant chair of Chemistry in King’s College. The writer
of this notice was engaged in assisting Professor Daniell to bring out the
third edition of his well-known work entitled ‘ Meteorological Essays,” and
on the sudden death of the author he requested Dr. Miller to cooperate
with him in completing the work, to which he readily assented. Dr.
_Miller was engaged about this time in some experiments on Spectrum
Analysis. They were conducted in a sort of lumber-room below the seats
of the Chemical Theatre, and formed the subject of a paper which was

XX1

read before the British Association and published in 1845 in the Philo-
sophical Magazine (Series 3, vol. xxvil. p. 81). He thus became inter-
ested at an early period in the subject of spectrum investigation. |

Miller continued during some years to use as his text-book Professor
Daniell’s ‘Introduction to the study of Chemical Philosophy,’ supple-
mented at a later period by Fownes’s ‘Manual of Chemistry.’ The
writer of this notice repeatedly urged Dr. Miller to bring out a work of
his own, which should be better suited to the wants of his pupils; but he
hesitated in doing so lest he should at all interfere with his predecessor’s
work. ‘I must prepare the book,” he said, ‘from my lecture-notes, and
you are not aware how much of Daniell I have in them.’ For some time
his idea was to accede to a proposal of the publisher of Daniell’s work to
bring out a third edition, making such additions thereto as the progress of
science required, and to maintain it in its old position as the text-book.
But on looking over Daniell with this view, he found that so many addi-
tions and alterations would be required as greatly to supersede the author’s
peculiar touches; so that he finally decided to produce a new work, and
the first volume accordingly appeared in 1855. In the preface to this
volume, which was devoted to ‘‘ Chemical Physics,” the author stated that
* he had decided to leave untouched the work of his late master, as the true
exponent of his views, upon some of those branches of science which his
researches had contributed to advance and adorn.” The two subsequent
volumes on “‘ Inorganic”’ and “ Organic Chemistry,” which appeared, the
one in 1856 and the other in 1857, were written from Miller’s lecture-
notes, as was also the case with the ‘‘ Chemical Physics,’’ the notes being
so amplified as to form continuous reading, a process which led te so many
insertions and alterations as to make the manuscript difficult to read.
But the effect of this mode of treatment was so far advantageous that
when the books were introduced to the students, they, so far from having
to conform to any new method, seemed to recognize in the new text-books
the very lectures they had heard.

The three volumes of Miller’s ‘Elements of Chemistry’ passed through
several editions, and were reprinted in the United States of America. While
not professing to set forth any marked original views, the work affords a clear
and comprehensive exposition of the science, and soon became deservedly
popular. In the later editions Miller adopted the new method of notation
in chemistry. His conservative principles led him to resist this change as
long as it was possible to do so. Moreover, having been, during so many
years, accustomed to the old notation, he never took kindly to the new.
Indeed it was part of Miller’s character to grasp a new idea with a certain
amount of mental siowness; but when once fairly appreciated, it was held
tenaciously and not given up without a severe struggle. But he was so
conscientious that he would sacrifice every thing to what he held to be
the truth. The writer has known him to refuse to hold any further
intercourse with a foreign man of gcience whom he had received into his

Xxil

house and assisted in various ways, on hearing the expression of a doubt
as to the benevolence of the Almighty for permitting him to undergo so
inuch trouble. Soon after he became Professor, he was on one occasion
giving evidence ina court of law on some scientific point connected with a
patent, when, during the cross examination, the Judge made a remark
which had the effect of questioning the veracity of the witness. Miller
felt this so keenly that he fainted, and had to be carried out of court.
After a short interval the Judge sent to inquire how he was. Miller said,
**T shall be better when his Lordship does me justice.’ On his return,
the counsel for the cross examination was proceeding to put questions
in the spirit of the objection, when the Judge stopped him, stating that
he had misunderstood the witness, and explained how.

As a lecturer Miller was more successful in style and expression than as
a writer, for his written composition had some tendency to become in-
volved. One of the best specimens of his lectures is that on Spectrum
Analysis, given before the British Association at Manchester in 1861,
at the time when Kirchhoff’s researches had made the subject more than
usually popular. One part of this lecture was devoted to an historical re-
view of that remarkable branch of chemico-physical research ; and so little
attention had been paid to this part of the subject that when a large
- audience were collected to hear, as they supposed, an account of Kirchhoff’s
discoveries, they were not a little surprised to find Kirchhoff occupying the
end of a long series of illustrious names, from Newton m 1701 to Wollas-
ton in 1802 and Fraunhofer in 1815; while the various other names were
arranged after the fashion of a genealogical tree, under the four heads of
(1) Cosmical lines, (2) Absorption-bands, (3) Bright lines produced by
the electric spark, and (4) by coloured flames, the four branches uniting
in the names of Kirchhoff and Bunsen, 1860. On the morning of the day
appointed for that lecture, successful and brilliant as it was, Dr. Miller
was seized with one of those bilious attacks to which he was subject, and
was so prostrated that he had to keep his bed nearly up to the time of the
lecture, and return to it immediately after its close. This gave occasion to
a little incident which deserves to be noted as illustrative of the cautious habit
of forethought of the man. In moving to the front of the crowded platform
with a bottle containing red nitrous fumes in his hand, in his weak state he
stumbled and fell, breaking the bottle in pieces. Immediately he sprang
to his feet, exclaiming ‘‘I have another!” on which a round of applause
caused him to remark, asif to himself, ‘I am too old a lecturer to rely upon
one bottle.”

This lecture was repeated before the Pharmaceutical Society of Lon-
con on the evening of the 15th January, 1862, and printed in the Society’s
Journal for February of that year. The historical details given in it have
been largely used by subsequent writers, presenting, as they do, in a very
clear manner, the results obtained by the earlier workers on the Spectrum.
It was on returning from this lecture to his house at Tulse Hill, with his

XXIH

friend aud neighbour Mr. (now Dr.) Huggins, that Miller assented to a pro-
posal made by Mr. Huggins that they should unite in carrying ona series of
experiments on the spectra of the heavenly bodies. Miller was at this time
engaged in an elaborate series of experiments which formed the subject of
a paper read before the Royal Society, 19th June, 1862, “On the Photo-
graphic Transparency of various bodies, and on the Photographic effects of
metallic and other Spectra obtained by means of the Electric Spark.”
This paper is inserted in the Philosophical Transactions for 1862.

The joint labours of Miller and Huggins were continued during about
two years; and as the observations could only be made at night, they must
have told on the energies of a man who was s0 actively employed as
Miller in brain-work at College and elsewhere during the day. The first
results of their observations are given in a note on the lines in the spectra
of some of the fixed stars, dated February 1863*, from which it appears
that a considerable time was devoted to the construction of apparatus
suited to this delicate branch of inquiry; but they had at length
“succeeded in contriving an arrangement which has enabled them to view
the lines in the stellar spectra in much greater detail than has been figured
or described by any previous observer.” They further add that, “ during
the past twelve months, they have examined the spectra of the Moon,
Jupiter, and Mars, as well as of between thirty and forty stars, including
those of Arcturus, Castor, a Lyre, Capella, and Procyon, some of the
principal lines of which they have measured approximatively. They have
also observed 6 and y Andromede, a, 3, e, and n Pegasi, Rigel, 7 Orionis,
6B Aurige, Pollux, y Geminorum, a, y, and e Cygni, a Trianguli, e, 2, and
n Ursee Majoris, «, (3, y, «, and » Cassiopeize, and some others.” When
their labours were sufficiently advanced, they embodied their results in a
memoir entitled ‘‘ On the Spectra of some of the Fixed Stars,’ which wag
published in the Philosophical Transactions for 1864.- At asomewhat later
period there is a jomt note on the spectrum of the variable star Alpha
Orvionis, contained in the ‘ Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical
Society,’ vol. xxvi.; and another joint note on the spectrum of anew star in
Corona borealis, in the ‘ Proceedings of the Royal Society,’ vol. xv., dated
May 17, 1866.

Messrs. Miller and Huggins, for their “ conjoint discoveries in Astrono-
mical Physics,” received each the Gold Medal of the Royal Astronomical
Society ; and on the occasion of presenting these medals, the President, the
Rev. C. Pritchard, M.A., F.R.S., after referring to a former inquiry as to
‘What is a sun?” remarked that the progress of science had led to the
further query, ‘‘ What is a star??? ‘* For the first dawning of a distinct
and intelligent reply to this question we are indebted to Messrs. Huggins
and Miller.’ * * * We find them associated “ in the examination of the
spectra of stars by means of an admirable and newly contrived apparatus
which had required much thought and labour to construct. With this

* Proceedings of the Royal Society, vol. xii. p. 444.

XXIV

instrument attached to the telescope it was possible not only readily to
divide the sodium line D into its two compartments, but to exhibit also
the nickel line which Kirchhoff had observed between them. The spectra
of the stars were now, in the first instance, compared approximately with
the superposed atmospheric spectrum already alluded to, for the purpose
of suggesting what metallic lines probably existed in the star under obser-
vation, and then were compared directly, by actual juxtaposition, with the
actual spectra of those metallic vapours which had been already suggested.
It seems impossible to conceive any process more rigidly or conscientiously
exact than that which Messrs. Huggins and Miller thus skilfully adopted ;
and here I may be excused for repeating that the attainment of the ulti-
mate object of the research depended, not on any approximation, however
close, of the stellar with the metallic spectra, but on the certainty of their
absolute coincidence. In this way, during the space of two years and a quar-
ter, many of the midnight hours of these gentlemen were passed in the
scrupulous examination and measurement of the spectra of upwards of fifty
stars; but in several instances the number of the fine dark lines, the in-
evitable indices (be it remembered) of the material constitution of these
distant worlds, were so numerous, that to measure and map them all the
labour of months would barely suffice. The physical result of all this
scrupulous and conscientious care was to discover the fact, or it may be to:
confirm the suspicion, that those mysterious lights with which the firma-
ment is spangled are in strict reality worlds fashioned, in their material con-
stitution at least, not altogether differently from the fashion of the little
orb on which we live; beyond the question of a doubt they are proved, by
the investigations of our medallists, to contain at least the hydrogen, the
sodium, the magnesium, the iron with which all terrestrial creatures are
so familiar.” ,

On Tuesday, May 14th, 1867, Miller commenced at the Royal Insti-
tution a course of four lectures on “ Spectrum Analysis, with its applica-
tions to Astronomy.’ These lectures were reported in the ‘ Chemical
News,’ under the revision of the author. Again, at the Meeting of the
British Association at Exeter in 1869, he gave a lecture on Spectrum Ana-
lysis to working men. This lecture was afterwards published in the ‘ Po-
pular Science Review’ for October 1869.

Miller was interested in the subject of water analysis, and, in conjunction
with Professors Graham and Hofmann, prepared a Report for the Govern-
ment ‘‘ On the Chemical quality of the Supply of Water to the Metro-
polis.” This was printed in 1851. At a later period he undertook an
investigation ‘“‘ Onthe combined Action of Air and Water on Lead,” and
in 1865 gave a lecture before the Chemical Society ‘On some points in
the Analysis of Potable Waters.”

Quitting the subject of Miller’s original work, we pass on to a brief
notice of the various services rendered by him to Science. He was on
the Council of the Royal Society during the years 1848-50 and 1855-57,

XXV

and being elected Treasurer on the 30th of November, 1861, he served on
the Council in an official capacity till the time of his death. His metho-
dical and punctual habits, his knowledge of affairs, and his excellent
judgment, with the earnest and lively interest he took in the welfare of the —
Society, rendered his special services as Treasurer of the utmost value;
whilst the same high qualities, combined with his accomplishment in .
science, singularly well fitted him for the various duties he had to perform
as Member of the Council and a chief Officer of the Society. The date of
his election to the Fellowship is 1845.

Mr. Gassiot, who knew Miller intimately, referring to his merits as
Treasurer, writes, “‘a more straightforward officer, or one more devoted to
upholding the dignity and promoting the usefulness of the Royal Society,
I do not know ; and there is probably no one with whom Dr. Miller com-
municated on the subject so freely as myself.’’ Mr. White, the Assistant-
Secretary, who habitually had to transact business with him, adds, “My own
experience of Dr. Miller was, that on walking down to King’s College I could
tell beforehand the mood in which I should find him—always uniform and
considerate. His decision on questions brought before him was generally
quick and sound, and he was ready in detecting the weak points of an
argument. In the whole period that he was Treasurer I never had a single
disagreeable word with him.”

In 1866 Dr. Miller was nominated a Member of the Committee then
appointed for the purpose of superintending the Meteorological Observations
made by direction of the Board of Trade, and served on it till the time of
his death ; he was also an active Member of the Committee of the British
Association for superintending the Kew Observatory, and devoted much time
to that work. The definition of the arrears to be executed under the
superintendence of Mr. Balfour Stewart, as entered on the Minutes of the
Committee, 9th March, 1870, was written by and. inserted at Dr. Miller’s
particular request, in order specially to define the important work that has
yet to be completed by the time when the connexion of the Observatory
with the British Association shall cease.

It may here be mentioned that whilst a Member of the Committee ap-
pointed to advise on the scientific arrangements for the marine researches
carried on during the voyage of the ‘ Porcupine’ in 1869, Dr. Miller was
happy enough to contrive a thermometer adapted for taking deep-sea tem-
peratures, which has been found admirably to fulfil its purpose*.

Miller was one of the original founders of the Chemical Society, and
frequently presided over its meetings, as well as occupied a place at its
Council Board. Along with his other various occupations, Dr. Miller was
a Member of the Senate of the University of London, to which he was
appointed, on the recommendation of Convocation, early in 1865; and his
sound judgment and knowledge generally, as well as his accomplishment
in chemical and physical science and his experience as a teacher, gave

* Proceedings of the Royal Society, vol. xviil. p. 408.

XXV1

ereat weight to his opinion in the deliberations of that bedy, and caused
his loss to be severely felt.

In addition to the various honours which rewarded Miller’s position as
a scientific man, it should be mentioned that he received the degree of
LL.D. at the University of Edinburgh, on the occasion of the installation
of Lord Brougham as the first Chancellor, that of D.C.L. at the Univer-
sity of Oxford in June 1868, and that of LL.D. at the University of
Cambridge in May 1869, after giving the Reade Lecture, which on this
occasion was on the Coal-tar Colours.

Perhaps the most marked feature in Miller’s character was sagacity
combined with a deep sense of religion. His religious views may be
gathered, although imperfectly, from an address entitled ‘The Bible and
Science,’’ delivered at the Church Congress in Wolverhampton, October
3rd, 1867; also from his “ Introductory Lecture,” on the opening of the
Medical Session at King’s College, October Ist, 1859, published under
the title, ‘‘ Hints to the Student on commencing his Medical Studies.”

In conclusion, the writer may be allowed to repeat what he said in a
short notice at the period of Miller’s death, drawn up at the request of
the editor of the ‘Chemical News’ :—‘“‘ During a quarter of a century Miller
continued to lecture with unceasing activity, and to take part in the manage-
meat of King’s College, every one, from the Principal and Professors to
the youngest student, being anxious to obtain his advice and assistance.
It was impossible to come in contact with him without feeling one’s self in
the presence of a man of pure nature, of spotless integrity, of sound and
sagacious judgment, and of true gentlemanly feeling. His loss will be
deeply felt, especially in King’s College, in the Royal Society, in the Mint,
andthe Bank of England, where he was one of the Assayers. He will be
missed in the Courts of Law, where his clear perception of patented pro-
cesses, and his strong sense of justice, made him respected alike by judge
and counsel. He will be missed by the manufacturers who sought his
advice ; but, above all, he will be missed by his own family, and by the
few friends who had his confidence.”

There had been symptoms of an overwrought brain for some months
previous to his last illness, which took place on the journey to Liverpool,
13th September, 1870, at the time of the British Association gathering,
which, however, he was unable to attend, his illness culminating in apo-
plexy on the 30th of the same month. His remains were brought from
Liverpool and interred in the cemetery at Norwood, by the side of those
of his wife, whom he survived one year. He died on the anniversary of
her burial, and at the comparatively early age of 53. Ie married, in 1842,
Lliza, eldest daughter of the late Mr. Edward Forrest, of Birmingham, by
whom he leaves issue, two daughters and one son.—C. T.

XXV

Joun T. Graves, M.A., F.R.S., was son of John C. Graves, of Dublin,
Barrister-at-Law. Hewas born in Dublin on the 4th of December, 1806,
and, passed some years in the school of the Rev. Samuel Field, Westbury-
on-Trym, Somersetshire. He entered Trinity College, Dublin, in 1823,
and was a class-fellow of Sir William Rowan Hamilton, with whom, though
living at a distance, he kept up a life-long friendship. In his under-
graduate career he was distinguished in both Science and Classics, and at
his Degree Examination in 1827 was awarded the Classical Gold Medal,
He soon after took an ad eundem degree at Oxford, and was incorporated
in Oriel College, where he resided some time, and proceeded to the degree
of M.A. He was also M.A. of Dublin University. On the 10th of June,
1831, he was called to the Bar as a Member of the Inner Temple, and for
a short time went the Western circuit. In.the year 1839 he was appointed
Professor of Jurisprudence in University College, London, in succession to
Mr. Austin, and not long after was elected to be Examiner in Laws
in the University of London. The records of his work as a lawyer
are Twelve Lectures on the Law of Nations, published in the ‘ Law Times,”
commencing April 25, 1845, and two elaborate articles contributed to
the ‘ Encyclopzedia Metropolitana,’ on Roman Law and Canon Law. About
this time he was a contributor to Smith’s Dictionary cf Greek and Roman
Biography and Mythology. Among other articles from his pen are those
on Cato, Crassus, Drusus, Gaius, and the Legislation of Justinian.

As a scientific author Mr. Graves commenced his labours in his twentieth
year. It was in October 1826 that he was engaged in researches on
profound and subtle questions in analysis; the results he obtained were
communicated to the Royal Society of London in the year 1828, and pub-
lished in the Philosophical Transactions for 1829, under the title ‘An
attempt to rectify the Inaceuracy of some Logarithmic Formule.’ ‘This
paper gave rise to interesting and important discussions, with which the
names of M.Vincent, Peacock, Ohm, De Morgan, Warren, Rowan Hamiiton,
and others are connected. It was by meditating upon the results of this
memoir that Sir W. Rowan Hamilton was led to his ingenious theory of
Conjugate Functions or Algebraic Couples, as may be learned from Sir
W. R. Hamilton’s abstract of a paper “On Conjugate Functions, or
Algebraic Couples, as tending to illustrate generally the Doctrines of
Imaginary Quantities, and as confirming the Results of Mr. Graves respect-
ing the existence of two Independent Integers in the complete expression
of an Imaginary Logarithm,” as well as from an abstract of a ‘* Memoir on
the Theory of Exponential Functions,’”’ both published in the Report of the
British Association for 1834. In continuation of the same and allied re-
searches, Mr. Graves contributed a paper to the Philosophical Magazine
for April 1836, ‘On the lately Proposed Logarithms of Unity, in iepli to
Prof. De Morgan ;” and in November and December of the same year
another, entitled “ Explanation of a remarkable Paradox in the Calculus of
Functions, noticed by Mr. Babbage.” To the same journal were contri-

XXVHI

buted by him, in September 1838, a New and General Solution of Cubic
Equations ; in August 1839 a paper on the Functional Symmetry ex-
hibited in the Notation of certain Geometrical Porisms when they are
stated merely with reference to the arrangement of points; and in
April 1845 a paper on a Connexion between the General Theory of Nor-
mal Couples and the Theory of Complete Quadratic Functions of Two
Variables. A subsequent number contains a contribution on the Rev.
J. G. MacVicar’s Experiment on Vision; and the Report of the Cheltenham
Meeting of the British Association contains abstracts of papers communi-
cated by him on the Polyhedron of Forces, and on = Congruence na=
n-+1 (mod. p).

The above list of papers, itself iacampluria is fa from representing ade-
quately Mr. J. T. Graves’s contributions to mathematical science. The
Transactions of the Royal Irish Academy contain many traces of his in-
tellectual activity ; and by his long correspondence with Sir William Rowan
Hamilton, commenced at an early period and maintained until death in-
terposed, Mr. Graves may be said to have taken no small part in bring-
ing to maturity the splendid conception of Quaternions, by which alone
the name of Hamilton would have been rendered immortal. In his pre-
face to the ‘ Lectures on Quaternions,’ Sir William makes frequent allusion
to the suggestive character of his correspondence with hig early friend,
and warmly expresses his indebtedness thereto.

Mr. Graves was oue of the Committee of the Society for the Diffusion
of Useful Knowledge. Inthe year 1839 he was elected a Fellow of the
Royal Society, and he subsequently served upon its Council. He was also
a Member of the Philological Society and of the Royal Society of
Literature.

For many years past he had taken interest in forming a collection of
mathematical works of all ages and countries, a collection which, though
only to be appreciated by the few, is by those qualified, who are acquainted
with it, considered to be almost unique for historical curiousness and com-
pleteness ; and nearly every book composing it was bound under his diree-
tion with costly care and elegance. This portion of his library he be-
queathed to University College, London, in. remembrance of his” former
connexion as Professor with that Institution.

In the year 1846, soon after his marriage with the daughter of the late —

William Tooke, Esq., F.R.S., he was appointed Assistant Poor-Law Com-
missioner, and on the constitution of the present Board in 1847 was
made Poor-Law Inspector. He served efficiently in that department
till the past month, when he sent in his resignation, an act which he did
not long survive. He died on the 29th of March, at his residence in
Cheltenham, at the age of 63.

| { J : ‘ i
“ye z.3 - ; vi y A i
: a <a ee € e yi Ve AS ’
ey: af : p< 2 es ¥ ~ tar x f AA f) ‘
SEER LRA Me JU Qad - pautidied | rae fe
j pa Ba
- | 6
.

1870.] Mathematical Theory of Combined Streams. 93

and the expression for the loss of energy becomes

When the fluids are all liquids, whose compressibility may be neglected,

P : a, s

we have oSdP=S,(P,—p,); and substituting for the difference of
Po

pressures its value, according to equation (2), the following expression is

found for the loss of energy at the junction,
av (vw—V)?).
ae : bee De ae ae RIN
that is to say, in the case of liquids all the energy due to the several velo-
cities (v—V) of the component streams relatively to the resultant stream
is lost.

When the expression (3 D) is reduced to a single term, it becomes the
well-known value of the loss of energy of a single stream of liquid at a
sudden enlargement in a tube.

as follows :—
iz
AV [{ V? 0g \
caries | eal SdP
S { 9 +f

War Dp :
2{2 aw > sdp)}
AS ‘

7. General Problem of Combined Streams.—In most cases the problem
of combined streams takes one or other of the two following forms. In each
of the two forms the areas of the nozzles a,, @,, &c. are given, and also the
area of the throat, A.

CoN Rta See a)

, 22%) &e. Those functional -
0? 1 Sos 2
values are to be substituted in the equations (1) and (2); and the solution
of these equations will give the numerical values of V and of P,. In the
case of liquids of sensibly constant bulkiness, s,,, &c., and S, are quan-
tities sensibly independent of p, and P,; and then equations (1) and (2)
can be separately solved without elimination, giving respectively V and P,.
Second Form.—Each of the component streams flows through a passage
whose factor of resistance, f, is given, from a separate reservoir in which
the pressure p and the elevation z of the surface above the junction-
chamber are given. The resultant stream flows through a passage whose
VOL. XIX.

terms of p,, and of S, in terms of P,,

94 On the Mathematical Theory of Combined Streams.

factor of resistance, F, is given, into a reservoir in which the pressure P
and the elevation Z of the surface above the junction-chamber are given.
These, together with the areas A, a@,, a,, &c., are the quantities given.
The functional values given are those of the bulkiness, s,,,, 5,,., &c., and S,,
as before; also the following values of the velocities, according to well-
known principles in hydrodynamics ; for any component stream,

fe
2g2@+2 sdp
omy / ie 5 e . e . e (5)
1+f

and for the resultant stream,

2gZ+2 SdP
vay / [werefe ; > Sees
seit
The functional values given are to be substituted in equations (1) and
(2), whose solution will then give the numerical values of p, and P,; and
from these and the other data the numerical values of », &c. and of V
may be calculated.

ehhaced
Appropriation of the Donation Fund. 145

B.—Account of Sums granted from the Donation Fund in 1870.

1. Mr. Warren De La Rue, for the enlarging of certain Solar

Negatives obtained at the Kew Observatory ................ #11 11s.
2. Dr. Carpenter, for the purchase of a specimen of Pentacrinus |
Joely DMIOCIISES GO IS ANE epee gat ice erie ar aad Paeher 25

3. Mr. Edward Waller, for the exploration of the Sea-bed on

the North-western coast of Ireland by means of the Dredge, in con-

tinuation of the researches made last year in H.M.S.‘ Porcupine’ 100
4. Mr. J. P. Gassiot, to defray expense of making six prints

from the Negatives of Sun-pictures taken at the Kew Observatory

during the years 1862-72, with the view of presenting them to the

Royal Society, the Royal Astronomical Society, the Imperial Aca-

demy of Sciences of Paris and of St. Petersburg, the Royal Aca-

demy of Sciences, Berlin, and the Smithsonian Institution, Washing-

iene 20 imi two PaAyIMENts) 9.0 le Se ON le 60
5. Mr. William Saville Kent, in aid ot a Zoological Dredging-

expedition in a private yacht off the west coast of Spain and Por-

LOGI. . cccnle phe Ganeeo oom Bp Fil rumto Bayo cue Serine ler etree a PRS rer 30
6. Dr. Bastian, for carrymg on certain experiments with a Di-
gester capable of sustaining high Temperatures.,.............. 10

——_———

£256 lis.

xix

referred to; for his mode of using his influence was so unostentatious, and
his desire for a recognition of his services so small, that much of what he
did is scarcely known; and the want of specific details in showing how his
influence was brought to bear in so many ways is owing to the modesty of
his nature. Justice, too, has hardly been done in the foregoing lines to his
scientific knowledge and sympathies. In this respect, as in his constant
endeavour to promote the wellbeing of his fellowmen, he was so little self-
obtrusive that few men knew the extent of his acquirements. He paid,
even to within a week of his death, constant attention to scientific progress,
and especially to its practical application. Among his notes written but a
few weeks before his last illness are details of the composition and mode of
action of chloral. It was this union of a scientific spirit with great bene-
volence of character which, aided by a large experience abroad and at
home, made him so excellent a physician.

His position at the Court necessarily occupied much of his time and
thoughts; he was unceasing in his attention to the health of the Queen and
of ber children, and the Royal family owe to him much of that blessing of
health which has happily been their lot. He was on most confidential terms
with the Prince Consort; andthe Prince found in him a congenial adviser
on all points connected with education and science. The Queen’s trust in
him was early and firmly implanted, and was never impaired, and her
sympathy and, we can truly say, affection for him were manifested to the
last.

Sir James Clark retired from private practice in 1860, and removed to
Bagshot Park, which Her Majesty had lent him for his life. He died
there on the 29th of June, 1870, in the eighty-second year of his age, re-
taining almost to the last hour of his life a warm interest in all scientific
progress, and a heart-felt sympathy with every step which would promote
the improvement and happiness of his fellowmen.

wt WV eed
UM" |
=

PROCEEDINGS OF

apne
eS

_;f THE ROYAL SOCIETY,

VOL. XIX. No. 128.
CONTENTS.
June 16, 1870.
PAGE
XIV. On the Atmospheric Lines of the Solar Spectrum, in a Letter to the Pre-
sident. By Lieut. J. H. HennessEy Bete sate Siig Cena yatee eee
XY. On the Radiation of Heat from the Moon.—No. II. - the EARL OF
Rosse, F.R.S. ah her Coen See ok ah AC 5
XVI. On Linear Differential | Equations —No. III. ee Wee Ei Rossen,
E.RB.S. an Re Seem ahaha tte - ae 14,
XVII. Observations with the Great Melbourne Telescope, in a Letter to Prof.
eer by AE SU HOR Ys fe hens er\ eraeat ie eur aie eke ve ha 18
XVIII. Chemical and Physiological Experiments on living Cinchone. By J.
BrovucutTon, B.Sce., F.C.S., Chemist to the Cinchona-Plantations of the
Winer CrOVErMIMENh (6) va Tels ewe ewe i eo te) tO
XIX. Researches on the Hydrocarbons of the Series Cy H2n+2.—VI. a C.
SCHORLEMMER . eae oh te ean eS re : : . «20
XX. Formation of Cetyl-alcohol by a singular reaction. By C. SCcHORLEMMER. 22
XXI. Researches in Animal Electricity. By C. B. Rapozirre, M.D. 22
Misty Ob E RCSeVipdar ol sven 2c uls) ta nee era ome el. yoo Usk ace 29
On Approach caused by Vibration. By FREDERICK GUTHRIE 35
On Jacobi’s Theorem respecting the relative equilibrium of a Revolving
Ellipsoid of Fluid, and on Ivory’s discussion of the Theorem. By I.
TopuuntTer, M.A., F.R.S., late Fellow of St. John’s College, Cambridge 42.
On the Theory of Continuous Reams. By JoHn Mortimer HeEppst,
Mieebnsthy Cokes Kory tat oon ew eR ey emi 1 56
Remarks on Mr. Heppel’s Theory of Continuous Beams. By W. J.
Macquorn Ranxine, C.H., LU.D., F.R.S. ree Pee mPa SS

For continuation of Contents see 4th page of Wrapper.

CONTENTS—(continued).

COMMUNICATIONS RECEIVED SINCE THE END OF THE SESSION.

PAGE
Researches into the Chemical Constitution of the Opium Bases.—Part IV. On

the Action of Chloride of Zinc on Codeia. By Avaustus Marruinssey, F.R.S.,
Lecturer on Chemistry at St. Bartholomew’s Hospital, and W. Bunnsipz, of
SIG Iees sel OSpUbAl rots oe top gy coe Crea ane ama ed oi col heer tn «, pa eae can, ena ge

Experiments on the Action of Red Bordeaux Wine (Claret) on the Human Body.
By H. A. Parkes, M.D.,F.R.S., Professor of Hygiene in the Army MedicalSchool,
‘and Count Cyprian Woutowicz, M.D., Assistant Surgeon, Army Medical Staff. 73

On the Mathematical Theory of Combined Streams. By W. J. Macquorn Ran-

mun, ©. b.D.,-F.R.SS. Lond.and Edin. . . .°, . testy ay ay NCH)
Obituary Notices :—
ECO) ASVARD) MIORVEEG Uc gb) Sy ie an ie ce elt aol nig Mle Rg Lr ain gen ie 1
VOEANN EIVANGEEIOTA EP UBRINGE 208 SO lie goat a a eee ls

TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET.

VOL. XIX.

PROCEEDINGS OF

ih hoya SOCIETY:

| CONTENTS.
yo

] ty
November 17, 1870.

II.

IIT.

IV.

PEL,

PAGE
. Researches into the Chemical Constitution of the Opium Bases.—Part IV.

On the Action of Chloride of Zinc on Codeia. By Aveustus Mar-
THIESSEN, F'.R.S., Lecturer on Chemistry at St. Bartholomew’s Hospital,
and W. Burnsip#, of Christ's Hospital. (See page 71.)

Experiments on the Action of Red Bordeaux Wine (Claret) on the Human
Body. By H. A. Parxzs, M.D., F.R.S., Professor of Hygiene in the
Army Medical School, and Count Cyprian Woxttowi0z, M.D., Assistant
Surgeon, Army Medical Staff. (See page 73.)

On the Mathematical Theory of Combined Streams. By W.J. Macquorn
RawnkIne, C.E., LL.D., F.R.SS. Lond. and Edinb. (See page 90.)

On the Fossil Mammals of Australia.—Part IV. Dentition and Mandible
of Thylacoleo Carnifex, with Remarks on the pikes for its Herbivo-
rity. By Prof. Owen, F.R.S. &c. Ay eNO aS aera one

November 24, 1870.

. Communication from the Secretary of State for India relative to Pendulum

Observations now in progress in India in connexion with the Great
Trigonometrical Survey under the Superintendence of Colonel J. T.
Waker, R.H., F.RS. .

On the Theory of Resonance. By the Hon. J. W. Strurr

On the Aromatic Cyanates. By A. W. Hormann, LL.D., F.R.S.

For continuation of Contents see 4th page of Wrapper.

No. 124.

CONTENTS—(continued).

November 30, 1870.
ANNIVERSARY MEETING.

PAGE
MOM OUP MUATOM ye se ie ee ele el ge eee ee See EES
isiOimbollows, GECCHSCONWOl sy 6 el ee ne le te a we ee le oe
——_—-_—— elected since last Anniversary . . ........ . . 114
PRMeresetOre ie VOsICen tb? yf 5 0 ie oe oe awe woes Soha ea Wile ar oh Ma
ema OM OL UMC UNTCOMIS sre! oe ea Oe eae, ene pn ey s
lection ol, Council and Officers. . 5. ee ee es 128
Biri rprertiep ete MaCNG Ga ec el See gan oe eae LZR ee ESO
List of Presents. . . . ode

Account of the Bios of ue sum of £1000 caealy ate ve Panliantoat
to the Royal Society (the. Government a , to be ne in ue the
advancement of Science . . 2 TSS

Account of Sums granted from eo Boation noe in 1870 SA Mert Ain eae is LAI.

TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET.

PROCEEDINGS OF

Pie ROYAL SOGIET Y.

VOL. XIX. INO E25.

Gl
it CONTENTS.

December 8, 1870.
PAGE
Report on Deep-sea Researches carried on during the Months of July,
August, and September 1870, in H.M. Surveying-ship ‘ Porcupine.’ By
W. B. Carrenter, M.D., F.R.S., and J. Gwyn JEFFREYS, F.R.S. . . 146

_ December 22, 1870.

I. On the Extension of the Coal-fields beneath the Newer Formations of Eng-
land; and the Succession of Physical Changes whereby the Coal-measures
have been reduced to their present dimensions. By Epwarp Huvi1,
M.A., F.R.S., F.G.S., Director of the Geological Survey of Ireland . . 222

II. On the Constitution of the Solid Crust of the Earth. By the Ven. Jonx
Henry Prart, Archdeacon of Calentta, M.A., F.R.S. . . . . . 228

ILI. Actinometrical Observations made at Dehra and Mussoorie in India, Octo-
ber and November 1869, in a Letter to the President. By Lieut. J. H.
PILUPNINESSE Vice cet nertr tsa RES wpe le env elay ache eis see

January 12, 1871.
I. Qn Fluoride of Silver—Part II. By Gzrorcr Gort, F.R.S. . . . . . 235

II. Some Experiments on the Discharge of Electricity through Rarefied Media
and the Atmosphere. By CROMWELL FLEETWOOD VARLEY . . . . 286

Ill. Polarization of Metallic Surfaces in Aqueous Solutions, a new Method of
obtaining Electricity from Mechanical Force, and certain relations be-
tween Electrostatic Induction and the Decomposition of Water. By
CROMWELL FLEETWOOD VARLEY . | -, 243

For continuation of Contents see 4th page of Wrapper.

CONTENTS—(continued),

January 19, 1871.

PAGE

I. On the Structure and Development of the Skull of the Common Frog
(Rana temporaria). By W. Kircurn Parker, F.R.S.

IJ. Method of measuring the Resistance of a Conductor or of a Battery, or of
-a Telegraph-Line influenced by unknown Earth-currents, from a single
Deflection of a Galvanometer of unknown Resistance. By HEnry
Mance, Superintendent Mekran Coast and Persian Gulf Telegraph De-
POSIREIHIETIG WMI PPACI CC a0 iy uc wy sr MRE eal dante tek oh Coie miata mtatem ome can Vie

III. Measurement of the Internal Resistance of a Multiple Battery by ae
the Galvanometer to Zero. By Henry Mance .... .« ‘

IV. Modification of Wheatstone’s Bridge to find the Resistance of @ Galvano-
meter-Coil from a single deflection of its own needle. Pi Prof. Sir WIL-
LIAM THOMSON, E.R.S.

V. Ona Constant Form of Daniell’s ae By Prof. Sir Wirtau THOM-
son, F.R.S. A aan, Metals Wo aN hes 612 utr ne

VI. On the Determination of a Ship’s Place from Observations of Altitude. By
IBKor Ole VVILLTAM LHOMSON, HR.Se oo oe ee ay ee bas

January 26, 1871.

¥. On the Mineral Constituents of Meteorites. By N&rvin Story Masxe-
tye, M.A., F.R.S,, Professor of Mineralogy, Oxford, and eee of the
Mineral Bicpatiacent, British Museum . - : soe

II. On the Organization of the Calamites of the Coal-measures. By W. C.
Wituiamson, F.R.S., Professor of Natural EDS in Owens ee
Manchester . ede lees ea a ae a ear are SOS clas MOREE NEE

III. On Approach caused by Vibration. A Letter from Prof. Sir W. THOMson,
LL.D., F.B.S8., &c. to Prof. FREDERICK GUTERIE, B.A. . eho

List of Presents .

TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET.

. 246

. 248

. 252

. 253

» 253

. 259

- 266

, 268

wag

PROCEEDINGS OF

THE ROYAL SOCIETY.

VOL, XIX. oh | No. 126.

CONTENTS.

LX
ip

ye Peas, 1871.

PAGE
I. On Linear Differential i —No. IV. ror W. H. L. RUssett,

RUNES ose ade gar ah cto wns mcr ek wal tein HRA eee ne cist

IIT.

III,

IV.

. Measurements of Specific Inductive Capacity of Dielectrics, in the Physical

Laboratory of the eee of Glasgow. a J OHN C. Gisson, M.A.,
and THomas Barcnay,M.A..... . sais Dg te a 218)

On the Uniform Flow of a Liquid. By Hmnry Mosrrey, M.A., D.C.L.,
Canon of Bristol, F.R.S., and posure Member of the Institute of
PRUNANGS! se he a Ms i ‘ EPUaE ular aks Corte ably ahs 415) 0)

February 9, 1871.

. On the Effect of Exercise upon the Bodily Temperature. By T. CLIFFORD

AutputtT, M.A., M.D. Cantab., F.L.S., Member of the Alpine Club, &. 289

. Observations of the Eclipse at Oxford, December 22, 1870. By Joun

Paris, M.A., D.C.L., F.R.S., Evgiesccr of eee in the De
(059 55 0 00 NA neat eee eect (ea ; ae yea)

On the Problem of the In- and Circumscribed ‘Triangle. By A. CaytEy,
lati: og. SB SR ges te ae GA hg SIPURA)

On the Unequal Distribution of Weight and Support in Ships, and its Effects
in Still Water, in Waves, and in Exceptional Positions on Shore. By BH.
J. Rep, C.B., Vice-President of the Institution of Naval Architects. . 292

For continuation of Contents see 4th page of Wrapper.

TT.

IT.

CONTENTS—(continued).

February 16, 1871.
PAGE

. On some of the more important Physiological Changes induced in the

Human Economy by change of Climate, as from Temperate to Tropical,
and the reverse (concluded), By ALEXANDER Rarrray, M.D. (Hdinb.),
moncconmeNa EMS. * Bristol se: Vie ew el ee. ws eee

On a Registering Spectroscope. By Wittiam Hueeins, LL.D., D.C.L.,
E.R.S. e ® ° 9 ° ° e ° e e ° ° ° e e ° ° ° ° ° ° ) 317

February 23, 1871.

. On the Mutual Relations of the Apex Cardiograph and the Radial Sphyg-

mograph Trace. By A. H. Garrop, of St. John’s College, Cambridge . 318

On the Thermo-electric Action of Metals and Liquids, By GzorcE Gorz,
vette eh ay hale ee Me SIS Gun ego weit Naat care ky Lays Wel aan oe

MSTROIePCSCNIES, fat 2 he aiden) oe oy lob ee Ph ince pu Oc Syiaae Baar

Obituary Notice :—
DRE PAMEHS COLA K Ream ane oc oN Ne fae Wiel no wat ee Qc sb oon

TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET.

PROCEEDINGS OF
THE ROYAL SOCIETY:

VOL. XIX. No. 127.

II.

III.

it,

II.

III.

CONTENTS. m ELOY

March 2, 1871.
PAGE

. Further Experiments on the effect of Diet and Exercise on the Elimination

of Nitrogen. By WH. A. Pankns, M.D,, ERS. . 1... 1. «se. Sad

Magnetic Observations made during a Voyage to the North of Europe and
the Coasts of the Arctic Sea in the Summer of 1870. By Capt. Ivan”
BELAVENETZ, I.R.N., Director of the Imperial Magnetic Observatory,
-Cronstadt. Ina Letter to ARCHIBALD Smiru, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S.. . 361

March 9, 1871.

. Results of Seven Years’ Observations of the Dip and Horizontal Force at

Stonyhurst College eee: from oe 1863 to March 1870. au the
Revo8-d. PERRY... 6 SRNR inten ule, Mie ore:

Preliminary Notice on the Production of the Olefines from Paraffin by Dis-
tillation under Pressure. By T. E. THorrs, Ph.D., Professor of Chemistry
in Anderson’s University, Glasgow, and Joun Youna. . . .. . . 370

Contributions to the History of the Opium Alkaloids. Part I.—On the
Action of Hydrobromic Acid on Codeia. By C. R. A. Wricut, D.Sc. . 371

March 16, 1871.

. Description of Ceratodus, a genus of Ganoid Fishes, recently discovered in

rivers of Queensland, Australia. By ALBERT GuntHER, M.A., Ph.D.,
IT TD) gs TCU SUES i oa ain Oe AR a A a a A mS eR ar age Ng Age 818)

On the formation of some of the Subaxial Arches in Man. By Grorar W.
CALLENDER, Assistant Surgeon to, and Lecturer on Anatomy at St. Bar-
BOOMME WaSmElOs iia koueeeu i tudes Cael ie la c's “ie wart) ah esa es OOO

March 23, 1871.

. Experiments on the Successive Polarization of Light, with the description of

a new Polarizing Apparatus. By Sir CoarLes WHEATSTONE, F.R.S. . 381

On an approximately Decennial Variation of the Temperature at the Obser-
vatory at the Cape of Good Hope between the years 1841 and 1870, viewed
in connexion with the Variation of the Solar Spots. By EH. J. Sronz,
FE.R.S., Astronomer ae at the ae of Good ae In a Letter to the
Pes tient SF sas ee pir dren rehire fm Eh Shon)

Résumé of two Papers on Sun-spots:—“On the Form of the Sun-spot
Curve,” by Prof. Worr; and “On the Connexion of Sun-spots with
Planetary Configuration,” by M. Fritz. By B.Lopwy. ... . . 392

For continuation of Contents see 4th page of Wrapper.

CONTENTS—(continued).

March 30, 1871.

‘PAGE
i Experiments in Pangenesis, by Breeding from Rabbits of a pure variety, into
whose circulation blood taken from other varieties had previously been

largely transfused. By Francis Gatton, F.R.S. ... . . . . . . 393
II. Contributions to the History of Orcin.—No. I. Nitro-substitution Com-
pounds of the Orcins. By Joun Stennouse, LL.D., F.R.S., &.. . . 410
List of Presents 418
ERRATA.

Page 246, tine 4 from bottom, for 200 lbs. read 2 volts.

2507 2507

Page 287, line 27, for ne ' read v=ne !

250R
-— 15
Page 288, line 29, for Q=C. E U ee | R PEE

250R :
read Q=C Foes ZUR | Ren708.
Page 324, 13 line from bottom, for arterial read cardiac.

Correction to W.H.L. RussEty’s Paper on Linear Differential Equations, 4c 126.
The expression for Q, page 283, should be
An An=—1

Q=... SS) Seo ce ate PEAS gol MOREA ot,

The process for ascertaining the value of the integral
Erz Ge my —a)rA-1
ie (2—B)eF(e—y)rt1

is erroneous, but how the mistake occurred I cannot now tell.—W. H. L. R.

TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET STRERT.

PROCEEDINGS OF

THE ROYAL SOCIETY.

VOL. XIX. No. 128.

CONTENTS} 2 Lol

April 20, 1871.

PAGE

I. Note on the crcumstances of the Transits of Venus over the Sun’s Disk in
the years 2004 and 2012. By J. R. Hinp, E.R.S. .

II. On the Existence and Formation of Salts of Nitrous Oxide. By Epwarp
Divers, M.D. se Meer ee ee ae cam P eR at eS RE of:

III. Research on a New Group of Colloid Bodies containing Mercury, and cer-
tain Members of the series of Fatty Ketones. By J. Emerson REYNOLDs,
Member of the Royal College of Physicians, Edinburgh, Keeper of the
Mineral Department, and Analyst to the Royal Dublin Society .

April 27, 1871.

THE BaKkERIAN LECTURE.—On the Increase of Electrical Resistance in Con-
ductors with rise of Temperature, and its application to the Measure
of Ordinary and Furnace Temperatures ; also on a simple Method of
measuring Hlectrical Resistances. By CHARLES WILLIAM SIEMENS,
E.R.S., D.C.L. .

I. On the Change of Pressure and Volume oS ate ee Chemie Combina-
tion. By M. BERTHELOT . ; is oes

II. Remarks on the Determination of a Ship’s Place at Sea. Ina Letter to Pro-
fessor Stokes. By G. B. Atry, LL.D., &., Astronomer Royal

May 4, 1871.

I. On the Structure and Affinities of Guyxia annulata, Dunc., with Remarks
upon the Persistence of Paleozoic Types of Madreporaria. By P. Manrin
Duncan, M.B. Lond., F.R.S., Professor of oo in nee 8 ee
London SD ena Re ae

For continuation of Contents see 4th page of Wrapper.

. 423

- 425

» 431

. 443

. 445

- 448

. 450

CONTENTS--(continued).

PAGE
II, On the Molybdates and Vanadates of Lead, and on a new Mineral from

Leadhills. By Professor Dr. AtBERT ScuRavr, of Vienna ... . . 461

May 11, 1871.

I, An Experimental Inquiry into the Constitution of Blood, and the Nutrition
of Muscular Tissue. By Wittiam Maxcet, M.D., F.R.S., Senior Assis-

tant Physician to the Hospital for Consumption and Diseases of the Chest,

IBKOMMPEON ys ws. . 465

II. On Protoplasmic Life. By F. Cracz-Catvert, P.RS . . .. . . . 468
III. Action of Heat on Protoplasmic Life. By ¥. Cracz-Catvert, F.R.S. . 472
HErSrmIMETCRCULSI Meats a, it oe coe ees a oak Se ee eed

TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET.

PROCEEDINGS OF

Pb ROYAL SOCIETY.

VOL. XIX. No. 129.

| og NOX
ne CONTENTS.

May 25, 1871.
PAGE

I. On the Temperature of the Interior of the Harth, as indicated by Observations
made during the Construction of the Great Tunnel through the Alps.
By D. T. AnstTep, M.A., E.R.S., For. Sec.G.8.. . . . . . . . . 461

II. Some Remarks on the Mechanism of Respiration. By F. Lz Gros Crark,
F.R.C.S., Professor, of we and ee at the as eee of
Sivicons Eero tomate: Seok . 486

III. Researches on the Hydrocarbons of the Series C non ity LD. By CC
SOERORMEEIMENEEN Foo ae ae 5 sha) Guichen OTe

IV. Note on the Spectrum of Uranus and the Spectrum of Comet I., 1871. By
Winner Eucemens, UED., D.C: V.PReS. 0 oo. a a 488

V. On a New Instrument for recording Minute Variations of Atmospheric
Pressure. By WILDMAN WHITEHOUSE, F.M.S. &.&. . . . ... .. ADT

June 8, 1871.
Wlection of Hellows .<-: . .-. Sal aie as at cane a Pam aes cate eC weet . 494

June 15, 1871.

TI. On the Fossil Mammals of Australia.—Part V. Genus Nototherium, Ow.
Papa O La Rug OWEN eM ce Sete) mm att Eee vey epee) oN he Slay re . 494

II. On Cyclides and Sphero-Quartics. By Joun Casry, LL.D., M.R.LA.. . 495

TIE. On a Law in Chemical Dynamics. By Jonn Haxz Guapstons, Ph.D.,
Heo, and ALERED Ripe Hee See as es a ee eth er ee oh) de te AOS

ITV. On the Organization of the Fossil Plants of the Coal-measures.—Part IT.
Lepidodendra and Sigillarie. By W. C. Witiiamson, F.R.S., Pro-
fessor of Natural History in Owens College, Manchester . . . . . 500

Y. Contributions to the History of the Opium Alkaloids.—Part II. On the
Action of Hydrobromic Acid on Codeia and its derivatives. By C. R. A.
Wricut, D.Sc., Lecturer on Chemistry in St. cae s Hospital Medical
She Suri eeryrnies are 9!

For continuation of Contents see 4th page of Wrapper.

CONTENTS—(continued).
PAGE

VI. On the Measurement of the Chemical Intensity of Total Daylight made at
Catania during the Total Eclipse of Dec. 22,1870. By Henry E. Rosco,
ety oranda’ Bee PHORPEY HRS. be cols. oye) wei 0) Set tar wn eee 6 eo:

VII. On the Calculation of Euler’s Constant. By J. W. L. GuaisHer, B.A.,
eR At Oem MMe me rsee Ro cE SP) oan Luh epee wa whe abe reaat aa, on Oa

VIII. Records of the Magnetic Observations at the Kew Observatory. No. 1V.—
Analysis of the principal Disturbances shown by the Horizontal and Ver-
_ tical Force Magnetometers of the Kew Observatory from 1859 to 1864.

By General Sir Epwarp Sapine, K.C.B., President. . . .-. . . . 524

IX. Amended Rule for working out Sumner’s Method of fi ee a ee
Place. By Professor Sir Wittiam THomson, F.R.S. . . . . - . 524

_ X. On Linear Differential Equations.—No. V. By W.H.L. Russert, F.R.S. 526

XJ. On the Undercurrent Theory of the Ocean, as propounded pee recent ex-
plorers. By Captain Spratt, C.B.,R.N..F.RS. 2. 2. . eee OL

XII. On the Physical Principles concerned in the passage of Blood-corpuscles
through the Walls of the Vessels. By Richarp Norris, M.D., Pro-

fessor of Physiology, Queen’s College, Brmingham. . .. . . . . 556
JOEL) GL TESGE (1 iG roamed Ramage SNe Ura eS, Coan ere NUS rg curva ver anND
ere PES are Sah Oe Mie a wee Sw Me age tet pO ao ee apa Oe

Obituary Notices :—
LSP ONT: Aub ENO WERE DEE s Ose mate hn kk ak ae Get eer ba Va Se ee) es
IUIEGRMUIGETGUNEN SC Vie ae ves dae es ed Ro DOP ee neem

Nore, p. 526.

I did not perceive till the eve of publication that L,,=0; this will give as the equation

° : di € m—1 - :
to determine Q simply, L, as +L, d = mee Q Oe gr ot ue NSIS d — Q 220)

W. H. L. R.—July 31, 1871.

NOTICE.

With the commencement of Vol. XX. the Annual Subscription for the Proceedings
of the Royal Society will be Twelve Shillings.

TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET.

Hera

oe pei

-
i
/
—
or
‘
.

| siNGhian INSTITUTION LIBRARIES
UT
3 9088 01 305 9779

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Books

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "Proceedings of the Royal Society of London"

See other formats